/V/^^. ^ ■ /—T 



GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



SINDHI LANGUAGE. 



COMPAEED 



WITH THE SANSKRIT -PRAKRIT AND THE 
COGNATE INDIAN VERNACULARS, 



D^' ERMST TRUMPP. 



PRINTED BY ORDER OP HER MAJESTY'S GOVERNMENT FOR INDIA. 



TRUBNER AND CO., 60, Paternoster Row, LONDON. 
F. A. BROCKHAUS, LEIPZIG. 

187 2. 






/^^ 



GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



8INDHI- LANGUAGE. 



GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



SINDHI LANGUAGE. 



COMPAEED 



WITH THE SANSKRIT -PRAKRIT AND THE 
COGNATE INDIAN VERNACULARS, 



BY 



D^- ERIEST TEUMPP. 



PRINTED BY ORDER OF HER MAJESTY'S GOVERNMENT FOR INDIA. 



TRUBNER AND CO., 60, Pateenoster Row, LONDON. 
F. A. BROCKHAUS, LEIPZIG. 

18 7 2. 






f \< y<(^% 



61600 

^06 



"^SBER ooLtEormd. 



DEDICATED 



TO 



SIR BARTLE FRERE, K.C.B. 



AS A TOKEN 



OF HiaHEST REGARD AND ESTEEM 



BY HIS OBEDIENT HUMBLE SERVANT 



E. TRUMPP. 



PREFACE. 



Ihe Grammar, which is now offered to the learned 
PubHc, has been compiled already years ago, but as 
there were no means of printing it, it was laid aside 
hopelessly. That it has finally been rescued from obli- 
vion is owing to the enlightened patronage of Her Ma- 
jesty's Government for India, which liberally granted 
the printing expenses. 

I am afraid, that I have given rather too much 
than too little by endeavouring to render the Grammar 
as complete as possible; I trust, however, that this object 
may have been attained to some extent at least. 

A beginner will do well, after he has acquainted 
himself with the Sindhi system of sounds, to commence 
at once with the declensions and to turn bye and 
bye to the formation of themes after he has got a fair 
insight into the fabric of the language. The Intro- 
duction is intended for those only, who wish to pe- 
netrate more deeply into the origin and nature of the 
Sindhi. 



8 PREFACE. 

The quotations, which I have added, I hope may 
prove useful to introduce the beginner into the study 
of the Sindhi literature; most of the quotations are 
taken from my edition of the Shaha jo Risalo^), but 
many others also from manuscripts in my possession, 
which I collected during my former stay in Sindh. 
What we need now most is a criticallv sifted edition 
of the popular Sindhi tales and songs, which are very 
numerous and from which a good collection might be 
made. The next desideratum is an enlarged Sindhi 
Dictionary, as the late Capt. Greo. Stack's Dictionary, 
which is very good as far as it goes, is not sufficient 
for reading older or more difficult pieces. We may 
fairly expect, that these deficiencies will soon be re- 
medied by Mr. Peile, the present energetic and en- 
lightened Director of Public Instruction in the Bombay 
Presidency, for which the thanks of the learned Public 
will be due to him. 

The Sindhi is by no means an easy language, it 
is on the contrary beset with more intricacies and dif- 
ficulties than any of its Prakrit sisters. But on the 
other hand it amply repays to the philologist the 
labours he bestows on it; for the Sindhi has preserved 
a great many forms, for which we look in vain in the 



1) Published with the title: 
Sindhi Literature. The Divan of Abd-ul-Latif, known by the 

name of: Shaha jo Risalo, 739 pages. Printed by F. A. Brockhaus, 

Leipzig, 1866. 
In the quotations Sh. stands as an abbreviation for it. 



PREFACE. 9 

cognate idioms. For the purpose of intercomparing the 
modern Arian dialects the Sindhi is therefore invalu- 
able. For this reason we have pointed out, in the 
form of annotations^ the relation of the Sindhi with 
the Sanskrit- Prakrit on the one hand and with the 
modern cognate idioms on the other hand, to give 
some impulse to a comparative study of the North- 
Indian Vernaculars, which as yet has been totally 
neglected. 

The Sindhi Grrammar of the late Capt. Stack is 
an accurate and meritorious work, but as all first 
attempts (for the Sindhi Grrammar of Wathen does 
not deserve the name) incomplete and destitute of a 
Syntax. I sincerely wish, that the deficiencies of 
his work , from the emendation and enlargement of 
which he was prevented by an untimely death, may 
have been made up by the Grammar now offered to 
the Public. 

The English reader will no doubt meet in this 
Grrammar with many an expression, which he will con- 
sider as erroneous or ill -chosen. For all such and si- 
milar mistakes I must beg his pardon, which the kind 
reader surely will not withhold, when he is told, that 
the idiom, into which I endeavoured to clothe my 
thoughts, is not my mother - tongue. 

Whilst this Grrammar was passing through the 
press, I had gone to India for the purpose of trans- 
lating the Sikh Grranth. In order not to delay too 
long the printing of it, I could only see and correct 
a proof-sheet once. The unavoidable consequence was. 



10 PREFACE. 

that owing to the letters of this Grrammar being 
loaded with so many dots and distinguishing marks, a 
number of misprints has crept in, which the student 
is requested to correct first after the affixed list of 
misprints. 

Reutlingen, 4*^ June, 1872. 

E. TRUMPP. 



CONTENTS, 



Page. 

Inteoduction. On the relation of the Sindhi 

to the Sanskrit and Prakrit i-l 

The Sindhi Alphabet. §. 1 1-6 

I. The Sindhi consonantal system. §.2. • 7—21 

II. The Sindhi vowel system. §.4 21-28 

Other orthographic signs. §.5 28—30 

Section I. The Formation of Themes in Sindhi. 

Chapter I. The termination of Sindhi nouns. §. 6. 31—44 

Chapter IE, Primary themes. §.7 45 

I. Formation of abstract nouns. §.8 46—51 

11. Formation of appellatives and attributives. §. 9. 51—57 

Chapter III. Secondary themes. §. 10. 

I. Formation of abstract nouns 57—62 

II. Formation of appellatives, attributives and 

possessives 63—77 

Chapter IV. Formation of diminutives. §. 11. 77—80 

Chapter V. Compound nouns. §.12 80—88 

Chapter VI. (render of nouns. §.13 88—98 

Chapter VII. Formation of the Feminine from 

masc. bases. §.14 98—103 



12 CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Section 11. The Inflexion of Nouns. 

Chapter YIII. I. Formation of the Plural. §. 15. 104-111 
II. Formation of cases ; case - af- 
fixes. §.16 111—122 

in. The Formative. §.17 122-128 

Survey of the SindhT declensional process. 

Declension of the Genitive affix ys^ and jcX.a.a«. 

§.18 128-130 

I. Declension 130-134 

II. Declension 134-136 

III. Declension 136—137 

IV. Declension 138 

V. Declension 139 

VI. Declension 140-142 

VII. Declension 142—144 

Chapter IX. Adjectives. §. 19. 

Position of adjectives 145—148 

Formation of gender. §. 20 ...... . 148-152 

Adjectives ending in 'u' 152 

Adjectives ending in o 153 

Adjectives ending in u^ a 154 

Adjectives ending in i, e 155 

Comparison of Adjectives. §.21 ... 156—157 

Chapter X. Xumeral adjectives. §. 22. 

I. Cardinal numbers 157 — 169 

Inflexion of cardinal numbers. §.23 • • 169—173 

11. Ordinal numbers. §.24 174-176 

Inflexion of the ordinals. §.25 176-178 

III. Arithmetical figures. §.26 • 178-179 

IV. Collective numbers. §.27 180-181 

V. Proportional numbers. §.28 182—183 

VI. Reduplicative numbers. §.29 184 

VII. Fractional numbers. §.30 184-188 

Chapter XI. Pronouns. 

I. Pronouns of the I and II Person. §. 31 188-194 

II. Demonstrative pronouns. §.32 194—202 

III. The relative pronoun. §.33 202—204 



CONTENTS. 13 

Page. 

IV. The correlative pronoun. §.34 204—206 

V. Interrogative pronouns. §-35 206—209 

Vl. Indefinite pronouns. §.36 210-215 

VII. The reciprocal pronoun. §.37 215—217 

VIII. Pronominal adjectives. §.38 218-224 

IX. Pronominal suffixes. §.39 225 

I. Pronominal suffixes attached to 

nouns. §.40 227-242 

II. Pronominal suffixes attached to 

postpositions and adverbs. §. 41. 242—249 

Section III. Tlie Verl). 

Chapter XII. Formation of the verbal themes. 

§.42 250-260 

The Imperative. §.43 260-268 

The participle present. §.44 268-271 

The participle past. §.45 271-279 

The participle of the Future passive. §. 46. 279-280 

Indeclinable past participles. §.47 • • • 280—284 
Chapter Xm. Formation of the tenses and 
persons. §. 48. 

I. Simple tenses 284 

1) The Potential 285-287 

2) The Aorist 288-291 

3) The Future 291-293 

II. Compound tenses. 

1) The compound Potential • 293 

2) The present tense 293-295 

3) The habitual Aorist 295 

4) The Imperfect 295 

5) The Perfect 296 

6) The Pluperfect 296 

7) The compound future tenses • • • • 297 

Chapter XTV. The auxiliary Verbs. 

A) The auxiliary verb ^^li. §.49 297-304 

B) The auxHiary verb J^'. §.50 • • • • 305-312 

Chapter XV. Inflexion of the regular verb. 

A) Inflexion of the neuter verb. §. 51 • • • 312-322 



14 CONTENTS. 

Page. 
B) Inflexion of the transitive Verb. §. 52. 

1) Active Voice 322-330 

2) Passive Voice 330-338 

Chapter XYI. Compound Verbs. §.53 338—344 

Chapter XVII. The Verb with the pronominal 
suffixes. §. 54. 

1) The pronominal suffixes attached to the 

auxiliary verbs {^y^ and ^j^, §. 55. 346—360 

2) The pronominal suffixes attached to the 

regular verb. §.56 360—379 

Section IV. Adverts, Postpositions, Conjunctions 
and Interjections. 

Chapter XVIII. Adverbs. §.57 380-398 

Chapter XIX. Postpositions. §.58 398-409 

Chapter XX. Conjunctions. §.59 410—417 

Chapter XXL Interjections. §.60 418-424 



SYNTAX, 

I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

Section I. The ITonn. 

Chapter I. On the absence of the article. §.61. 425—428 

Chapter 11. On the gender of Xouns. §. 62 . 428—431 

Chapter HI. Number. §. 63. . . 431—435 

Chapter IV. Cases of the Noun. 

I. The Nominative. §.64 435-438 

IL The Vocative. §.65 • 438-441 

III. The Instrumental. \. m 441-443 

IV. The Genitive. §.67 -• 443-452 

V. The Dative. §.68 452-455 

VI. The Accusative. §.69 455-459 

VIL The Locative, §.70 459-463 

VIII. The Ablative. §.71 463-466 

Chapter V. Pronouns. 

I. Personal Pronouns. §.72 466-469 



CONTENTS. 15 

Page. 

n. Demonstrative pronouns. §.73 470—472 

m. The relative and correlative pronoun. §. 74. 472—476 

IV. The interrogative pronouns. §. 75 • •■ • 476—477 

V. The indefinite pronouns. §.76 477—478 

VI. The reflexive pronoun. §.77 478-481 

Section 11. Tlie Verb. 

Chapter VI. The Infinitive. §.78. ...... 481-483 

Chapter VII. The Gerundive. §.79 483—484 

Chapter VIII. The Participles. §.80 484-491 

Chapter IX. The tenses of the verb. 

I. The Present. §.83 491-494 

II. The Imperfect. §.84 494 

III. The Aorist. §. 85. 

1) The simple Aorist 495 

2) The habitual Aorist 496—497 

IV. The Perfect. §.86 497-498 

V. The Pluperfect. §.87 498-499 

VI. The Future and Future past. §. 88 • • • 500-501 

Chapter X. The Moods. 

I. The Indicative. §.89 501 

II. The Potential. §.90 502-504 

III. The Imperative. §.91 505-506 

n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 
Section III. The simple Sentence. 

Chapter XI. Subject and Predicate. §. 61. . . 507—508 

Chapter XII. Concord of the Subject and Pre- 
dicate. §.93 509 

Chapter XHI. Enlargement of the sentence by 

a near and remote object. §. 94. . . 510—513 

Chapter XIV. Enlargement of the sentence by 
a nearer definition of the verb as pre- 
dicate. §.95 513-514 

Chapter XV. Omission of the verb as predi- 
cate. §.96 515 



16 CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Section IV. Tlie compoimd Sentence. 

Chapter XYI. i. Coordination of sentences. §. 97. 516—517 
Chapter XYII, Contraction of coordinate sen- 
tences into one; concord of two and 
more subjects and predicates. §. 98. 517—519 
Chapter XVIII. ii. Subordination of sentences. 
§. 99. 

1) Subordination of a sentence by subjunctive 
particles. §.100 520-525 

2) Subordination of a sentence by the relative 

and relative adverbs. §. 101 525—526 

3) Subordination of a sentence by an inter- 
rogative pronoun or particle. §. 102 • • • 526 

Chapter XIX. Abbreviation of subordinate sen- 
tences. §. 103 527 

Chapter XX. On the indirect oration. §. 104. 528 

Appendix I On the Sindhl Calendar 529—533 

Appendix II. Survey of the different Sindhi- 

Arabic Alphabets 534—535 



INTRODUCTION. 



THE EELATIONSHIP OP THE SINDHI TO THE 
SANSKRIT AND PEAKRIT. 

The Sindhi is a pure Sanskritical language, more 
free from foreign elements than any other of the North 
Indian vernaculars. The old Prakrit grammarians may 
have had their good reason, to designate the Apabhran- 
sha dialect, from which the modern Sindhi is immedia- 
tely derived, as the lowest of all the Prakrit dialects; but 
if we compare now the Sindhi with its sister-tongues, we 
must assign to it, in a grammatical point of view, 
the first place among them. It is much more closely 
related to the old Prakrit, than the Marathi, Hindi, 
Panjabi and BangalT of our days, and it has pre- 
served an exuberance of grammatical forms, for which 
all its sisters may well envy it. For, while all the 
modern vernaculars of India ^) are already in a state of 
complete decomposition, the old venerable mother- tongue 
being hardly recognisable in her degenerate daughters, 
the Sindhi has, on the contrary, preserved most important 
fragments of it and erected for itself a grammatical struc- 
ture, which surpasses in beauty of execution and internal 
harmony by far the loose and levelling construction of 
its sisters. 

The Sindhi has remained steady in the first stage 
of decomposition after the old Prakrit, wheras all the 



1) In speaking of the modern vernaculars of India we exclude 
troughout the Dravidian idioms of the South, which belong to quitt 
a different stock of languages. 

Trump p, Sindhi-Grammar. 1 



11 INTRODUCTION. 

other cognate dialects have sunk some degrees deeper; 
we shall see in the course of our introductory remarks, 
that the rules, which the Prakrit grammarian Krama- 
dishvara has laid down in reference to the Apabhransha, 
are still recognisable in the present Sindhi, which by 
no means can be stated of the other dialects. The Sindhi 
has thus become an independant language, which, though 
sharing a common origin with its sister- tongues, is very 
materially differing from them. 

The Sindhi, which is spoken within the boundaries 
of Sindh proper, is divided into three dialects, which 
grammatically differ very little from each other, but offer 
considerable discrepancies in point of pronunciation. The 
dialect of lower Sindh, comprising the Indus -Delta and 
the sea-coast, is called ^J^ lari, from t5T5 laru^), by 
which lower Sindh is designated. The dialect, which is 
spoken north of Haiderabad, is called TOTT?^^ siraiki, 
from "ftl^ siro, by which Upper Sindh is designated; 
the dialect in vogue in the Thar, or desert of Sindh, is 
called ^^IT!^ thareli, from ^"^ tharu, the desert. 

The dialect of Lar, though employed in most Sindhi 
compositions, is not the purest; the vowels are frequently 
contracted and the consonants too much softened down 
by assimilation. The northern or Siraiki dialect has 
remained far more original and has preserved the purity 
of pronunciation with more tenaciousness, than the southern 
one. With reference to this superiority of the northern 
dialect to the southern the Sindhis like to quote the 
proverb: 

lara jo parhyo sire jo dhago. 
The learned man of Lar is an ox in Upper Sindh. 



1) ^T5 is not a proper noun, but an appellation, signifying: 
„sloping ground;" the same is the case with 'RTOT ^i^^» which signifies 
the upper country. 



INTRODUCTION. Ill 

The dialect of the Thar is vigorous but uncouth 
and already intermingled with the Marvari; it is spoken 
by the Shikaris, Dhedhs (%;g carrier) and other out- 
cast tribes. As far as I know, there are no literary 
compositions extant in this dialect. 

The object of these introductory remarks is to show 
the relative position, which the Sindhi holds to the 
Sanskrit and Prakrit; and in order to elucidate this 
subject, we shall lay down the rules and principles, by 
which the present Sindhi vowel and consonantal 
system has been derived from the Sanskrit by the me- 
dium of the Prakrit. Thus, we hope, a solid basis also 
will be gained for intercomparing the Sindhi with its other 
sister-tongues. By this process alone, which will enable 
us, to assign to the Arian stock, what has been taken 
from it, though much altered now in shape and outward 
appearance by dint of contraction and assimilation, we 
shall on the other hand be able to trace out a certain 
residuum of vocables, which we must allot to an old 
aboriginal language, of which neither name nor extent 
is now known to us, but which, in all probability, was 
of the Tatar stock of languages and spread throughout 
the length and breadth of India before the irruption of 
the Arian race, as all the other vernaculars contain a 
similar non- Arian residuum of words, which have been 
already designated as "provincial" by the old Prakrit 
grammarians. 

The following investigation is destined for such as 
may be competent, by their previous studies, to penetrate 
more deeply into the real nature of the modern idioms 
of India, and for them, I trust, these outlines may prove 
useful and at the same time incentive, to follow up more 
deeply the intricate path, which I have pointed out. 



1* 



IV INTRODUCTION. 

I. THE SINDHI VOWEL SYSTEM. ■) 

§. 1. 

We consider first the single vowels, their change, 
substitution, contraction or elision in Sindhi. 

1) ^ (r) and its permutations. 

The Sindhi, like the old Prakrit, has cut off ^ 
from its system of sounds; for it is either treated as a 
vowel, in which case it is changed to i, a etc., or as 
a consonant, in which latter case it coincides with 

At the beginning of a word ^, if standing by 
itself, is changed to ft (ri), just as in Prakrit, e. g. Sindhi 
ft^ richu, bear, Prak. f^, Sansk. "^"^^ 

But if ^ be joined to a consonant, the following 
rules hold good: 

a) r is usually dissolved into i, as: "^^TTST disanu, 
to see, Sansk. ^"^ (but Prak. '^'^l^), Hindi t^lJ^J? ft^ 
vichu, scorpion, Prak. fcj^f^^ (or f^^j^^), Sansk. 
^f^«fi; f^S^ ki5, done, Prak. f^^, Sansk. ^rf: fxf^- 
^Tff ginhanu; to take, Sansk. T^, Prak. ^TTTg^ 

6) r is dissolved into u, if the consonant, to which 
it is joined, happens to be a labial, as: "Sf^ budho, 
old, Prakrit on the other hand cf^, Sansk. "a^; V(^^ 
muo, dead, Prak. TT<^ or already T{^ (by elision of ^), 
Sansk. IJrT. In such instances, as 5^^^^ sunanu, to 

1) In order to facilitate the intercomparison of the Sindhi with 
the Sanskrit and Prakrit we have used in these introductory remarks 
a modilSed Sanskrit alphabet, the particulars of which see further on 
under the Sindhi alphabets. The romanized transcription, which 
we have added -every -where, is in accordance with the Standard 
Alphabet by Prof. Dr. Lepsius, 2^ edition. 



INTRODUCTION. V 

hear, Prak. §^j the original root- vowel (Sansk. ^) has 
been preserved. 

c) In most instances though r is dissolved into 
ar, irrespective of the consonant to which it may be 
joined, as: 

H^"^ maranu, to die, Prak. H^, Sansk. 1J. 

VIT;;^ bharanu, to fill, Prak. H^, Sansk. H. 

VT"^ dharanu, to place, Prak. "^T, Sansk. "U. 

tiis^M saranu, to move, Prak. ^^, Sansk. H. 
In such hke instances the Sindhi, as well as all the 
other cognate dialects, is quite in accordance with Pra- 
krit usage, the Sanskrit verbal noun being taken as 
the base of the infinitive in the modern idioms. In 
other instances though the Sindhi is not so liberal in 
dissolving r, as the Prakrit; it has managed, on the con- 
trary, in many cases to preserve r by changing it to ir 
or transposing the same , as : 'W^'T mirdangu (or : f^TVI 
mirdhangu) a tabor, Prak. "Pf^^TY, Sansk. iT^'l:; f^R5 
virkhu, taurus (planet), Sansk. cT^; f^Vt hirdho^), heart, 
Prak. f^^fSI, Sansk. ^^^I^ but the more Prakritical 
form f^^^ hio, is also in use in Sindhi. 

In a few cases r has been preserved by being changed 
to simple r (subscribed), in conjunction with a dental t, 
d, or a cerebral t, d; as: IfJ^ jatrd, son-in-law, Prak. 

^TTT^^Stj Sansk. ^"PRTTl^' ii^ this form ff has been 
elided , which is rather of rare occurrence, and the dental 
has passed into a cerebral, the affix cR being dropped 
altogether; similarly T^T? niatre, audits derivatives, as: 
TTR^t niatrejo, TfTZHt ^atret5 etc., corresponding to 
the Prakrit form TJf^^^, Sansk. TTTrT^* 



1) The aspiration of \f is caused by the following r, which very 
frequently aspirates a preceding c-onsonant, as we shall have often oc- 
casion to notice. 



VI INTRODUCTION. 

2) The Diphthongs ^ ai and ^ au. 

Properly speaking there are no diphthongs in Sindhi, 
as little as in Prakrit ; ai is generally pronounced 
loosely as a-i, and au as a-u. The SindhT, however, is 
somewhat tighter in its pronunciation and not quite so 
effeminate as the Prakrit, so that it will depend more 
or less on the option of the speaker, if he will contract 
ai or au into a real diphthong, or pronounce them se- 
parately as two distinct vowels. From the manner of 
writing, no safe conclusion can be drawn, as a fixed 
system of orthography is still a desideratum. It may 
however be laid down as a general rule, that the Sindhi 
ignores diphthongs and pronounces them as two distinct 
vowels. 

a) The diphthong ai. 

a) In such words, as are borrowed from the Arabic 
or Persian, the original diphthong is generally retained, 
and written and pronounced accordingly, as: ^"^ sairu, 

journey; Arab. IaII; ^^y paida, created, Pers. Ijoo; like- 
wise in such nouns, as have been taken from the Hindu- 
stani, as: ^^ paiso, a pice. On the rest it is quite 
optional, to write and pronounce for instance %^ saina 
or ^^<R sa-ina, hint; the Hindus prefer the loose Pra- 
krit pronunciation (a-i, a-u), the Muhammedans more 
the Arabic or Persian method (ai, au). 

P) But generally the diphthong ai is contracted into 
e in SindhT, which is always long, and never anceps, 
as in Prakrit; e. g. %^ veru, enmity, prak. cfg^ (Lassen 
quotes also a form "il^Q, Sansk. ^^.5 %^ ^^Ju, physician, 
Prak. c|';j^, Sansk. ^^; tiM 1 c^^ sendholunu, rocksalt 
(literally, Sindh-salt), from the Sansk. ^1^=1) Sindhi, and 
^^^5 salt (Prak. ^t^l). 

In a similar manner also ^SP\ ay, which in Sin- 
dhi is treated in the same way as ai, is frequently 



INTRODUCTION. VII 

contracted into e, as: ^i^JF nenu, eye, Prak. Alj^iy. 
Sansk. ^^TR; ^T^TT seja, bed, Prak. tt^h Sansk. ^p^^, 
Y) The original diphthong ai may also be contracted 
to 1, as: Vt^ dhirju, firmness, Sansk. ^^, Prak. ^\j^ 
This Sindhi form is so far a proof for the correctness of 
the Prakrit rule , as ^\^ can only be derived from ^ZSf 
and not from \f^^ itself; similarly Hindi if^H , 

h) The diphthong au. 

The same, that has been remarked on the diphthong 
ai, may also be stated of the diphthong au; it may be 
optionally pronounced as a diphthong, but is more com- 
monly separated into its component vowels. 

a) This diphthong is generally preserved in words 
borrowed from the Arabic or Persian, as: ^^ dauru, 

a period, arab. s^3; ^TJT aurata, woman, Arab. ^)y£-', 
also in pure Sindhi v^ords it is used and written, as: 
^|l^ aukho, difficult; StT^ bhauru, a large black bee, 
Sansk. ^T{\; ^1 laugu, a clove, Sansk. ^TgT^^ In such 
pure Sindhi words though the diphthong may also, after 
the analogy of the Prakrit, be separated into a-u, as: 
oJ^^TII va-uranu, to seek, or: "'^Tlf'^ vauranu; Hn^^'^ 
bha-unanu, to wander about, or: ^TW^ bhaunanu. 

At the end of a word no diphthong is admissible, and 
jtmust always be pronounced ^^ a-u, for the sake of infle- 
xion, as: ^^ sa-u, hundred (Prak. ^^ W^ j^-iij barley, 

Pers. ^, Sansk. '^^; ^^ ca-u, say, imperative of "^^TO, 
to say. 

P) But very frequently this diphthong is contracted 
to 5, as: ^TtTt g^^o, fair, Sansk. iff^; ^^^^ jobhanu, 
time of youth, Prak. ^ITTf, Sansk. 'qj'^^H; ^TfS 
moru, a crest, Prak. 1^^ (Sansk. ^^7); Ht^ bhono, 
oi' H^^ bha-uno, a vagabond. The same rule also is 



VIII INTRODUCTION. 



occasionally applied to Arabic or Persian words, as: ^^^ 

koma, a clan, or: «fiTT kauma, Arab. *^'. 

Y) The diphthong au may also be contracted to u, 
3^s: ^ft^lf^ stirihai, heroism, Prak. ^ft,^ Sansk. "^ir^; 
^5I!r lunu, salt, Prak. ^^T5F' Sansk, ^TofTJ (^^f being 
treated like au). 

§. 2. 

3) The vowels a, a; i, i; u, u; e; o. 

Having considered the diphthongs ai and au in their 
relative position to the Sanskrit and Prakrit, we submit 
now the common Sindhi vowels to a nearer examination. 

a) The vowels a, a. 

The short vowel ^ a, is more tenaciously kept fast 
in Sindhi, than in the Prakrit, and the Sindhi very fre- 
quently recurs directly again to the__ original Sanskrit, 
as: Xf^ pako, cooked, Sansk. XJ^, but Prak. fxi^ 
^XfT'5 angaru, coal, Sansk. ^'^TK? ^^^ Prak. "^^T^t 
nxi^ supan5, dream, Sansk. |<|'^, but Prak. f^f^TTT 

'^f^ vale, a creeper, Sansk. «r^tj ^"^^ Prak. c(f^. But 
there is no lack of examples on the other hand, in which 
original a has been likewise shortened to i, as : f%Tn' khima, 
patience, Prak. l^^?!? Sansk. "J^TTTj ft[>T mina, marrow, 
Sansk. "JTWr. 

In this way a has been shortened to i in all those 
forms, which are already alleged by the Prakrit gram- 
marian Kramadishvara in the Apabhransha dialect (com- 
pare: Lassen, Instit. Linguae Prak. p. 454) as: "Rf^" 
fTT^ jia-tia (Apabhransha: 'nT^-ffT'^j instead of ^V" 
rTV)? f^fW^frrfW jite-tite, where -there (Apabhransha: 
^r^-Wr^'), from ZJ^-fR); f^ff{ kite, where? (Apa- 



J) e is in Prakrit before a double consonant := e =: t. 



INTRODUCTION. IX 

bhransha: ^r^, from an original form era, instead of 
^>^, thence the common Sansk. form c|^)^ The Sindhi 
adverb ^^ la or ^^ la, thus, corresponds to the Prak. 
"5^^, and is regularly derived from the Sansk. adverb 
^F^ZfTT (not from 'jfrTj which Lassen has already doubted) 
with the elision of h (la = iha). 

Short a is occasionally, but rarely, changed to u, as: 
TT^^ ra-uru, tax, Sansk. TI^^T. (but not in the examples 
quoted by Lassen §. 173, 3). 

Long a is in Sindhi frequently preserved in such 
forms, where in Prakrit it has been already shortened 
(owing to the contraction or assimilation of the following 
compound consonant): as: %TP7T hairagi, a religious 
ascetic, Prak. '^TJ^, Sansk. %ip^; TIU?^ marikha, 
way, Prak. 4^ J J | , Sansk. 'TTTTj ^T?T j^ti'^? pilgrimage, 
Prak. ^"^j Sansk. Ijmj; ofT^, vaghu, tiger, Prak. '^7^, 
Sansk. cZTT^T. Long a has been shortened in ^t^K ^^~ 
dare, spade, Sansk. "^FJ^. 

Long a is weakened to i in the following adverbs, 
after the analogy of the Prakrit, as: IT'fef^- rTf^f^ ja- 
dehe-taclehe, when -then; ^ff^f^ kadehe, when? which 
are derived from the Sansk. adverbs: Tf^X-fT^J ^^T. 

Long a as a feminine termination of Prakrit nouns 
is in Sindhi occasionally permuted for i or even i (e), as: 
cfxf va-i, speeck, Prak. cfT^, Sansk. ^J^ ; uft dhure, 
origin, Prak. ^U, Sansk. '^^. The only example of 
final ^H of a masc. theme being changed to i is U? 
ra-e, prince, Prak. TTW, Sansk. TTWT nom. 

In a certain number of words, ending in the Sansk. 
crude state in rT (but nom. sing. rTT), final a has been 
changed in Sindhi (as now and then already in Prakrit) 
to u, as: fl|^, father, Prak. fl4^| (by elision of rT), 
Sansk. nom. fxHrff; ^"^ bhau, brother, Prak. HTW 
Sansk. ^Ifll; and by the same levelling process: ^^ 



X INTRODUCTION. 

man, motlier, Prak. TTW, Sansk. WTfTT; TI^ rau, prince 
(besides T]R()' ^^ pandhu, journey, Sansk. Xt^^T ^• 

As regards the vowel changes in the midst of a 
word, the Sindhi adheres on the average to Prakrit usage, 
as: XI^*^ patharu, bed, Prak. tf?^, Sansk. XT'^BTTT,? Hindi 
f^W^)? different from the else identical word Xf^T^ stone, 
Prak. Xfr^, Sansk. IT^^ (Hindi XJr^^); TT^U maya, 
compassion, Sansk. *i\m (Hindi likewise TT^); ^^^t 
devali, temple (in Sindhi with the fem. termination i), 
Prak. ^^^, Sansk. "^cfX^'IJ (Hindi likewise ^cj;^). 

h) The vowels i, i. 

Short i is in Sindhi pronounced like short e, when 
preceded or followed by ^ h, and regularly so, when 
ending a word, as: ^1|^ eharo, such a one, "firf^frT 
mehete, a mosque; TTT^ gale, word. Short i corresponds 
therefore often to the Prakrit IJ e, which is considered 
short, when followed by a compound consonant, whereas 
17 e is in Sindhi always long; e. g. Prak. ^T^jg, Sindhi 
-pTTCI ("pTTTL^), to take; f?(^ nindra, sleep, Prak. "^ 
or fttT^, Sansk. f^^T; f^'? cinhu, sign, Prak. ^^^ or 
f^^, Sansk. f^. 

It is a curious phenomenon in Sindhi, that occasion- 
ally a short i is interpolated in a syllable, which the 
effeminate pronunciation finds too harsh for the ear. 
This is particularly the case, when a syllable closes with 
a double n or n followed by another consonant (especially 
a liquida). The consequence of this effeminate pronunciation 
is, that the n thus separated by the interpolation of i, 
becomes nasalized, as: ^f^^ saina, sign, hint, instead 
of ^Jf^, from ^fl^; ^^fjl^ saisaru, world, instead of 
^H^T^ ' 4-Jd[^C?5 maijala, a day's journey, instead of THT^ 
(jCli), and is frequently no longer heard at all, especially 



INTRODUCTION. XI 

in the mouth of the Muhammedans , who write: jClo 
ma-izala, sLL^ sa-isaru etc. 

Lengthened is i in ^ ki, what, Prakrit already 
^, from the Sanskrit f%R ; further in ^f^ sihu, lion, 
Prak. ^^, Sansk. f^^; but not in f^^ jibha, tongue, 
Prak. ^fT? Sansk. f^^. 

Long 1 is kept fast by the Sindhi in many instances, 
where in Prakrit it has been shortened to i, in consequence 
of the assimilation of consonants, as: rft^ tirthu, a 

holy bathing-place, Prak. frTF^, Sansk. rft^. 

Long 1 is rarely shortened to i, and this only, 
when ending a noun, as: IRTft. nare, a woman, Prak. et 
Sansk. ^f^. 

Long 1 passes into e in those instances, which have 
been already marked out by the old Prakrit grammarians, 
as Prakrit ^f^B^ T^ftH etc., Sansk. cR^'?^^ f^ etc. 
The corresponding Sindhi forms are: qRF^, keharo, what? 
(by transposition of i|, instead of %^;^) ; ^"^ keru, who, 
(by elision of 5, instead of %H kerhu; in the Apa- 
bhransha dialect r on the other hand has been dropped, 
as: ^^). The Prakrit form Tjf^ (Apabhransha "^il^) 
has not been taken up by the Sindhi, but other forms 
have been created from the pronominal bases cfi^ ^^ 
'ift, ^tjit^ ^^) ^y adding to them the diminutive affix 5^ 
ro, as : f^^^t keharo, of what kind; f^^^t^flT^ft Jetiara 
— tehar5 , of which kind — of such a kind ; ^l^^t ehar5, 
of this kind, ^^5^ ^haro, of that kind. 

c) The vowels u, u. 

On the whole the Sindhi has taken up those changes, 
which these vowels have been made subject to in Prakrit; 



XII INTRODUCTION. 

but in some special cases it has remained more original, 
than the Prakrit, as: Xf^n purusu, man, Prak. Xlft^ 
Sansk. Tf^^; ^f^tt? mukhiri, a bud, Prak. Tf^^, Sansk. 

U is changed to a in: Tf^ garo, heavy, Prak. T^^ 
Sansk. H^; I'^T^ dabalu, weak (Prak. still ^W^, Sansk. 
q^cf^; or it may be dropped altogether, as: Iff^ pare, 
on, upon, Prak. "^^T^ft, Sansk. "^XTfi!,, 

U is changed to o only in the following instances, 
^s: ^rft iiioti, pearl, Prak. l^"^ (motta) Sansk. TT^; 
T^t^ p5thi, book, Prak. "q^r^^? Sansk. ^^^15 5 ^- 
5k. kodare, a spade, Sansk. "^Ff^^ 

Long u is preserved more tenaciously in Sindhi, 
than in Prakrit, e. g. ^T^ nuro, a hollow ring on the 
ankle, Prak. TTf^^T, Sansk. cTOT: — ^^ such cases, where • 
original u has been depressed to o in Prakrit, the original ' 
vowel generally reappears in Sindhi, as: ^fl^f^ ukhiri, 
a mortar, Prak. ^^1^^, Sansk. ^^Hl^^; Ilf^ puthe, ^ 
power, Prak. "CTtf^? Sansk. Xlf^, which is, though 
identical in form, not to be confounded with Xjf^ puthe, 
the back, Sansk. XTg', Hindi Xf^^ 

d) The vowels e and o. 

In Sindhi, as well as in Prakrit, e and o are no 
longer looked upon as Gruna - vowels , but as simple 
sounds. In Sindhi e and o are always long, never 
anceps, as in Prakrit; for the short Prakritical e short 
i is substituted in Sindhi, as: f^^ hiku, one, Prak. 
15^; and for the short Prakritical o short u, as stated 
already. 

Both vowels keep their place very steadfastly and 
frequently reappear in such cases, where they have been 



INTRODUCTION. XIII 



already shortened in Prakrit, owing to the assimilation 
of consonants, as: $TT premu, love, Prak. tf^TT (p^mma); 
^H^ jobhanu, time of youth, Prak. "^St"^^ (jovva- 
nam); ^ff jogu, fit, Prak. ^^pTf, Sansk. '^^t^. 

Quite exceptional is the shortening of o to u in 
^^f\ luharu, blacksmith, instead of: ^t^^T"^ (Sansk. 
^t^^lT)? where a has been likewise shortened to a; and 
the change of e to i in xf^ piju, draught, Sansk. ^"ZJ; 
1^ khi, wellfare, Sansk. "^l^; rftw nihu, love, Prak. 
^]|^, Sansk. '^^; if(^ mihu, rain, Prak. ^i|t, Sansk. 

When ending a noun e and o are frequently shortened 
to e and li respectively, especially in poetry; but these 
changes being peculiar to Sindhi, we shall consider them 
hereafter separately. The peculiarity of the Apabhransha 
dialect, as noted by the grammarian Kramadishvara , is 
fully borne out by the modern Sindhi; it uses likewise in 
the locative singular e (i) instead of e, as XJl^f^ pa- 
radehe, in a foreign country, XfJT^ ghare, in a house etc. 
In the same way, as the Apabhransha, the Sindhi also 
changes to a great extent the Prakrit termination o to 
u, as: cjj;^ kamu, business, Prak. "^piTt ^^c. The same 
may also be said of the ablative sing, termination ^|?j 
(= a — o with elision of ^) which is commonly shortened 
to adu in the Apabhransha dialect , and in Sindhi further 
to a-u: as ^^T^ ghara-u, from a house. This old 
Sindhi ablative termination is now-a-days generally con- 
tracted to ^^ au (a being likewise shortened to a, and 
to avoid the hiatus , both vowels being nasalized) but a-u 
is still very frequently used in poetry. 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

§• 3. 
The elision, contraction and insertion of vowels. 

These three points , so important in the old Prakrit, 
we may, as far as the Sindhi is concerned, sum up 
under the following brief remarks: 

a) An ehsion of vowels takes far more rarely place 
in Sindhi, than in the Prakrit, because the consonants 
do not so easily give way; there is however no lack of 
instances, in which the Sindhi accedes to Prakrit usage, 
as: <1^|^ duar5, temple (different from H^|15 door, 
Sansk. '^JX), Sansk. Hg(T^^5 where e has been elided; 
(^^1^ siar5, the cold season, Prak. ^ff^WT^) Sansk. 
^ri<*lc!i; ^^ kumbharu, potter, Sansk. cR^^TT.; 
X(i^j^ pakhala, a pair of leather-bags , Sansk. XfTftl^^; 
f^TET rinu, the desert (the Pin), Sansk. "S^JRIIJ; f^^ dhia, 
daughter (prakrit already \ft^j see Lassen p. 172, note); 
f^ bi, also, Prak. f^, Sansk. ^fxT. 

h) As regards the contraction of vowels, the 
Sindhi coincides more fully with the Prakrit, though in 
some instances I have noticed a deviation from Prakrit 
analogy, as: "^^t cotho, the fourth, Prak. xl^ir'^, Sansk. 
T^IJ^; 1^75 moru, peacock, Prak. 1^^? Sansk. THR; 
^^ lunu, salt, Prak. ^TTf, Sansk. ^cfTJT; ^^^ sonu, 
gold, Sansk. <H«TO. 

c) With reference to the insertion of vowels the 
Sindhi agrees on the whole with the Prakrit. 

a) An original compound consonant is separated by 
the insertion of a vowel, to render its pronunciation 
more easy for a Sindhi organ. The insertion of a respective 
vowel depends on the sequence of vowels or the varga 
of the consonant, which is to be separated from the 
preceding one, though this rule is by no means strictly 
adhered to. 



INTRODUCTION. XV 

a is inserted in cases like the following: ^W^ sa- 
raha, praise, Prak. ^^T^T, Sansk. 1^JV||; ^^^ sa- 
loku, a sloka, Prak. 1%^^, Sansk. '^cR, 

i is inserted, as: ^^^ istrl, woman, Prak. 'SSf^, 
Sansk. ^^; "^H? varehu, year, Prak. off^^, Sansk. 
oT^; fi^^Trr milanu, to be obtained, Prak. fl^^TTrr* 
Sansk. root ^, 

U is inserted, as: ^'R«T|' supano, dream, Prak. f^- 
f^TJT, Sansk. ^'^; n^ii^^ sumaranu, to remember, Prak. 
^TI^, Sansk. 15^ (root TIJ). 

P) On the other hand the Sindhi very frequently 
has gone a step farther and dispensed with the insertion 
of a vowel by pushing the root -vowel between the 
compound consonant and dropping the final consonant, 
as: %T!r senu, friend, Prak. ^"^^j Sansk. ?|f^; or more 
commonly it drops simply one of the compound consonants, 
as: gF nuhu, daughter-in-law, Prak. ^TJ]?, Sansk. "^tTf; 
^TRH saghanu, to be able, Prak. ^'itTntMR? Sansk. 



§. 4. 
Sandhi, Hiatus and Euphony. 

The Sindhi, as well as the Prakrit, dispenses totally 
with the rules of Sandhi, and vowels may therefore 
meet, without being subject to the laws of euphony. 
To separate however in some measure concurring vowels, 
the Sindhi very liberally employs the use of Anusvara, 
whereby a certain nasalizing pronunciation has been 
imparted to the language, which is in some measure 
disagreeable to our ear; e. g. ^jsj^ au, I; Wl^t^ su- 
khau, nom. plur. of ^^J, vows; 4<||^li| khainu, to 
burn; Tf^ gau, cow etc. The Anusvara is further 
inserted, to facilitate the lengthened pronunciation of a 



XVI INTRODUCTION. 

vowel, as: if^ mihu, rain, Sansk. '^f^; this is particularly 
the case, when a noun ends in a long vowel, as ij(\ 
pri, friend, i^ bhu, earth etc. 

On the other hand there are also examples to be 
met with, where original Anusvara has been dropped 
in Sindhi, as: ^^ masu, or TT^ mahu, meat, Sansk. 



11. THE SINDHI CONSONANTAL SYSTEM. 

§. 5. 

In comparing the Sindhi letters (see below the Sindhi 
alphabets) with the Prakrit alphabet, we see at the first 
glance, that the Sindhi has retained the letters ^ s, 
3^ n, "3? n and ^ n, as single letters, which have 
disappeared already from the Prakrit alphabet, except 
when preceding a consonant of their respective vargas. 

^ s, is in Sindhi by no means a palatal sibilant, 
as in Sanskrit, but a simple dental sound, equally 
unknown in Sanskrit and Prakrit, which has become 
naturalized in all the modern idioms (with the exception 
of the Gujarati), and which corresponds to our common 
dental sh. It is derived from various sources: 

a) from the Sanskrit palatal sibilant ^, as: ^tjo? 
sabdu, word, Sansk. "^^i ^0^ sariru, body (besides 
^;^^ sariru), Sansk. ^f^; ^[T^ sukru, friday, Sansk. 

1^- ^ . . .^ 

h) from the Sanskrit dental sibilant ^ s, as: ^ftS 
sihu, lion, Sansk. f^^; ^iHW sahu, rich (by the Musal- 
mans generally pronounced ^T^ sa-u) Sansk. 'W^; the 
s of Persian words is also now and then changed to s, 
as: ^[ft^ sikha, a spit, Pers. ^a^. 

c) from the Sanskrit cerebral sibilant "^ s , as : ^^W 
kasanu, to pull, Sansk. ^^ (Hindi cff^); f^J^Tff kisnu, 



INTRODUCTION. XVII 

Krishna, Sansk. cR^Tf; f^f^ visu, world (besides f^^) 
Sansk. fo|b|^. 

The letter ji of Arabic and Persian words is always 

rendered by ^5 as: ^^ saharu, town, Pers. ^4-^; ^J 
sahu, king, Pers. 5 Li. 

This is a very remarkable deviation from the prin- 
ciples of the Prakrit , where the letter ^ has been changed 
to ^, and further to ^. ^ 

In Sindhi the use of the letter ^ is confined to a 
limited number of indigenous vocables (those, which 
have been borrowed from foreign sources, not being taken 
into account), but that it is still to be considered more 
or less exceptional, may be concluded from the circumstance, 
that the Prakrit rules concerning its permutations (^ = 
^ = ^ are still in full force in Sindhi, as: ^T!TT!T su- 
nanu, to hear, Prak. ^TTTfTfil, Sansk. "^TT^^^; XfiT^ 
phasi, or xui-^ phahl, a noose, Sansk. TTT^; ^H (lesu, 
country, Sansk. '^^; 5^ daha, ten, Prak. "^j Sansk. 

The same law holds good with reference to the 
cerebral "^ s, which hke "SJ, passes into ^ or ^, as: 
^ nuhu, daughter-in-law, Sansk. ^^^; f^H visu, 
world, Sansk. fo|t|4; %^ vesu, disguise, Sansk. ^'^^ 

^ and ^ are in Sindhi also frequently changed to ^ 
ch, as: '(cj)^y^ kichari, rise and pulse boiled together (Hindi 
f<5^x|^), Sansk. "^^XT; ^^t* chancharu, Saturday, 
Sansk. '^M'^T^; ^ cha, or ^^ chaha, six, Prak. ^, 
Sansk. "^^ This permutation seems in Sindhi to be so 
deeply rooted, that even the Jjj of Arabic and Persian 
words is occasionally changed to ^, as: ^^J^ chala 

(besides ^TI^), would to God, Arab. JUI^Li; ^"^ft 
chabase, bravo! Pers. jxLjLi; ^TSJ^ pachahu, king, 
Pers. 5Lcoj>G. 

Trumpii, Sindhi-Grammar. 9 



XVIII INTRODUCTION. 

The cerebral "^ is occasionally written in Sindhi, 
but only by Brahmans, and even with them its use 
depends on their relative knowledge of Sanskrit. We 
may therefore as well leave out this letter from the 
consonantal system of the Sindhi, as its actual pronun- 
ciation is completely ignored. In Capt. Stack's Sindhi 
Dictionary some words are given with the cerebral ^, 
such as: f^'^^ visai, voluptuary, 5"^ dustu, bad, cJJ]? 

kastu, wretchedness etc., but the letter itself as well as 
those words are only known to the Brahmans. 

The guttural 5^ n, as well as the palatal ^T n^ keep 
their place in Sindhi as single letters, e. g. ^3* anu, 
body (Hindi ^rf or ^TJ )? Sansk. ^^; ^^3^ mananu, 
to ask (Hindi iqjJ^J), Sansk. ^T'l^ (r. Wj)^ TJSP^T 
maiianu, to heed (Hindi ^^), Sansk. "^iT^W. In the 
kindred dialects both these nasals are only used in con- 
junction with a letter of their varga, and never as single 
consonants (the Panjabi alone being excepted). 

The cerebral "^ n has not supplanted the dental 
"ST in Sindhi, as in Prakrit, but both are sharply kept 
asunder; '^ n is also used as a single consonant, in 
the same way as 3* n and Sf n , and is of very frequent 
occurrence, in which respect the Panjabi alone agrees 
with the Sindhi, the other dialects using TJT n only before 
letters of the cerebral class, with the exception of the 
Hindustani, which is destitute of a cerebralnasal. 

§. 6, 
1) Single consonants at the beginning of a word. 

At the beginning of a word the following consonants 
occur in Sindhi: 
J) Gutturals: ^ k, ^ kh; ^ g, "R gh; — - f h; — — ^ g. 

2) Palatals: "^^ c, ^ch; ^ j, 1^ jh; — "^f y; — ^ s, ^T J. 

3) Cerebrals: ? t, 3 th; 5d, ^dh; — 'S r; — — f d. 

4) Dentals: TT t, ^ th; ^ d, ^ dh; ^ n; t r; ^ 1; ^ s; — 
ojLablals: "R p, "^ ph; "^ b, ^ bh; i?m; "^ v; — — '^ h. 



INTRODUCTION. XIX 

This scheme deviates from that of the Prakrit in 
some essential points, which we have partly already 
noticed. 

Peculiar to the Sindhi is the cerebral 5 r, beginning 
a word, which is not found in any of the other dialects. 
It is, however, also in Sindhi confined to the two inter- 
jections § re and ^ ri; the former is used in calling 
out to a man, the latter in calling out to a woman. 
There can be no doubt, that we have in both forms 
the Sansk. interjectional adverb ^JX^ (which form is also 
used in Sindhi) which has been vindicated by Dr. Cald- 
well (Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian languages, 
p. 440) to the Dravidian idioms of the south, and the 
original signification of which is : o slave ! The correctness 
of Dr. Caldwell's statement is borne out by the Sindhi, 
in which besides. 5 ^.nd 5^ also ^^ and ^I5T i^ used, 
corresponding to the Dravidian ada. 

All those consonants, as arrayed above, hold their 
place at the beginning of a word, when standing single; 
but when a noun happens to be compounded, then the 
first consonant of the second noun is no longer con- 
sidered initial, and may therefore be elided, as: TO^% 
siaro, the cold season, Prakrit already Tf^^Tf^? Sansk. 
^sfVfT^ — ^T^* 

1) ^ k is not subject to aspiration, as in some examples 
of the Prakrit, e. g. I^^, Sansk. cfi^, Sindhi ^"^ kubo, 
hump-backed; neither is k changed to "^ at the beginning 
of a w^ord, but frequently at the end (being an affix) 
and in the case of the genitive affix ^^ even to the 
media ^ j. 

The k of Arabic - Persian words on the other hand 
is now and then aspirated or even changed to ^ /, as: 

;«jLi4^ khutabu, school, or ^Li:^ x^tabu, from the Arabic 

iol;c^; ^L-§X^ sukhanu, a rudder, Arab. ^LXL. 

2* 



XX INTRODUCTION. 

2) T g is aspirated in the single instance of ^P^ 
gharu, a house, Prak. TJ^ (instead of ^T^), Sansk. 17^, 

3) rT t is very frequently changed to the cor- 
responding cerebral 7 t. The tendency of the dentals, 
to surrender their place to the corresponding cerebrals, 
has so much got the upper hand in Sindhi, that its 
consonantal system differs therein quite materially and 
significantly from the old Prakrit; e. g. ZT^ tramo, 
copper, Prak. wt"^, Sansk. fTFt (^^^^^ TTRT); | tre, 
three, Prak. frffiSj Sansk. "^tftl (Hindi rft*T); ^^^ same 
may also be stated of the aspirate ^ th , as : 31"^ thanu, 
stable, Prak. "^TJl, Sansk. ^T«7. 

The cerebral ^ (3) with its media 5 (^ comprises 
the most non-Arian elements of the language; nearly 
y4 of the words, which commence with a cerebral, are 
taken from some aboriginal, non-Arian idiom, which in 
recent times has been termed "Scythian"^), but which 
we would prefer to call Tatar. This seams to be a 
very strong proof, that the cerebrals have been borrowed 
from some idiom anterior to the introduction of the 
Arian family of languages; the Sanskrit uses the cerebrals 
very sparingly, but in Prakrit, which is already con- 
siderably tinged with so-called "provincial" (i. e. non- 
Arian) elements, they struggle already hard to supplant 
the dentals. 

4) ^ d , as well as its tenuis rT t , is very frequently 
changed to the corresponding cerebral 5 d, and, as even 
d did not seem hard enough at the beginning of a word, 
it was changed in most cases to the peculiar Sindhi ? d 
(the pronunciation of which see under the Sindhi al- 
phabets), as: ft*^ ^olij a kind of sedan chair, Prakrit 
already f^^T? Sansk. "I^^T"' 55 dandu, a stick, Prak. 

1) This term, tliougli used by Dr. Caldwell and Mr. Ed. Norris, 
we find too vague; Tatar is more specific, as we understand by this 
term a certain family of languages. 



INTRODUCTION. XXI 

5Tt5, Sansk. "^5; ff^TTf dianu, to give, Prak. ^f^^ 
Sansk. root ^J; f^^HT disanu, to see, Prak. Fcpl^ 
Sansk. "g^. But if r be joined to the cerebral media, 
the simple cerebral (^ must be used, as 5 d is already 
by its own nature a double cerebral, e. g. ^T^ drakha, 
grape, Sansk. "^T^^ (Hindi ^T^). The simple cerebral 
5 d is very seldom to be met with at the beginning of 
a word, and must be carefully distinguished from ^ d, 
as: T53t ^it^l^Oj obstinate, but f^Tf dit^^o, seen, par- 
ticiple past of T5?RT to see. 

^ d, is changed to its aspirate V dh in the single 
instance of fif^ dhia, daughter, after the precedent of 
the Prakrit ift^J o^ ^W. 

5) Initial "R is aspirated in some instances, as: 
XfJT^ifft phasi or TRT^ phahi, a noose, Sansk. XTT^ (Hindi 
Xf^f^); now and then it passes also to the semi -vowel 
cf (by the medium of "^ b) as: oJTCT vajho, a Hindu 
schoolmaster, Sansk. t^IfX^T'^ (initial u having first 
been dropped). 

6) The semi -vowel '^ y has become now very 
scarce in Sindhi at the beginning of a word, as: ^^^ITf 
yabhanu, coire; IJ^ yato, stout; HJl^ yaraha, eleven. 
After the analogy of the Prakrit initial "^ is generally 
changed to ^, as: ^ jo, who, Sansk. ^; Ifn jasu, 
fame, Sansk. "^"^J. 

In words, borrowed from the Arabic or Persian, 
y is always preserved, as: "^"'^ yarn, friend, Pers. 
sL> etc. 

The only instance, where initial '^ has been changed 
to ^ 1 in Sindhi is ^^T3 lathe, a walking-stick; the 
same is the case in Prakrit, ^ft, Sansk. llf%. 



XXII INTRODUCTION. 

§• 7. 
2) Single consonants in the midst of a word. 

According to a common Prakrit rule the following 
consonants : 

^ k, ^ g; ^ c, W J; W t, ^ d; XT p, ^ b, 
when standing single in the midst of a word, may either 
be retained or elided. This rule we find corroborated 
by the Sindhi, but not without some essential restrictions, 
\ the consonants being on the whole more frequently re- 
tained than elided, as the effeminacy of pronunciation 
has not yet reached that degree of indistinctness in Sindhi, 
which so peculiarly characterizes the Prakrit. We shall 
therefore find, that in many instances the Sindhi has 
followed the already beaten track, but has more fre- 
quently preserved the old harder form, or chosen its own 
way of ehsion and contraction. The semi -vowels are 
but rarely totally elided in Sindhi; they either keep 
their place or are dissolved into their corresponding 
vowels. 

Examples of elision: Ifl^ sui, needle, Prak. ;fj^ 
Sansk. ^'^. f^^ kio, done, Prak. f^^, Sansk. cRff; 
^T^ rau, prince, Prak. JJ^^ Sansk. TT'5IT' "^^^^W 
ca-umas5, the rainy season, Sansk. "^fTl^TIff; ^^^ sara-u, 
autumn, Prak. ^Tj^? Sansk. '^T.^^; ftf^ piu, father, 
Prak. fxTW? Sansk. flRTT. 

This process of elision is extended even to foreign 

words, as: ^T^"^! nakhuo, a ship-master, Pers. ItX^LI. 

But more frequently the consonants keep their place, 
as: ^TFT^ sagaru, the sea, Prak. ^T^^, Sansk. ^TPTl; 
;:iTT^ nagaru, town, Prak. XSJ^^, Sansk. ^rf^; ^"^^ 
vacanu, promise, Prak. c[^IT!f, Sansk. oT"^^. 

It is quite characteristical , that the Prakrit does 
not elide the cerebrals, for which it shows already 
such a predilection, but, wherever possible, it changes 



INTRODUCTION. XXIII 

the dentals into cerebrals, to guard them thus against 
elision. This process we find in full operation in the 
modern dialects, which have sprung from the Prakrit; 
the common dentals have become too weak for the mouth 
of the people , a circumstance , which receives a particular 
light from the manner, in which the modern Indians 
write and pronounce European words; every dental is 
without mercy changed by them into a cerebral, which 
proves at least so much, that the cerebrals are more 
familiar to them, than the dentals. 

Let us now briefly glance over the exceptions, which 
have been noted down by the Prakrit grammarians. 

1) According to the rule, laid down at the head 
of this paragraph, the letters ^ k, T g, '^ c, IT j 
are, when not elided, retained. The exceptions from this 
rule in Prakrit are not borne out by the Sindhi, and 
seem therefore to have been more of a local character. 
The only exception, which is corroborated by the modern 
idioms, is the Prakrit form "^f^Tjft? sister, Sansk. ^fS^^jf^, 
which must be explained by an original form "^f^^^ft' 
from which "^f^Tjt ^^^ sprung ; Hindi "^f^^ and Sindhi, 
by transposition of the aspiration, ^'3[^[ bhenu. 

^ k, may pass into its corresponding media ^, 
as: H^W bhagatu, a worshipper, Sansk. ^T^; ^T^f^ 
sagate, strength, Sansk. "Sttf^;, On the contrary there 
is a transition of T to ^ (and by the influence of following 
r to kh) in t^J khada, a pit, Prak. T[^, Sansk. TJ^^ 

2) The cerebral 7 t and its aspirate Z th, frequently 
pass into their corresponding media, as: ^^ kandhi, 
a necklace (besides ^^), Sansk. ^Tt^^, This is fully 
borne out by the modern dialects, especially the Sindhi, 
which goes already a step further in this downward 
course, and changes 5 d to f r, and ^ dh to ^ rh; 
e. g. "^5 baru, the Indian fig-tree, Sansk. cf^; ft?^ 
troranu, to break, Sansk. "^^i Tf^UJi parhanu, to 



-"^XIV INTKODUCTION. 

read, Sansk. "q^; if^ pirhi, throne, Sansk. xft^t; 
^f^ brhanu, to rolfdown, Sansk. ^. 

To this permutation also the original Sanskritical 
5 d IS subject in many instances, as: ^f^ juranu, to 
be joined, Sansk. :5Tf; xft^TTT piranu, to press, Sansk. 
^ ' \ ' ^^ J^?^' inanimate body, Sansk. 1^5, In a similar 
manner also the Sansk. ^ dh may be changed to <g rh, 
^s* ^^ mtirhu, ignorant, Sansk. 1^. 

But by far the greatest number of words, in which 
r or rh is to be found, is of non-Arian origin. 

3) IT very often passes into its media ^, as: 
t^f^ khande, patience, Sansk. "^xf^- The Sansk. par- 
ticipial termination ^rff (^fTrf ) is always changed in Sindhi 
^o ^^ ando, as: ^^^ halando, going, cf}l^ doing^ 
rT is even changed to an aspirated cerebral, but only 
m such cases, where the aspiration has been caused by 
an ehded r, as: "q^ vathu, taking, Sansk. Hf?!. ff is 
preserved in many instances, where in Prakrit it has 
passed into the media ^, as "^^frT rute, season, Prak. 
^^^, Sansk. '^H. In words borrowed from the Arabic 
(or Persian) Jf is occasionally aspirated, as: f^TT^ him- 

matha, Arab. ^^; ^^HT saatha, hour, Arab. o^U. 

4) XJ only rarely passes into its media '^, as f^ bi, 
also, Sansk. ^fxT; ^^^TT rajbutu, a Rajput, Sansk. ^- 
^XJ^; Prak. IT^'R; upon, but Sindhi Xjf^, 

On the other hand there is a transition of the media 
to the tenuis in the abstract affix X|, 1^, XIT!r etc. (Hindi 
^^ ), from the Sansk. affix rof , r^ (v = b = p) , as : 
IT^If dahapa, wisdom. 

Final XJ is now and then changed to u (p = b = 
V =r u), as: ffT^ tau, heat, Sansk. cTTXT, Hindi fTT'^ tao. 

5) The substitution of ^ in lieu of 5 has been 
preserved in the case of: TT^^ talau, a tank, Prak. 



INTRODUCTION. XXV 

iT^^? Sansk. rT^PT^ In other examples however the 
course, taken by the Prakrit, has again been abandoned, 
and a new one struck out; e. g. the Prakrit 571^^ ? pome- 
granate, sprung from the Sanskrit ^TflW (by the sub- 
stitution of ^ for 5) becomes in Sindhi 5T3 darhu (Hindi 
CT^fT ) ? ^^^ initial dental "^ being first changed to 5 d 
and then hardened to 5 d, and 5 d passing into 
5 r with an additional aspiration (which is rather 
unusual). 

The modern idioms deviate in this respect from the 
Prakrit, that they change 5 d to 5 r, instead of substituting 
^ for 5; but therein also lies a hint, how the sub- 
stitution of ^ for ? has been possible. The change must 
have been effected by the medium of 5 r (not of T,, as 
■Xassen supposes), which approaches ^ very closely in 
sound. This explains sufficiently such like cases as : tf^^^ 
pilo, yellow, Sansk. xRtI; the change must have passed 
through the following stages , as : iJ^fT = ift^ = ifts 

6) The substitution of T r for ^ in those numerals, 
Avhich are compounded with ^^, has been retained in 
Sindhi, as well as in the cognate dialects, e. g. Prak. 
IJ^TT.^) Sindhi IJTtjt yaraha, eleven; Prak. offT^^, Sindhi 
"^X^^ baraha, twelve; Prak. flT.^, Sindhi ^^ teraha, 
thirteen; ^ however must be standing by itself, for 
Prak. '^'^3^]|, Sindhi ^fi| codaha, fourteen. 



8) Single Aspirates in the midst of a word. 

On the average the aspirates are in Sindhi more 
frequently preserved, than elided, though the Prakrit 
laws, concerning their elision, are also in force. 

a) The letters ^ kh, ^ gh, ^ th, V dh, H bh 
may be elided in this wise, that only the spiritus ^ 



XXVI INTKODUCTION. 

remains. This phenomenon is so far of great importance, 
as the Prakrit seems to indicate thereby, that it considers 
the aspirates as compound consonants, Hke gh, bh etc., 
the base of which is dropped and the spiritus ^ alone 
retained. The aversion of the Prakrit against the aspirates 
seems to point to a Tatar under-ground current in the 
mouth of the common people, the Dravidian languages 
of the south being destitute of aspirates. Against this 
tendency of clearing away the aspirates the modern idioms 
react far more strongly than the old Prakrit, their pro- 
nunciation proving in this respect much tighter, than 
that of their immediate common mother-tongue. 

Examples of elision: ^^ miihu, face, Prak. ?7^, 
Sansk. ^I^; but ^l^" mukhu is also in use in Sindhi; 
ifll? mihu, rain, Prak. '^^J, Sansk. i^^; in Sindhi also 
^; ^^ sahi, friend, Prak. ^^, Sansk. ^f%; ^f^ 
kahanu, to say, Prak. cR^, Sansk, c|t|^ ; ^^TTT lahanu, 
to obtain, Prak. ^^, Sansk. '^^. 

In some instances the Sindhi advances beyond the 
Prakrit by dropping ^, which has been severed from 
its base, as; ^T^ sau, upright, Prak. ^T?, Sansk. 'HTV. 

h) But more commonly the aspirates in question are 
retained, as: ^I^ sukhu, pleasure, Prak. ;p[l^; ^ift^ 
adhird, hasty, Prak. ^\|TTT' ?T^ sugharu, shrewd, 
Sansk. ^^7. ^ 

c) The aspirates ^ ch, ^ jh, 7 th, ^ dh, "Ri ph 
are retained unaltered; e. g. "?^^tT icha, wish, Sansk. 
^^TT? ^^t acho, white, Sansk. ^'^; ^^ kanthi, a 
kind of necklace, Sansk. "^TT^TJ; ^^TH dhundhanu, to 
seek, Sansk. "^^TSF; ^tR^saphalu, fruitful, Sansk. ^^TU^, 

d) The aspirate 3 th may also pass into its cor- 
responding media, as: ^f% sundhe, ginger, Sansk. ^- 
J!^, Hindi ^fe; ^i^ kandhi, a kind of necklace (be- 



INTRODUCTION. XXVII 

sides ^;jt); 'ifS gandhe, a bundle, Prak. T^^, Sansk. 

The cases of a media passing into its corresponding 
tenuis are very rare, as: ^^t sutho, pure, Sansk. ^^, 
Hindi again ^^. 

e) The aspirated dental ^ th passes in some in- 
stances into its corresponding media If 5 ^s: 4"^ pandhu, 
journey, Sansk. Tfr'^T m. The aspirated dentals may 
also be exchanged for their corresponding cerebrals, as: 
^^ budh5, old, Prak. ofS^S; Sansk. '^^; ^^ mudhu, 
a fool, Prak. TJ^, Sansk. W^. 

The transition of an aspirated dental to its cor- 
responding non-aspirate is very rare, as ^^madu, liquor, 
Sansk. ^ (Hindi ^^ and Tf^). 

§. 9. 
4) Single nasals. 

The dental ^ n, is now and then changed to the 
palatal ^ li, as: "^^ thaiiu, woman's milk, Sansk. "^Sf^, 
Hindi ^w^ (udder). <R is changed to the cerebral "^ n 
in \r^ dhenu, a milk-cow, Sansk. "Ija In the case of 
T^!T^ limu , a nimb - tree , ^ has been exchanged for ^, 
Sansk. "f^^, Hindi ^T( and ^H. 

The palatal ^ n is in some instances substituted 
for "^ jj (= Sindhi IT J), as f^^ minu, marrow, Sansk. 
TT^rafT; l^^t besides f^T^T the form fip| mija, is also in 
use. Similarly 'ST n may supplant ^ nn, as: XTSft puni, 
virtuous, Prak. XTTtTlJ, Sansk. X^iq'; ^"^ suno, empty, 
Prak. ^TTtTT, Sansk. "^fUJ^f, It only rarely happens, that 
a cerebral n is changed to a dental one, as: XJ^ 
[=z punno) accomplished, participle past of XTrT'^tfr, Sansk. 

A single ^ m in the midst of a word is now and 



XXVIII INTRODUCTION. 

tlien elided, as: ^(J^ sai, lord, Sansk. ^qpfTlt (= ^TT" 
fip^); but the form ^JT^ sami has likewise been 
preserved. 

^ m is further elided in the affixes ^^ (= ^^T^) and 
T(7J(, as: ^TSTftt achane, whiteness, from ^^' acho, 
white; ^t^TW loliao, made of iron; further in the 
affix ^rfj as: ^TlrT bharyatu, a carrier of burden, from 
^tj? a load. These forms we shall explain further on 
in the formation of themes. 

§. 10. 
5) The semi -vowels H y, and cf v. 

1) In Prakrit '^ j has lost its hold in the midst 
of a word; it is either dissolved into the vowel i, or 
changed to ^ j, or dropped altogether. In Sindhi on 
the contrary '^ may keep its place in the midst of 
a word; it is even frequently inserted, to avoid a hiatus, 
as: ^|i(| ayo, come, ^Tfl bharyo, filled, though these 
forms may also be written and pronounced: ^fj'?^^ 
a-i-o, bhar-i-o, which is frequently done in poetry, to 
gain a syllable. The cases, where '^ has been dropped 
altogether in Sindhi, are rare, as: "^T^va-u, wind, Prak. 
already "^T^, Sansk. "^5; "^ is frequently contracted, as: 
;;^TTt nenu, eye, Prak. ITf^TJ, Sansk. ^T{^; at the end 
of a word the elision of '^ is more common, as: J^^ 
visu, world, Sansk. f^'CfTJ. After the precedent of the 
Prakrit '^ is exchanged for IT in cases like the following: 
%5T seja, bed, Prak. ^^TT) Sansk. '^^J? ^^ VW^ 
draught , Sansk. H7| etc. 

"^ as a sign of the passive verb is in Sindhi, as 
already in Prakrit, always changed to W j, a method, 
by which the Sindhi has gained a regular passive voice, 
whereas all the kindred dialects are compelled to make 



INTRODUCTION. XXIX 

up tlie passive by compositions; e. g. ffftniTTT disijanu, 
to be seen, active ff^Tff disanu, to see, Hindi ^^ 
ITWT etc. 

2) "^ V is, after the analogy of "^j either preserved 
or dissolved into u; but if the laws of euphony require 
it, it is again reinstated between two vowels, and very 
rarely dropped altogether; e. g. if^^ jiu, life, formative 
^cf jiva (instead of if)^ jia), Prak. ift^, Sansk. iftcf; 
^cf^ devi, goddess; on the other hand ^^ deu, a demon, 
formative ^of deva; XJcftT pavanu, wind, Prak. "CJ^Tff 
Sansk. "R"^*!. It is also now and then totally elided; as: 
ftr^^ jianu, to live; f^ dihu, day, Prak. f^^I^^ 
Sansk. f^of^, especially when compounded with another 
consonant, as we shall see hereafter. It may also be 
contracted, as: "RTTT punu, to fall, instead of H^TFT; "^TH 
cunu, to say, instead of "^"^TfT. In the prefix ^"Sf it 
may also be contracted to ^(J au, as: ^J^J^ ausaru 
or ^«f^T^ avasaru, want of rain; ^rTT^ autaru or 
^gfofffT^ avataru, an Avatar. 

A euphonic insertion of «[ takes place in the word 
'^'^ chava shade, to keep the two vowels a-a asunder; 
in Prakrit already, for similar reasons, ^ has been in- 
serted, ^Ti|T (comp. Yarar. II, 18), Sansk. "ST'^T. 

§. 11. 

6) The liquidae 1[^ r and ^ 1; the sibilant ^ s and the 

spiritus ^ h. 

1) ?, r and <^ 1 are not elided in Sindlii, but keep 
their respective places; ^ is frequently exchanged for T. 
in Sindhi, as: ^^^ kelo or c|;X^ kero, name of a flower; 

W^^H burbuli, a nightingale, from the Persian Ju-U; 
H^^l^ siaru, a jackal, Hindi "ft?^^? Sansk. ^tF[J^; 



XXX INTRODUCTION. 

5f^^ dubiro, weak, instead of: ^fcf'^' dubilo, which 

is also in use, Sansk. H"^^; ^^T^ saraha, praise, Prak. 
^^T^T, Sansk. WT^T. The only example, in which T 
has been changed to IT = ^ is "R^TJt pujanu, to be 
accomplished (Hindi likewise ^J^'tfTT) from the Sansk. 

2) The sibilant ^ (be it original or a derivative 
from ^ and ^) either keeps its place or is changed to 
^, as: ^ifl desu, country, more generally: 5ff dehu, 
Sansk. "^^; TfT^ niasu, flesh, or l^J^ mahu, Sansk. 

In the case of ^^ hanju or ^1^ hanjhu, a wild 
goose, original ^ has been exchanged for ^ or ^ (in 
Hindi ^^ or ^J^ ) , Sansk. ^^, Similarly ^If hanja 
or ^X hanjha, tear, Sansk. ^'^, Prak. ^pfj (initial h 
being in Sindhi of a euphonic nature in this case); in 
the same way the Sindhi demonstrative pronoun '5^ 
ijho seems to have sprung from TJ^ = IJ"^, and ^^ 
ujho from the remote demonstrative base u, and so 
(= sa). 

3) ^ h remains unaltered in Sindhi; in some in- 
stances however it is dropped for euphony's sake, as: 
^^ft sarahd, joyful, Sansk. ^^^ {= ^f^^ = ^f- 
^^ = ^T.^) ^T^ sa-u or ^Xg sahii, the same as: 
^f^ or ^T'^ honest. 

Remark. The final consonants, their respective 
changes and permutations we may here as well pass over, 
as the modern Indian vernaculars have already so much 
receded from the old Prakrit, that partly quite new 
formations have been introduced, which preclude any 
nearer comparison with the Prakrit. The particular 
changes or elisions, to which the final consonants are 
subject in Sindhi, we shall supply in their proper places. 



INTRODUCTION. XXXI 

§. 12. 
7) Compound consonants. 

For a thorough insight into the nature of the North 
Indian vernaculars this point is of the greatest importance ; 
for thus only we can trace out the changes, which the 
Sanskrit has undergone in the mouth of the common 
people, if we follow up the laws, according to which 
the Sanskrit sounds have been decomposed into the Pra- 
krit and its modern daughters, or weakened at least 
to such a degree , that they are now scarcely recognisable. 
We can perceive a principle pervading this process of 
decomposition similar to that, by which out of the old 
Latin the modern Romanic tongues have been derived, 
and the mutual congruity is often surprising. 

We meet here again with the same principle, which 
we have seen operating in the decomposition of the vowels 
and the single consonants. The effeminacy of pronun- 
ciation, which absorbs every hard and rough sound, and 
which consequently rather bears up with vowels , though 
they may form a displeasing hiatus, than with consonants, 
which are elided wherever possible, can in a far less 
degree endure compound consonants. All means 
are therefore employed, either to smooth them down or 
to assimilate them, in order to adjust them for a Pra- 
krit mouth, a consonant compounded of letters of dif- 
ferent Vargas being incompatible with Prakrit rules of 
euphony. It is understood, that in such an idiom a 
conjunction of three letters is quite out of question: 
the utmost which the Prakrit can endure, is the same 
letter doubled, as ^ kk, '^ tt etc.; T. and ^ alone 
cannot be doubled. 

Another means, to do away with a compound con- 
sonant, is to dissolve the same into its component parts 
by the insertion of a vowel, a method, to which recourse 
is had very frequently in Prakrit and the modern ver- 
naculars. 



XXXII INTRODUCTION. 

But even such a doubled consonant is as yet thouglit 
too hard; we perceive therefore already a tendency, as 
well in the old Prakrit as in its daughters, to clear 
away the doubling of a consonant by prolonging the 
preceding vowel, to restore thereby again the quan- 
tity of the syllable, as: ^|(i| age, fire, Prak. ^fjTf 
Sansk. ^f^, Hindi ^^; Hindi ^H wall, Sindhi f^fjf 
Sansk. -plf^, 

§. 13. 

A) Assimilation of the first four consonants of the 
five Vargas. 

These are the following: 

^ k, 1^ kh; ^ g, ^ gh. 

"^ c, ^ ch; ^ j, 1^ jh. 

7 t, 7 th; 5 d, ^ dh. 

rT t, ^ th; ^ d, V dh. 

XT p, -q; ph; ^ b, H bh. 
The ground -law of the Prakrit is this: when two 
consonants form a compound, the former must give 
way to the latter, by being assimilated to the same; 
thereby originates the only conjunction of consonants, 
which is suffered in Prakrit, the doubling of the 
same consonant. In the dental class this doubling of 
a consonant does not prevent it from passing over into 
the cerebral class; in the other vargas the transition 
of a so doubled consonant to another varga is rare, 
as the consonant gains more strength b}^ being doubled. 
The only example of such a transition to another varga 
is ^"^^ sarvagu, omniscient, Prak. 4^c|^, Sansk. 
^"^^5 where the doubled palatal has been changed into 
a double guttural CJ -= ^)i a transition, which is 
natural enough in a single consonant, but which is very 
seldom to be met with in a doubled consonant. >lM^I 
saghanu, to be able, Prak. ^^^TTT, Sansk. ^fJ^^fiT 



INTRODUCTION. XXXIII 

(Hindi ^«^^), and perhaps a few others, which may 
have escaped my notice. 

On the whole the Sindhi, as well as the kindred 
dialects, agrees with this ground -law of the Prakrit^), 
without making it an immutable rule of its proceedings : 
for it may also assimilate the following consonant to 
the preceding. In many instances the Sindhi is more , 
original, than the Prakrit, by preserving such like con- 
junctions of consonants, as are usual in Sanskrit. 

Examples of assimilation. 

^1^ suto, asleep, Prak. ^'^, Sansk. ^^; ^TR^ 
upano, created, Prak. '^'OJirjJT, Sansk. '^rR^ST? ^TFT bhatu, 
boiled rice, Prak. ^'^, Sansk. ^^ (Hindi ^Trf^? ^J W^' 
longing the preceding vowel); ^^ ladho, received, Prak. 
^5^, Sansk. ^^. But on the other hand: cR"^ kubo, 
hump -backed, Prak. 'H^t? Sansk. cR^, 

But an original compound consonant may also be 
preserved unaltered in Sindhi, as: ^©5 sabdu, word, 
Prak. ;^^, Sansk. "SJ^; ^"^5 mukto, free, Prak. '^'^, 
Sansk. H^. 

It depends however more or less on the option of 
the speaker, if he will pronounce a compound con- 
sonant as such, or separate the same by the insertion 
of a vowel, as: ^"©S sabdu, or ^f%H sabidu, the in- 
serted i being pronounced so rapidly, that it is scarcely 
perceptible. The Musalmans therefore, when writing with 
Arabic letters, never place the sign jazm {-^) above a con- 
sonant, destitute of a vowel, but always add the kasr, which 
is nearly equal to jazm, it being scarcely heard at all in 



1) It must be stated here, that according to the common method 
of writing the Sindhi, a double consonant is not expressed generally, 
but only in such instances, where two words, written else in the same 

way, are to be distinguished, as ^1 una, by him, and ^f unna, wool. 

Trumpp, Sindhi-Granimar. 3 



XXXIV INTRODUCTION. 

pronunciation. The next vowel, thus inserted, is usually i 
(kasr), but a or u may also be employed, according to 
euphony or the sequence of vowels, as: VJTJff bhagatu, 
a worshipper, Sansk. ^^; ^rfffT sagate, power, Sansk. 
?lf^ (Hindi ^^r^ £). 

§. 14. 
B) Assimilation of the nasals. 

a) A nasal, preceding a consonant, generally keeps 
its place as: '^ff antu, end, Sansk. ^'5Jf^ A preceding 
nasal may be dropped altogether, if the preceding vowel 
happen to be a long one, as: T^PR masu, flesh, Sansk. 
Hf^5 ^ift g^^o, a cart, Sansk. T{1^ (Hindi 1T^), 
the doubled consonant being cleared away in the latter 
instance by the prolongation of the preceding vowel. 

The compound •^ nm is severed by the insertion 
of a vowel, as: ^W^ janamu, birth, Sansk. ^•^. 

h) In a compound consonant the following nasal 
is assimilated to the preceding consonant, as: '^'PT age, 
fire, Prak. ^frrf, Sansk. ^pj; ^^Tt lago, applied, 
Prak. ^TTf, Sansk. ^^; ^'Tt bhago, broken, Sansk. 

The compound consonant however may also remain 
unaltered, or be taken asunder by the insertion of a vowel, 
as: ^]f^ ratnu or ^)R ratanu, jewel; WlTTTHf jujanu, wise, 
Prak. n^, Sansk. »^; ^XT«Tt supano, dream, Sansk. 

The nasal may also be pushed forward, to escape 
being assimilated: as: rtlT nango, naked, Prak. •T"T^ 
Sansk. ^^. 

On the reverse a following nasal may also as- 
similate a preceding consonant, as: ^^^ sa-ina, hint, 
Sansk. ^^; TTTSft rani, queen, Sansk. "^J^. The nasal 
may also assimilate a preceding consonant in such a wise, 



INTRODUCTION. XXXV 

that it draws the same over at the same time to its 
own varga. The only example of such an assimilation 
(if it be not to be explained in some other way) is the 
reflexive pronoun XfT^ pana, self, Prak. ^XnTJ, Sansk. 
^|f44|; in Hindi we have the form ^TJ , which has 
sprung from W^, instead of ^^ {= ^|rHT); compare 
on this head: Lassen §. 67. 

c) The nasals may assimilate a preceding or fol- 
lowing semi-vowel, as: XT^ft pum, virtuous, Prak. 
XJTrifT, Sansk. TRnf; H^ suno, empty, Prak. ^JTrTTT, 
Sansk. "StRJZf; ^^^ unna, wool, Sansk. "^^T^^; "^^TTTOT 
ca-umaso, the rainv season, Sansk. ^TT^TH, 

On the other hand notice Xf^J puro, full, Sansk. 
TlT[f; "^"^ curu, pulverized, Sansk. '^TJ) where the semi- 
vowel r has assimilated the nasal, r being stronger in 
sound, than n. 

^ mr in the Sanskrit ^^ amra, is changed in Sindhi 
to mb, as : ^f^ ambu, mangoe, Prak. ^15 (Hindi ^TT) ; but 
in the case of the Sindhi word TJ^T t^'^^o? copper, 
Sansk. ffj^, Prak. rf^ (Hindi rTT^T o^ fTTWf) the semi- 
vow^el r has been pushed forward to t = t, as r may 
easily hold its place in conjunction with a dental or 
cerebral. 

^ mb is assimilated to mm, as : irTTT nimu (= nimmu) 
a lime-tree, Sansk. m'^; ^ ml is taken asunder, after 
the analogy of the Prakrit, as: fil^Tjr milanu, to be 
obtained, Prak. 'ftf^'RlJ? Sansk. %, Hindi likewise 

§. 15. 

C) Assimilation of the semi -vowels. 

a) The semi-vowel '^ y. 

a) If the semi- vowel "^ happen to be joined to a 
preceding consonant, it is assimilated to the same, as: 

3* 



XXXVI INTRODUCTION. 

^IT jogu, fit, Prak. ^TTf, Sansk. "^TTJ, Hindi ^TJ ; 
m^ vagku, a tiger, Sansk. ^Tlf: cf??T va-isu, a Yai- 
shy a, Sansk. ^3f^Z[ (Hindi '^^). It may, however, also 
hold its place , as : «fTW vakyu , a sentence , Sansk. cff^ 
though this is very rarely the case. 

P) ^, when compounded with a preceding ^, is 
elided, as: Hft turi, a small trumpet, Prak. fT^? Sansk. 
fT§; V^^ dhira, firmness, Prak. \|^^, Sansk. \f§; ^^ 
aru, sense of honor, Sansk. ^If, Hindi ^ft^". But 
'^ may also be preserved b}^ being changed to ^, as: 
ifim' dhirju, the same as: ^\jj^ ??"k5I suriju, the sun, 

Prak. ^T or ^^ft? Sansk. ^fZf; ^"^^ acurju, wonder- 
ed ^ -^ C^ ^ v» n9 

ful, Prak. ^"^ISrR^j Sansk. ^^^. 

Y) '^ joined to a preceding dental is either simply 
dropped, as: j7\J\ nitu, always, Prak. f^^, Sansk. mHI; 
^n"%H aclitu, the sun, Sansk. ^JTreHT, or it may also, 
though rarely, be preserved, as: ^^ift mathya, falsely, 
Prak. frr^T? Sansk. fi^^AjT. But the more usual way 
is that "^j being first assimilated to a preceding dental, 
draws the same over to its own (i. e. palatal) class, so 
that r^ is changed to W, "SZJ to "^j ^ to "^il and ^ 
to 515^ (for which double consonants, as remarked al- 
ready, the simple bases are only written in Sindhi); e. g. 
f^^Tvija, science (^ = '^), Prak. "^^TTj Sansk. f^- 
W-) W^ aju, to-day, Sansk. ^Rf (Hindi ^T^); ^T^ 
khaju, food, Sansk. 1^"^; TT15, manjhu, the midst, 
Prak. TI^rCT, Sansk. lP[Uf: "^IJTtl bajhanu, to be bound, 
Sansk. "^XZT ; "^T^y vajho , a Hindu schoolmaster , Sansk. 
^XTPITT'^; ^T liaca, murder, Sansk. ^^HTT. 

B) ^ joined to a preceding ^ is changed to IJ^ jh, 
as: Tf^ g^jliOj concealed, Prak. TTtCT^STT? Sansk. T^Rt. 

s) ^ is assimilated to a preceding ^, but final ^, 
instead of being doubled in consequence thereof, is 



INTRODUCTION. XXXVII 

aspirated, e. g. cfi^ kalha, yerterclay, Prak. cR^, Sansk. 
chtt4 (Hindi ^5^); H^ mulliu, price, Sansk. ^7^; in 
the midst of a word '^ is simply assimilated to ^ (the 
doubling not being expressed in Sindhi), as : "^^^T palangu, 
a bedstead, Sansk. Xfq^ (r being exchanged for 1); XJ- 
^Tff palanu, a pack-saddle, Prak. Xf^^JTJT, Sansk. Xf^EffTJJ, 

1)) The semi- vow el T, r. 
a) T. is assimilated to a p>re ceding or follo^ying 
consonant, as: ^PT ^E^^ "^^^ front, Prak. ^JTrff, Sansk. 
^^^ 'T^^ g^yai'l? name of a Eagini, Sansk. ^T^^tQ'? ^- 
ITTTJ gajann, to thunder, Sansk. Tl^{^ (but Hindi T^^- 
^T); ^PT kamu {= kammu), business, Pralc ^i^, Sansk. 
^5^;^ (Hindi ^^) ; ^^ mundhi, head, Sansk. TT^^; 
IRTI sapu, snake, Sansk. ^If; THm sigho, quick, Sansk. 
^Sff^ (Hindi "S^t^); "^^fit caki, a mill, Sansk. ■^^; 
nibhagu, misfortune, Sansk. f^^jrf^ 

On the other hand \, preceding or following a con- 
sonant, may just as easily hold its place, without being 
assimilated, as: ^"^ carco, silly talk, Sansk. '^^; tf^ 
pri, friend, Sansk. iv(H\ T{^ parbhu, a festival, Sansk. 
Xf"^ ( of = -q , and ^ aspirated by the influence of X) ; 
rf^ garbu, pride, Sansk. Tycj; "Sra sukiai, Friday, Sansk. 
W^\l J^^ surgu, heaven, Sansk. WT? ^W dharmu, re- 
ligion, Prak. IfYT?, Sansk. ^ff{^ 

Yery frequently such a compound is again dissolved 
into its constituent parts by the insertion of a vowel, 
as: fxpO' piri, friend, or jf^ pri; fxf'fti^TrfW piribhate, 
break of day, Sansk. IWTfT; or r is transposed for euphony's 
sake, as: IfrTT^ partapu, splendour, Sansk. IfrlT'R; "Rrf 
partu, leaf (of a book), Sansk. "q^- "^^ drigho, long, 
Prak. f^XXI, Sansk. '^; flfi"^ kirte, trade, f^# kirtu, 



^^^ 



XXXVIII INTROD UCTION. 

action, Sansk. ^frT and ^ff; ^cfi traku, a spinning 
wheel, Sansk. rf^. 

It very rarely happens, that r is totally elided in 
a compound, as: GfTSr vaghu, tiger, Sansk. ^U^? TlfTT 

rate, night, Sansk. Jjf^ (Prak. "^C^ by ejection of a); 
Hr^ bhau, brother, Sansk. ^rTT. The ejection of r in 
these and such like examples is caused by the preceding 
long vowel, which precludes the possibility of assimilating 
the compound consonant, or by the consonant, with 
which r forms a conjunction, being initial. In such 
cases, as 1^"^, the Prakrit has preferred to drop the long 
vowel, in order to make room for assimilation. 

P) When compounded with a preceding dental, r 
is in most cases assimilated to the same in Prakrit, 
though it may also keep its place; in Sindhi on the 
other hand r is, when following a dental, mostly pre- 
served, and the assimilation takes place only in the dialect 
of Lar (Lower Sindh) , whereas in the dialect of the Upper 
country (Siro) the original compound is preserved, the den- 
tal only being commonly changed to a cerebral (or even 
to an aspirated cerebral, by the influence of r); e. g. TfZ 

putru, son, Prak. Xf^, Sansk. Tf^ (in Lar: TfT puttu, 

according to the analogy of the Prakrit); fr^Z mitru, 

friend, Prak. fiT^? Sansk. jij^ (in Lar: J^Z mittu); 

'^^ candru, the moon, Prak. "^^^j Sansk. '^^'^ ^^ 

khetru, a field, Sansk. '?^; Tf^ mantru (or with tran- 

siton to the media) 1^^ mandru, an incantation, Sansk. 

T{^; ^ tre, three, Sansk. J^; 5^ dadhru, or 5^ da- 

dhu, a cutaneous disease, Sansk. F"^; ^XfTTT dhrapanu, 

to be satiated, Sansk rT'R^ (by transition of the tenuis 
into the media). In those adverbs , which are compounded 
with the adverbial affix ^, ^ is, after the precedent 



of the Prakrit, changed in Sindhi to ^, as: f^Tq kithe, 
where; f^^ jithe, in ^yhich place; fTT^ tithe, in that 
place etc. 

E, when preceding a dental, may likewise be as- 
similated to the same, as: ^fTT^T katanu, to spin, Sansk. 
of)'^«-f; ^TTT katara, scissors, Sansk. cfJ^rCt? «ff? ^^^te, 
a wig, Sansk. oTf^^T; ^f khada, a jDit, Prak. T|f^ 
Sansk. rffl". On the other hand the compound may also 
be retainedunaltered, as: ^^TT ardhangu, palsej, Sansk. 
^VT'^; ^nt arthu, object, Sansk. ^^; fft^ tirthu, 
a holy bathing-place, Sansk. fft^; or the compound may 
again be dissolved by the insertion of a A'owel, as: ^^fw 
mtirate, image, Sansk. TTTTT^ ^TlrT kirate, glory, Sansk. 
^lf#, Prak. f%f%; rf% tirathu = rfl^. 

Y) ^ rv is either assimilated , as : ^i^ sabhu , all, 
Sansk. ^of, Hindi ^^^ (the aspiration of b being caused 
in Sindhi by the influence of elided r); or the compound 
may be retained unaltered, as, ^TST^PTm sarvasagate, 
omnipotent; or the compound may be dissolved again 
by the insertion of a vowel, as: m^ purabu, the east, 
Sansk. XToT, 

B) In the compound ^ sr the semi -vowel r may 
either be assimilated, as, ^^^ suo, heard, Prak. ^^ 
(= ?7rTT)? Sansk. ^^] ^^ sasu, mother-in-law, Sansk. 
^^; or, the compound may be retained, as: "^l" sri, 
prosperity; or more commonly, the compound is dis- 
solved by the insertion of a vowel, as f^TTiy siradhu, 
funeral obsequies, Sansk. "^J^ (Plindi ^^). The San- 
skrit ^^, tear, Prak. already ^fe (instead of ^^) 
has become in Hindi ^^; the Sindhi form is '^IT hanja 
or ^IJ^ hanjha (with initial euphonic h) , s being changed 
in this instance to ^ or 1^; Panjabi likewise anjhu. 

The same holds good with reference to the compound 



XL INTRODUCTION. 

^ sr, as: ^PT^^ sahasu, thousand, Prak. ^^W, Sansk. 

The compound ^ rs and ^ rs are assimilated in 
SindhT as well as in Prakrit, as: cf^"^ to rain, Sansk. 
'^^; "RTOt Paso, side, Sansk. XIJ^ (Hindi T(J^); ftp^ 
sisi, head and neck, Sansk. "^If (Hindi H^H); o^ "they 
are preserved (of course with transition of "^ and "^ to 
^), as: ^l^;3[ darsanu, interview, Sansk. '^'^^; rT^^ 
tarsanu, to wait, Sansk. fT'EfTU; the compound "Bf rs may 
also be dissolved into Tff, and this again into Ti^, as: 
^^^ sarah5, happy, Sansk. ^^"^ (compare §.11, end). 

c) The semi-vowel -^ 1. 

a) ^ forming a compound with another consonant 
at the beginning of a word, is severed from the same 
by the insertion of a vowel, as: HU^ saraha, praise, 
Prak. ^I^JTITj Sansk. "^tfr (r = 1 in Sindhi); fl|t^n 
Idlesu, fatigue, Sansk. ^7^ (Hindi ^^H); H^^^cR sa- 
loku, a Sloka, Sansk. "^^cfi, 

p) In the midst of a word ^ is assimilated to any 

consonant, save ^, T. and '^, as: "^^"^ bakaru, vegetables, 

Prak "Sf^^, Sansk. cf^^; or it is severed again from 

the compound by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^cR, hot 

... ^ 

wind, Prak. '^^, Sansk. "^"^T? ^^^^ initial vowel u 

being thrown back to serve in place of an inserted 

vowel. 

d) The semi-vowel '^ v. 

a) «f, joined to a preceding consonant at the be- 
ginning of a word, is either dissolved into u, as: mj 

surgu, heaven, Sansk. ^f^TT; ^^j^ duaru, door, Prak. 
^^Xt^ Sansk. fR; ^W^ ^uau, taste, Sansk. ^fT?[; 
or it is totally elided (i. e. assimilated to the preceding 
consonant) as: IT^^ Jalanu, to burn, Sansk. ^^?f; 
^rj sargu (besides Wj), heaven, Sansk. ^^; ^T^ sai, 



INTRODUCTION. XLI 

lord, or ^J^\ sami, Prak. ^T'fil? Sansk. ^^f5=(^; ^- 

F^ sahuro, father-in-law, Sansk. "Jg^UT,; ^?! sasu, mother- 
in-law, Sansk. ^^^ cf v may also be severed from the 
compound by the insertion of a vowel (a or u), as: 
^"^15 savadu, taste, flavour (besides ^^^), Sansk. ^T^; 
^^T^ duvaru, door (besides "^W^)- "^ very rarely as- 
similates a preceding consonant, as: "^ ba, two, Sansk. 
"l" (r=: vva = bba = b). 

p) "^ V being joined to a preceding consonant in 
the midst of a word, is assimilated to the same, as: 
X(^ pako {= pakko) cooked, Prak. flf^, Sansk. Xf^; 
'RH satu, strength, Prak. ^"W, Sansk. ^?^. 

In the abstract affix r^, ^«7, the dental on the \ 
other hand is assimilated to the semi -vowel '^, which 
latter is first changed to the labial "^j and then to 
the corresponding tenuis '^, so that we have in Sindhi 
the forms If pa, T^ po, XfUf panu or TJI^t P^i>o, as: 
"^Xr^If banhapa, '^T'^'^t banhapo etc., slavery, from 
"^P^ banho, a slave. 

The regular form of assimilation however is also in 
use, but only in a few examples; f^ is in this way as- 
similated to "W tt = 5 tt^7 ^^^ ^^^ double consonant 
again cleared away by the prolongation of the preceding 
vowel, as: ^f^lj^ chokiratu, time of youth, from ^- 
^"^ chokaru, a boy. 

The semi -vowel may also be dissolved into u, as: 
Xf^^ITO'^ paramesuru , supreme lord = Grod , Prak. already 
Xf^'^^^, Sansk. XRJFf^^^; or it may be retained, as: FJ- 
i^^l^^ danesvari, liberal, besides: ^J^^^^^ danesuri. 

§. 16. 
D) Assimilation of the sibilants. 

a) The palatal sibilant ^ s. 

a) ^ s, when preceded by "^ c and ^ ch, is as- 
similated to them, as: ^"^^ acurju, wonderful, Prak. 



XLII INTRODUCTIOiN. 

W^fr.^? Sansk. ^^iz| (long a being shortened in 
Prakrit and Sindhi, and in compensation thereof the fol- 
lowing consonant doubled, to restore again the quantity 
of the syllable); ^f^'^'^^ sanicaru, Saturday, Sansk. "^OJ^- 
^l (Hindi B^^-^), 

P) The compound ^ cc (which how^ever is rendered 
in Sindhi, as all double consonants, by its simple base) 
arising from the assimilation of ''^, is, after the analogy 
of the Prakrit, frequently aspirated in Sindhi, on 
account of the inherent tendency of the sibilant towards 
aspiration (^ z:^ ^), as: T^^ vichu, scorpion, Prak. 
f^^Sf^t? Sansk. o|f^cR: TTSrTT^j pachutau, repentance, 
Sansk. M^l rJI'R, final M being changed (by b ^= v) in 
Sindhi to u. 

7) ^ followed by ^, assimilates the same, as: ^^ 
rasi (= rassi), a rope, Prak. Jjf^, Sansk. '^f^TT, but not 
necessarily; for: cfi^^ft^ kasmiru, Kashmir. 

h) The cerebral sibilant "^ s. 

a) The compound '^'^ sk (of "^T^ I have hitherto not 
met any instances) is assimilated in Sindhi to ^ (^= "^), 
and not to '^^ kkh, as in Prakrit; e. g. ?^T^ dukalu, 
famine, Sansk. 'F'B^f^; f^^^ft nikami, useless, Sansk. 
f^bch4^; ^^ suko, dry, Sansk. ^"^ (Hindi, as in 
Prakrit, ;^T). 

p) The compounds ? st and "? sth, are assimilated 
in Sindhi to tth, as: f^^ dith5, seen, Prak. f^^, Sansk. 
1^; ^7 gothu, a village, Prak. rff^, Sansk. rf^^; 
f^^ nitharu, obstinate, Prak. f^^^, Sansk. 'PT^; 
frj^ mitho, sweet, Sansk. "ftf?^ 

The compound is also retained unaltered, as: 5'S' 

dustu, bad; but this is only done by Brahmans, who 
understand Sanskrit; the common people ignore it com- 
pletely. 



INTRODUCTION. XLIII 

The cerebral 7, which has sprung from "B" or ¥ by 
assimilation, may also pass into its corresponding media 
^ dh, and this again to ^ rh, e. g. ^^ k5rhu, leprosy, 
Sansk. ^"^ (the preceding vowel u having been length- 
ened in Sindhi to 5, to clear away the double consonant 
tth or ddh). 

Y) The compounds '^ sp, ^^ sph are assimilated 
to "^ in Sindhi, as: "^T"^ bapha, steam, Prak. cfX.T^, 
Sansk. ofT'^Xf (Hindi "^T"^, and even with aspiration of 

In compound Avords "^"R is simply assimilated to ^ 
p (= pp) as: X^XJTV niputro, without a son, Sansk. 

S) In the compounds "^^ sm and "^ sn, "^ is in 
Prakrit exchanged for h and placed after H and TJT 
respectively; in Sindhi the original compound may be 
preserved, as: fcfmr visnu, Prak. f^TTj?; f^^rj'^fF vi- 

snavahti, a worshipper of Vishnu; by the Musalmans 
however words of this kind are simply written ^^^, 
yhiyxl^ , Hindustani likewise ^^^ , as cerebral s is ignored 

by the common people. 

s) The compound '^ sy (and ^^ sv) is in Prakrit 
assimilated to W ss, but in Sindhi to ^ kh {= kkh) 
as: TOT^ sik^^j ^ disciple = Sikli, Sansk. 'BtT'EJI. 

c) The dental-sibilant ^ s. 

a) The compound '^ sk is assimilated in Prakrit 
to ^ kh, in Sindhi however to ^ k, as: ^TJ kandhu, 
shoulder, Prak. 'J^^ ('^^^)7 Sansk. "^i^ (Hindi ^If). 

P) The compounds "^ st and ^ sth are assimilated 
to ^ {= tth) and T^ ts to ^ ch (= cch), as: ^S? thaiiu, 
woman's milk, Sansk. '^^TH; f^I^t ^^'•-io? become, Sansk. 
f^rf; ^H thambhu , "post (Prakrit on the other hand 



XLIV INTRODUCTION. 

1^7^), Sansk. T^^T^; cf^ vathu, thing, Sansk. cm[; 
^ig hathu, hand, Prak. ^r^, Sansk ^"^ (Hindi ^T^); 
"SfTTJIT thano, place, Sansk. ^TH^ ^^ atha, is, Prak. 
^jfF5J, Sansk. ^f^; offs^ vache, a buffalo calf, Prak. 
^-^^ Sansk. "^i^. 

The compound "^ st however may also, instead of 
being assimilated, be dissolved into its constituent parts 
by the insertion of a vowel, and when the compound 
happens to be initial, by prefixing a vowel, as: ^^- 
fj{ astute, praise, Prak. TJ^, Sansk. ^frt; ^jf^gT^ istiri, 
woman, Sansk. ^^, "~' 

7) "W sp is assimilated to '^ {= pp), ^5 sph to 
"^ (= pph), '^ ps to "^ {= pp) respectively as: XU^TTT 
phutanu, to be broken, Sansk. "^7; TJI^nT phurti, 
activity, Sansk. ^^f%; ^If^ ^^P^j ^ ^i^^ of coarse wheaten 
flour, Sansk. "^rf^cJiX; but "^ may also remain un- 
assimilated, as: c^"^^^ 

In compound words ^ sp may be preserved , as : f^- 
^Cffrf, vispate, Thursday, Sansk. c|^44*|f^; or the com- 
pound, esjaecially at the beginning of a word, .may be 
dissolved into its constituent parts , as : 'RT'W parasu , the 
philosopher's stone, Sansk. ^^ (^1^)5 Hindi Hkewise 

h) The compound "^ sn, when beginning a word, is 
either dissolved into its consistuent parts by the insertion 
of a vowel, as: ^^T^ sananu, bathing, Sansk. "^T^; 
^^^ saneho, a message of love, Sansk. '^^; or the 
preceding ^ is cast off altogether, as: ^fe nihu, love, 
Sansk. %^ (Hindi ^^), Prak. also %^; ^^ nuhu, 
daughter-in-law, Prak. T^t^^? Sansk. "^^J. 

e) The compound "^ sm is assimilated to ^ s (== ss) 
as: f^^T^ visai, stupor, Sansk. '^'^^; or dissolved 
again by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^^TTTF sumaranu, 
to remember, Sansk. '^; fsf^PT"^ visamanu, to be 



INTKODUCTION. XLV 



or s 



stunned, Sansk. f^f^ (fcfl^^H, Prak. f^*^^^) ; 
is changed to h and placed after TJ (similarly to '^^), | 
as Prakrit T^ = "^^ in the pronominal forms H^fS 
^T^T (cf. Lassen p. 331, 4; p. 329, 5), In Sindhi the 
Tf of the conjunct '1^ is also changed to v, as ffo^ tavhi, 
you, instead of rTT«^ tumhi. 

^) The compound ^ sy is assimilated to ^ s (=: ss) 
and thence farther to ^ h, as: TifS niuhi, rfyF tuhietc, 
which must have sprung from an original form *i^, j 7 
rT^ etc., Prak. already ^5, TT^ (thence also the other 
Prakrit forms TTtJJ^ ^:^ := ^^^ ^ =- T^^^ ^); V 
irtf^ tahe, of that (nom. sing. ^ so) Prak. rTW 
Sansk. W^. 

d) The compound "^ ks. 
This compound letter is assimilated in Sindhi: 

a) To 1^ Idi (= kkh), as: ^rf^ akhe, eye, Sansk. 
^f^; ^^ khiru, milk, Sansk. '^i;; ^T^ kharo, 
brackish, Sansk. J^JX} 1^ khetu, field, Sansk. W^'^ 
f^T^T khima, patience, Sansk. "^TTT; ^ k^ii, wellfare, 
Sansk. '^TJ; T!^^ rakhanu, to keep, Sansk. T!^^; ^t~ 
"& khande, patience, Sansk. I^TPfT. 

AU these instances are against Prakrit usage, ac- 
cording to which "J^ ought to have been assimilated to 
^ ch, though ^ is also admissible in Prakrit, and 
prove distinctly, that the Sindhi has followed its own 
course, independently of the Prakrit. 

P) ^ is also assimilated to ^ ch, after the pre- 
cedent of the Prakrit, as: 'ft^ richu, a bear, Sansk. 
^^'i Sfl* churl, a knife, Sansk. TS'^'i f^^TTT chinanu, 
to pluck, Sansk. f^Tff ; ^5r^[I!r lachanu, sign, Sansk. ^- 
"H^ but ^X^"^ lakhanu is also in use in Sindhi. 

According to Prakrit rule every consonant (the nasal 
n excepted), which is joined to ^, must be dropped; 



XLVI INTRODUCTION. 

but the Sindhi so far deviates from the Prakrit , that it 
separates any such consonant by the insertion of a -vowel, 
as: Prak. ^^^g^, but Sindhi ^f^Tft lachimi, the wife 
of Yishnu, Hindi likewise ^^[^, Sansk. ^"g^. On 
the other hand the Sindhi assimilates the nasal in the 
compound "^tTJ ksn to 1^ (kh = ks), whereas the Prakrit 
changes the same to TT]^, as: Sindhi frT^i^ tikho (=:tikkho), 
quick, Prak. frf"^i|, Sansk. rH'^. 

A change of ^ kh (= ks) to the spiritus ^ h is 
found in Hindi, after the analogy of the Prakrit, as: 
Hindi ^FTT^tlT rigkt (opposed to left), instead of the 
more common HT^l^'^L ^^^ ^^^ ^^ Sindhi, which simply 
clears away the doubling of the letter in Prakrit by the 
prolongation of the preceding vowel, as: ^if^^t^t 4^" 
khino, right, southerm. 

§. 17. 
F) The spiritus ^ h. 

The spiritus ^ cannot be assimilated to any other 
consonant. If therefore ^ be joined to any other con- 
sonant, the compound is again separated into its com- 
ponent parts in the following way: 

a) In the compounds S 1^5 ^ ^^j ^ is put after 
the nasal, a euphonic transposition, which is already 
common in Prakrit, as: "^f^ bahe, fire (instead of "^f^ 
bahe), Prak. o(Tr^, Sansk. «rfe; V^^ cinhu, mark, 
Sansk. fxjri; the hardened Prak. form f^^ or ^^ 
is not used in Sindhi. 

The compound 'S (instead of ^ hm) is in Sindhi, on 
account of the preponderance of the labial, already ex- 
changed for T^ mbh, as: "^^TfT bambhanu, a Brahman, 
Prak. "^Tf^, Sansk. ^l^ITrr. 

h) ^ hy is assimilated to ^ jh (by transposition: 
hy = yh = jh), as: ^TfCT g^j^^, concealed, Prak. XT- 
t3JT^, Sansk. g^^. 



INTRODUCTION. XLVII 

c) 5 hv i^ assimilated to H in Sindhi (hv =: vh = bh), 
whereas in Prakrit the following semi -vowel is simply 
elided, as: f^^jibha, tongue, Prak. ^^, Sansk. f^^J, 
(Hindi ^'t^). 

§. 18. 

E) Assimilation of three conjunct consonants. 

In Sindhi, as well as in Prakrit, a compound, con- 
sisting of three consonants, can only then be tolerated, 
if the first consonant happen to be a nasal: as: ^5 
candru, moon, ^f? mantru, incantation. ^ 

As regards the assimilation of three conjunct con- 
sonants the preceding rules come into operation. If no 
assimilation takes place, the one or the other of the 
consonants thus joined together, is severed from the rest 
by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^T'TOT'O' sastiri, a Shastri, 
learned in the Shastras (a usual title of a Brahman), 
from the Sansk. ^Mt!5l. In reference to the assimilation 
itself the following rules are to be observed. 

a) If one of the consonants happen to be a semi- 
vowel, it is dropped, and the assimilation of the re- 
maining two consonants is effected according to the usual 
method, as: TtTJ^ marathi, a Marathi man (or. adj.), 
Sansk. TT^TO'5' ^P"'^t ^EJ^i ^^® foremost, Sansk. ^p^f; 
XrP§^ paso, side, Prak. XfJ^, Sansk. XfT^. 

The semi -vowel '^ alone, when preceded by a 
dental, forms an exception to this rule, this compound 
being changed to the corresponding palatal (see §. 15, y), 
as: ^^ sanjho, evening, Prak. ^^IJJ, Sansk. ^R^^. 

h) When of three conjunct consonants the two 
former or the two latter can be assimilated, preference 
is given to the stronger assimilation, as: TT3t. machu, 
fish, Prak. '5R['^^^, Sansk. JJf^; in this instance M ts 
is assimilated to ^ (cch), the assimilation of it being 
stronger than that of ^ to '^. 



XLVIII INTRODUCTION. 

§. 19. 
G) Elision of a double consonant. 

The doubling of a consonant renders the same so 
much stronger, that even a long vowel, preceding it, 
must give way and is weakened to its corresponding 
short one. On the other hand a double consonant, as 
noticed already, may again be rendered simple; but in 
this case the preceding vowel, to make up for the 
quantity of the syllable, must be prolonged, as: ^xfW 
rate, night, Prak. ^"^j Sansk. "^f^; cJ5^ kamu (= kam- 
mu), business, Prak. cf^Tl^, Hindi on the other hand 

It is quite against the genius of the language, to 
elide totally a double consonant; notwithstanding this 
some few examples of this kind are to be met with in 
Sindhi, as: 5^H duare, illness, 5W^5 ^^j- duari, ill, 

Prak. 'S'5^: Sansk. H"^^; ftl^t ^i^? friend (cor- 
roborated already by the Prakrit, which however pre- 
serves also the original from 'fil'^). In these and such 
like examples the process cannot have been such, that 
a double consonant is elided at once, but it must first 
have been reduced to its simple base by the prolon- 
gation of the preceding vowel, as: iftm i^i^o, instead, 
of fiT'^; from this base has sprung again, according 
to the usual laws of elision, the form iflf^^ mio, in 
which, against the ordinary process, long i has been 
shortened to i, fi?^^. 

In the forms ^^ffft ^^^ ^^ff'^j original double b 
must have been changed to vv (both letters, b and v, 
being already identical in Prakrit) previous to its elision; 
but it is quite an extraordinary phenomenon, that the 
following vowel has been lengthened instead of the 
preceding one. 



INTRODUCTION. XLIX 

Far more easily may one of the compound con- 
sonants be elided, when preceded by a long vowel, which 
renders the assimilation impossible, especially if one of 
the compound consonants be a semi-vowel, as: "^"^ 
vaghu, a tiger, Sansk. «m'5T; TJ'^ rani, queen, Sansk. 
^^J3^. Thus even two semi-vowels may disappear, as: 
X(J^ paso, side, Sansk. tjj^, 

§. 20. 
H) A double consonant at the beginning of a word. 

A compound consonant at the beginning of a word 
is subject to the same laws of assimilation, as in the 
midst (or end) of a word. But as a double consonant 
would not be utterable at the beginning of a word, one 
of the assimilated, i. e. doubled consonants is simply 
cast off, so that only the simple base of the con- 
sonant remains, as: q^«5(y jalanu, to burn, instead of: 
^^m jjalanu, Sansk. ^^;?T: "^ITT vaghu, tiger, instead, 
of ^"m vvaghu; cRlJ kandhu, shoulder, instead of ^U 
kkandhu. But if a word be compounded, the common 
laws of assimilation are applied (to the second), as: 
^4'^ dubalu, weak, Prak. H«4'<^. 

Those compounds, which are not susceptible of 
assimilation, are dissolved into their component parts 
by the insertion of a vowel, as: fch^ff kilesu, weariness, 
Prak. |cD^^, Sansk. ^>^; s;q^;[g sumaranu, to re- 
member, Prak. ^TT^, Sansk. "^^ ("51); or the first 
letter of the compound is cast off, which is particularly 
the case, if this happen to be a sibilant, as: iffe 
nihu, love, Prak. ^TJI^ saneha, Sansk. '^^; but if the 
sibilant be followed by a semi-vowel, the latter, as 
the weaker, is dropped, as: ^T? sahu, breath, Sansk. 

Trump p, Sindhi-Grammar. 4: 



L INTRODUCTION. 

^51^; ^T<^ s^l^? wife's brother, Prak. ^PfT^t ^^^^? 
Sansk. Tm^. 

^ tr and ^ dr, which in Sindhi are commonly 
changed to the corresponding cerebrals, keep their place 
as well at the beginning as in the midst (or end) of a 
word, as: 7 tre, three; 3T^ drakha, grape, but Hindi 
^|I5, Sansk. ^T^T. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 



§• 1- 

Up to the present time various alphabets have been 
in use in Sindh, the Muhammadan portion of the com- 
munity using the Arabic characters, loaded vnth. many 
dots, to express the sounds peculiar to the Sindhi, and 
the Hindu population employing different alphabets of 
their own, which vary very much, according to the lo- 
cality, in which they are used, though all of them are 
originally derived from an old Sanskrit alphabet. These 
latter alphabets, which are known in Sindh by the 
name of the Banya characters, are utterly unfit for 
literary purposes, as they have become greatly mutilated 
in the course of time and are very deficient in the vowel 
and consonant system, so that the Hindu merchants 
themselves, after a lapse of time, are hardly able to re- 
produce with accuracy what they have entered in their 
ledgers. iSIo alphabet suits the Sindhi better, than the 
Sanskrit alphabet, the Sindhi being a genuine daughter 
of Sanskrit and Prakrit. But appropriate as the Sanskrit 
characters are to the Sindhi sounds, they will under the 
present state of society in Sindh be hardly in their right 
place, religious prejudices preventing the great majority 
of the population from using them in their writings. 
Sindh has been the first Indian country, which has suc- 
cumbed to the fury of the Moslim invaders, and Hin- 
duism and the culture of Sanskrit literature has been 

Trumpp, Sindhi- G-rainmar. A 



2 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

SO completely swept away from its borders, that it is 
now, as has been stated, "a country without castes and 
Brahmins." 

The Muhammadans of Sindh, as soon as they tried 
to employ their native idiom for literary purposes, de- 
tected, that the Arabic system, which had been forced 
upon them as a necessary consequence of the Islam, was 
deficient in many sounds, and they endeavoured to make 
up for this deficiency by dotting the nearest corresponding- 
Arabic letters. The manner, in which they have done 
this, has not been very satisfactory. They were not led 
by any system and therefore the emendation, they at- 
tempted at, stopped half-way. 

In the guttural class the Arabic base \S (k) was 
indiscriminately used to express the sounds k, kh; g, 
gh, g; the aspiration (kh, gh) was left unnoticed, and 
for the media g not even the corresponding Persian 
letter {S^ was supplied; the guttural n was expressed 
by the compound (Xj (nk). 

In the palatal class the aspirate ch was happily distin- 
guished by an additional dot (= ^) , and jh marked like- 
wise _. ; also the peculiar Sindhi J (dy) was not forgotten 
and marked by _. ; the palatal n (ny) was again expressed 
by the compound J>, so that in this class all sounds 
were provided with distinguishing marks. 

In the cerebral class, which is completely wanting 
in the Arabic system, the bases of the dentals were 
retained and the dots distributed in such a way, as 
to distinguish them from the corresponding dentals, 
viz. : (^=t; cj = th;j=d,t> = dh,(3 = d, a method, 
which is not without ingenuity; but the cerebral r and 
the cerebral n were again completely forgotten (i. e. they 
were expressed by the corresponding dentals s r and 
^ n) and left to the knowledge of the reader. 

The dental class did not offer many difficulties; 
only the aspirates had to be provided with diacritical 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 3 

marks, which was done in the following way: ^ = th, 
o = dh. 

The same was the case with the labial class, where 
the aspirates only were to be pointed ont by peculiar 
marks; but here their skill seems to have left them. 
In order to express ph, refuge was taken to the pe- 
culiar Arabic and Persian letter o (f), which was pro- 
vided with two additional dots = o, bh having been 
expressed already by ^j; the peculiar Sindhi b was 
dexterously rendered by ^. 

The Sindhis had in this undertaking apparently the 
Sanskrit alphabet before their eyes, where the aspi- 
rates are written and treated as one sound. Ac- 
cordingly they tried to express the aspiration of a letter 
by additional dots, which overloaded the few Arabic 
bases with diacritical signs. 

The necessity further, to provide marks for the 
cerebral class, compelled them, to distribute afresh the 
dots for the dental aspirates, so that the eye finds only 
with difficulty a resting-place in the confuse mass and 
position of diacritical marks, as: Oj = t, o = t; 
td? = th; ^ = th. 

This attempt to adapt the Arabic characters to the 
sounds of a Prakrit language is very interesting, though 
the method applied has followed a wrong track and has 
not been extended to all the sounds of the language. 
The way, in which this has been done in Hindustani, 
is far more correct, in fact, the only course, which can 
be taken in adapting the Arabic letters to an Indian 
language. The Arabic system knows no aspirates, 
and consequently the aspiration must' be expressed by 
an additional ^s^ h, if the original character of the 
Arabic alphabet is to be preserved in any way; else a 
quodlibet will be made out of it, which may be de- 
signated by any name but Arabic. 

It was therefore soon found, when European scho- 
lars began to pay attention to the Sindhi, that the 

A2 



4 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

common Sinclhi characters would not do for scientific 
purposes. ISTew characters were in consequence com- 
posed by a Bombay civilian and unfortunately introduced 
into the government schools of Sindh, without being 
first submitted to the examination of competent scholars. 

This new system, instead of striking at the root of 
the previous confusion, merely endeavoured to make up 
some deficiencies of the old, while retaining all its errors, 
so that it cannot even boast of the compactness of the 
old system. 

The alterations and emendations were the following: 

In the guttural class, where the old system wa& 
most deficient, as we have seen, the Persian letter S g 
has been justly taken in, and from the Hindustani, the 
aspirate ^ gh, of which we fully approve. We should 
now reasonably expect to find the compound j^ kh 
corresponding to j^ gh; but to our utter surprise we 
find the old error repeated, and 'kh' again rendered by 
the simple base j" k. So it has happened , that all the 
prints published in this character are disfigured by 
the letter .^, which is now used throughout as the 
simple base for k, whereas it is well known, that ^=> 
is only used at the beginning of a word, when connected 
with a following letter and in the midst of a word only, 
when unconnected with the preceding and connected with 
the following letter, and that it is in no way differing, 
as regards its pronunciation, from kS\ as a final letter 
the shape of ^=> has never been seen before. 

The guttural n, which in the old system was con- 
sequently rendered by lXj (nk), has been expressed in 
the new system by S^ which is quite inappropriate; 
for the base is not 'g', but 'n', pronounced with the 
guttural organ, and in the Arabic consonantal system 
it can only be rendered by a compound letter (e^ ng). 
The peculiar Sindhi g is marked S\ we have only to 
point out the inapplicability of two dots beneath J^ 
and the frequent confusions, to which it will give rise. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 5 

In the palatal class we meet with the same in- 
consequence; the aspirate ch has been taken over from 
the old system (^ ) , whereas for jh the Hindustani com- 
pound ^^s^ has been borrowed. In the other letters of 
this class only the dots have been differently distributed; 
j (in the old system marked S) has been expressed by 
_. , and the palatal n by -^ , which is less to the point 
than the old J>, which was as correct as it could be 
rendered. 

In the cerebral class only the dots have been dif- 
ferently arranged as: t = o (old system (^5), th = ;!? 
(old system o); d = l> (old system the same), dh =: ^> 
(old system the same), d = S (old system 0); the ce- 
rebral r, which had not been marked at all in the old 
system, has been borrowed from the Hindiistani (••), and 
the cerebral 'n' is marked by the antiquated method of 
placing a h above it {^), which is highly inconvenient 
in writing, and has therefore been justly discarded in 
Hindiistani, where formerly the cerebrals used to be 
marked by the same letter. 

In the dental class the old system has been re- 
tained unaltered. 

In the labial class the base o was retained for ph, 
with additional dots (= o; old system o); bh was 
rendered by o, as in the old system. 

We fully allow, that the old SindhT system of writing 
did not answer its purposes, quite abstracted from its 
deficiency; but instead of emendating the old system by 
a different distribution of dots and inserting a few Hin- 
dustani letters, we consider it far more advisable, to 
adopt the whole Hindustani consonantal system, 
and to mark those sounds, which are peculiar to the 
Sindhi, by convenient dots. 

The Sindhi language is restricted to the com- 
paratively small province of Sindh; we cannot there- 
fore see any reason, why the Hindustani alphabet, which 



6 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

is known throughout the length and breadth of India^ 
and which is a compact system in itself, should not be 
preferred to such a motley composition? 

The number of the Indian alphabets should not be 
augmented, but rather, wherever possible, be restricted, 
as they only serve as barriers to mutual intercourse. 
If therefore the old system of writing proves unfit for 
Hterary purposes, we consider it for the best, to sub- 
stitute one universally known, instead of emendating im- 
perfectly a local alphabet, which has no chance to spread 
beyond its narrow borders. 

As under the present circumstances it is not likely, 
that the Hindu portion of the community will adopt the 
Hindustani alphabet, owing to religious scruples on their 
side, we have chosen for them the Hindi characters, 
with some slight deviations from the system employed 
by Capt. Stack, which were imperatively necessary, and 
which will be noticed further on. We may say the 
same of the Hindi alphabet, what has been remarked 
on the Hindustani; it is well known throughout India, 
and the common vehicle of literature amongst the whole 
Hindu population. An emendation of the old Banya 
characters would have been far more useless, than that 
of the Arabic system current amongst the Moslims. 



I 



1 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 



;. 2. 



I. The Sindhi consonantal system. ^) 



SINDHI. 



Gutturals: 



^\^ 


S;^ 


.<i 


,» 




^; ^ 


T; ^ 


5: 


f 




k; kh 


g; gh 


n 


h 





Palatals: 





^;-«=- 

W; ^ 


i 


^ 
^ 


LT 
^ 


c; ch 


j; jii 


n 


y 


8 



Cerebrals: 



e?; ..^* 


0; .550 


U 


y^) 




7; 3 


?; ^ 


TTJ 


?; ? 




t; th 


d; dh 


n 


r; rh 





Linguals; 



Dentals ; 



g 



C 
^ 



0; ..^* 


i>; .s^c> 


eJ 


;; J 


U" 


W; ^ 


^; ^ 


jq 


^;^. 


^ 


t; th 


d; dh 


n 


r; 1 


s 



Labials: 



^'-f '■•6^. 


V' -^ 


r 


; 


. . . 


XT;!?! 


•^; H 


TT 


^ 




p; ph 


b; bh 


m 


V 





b 



ARABIC LETTERS. 

£ C t £ ^' 
' ^ X T q. 



t s S z 

CJ j \ (v Pers 

<i ^ Z (z) 



We subjoin here the common alphabetical order of 
the Arabic - Sindhi Alphabet: 



1) In the Komanized transcription we have followed tlie Standard 
Alphabet, by Prof Lepsius (2<^ edition). 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 



Un- 
connected. 



Final. 



Med. 



Initial. 



Name. 



c 
c 

t 

; 

; 
) 



^t-^ 



c 

e 

e 

J. 



V 

tX 

<X 

7 

> 



) 






:t5f- 



s?r 



&> 



r*t 



2li5i. 



•^ 


c 


^ 


B 


SFt 


Z 


JI3 


d 


»5 


d 


so 


4 


jiS 


S 


^; 


r 


"1 


r 


'^> 


z 


^) 


V 

z 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 



Un- 
connected. 


Final. 


Med. 


Initial. 


Name. 


Pronun- 
ciation, 


LT 


u^ 


MJ, 


JM 


(J^t^-^ 


S 


LT 


tr 


M. 


Mi 


ij^ 


s 


^ 


(ja 


xa 


^ 


jLo 


s 


Lf^ 


(jd 


^ 


^ 


4>ll3 


z 


h 


k 


k 


Jb 


1 


t 


ib 


k 


k 


h 




B 


£ 


6 


X 


^ 


^ 


\ 


£ 




X 


£ 


" 


T 


o 


(^ 


A 


i 


^, 


f 


(J 


(J- 


A 


'£ 


oL» 


q 


^ 


dl, ^ 


jC 


^ < 


oir 


k 


^ 


cX 


^ 


r 


oLT 


g 


^ 


^ 


f 


f 


oLJ* 


g 


J 


J< 


JL 


J 


r^' 


1 


r 


r 


^, ♦ 


X) 


r*^ 


m 


u 


c^ 


k 


j 


u^ 


n 


o 


L> 


X 


j 


iii 


n 


5 


^ 


y 


^ 


^'5 


V 


s 


-;5>, ^c 


■s:;4 


5^ 


'f* 


h 


c5 


^ 


-^ 


J 


*5f 


y 



10 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 



The (purely) Arabic letters are also used as nu- 
meral values, in recording (by brief sentences, in which 
the sum of all the letters must be added together) 
historical events. 



1 


1 


c 


8 


U^ 


60 


uy 


400 


L^ 


2 


h 


9 


e 


70 


^ 


500 


C 


3 


^ 


10 


o 


80 


t 


600 


O 


4 


d 


20 


u^ 


90 


3 


700 


» 


5 


J 


30 


o 


100 


LT^ 


800 


; 


6 


r 


40 


J 


200 


ib 


900 


) 


7 


u 


50 




300 


d 


1000 



This method of computation is called abjad, from 
the first four letters, which are pronounced as a group. 
The following technical groups are: 

.^b^, d^xj, v:>^y5, ijoAx^j ^J<-y, (<-%^j ^y^ 

The Arabs have borrowed this whole system from 
the Hebrews and have therefore also followed the order 
of the Hebrew alphabet; the first nine letters re- 
present the units 1 — 9 ; the nine following the tens, 
the nine following the hundreds and the last 6 a 
thousand. 

The order of the Hebrew alphabet goes only as 
far as (^ (400); from thence the Arabs have gone their 
own way, by using those letters, which are peculiar to 
their own language. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 11 

1) The G-utturals. 
The gutturals k, g are pronounced in the common 
manner; their aspirates, kh, gh, as all other aspirates, 
form, according to the Sanskrit system, one sound, 
and must therefore be pronounced by a strong breathing 
of the respective simple base. Peculiar to the Sindhi 
is the guttural h, which is throughout used as an in- 
dependent sound (like the engiish ng in "sing"), and 
never precedes the letters of its own varga or class, 
in which case Anusvara or simple n is employed (see 
Introduction §. 5). In the Hindi alphabet it is ex- 
pressed by ^, it being an original Sanskrit sound, but 
the Arabic system, which knows only one dental n (^), 
offers great difficulties in this as in other respects. In 
EDndustani an independent guttural n is not to be met 
with ; w^e have therefore been compelled to circumscribe 
it by the compound Jo ug, which comes nearest to it, 
following therein the track of the old Sindhi alphabet. 
But one difficulty still will remain, that the guttural 
simple n can thus not be distinguished from the guttural 

n preceding a letter of its own varga, as: cCif (^33*) anu, 
body, and Jo I (^FT, or more properly: W^) angu (ahgu) 

a limb. In the alphabet, now in use, an attempt has 
been made, as has been adverted to, to obviate this dif- 
ficulty (viz. : J^ = h) , but we cannot agree , that the 
problem has been solved satisfactorily, a false base having 
been chosen for the guttural nasal. Practically the dif- 
ficulty will be easily surmounted by any careful student, 
as there are only a few nouns in the language, in which 
simple guttural h is found. 

We subjoin here an alx3habetical list of all those 
words, in which the sim^ole (unconnected) guttural nasal 
is to be found: 

lXjI ra. ahu, body; 3;L6l ni. anar5, Tuesday. ^^(Xil 

£ anari, a disease of the gums etc. j^^L£>f m. aharyo, 



12 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

a bruise in the sole of the foot; l^j n. anaru, coal; 
S::S m. anuru, a finger's breadth. SjS f. anure, a finger; 
toe; 0.x j I m. ananu, courtyard; yJ^Syt^S m. anutho, the 
thumb; ^^^\ f. anuthi, a thumb-ring, y^l^ m. bhaho, 
share, and its derivatives, as: j.;cjL£jL4j adj. bhanaito, 
in shares; ^y^l^ m. bhanero, a sharer, jixix^j m. 
phehano, the orbicular excrement of camels {^}Xkx^^^ f. 

phehini, the orbicular excrement of sheep etc.). s* JoL:s. 
m. Jahuro, the wild Bern fruit; ;^>^JoLs^ f. januri, the 
wild Beru tree; j^i adj. cano, good, and its derivatives. 
^ljQ5&t> m. dhihai, a manufacturer of saltpetre; ^ulj^\i 
V. a. danoranu, to flog; j.xX!io adj. duhito, stout; ^>.)6<S 
f. duhiri, a stick to beat clothes with (in washing); 
yjS.kSi'S m. dhunino, name of a fish. <jCjT m. ranu, colour; 

^jXj> V. a. rananu, to dye, and its derivatives; j.^^ m. 
raho, a carpenter's chalk-string. ^LxjLl f. sahaha, or: 
j^\C^ f. sahaha, care, and its derivatives (as: jjc^LxiLL 

adj. sahahito, careful, ^;oIXjL^ adj. sahahti, ditto); jj^LxiLl 
V. n. sahahanu, to be careful. S.k^ m. sahu, connexion 
by marriage, and its derivatives; dik^ m. sihu, born, and 
its derivatives; ^SXj^^ f. sihari, name of a fish (or: 

^^JL.^ sihari); S.kZj m. saharu, the seed-pod of the thorn- 
tree; ^l^kL V. a. sahanu, to point out; lXUau f. siha, 
bow. i^jL? m. gaho, or ^t^^f f. gam, name of a fruit 
and shrub (Grewia betuloefolia). JCJ m. lahu, lameness 
{yts} adj. laho, lame); JCaJ m, lihu, limb; Jo.J £ liha, 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 13 

a trip in carrying; i^j m. lino, time, turn (besides: 

LXaJ f. lina, ditto). \Sx/i f. mana, a betrothed girl; Sj^a 

m. munu, a grain of mung; S.kA m. nianaru, fire; ySj.A 

m. muniro, a mallet (used by washermen); ^^^X;i y. a. 
mananu, to ask, to beg, and its derivatives; j^i^o adj. 

mono, having the colour of mung; ;ixo adj. & adv. 

nihuno, entirely, wholly. ^.Xjfj m. vaiianu, the ^.gg- 

plant, and its derivatives; JCaj© f. hihu, Assafoetida; 

^S-j^ ni. hihiro, name of a fruit of an aquatic plant. 

Another letter peculiar to the Sindhi is J^, 3J^ g; 
it is not found in Hindi or Hindustani, nor in any of 
the cognate dialects, and we have therefore been com- 
pelled to provide it with a mark of its own. After the 
precedent of the Pasto we have added a hook below the 
under parallel line, which marks off this letter strongly 
enough, without giving rise to any confusion or mis- 
conception. The pronunciation of g is quite peculiar; 
it is that of the letter g uttered with a certain stress 
in prolonging and somewhat strengthening the contact 
of the closed organ, as if one tried to double the sound 
in the beginning of a Avord, as gga. The pronunciation 
is so far quite in accordance with the origin of this and 
the other three letters, peculiar to the Sindhi, though 
they are now treated to all intents and purposes as 

simple letters; e. g. J^l agu, the front, Prak. ^FT, 

Sansk. ^W (compare Introduction §. 15, 6); j^ Is-go? 
applied, Prak. ^^^, Sansk. ^^ (see Introduction §. 14); 

j^^ bhago, broken, Prak. ^''T, Sansk. ^^. In other 
instances, where an original doubling of g cannot be 
proved etymologically, the use of this harsh g must be 
explained by the influence of the following letters, as: 

^^ gothu, a village, Prak. 'TK, Sansk. 'TT'3'; in this, 
as in similar cases, the weio-ht of the double tth, which 



14 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

in Sindlii has been reduced to its simple base by the 
prolongation of the preceding vowel, seems to have been 
thrown forward on g. Such an influence is especially 

exercised by a following r, as: yS garo, heavy, Prak. 
TT^^, Sansk. 7J^. 

Both letters, g and g, must be carefully distinguished 
in pronunciation, as the signification of a word varies 
considerably according to the use of one or the other 

letter, as: j^f garo, mangy, but j^r garo, heavy etc. 

2) The palatals. 

The palatals ^ j and ^ c, and their respective 
aspirates j^:^. jh, and ..^ ch, are pronounced in the 
common Indian way as simple sounds, and are gram- 
matically treated as such, though they are, according 
to their present pronunciation, compound sounds. 
Originally they cannot have been pronounced, as they 
are at present, for else the grammatical rules of Panini 
would be incomprehensible. In our days -^ is pro- 
nounced as english j, and ^ as english ch, that is to 

say, as dz and ts respectively; how these sounds, if they 
are to be treated as simple ones, should be aspirated 
or doubled by any human organ, is past our conception. 
The old pronunciation of these letters^) must have gone 
through great variations, till they have become the com- 
pound sounds of the modern Indian idioms.^) In the 
Eoman transcription they have therefore not been marked 
by the palatal stroke (-:_), but \)j the same sign, with 



1) See Standard alphabet, p. 93. 

2) The pronunciation of the Marathi ^ and ^ as ts and dz 
respectively before the vowels a, a, u, u, ai, o, does not fall under 
this head, as this is owing to Dra^-idian influences and only occurs 
in words of non-Arian origin. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 15 

which the sibilant sh (= s) is provided, to point out 
their modern pronunciation. 

The Sindhi has preserved the palatal nasal n (^) 
as an independent sound, which never precedes the let- 
ters of its own varga, for which purpose anusvara (and 
in Hindustani writing simple ^) is used. The Hindu- 
stani being destitute of a palatal nasal, we had to 
provide a new character. Following the analogy of 
the old Sindhi alphabet we chose for it the compound 
vs., which comes nearest to it, for the palatal li of the 

Sindhi is properly a compound sound, and is pro- 
nounced ny. The proper circumscription by ^j would 

not do for this reason, that the palatal li is still con- 
sidered by the Sindhi as a simple sound and rendered 
in Sanskrit writing by >[; it ought therefore to be pointed 
out, as near as possible, as such, for which purpose the 
compound J> answers much better, than j, which latter 

would give rise to many misconceptions. In the Eo- 
manized transcription it has simply been furnished with 
the palatal line = n. 

The sign chosen for it in the alphabet at present 
in use viz.: -., is not to the purpose, as the base is not 
-^, but the nasal ^, with a subsounding y. 

The sibilant J^^ ^ s, which we have inserted in 
our scheme in the palatal row, is no longer a palatal 
sound at all, but a pure dental sh =-■ s. The original 
pronunciation of ^ is more than doubtful; now-a-days 
it is in no way differing from our common sh, and 
might therefore be as well classed under the dentals. 
The Arabic ~ Persian ji is always rendered in Sanskrit 
writing by ^; but it is also found in pure Sindhi words, 

as: -g-u^ sihu, lion etc. compare; Introduction §. 5. 

Pecuhar to the Sindhi is , ^, j. It is now treated 

as a simple sound, but it has in most cases, as etymology 
proves, sprung from a double jj (= "^j, and is still pro- 



16 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

nounced as a compound sound = dy; e. g. : I aju 
(r=z adyu), to-day, Prak. ^^, Sansk. ^^ (on the as- 
similating process see Introd. §. 15.); L^^ vija, science, 
Prak» T^^T, Sansk. T^^T? ^^ veju, physician, Prak. 
"^^7 Sansk. "^^^ In other nouns though an original 
doubling of cannot be traced etymologically, as: ^L 
Jatu, a Jat, Hindi ^T^; and is in such instances fre- 
quently exchanged for -., as: (^vi'LS^^ jatrl, or: (^vj'L:^ j^tri, 
a pilgrim, Sansk. '^T"^)» 

3) The Cerebrals. 

The cerebrals ^ t and 3 d, and their respective 
aspirates, ^^ th and ^i dh are common to all the 
North-Indian vernaculars ; they are pronounced by turning 
the tip of the tongue towards the roof of the mouth 
whilst sounding the dental bases, t, d, etc. respectively. 

The Sindhi has likewise preserved an independent 
cerebral ^, I!T, n, which is not bound to the letters of 

its own varga as: ^^^ vanu, a tree (Sansk. ^^H) ^"^ 
thanu, the teat of an animal, Hindi ^^, Sansk. W*^. 
It is pronounced very hard and resembles much the com- 
pound nr (in Pasto it is therefore very frequently ren- 
dered by nr). 

In Sindhi it exchanges therefore occasionally its place 

with the cerebral r, as: ^^-§iU manhu, man, or: ^yt-jL^ 
marhu. The cerebral 6 d, which in Prakrit already fre- 
quently supplants the dental d, has in Sindhi given birth 
to two other cerebral sounds, viz.: j, 5 d, and 'j, ^T r, 
and this again aspirated, ^v, ^ rh. 

J, 5 4 is pronounced in a similar way as g; the 
cerebral d (6) is uttered with a certain stress in pro- 
longing and somewhat strengthening the contact of the 
closed organ, as if a double d was to be pronounced. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 17 

Originally it is, as g, a double d, as may be still proved 
in most cases by etymology; e. g.: 30^ vado, great, 

Prak. "^j Sansk. "^^5 ui-^'^}^ coclaho, the fourteenth, 

Prak. '^[t?Cl'» ^^^ ^^^ Sindhi, which is very fond of 
hard cerebral sounds, often employs this letter d, where 
no original doubling of the cerebral has taken place, 
especially at the beginning of words, where the 
full stress of the voice can be laid upon it, as: 
fJfo doll, a kind of sedan chair, Prak. 5t^Tj Sansk. 

^^^5T (compare Introd. §. 6. 4). The simple cerebral o 
has been thus nearly totally supplanted at the beginning 
of a noun by d, and d is only found in a few nouns, 
to distinguish them from others written else quite alike, 
as: ^^5 ditho, obstinate, but j.^'^ ditho, seen. 

It has therefore been a great mistake of Capt. Stack, 
that he has not distinguished 5 d from 3 d, and marked 
both sounds by the same diacritical dot (=5), though 
he has been aware of their different pronunciation. A 
Sindhi will never confound <3 d with 5 d; they are in 
his mouth thoroughly distinct from each other and have 
been differently marked already in the old Sindhi al- 
phabet (viz. : d = i> , and d = i). We were therefore com- 
pelled in this respect to deviate from Capt. Stack's San- 
skrit alphabet, retaining for the simple cerebral d the 
original Sanskrit letter 5, and marking the sound of d 
by a line beneath 5 (= 3), the dot beneath 5 being 
reserved for some other sound, which we shall presently 
notice. 

The cerebral v, ^ r, and its aspirate ^sa'L S rh have 
sprung from the cerebral 3 d and .5&t> dh respectively 

(see Inti-oduction §. 7, 2), as: jf guru, molasses, Sansk. 

15; \H'is5 drirhata (f^^nT) firmness, Sansk. ?^rTT» 

We have noticed already (1. c), that by far the greatest 
number of words, in which r or rh is to be found, is 

Trumpp, Sindhx-Grrammar. B 



18 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

taken from some aboriginal tongue, whicli is now lost, 
and wich must have had a great predilection for cerebral 
sounds (as the Dravidian idioms of the south) and to 
the influence of which the preponderance of the cerebrals 
in the north Indian vernaculars must be ascribed. 

The two peculiar letters Z (tr) and 5 (dr), which 
Capt. Stack in his Sindhi Grammar has advocated for 
the Sindhi under the cerebral class, are found, on nearer 
investigation to be compound sounds (see Introduction, 
§. 15.) and may therefore be safely discarded from the 
alphabet, as they ought to be written ^ tr and ^ dr 
respectively, as: ^^ putru, son, Prak. "5^, Sansk. "J^? 

^TO drakha, grape, Sansk. ^1^1. A subscribed r is 
also found in some nouns with the aspirate S dh, as: 
ST'R^ dhrapanu, to be satiated, and its derivatives, as: 
^T?^^ dhrainu, to satiate; ^T^ dhrau, satiety, all of 
which are sprung from the Sansk. root Hlf (rfHTJT); 3'^ 
dadhru (also written: 5S dadhu), a cutaneous disease, 
Sansk. ^^, Hindi ^T^ (compare Introduction §. 15. h. f). 

We have not inserted the cerebral s "^ in the Sindhi 
alphabet, though in Capt. Stack's Sindhi Dictionary a 
few words are written with '^. This letter is com- 
pletely ignored by the common people and left unnoticed 
in the old Sindhi alphabet; only a Brahman now and 
then uses it, to show his knowledge of Sanskrit (com- 
pare Introduction §. 5). 

4) The dentals. 

The dental row offers nothing particular; ^ r, which 
is considered a cerebral in Sanskrit, has become a pure 
dental in the modern idioms. 

5) The labials. 

It is to be noted, that .^^, ''li ph, is to be pro- 
nounced as the aspirate of ^.j, ^ p, and never as f, 
which is of Arabic or Persian origin, wherever found. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 19 

Peculiar to the Sindlii is the letter ^, "^ b; it is 
pronounced in the same way as g and d, being ori- 
ginally a double b, as: J ba, two, Sansk. W (= vva = 
bba; see Introduction §. 15. d. a); ^^f kubo, hump-backed 
(see Introd. §. 13); JjS dabalu, weak, Prak. ^'^^, 
Sansk. y«t5!. In other nouns however an original doubling 
of b cannot be traced out, and the language seems to use 

i^ b and o b quite arbitrarily, as: j^lJ babo, father, 
but, sjU bab5, father's brother, both nouns being de- 
rived from the Turkish GG father. 

The nasal of this class is m; but when preceding 
a letter of its own varga it is supplanted by simple n 

(or anusvara), as in all the other rows; e. g.: ^1 i^^) 
ambu, a mango; 'X^jJS' (^H1^ kumbharu, a potter. 

§. 3. 
On the purely Arabic letters. 

The Sindhi, as well as the Hindustani, has, in con- 
sequence of the forced introduction of the Islam, been 
considerably mixed up with Arabic elements, and though 
the vulgar pay no attention to the particular pro- 
nunciation of the genuine Arabic sounds, the original 
Arabic orthography has been generally adhered to. 

Under the guttural class we find the letters: c, ^, 
f-' £' U' ^^^ Roman transcription of which we have 
conformed to the Standard alphabet, though these letters 
are somewhat differently pronounced in Sindhi. c , which 
is in Arabic treated as a consonant, is generally ignored 

and only its accompanying vowel articulated, as: J^ki 
laqulu, intelligence, is sounded: akulu. In the midst 
of a word c is either passed unnoticed (i. e. only the 

respective vowel is uttered) as: o^ niamata (properly: 

B2 



20 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

niiamata) or c with its accompanying vowel is pro- 
nounced as a long syllable, as: JuJJjtS a ferrier, is 
sounded like: nalbandu (properly: nadbandu) and by 
ignorant people also written accordingly; or the c with 

its respective vowel is dropped altogether; as: lULb food 
(taiamu) is commonly pronounced: tamu. The same is 
the case at the end of a word, where c with its vowel 

is contracted by the vulgar to a long syllable, as: ^t^ 
receipt - account (jamaia) is pronounced like jama, and 
mostly written accordingly; only the Mullas, who pretend 
to a knowledge of Arabic, affect the deep guttural ar- 
ticulation of the Arabic. In Sanskrit writing c is there- 
fore simply rendered according to its accompanying 
vowel, and not dinstinguished by any particular mark 
or dot. 

The deep Arabic -^ li is treated in the same way 

and pronounced as simple h, as: JLi Halu, state, is 
sounded: halu. The Arabic and Persian ^ x is com- 
monly pronounced by the vulgar (especially the Hindus, 
who are quite unable to articulate y) as kh, as: -2^ 
si/a, a spit, is sounded: sikha (Pers. -^^j^). 

The Arabic or Persian p 'Y is pronounced in Sindhi 
as simple g, and very frequently exchanged for S in 

writing, as: cLj bayu, garden, is sounded as: bagu; 

^ Yamu, grief, as: gamu etc. 

The deep guttural ^j q of the Arabic is articulated 

in Sindhi like simple k, as: ^^ qoma, a tribe, clan 

(Arabic j»^i'), is pronounced like: koma; J^i* qaulu, 
word, like: kaulu etc. The Hindus ignore all these 
foreign letters in their writings and render them by 
the nearest Sanskrit consonants, as has been adverted to. 
The lingual letters, which are peculiar to the Arabic, 
are not distinguished in Sindhi pronunciation from the 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 



21 



corresponding dentals; h t is sounded like common t, 
and ^ s like z; ib ^ and ^ z likewise as z. The 
Hindus on the other hand pronounce h and ^ like j, 
and render these letters promiscuously according to their 
actual pronunciation, which is frequently done by the 
Musalmans likewise, especially the unlearned. 

The Arabic letters, which figure under the dental 
row, viz.: ^ ^, j S, and v z (the two latter of which 
are also common to the Persian) are pronounced in Sindh 
(and India generally) as follows: ^ like s, 6 and -. like 
z, whereas the Hindus pronounce these two latter con- 
sonants like j and render them also accordingly by ^, 
which is not unfrequently done by the Moslims also. 

The Arabic and Persian o f is sounded by the Mu- 
hammadans as f, but by the Hindus as ph, and ren- 
dered in their writings by ^. 



4. 



n. The Sindhi vowel system. 

We next subjoin a tabular survey of the Sindhi 
vowel system. 

1) Simple vowels: 



I, 



I 

a 



^ t 

i (e) 1 



e 



I 

u 



u 



o 



2) Diphthongs 



ai 



au 



22 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 



3) Nasalized vowels. 



a 



a 



e 
ai 



1 



♦ 



or 



u3» 



6 
au 



1) Simple vowels.^) The Sindhi uses all the 
vowels, common to the Sanskrit and Prakrit; but it is 
to be noted, that i, when preceded or followed by h, 
or when closing a word, has the sound of short e (see 
Introduction §. 2. h). E and 5 are in Sindhi, as already 
in Prakrit, simple (and not Guna) vowels (see Intro- 
duction §. 2. d), and consequently always long (and not 
anceps, as in Prakrit). 

As the Arabic is destitute of the sounds e and o, 
a great difficulty arises in Sindhi as well as in Hindu- 
stani, how to distinguish i from e, and u from o. The 
Indian grammarians have therefore invented the term 

of J^^ ^pLj ya-e majhtil, or the unknown ^ for the 

sound e, and J^^ ^fi vave majhtil, or the unknown ^, 

for the sound 5 ; but at the same time no practical mea- 
sures were taken, to mark off e and 5 by any dia- 
critical sign, and the reader was left to help himself, 



1) As we shall further on employ only the Hindustani cha- 
racters, we cannot enter here more minutely on the Sanskrit vowel 
system, and we refer therefore the student for nearer information to 
any Sanskrit grammar. We shall only make use of the Sanskrit 
characters in the course of this grammar, as occasion may call for. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 23 

as best lie could. But as the distinction of i from e 
and u from o is somewhat difficult for a beginner, 
especially a European, and for the right understanding 
of the language very important, we have contrived to dis- 
tinguish e from i by a perpendicular Kne, as: ^ 

ke, some, ^^f ki, somewhat; and o from xx. by placing the 

sign ^- above ^, as: ^jjj» to, from-on; ^^j tu, thou. In 
prints, destined for the use of natives, these distinctions 
may be dispensed with as more or less superfluous; 
but in prints, intended for the use of Europeans I have 
no doubt they will prove very serviceable and clear 
away many a stumbling block. 

In Arabic writing the short vowels a, i, u are 
not expressed in the body of the consonants, but by 
mere marks, placed above or beneath the consonant, 
after which they are to be sounded; if the consonant 
happen to be an aspirate, the vowel mark is placed 
on the accessory ^s^. The mark for a is ^^, and is cal- 

led x^^ fath ah (in Persian J C zabar) ; the mark for i is 
^r, and is called slw^y kasrah (in Persian ox zir, pro- 
nounced in India: zer); the mark for u is -^, and is 
called x^ zammah (in Persian jiLu pis, pronounced in 
India: pes) e. g. ^ faiia, ^ fini, ^ funu. But if a 

noun commence with a short vowel, I (alif) must serve 
as base for the these vowels, the vowels themselves being 
considered only as auxiliary signs for the consonants, as: 

^jl ana, ^\ ini, ^1 unu. In Arabic initial f is in these 

cases always provided with hamzah, as: ^1, ^1, ^1, 

but in Hindustani it is dispensed with, to which practice 
we shall also adhere in Sindhi. 

The three long vowels: a, i, u are expressed in 
the body of the consonants by the letters I, ^^ *, with 
the addition of the respective vowel points; in this case 



24 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

^ ^5? ; ^^^ called ^jSlL sakin, or quiescent, because 

tliey are not moved by a vowel of their own; e. g.: 

i^\^i hari, a peasant; ^sU maru, a beater; ^v^x> muri, 

capital (in trade) ^K-^ cikatu, creaking. The same 

holds good with reference to the vowels e and 5, 
which are not (originally) distinguished in writing from 
1 and ti, as: jy^s^ chero, whetting.^) 

Long a, when initial, is expressed by I and the 

sign - placed above it, as: sS\ adaru, courtesy. This 

sign is called sjoo maddah, i. e. extension, and is pro- 
perly an alif placed above horizontally. Long i and u, 
when initial, must be preceded by alif, to support the 
respective vowel point, as ^^ and . themselves are 

quiescent; e. g.: ^^j>}^ Iho, this very person; ^^1 uho, 

that very person. The same is the case with e and o, 
as: j<XjI edo, so large, jSjl odo, near. 

^^ and . when quiescent, should be provided with 
the sign jazm (-^), to indicate thereby, that they are 

not moved by a vowel of their own, as: 3.4^!, j^^f, 
00 piru; but this practice is generally neglected in Hindu- 
stani, as superfluous. If on the other hand ^ and^ be moved 
by a vowel put above or beneath them, they are no longer 

quiescent, but regular consonants, as: s\S yarn, friend; 
J^Lli niyanu, a tank; ^j vanu, tree; ^^J^ nivai, want 
of wind; ^Ij vava, formative of il^ vau, wind. 

1) In some Arabic nouns final ^ (generally without dots) is used 

with the power of alif, as: i^m^ 'isa, Jesus; {^y^ 8ikra remem- 

brance. Note also the antiquated writing cd^a^ zalat, prayer, 'OOj^J 
'taurat, the Thorah (pentateuch) , which is falsely pronounced in India: 
■tauret. 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 25 

2) The diphthongs ai and au. 

The diphthongs ai and au are expressed in Arabic 
by a preceding fatHah and a following quiescent ^ or ^, 
which should be provided in this case with jazm, to 

prevent mistakes, as: liif aitru, spinning wheel; ^SyJt^ 

bairagi, an ascetic; j-go'^f autho, impure; (^^Lio^ cau- 

dhari, round about. At the end of a noun no diph- 
thong is admissible in Sindhi; compare Introduction, 
§• 1, 2. 

3) The nasalized vowels or Anusvara. 

We have noticed already, that the simple dental n 
(^j) is now used in Sindhi before the letters of any varga 
indiscriminately, which in Sanskrit writing is commonly 
expressed not by the dental rT^ but by the sign called 

Anusvara (-^) e. g.: JLjC^ (^TT^) kangalu (properly: 

kangalu) poor; j-^Lf" (^1^1) ganjo, scald-headed; ^5>JUj 

(«r(3T) nandho, small; jj^ (t!^ randu, path; j^\^ CfTT^) 
bambha, hag. 

But besides this full nasal the Sindhi also uses 
the proper Anusvara, which only communicates to 
the respective vowel a nasalizing touch, very extensively, 
and as both, fall n and the nasalizing touch, which is 
communicated to a vowel, are expressed in Sanskrit 
writing by Anusvara, and in Hindiistani by the dental 
n (^), some confusion necessarily arises from this practice, 
to obviate which the following remarks should be care- 
fully attended to. 

a) Anusvara (or ^) preceding another consonant 
must always be pronounced as a full nasal, if the 

vowel of the syllable be short, as: "^^^ ^f^, pandhu, 
journey; but if Anusvara precede 'h' in a short syllable, 
it is always to be pronounced as such, i. e. only a slight 
nasalizing touch is thereby communicated to the vowel, 



26 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

as: Wf^, ij"^^ jabe; ^^, ^i muhii, mouth; in a few 
words, where full n precedes h, it must be rendered in 
Sanskrit writing by *T, not by Anusvara, as: f^'S cinhu, 
a sign; ^Bp^TIT thanhanu, to compress. In Hindustani 
writing no such distinction can be made, as there is 
only one (^) at hand, which must serve as full nasal 
or Anusvara, as the case may be; no tiling is therefore 
left to the student, but to commit these few words to 
memory. We must repeat here, what has been remarked 
already, that the use of the Arabic characters oifers great 
difficulties when apphed to a Prakrit language of India. 
h) Anusvara preceding a consonant in a long syl- 
lable is to be pronounced as a full nasal, as: '^jf^ 

,^Lj banthe, ravenousness ; "HT"^, -4^^. pingha, a swing; 
^^.^ j^JJi^ kundhu, a young man; '^'^T, jJou^ vendo, 
going; ^i<s|^, Lijj.J lombaru, a male fox. But if the 

long vowels, provided with Anusvara, be followed by h, 
s or V, they are to be pronounced with a nasalizing 

touch only, as : ^m^i,^ y^^^ thahara, steadiness ; 'TTW, 

(j*^Lo masu, meat, ^T«l^, ;r^^j' thavaru, Friday; 'Tl?, 

.^AA^o mihu, rain; ^f^, '-^^ mehe, buffalo etc. Where 

full 11 precedes h in a long syllable, it must be ren- 
dered by •? (in Hindustani writing a further distinction 

is impossible), as: '^'^^ cs'^'"^ banhi, a slave-girl, but: 
^^, ^lo baha, arm. 

c) At the end of a word Anusvara always retains 
its proper nasalizing touch, be the final vowel short 

or long, as; ift^ ^j^j pri, friend; ^^ ^y^ bhu, earth; 

^1^5 uiuhe (Formative of the I. pronoun sing.); also in 

compound words, as: ^J^, ^y^> \jy^^ ^^^ \M}i^ buzzing. 
This rule is based on the fact, that in Sindhi every 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 27 

word must needs end in a vowel (which however may 
be nasahzed). 

d) Anusvara, placed between two vowels, be they 
short or long, always retains its proper nasalizing sound, 

as: ^?^, ^^jf ai, and; TTS^, \^^}^ mainu, to measure; 

W^, ^y^^ ^^5 I; ^j^ajLa^ kiau, it has been done by 

them (compare: Introduction §. 4). 

The same holds good with reference to Anusvara, 
following a diphthong (see: Introduction §. 1, 2), as: 

<T^T, y^^\ rauso, merriment {= rauso); T^^ ^-J^^ 
maltha, madder (=^ maitha). 

In the Eomanized transcription, which we shall 
add throughout this grammar, the two different sounds 
of Anusvara are rendered in this way, that the sound 
of full n is always expressed by n, whereas the na- 
salizing touch, which is communicated to a vowel by 
Anusvara, is marked by the sign -^ placed above it, as: 

^H, ool == antu; but ^^, ^yVA = au. 

We have already adverted to the great difficulties, 
under which the Hindustani labours to mark the ori- 
ginal sound of Anusvara, as it has only one n (and this 
the dental n) at its disposal. The difficulty is already 
great in Hindiistani, and still greater in Sindhi, which 
is so much addicted to the use of nasalized vowels. In 
addition to what has been stated already, we beg to 
turn the attention of the student, as far as the Hindu- 
stani characters are concerned, to the following 
points : 

Final ^ has always the sound of Anusvara proper 
(see under c) and need therefore not perplex the student^ 

as: (j^^;Li marhu, man; ^pK zalu, women; ^LSl ia, 

from this place, ^L^j tia, from that place. 

Anusvara, separating two short or long vowels (see 
under d) is rendered by ^^ and can be recognized as 



28 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

such by its position; in this case, to obviate all mis- 
conceptions, we have furnished the second vowel with 
hamzah, to point out thereby, that the following vowel 
is not to be read together with the preceding, but that 
jj closes the first syllable, as: ^1 (?^) i~^? thus; ^JJ 
(m^) ti-a, in that manner; ^yf (T^) gau, cow. If 
the second vowel chance to be a long one, ^^ (without 
dots) provided with hamzah must precede the same, to 
serve as basis for the vowel point (see further on under: 

Hamzah), as: ^aajLaL sa! (^it) lord; j.^ (f^^T) liio, 

mind; ,^^^1^=^ ciau, it has been said by them. 

In such like instances, as exhibited under a and &, 
the Hindustani alphabet offers no means of distinguishing 

the full nasal from Anusvara proper, as: ^^^Ij banhi, a 

slave -girl, ^G baha, arm, and these difficulties can 
only be overcome by practice. In the old Sindhi al- 
phabet and in that now in use no notice whatever is 
taken of these and such like intricacies. 

§• 5. 
On the other orthographic signs. 

1) The sign -^i. (s<>.x) maddah, prolongation) is placed 

on initial alif, to render it long, as: y^3\ atharu, pack- 
saddle. In the midst and at the end of a word maddah 
is not placed on alif, if the preceding consonant be 

moved by fatHah, in which case alif is called ^5'Lw 
sakin, or quiescent, as: L^K ra-ja, prince; lilUo ma -la, 
garland; but if the preceding consonant is provided with 
jazm (i. e. not moved by a vowel), alif must have 
the sign of maddah, as commencing a syllable, e. g. : 

jjLs qur-anu, Qoran, not qu-ranu. 

2) The sign -^ (*yi jazm, abscission), placed above 



THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 29 

a consonant denotes, that the consonant thus marked 

O ^ 5 0^ 

is not moved by a vo^Yel, as: j-^^ vel-ho, idle; Syo 
mar-du, man; Owl sar-gu, heaven. In old Sindhi T\T.i- 
tings the use of jazm is hardly to be met with, as they 
preferred to provide such a mute letter T^-ith kasrah, the 
sound of which was hardly heard in pronunciation, as: 

o'yo mari-du, instead of Syo mar-du, and served quite 

the purposes of jasm. "We cannot adopt this system, 
as in many cases it will give rise to confusion and mis- 
conceptions. 

3) The sign ^^ (jo<Xci.j tasdid) corroboration, placed 

above a consonant denotes, that the letter in question 
is to be doubled. In the old Sindhi writings the tasdid 
is hardly ever to be met with, as they were in the habit to 
express even an originally double letter by its simple base, 

e. g.: ly kamu, business, instead of If' kammu. It is 
now used only in such instances, where the doubling of 
a consonant is rendered necessary in order to distinguish 

two in other respects identical words, as: ^\ una, by 

him, and ^1 unna, wool. 

4) The sign -t_ (syli hamzah, i. e. punction) is used 
in the midst and at the end of words as a vicarious base 
for I; when two vowels, short or long, meet in a word, 
the second vowel must be supported by the base ^, 

furnished with hamzah, e. g.: ^^ piu, father; ^ jue, 

the den of an animal ; III^ hiara , now; ^J^ jua, louse; 

Ijli qa-imu, standing; C-jL^ bham'a, brothers; ^.^ ji-u, 

life; ^ kuo, rat; pL^ gha-u, wounding; ^| a-i, a 

goal etc. 

A final short vowel, preceded by a, u, o is usually 

supported by the sign hamzah alone, as: iL^ bha-u, brother; 



30 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 

po-e, after; ©yc hu-e, sound. But if ^ be radical in 
a word , hamzah with its accompanying vowel is 

placed upon j, as: ^ib nau, fame, Formative ^jLS nava; 

^•.JL5 gaii, cow; yXsa'il'^ marMa, Formative of: ^^M\^ 
marhu, man. 

In the Formative Singular of such nouns, which end 

in i, hamzah is dropped for brevity's sake, as: ^Joi 

handi, a pot, Formative: (5<\Ii handia (instead of i^S.ji); 
but in nouns like jjj^LL sai, lord, hamzah must be 
retained in the Formative, to prevent mistakes, as: 
^iJL^jLl saia. 

Note. The sign -= (t>^5 ^^§^9 conjunction) only occurs in 
Arabic phrases and constructions; it joins two words, the latter 
of which begins with ahf, the accompanying vowel of which 
is dropped and the final vowel of the preceding word drawn 

over or rather joined to the following; e. g.: iXX^-il cXa^ fabdu- 

Imaliki (instead of: JC^^JI tX^^); ^a«I JU* qala-sma5 (instead 

of: /^4mjI^ JL5)j ^' i*-^-? bismi - llahi. 

The use of the so-called Tan v in (i. e. -2_ |, ^, pro- 
nounced in Arabic 'un', 'an', 'in^) in Sindhi is to be 
disproved of, as the Tanvin is only a fanciful invention 
of the Arabian grammarians, and by no means fit to 
express the Sindhi nasalized short (and least the long) 
vowels. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 31 

SECTION I. 

THE FORMATION OF THEMES IN SINDHI. 

Chapter I. 
The termination of Sindhi nouns. 

§. 6. 

In the formation of themes the relative position^ 
which the Sindhi holds to the Sanskrit -Prakrit on the 
one side, and to its modern sister-tongues on the other 
side, is most clearly delineated. 

The pecuHarity of the Sindhi, and at the same time 
the great advantage, which is possesses over the kindred 
idioms consists therein, that every noun, substantive, ad- 
jective, pronoun, participle and infinitive ends in a vowel. 
By this vocalic termination the Sindhi has preserved a fle- 
xibility, and at the same time a sonorousness, of which 
the other modern vernaculars are completely destitute. 

After w^hat has been remarked on the nature of the 
diphthongs in Sindhi (see Introduction §. 1), it may 
be easily gathered, that no Sindhi noun can end in a 
diphthong. A Sindhi noun may therefore end in a, 
i(e), u; a, i, ti, 5; no noun ever ends in e, and those, 
which seem to do so, are not in the Nominative, but in 
the inflected case. A flnal vowel may also be na- 
salized, as: (j^^'jL^o marhu, man, ^j-(^v?^ cotho, the 
fourth; ^^.j pri, friend, which is especially the case, 

if a word terminate in a long vowel, but this con- 
stitutes , after what we have said on the nature of Anu- 
svara, no exception to the general rule. 

In the formation of themes the Sindhi has in the 
main followed the course pointed out by the Praki^it, 
but it has created many new formations, independent 
and irrespective of the Prakrit. The levelling process 



32 SECTION I. THE FOKMATION OF THEMES. 

of the modern idioms has already gained the ascendancy, 
and terminations, which the Prakrit, though seized al- 
ready by the same tendency, has as yet kept asunder, 
have been thrown together into one class in Sindhi. 

The Sindhi has lost the neuter, which has been 
already discarded in the Apabhransha dialect of the 
Prakrit, the immediate predecessor of the modern Sindhi. 
This, as it seems, has been the first step, to break the 
fetters of the old compact mother-tongue, and to initiate 
the levelling process of the present idiom. 

Inasmuch as the Sindhi requires a vocalic ter- 
mination for every noun, the distinction of the gender 
is not so perplexing as in the other dialects, which offer 
great difficulties in this point to the student. The ter- 
minations, which have been already fixed for the Pra- 
krit, have been mostly retained in the Sindhi, with the 
exception of neuter nouns, which have been, for the 
most part, transferred to the masculine terminations, 
less to the feminine. 

I. The termination u. 

1) Masculine themes in u. 

By far the greatest number of nouns end in Sindhi 
in u, and are, with a few exceptions , masculine. This 
short final u corresponds to the Prakrit termination 
^^ o, which, according to the testimony of the old 
Prakrit grammarians, has been already shortened to u 
in the Apabhransha dialect.^) To this class belong in 
Sindhi: 



1) In Marat 111 final ^ (= Sindhi u) has on the whole become 
already quiescent; the same is the case in Bangall, except when 
final a is preceded by a double consonant, in which case it is heard. 
In PanjabT, Hindi and Hindustani final a has quite disappeared; 
for nouns like piu, father, mail, mother etc. are in Panjabi ex- 
ceptional cases. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 33 

a) such nouns, as end in Prakrit in o (= San- 
skrit final ^, as: Ij naru, a man, Prak. TJt^, Sansk 
*TT.; i^ gharu , house , Prak. "^^ (Sansk. TiD ; li" kamu, 
business, Prak. c^f^, Sansk. cUTT^, To this class be- 
longs also a number of adjectives (though the majority 

of them has retained the termin^ltion o), as: J^j* talu, 
hidden; y^\ ajaru, imperishable; o^a^I acetu, careless. 
Most of the adjectives, borroved from the x^rabic or 
Persian, assume this termination, as: j.Ui* tamamu, whole; 
s«^*^ Y^^lb^^? poor etc. 

h) such nouns, as end originally in u, as: il^ 
vau, wind (Sansk. "^T^ i^-; t)oo madu, liquor, Sansk. 

c) such nouns, as end in Sanskrit in ta (crude 
form tr), Prak. a (by ehsion of t), or which add in Pra- 
krit the termination aro, as: ^^ piu, father, Sansk. 

fRlTT, Prak. fcf^; ^L^ bhau, brother, Sansk. i^TrTT, 
Prak. already ^^ (in Sindhi again with elision of d); 

^'U4? bhataru, husband, Prak. H^TTT? Sansk. ^WT (see 
Varar. Y, 31). 

2) Feminine themes in u. 

These are, comparatively speaking, few in number; 
to this class belong such nouns, as end in Sanskrit 

in u, and are feminine as: ^j f. thing, Sansk. "^^i 

J^j> dhenu, a milk-cow, Sansk. V^T? or such, as have 

shortened u to u, as: jj^ sasu, mother-in-law, Sansk. 

^^; \ vijii, lightening, Prak. f^^, Sansk. f^^Hrl^* 

In a few themes original a has been shortened to 
u, the Sindhi following herein the levelling process no- 

Trumpp, Sindhl-Grammar. C 



34 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

ticed under 1, c irrespective of gender, as: ^U man, 
mother, Prak. 411^1, Sansk. ^WT; ^s^o dhiu, daughter, 

Prak. already ift^T ^^^ ^ft^iT, Sansk. "Sf^T (see Varar. 
IV, 33; Lassen p. 172, note); ^li niihu, daughter-in- 
law (Sansk. 'W^ 5 quite exceptional is Sw^ bhenu , sister, 

Prak. cjf^Ajft (Hindtist. J^^j), Sansk. ^fJlTSft. -^ number 
of nouns ending in u, which are feminine, we shall 
enumerate when treating of the gender of nouns; their 
origin is in many cases unknown. 

n. The termination o. 

Besides the nouns ending in u, those ending in o 
are the most numerous in Sindhi; they are all without 
exception masculine. The old Prakrit termination 
^Sti (o) bas been split in Sindhi into two classes, in one 
of which o has been shortened to u and in the other of 
which it has been retained unaltered. 

A strict rule seems not to have been attended to 
in settling these two terminations , but usage alone seems 
to have decided for the one or the other; in many in- 
stances both terminations are promiscuously used. It is 
worthy of notice, that many nouns, which end in Sindhi 
in o, have retained the corresponding termination a 
(masc.) in Hindi and Hindustani and to a great extent 
also in Marathi, Bangali and Panjabi, and similarly those 
nouns, which terminate in Sindhi in u, have dropped the 
corresponding vocalic termination (i. e. ^, a) in the dia- 
lects quoted. 

Examples: ^J taro, the sole of a shoe (Sansk. W^ 

n.) ^ galo , the throat (Sansk. 1^ m.) , whereas on the 

other hand J^r galu, cheek, corresponds to the Sansk. 

T^ m., j^y lurko or JUJ lurku, a tear; j^b^-ww sonar5, 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 35 

goldsmith (Sansk. ^cf^^TT)? on the other hand JL^i 
luharu, blacksmith (Sansk. ^^^TT.)^ 

In some instances the language has made use of these 
two different terminations to derive words of somewhat dif- 
ferent meanings from one and the same base, as : 3 >^r^ euro, 
powder, filings, and [^ curu, adj. powdered (both from 
the Sansk. "^Tj) ; s..gxo matho, the head, and ^.^ mathu, 
the top (both from the Sansk. TJ^ n.). 

We may however lay down some rules, by which 
the Sindhi seems to have been guided in retaining the 
original Prakrit termination 0: 

1) Adjectives, derived directly from the Sanskrit- 
Prakrit, have on the whole retained the ending o, as: 

yix^ cano, good (Sansk. ^^); j-^^ mitho, sweet (Sansk. 

TO"?); jsL^^kharo, bitter (but \l^ kharu, s. m. potash, 

both being derived from the Sansk. "'^T.); ^^j rukho, 
hard (Sansk. ^^). In many nouns though both ter- 
minations are allowed as: j^ii^l adharo or: wit>l adharu, 
helpless; jv^Jo nidharo or: j.5i\j nidharu, wretched; 3>^j! 

abharo or: J^] abharu, poor. 

Adjectives derived by secondary affixes from other 

themes generally retain the termination o, as: iJu^ Ja- 
tiko, relating to a Jat (o^); }^U vaniko, belonging to 
a Vanyo (j-^ilp; j.-^-^; rasil5, juicy (from J*.^); joJoL^f 
khandiro, patient (from JoL^f). Excepted are the affixes 
Jjl^ (Prak. «2|nl|, Sansk. "^fT), as: ^IjIjo dayavanu, com- 
passionate; Jf (^^), as: JIS3 dayalu, the same as 

^jl^lSS; nI (^'^)5 when forming substantives, as: ^U^d 
dhanaru, herdsman, whereas the affix aro generally forms 

adjectives, as: j.L^^ sagharo, strong (from ^£1). 

C2 



36 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

2) Verbal nouns, which are derived from the 
root of verbs by lengthening the root- vowel, take the 
termination o, as: 

jjL^ gh.Sitd, decrease, from ^J^^ to decrease. 

j.^c-jLi carho, increase, from ^ly^'j^ to rise. 

The termination u however is also in use, es- 
pecially with such themes, in which the root -vowel is 
not lengthened, as: 

oJo marku, boasting, from ^jS'Jo to boast. 
v5^^ jhatu, snatching, from ^l^-y to snatch. 

3) Nouns of agency, which are derived from ver- 
bal roots by prolonging the root -vowel (if it be short) 
take likewise the termination o, as: 

jjaol. vadho, carpenter, from ^jj^5j to cut. 

_- _ > ^ ' . 

ysp tobo, diver, from ^^ to dive. 

ciro, sawyer, from (j»wy^ ^ split. 



4) Some nouns of foreign origin change (original) 
final a or ah to o in Sindhi, as: jjIJ babo, father, Hindust. 
(turkish) tSG; 3)l5;3 darvaz5, door, Pers. ssl^^S. 

5) All participles present and past end in o, 
as: jtXlJi halando, going; jlii halio, gone; j jJj.U ma- 
rindo, beating, ^jXx) maryo, beaten. 

6) It is seldom the case, that an original final a 
(fem.) has been changed to 5, and rendered thereby mas- 
culine, as: zAj taro, star (Sansk. rTTTI fem.); Hindi 

likewise WITJ masc. (Pasto: (^^jXw st5rai m.); in Marathi 
it is both masc. and fem. 

Note. If we turn to the cognate dialects, we find, that the 
Gujarati comes nearest to the Sindhi in this respect; for nearly 
all the nouns, which end in Sindhi in 5 and u, have retained 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 37 

the termination o. As the Gujarati has preserved the neuter, 

it forms a regular neuter ending in ^ u from masc. themes in 

o, as: ^fJT^ ^ dog (in general), but ^{fT^ a male dog. This 

neuter termination we consider identical with the Sindhi vocalic 
termination u, with the only difference, that Anus vara, as the 
sign of the neuter, has been added. 

In Marathi, Hindi and Panjabi, final 5 of the SindhT 
and Gujarati has been changed to a. The Panjabi and Hindi 
(Hindustani) have lost the neuter, but the Marathi, which has 
preserved it, forms from the masc. termination a a regular 

neuter ending in e (Tj), which is in its origin nothing else but 
another masc. termination with the addition of final Anusvara, 
just as in Gujarati (compare on this point: Lassen, Instit. lin- 
guae Prak. p. 429, 14); e.g.: ^5^ n. a plantain, Hindi: ^^J 
m., o|)|^|[| , inf. (properly a neuter verbal noun, as in Sanskrit), 

Sindhi . T5^ karanu (m.), Hindi c|)<^f-|| karna (m.), Gujarati: 

* '' _ _ 

chl^ill (n.), as in Marathi. 

In Ban gall the termination a (— o of the Sindhi) is only 
to be met with in a few nouns , as : gadha , ass, ghora, horse etc. 
(nouns like: pita, karta, do not come properly under this head, 
as they are Sansk. Nominatives); as a masc. termination of ad- 
jectives a is unknown in Bangall. 

m. The termination u (masc. and fern.). 

Nouns ending in u correspond generally to the 
Sanskrit-Prakrit termination u, which in Prakrit is leng- 
thened in the Nom. Sing, to u; those nouns, which end 
already in Sanskrit u, retain this termination unaltered 
in Sindhi. Some feminine nouns, ending in u, shorten 
their final u again to u, adding at the same time one 

of the feminine terminations i (e) or a; e. g.: .iLl sau, 
upright (Prak. ^T^, Nom. Sing. W^, Sansk. FT^), 
Hindi ^V or ^TV; ^;;^* taru m. palate, Sansk. WT^ 
n. (Hindi ftT^); ^^ bhu f. earth (or: ^^^4-? bhue), Sansk. 
^; ^JyL ju f. louse (or; ^Ja^ jua), Sansk. '^^ (with eli- 



38 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

sion of final k in Sindhi); ^^^1 abirti, honor (or ©loT 
abirue) Pers. 

Under this head fall many appellatives and adjectives^ 
ending in u, ati and aku, corresponding to the Sansk. 

affixes uka {^^ and aku (^^)j as: ^^\3 taru, a swim- 
mer (= taruka), ^^LiJ rahakti or: ^L^J rahati, inhabitant, 

^jU^^ khatati , profitable (from viL^ f. profit). 

In some nouns ending in ti, a more complicated 

contraction has taken place, as: ^yc=*Lo marhu, man, 
Prak. l^piIT^? Sansk. 7f |«^l^ (n of the Prakrit inter- 
changing with r, and ^ being exchanged for h); ^yi\\c> 
darhu , pome - granate , Sanskrit ^TR?I , Hindustani 

*vl5; ^^-4^ kachu, tortoise, Sansk. ^"^"^ [(p = h = 
v = u); ^j^4^; vichu, scorpion, Prak. f^tSi'^, Sansk. 

IV. The termination a. 

Nouns ending in a correspond generally to the San- 
skrit-Prakrit termination a (^) and are all feminine, 

as: LxLs^ cinta, anxiety, Sansk. 1x1 nH? L!^ haca, murder, 

Sansk. ^rqi; lo*L^ jatra, pilgrimage, Sansk. 'MT^T; H^f 

khima, patience, Prak. ^^T, Sansk. ^fil. 

There exists a small number of masc. nouns, now 
ending in a, which must not be confounded with the 
preceding fem. nouns, as they are of quite a difibrent 
origin; they are derived from Sansk. themes ending (in 
their crude forms) in an (^R[) and r (^J), and in the 
Nom. Sing, in a, as: Liir raja, prince; UjI atma, soul; 
LSj.r' karta, the agent (in grammar). There are also a 
few foreign words, ending in a, as: Li-wl asna, an acquain- 
stance, Pers. L^l. 



SECTION I. THE FOKMATION OF THEMES. 39 

A few adjectives end likewise in a (or a) as: LSl<3 
data, liberal; ^^U tala, exhausted etc. 

V. The termination a. 

The vocalic ending a is shortened from the pre- 
ceding fern, termination a, just as u has been shortened 
from o. To this class belong in Sindhi: 

1) such nouns, as end in Sanskrit and Prakrit in 

a, as: ^^ Jibha, tongue, Prak. ^Ul^, Sansk. 'HR'^T' 
^^ nuha (besides ,^j) daughter-in-law, Sansk. '^Wl'f 
^s^o dhia (besides: ^J?t>), daughter, Prak. ifl'^ or \ftw; 
^^yu^ sa-ina, sign, Sansk. ^"^T; 2^ mina, marrow, Sansk. 

♦i^T. Further a great quantity of nouns, the formation 
of which is peculiar to the Sindhi, and which may be 
derived from every verbal root. This formation cor- 
responds exactly to the Sanskrit affix ^I^ (a), which is 
added to the verbal root, to form fem. nouns, as San- 
skrit: fJ^FTj breaking, from "p^F etc. In Sindhi the 
derivation of such nouns from verbs is quite general, 
and the language acquires thereby a great facility to 

form verbal nouns, as: -4^^ cokha, investigation, Infin. 

Jj4^j^ (root: 4^^)' ^ g^^^i pounding, Inf ^l^3S 

(root: df). The Sindhi always falls back on the Pra- 
Imt, especially in such nouns, as differ already from 
the Sanskrit, by dropping either a final consonant in 

Prakrit or affixing a new vocalic ending, as: (j-..a^I asisa, 

blessing, Prak. ^ftt^, Sansk. '^'RtJ^* 

2) The feminines of such adjectives, as end in 

the masc. in u, as: .^^ kubha, fem. of .^^^ kubhu, un- 
fortunate; ^[j^ sujana, fem. of ^jl^, well-knowing. 

Only a very small number of adjectives ends ori- 
ginally in a, which remain unchanged in gender, num- 



40 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

ber and case, as: JLa. jala, or '^L^ jara, abundant; IL^ 
Jama, much, many. 

3) Many nouns fluctuate, as regards their ter- 
mination, between a or i (e), as both short vowels form 

the common fem. terminations in Sindhi, e. g.: \\^ nara 

or ^LS nare, woman; J ara or ^1 are, affection; ^^ 

chana or ^4^, chane, a pond; 1>. rira or ^. rire, 

quarrel. From the adjectives, ending in u, the feminine 

may be formed in final a or i (e), as: \^\ atora, or: 

y^iS atore, what cannot be weighed, masc. \yi\\ viyili- 

caryata or ooli caryate, mad, masc. viiol^. 

This accounts easily enough for the phenomenon, 
that such nouns, as end in Prakrit in i, have adopted 
in Sindhi the termination a (simply exchanging one fem. 

termination for another), as: ^ly^ bhena (besides: jJo^j), 

sister, Prak. "^f^^ Sansk. HPTni; ^o dhure, origin, 

Prak. "^TI, Sansk. "^^. But, though the respective fem. 
terminations are often exchanged, the original gender 
is commonly strictly adhered to in Sindhi, and the case 
is very rare, that an original masc. noun has been chang- 
ed to a feminine, as: «^G bapha, fem. steam, Sansk. 
"^T"^ masc. (in Hindi it has become likewise a fem.). 

Note, As regards the cognate dialects, the Ban gall has 
throughout preserved the original fem. termination a; the Ma- 
rathi too has remained more faithful to the Prakrit, but it has 
already in many cases shortened a to a, and then dropped it 
altogether (in pronunciation at least) as : ift^ Jibh , tongue, cff^ 
vat, way etc. In the other dialects long final a has either been 
preserved , or it has been thrown off altogether (after having first 
been changed to a). 

As in Sindhi every noun must needs end in a vowel, such 
fem. nouns, as are borrowed from the Hindustani, frequently 

adopt the fem. termination *"a' in Sindhi, as: Hindust. ^^\ (f) 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 41 

earth, Sindhi ,j»-^) zamina; Hindust. lCLo (f.) property, Sindhi 
uX-Lo milka. In a few nouns the gender has been changed, 
as: Hindust. V*^ kitab (fern.), Sindhi V^^ kitabu, masc. 

VI. The termination i. (masc. et fern.) 

Themes in i are in Sindhi of both genders; they 
are either masculine or feminine. 

1) Masc. themes ending in T. 

The termination i in masc. nouns corresponds: 

a) To the Sansk. affix i (= in), as: ^>i4> dharmi, 

religious (Sansk. ^MIh), Nom. Sing. VTfT; ^y^ svami, 

lord (Sansk. ^TT'm*T)5 (^-^'Li hathi, elephant (Sansk. 

h) To the Sansk. affix ika (X^ = ^j ^y eliding 
k and lengthening i to i; e. g.: (^xli hari, a peasant, 
Sansk. ^ifocft)? /^^^^ othi, a camel -rider (from ^j^\ 
camel); ^jCaj^ thekiri, a seller of earthen ware (from 
yCugJ, earthen ware). 

c) To the Sansk. adjectival affix '^ y, by changing 
^ to 1, as: jj.j^^ pri, friend, Sansk. TB[^; ^^^^ abhagi, 

unfortunate, Sansk. ^Rm'^. 

d) To the Sansk. affix ^[^ iya, by eliding '^^ as: 
^5<\Ijb Hindi, Indian; ^tXl*« Sindhi, relating to Sindh. 
With this class coincide all the Persian and Arabic 
adjectives, formed by the so-called ^lo s^G or y of 
relation, as: ^J'Xl farsi, Persian; ^^yk ^arabi, Arabic; 
^♦L\ zaxmi, wounded. 

e) To Sanskrit masc. crudes, ending in i, which ge- 



42 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

nerally have final i lengthened to i in Sindhi, as: ^y^ 
kavi, poet, Sansk. "'^T^; JlXJir kali-kalu, the Kali -pe- 
riod; in some nouns though original short i has been 
preserved, as: J^ hare, Vishnu (Hindi: ^K and ^tT)^ 
^Aj pa-e, lord, master (= ^m)« 

There remains a number of words in i, which are 
masculine, the origin of which is unknown, as: J^ 

bell, servant; ^jtXjLj bandhi, a log of wood floating in 

the river; ^^^U manjhi, a brave man. 

Note. The Ban gall and Marathi agree with the Sindhi in 
this respect, as Bang, svami, Marathi hatti etc. On the other 
hand both idioms have retained the masc. termination i, as Bang, 
pati, lord, Marathi kavi, poet. In Panjabi, Hindi (Hindust.) 
final i of masc. themes is occasionally preserved, but more ge- 
nerally dropped, as har = hari; kav = kavi; or lengthened to 
1, as in Sindhi, as kali = kal, kali. 

2) Feminine themes ending in i. 

a) Feminine nouns, which end in Sanskrit and Pra- 
krit in i, remain unchanged in Sindhi, as: ^d^ nadi, 
river, Sansk. ^I^? 'jlL sati, a virtuous woman, Sansk. 
^m? ^1; rani, queen, Sansk. IT^. 

The Prakrit termination ^ (fem.) is occasionally 
changed to i in Sindhi, as: ^Sl; vai, speech, Prak. '^TW, 

Sansk. "^T^ f. ; in some nouns i (Prak.) is shortened to i (e), 
as: ^^ dithe, sight, Prak.f^JJ^, Sansk. "§f%^ Neuter nouns, 
which end in Sansk. in i, may accept in Sindhi the fem. ter- 
mination i, as: ^^<3 dahi, sour milk, Prak. "^f^, Sansk. 
^f^; ^54^Li makhi, honey, Sansk. IITT^^, with eli- 
sion of ^. 

&) The fem. termination i corresponds to the 
Sanskrit-Prakrit affix i, by which feminiucs arc formed 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 43 

from masculine themes. In Sindlii this termination is 
used to derive feminines from masc. bases ending in 

o and u, as: JL^j bhali, fem. good, from the masc. base 

j-JL^j; 4>^ g^li, a slave-girl, from jjj-f a slave; ^i^lU 

bambhani, the daughter or wife of a ^^4-4^5 ^^ Brahman. 

c) The fem. termination i is frequently applied to 

express littleness, smallness, neatness, as: ^^1^ 
kati, a small knife, from ^1^ katu, a large knife; ^jU 

mati, a small jar, from pHo niato, a large jar etc. 

d) The fem. affix i, which corresponds to the Sansk. 
abstract affix TJ, derives abstract nouns from adjec- 
tives and substantives, as: (^^j-^ cori, theft, from ^j.^ 
corn, a thief; ^^ bhali, goodness, from j.-L^j bhalo, 
good; ^^34> dosti, friendship, from o^a-^jo dostu, friend. 

VII. The termination i (e) fem. (m.) 

The ending 'i', which, with a few exceptions, de- 
notes fem. nouns, corresponds to the Sanskrit -Prakrit 
termination I; in others again is has been shortened from 

1, in the same way, as final a from a; e. g.: j»tXj budhe, 
intelligence, Sansk. "^t^? o^i mate, opinion, Sansk. HTrf; 
s\S nare, woman, Sansk. ^Tii. 

The termination i (e) is generally used to derive 
feminines from adjectives and substantives ending in 

u, as: o^j^l acete, thoughtless, masc. o^^^l; y^iXl^ sa- 

dhare, stout, masc. y^oJL; .^dS gadahe, a jenny-ass, 

from jD jLj a jack-ass ; otJ vj parite , a washerwoman, from 

oo>j a washerman. 

In some few nouns the original gender has been 

changed, as: J*f age, fire (fem.), Prak. '^P'TJ (ni.), 



44 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

Sansk. ^|R| m.; ^o dehe (fern.), body, Sansk. "^ 

(m. and n.); in the cognate dialects both are ahke fern. 
It is further to be observed, that in Sindhi final i 
(e) very frequently interchanges with final a, both vow- 
els constituting the regular fern, terminations, e. g.: 

J are or J ara, fondness; vj/ gore or ^:^ gora, thun- 

der etc. Among these we must also reckon forms like ^j 

dhure, origin, Prak. ^JU, short final a having been ex- 
changed for i (e). 

In Sindhi, as well as in the cognate dialects, some few 
masc. nouns have retained the original Sansk. termination 

i , as : yi hare, Vishnu, v:^^^;^ viraspate , the planet Jupiter 

(Thursday) -aj pa-e, lord, husband (== 'RtW)? in others 

again i has been shortened from i, as: ^^aT kehare, lion, 

Sansk. %'5jft^, Hindi cfi^ and ^ft^f i^^ ^^^^® ^^^ 

^SL4^ sahai, a helper. 

To some nouns of foreign origin the termination i 
has also been added, as: &\3j:>. /udae, God (Pers. liXL); 
..^Xu« sethe, a Hindi wholesale merchant (Hindust. --^^aav); 
yj^ Xi^i^^j nom. prop, of a Pir and fabulous prophet. 

Some adjectives, mostly such, as have been bor- 
rowed from a foreign source, take also the termination 

i (m. andfem.), as: ji:^h> x^^^? j^^yf^l (Pers. yii^^); ^^ 

sade, delighted (Pers. jL^); u^^^i- caurase, four-square, 

Sansk. '^¥. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 45 

Chapter II. 
Primary themes. 

§. 7. 

With reference to the formation of themes the Sindhi 
conforms on the whole to the system of the Prakrit, in- 
asmuch as Prakrit themes are directly received into 
the Sindhi with such modifications, as are peculiar to 
the Sindhi; but besides this the Sindhi has set up new 
formations of themes, whereby the inherited stock of vo- 
cables, be they of Arian or non-Arian origin, is peculiarly 
remodelled. As regards the themes taken directly from 
the Prakrit, we must refer to the Sindhi system of sounds 
in our Introduction, which alone can give the necessary 
clue as to the origin or derivation of a theme from the 
Prakrit; in the following we shall only treat of those 
themes, which have been formed either by modifying the 
old inherited stock, or by new rules altogether, irrespective 
of the Prakrit. Nouns of Arabic or Persian origin we 
shall exclude from our present investigation, as they have 
nothing in common with the genuine Sindhi forms, but 
are intruders, without which the Sindhi may well exist; 
they partake so far of the general laws of the formation 
of themes, that a vocalic termination is affixed to them, 
according to their respective gender, to render them sus- 
ceptible of inflexion. 

Whe shall divide the Sindhi formation of themes after 
the precedent of the Sanskrit into two classes, viz: that of 
primary and secondary themes, that is, such themes, 
as are directly derived from verbal roots, and such, 
as are derived from primary nouns, by means of affixes. 



46 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

§. 8. 
I. Formation of abstract nouns. 

I) Themes in a, i (e); u, o (i fern.) 

a) Themes in a are formed from the simple root 
of the verb (which in Sindhi, as weU as in Sanskrit, is 
always monosyllabical , derivative verbs excepted) by 
dropping the Infinitive (verbal) affix anu. In this way 
an abstract noun may be formed from every Infinitive 
of the language, exhibiting the abstract idea of the verb. 
The affix a corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^, 
which is added to the root of the verb (as: Sansk. "5^1, 
worship, from "^[^ to worship) to form abstract nouns; 
in Sindhi final a has been shortened to a; see §. 6, Y. 
e. g.: 

(^U* jaga, wakefulness, Inf. ^\^ to be awake. 

.Sli marha, pardon, Inf. J^iwo to pardon. 

7^, V^^^-) pi'essure, Inf. ^^-Ui to press. 

.4^ sagha, strength, Inf. ^^^^4^ ^^ ^^ strong. 

In some roots 'a' is prolonged to a and 'u' to o , as : 

v£>i-^ jhata, snatching, Inf. ^^^.^.^ to snatch. 

dy^ bhola, error, Inf. ,jJL^ to err. 

Z>) Themes in i (e) are formed in the same way 
as the preceding (i being only a variation of a), with 
this difi'erence, that the root- vowel must always be pro- 
longed (viz: a = a; u = o; i = e), e. g. : 

^Vj^f ghate, descrease. Inf. ^^l^ to descrease. 
(•34^ ghome, vagrancy, Inf. ^^ to wander about. 
^•jj^ verhe, quarrel, Inf. ^^'U to quarrel. 

c) The termination 'u' corresponds to the Sansk. affix 
^, which derives abstract nouns from verbal roots, with 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 47 

or without prolonging the root- vowel; the same is the 
case in Sindhi, where the root- vowel either remains un- 
changed, or is prolonged. E. g.: 

iSl^ marku, boast, Inf. J^i to boast. 
.^Sf lahu, descent, Inf. ^J^i to descent. 
Ij.^ bhoru, crumb, Inf. ,jZ^j to crumble. 
U^^ pheru, turn. Inf. ^^4^ to turn (v. n.). 

d) Themes in o are identical with those in u, 
both terminations interchanging very frequently (see 
§. 6, I. II.). 

pl^ g^^^toj deficiency. Inf. ^^f to decrease. 

^vLi carho, increase, Inf. 0^>^ to rise. 

^y^^ jhagiro, quarrel. Inf. ^I'-iX^ to quarrel. 

^Xl^'i dekharo, showing, Inf. ^^^L^jj to show. 

The masc. termination o is occasionally exchanged 
for the fem. termination 1, with some slight alteration 
of meaning, as: 

^^a^L^. carhi, ascent, Inf. ^'i^ to ascend. 

^.I^Joi dekhari, showing. 

2) Themes in anu, ano, ani, ane. 

a) Themes in anu coincide in Sindhi with the 
form of the Infinitive, which, according to the te- 
stimony of the old Prakrit grammarians, has already 
been the case in the Apabhransha dialect, the Infinitive 
of which terminated in ^^ (compare: Lassen, Instit. 
ling. Prak. p. 469, 5). 

The old Sanskrit Infinitive in ^*^ (the Latin su- 
pinum) has been lost in the modern vernaculars (the 
Gujarat! Infinitive, which ends in "^ is properly a 
neuter Gerundive, and the Bangali infinitive, which ends 
in te, is a past participle, used as a verbal noun) and 



48 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

in its place the verbal noun in ^p^ is substituted, which 
in Marathi has remained neuter (TJ e), but which in 
Sindhi and the other dialects has been classed under the 
masculine termination. The affix anu is added directly 
to the verbal root in Sindhi, and forms abstract nouns, 
corresponding to our Gerunds; as: 

J^S disarm, seeing, root: ,^0. 

^Jbc halanu, going, root: Jjd. 

^iJo maranu, dying, root: li. 

The naked verbal root, as pointed out, is in Sindhi 
nowhere to be met with, but always ends in the Im- 
perative, where alone its crude form comes to light, in 
a vowel, which is either u (in intrans. verbs) or i (e) 
. (in transitive verbs). According to the final vowel of 
the Imperative the junction vowel of the Infinitive or 

verbal noun varies in Siro, as: ^^^sUo marinu (to beat), 

* fjjUi letanu, to recline, but in Lar no regard is had to 

this circumstance , and all Infinitives (irrespective of their 
transitive or intransitive signification) terminate in anu. 
h) Themes in an 5 (which is originally only a 
variation of anu) express in Sindhi more a lasting 
action, occupation or state; e. g.: 

li^*; ^i diano vathano, giving and taking (debt and 
and credit), besides: J;4^'i J^S^? which is also in use. 

jiw^ bharino (or bharano) embroidering (literally: fil- 
ling up). 

dXjSs manino (or manano) betrothal (literally: asking 

[for a bride]). 

Note. It is remarkable , that all the other dialects, with the 
exception of the Bangali and GujaratI, have retained this ter- 
mination of the Infinitive, as: Marathi ^^vT (e being originally 
identical with o, see Lassen §. 144, 2), Hindi (Hindust.) ^T^TT, 
Panjabi: karna. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 49 

c) More frequently than the termination ano, the 
feminine ending ani is used in Sindhi, serving at the 
same time to express smallness, neatness etc. of a 
state or action: 

^^ cavani, saying, Inf. ^^ to say. 

^jJli halani, going, gait (comely), Inf j^^Jli to go. 

^w^ bharini, embroidery, Inf. ^jy^ to fill. 

^^Aij^ vadhani, carpentering, Inf. ^^3^ to cut. 

Occasionally the termination am is shortened to ani 
(ane), as: 

^^f gehane, swallowing (besides: ^^^f)-> Inf. ^^f 

to swallow. 
The affix ani (or ini) joined to roots of causal 
verbs, signifies: expense for, wages for, as: 

^ilL^ khanani, expense for carrying or lifting up 
(porterage). Inf. ^Ll^ to cause to carry. 

^CLi car ani, expense for grazing cattle, Inf Ij")^^ 
to cause to graze. 

^^Cfl^t> dhuarini, expense for washing, Inf ^Jui^^ 
to cause to wash. 

3) Themes in ti. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix f^f, by 
which abstract nouns are derived from verbal roots, be- 
sides those, which are taken over directly from the San- 
skrit. The junction vowel in Sindhi is a, as: 

c>l^ khapate, expense, Inf. J^.1^ to spend. 

o6^ vanate, pleasure. Inf. ^j to please (act.). 

i^^L^ o^l avate javate, income, expense (literally: 

coming, going); as Infinitives they are not used in Sindhi, 
but in Hindi. 

Trumpp, Sindhi- Grrammar. D 



50 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

^iXj^t^- chadate, remission, Inf. ^J.^^^ to remit, 
o^ii halate, behaviour, Inf. ^Ji to go. 

4) Themes in atu, atti (a — u), ati (fem.). 

These affixes correspond to the Sansk. Unadi-affixes 
^TT ^fT which Bopp has justly referred to the In- 
finitive affix 5 = WTT . This is borne out by their sig- 
nification, which in Sindhi nearly coincides with that 
of the Infinitive, as: 

^Cj^f gheratu, surrounding. Inf. '^>.j^ to surround. 
4K^4s- chimkatu, jingling, Inf. ^^jX^^s. to jingle. 

viKi.4? bhunikatu 

> humming, Inf. J^^XI^^ to hum. 
i^Ki..^ bhunika-u 

(by elision of t.) 

j'IIa^. pherati, giddiness, Inf. ^v-^-^j to cause to turn. 

Note. A feminine may thus be derived nearly from all 
masc. bases. 

5) Themes in atru (or: itru). 

The Sindhi affix atru (or itru) corresponds to the 
Sansk. affix ?^^, and denotes an instrument, where- 
with any thing is done or executed. In Lar this affix 
is assimilated to atu (= attu) whereas in Siro the ori- 
ginal compound is preserved (only with transition of t 
into t) ; the root- vowel is lengthened in some themes ; e. g. : 

lic^l^ vajatru, a musical instrument. Inf. ^j^^ to sound. 

lic^; vahitru, a beast of burden. Inf. ^i^ to labour. 

6) Themes in iko. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^Ri (the 
junction vowel 'a' having been changed to i in Sindhi), 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 51 

which in Sanskrit forms nouns of agency, but in Sindhi 
also abstract nouns; as: 

ji^S dariko, quarrelling, Inf. ^jo to quarrel. 

sJSj pitiko, beating the forehead. Inf. ^Jcj to strike 

one's head in grief. 

§. 9. 
n. Formation of appellatives and attributives. 

7) Themes in o. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^^ (final 
^ being commonly elided in Sindhi), and forms attri- 
butives from verbal roots, which imply habitual 
action or possession. The root-vowel, if it be short, 
must be prolonged, as in Sanskrit; e. g. : 

j^ol^ vadho, carpenter, Inf. ^^^ to cut. 

jyxs^ ciro, sawyer. Inf. ^l^^ to split. 

•jij tobo, diver. Inf. ^j to dive. 

jvj-^ ghoro, seeker. Inf. ^j^}4^ to seek. 

In some few instances the full Sansk. affix has been 
preserved, as: 

jCSLf gaiku, singer. Inf. ^}f to sing. 

8) Themes in u. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^^ (final 
^ beeing ehded in Sindhi and u lengthened) and forms 
verbal adjectives or attributives, implying a habitual 
or characteristical action or state. The root- 
vowel, if short, is commonly prolonged before the ac- 
cession of this affix; as: 

^ol^ vadhii, increasing, Inf. ^j^^^j to increase. 

^j\j taru, a swimmer. Inf. '^Ji to swim. 

yo^^ verhu, a quarrelsome person. Inf. ^'U to quarrel. 

D2 



52 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

• vt^j ph5ru, a robber, Inf. '^y-^. to rob. 

Jo^ ghomti, a vagabond, Inf. ^^^^f to stroll about. 
Without prolongation of the root- vowel: 

ypij rahu, inhabitant, Inf. ^"^ to stay. 

y^ sahu, patient, Inf. ^j^ to bear. 

9) Themes in aku, akti, ati. 

This affix denotes the same idea of a habitual 
state or action, as the preceding. It corresponds to 
the Sansk. affix W^ which is added to the verbal root 
either unaltered, or with final 'u' lengthened, or with 
elision of ^ =; a-u. In some instances the root -vowel 
is prolonged. E. g.: 

^^ ^^ ' [ inhabitant, In£ ^^^ to stay. 

^Li^ raha-ti, J ^ 

J^Lo piaku, drinker, Inf ^j to drink. 

^Li.j vircau, wearisome, In£ ^^^^ to be wearied. 

•jlXs^ vekaii, for sale, Inf ^5^ to be sold. 

^li^j petati, ill-wishing. Inf. ^j> to curse. 

10) Themes in and5 (and indo). 
This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^Trf , Prak. 
^•iTt (^^ Sindhi with change of the tenuis into the 
media), and forms in Sindhi, like as in Sanskrit and 
Prakrit, present participles. According to the final 
vowel of the Imperative the participle ends in ando 
(Imperative u) or indo (imperative i); some participles 
are formed irregularly. 

jjd^ lagando, applying, Imper. tXJ, Inf J^j to apply. 
jjolLS disand5, seeing, Imper. y^^, Inf ^^'^ to see. 
ijJjJLygj bhelindo, trampling, Imper. Joy^, Inf ^a^ 
to trample. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 53 

jjcu^j tliindo (irreg.), Imper. ^Ja^j, Inf. J^^^j* to 
become. 

Note, We advert to the fact, that all the other dialects 
have dropped the nasal in the Prak. affix ^rfl^; the PanjabT 
has preserved it in a few forms, as: hunda, being, janda, going, 
but in the regular present participle the affix is always da, with 
change of the tenuis into the media, just as in Sindhl. In Gu- 
jarat! the present participle ends in to, as: ^ISWt l^^^hto, 
writing; in Hindi (Hindtist.) in ta, as: likhta, hota, being etc. 
Hindu! tu, as: f^^fT likh-tu, writing. The Marath! has formed 
two present participial affixes from the Sanskrit affix ^ff ; one 
in ta, corresponding to the Hind! form, as: T^'ferTT? writing, 
with which affix the terminations of the substantive verb ^Tf^T 
coalesce into the forms to, tos etc.; the other in at or !t. The 
Bangal! has discontinued the use of the present participle (with 
the exception of a few Sanskrit participles ending in at) and only 
employs the same in conjunction with the substantive verb ach!, 
as: dekhitechi, I am seeing; but dekhite is by no means to be 
confounded with the Infinitive, as it is commonly represented in 
Bangal! grammars, it is the Locative form of dekhit, and signifies 
literally: I am in seeing (the Locative of the present participle 
is similarly used in Sindh! and Hind!). 

11) Themes in aru, aru, aro. 

These affixes correspond to the Sansk. affix W^, 
and form in Sindhi verbal nouns, which imply a ha- 
bitual action or occupation; their number is not very 
considerable; as: 

^Vf^^ _ _ (a pedlar. Inf. '^\y^ to seek. 
^;^;>-^^ ghoraru, J 

SjLi^j ptijaro, a worshipper, Inf. ^^^j to worship. 

jsLixAj piiiaro, a cotton carder, Inf. ;j;.io ^^ card 

cotton. 

^Lajo penaru, a beggar, Inf. '^^ to beg. 



54 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

12) Themes in ib5. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix rf^, in- 
credible as this may appear. In Sindhi rT has been elided 
and vv {= ^) hardened to b {= bb). It forms now in 
Sindhi present participles passive, though its original 
use and signification has still been preserved in the for- 
mation of the future passive; as: 

j-JL]^ busatib5, being choked, In£ ^'Ll^ to choke. 

>^?i;S drohibo, being cheated, Inf. ^^jjt) to cheat. 

j^i^ jhalibo, being seized, Inf. ^\^l^ to seize. 

13) Themes in in5. 

We have in Sindhi two themes in ino, which are 
quite of different origin and signification. 

a) The affix ino, added to such verbs, as end in 
the Imperative in u, corresponds to the Sanskrit affix 
^H, which forms attributives and appellatives; in Sindhi 
the affix ana has been changed to ino; e. g.: 

j-Lbo halino, going, Imper. Jii. 

j.i5lvo murkin5, laughing, Imper. c^wo. 

yfyj^ chirkin5, shying, Imper. jCg^. 

py^ bhurino, crumbling, Imper. y^. 

j-Uj pinino, begging, Imper. ^j. 

Some of these attributives are also used substantively, 
and as such they are also susceptible of the fem. ter- 
mination, as:' 

lUdg^ chinkind, rattle, i. e. that which rattles. 

^^y-^, phirin5, spooling -wheel, i. e. that which turns 

round. 

jj^lifc> dhavane, a pair of bellows, i. e. that which 

blows (the fire). 

h) The other affix ino or ano corresponds to the 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 55 

Sanskrit affix ^^7}, by which the future passive par- 
ticiple is formed in Sanskrit. Thus in Sindhi a Gerundive 
may be derived from every transitive verb by means 
of this affix, as: 

jJnU marin5, one who is to be beaten, Inf. ^^Ixi to beat. 

^^ diano, what is to be given. Inf. J^^ to give. 

^juj^o dhuano, what is to be washed. Inf. ^^^J^o to wash. 
jX^'^ rathano, what is to be taken, Inf. 0^** to take. 

In the same way a gerundive is derived form causal 
verbs, as: 

jijC; varain5, what ought to be returned. Inf. ^f^j 

to return (act), 
jisuit^ dhuarino, what ought to be caused to wash. 

Inf. j|j>L^4> to cause to wash. 

Note. In Hindi and Hindustani the Gerundive coincides 
with the Infinitive, with this difference, that the Gerundive is 
properly a masc. substantive, and therefore only a Gerund; very 
rarely the Infinitive is employed as a Gerundive proper (i. e. 
future passive participle), agreeing with its governing noun in 
gender, as in Sindhi. The Panjabi on the other hand quite 
agrees with the Sindhi in this respect, using the Infinitive as a 
regular Gerundive, agreeing with the governing noun in gender, 
number and case, like an adjective. The Mar at hi forms the 
Gerundive by the affix ^^ffcfj (^H*^^ ^ff"^), which corresponds 
to the Sansk. affix ff^, Prak. rf^; in MarathI rf has been 
elided and in its place V lengthened, as: ^TT'^TT faciendus, 
l^^^T"^ dirumpendus. In a similar way the Gerundive is formed 
in GujaratI by the affix ^^ (= fTW) ^s: ^^^"Spf scribendus. 
In Ban gall occurs no proper formation of a Gerundive, but 
the Infinitive (in distinction from the verbal noun) is ge- 
nerally employed to express the idea of a Gerund , like in Hindi, 
as: amake jaite hai, mihi eundum est; but many original Ge- 
rundive forms are borrowed directly from the Sanskrit, as: kar-- 
tavya etc., the affix aniya is also in use. 



56 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

14) Themes in io or yo. 

The affix io or jo is used to derive perfect par- 
ticiples; it corresponds to the Sanskrit affix rl, Pra- 
krit already ^, and frequently altogether elided, for 
which reason y or i is inserted in Sindhi, to prevent 
the hiatus. 

The perfect participle of transitive verbs always 
implies a passive signification, whereas that of in- 
transitive verbs only expresses the idea of the 
Prseterite. 

In many instances the Sindhi ha& preserved the ori- 
ginal Sanskrit -Prakrit forms of the perfect participles, 
modified according to the laws of elision and assimilation 
current in Sindhi. 

^^u^J pasyo (or j.aa^S pasio) seen, Inf. ,^^j to see. 

^.A-L^ jhalyo (or: j^.^^ jhalio) seized, Inf j^^^i^ 

to seize. 
jjG^x) moty5 (or: 0yjo motio), returned. Inf. ^yi to 

return. 
j^'j ditho, seen; Sansk. ^^, Prak. f^ZT; Inf J^-^S 

to see. 
^•f uto, said; Sansk. '^^, Prak. TWt; Inf. ^] to say. 

Note. In reference to the formation of the perfect participles 
(the perfect participle active in cfff has completely disappeared 
from the grammar of the modern vernaculars) a great variation 
is to be noticed in the cognate dialects. The Panjabi, Guja- 
rat!, Hindi and Hindustani quite agree in this point with 
the Sindhi, as Panjabi: ghallia, sent. Inf. ghallna; GujaratI: 
lakhyo, written; Hindi (Hindust.): likha (without insertion of 
euphonic i or y in the place of elided t or d), Inf. likhna. 

The MarathT differs considerably in this respect from the 
idioms mentioned; it forms the perfect participle by affixing ^T 
to the root of the verb (with the junction vowel a or i, according 
to the intransitive or transitive signification of a verb). The 
first traces of this affix must be sought already in Prakrit; the 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 57 

Sansk. rf has been changed in Prakrit to the corresponding media 
F, and this again to 5 (d); see Lassen: Instit. linguae Prak., 
p. 363. We have seen already (Introd. §. 6, 4) that 5 is fre- 
quently changed to 5 I" i^ ^^^ modern idioms, and this is again 
exchanged for 1; as: x|lc?5cO| gone, Inf. xfT^TJj; ^T5^T 
broken, Inf. ^JS^, 

The Bangali coincides in this point quite with the Hindi, 
as: dekha, seen (without insertion of euphonic i or y). 



Chapter III. 
Secondary themes. 

§. 10. 

Under this head we shall class all those themes, 
which are derived from other nouns by means of an 
affix. We shall pass again all those forms, which have 
been taken directly from the Sanskrit-Prakrit, and only 
treat of those formations, which are peculiar to the 
Sindhi. 

I. Formation of abstract nouns. 

Abstract nouns may be derived either from sub- 
stantives or adjectives, the affixes which the Sindhi 
uses for this purpose, agree all, more or less, with the 
primitive Sanskrit -Prakrit affixes. 

1) Themes in i. (f.) 

By the affix i a very numerous class of abstract 
nouns is formed, which, after the analogy of the Per- 
sian, may be derived from any noun. The final vowel 
is always dropped before this affix, but in other respects 
the noun undergoes no change whatever. 

The affix i corresponds to the Sanskrit affix IJ (n.); 
in Sindhi as well as in the other dialects the feminine 



58 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

form 1, which is already current in Sanskrit, has alone 
been retained; e. g.: 

{S)}=^ ^^ri, theft, from [^ coru, thief 

i^(XjJo mandi, wickedness, from jtXLo mando, wicked. 

^^^kami, deficiency, from ^ kame, deficient. 

2) Themes in ai. (f) 

The affix ai is only a variation of the preceding 
affix; final u (= o) and 5 are not dropped, as before 
the preceding affix, but changed to a (as in the other 
dialects) to keep their place; e. g.: 

^j^io nirmalai, purity, from JColj nirmalu, pure. 

^\'i^ kurai, falsity, from jj^ kuro, false. 

Both forms are therefore frequently used indiffe- 
rently, as: 

J^ bhali, goodness, or: ^^Lgj bhalai, from jJ^j 

bhal5, good. 

3) Themes in ta and tai. (f.) 
The affix ta forms in Sindhi a very numerous class 
of abstract nouns from attributives and adjectives; the 
final vowel is always dropped and the union- vowel i in- 
serted (except when the noun ends in i). The affix ta 
corresponds to the Sanskrit affix rTT, which is used for 
the same purpose in Sanskrit. Besides the affix ta, the 
emphatic form with i (ta-i) is also in use; e. g.: 

L£x^ ghatita, 
^(i^^f ghatitai, 

Li^^ jogita, fitness, from «J^ jog^? fit. 

4) Themes in te; ti. (f) 

The affix te, which is else only used with pri- 
mary formations, is in Sindhi also (though very rarely) 
found with secondary formations; the affix ti, which is 



want, from o^^^ ghate, deficient. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 69 

also occasionally to be met with, is only a variation of 
te (i having been lengthened to i); as: 

^^•Xl savate, straightness , from ^j-a-lL sao, straight. 

^-i±^r ghatiti, deficiency, from viiu^ gliate, deficient. 

Note. The affix ti is also used in Hindustani, as: ^^^ 

deficiency, from [V^. 

5) Themes in ane or aine. (f) 

These affixes form a numerous class of abstract 
nouns from adjectives implying colour or some other 
inherent quality. They correspond to the Sanskrit affix 
?[JH^, which forms abstract masc. nouns. In Prakrit 
the termination ^l^ may already be lengthened to ^^ 
(cf. Yar. Y, 47); in Sindhi TT (m) has been elided, which 
is rather uncommon, and a feminine termination sub- 
stituted for the masculine; the i of iman has been dropped 
= ane, whereas in the form aine i has been inserted 
after a, to render the V more prominent. E. g.: 

jTjLg^f achane, whiteness, from j-§^l acho, white. 

^IIXj^ vekirane, breadth, from j^J^ vekir5, broad. 

^J\i^ vadane, gTeatness, from jo^ vaclo, great. 

The affix ane (aine) is very often exchanged for the 
affix ai (see 2.), and with many nouns both affixes are 

promiscuously used, as: ^\l^ or ^jl;i? blackness. 

Note. In Hindi and Hindustani the affix ma (= ^TH*?) 
is rarely used, and no longer as a mascuhne; e. g. : garima, f., 
importance. In Gujurati the affix an is used (as neuter) e. g.: 
sj^^fu depth, from ^^T ^^ep; the Mara thi and Bangali hare 
preserved the original Sansk. termination ma (as masc). In Pan- 
jabi, as in Gujarat!, the form an (m.) is used, as: ucan, m., 
height, from uca, high. 

6) Themes in po, pa, pai, pi; panu, pano; tanu; atu. 

These affixes form a very numerous class of abstract 

nouns from substantives and adjectives. _ We can see in 



60 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

this instance, how the Sindhi has menaged to derive 
from one and the same Sanskrit affix a whole series of 
abstract affixes, which at the first glance seem to have 
nothing in common. 

The affixes po, pa, pal, pi are derived from the 
Sansk. abstract-affix i^ tva, which is assimilated to "OCT 
(see Introd. §. 15, D, b.); from this the Sindhi has formed 
the various terminations pa, pa, pal, pi. 

From the self-same affix f^, which has become r^<U 
in Prakrit (from an original nH), and which has been 
assimilated in the Apabhransha dialect to w^fll (see 
Lassen, p. 459, 9.) the Sindhi has derived the affixes 
panu or pano. 

From the same source has also sprung the affix 
tanu, but by a different process of assimilation, the 
semi -vowel v being assimilated to the preceding dental 
(cf. §. 15, D, b.). 

Another form of assimilation is the affix atu (viz: 
tva = tta = tta = ata, the double consonant being 
cleared away by lengthening the preceding vowel), which 
is only rarely used. 

The final vowels undergo various changes before the 
accession of the above mentioned affixes; final u is ge- 
nerally changed to 'a' or T, with the exception of the 
fem. nouns ending in 'u', which preserve 'u' (as radical) 
before all affixes; final o is either weakened to 'a' or 
changed to o; final i is either shortened to 'i', or with 
a subsounding 'a' to 'ia', which is mostly the case before 
the heavy affixes panu, pano; final u is shortened to V 
with a subsounding 'a' (= ua) before the heavy affixes 
panu, pan5; long u though keeps now and then its place 
before them; before the lighter affixes po, pa, pai, pi 
final u is shortened even to 'i' (for euphony's sake). Final 
short V may be lengthened to a, to distinguish the fe- 
minine themes from those ending in V; but this depends 
on usage. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

a) final u: 

j.i.IjJaJ panditapano, m. The duty of a pandit; 

from ;;i)JlJ. 
i^l31^ chokiratu, m. The time of youth; 

from jij-^ chokaru, a boy. 
Cv4^*i vathupa; f. assistance; 

from ^^j fem. laying hold of. 

b) final o: 



61 



.jLIiJaS nandhapai, f. 



Jj^JUi nandhapanu, m. 
jjuooJuS nandhepo, m. 

c) final i: 
vl^l^ vahipa, f. 
jj^l; vahipo, m. 



Time of youth ; from j.;o JuS 
nandho, small. 



The duty of a ^\j m. or watchman. 



<^A^Job' kandhiapa, f. 
0.15:^ Jo (^ kandhiapanu, m. 



The offixe of a ^Jol^ 

kandhi, one who gives 
a shoulder in carrying 
a corpse. 

^.^Sio mukhitanu, the duty of a ^^^^Sio mukhi or 

headsman. 

d) final u: 



humanity, from ,j^-^Lo manhu 
man. 



^-•j^iLo manhipo, 

jiljc^Uo manhuapano, 

jixj^yo mirupan5, bestiality, from jj^y? miru, wild beast. 

e) final a: 
^13 > ranapanUj widowhood, from ,jT rana, a widow, 
j^^l; zalapanu, womanhood, from J('\ a woman. 



62 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

Note. These abstract affixes are to be met with in all the 
cognate idioms. The Hindi and Hindustani use the affixes 
pan, pana and pa, corresponding to the SindhT forms panu, 
pano and po. The GujarathT: pan and panii (both neut.); the 
Marathi: pan (n.) and pana (m.); the Panjabi: puna. The Ban- 
gal i comes nearest to the Sanskrit in this respect, having re- 
tained the original abstract affix tva unaltered. 

7) Themes in karu, karo, kara, kare. 

These themes fall under our consideration in this 
place not so much on account of their formation, as 
their signification, for we have here not to deal with 
an affix, but with an adjective, used to form com- 
pounds , and signifying : making, e f f e c t in g. In Sindhi 
the original signification of ^TT. has been already ob- 
literated , and it is now used in the same way as an 
affix, to form a number of abstract nouns; e. g.: 

js 1X^(^50 luchikaro, uneasiness, properly: that which 

makes . (^<v^ lucha, or being tossed about. 

^li3^ vanakaru, 



^U3j vanakare, 



wood, forest; properly: that which 
produces trees (jj^). 

TLjG&Jl^* thadhekara, cool temperature; properly: that 
which makes coolness (^J^*). 

8) Themes in ko and o. 

The affix ko serves originally to derive adjectives, 
and corresponds to the Sansk. affix ?[J^; but in Sindhi 
it is sometimes used (as the preceding affix «BTT.) to form 
abstract nouns; the affix o is identical with ko, k 
having been ehded. E. g.: 

sX^js\.J luchiko, uneasiness; the same as: J.LX44J. 

j-)vyot> dhuryo, a duststorm; properly: that which makes 

sand (j^4>). 



SECTION I. THE F0R3UTI0X OF THE3IES. 63 

§. 10. 

n. Formation of apellatives, attributives and 
possessives. 

9) Themes in i. 

This affix, vrliicli in SincUhi and the kinclrecl idioms 
is so frequently employed, has sprung from three dif- 
ferent sources: 

a) The affix i, correspondiiig to the Sanskrit affix ?[«fi. 

This affix forms attributives and appellatives of 
various sigmfications ; the root- vowel is generally length- 
ened before the addition of this affix, i. e. 'a'* becomes a; 
'i : e: 'u' : 5: e. g.: 

^^^jl othi. a camel-rider, fr^om ^'t uthu. camtL 

,c*iU bakhi:. a seller of vegetables . from SS bakarii. 
v^' ■ - > • 

vegetables. 

,cJC^-2J>" thekiri. a seller of earthen - vrare : from 1x1^' 

thekini. earthen- ware. 

h) The affix i. coiTesponding to the Sansk. affix 

This affix denotes in all the modem vernaculars 
descent or relationship. Before its addition to a 
noun a final short vowel is di^opped. long u is shortened 
to V. and o is changed to a. Li some instances final 
short "'u' ('shortened frx'm oi is changed to a {= oi and 
thus preserved: e. g.: 

^tXlw sindhi. of Sindh. frxm .ijj-^ f. sindhu. the 

country of Sindh. 

^tU^ hindiu. relating to a Hindu, from .jJ^. hindiu 

a Hindu. 

^Vlarl. ) 

of Lar. fr'om ■•^» m. laru. Lower Sindh. 



,^I^;N' larai. 



y 



64 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

^11^ sirai, of Sir5, from j^^ siro, Upper Sindh. 

c) The affix i, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ?f<r^. 
(N"om. Sing, i.) 

The Sindhi affix i serves to form possessive nouns, 

like the Sansk. affix ?[*5.5 ^- g-- 

j^.^13 dahi, complainant, from ^t3 daha, con^laint. 

^f^s rogi, sick, from J^s rogu, sickness. 

^U mall, gardener, Sansk. ^iRfJr^. 

In such formations, as are peculiar to the Sindhi, 
a final short vowel may keep its place before the 
affix 1, as: 

^^Co matai, tenacious of one's opinion or sect, from 

oti make opinion or religion (final V being exchanged 

for 'a', for euphony's sake). 

10) Themes in ai. 

The affix ai is only a variation of the affix i (9, a), 
final 'u' and o of such themes, as end in 'u' and 5 being 
again changed before it to a; nouns thus formed imply 
an occupation, habit or tendency, as: 

^l? L? bagai, gardener, from cAJ bagu, garden. 

^L^AJ necai, a maker of huqqah-snakes , from ^-^^y 

neco a huqqah-snake. 

^Ij.^.> jhagirai, a quarreller, from jj^^ jhagiro, 

quarrel. 

11) Themes in u. 

The affix ti, corresponding to the Sansk. affix "^^, 
is added to substantives, by means of which, as in the 
primary formations, apellatives and adjectives are 
derived, denoting an habitual action or state. A final 
vowel is always dropped before the addition of this affix; 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 65 

in some nouns the first vowel is lengthened at the same 
time; e. g.: 

yd\i hanti, injurious, from pLi hane, injury. 

• 1). veru, revengeful, from o^ veru: enmity. 

loL^ chapirti, a mountaineer, from vl^ chaparu, 

a range of hills. 
^r^^ bakhiru, a man of Bakhar, from ^.^ bakharu, 

a town of upper Sindh. 

12) Themes in au. 

The affix au is identical with the preceding, the 
only difference being that the final vowel of the theme 
is lengthened before the affix u (fin. u = a r:= a). 

yjiSolio dharmati, religious, from r»vii> dharmu, religion. 

^UoLci sarmati, bashful, from, jllco sarmu, shame, 
modesty. 

13) Themes in ao. 

The affix ao is already so much corrupted, that its 
origin is scarcely recognisable; it corresponds to the 
Sanskrit affix *iM, which forms adjectives, denoting 
"made of, consisting of." The labial m has been 
elided in this affix as well as in the abstract affix lE^^R^, 
and a has been lengthened in compensation thereof. The 
semi -vowel y has likewise disappeared, ao = ayo; the 
final Anusvara is altogether euphonic and more or less 
optional; e. g.: 

jjj.j|^dli haidrao, made of ^jLli haidra, turmeric. 

^jjL^Il^ jambhao, made of j-^jLi jambho, a kind 
of oil-seed. 

^jj.jliJ lohao, made of ^j.j lohu, iron. 

14) Themes in o. 
This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^; it 

Trumpp, Sindhi- Grammar. E 



66 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

forms adjectives and attributives in the largest sense. The 
final short vowel of a noun is always dropped before this 
affix, and u and i are shortened. The root- vowel either 
remains unaltered or is lengthened, viz: 'a' to a, i to e 
and V to o; as: 

j.^C^ sagho, strong, from .^^ sagha, strength, 

jjo^ vingo, crooked, from jCj^ vingu, a crook. 

*jJi^ bhakuo, stupid, from ySC^ bhaku, a blockhead. 

5-f^.5 veco, mediator, from -.^ vicu, midst. 

' - - _ _ _ > " - 

}^j)^ baroco, of a Beluch, from --3*.^ barocu, a Beluch. 

j^jl otho, of a camel, from ..^'l uthu, camel. 

i^L5 gao, of a cow, from ^y^ gaii, cow. 
Iregular formations are: 

i^Lc mahyo, of a buffalo, from ..^JLyo mehe, a buffalo. 

^js^ll saio, hundredth (per cent), from Jlj sau, hundred. 

15) Themes in aru (aru), aro; alu. 
These affixes correspond to the Sansk. affix ^TT^ 
(in Prakrit likewise ^^ cf Yar. IV, 26), which forms 
possessive nouns. In Sindhi r and 1 are interchanged, 
and in some nouns aru has been shortened to aru. The 
root -vowel commonly remains unaltered, but in some 
nouns 'u' is changed to 6 (i. e. 'u' takes Guna); as: 

.LL«oo meharu, or a buffalo keeper, from ..g^-yo mehe, 
L^x> meharu, buffalo. 

ooW cotyaru, having a f^^}^ coti, bundle of hair on 

the crown of the head. 

]Ui4> dhanaru, a herdsman, from J^<^ dhanu, a herd 
of cattle. 

sL^Jjl otharu, a camel-herd, from ..^1 uthu, camel. 

Jll^ javalu, containing barley, from ^ jau, barley. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 67 

Some of these formations, with the affix alu or alo, 
are used in a substantive sense, their original possessive 
signification being more or less lost, as: 

JGi^ gharyalu, j ^ ^°"^' ^^^^^^^^^^ containing or 

^Uj^ gharyalo, j expressing the hour {^^. 

JL5 dialu, candlestick; literally: having a light (^o). 

Jll^^ jhuralo, cloudiness; literally: containing clouds 



16) Themes in iro and ilo, or: ero and elo. 

These affixes correspond to the Sansk. '^'^ and "^^ 
and form attributives, signifying: habit, quality or 
intensity; ero and elo have sprung from the Prakrit 
affix ilia (Var. IV, 25); e. g.: 

iyxi&jJL^ khandhiro, patient, from ^jJL^ khandhe, 

patience. 

p^A^jci hathilo, obstinate, from ,-gii hathu, obstinacy. 

jo«jL§^ chavero, 1 

',-* v-,^--.- [ shadowy, from pL^ chava, shade. 

jJL}w§^* tharelo, of the Thar, having the custom of the 

Thar or desert. 
dLc*^ camelo, leathern, from ^ camu, leather. 

17) Themes in iru. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^ (with 
the union -vowel i) and forms attributives and appel- 
latives as well as possessive nouns; a final vowel, short 
or long, is always dropped before the addition of this 
affix; e. g.: 

l^iXll sandhiru, a house-breaker, from j^d^ sandhe, 

a hole in a wall. 



E2 



68 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

1jL4s> jhatiru, a peeper, from ^L^:^ jliati, looking 

througb. a hole. 
1.^1x4^. chimbhiru , a rebuker, from ^^^rs. chim- 

bba, rebuke. 
Lj^ jhapiru, one who snatches, from j-^yg^ j^apo, 

a snatch. 

licAj petiru, a glutton, from ouj petu, belly. 

i i 

yo^ vihiru, poisonous, from Ja^ f. poison. 

18) Themes in atu and alu. 

This affix has sprung from the Sanskrit affix HfT 
by elision of fl; in some nouns 'a' has been lengthened, 
to compensate for the elision of m; it forms possessive 
nouns, just as in Sanskrit; e. g. : 

vLul4^ bharyatu, a porter, from {^y^ bhari, a man's 

load. 

oJ^vj.j porhiatu, a labourer, from j--v?;>^. porhio, labour. 

oUaj^ dianyatu, a debtor, from ^^^^'i diani, a debt. 

19) Themes in eto (ito). 

The Sindhi affix eto corresponds to the Sansk. affix 
^iT, denoting "to be provided with", to possess as one's 
own. The short i of the Sansk. affix has in Sindhi been 
produced to e, on account of the accent; the final vowel 
is always dropped before this affix; e. g.: 

j.Aj^. putreto, having a son, from y!b patru, son. 
j.;cax»4> dhieto, having a daughter, from ^^,:> dhia, 

daughter. 
j.xAjj.:s^ joeto, having a wife, from &ys^ joe, wife. 

j.AjLgJ bhaito, having a brother, from iL^ bhau, 

brother. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 69 

20) Themes in aito. 

This affix is identical with the preceding in de- 
rivation and signification, the only difference being that 
final o, V and 'a' are changed before it to a, as: 

j.Aj|^l; varaito, adj., at the right time, from j^!^ 

varo, time. 
sjcjL^ sajhaito, adj., opportune, from ^^ sajhu, 

opportunity. 
tAjlil; vataito, having a road, from ^^^ vata, a road. 

21) Themes in ru and lu. 

a) The affix ru corresponds to the Sansk. diminutive 
affix T,, and is affixed to adjectives and participles present, 
with some slight variation of the original meaning; when 
added to adjectives the root -vowel is now and then 
lengthened. Final 'u' and o are changed to 'a' before the 
addition of this affix; i remains unaltered. 

•ij^T khabaru, left-handed, from j^4^ khabo, left. 

*i^Ll sajaru, right-handed, from j^Ll sajo, right. 

'-f^^ khasaru, sterile, from (j-*4^ khasu, not fully 
developed. 

y-U^cf^\^ kachiro, of the province of Kach, from ^4=^l^, 

a Kachi. 
'^dJ^^S3 likhandaru, a writer, from jtXl^ part. pres. 

writing. 

h) The affix lu is identical with the affix ru (r [r] 
= 1) and turns preterite participles into simple adjectives; 
it is seldom found with adjectives, the signification of 
which it does not change materially. 

Jo^ vialu, lost, from ^^ vio, gone, lost. 
Jl§j(3 dithalu, seen, from y^'s3 ditho, seen. 



70 SECTION I. THE FOKMATION OF THEMES. 

J|^^ vistiralu, simple-minded, from jv^^ visuro, 

simple-minded. 

Similarly in Prakrit the affix r or 1 (dimin.) is 
added to nouns and adjectives, without essentially al- 
tering their signification (cf. Yarar. IV, 26), as Sansk. 
f^lT lightening, Prak. f^'5|[or fsjl^^; iftfT yellow, 
Prak. xH*^ or: xft'^^y. 

The same affix ^5T we notice in the Mar at hi, 
where it is added to preterite participles to turn them 
into real adjectives, as: xn^^^^f gone (from x| I^^T) ? 
Ht'fe^^ broken (from ^'^[^); the same holds good 
in Grujarati, as: ^%^, written (Adj.) (from cfii^Jt). 

22) Themes in iryo. 
The affix iryo is originally compounded of the di- 
minutive affix T. {=^ r) and the adjectival affix yo ('^); 
it forms adjectives and attributives denoting inclination 
or hesitation; e. g.: 

^j^tX.^ sadhiryo, half-wishing; literally: being some- 
what disposed to wish. 
^y-js^^f ghoriryo, a pedlar; i. e. one who is inclined 

to seek out. 
^jvoLj periryo, a walker; literally: disposed to travel 

afoot. 
^'jxiyj paramatiryo, easily persuaded; literally: dis- 
posed to take another's counsel. 

23) Themes in aku and akti. 

These Unadi- affixes, which else only occur with 
primary themes, are in Sindhi also used (but very ra- 
rely) in secondary formations, as: 

S\''U^cs^ jheraku, quarrelsome, from jv-v-^^ jhero, 
^\'U^:^ jheraku, contention. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 71 

24) Themes in iko. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^ (in 
Sindhi with the addition of the union-vowel i) and forms 
adjectives, denoting relation, quality etc. A final 
vowel, short or long, is dropped before this affix; final 
u alone is shortened to 'u' and takes the union -vowel 'a' 
instead of 'i'; e. g. : 

ji^Ljf^ vapariko, mercantile, from xLIf: vaparu, trade. 

yGI^ vaniko, relating to a j^l^ vanyo or shopkeeper. 

^Li hariko, relating to a (^^Li hari or peasant. 

yS^yjQ miruako, brutal, from ^^y^ miru, a wild beast. 

25) Themes in ico or eco. 

These affixes have sprung from the Sansk. affix ^^, 
and form adjectives denoting descent or origin. In 
Sindhi 'i' has been lengthened to i or even to e, and the 
guttural k has been exchanged for the palatal c. The 
final vowel, short or long, is always cast ofi" before these 
affixes; e. g. : 

^^^^f gotheco, of the same village, from ^}f go- 

thu, village. 
j.^*jLj par eco, of the same quarter, from ^'^Lj paro, 

quarter. 

j^.;^ pareco, of the opposite side, from ^U adv., op- 

posite. 
j-^^jj^ verhico, of the jungle, from ^yJ^ verhe, jungle. 

26) Themes in oko. 

This affix, which is added only to nouns or ad- 
verbs, denoting time, is identical with the affix ^; the 
union-voWel o is peculiar and not to be met with else- 
where; every final vowel, short or long, is dropped be- 
fore it; e. g.: 



72 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

^}s^)^ varehoko, yearly, from J^s^ varehu, year. 

j.5j.jfr ratokd, nightly, from c^l^ rate, night. 

j.5j.iLi hanoko, recent, from ^iLS hane, now. adj. 

j.5j^JI^ kalhok5, of yester (day or night), from ^Jl5^ 
kalha, yesterday, adv. 

j.5j^j paroko, of last year, from wj (fem.) last year. 
A few other adjectives are formed by the same 
affix, with the further difference, that the root -vowel 
is lengthened, as: 

jfjsOJls^ candroko, moonlight, from ^JL^i. candru, 
moon. 

27) Themes in ano (anu, ino), ahiko. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ?[r?, and 
forms adjectives denoting relation or descent. It is 
remarkable, that the original union -vowel 'i' has been 
dislodged in Sindhi and a substituted in its place (com- 
pare with this such Latin forms, as: romanus, afri- 
canus). The adjectives, formed by the affix ano may 
moreover add the affix ko (with the union vowel 'i'), 
so that we thus have adjectives with a double affix, 
which do not materially differ from the simple forms 
in ano; e. g.: 

jiljj.£s. corano, 

^.f V- _ -T - f of a thief, from sis. corn, thief. 
jXaKj-ss. coraniko, /"•• ' 

jili lucano, rascally, from ^ luco, rascal. 

jiU^t) dhiano, of a daughter, from ^^^^ dhia, daughter. 

ji byo miruano, of a wild beast, from ^^>f miru, wild 

beast. 
jiUL^ bhayano, of a partner, from ^SL^ bhai, 

partner. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 73 

In a few nouns a short root -vowel is lengthened, as: 
jil'^JoLi candrand 



^j^CJoLi candranu, 
jJ>JoLi candrino, 



moonlight, from ^0<Xs^ candru, 
moon. 



28) Themes in uno (uniko). 

a) This affix is identical with the preceding, but 
the union-vowel has been exchanged for u; in signification 
there is no difference; e. g.: 

ji^j-gJLuA; sethuno, of a Seth, from ..^1^ sethe, a whole- 
sale merchant. 
jiy»l* vatuno, oral, from o)L^ vatu, mouth. 
py^^ aguno, preceding, from J*! agu, front. 

ji^Jt^ kalhuno, of yester ( — day or night), from ^^ 
kalha, yesterday. 
To the affix uno the affix k5 (iko) may be super- 
added , without altering the signification in any way, as : 

jXj«5*l agunikd, the same as: jiy^l aguno. 

h) There is another affix uno, which is joined to 
numerals, identical in form with the preceding, but 
of different origin. It is derived from the Sansk. noun 
TXTjf (quahty), with elision of g in Sindhi and pro- 
longation of u. In Panjabi both forms, guna and una, 
are in use, so that there cannot remain any doubt about 
its derivation.^) It forms adjectives from numerals, 
signifying: having such a quality, or: manifold, as: 

iijjCjo hekuno, single (having a single quality), from 
^> ,"1 

cXxis heku, one. 
jj^-^j panjuno, quintuple, from "Xi panja, five. 

pyl, sauno, hundredfold, from ^Z^ sati, hundred. 



1) Compare also the Persian iuli^ as: JuLS^O twofold etc. 



74 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

29) Themes in ani. 

This affix, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ^|^f^ 
forms patronymics or nouns denoting descent; the short 
final T of the Sansk. affix has been lengthened in Sindhi, 
as in other similar nouns. A final short vowel is dropped 
before this affix , likewise o ; final i is changed to y (= i) 
and u is shortened; e. g.: 

^^\Sy^' mahmudani, son or descendant of c>yj^ 

mahmudu. 

^iG^I aryani, son of ^s\ ari. 

^b3f aduani, son of ^Sl adu. 
^LT IS bagani, son of j.5^Lj bag5. 

30) Themes in ino. 

This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^^^ and 
forms adjectives denoting relation or descent; as: 

^IXlI sanino, affianced, from iX^ sanu, connexion 

by marriage. 

)X^j vasino, subjected, from J.^, power. 

31) Themes in atho. 

This affix coincides with the Sansk. affix ^fZ (with 
transition of t into th); it forms possessive nouns, as in 
Sanskrit; e. g.: 

j^'LoLj panyatho, damp (containing water), from ^Lj 

pani, water. 

^^^(^s^ chabaratho, containing vl^^ chabaru, a kind 
of grass. 

32) Themes in aso (asii). 

This affix, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ^, 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 75 

forms adjectives, denoting ^'to be full of", to be pro- 
vided with"; as union -vowel a has been inserted; as: 

^LjjI^ varyaso, sandy, from ^y^ van, sand. 
(j^lljo mavasu, full of pride, from ^i mau, pride. 

33) Themes in haru or haro. 

This affix is in Sindhi and in the cognate dialects 
added to verbal nouns (i. e. the Infinitive); it forms a 
kind of participle, which is commonly used as a sub- 
stantive noun. In Mar at hi it forms the participle 
future, as it implies at the same time the notion of some 
future act or state; in Sindhi too it is now and then 
used in a future sense. It is to be noted though, that 
the Marathi affix is not "^T^, as commonly shown in 
Marathi grammars, but ^l\; a like mistake is generally 
to be met with in Gujarat! grammars, where it is stated 
to be «TrT.. In Marathi and Grujarati the form of the 
affix is clearly enough ^STR, corresponding to the Sansk. 
adjective ^TT., making, doing, with elision of ^. In 
Sindhi, Hindi and Panjabi it is har, which form is to 
be explained in this way, that initial ^ has been ori- 
ginally aspirated by the following ^ (which is very 
frequently the case in Sindhi), and then elided, leaving 
h (see In trod. §. 8). In Sindhi the form haru, haro, is 
only added to the Infinitive, in other themes the original 
form karu has been retained unaltered; e. g.: 

sL^^y^ sirjanaharu, the creator, In£ jj^^^Ca*/ to create. 

^L^.^j likhanaharu, a writer, or one, who is about 

to write; Inf. J)4^ ^^ write. 

34) Themes in karu, karu. 

The original adjective form karu (in Sindhi also 
shortened karu) is also (but rarely) in use; it forms ad- 
jectives and attributives from substantives; as union- 
vowel a is inserted: 



76 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

^^Ij-S^-T^ jterakaru, I quarrelsome, causing quarrel, 
'Sfu^^:- jherakaru, | from j^^g^ jliero, quarrel. 

35) Themes in vanu. 

The Sindhi has preserved in this affix the JSTom. 
Sing, of the Sansk. affix <=lr!^ (= van), and discarded 
the Prakrit form cpjf^; the same is the case in the 
cognate dialects, with the exception of the Grujarati, 
which uses the termination ^J{^ It forms adjectives, 
implying possession; e. g.: 

^I^Lj5 dayavanu, compassionate, from LI5 daya, com- 
passion. 

J^ljLi^ vijavanu, learned, from ILy vija, learning. 
j^ly-^Aw silavanu, virtuous, from JkA-w silu, virtue. 

36) Themes in vara 

This is one of the most useful affixes of the 
modern vernaculars; it may be joined to any verbal noun 
or substantive, and denotes an owner or actor; this 
affix is most extensively used in Hindustani (vala), where 
it is used as a substitute for different formations. It 
corresponds to the Sansk. affix '^^, from which it has 
been derived by lengthening the root-vowel. It is to 
be observed, that ^Jj must be joined to the formative 
or oblique case of a noun. 

j»Ul^ gharavaro, owner of a house, from 1^ gharu, 

house. 
jjlljlgi** gharanevaro, owner of houses. 

sJ^i5S dianavaro, a giver. Inf. ^^ dianu, to give. 
jJli* vicavaro, mediator, from ^^ vicu, midst. 
jslpj^ beriavaro, boatman, from ^^''LKi beri, boat. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 77 

37) Themes in yo. 

The affix yo, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ^, 
forms adjectives from substantives, as: 

y^fl^ bhagyo, fortunate, from iSL^ bhagu, fortune; 

luck. 
^yf^ vikevikhyo, a grumbling person, from J^^ 

vikevike, grumbling. 
y^;y!::^ joyo, effeminate, from ^^ (^j\) joe, wife. 



Chapter IV. 
Formation of Diminutives. 

§. 11. 

The Sindhi evinces a great facility in forming dif- 
ferent kinds of Diminutives; it surpasses in this re- 
spect all the kindred dialects, being able to derive di- 
minutives from any substantive, adjective or even par- 
ticiple. 

The one method, to express the idea of a diminu- 
tive, is, to substitute the feminine termination for the 
masculine, the feminine expressing generally: small - 

ness, littleness, nicety, as: ^^ katu, m. a large 

knife, ^'l/ kati, fem. a small knife (cf. §. 5, YI, 2, c). 

An old diminutive formation has been preserved 
in a few straggling words, ending in otru (otro) or otu 
(oto) ; the same formation is still current in the Pasto (otai, 
utai), where diminutives are regularly derived by means 
of this affix. The origin of this diminutive affix is 
rather uncertain; e. g. Sindhi: 

^IjifiG bahoti, a small fire, from .^cli bahe, fire; 

lj^x>La^ jamotru, the headman of a village (literally: a 



78 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

little p»Li jamu or Jam, prince); ^j*L)^ diati, a small 

light, from j.jj dio, an oil -light. 

Besides these formations the Sindhi uses for the 
purpose of forming diminutives proper two affixes, 
which are originally identical; viz.: ero {= ro, the union- 
vowel T having been produced to e, on account of the 
accent), which is added to adjectives only, and ro, 
which is promiscuously joined to adjectives and sub- 
stantives. Both these affixes correspond to the Sanskrit 
diminutive affix T. r, from which the Sindhi, after its 
own peculiar method, has menaged to form two separate 
diminutive affixes. The other diminutive affix of the 
Sanskrit, ^ k, is not in use in Sindhi, but is so in 
Hindi, Marathi and Panjabi. 

1) The affix ero. 

This deminutive affix is, as noted already, added 
to adjectives only and implies: somewhat more or 
less (as the case may be), rather, very; e. g.: 

^yf^^i> drighero, somewhat long, adj. j-g-O drigho, 

long. 
jyjs^ thorero, rather little, adj. }\y^ thoro, little. 

j^AJc^f ghat ero, rather deficient, adj. ^a^ ghate, 

deficient. 

2) The termination ro, fem. ri. 

This diminutive affix is joined to substantives and 
adjectives, even to such, as have already received the 
affix ero; it denotes small n ess, littleness, deficiency, 
tenderness or contempt. In order to point out more 
effectually the idea of the diminutive, the feminine ter- 
mination ri may be chosen, instead of the masculine. 
The Sindhi poets use the diminutives with great taste 
and delicacy, and know to give different shades to their 
pictures by their proper application. The final vowels 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 79 

undergo the following changes before the addition of 
the affix ro (ri): 

1) Final u (m.) is changed to V or T, with the ex- 
ception of fern, nouns ending in V, wich remain 
unaltered. 

2) In the same way final o is changed to 'a' or T. 

3) Final 'a' remains unaltered. 

4) Final 'i' remains unaltered or passes (for euphony's 
sake) into 'a'. 

5) Final i and u are shortened with a subsounding 
'a' (as union-vowel). 

Final V. 

j^ jJJ pandharo , a short journey, from ^ jJl pandhu, 
journey. 

^'-j^ hatiri, a small shop, from vivi hatu, shop. 

j^jJi^ jinduro, short life, from jJ:^* jindu, life, fem. 
(5^4^ vijuri, a small flash of lightening, from '^ 
viju, fem., lightening. 

Final 5. 

s-IaJL^ hiar5 heart (endearing), from ^Xxsi> hio, heart. 

j^j.^ bholiro, a small monkey, from j-ij-^ bhol5, 

monkey. 
yj)}4^ th5riro, | very little, from j ^^- thoro, little. 

^jyjsy^ thoreriro, | extremely little. 

Final V. 

^^^j> dhiari, a little daughter, from ^j> dhia, 

daughter. 

Final Y. 

(^L^l akhiri, a small eye, from ^1 akhe, eye. 
(5^Lr galhari, a short word, from .^il? galhe, word. 



80 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

Final i and u. 
yu^i)jJo mandhiaro, a small churning staff, from ^j^jJx? 
mandhi, a churning staff. 

bhatuari, a small scorpion, from yX^ bhatu, 



a scorpion. 



Chapter V. 

Compound nouns. 

§• 12. 
I. Nouns compounded with a preceding particle. 

1) Nouns compounded with the negative par- 
ticles a, ana, na, nir, ni, ma. 

All these negative particles are of Sanskrit origin 
and used in the same way and in the same sense, as in 
the Sanskrit. The negative particle 'a' is only used with 
adjectives, ana chiefly with participles and Gerundives, 
rarely with adjectives; na with adjectives, and the shor- 
tened form n"a with Gerundives and participial adjectives; 
nir and ni (with assimilated r), only with adjectives 
(and abstracts, derived from adjectives). We have not 
mentioned expressly the negative particle dur (^), which 
belongs to the same class, as it occurs in such formations 
only, as are borrowed directly from the Sanskrit and 
have already passed through the process of assimilation, 

usual in Sindhi, as: Jfe'^ dukalu, famine, Sansk. "^"^T^ 
(see Introd. §. 16, B). For the sake of a general survey 
we have summed up here all the negative prefixes, 
though the nouns compounded with them belong to 
the subsequent classes of compounds, as far as their com- 
position is concerned. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 81 

Prefix a: ou^^l acetu, thoughtless; thence. 
..... 

^Ua£!^I acetai, 



^Awyi^l aceti. 



thoughtlessness. 



Prefix ana: yl^xJi] anathiano, impossible. 

j.^.^1 anapucho, unasked. 
jjsLIoJI anavesaho, unbelieving. 
^^L^j^t anavesahi, s. £, unbelief. 

Prefix na: j;l^LS nakaro, useless. 
jXliLj nacano, unwell. 
^jLxIilS nacanai, illness. 

Prefix na: j-Ix^I nathiano, impossible. 

^Alg^ nathiani, impossibility. 

yX^S nakhatu, profitless. 
Prefix ma: ^iX^ machadu, not giving up. 
•.iL^jCc makhatu, profitless. 
Prefix nir and ni: ^^5^^ nir-dal, unfeeling, Sansk. M^lf. 

JLO nir-asu, hopeless, Sansk. frT^T^. 

j.XlSjG ni-dhaniko, masterless ( Ait^). 

j^xxj ni-putro, sonless (Ijcj). 

2) Nouns compounded with the privative particles 
re, without, and be, without. 

The privative particle re, which is also used as a 
preposition, and as such always requires the For- 
mative (oblique case), is derived from the Sanskrit pre- 

Trumpp, Sindhi-Grrammar. F 



82 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

position ^rT (Prakrit f^Jf = ft'J^ ^^^ contracted ^ 
re) without, excepted; be is borrowed from the 
Persian and corresponds originally to the Sansk. prefix 
f%. These prefixes are in Arabic writing generally 
written separately and not joined to the noun, as: 

re: s.^.^ (5> re-kamo, useless. 

iAjU ^s re-panyo, waterless. 

i^i ^^ re-cayo, untractable. 

be: j.4^;l ^ be-sagh5, powerless. 
j^<> ^j be-din5, irreligious. 
s.i ,-j be-lajo, shameless. 

3) Nouns compounded with the particles of qua- 
lification su, well, ku, badly, and ava (au), away, from. 

su: JLCw sukalu, good time = cheapness. 
owj^ sucetu, attentive. 
^wjjl supri, good friend = sweetheart. 

ku: ciJ^J kupate, dishonesty. 
yj^£S kupatyo, dishonest. 
^l/jy kuniyau , bad justice = oppression. 

jXliiXr kudhang5, ill-bred, 
ava (au): J/5I avagunu 1 ^.^^^ 
Jji^^T augunu, j 

y^ -'la bad landing place. 

h^\ autaru, j 

4) Nouns compounded with the possessive particle 
sa (shortened from the Sansk ^5), implying "with", 
"provided with". 

j-JL^x^ saphalo, fruitful. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 83 

j^s».j.A-l sabojlio, intelligent. 
jw^ll saputro, having a son. 

II. Nouns compounded with a substantive, adjective 

or numeral. 

The Sindhi generally follows in the formation of its 
compound nouns the rules of the Sanskrit, though the 
compounds cannot be formed in Sindhi in the same un- 
limited number, as in Sanskrit, the want of case-in- 
flexions offering an essential obstacle. No compound 
can be formed from more than two nouns, a noun com- 
pounded of three words is a linguistic impossibility 
in Sindhi, as in such a compound all idea of coor- 
dination or subordination would be completely lost. We 
shall consider the compounds current in Sindhi under 
the received Sanskrit appellations. 

1) So-called Tatpurusa compounds, or conjunction 
of two nouns, of which the former stands in a case- 
relation with the latter. 

These compounds are rarely used in common con- 
versation, but more extensively in poetical compositions* 
The former of the two nouns, which is dependent on 
the latter, must consequently be placed in the For- 
mative, to express thereby its grammatical dependency. 
In reference to the method of writing these compounds 
there is no fixed rule; some of them, in which the idea 
of unity prevails so much, that they are considered as 
one word, are joined in writing accordingly; others 
again, in which the conjunction is more loose, are written 
separately; e. g.: 

^Ij ^j| utara-vau, north-wind. 

^A^J y^ ghara-dhani, master of the house. 

p^^ ^j^ mathe-khau, torturer, literally: eating 



one's head. 



F2 



84 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

j.JLXi (jl>.j<3 desa nikalo, banishinent. 

^Sy.^ jjl5" karane-trutro ; a lazy fellow; literally: broken 

of hands. 

jl^ J^U pana bharti, selfish; literally: filling oneself 

A peculiar kind of compound is formed by an ad- 
jective joined to a substantive, which by the addition 
of the affix varo (see §. 10, 3, b) is turned again into 
a possessive noun; the adjective must in this case agree 
with its substantive in gender, number and case. Such 
compounds are, as far as their signification is concerned, 
Bahuvrihis, but according to their composition Tat- 
purusas; for the latter reason we have inserted them 
in this place; as: 

jxl^^.j J ^Aj bie desavaro, a foreigner (a man of another 
country). 

^'^SySjM (5"^* tikhia-surtevaro , a man of sharp under- 
standing. 

jJ^4^ C5^^ ^^^^ pahavaro, a man of good counsel. 
More poetical are compounds like: 

bi3 Jt> ^i^ vadia dile data, a munificent giver (a 
giver of a great heart). 

2) So-called Dvandvas, or aggregation of nouns. 

In the sense of the Sanskrit Grammar there are no 
Dvandvas in Sindhi. Two nouns are frequently joined 
in Sindhi, expressing one common idea, but gramma- 
tically they are treated as two separate words. In 
Sindhi, as well as in the other cognate dialects, two 
nouns are frequently joined together, of which the latter 
is without a proper meaning, and only added to render 
the sound more full; these compounds are called alli- 
terations. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 85 

i^j ^^j vathu puju, f. , hurry; literally: taking {^^) 

arriving (li). 

jJL^j 3^^ cano bhalo, very good; very well. 

v£.-l vE^ mata sata, exchange (^jo and ^^L, both sig- 
nifying exchange). 

^j>: ^^f ghate vadhe, less or more. 

^j ^4^ jhuru phuru, rainy weather (Lg^ cloudiness; 

^j^^lo ' f aju subaha, in a day or two; literally: to- 

day, to-morrow. 
(Xi JCj baka saka, prattle; jG talking, chatting, 

cX^ being a meaningless alliteration. 

But more frequently than by aggregation the Sin- 
dhi joins two nouns by inserting the Persian copula o 
(frequently nasalized = 6) ; the final vowel of the pre- 
ceding noun is dropped before it and both words are 
joined into one and written accordingly; in some in- 
stances though the final vowel of the preceding noun 
keeps its place before o. These compounds are Dvandvas 
in a grammatical sense, only the latter noun being 
subject to the laws of inflexion. 

.^jii'ir ratodihu, night and day. 

^s^dsl^^s^iXli handhohandhu , every place. 
^')i^^; ^ate-o-rate, every night; night by night. 

wjj J paropare, kind by kind = every kind. 

The conjunction may also be effected by the Per- 
sian copulative particle a, in the same way as by o; 
this a too is very frequently nasalized in Sindhi = a; 
the final vowel of the preceding word always disappears 
before a or a; as: 



86 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

^^^^l^x) mukliamnklii , meeting; literally: tete-a-tete. 
j-^jyoL^Xxj mukhamelo J assembly; literally: face and 

meeting. 
Z^ylCj^ veravera, adv., always; literally: time and time. 

fy,). 

3) So-called Karmadharayas, or descriptive com- 
pounds. 

The Sindhi is now too simple, to admit of new com- 
pounds of this kind; the common rule is, as in the 
other dialects, that the adjective precedes its substantive 
and agrees with the same in gender, number and case. 
Some remnants however of original Karmadharaya com- 
pounds have been preserved in Sindhi, and what is still 
more remarkable, the Sindhi has formed some similar 
compounds out of its own resources, in which the ad- 
jective is joined to the substantive in its original (else 
not occurring) crude state. It is to be noted, that all 
compounds of this description are written in one word; 
e. g.: 

j^^L^S mahajanu, a great merchant, Sansk. *t^T^H. 
^) "^ ^^ ' I a great prince. 



> .- 



j^K-^ maharaju, J 

y^l^'ij vadakhati, a glutton (great eater). 



j-4^"i^ ghanaghuro, well-wishing. 
ly^^A mathaghuro, ill- wishing. 
^-gjjUoo paramarthu, benevolence. 
Jj.J"j paraloku, the other world. 

4) So-called Dvigus, or collective compounds. 

This class of compounds, which is formed by a pre- 
ceding numeral, is in frequent use in Sindhi; e. g.: 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 87 

^y-^ bipahari, midday; compounded of ^ bi, two 

and (5>4^, a watch of three hours. 

'L^ bihare, a ]3air of water wheels. 

j-wLili caumaso, a space of four months = the rainy 
season. 

ji'l^^i cauvatd, a place, where four roads meet; li- 
terally: having four roads. 

^jUAw^rdo panjasnani, washing of the five parts of the 

body (= head, two hands, two feet). 

^^JC^Xi barahamasi, a year = a twelvemonth. 

5) The so-called Bahuvrihis, or relative com- 
pounds. 
This class of compounds, denoting posssession or 
relation, which again comprises all the four preceding 
classes, by changing them into adjectives, is still very 
numerous in Sindhi; for either original Bahuvrihi com- 
pounds are borrowed directly from the Sanskrit, or new 
compounds are formed according to the same principles, 
which are laid down in Sanskrit. The final noun re- 
ceives generally the adjectival affix o (see §. 10; 14); 
in such compounds, as are taken directly from the Per- 
sian, the final noun may remain unchanged, its relative 
signification having been fixed already in Persian. 

a) Bahuvrihi formations from Tatpurusa 
compounds. 

y^sy^s rata-varano, having the colour of blood. ^ 

yj^4^jji matha-miiho, haughty; from .^jc top, and .^ 

(= j^kjii) mouth. 

^4j\Uaj petarthi, glutton; from o^^j petu, belly, and 

" ^ i \ 

^^'^s\ arthi, having an object; having the belly for 
one's object. 



88 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

h) Bahuvrihi formations from Karmadharaya 
compounds. 

jit^o^ vadavato, loquacious; literally: having a big 
mouth. 

j-^I^f ghana-bijo, having much seed. 
j.x)l>^^j..^* th5ra-veram5 , having little delay = quick, 
JtXiL.o safu-dile, having a pure heart; Pers. 
JU^^^ /us-xialu, joyful; Pers. 

c) Bahuvrihi formations from Dvigu compounds. 
3.0^ caudaro, having four doors. 

^X^j bimano, containing two maunds. 

ysii\^xi\\^ barahamaho , yearly = containing twelve 
months. 

d) Bahuvrihi formations from such compounds, 

as are preceded by an adverb or prefix. 

j-wXaIw saputr5, having a son. 
o^A^ sucetu, attentive. 

kumaty5, dishonest. 



Chapter VI. 
Gender of nouns. 

§. 13. 

It has been stated already, that the Sindhi has lost 
the Neuter, most of the original neuter nouns having 
assumed a masculine, a less number the feminine ter- 
mination. The gender of a Sindhi noun is easily re- 
cognizable, as every noun must end in a vowel; some 



SECTION I. THE FORIMATION OF THE]\IES. 89 

terminations admit of no exceptions, others are common 
to both masculine and feminine nouns. 

The termination o is masculine without any ex- 
ception; the termination a is feminine without any ex- 
ception; all the other terminations contain more or less 
exceptions. 

1) The termination V. 

The termination \\ is, according to its origin, ge- 
nerally masculine; but as original Sanskrit -Prakrit 
themes, ending in \i and being of the feminine gender, 
have been mixed up with it. a number of nouns have 
retained the feminine gender. In some of them an ori- 
ginal feminine termination has been dropped and 'u' sub- 
stituted in its place, whereas the gender of the noun 
has been preserved; in others again no reason can be 
detected, why they have been treated as feminines in 
Sindhi, the masculine gender having been retained in the 
cognate dialects; some few of them are of unknown 
origin, on which we cannot venture any conjecture. 

As a general rule we may state, that, abstracted 
from the termination, all nouns are feminine, which 

imply a female being, as: iUo mau, mother; ^c> dhiu, 
daughter; .^^ nuhu, daughter-in-law; Jw«l sasu, mother- 
in-law; 1^;-^ bhenu. sister; ^^^c> dhenu, milk -cow; 
^JyJ<f gau, cow; with some of them the feminine 
termination 'a' is also in use, as: ^55 j> dhia, ^j nuha, 
bhena. 



The following is a list of nouns ending in 'u', which 
are feminine: 

'1 aju, f., to-day; Sansk. ^T^T, adv., Hindi ^^, adv. 
^1 ansu, £, offspring; Sansk. ^"SJ, m.; Hindi ^^, m. 

(Xsi angu, or: -^i anghu, f. , a rent, tear; origin 
unknown. 



90 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

tjT au , £ , slimy excrement , origin unknown. 

lis baburu , f. , the acacia tree ; Sansk. "^"^^j m. Hindi 

^12 barkhu, £, shortened from o^^S^Ij barkhata, bles- 
sing (Arab. o^^Ij; in Sindhi k has been aspirated 
by the influence of r) pronounced as a good omen 
in beginning to count = one. 

4XL bindu, f. , semen virile; Sansk. t^'^, m., Hindi 

J«.4j bhasu, £, ashes; Sansk. ^^H, n.; Hindi HH, m. 

Ij paru, £5 last year; Sansk. Ht*rt^, adv. 

•5^^ priina-u, £, the day of the full moon; also ^^^ 

puna-e; Sansk. "R"^^, n. 
jjTLS' taku, £, a leathern vessel; origin unknown. 
jaS tandu, £, thread, wire; Sansk. rT^H, m.; Hindi 

w^* tharu, £, cream; origin unknown. 

A^ thanu, £, woman's milk; Sansk. tuiiH, m.; Hindi 

JTo' traku, £, the spindle of a spinning wheel; Sansk. 
ff^; in Sindhi r has been pushed forward, to keep 
its place the more easily in conjunction with the 
cerebral; see Introd. §. 15, B, a. 

1^ Jaru, £, leech, afterbirth. Two words have been 
apparently melted into one. ^^ leech, corresponds 
to the Hindustani y]\ zalu (properly Persian), which 
has sprung from the Sanskrit ^|^ch|; the final syl*- 
lable ka has, as elsewhere, been cast off, but the 

original gender retained. ^^ afterbirth, has been 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 91 

shortened from the Sansk. ^U^, ra., HindListani 
^A^ jer (Greek: Y'^pa^). In Hindiistani the gender 

of w^ seems to be doubtful, for Shakespear is 

silent about it; in Hindi it is considered mascuHne 
(Thompson, Hindi Dictionary). 

JUri- jindu, f., life; borrowed from the Panjabi, where 
it is likewise fem. 

^i Ja-u, £, sealing-wax; origin unknown. 

NL^5'^:i jaukharu, f., a salt, used in medicine; com- 
pounded of ^i barley, and >L^5^5 which see. 

Jl§.^ jhilu , f. , name of a plant (Indigofera pauciflora) ; 
origin unknown. 

J^ cupu, f., or: <Ls^ cipu, silence; taken from the 
Hindi, in which it is fem. 

Ji^ cilu, £, name of a vegetable; origin unknown. 

^ ca-u, £, a jeweller's weight; origin unknown. 

A"^!^ charu, £, ashes; originally identical with >L^, 
Sansk. "^JT.. 

J^g^ chilu, £, bark, peel; Sansk. "3Cf^ or ^^T5 the 
original fem. termination i (I) has been lost in this 
noun, but the gender retained; besides J- ^-_^ the 
form d^:^ is also in use. 

yfj^ cizu, £, thing; taken from the Hindustani (Per- 
sian) where it is fem. 

^[io dhatu, £, root; metal. Sansk. VIU, m.; Hindi 
m?!^ or ^TrT, m., but used as fem. in the sense of 
semen virile. 

js^o'i dadhu, £, ringworm; Sansk. '^'5, m.; Hindi 
^T^, m. 



92 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

r^^ sara-Uj fern., autumn, Sansk. "^^5 fern., Hindi 
^SfJ^, fern. 

JuiXlxL sugandhu, f. (occasionally also masc), perfume, 
Sansk. ^n*^? ni., Hindi ^Ip^ , m. 

jQdslMj sindhu, £, the country of Sindh; tlie Indus; 

Sansk. f^pg, m.; Hindi 'ftpi or "ftpg, m. 
vLr katu, £, rust (occasionally also m.); origin unknown. 
fj^ kasu, £, verdigris; origin unknown. 
[L^ kharu, f, potash; Sansk. "^^j m., n.; Hindi 

^T, m. 
'-L^ kharu, f (also masc), oil -cake, Hindi ^13<^, f, 

Sansk. 1^^, n. 

^4X14^ khandru, £, sugar, Sansk. <5t<j^, m.; Hindi 

S garu, £, the mange; Sansk. ^^, £ 
If garu, £, the pulp of any fruit; Sansk. 1^, m. 
jvT gamu, £, name of a wild grass; origin unknown. 
^^Jif gau, £, cow; Sansk. 'it, £; Hindi ^J\^ 'it 
or TIT^ 

J limu, £ The nimb tree; the same as li, which see. 
^Jy;J lau, £, devotion, love; Sansk. ^'^, m. ; Hindi 

^R, £ 
li maru, £, cerumen; Sansk. 'Tl^, n.; Hindi ^^, £ 
J/^ masu, £, ink; Sansk. TTTO, £; Hindi T^f^ or ^T^. 

ijCo mikhu, __^ 

, " . > £, marrow; Sansk. +1^1, Hindi ^WT, £ 

ajo minu, 

C^ i 

J^-Lo mailu, £, dirt; see Ijc, with which it is identical. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 93 

Ij nimu, f., the nimb tree; Sansk. M*-^<^, m.; Hindi 

q^ or ^t^, m. 
' ^ Y ^ ^ nahatharu, £, whitlow, from ^ nahu, nail and 

L^*, which see. 

^jj vathu, £, tiling; Sansk. «fW, n.; Hindi <sftiri, £ 

^•: vathu, £, seizure; Sansk. "^m (election); the as- 
piration of th has been effected by r. 

' y viju, £, lightening; Sansk. i«|^r^, £, Prak. N^, £ 

.". vira-u, £, allowance, ration; Sansk. '^"ff'R, n., sti- 
pulated pay. 



> £, world; Sansk. f^T^fH, m. ; Hindi f^m^ , m. 



J^y visu, 

^^ vasa-u, £, a cultivated ]3lace; Sansk. root: cfr^d, 
provided with rain (and therefore cultivated). 

£, poison; Sansk. f^"^, n. ; Hindi f^^ 
or f^l^, m. 



^^ vikhu 
.5^^ ^dhu 



? 

: 



^^ vansu, £, lineage; Sansk. "^"SJ, m. ; Hindi "<s(^, m. 

£, a wild goose; Sansk. ^^, m.; Hindi 
^^ , ni. (see Iiitrod. §. 11, 2.) 



A.i hanju 



.^:s\i hanjhu, 

i\xsi> hiiidu, £, India; originally an Arabic-Persian word, 

derived from the province nearest to the Persians, 
i. e. f^p^ (by change of s into h); Hindustani: 

jJ^, m. 

JCl^ hihu, £, assa foetida; Sansk. f^^, m.; Hindi 

f|rj^ or f^Tj^ or f|^, m. 

Under this head we must class all the imitative 
sounds, which end in V, and which are considered fe- 



94 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

mi nines, because their final V is not subject to in- 
flexion; the same may be stated of some Dvandvas, 
which consist properly of two Imperatives, ending in 
'u', and which are likewise treated as feminines, being 
exempt from the laws of inflexion. 

Ji^ ^\ acu vanu, £, coming going (Imper.). 

y^^ y4^ jhau jhau, £, grumbling (imitative sound). 

,„^ .js^ ca-u, ca-u, i. , , ,, . ,^ . 

> - -J^ ' ( ^alkmg (Imper.). 

d>5 ^ ca-u, vatu, f., J 

^' "yj^ tau tau, £, gabbling (imitative sound). 

IJ ^*^ vathu puju, £, hurry (Imper.). 
^ etc. etc. etc. 

2) The termination u. 

The termination u is generally masculine; there 
are however some exceptions, the gender of which 
is regulated either by original Sanskrit usage, or by 
the practice of the cognate dialects. The imitative 
sounds, ending in u or u, are all treated, on account 
of their inflexibility, as feminine. Such exceptions are: 

^^1 abirti, £ (also: ^jol abirue), honour; Hindustani 

"^^^T, £ (Pers.) 

^^Ajl au, £, pride, egotism; identical with the I. per- 
sonal pronoun of the Sing. J (Panjabi: hau, £). 

^4? ^^^5 f-j earth (also: ^^j bhue); Sansk. W[^, £ 

•^j tarti, £, a fine cord of camel's hair (root: ^Ji^ 
to pass through). 

^ys> ju, £, louse (also: J^ ju^a); Hindi ^, £, Sansk. 

^^, f. 

yjyd^^ camaju, £, a kind of louse, adhering to the 
skin ((^). 



SECTION I. THE FORIMATION OF THEMES. 95 

'. (J 55 ^"f^ ^^^' ^'^ imitative sound; the hum of a 
spinning wheel. 

SS ku-ku, f. , imitative sound, by which a dog is 
called. 

yjjf gau, f., cow; the same as ^^yS. 

^J lu, £, small hair on the limbs (also: ^ lua); 

Sansk. ^fT^' ^^-^ Hindi ^T^, m. 
yD^ vahu, f., daughter-in-law; Sansk. "^f^, Hindi '^^. 

3) The termination a. 

The termination a comprises, according to its origin, 
as we have seen, mostly feminine nouns; there are 
however a few masculine nouns, ending in a, the 
gender of which is, in most cases, already fixed by the 
signification of the noun itself, or by the language, 
from which the noun in question is taken; such ex- 
ceptions are: 

Lil^ raja, prince; Sansk. JSTom. TT^, m. 

S"^ lala, master; lord; Hindi ^T^T. 

[jS karta, the agent (in grammar) ; Sansk. Xom. ^^L 

Uj-| atma, soul; Sansk Xom. ^JifrHl, m. 

L^i^Lc ma/jilia, melancholy. Arab.: Hindustani, masc. 

b^i clevata. Deity; Hindi ^"^TTT, f; Sanski-it 

4) The termination i. 

The termination i is, as stated already, divided 
between masculine and feminine nouns, yet so, that 
the feminine prevail considerably in number. All nouns 
denoting a male being (man or beast) are of course 
masculine, whereas nouns, denoting a female being, 
inanimate objects or abstract qualities are femi- 



96 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

nine; contrary to this general rule the following nouns 
are masculine: 

(^wa;I asiri, a large kind of tamarisk tree. 
^^tXjG bandhi, a log of wood floating in the river. 
^i\lj bundi, the muzzle of a gun -barrel. 
,^^^j bhacatij name of a plant (Desmochaeta lap- 



pacea). 

^^LS paki, razor (by the Hindus used as fem.) 

^Lj pani, water. 

^.^Jo pakhi, bird. 

(^jL.^j thudi, the lower stalk of a plant. 

^o* tiki, a cake. 

^.^£s^ chathi, a religious ceremony, performed on 

the sixth day after childbirth. 
^^c> dogi, a thick stick. 

^•i^j> dhari, a coloured edge to a cloth. 

.^jCIS^II/ surjamukhi, sunflower. 

^jLd kundali, horoscope. 

j^nL.^ ghari, a stripe left unfinished. 

^i^ gliiti? ^ lane, alley. 

(^o^ ladi, the ropes of a boat. 

^SIJq mustari, the planet Jupiter. 

^5BjLl^ mundhi, head. 

3J.X) moti, pearl. 
^^1; vangi, a stick with ropes hanging from it, to 
carry water pots, etc. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 97 

5) The termination i (e). 

The termination 'i' (e) is, with that of a, the regular 
feminine ending in Sindhi. There are however a few 
mascuHne nouns, ending in 'i', which are mostly borrowed 
from foreign languages. As in conformity with the Sindhi 
laws of sound no word can end in a silent consonant, 
the quick and hardly perceptible sound 'i^ (e) has been 
added to some words, which end originally in a silent 
consonant, to render them susceptible of inflexion; to 
some foreign nouns too, which end in a, the short vowel 
T has been added, for euphony's sake, which however 
may interchange with 'u' in some cases. 

i\lL] ahmade, Nom. prop. 

&]0<L x^dae, Grod (Pers.). 

»,o^ xizire, N'om. prop, of a fabulous prophet. 

eir ra-e (or: il^, prince; Hindi TT?[. 

^ic-yv sethe, a Hindii wholesale merchant; Hindi. 

wi4^* qaisare, Caesar. 

In some few instances original flnal e of the San- 
skrit has been preserved , without having been lengthened, 
as is usually the case in Sindhi, as: 

^j pa-e, lord (also: ^aj pati); Sansk. "RTrT. 

v^i^Llr^ viraspate, the planet Jupiter; Sansk. "^^Wm. 

w5 hare, Yisnu; Sansk. ^K5 Hindi ^"K or ^^. 

In others again original i has been (contrary to 
the usual rule) shortened to i, as: 

y^^f kehare, lion, or: y^f kesare, Sansk. '^^TO. 

&^r ktie, street, besides: ^^ kui, Pers. 

©L^ sahae, helper, besides: ^jL^-^ sahai. 

Others again are to be taken as Bahuvrihi com- 

T r u m p I) , SiudliT-Grammar. ^ 



98 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 



pounds, in whicli final i (e) may be preserved (see 
§. 12, 5. 6.), as: 

JiXiLo safudile, a sincere man = having a pure heart. 

.ssi(:>hsQi>\ adho-adhe, half-sharer = having half and half. 



Chapter VII. 
Formation of the Feminine from masculine bases. 

§. 14. 

The formation of the feminine from masc. nouns 
agrees in the main with Sanskrit and Prakrit usage. In 
some instances feminine derivatives have been taken directly 
from the Sanskrit or Prakrit, subject, of course, to the 

peculiar assimilating process of the Sindhi, as; ^iC rani, 

queen, Sansk. TJ^ (see: Introd. §. 14, b.). Such like 
formations we shall pass by in the following remarks 
and only attend to the laws still current in Sindhi. 

The Sindhi possesses in some cases separate words, 
to express the idea of the feminine, so that the process 
of deriving the feminine from the masc. base is super- 
seded. These instances however are restricted to nouns, 
implying relationship, and the names of the com- 
monest domestic animals, where the language has 
preferred to create separate words, instead of deriving 
them from the corresponding masc. base; as: 

J^^wygo bhena, sister; iL^j bhau, brother. 

^o dhia, or ^o dhiu, yXj putru, son. 

daughter; 

i^Uo mau, mother; ^^ piu, father. 

ys^ vahu, daughter-in-law; jvJ'L^ ]^^^i son-in-law. 

^£s.f<3 daci, a female camel; j..§.flo dagho, a male camel. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 99 



i> 



yS ga-u, cow; tX^li dandu, ox. 

^.^Jjyo mehe, a female buf- ^H sanu, a male buffalo. 

falo ; 
From other masc. bases the Sindhi forms regularly 
a feminine, as far as this is admissible; some nouns are 
only extant in the feminine, the masculine being out 
of place or having disappeared from the language. 

1) Formation of the Feminine from masc. 
nouns in V. 

From substantives ending in V the Sindhi forms 
the Feminine by changing 'u' into i or i (e); with ad- 
jectives the termination 'i' (e) or V may be optionally 
used. In the case of the substantives the use of the ter- 
mination i or 'i' (e) is more or less optional , but in some 
of them one or the other is preferred. 

^ySj.^ chokari, 
S}^ chokare, 

^Sf gaclahe, jenny-ass, from .s^Sf gadahu, jack-ass. 
^J> parte, washerwoman, from ^yl partu, washerman. 
"yf',^^ dhira or yfj^c> dhire, firm, from v-v?o dhiru, 
adj. m. 
Besides this common formation of the feminine another 
method of forming the same by means of the affixes ni, 
ni, ani, aini, is in use, which are however only added 
to nouns denoting human beings , castes, occupations etc. 
very rarely to names of animals or to adjectives. 

All these affixes correspond to the Sansk. affix ^IX'fl' 
(z= ;^, see Bopp, Compar. Grram. §. 840), as: ^J^T^jft 
the wife of Indra etc. In Sindhi the original affix ani 
(with change of the dental to the cerebral) has either 
been preserved, or a (see Bopp sub loco) has again 

LofC. ^2 



girl, from S}-^ chokaru, boy. 



100 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 



been cast out, and only ni (ne) added. All these affixes 
are joined to the feminine termination (i, seldom to a), as: 

j^i Jatine, 



^^i jatini, 

^Uici Jaty-ani, 
^^Lf gahine, 
^Ll^LT gahyanij 



the wife of a 



Jat. 



a female singer; masc. not in use. 






^iLss^jwi^) barocani, the wife (or female) of a _.jJ 
or Beluch. 



^^)^^^ sihane, lioness, from -4^a^ sihu, lion. 
(j^j^4^ chutine. "^ 

swift, from vi>^4^ chtitu, adj. m. 



.aJ^^cs. chutini, 



^iL-0^9. chutyani. 

2) Formation of the Feminine from masculine 

nouns in o. 

From masc. nouns ending in o the feminine is formed 
by changing 5 into 1, as: 

{S)}^r^ chori, a female orphan, from 3;j.-g.9^ ch5ro, 

orphan, m. 
^j.f golT, a slave-girl, from j.Jj.f golo, a slave m. 

Besides this feminine termination the affixes ni, ni, 
ani, aini are also in use with nouns denoting caste, 
trade or occupation, as: 

^^^aJ langhine. 



^-l^^J langhini, 

^Ll§^ langhyani, 
j^Ll^^j langhyaine, 



the wife (or female) of a j.^^3 
langho or drummer (by caste). 



1) After a Palatal sl^ort i is frequently cast out. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEME; 



101 



3) Formation of the Feminine from masculine 

nouns in u. 

Masc. nouns ending in u form the feminine by the 
affixes 111 or ni. with the union-vowel i. by which final 
11 is dislodged: hnal u may also be shortened to *u'\ which 
serves at the same time as union-vowel, e. o-.-. 



(^ 



iXisi hindini. 



^Jujc hindine 



the wife (or female) of a .cxLs. Hindu 



or: 
^tXl$& hinduni 
^cX-i^ hindune 

The affixes aiii or aiiii are also in use, before the 
addition of which final Ti is alwavs shortened to hi*, as: 



t5^ 



iCjU5i hindu-ani 



^j\ZiXLsi^ hindu-aine 



a Hindu female. 



4) Formation of the Feminine from masculine 
nouns in i and i. 

From masc. nouns ending in i and 'i' (ei the fe- 
minine is formed by nitans of the affixes ni, ni or am; 
final i is shortened to 'i\ and serves thus as union- 
vowel: as: 



«^> 



if korini. 



^,^3^ korine, 
,-ilosi5^ korvani. 



the wife (^female) of a ^s}f kori, 



weaver. 



vS^H"^*^ 



sethini . 



^, ^'a;^^ sethine. 

sethvaiii 



the vife ( female) of a -§iU-w sethe. 
a Hindu wholesale merchant. 



Xote. The coo'nate dialects form the feminine from masc. 
nouns in the same ^\'av as the Sindhi. bv chanoina' either the 



102 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 

masc. termination to the feminine, or by adding one of the 
above-mentioned fern, affixes. 

The Hindi and Hindustani approach the Sindhi very 
closely in this respect; they form the feminine either by sub- 

stituting the feminine termination i, as: i^V larki, girl, from 

l^jJ larka, boy, ^ii^il^ brahmani, the wife (or female) of a 

Brahman, from j^^JsLj brahman; or by adding one of the af- 

fixes an, in, ani, to the masc. base, as: ,j>Um/ sunaran (or 

sunarin), the wife of a sLk^ sunar, goldsmith; ^v^-^ serm, a 

lioness, from vA^ ser, a lion; ^^^\yX^ mehtarani, the wife 

(daughter) of a mehtar, or sweeper. 

The same law holds good in Gujarati; either the feminine 
termination I is substituted for the masculine, as: ^fTtj ^ ^^" 
male dog, from ^rT^ ^ male dog, or the feminine affixes 
"^"^ TJr or ^I^in ^^® added to the masc. base, as: "^"^IH 
a tigress, from Gn"^ tiger; ^Z'^CtT? ^ female camel, from ^^ 
a male camel; lf|iy'^|ijj| mistress, from IHlft ^o^^* 

The formation of the feminine is quite analogous in the 
Panjabi; for the masc. termination is either changed to the fe- 
minine, as: ghori, a mare, from ghora, a stallion, or the fe- 
minine affixes an, ni, ani are added to the masc. base, as: 
uskajan, a slanderous woman, from uska]T, a slanderous man; 
utni, a female camel, from ut, a male camel; mu gal ani, the 
wife (or daughter) of a mugal. 

The MarathT forms the feminine from nouns in 'a' (quies- 
cent) or a by substituting the fern, termination I, as: l^'T^T 
girl, from ^TT^T boy; HT^fX? ^ slave-girl, from (^^ a slave; 
in nouns ending in 'a', the Sansk. fern, termination a is occa- 
sionally to be met with, as: ^^T or ^tTT^T ^^^ ^^^^ of ^ ^^* 
Besides these two fem. terminations the affix in or In is to be 
found in nouns ending in 'a' (quiescent) or I, as: ^T^H^ •> tigress, 
from «rT^? tiger, XflXfyTTT a sinful woman, from XIXmT ^ sinner; 
\I^?fX^ mistress, from \Irff master. 



SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 103 

The Bang all stands nearest to the Sanskrit with regard 
to the formation of the feminine; it substitutes the fem. ter- 
minations a or I for those of the mascuhne, as: tanya, daughter, 
from tanya, son; puttrl, daughter, from puttra, son. Ad- 
jectives or nouns of agency, ending in ka ('a^ being quiescent) 
form their feminine always in ka, as: karika, doing, from 
karak, m., gayaka, a female singer, from gayak, a male 
singer. Nouns in i (= in) form their feminine by the affix ni, 
as: hattini, a female elephant, from hatti, a male elephant; 
likewise patni, mistress, from pati, master. Also the use of 
the affix ani or ani is strictly in accordance with Sanskrit 
practice, as: acaryaiiT, the wife of an acarya. 

We find thus, that all the north-Indian vernaculars of San- 
skrit origin fully agree in the formation of the feminine. 



104 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

SECTION II. 

THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Chapter VHI. 
I. Formation of the Plural. 

§• 15. 

The crude form of a Sindhi noun is always iden- 
tical with its JSTominative Singular, the Nominative 
Singular having no longer a case-sign in any of the 
modern Arian tongues. 

The Sindhi possesses no definite or indefinite 
article, as little as the Sanskrit or the Prakrit; if the 
one or the other is to be expressed for distinctness' sake, 
a demonstrative or indefinite pronoun (or the numeral 
"one") is placed before a noun. There is no longer a 
Dual in Sindhi, neither in Pali nor Prakrit, nor in any 
of the modern Sanskritical tongues; we have therefore 
only to describe the formation of the Plural (JS'omina- 
tive), according to the respective terminations of nouns. 

1) InTouhs ending in u. 

Nouns ending in ii are, as we have stated already, 
for the greatest part masculine, a few of them only 
being feminine. According to their respective gender 
the Plural is formed, as follows: 

a) Plural of masculine nouns ending in u: 

These nouns form their Plural by changing u into 

a, as: .i^«^ khtihu, a well, Plur. .iy^f khuha, wells; 

[z varu, husband, Plur. T: vara. If final \i' be preceded 

by short V, a euphonic v is inserted in the Plural, as: 

.r ra-u, weed, Plur. iC rava, weeds. But if final V be 



SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 105 

jDreceded by any other vowel, but short 'a', the insertion 

of V is optional, as: ^L^ ghau, a wound, Plur. "Xj^ 

ghava or: ^Lg/ ghaa, wounds; ^jS deu, a god, Plur. 

Iji deva or: LS clea, gods; but when a long vowel, 

preceding final u, is nasalized, the insertion of v be- 
comes necessary, as: 

^Lgo than, a dish, Plur. l^L^' thava, dishes. 

The following two nouns form their ISfom. Plural in 
an irregular way: 

iL^j bhau, brother, Plur. ZjL^ bhaura or: y^2 bhauru^ 
brothers. 

^j piu, father, Plur. iL piura, fathers. 

Both these Plurals point back to the Prakrit forms 
^T^n (Nom. Sing. ^T^) and fxi^^J (j^om. Sing. 
flf^^), and are therefore, properly speaking, not ir- 
regular (c£ Yarar. V, 35). 

Annotation. We have already noticed (§. 5, I.), that the 
Sindhl termination u is shortened from the Prakrit ^| ; in Pra- 
krit nouns ending in o form their Plural in a, which has been 
shortened in Sindhi to a. 

The cognate idioms agree with the Sindhi in this respect. 
In Hindi and Hindustani, this class of nouns, having already 
dropped the terminating short vowel in the Singular, throw the 
same off in the Plural likewise, i. e. they remain unaltered in 
the Plural. The same is the case in Marathi and PanjabI; the 
Gujarati alone adds the Plural termination o. 

&) Plural of feminine nouns ending in ii. 

These nouns form their Plural by changing final u 
into u, as: 

..^*^ vathu, a thing; Plur. ^^4->5 vathu, things; ^ 

viju, lightening; Plur. ^y^% ^y^? lightenings. 

The following nouns have, besides their regular 
Plural , also an irregular one , as : 



106 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

0MV4J bhenu, sister (or: (^^.a^j bhena); Plur. ^Jj^ 
bhenu or: vi-^^j bhenaru, ^^^-aa^j blienaru, sisters. 

iU mau, mother; Plur. ^^Uo mau, or: wjU mairu, 
^j^^SLo mairu, mothers. 

^t> dhiu (or: Jj&t> dhia), daughter; Plur. ^y^i^ dhiu, 
or: >.^i3>j dhiaru, ,j^5.%t> dhiaru, daughters. 

..^j nuhu (or: ^j nuha), daughter-in-law; Plur. ^^^ 

nuhu or: ^^3 nuharu, \j^y^ nuharu, daughters- 
in-law. 
In the levelling process of decomposition these fern, 
nouns have adopted the same affix ara (or for euphony's 
sake: ira), as the irregular Plurals of masc, nouns, and 
as feminines they have lengthened the same also to aru. 

Annotation, In Pali fern, nouns ending in 'u' remain either 
unchanged in the Plural, as: yagu, sacrifice, Plur. yagu, or o 
(the Sansk. Plural affix ^H ) is added to them (with inserted 
euphonic 'y') as: yaguyo; the latter is also the case in Prakrit, 
as: bahu, wife, Plur. bahuo, or the affix 6 may be again shor- 
tened to 'u% as: bahtiu. In Sindhi this Plural affix 'u' has been 
contracted with final 'u' (u) into u, and at the same time nasa- 
lized = u. 

2) Nouns ending in o (o). 

These form their Plural by changing final o into a, 

as: jji>t>l^ vadho, a carpenter, Plur. Liol^; jjj.j tobo, a 

diver, Plur. Ljjj toba, divers. If final o be nasalized, 
which is frequently the case, the nasal is also preserved 

in the Plural, as: ^y^y^ cotho, the fourth, Plur. ^L^j.^. 
cotha. 

If final o be preceded by short 'a' (or nasalized: a), 
a euphonic v is inserted between them in the Plural, as : 

y^S tao, a pan; Plur. 1^3' tava, pans; ,jj^Aj nao, new; 

Plur. jjllli nava; but if final 5 be preceded by any other 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 107 

vowel, the insertion of v is optional, as: jlT kuo, mouse, 

Plur. Cf kua or: ly kuva; j.X^ meo, fisherman, Plur. 

Llkjo mea or: \^^ meva; pL^ gha-o, a fish-net, Plur. 

L.3L4-f gha-a or: \^l^f ghava. 

We have repeatedly adverted to the fact, that the 
Prakrit termination o has in Sindhi either been shor- 
tened to 'u', or retained unaltered; the formation of the 
Plural of the latter description of nouns is quite in ac- 
cordance with Prakrit usage (Sing, o, Plur. a). 

Annotation. In the cognate idioms the masc. termination 
a has been substituted instead of o. In Hindi, Hindustani, 
Marathi and PanjabT masc. nouns ending in a commonly change 
the same in the Plural to e, a Plural termination, which is 
already in use in the inferior old Prakrit dialects (see: Lassen, 
Instit. Ling. Prak. p. 430). The Gujarat! differs in this respect, 
as masc. nouns ending in o add to the Plural termination a the 
affix o, as: chokaro, a boy, Plur. chokara-o; a similar formation 
of the Plural is already ascribed to the MagadhI dialect of the 
Prakrit; cf. Lassen^ p. 399. 

3) Nouns ending in u, u. 

Nouns ending in u or, as it is more common, in 
u, be they masc. or feminine, remain unchanged in the 

Plural, as: ^y%=->^ vichu, m., scorpion, Plur. ^^-^^ vichu; 

yf gau, fern., cow, Plur. yS gau, cows. 

In Pali, masc. themes ending in 'u', lengthen the 
same in the Nom. Plural to u, as bhikkhu, a beggar, 
Plur. bhikkhu; and such masc. themes, as end in u in 
the Nom. Sing., remain unchanged in the Plural, as: 
abhibhti, a chief, Plur. abhibhu (contracted from abhi- 
bhuvo). In Prakrit masc. themes ending in 'u' lengthen 
their final vowel always in the Nominative Sing., to which 
in the Nom. Plural the affix o (— ^^) is added, as: 
vau, wind, Nom. Sing, vau, Nom. Plur. vau5, winds. 
This Plural affix o may in Prak. be again shortened to 
'u', and in the modern dialects it is dropped altogether. 
In Sindhi u is usuallv nasalized = u. 



108 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Annotation. In Hindi, Hindustani, Marathi and PanjabI masc. 
nouns ending in u, remain unaltered in the Plural; but fern, 
nouns add in Hindustani the Plural termination a, as joru, a 
wife, plural jorua, the Prakrit Plural affix o being changed to 
a, I. The Gujarat! keeps close to the Prakrit in forming the 
Plural of masc. nouns ending in u, by adding the Plural affix o, 
as: hindu, a Hindu, Plur. hinduo. 

4) Nouns ending in a (a). 

These are, as noticed already (§. 13, 3) for the most 
part feminine; they form their Plural hy adding the Plural 
affix u, as: 

L^ haca, f., murder; Plur. ^jGl^ haca-u, murders. 
The Plural of these nouns corresponds to the Prak. 
Plural termination a-o or a-u, o (or shortened 'u') 
being added to final a of the Singular (see Lassen p. 307). 
In Sindhi the Prak. Plur. increment o has been changed 
to ti, and at the same time nasalized. 

Few nouns ending in a are masculine; they remain 

unaltered in the Plural, as: l^l!!^ lala, master, Plur. ^"3 
lala, masters. 

The Prakrit Plural increment 5 (a-o) has first been 
shortened to 'u', and then been dropped altogether in 
Sindhi. 

Annotation. In Hindi and Hindustani fem. nouns ending 
in a (1) form their Plural by adding the increment S, as bala, 
misfortune, Plur. balal. This e corresponds to the Prakrit affix 
o , which in the inferior Prakrit dialects is frequently changed to e 
(cf. Lassen, p. 398, 408). Those masc. nouns, the final a of which 
does not correspond to the Sindhi o, remain likewise unaltered 
in the Plural. — In Panjabi fem. nouns ending in a add either 
1 or ii, the Plural increment i being a change from the Hindi e, 
and ia from the Prakrit affix o, with euphonic 4' or y. A few 
masc. nouns remain likewise unaltered in the Plural, as atma, 
soul; pita, father etc. — The Gujarat! entirely agrees with the 
Prakrit, adding simply o to the fem. nouns in a, as: ma, mother, 
Plur. ma-o. — In Marathi fem. nouns ending in a do not un- 
dergo any change in the Plural, as: mata, mother, Plur. mata; 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 109 

some masc. nouns, falling under this head, remain likewise un- 
altered in the Plural. 

5) JNouns ending in a. 

These nouns being all feminine, form their Plural 
by changing final 'a' either to u (as in Lar); or to a 

(as in Siro); Ij tara, nostril, Plur. ^^Ji taru or: ^!li* 
tara, nostrils. 

These nouns have been, as noted already, shortened 
from Sanskrit-Prakrit bases ending in a; they either drop 
final 'a' before the Plural increment a {--^ Prak. o), or restore 
the original a and drop the Plural increment o ■= u, 
nasahsing at the same time the final long vowel. 

Annotation. This class of nouns is wantig in the cognate 
idioms, where final 'a' has become silent; e. g. Hindustani: 
jibh, £, tongue, Plural: jibh-e, the Plural being made up by 
the increment e = Prak. o. — Panjabi: bah, f., arm (Sindhi: 

..^o baha), Plur. bahl; Marathi: jibh, f. Plur. similarly: jibha. 
The Gujarat! is consequent in adding simply the Plural increment 
6 to fem. bases, ending in a quiescent consonant, as: sanjh, f., 
evening, Plur. sanjho. 

6) Kouns ending in i (i). 

a) Masculine nouns ending in i remain unaltered 
in the Plural: 

Jy^j bell, a servant, Plur. J^ bell, servants; ^Jvj 

pri, friend, Plur. ^^j pri, friends. 

In Prakrit masc. nouns ending in i form their Plural 
by adding the increment 5, which has been shortened 
to 'u' and then cast off altogether in Sindhi. 

h) Feminine nouns ending in i add in the Plural 
the increment u, shortening before this affix the pre- 
ceding long i, which may also, for euphony's sake, be 

changed to y; as: ^^'^ goli, a slave-girl, Plur. ^y^^ 

goliu, goliyu, golyu; ^-oL^J nihai (or: nihai), a potter's 

kiln, Plur. ^j^^^Lgj i^iliayu. 



110 SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Feminine nouns in i add in Prakrit likewise the 
affix 0, which may be shortened to 'u'; in this case final 
'u' has in Sindhi been lengthened to u and nasalized at 
the same time, to distinguish the Plural of the feminine 
nouns from that of the masculine. 

If final 1 be preceded by any letter of the palatal 
class or by 'h', it is commonly dropped before the Plural 

affix u, as: ^^skjo manji, a stool, Plur. ^y^^ manju, 

stools; ^^^j f., manjhi, a buffalo, Plur. ^y^sx^ manjhu, 

buffaloes. * 

Annotation, In Hindi and Hindustani fern, nouns follow 
the method of the Prakrit in forming their Plural, with the only 
difference, that the Prak. Plural increment o is changed to a, 
and this again nasalized, as churl, knife, Plur. churm. Masc. 
nouns in i do not differ from their Singular. The Panjabi quite 
accords with the Hindi, fem. nouns in T adding the Plural ter- 
mination a, as dhi, daughter, Plur. dhia, the masc. nouns in i 
remaining unaltered in the Plural. The same may be remarked 
of the Marathi. The Gujarati stands nearest to the Prakrit in 
this respect, all nouns, be they masc. or feminine, adding simply 
the Plural affix o. 

7) J^onns ending in i (e)* 

a) Fem. nouns ending in T (e) form their Plural 
by adding the Plural affix u, as: ^i^jIC rate, night, Plur. 
^y^'(s rateu, nights. — If 'i' be preceded by a palatal 
or h, it disappears before the Plural termination u, as: 
^Avu) mehe, buffalo, Plur. ^^^1a>o mehu, buffaloes. 

£:j^ joe, wife, forms its Plural either regularly, as: 

jj^j.^^ joyu, or irregularly, as: ljj.:a. joii*^? r?>^ johiru, 

or ^^y\y=^ joiru, wives. 

&) Masc. nouns ending in T (e) remain unchanged 
in the Plural, as: -^ic-w/ sethe, a wholesale merchant, 

Plur. j^X^^ sethe. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Ill 

Annotation. In Hindi and Hindustani, as stated already, 
final T has been dropped, and such nouns, as end in Sindhi in 
'a' or 4', use there one common Plural increment, viz.: e. In 
Gujarat! and Panjabi final 4' has likewise disappeared in most 
cases, and o and i. are respectively added as Plural terminations. 
In Mar at hi fem. bases ending in 'i' remain either unchanged in 
the Plural or have final 4' lengthened to i. The lengthening of 
final 'i' in the Plural is more in accordance with Pali and Prakrit 
usage (e. g. Pali: ratti, night, Plur. ratti or rattiyo; Prak. ratti-o 
or: ratti-u). Masc. bases ending in 4' remain similarly either 
unaltered in the Plural, or (according to some Pandits) lengthen 
the same to i (as in Pali and Prakrit). 

II. Formation of cases; case -affixes. 

§. 16. 

Properly speaking there is no longer a declension 
in Sindhi, nor in any of the modern languages of the 
Arian stock; there are only a few remnants of the an- 
cient Sanskrit, Pali and Prakrit case-inflexions, all the 
other cases being made up by means of case -affixes 
or postpositions.^). 

If we compare the modern Arian dialects with the 
Pali and Prakrit, we perceive at once the great de- 
terioration, the modern idioms have undergone in this 
respect; for while the Pali and Prakrit have as yet pre- 
served all the cases of the Sanskrit, with the exception 
of the Dative, which has already become scarce in Pali 
and has been discarded altogether in Prakrit, its functions 
being shifted to the Genitive, tke modern idioms have 
lost nearly all power of inflexion and substituted in lieu 
of flexional increments regular adverbs, w^hich we ge- 
nerally term postpositions. The same process we can 
notice in the modern Eomanic tongues, where after the 
loss of the Latin declensional inflexions, prepositions have 
been substituted to make up for the lost cases. 



1) lu poetry postpositions may also be placed before the noun, 
they govern, as the rhythm may require. 



112 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

The great distinctive feature of the declensional 
process of the modern Arian dialects , with the exception 
of the Bangali, consists in the fact, that there are pro- 
perly only two cases of a noun, the absolute or 
crude form, corresponding throughout to the I^om. Sin- 
gular, and the Formative case, to which the various 
adverbs or postpositions are added, which serve to make 
up for the lost case-terminations. This latter case has 
been generally called the oblique case by European 
grammarians, but we prefer to call it the Formative 
(after the precedence of Dr. Caldwell). 

The number of declensions, if they may be termed 
thus, depends therefore in Sindhi, as well as in the cognate 
idioms, on the various methods, in which the Formative 
is made up; for the case-signs remain the same, as well 
for the Singular as the Plural, since they are, as we 
shall presently see, originally either (Sanskrit) prepositions 
or adverbs. 

We shall now first investigate the remnants of the 
ancient case - terminations in Sindhi and the adverbs or 
postpositions, which have been substituted for such cases, 
as have lost their original inflexions. In the arrangement 
of the cases we shall follow the common order, which 
has been instituted by the old Sanskrit grammarians, in 
order to facilitate the intercomparison. 

1) The N^ominative case of the Singular and 
plural we may pass over, since they have been noticed 
already. 

2) The Accusative case of the Singular and Plural 
has been dropped in Sindhi, as well as in all the other 
kindred idioms. This has been already the case in the 
inferior Prakrit dialects, and is expressly mentioned of 
the Apabhransa, the mother of the modern Sindhi 
(see: Lassen p. 459). 

We must keep this fact constantly before our eyes, 
that in Sindhi, as well as in its sister-tongues, there is 
no such thing (in a grammatical sense), as an Accusative 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 113 

case, the Accusative being now throughout identical with 
the N'ominative. If we find therefore generally stated in 
European grammars, that the postposition ^5^ khe, or 

j5" ko in Hindustani serves to denote also the Accusative 
case, we have, in the strictly grammatical sense of the 
word, to repudiate such an idea. Whe shall see under 
the Dative case, what the origin of that postposition 
is, and that will satisfactorily explain the syntactical 
pecuHarities of the modern Indian tongues, which use 
such and similar postpositions, where we use either the 
Dative or the Accusative. 

3) The Inst rumen talis is not distinguished by 
any case-affix or postposition in Sindhi, but differs from 
the I^ominative Sing, only by the change of the final 
vowel (where such a change is admissible). The In- 
strumentalis is in the Singular and Plural identical with 
the Formative (which see further on). From thence it 
would follow, that the Instrumentalis is originally the 
Genitive, which may be rendered very probable by the 
Instrumentahs of the Plural. 

Annotation. The Hindi and Hindustani use as Instru- 
mental case- affix ne. In Hindu! (see Garcin de Tassy, Eu- 
diments de la langue Hindoui, 26, 99) we meet further the affixes 
ne, ne, ni and na, and in the Plural (a)n or ne, n#, ni, 
as in the Singular. In Panjabi we find the instrumental affix 
nai, or na, or only i, or the Formative is promiscuously 
used for the Instrumentalis, just as in Sindhi. In Gujarati we 
meet with e as Instrumental affix. The Marathi uses for the 
Instrumentalis Sing, the affix ne, and for the Plural nl. As 
to the origin of these various instrumental affixes there can hardly 
be a doubt. The Sansk. instrumental case -inflexion of the Sin- 
gular na, na (see Bopp , Comp. Gram. I, §. 158) has been 
used as a separate adverb in Hindustani and Panjabi (not in 
Marathi, where it coalesces with the noun as a regular inflexion), 
or even been abbreviated to T or e (n being originally only a 
euphonic addition to the instrumental affix a), as partlv in Pan- 
jabi and in Gujarati. In the Instrumentalis Plur. the Marathi 
uses also (besides nl) the affix hi, corresponding to the Prak. 
Plur. instrumental affix j^ or f^; see Lassen, p. 310. In Ban- 

Trumpp, SindM-G-rammar. H 



114 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

gall te is used as instrumental affix, which is originally iden- 
tical with the Ablative affix "flfj = ff^, 

4) The Dative case has totally disappeared from the 
Prakrit and its functions have been assigned to the Geni- 
tive. We find therefore in the modern idioms the greatest 
discrepancy as to the method , in which the Dative case 
is provided for. In Sindhi the affix ^ khe is used, 

as well for the Singular as the Plural, being placed after 
the Formative Singular or Plural of a noun: as ^^f l^f 
ghara khe, to a house, ^^ ^"i^ gharane khe, to houses. 
In poetical language the postposition ^ kane or: ^ 
kane is also used instead of ^^f khe, which are ap- 
parently derived from the same source, as ^5^, only by 
a different process of assimilation (cf. the Hindi: kan, 
kane, Hindu! ^i|). 

Annotation. The Bangali uses as Dative affix ke, the 
Hindi and Hindustani ko (dialectically also pronounced 
^ku' in the Dekhan), the Hindu! (according to Garcin de Tassy) 
also k^, kaij, kah, kah, kaha and even hi. 

Dr. Caldwell, in his Comparative Grammar of the Drandian 
languages has attempted to vindicate the Hindustani ko for 
the Dravidian languages of the South; he says (p. 225): "In 
the vernaculars of northern India, which are deeply tinged with 
Scythian characteristics, we find a suffix, which appears to be 
not only similar to the Dravidian, but the same. The Dative- 
Accusative in the Hindi and Hindustani is ko, or colloquially 
ku; in the language of Orissa ku, in Bangali ki, in SindhT 
khi, in Shingalese ghai; in the Uraon, a semi -Dravidian 
Kole dialect, gai^ in the language of the Bodos, a Bhutan hill 
tribe, kho, in Tibetan gya. The evident existence of a con- 
nexion between these suffixes and the Dravidian Dative case-sign 
ku, is very remarkable. Of all the analogies between the 
North -Indian dialects and the south eTn, this is the clearest 
and most important, and it cannot but be regarded as be- 
tokening either an original connexion between the northern and 
the southern races, prior to the Brahmanic irruption, or the ori- 
gination of both races from one and the same primitive Scythian 



SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 115 

stock." If this case -sign ko or ku then be the clearest and 
most important analogy between the North-Indian vernaculars 
and the Dra vidian tongues, we shall see presently, that there 
will be no analogy whatever between them, though at the first 
sight the identity of both seems to be past any doubt. In the 
first instance the fact speaks already very strongly against such 
a supposition, that the Marathi, which is the closest neighbour 
to the Dra vidian tongues, has repudiated the use of khe, ke 
or ko, and employed a Dative -affix, the origin of which we 
hope to fix past controversy. We shall further see, that the 
Gujarati and Panjabi have also made up for the Dative case 
by postpositions, borrowed from the Sanskrit, without the slightest 
reference to the Dravidian languages, and we may therefore 
reasonably expect the same fact from the remaining Arian dia- 
lects. It would certainly be wonderful, if those Arian dialects, 
which border immediately on the Dravidian idioms, should have 
warded off any Dravidian influence on their inflexional method, 
whereas those more to the north should have been ''deeply tinged 
with Scythian characteristics." Fortunately we are able to show, 
that such an assumption is not only gratuitous, but irreconcilable 
with the origin of the above mentioned Dative-affixes. 

We derive the Sindhi khe, the Bangali ke, from the 
Sanskrit Locative cfiff, 'for the sake of, 'on account of, 'as regards'. 
This will at once account for the aspiration of k in Sindhi; for 
this is not done by chance, but by a strict rule (see In trod. 
§. J, e, note); in Bangali r does not exercise such an influence 
on the aspiration of a preceding or following consonant, and 

therefore we have simply ke. The Sanskrit form cRff becomes 
in Prakrit first f^W, then (by the regular elision of t) f^IX, 
and contracted ke, and in Sindhi, by reason of the elided r, 
khe. The Hindi and Hindustani form of this adverb ko 

we derive in the same way from the Sansk. cpff which is used 

adverbially with the same signification as the Locative ^fT, In 
Prakrit already, and still more so in the modern dialects, the 
neuter has been merged into the masculine; we have therefore 
first f^iTt, thence THR^^, and contracted ^, ko. We can 
thus satisfactorily account for the various forms: khe, ke or 
ko. ,That the proposed derivation of these adverbs does not 
rest on a mere fancy, is further proved by the Sindhi particle 
re, 'without', which is derived in the same way from the Sansk. 

Locative '^n, Prakrit "Kn "^ ftlj? a^d thence contracted 

H2 



116 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

re (ria). It remains now for us to notice briefly the somewhat 
deviating forms of the Hindui, as exhibited by Garcin de Tassy. 
In ^t ^^ ^^^^ '^T kail a euphonic Anusvara has been added, 
to which the modern tongues have taken a great fancy; kavi 
is only a different pronunciation for k^, o changing in Hindui 
very commonly to au. The forms ^^ kah, or with euphonic 
Anusvara ^^ kah or oR^ kaha, present again another proof 
for the correctness of the proposed derivation of these adverbs. 
For we have in cR^^ <^^^ ^^ (Hindi also: kan, kane, with 
a full nasal, and in consequence thereof with ejection of h) 
the same basis as in ^f and cfif , only the assimilating process 
has been different. The vowel '^ r, when joined to a con- 
sonant, can, according to Prakrit usage, be resolved either into 
4' (as in f^^) or into 'a' (as: ^fT for ^rf) (see Varar. 
I, 27; Lassen p. 116, 2, a; Introd. §. 1); in consequence of 
the inherent r the following consonant is aspirated (as in Sin- 
dhi: kk = k), so that we get the form cp^; this aspirated ^ 
th is again elided, so that h only remains (see Lassen p. 207; 
Introd. §. 8), and thus we have the forms cp^^ ^^^ With 
the other alleged form f^ hi, the matter stands different; we 
compare this Hindui Dative affix with the Apabhransa Genitive 
affix H, -he Genitive, as noted already, supplying in Prakrit the 
place of the Dative (as to the analysis of this ^ see Lassen 
p. 462 and 466). 

The Marathi uses two affixes to make up for the Dative, 
which are joined to the crude form by the so-called union-vowel, 
viz: ^, s and ^T la. The first of these two, s, is identical 
with the Prak. Genit. -Dative case termination T^tf ss = Sansk. ^ZJ 
sy, so that we have here the remnant of an ancient Sanskrit- 
Prakrit case-inflexion. The latter one, la is more doubtful as 
to its origin. Lassen has already started a conjecture (see Instit. 
Ling. Prak. p. 55, 99) as to the origin of this affix; he derives 
it from the Sansk. ^|^ = ^H'^^ 'place habitation', signifying 
the place, where the action rests. "\Ve cannot endorse this de- 
rivation, as the Marathi case-affix is not ^Jf^ ^^^5 but ^J la 
and we cannot see any reason, why initial long a should have 
been transferred to the back of this particle. We would com- 
pare the Marathi Dative affix la with the Sindhi postposition 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 117 

lae, 'on account of, 'for the sake of, 'for', HindustanT 
^LJ lie, both of which are derived from the Sansk. root C?5| (<T) 

to give (Sindhi: (J^^ lainu, to apply). This seems to me to 
be borne out by the modern Persian Dative- Accusative particle 
f ra, which as yet is very scantily used in the old Parsi, and 
w^hich, according to Spiegel's Pars! grammar (p. 55) does not 
denote properly a Dative case, but originally signifies 'for the 
sake of, 'on account of. The same particle we find also in 

the Pasto, ^ lah, which corresponds to the modern Persian 

particle U. — In Bangali we meet also (besides ke) especially 
in poetical language a Dative affix re, which I do not hesitate 
to identify with the Marathi ^J and the Hindustani lie. 

In GujaratI the Dative -affix is ne, which we identify with 
the Sansk. preposition f^, Greek s'v, Latin in. The Pan- 
jabT uses as Dative affix nu, in which we likewise recognise 
the Sansk. preposition ^f-|, 'toward', 'to'. 

5) The Ablative case is formed in Sindhi by the 

affix ^1 a, which is always connected with the base 
itself and never written separately. The Sindhi shows 
itself thus fully conscious of the origin of this case -ter- 
mination, which corresponds exactly to the Pali-Prakrit 
Ablative case - termination a, which originates from the 
Sanskrit ablative ^H by the elision of final t (see 
Lassen p. 352, 304); in Sindhi the final long vowel has 
again been nasahzed, as in so many other instances. 
In the Singular final V, o, V are dropped before the 

affix a, as: ,jf^^ ghara, from a house, nom. w^ gharu, 

a house; ^jCS dara, out of a defile, nom. j>3 daro; 

jjLSGv zabana, from the tongue, nom. jjLjv zabana, tongue. 
Those nouns, which end in the Singular in i (!) and 

u (u), shorten the same before the affix a, as: ^^'Ip 
noria, from a rope, nom. (^jjj nori, a rope; ^Jt^r5 ^^" 
rua, from a wild beast, nom. ^^'^ miru, a wild beast. 



118 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Nouns in 'i' (e) generally retain their final vowel before 

tlie affix a, but they may also drop it, as: ;jL>w4:> phu- 

rea, from (by) a robbery, nom. y^^ phure, a robbery; 

^iSlj nirta, out of thought, with reflexion, nom. ^Ij 

nirte, thought. Nouns in a either nasalize the same in 
the Ablative, or, more commonly, use the postposition 

^Lg5^ kha etc. In the Plural the Ablative affix a is 

joined to the full Formative in -ne, as: ^L^Sf gha- 

rane-a, from houses, (^Lu^y? miruane-a (^Loj^), from 

wild beasts etc. 

Besides this common Ablative affix a we find in 

Sindhi also such forms, as: au (^y), contracted: 6 (^3 1), 

and even u (^.1). In the more ancient idiom, as used 
by the Sindhi poets, the Ablative Singular generally ends 
in a-u. All these various Ablative affixes are derived 
from the Prakrit Ablative ^Tt^ (see Lassen p. 302, 304, 
599), which becomes (by the elision of d) ao, or shor- 
tened: au. 

The Sindhi uses also the postposition ^L^O ^^^j 
^1^ khaii, jjH^ kho, to express the idea of the Abla- 
tive; all these and other postpositions require the For- 
mative of a noun. Other postpositions, which are used 
to make up for the Ablative, see under the list of post- 
positions. 

Annotation. Nearest to the Sindhi comes the Mar at hi in 
this respect, which uses as Ablative-case terminations the affixes 



1) The postposition ^^-^ kha etc. is derived form the same 
source, as ne-^j with the only difference, that the Ablative termination 
a, ail etc. has been added. The same is to be said of the Ablative 
postposition ^LIj kana, derived from ^^ by the same process. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 119 

un and hun, occasionally also tun. In Bangali and Pan- 
Jabi we find the Ablative affix te (though in Panjabi a re- 
gular Ablative termination o is also to be met with), which 
has sprung from the Prakrit Ablative termination Jf[ to; si- 
milar to it is the Gujarat! Ablative affix thi, which has been 
aspirated. In Hindi we find also thi, but most in use is se, 

apparently identical with the Prakrit Genitive termination ^ (see 
Lassen p. 462). 

6) The Sanskrit Genitive -case termination ^, in 
Pali and Prakrit W ss, has been lost in all the modern 
tongues, mth the exception of the Bangali, where ss 
has been hardened to r. All the other dialects have 
taken to a new way of forming the Genitive, of which 
we find already some traces in the old Yedic language: 
the noun, which ought to be placed in the Genitive case, 
is changed into an adjective by an adjective affix, 
and thence follows, as a matter of course, that this so- 
called Genitive, which is really and truly an adjective, 
must agree in gender, number and case with its go- 
verning noun as all other adjectives. 

The Sindhi employs for this purpose the affix ^ 
jo (fem. ^^ ji), corresponding to the common adjective 

affix k5 (= Sansk. ^, with transition of the tenuis 
(c = k) in tothe media ( j) , very hkely to establish thereby 
some distinction between these two originally identical 
affixes. In Sindhi this adjective affix jjs^ jo is always 
written separately, whereas the common adjective 
affix ko is joined to the base, as in Sanskrit (see 
§. 10, 24); it follows always the Formative Sing, or 

Plur. of a noun, as: (^^c> j^ ^-^ ghara jo dhani, the 
master of the house, ^^^^ i^ UT^ gharane j5 dhani, 
the master of the houses; &^ ^^ J*.Ivo mursa ji j5e, 
the wife of the man; ^^j^ ,jj^ ^^r^ mursane ju 

j5yu, the wives of the men. In poetry jjJ«l sando, 
'belonging to', is used quite in the same way, as ^, as: 



120 SECTION 11. THE IMFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

i5^ ^b ^iXjJ^ ^bjj priya sande para de, towards the 
direction of the friends. 

Annotation. The Marat hi uses as Genitive case -affix "^5 
with transition of the guttural ^ into the corresponding pa- 
latal, as in Sindhl, yet without changing the tenuis into the 
media. The Hindi and Hindustani have preserved the ori- 
ginal Sanskrit adjective affix ^, without changing it into the 
palatal ka; in Hindu! we meet also with the affix ko and 
kau. The Panjabi and Gujarat! seem to make an ex- 
ception from what we have just stated. In Panjab! the Genitive 
case-affix is da, in which we recognise the Prak. Ablative affix 

^ do (= cTH), turned into a Genitive affix. This Panjab! 

Genitive case-affix will clear up the Pasto Genitive prefix C> da, 
being identical with it in origin. The Gujarat! employs as Genitive 
case-affix no, which is another adjective affix, corresponding 
in signification with cfi and used in Sindh! (see §. 10, 27), to 
form adjectives in the same way, as ko (on the origin of this 
affix no see Bopp's Comp. Gram. HI, §. 839). 

7) The original Sanskrit Locative termination 'i' 
has been preserved in Sindhi, though the Locative can 
now only be distinguished in masc. bases ending in 'u', 

as: ^jJ^ handhe, in a place, nom. jad^kh handhu; ^^a^ 

mathe, on the top, nom. „.^ mathu, the top. In nouns, 
ending in any other vowel, but 'u' (masc), the Locative 
must be expressed, for perspicuity's sake, by an adverb 
or postposition , requiring the Formative of a noun , as : 

^j^ (54^^^ kothia me or: .-^^^ is^}'^ k5thia manjhe, 
in a room. In poetry the Formative of any. noun is 
commonly u.sed also as Locative, without a postposition. 

Annotation. In Marath! the Locative affix 'i' has been leng- 
thened to ! and at the same time nasalized = 1. Besides this 

we meet also with the Locative termination ^J||T , which is 
originally the Sansk. Ablative, used as a Locative. In Ban- 
gah the Locative ends in e (i), as in Sindhi,' or is expressed 
by the affix te. In Panjab! the Locative is generally ex- 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 121 

pressed by adverbial postpositions, though the Locative itself 
has not been altogether lost; we find there the affix f, as 
in MarathT, or e, which are always joined to the base of 
a noim. In Gujarat! the Locative is either expressed by 
the affix e, or by the help of postpositions. In Hindi and 
Hindustani the Locative, as a distinctive case, has been quite 
lost and must always be expressed by postpositions. Still 
some vestiges of it are lingering in the so-called participles ab- 
solute, as: bote, or with the emphatic hi, hotehi, in being. 

Some other idiomatic phrases, as: ,^i> (j^l us din, on that day etc. 
point also to an original Locative. 

8) The Vocative is expressed in Sindhi by pre- 
iixing one of the interjectional particles: e, he, ho 
or ya, and, when speaking to an inferior, re (fern, ri) 
or are.^) The final vowel of a noun in the Vocative either 
undero'oes a chano;e or remains unaltered. In the Vocative 
Singular masc. nouns ending in 'u' change the same to 

V, asi'^L^Ajo ;^l e mehara, o buffalo-keeper! nom. >L^xj 

meharu; those ending in o change the same to a, as: 

iCx^Aw ^1 e stimira, o Sumiro! those ending in u, I, 'i' 

remain unaltered, as: ^y-^^, (^t e Punhu, o Punhu! In 

the Vocative Plural nouns ending in 'u' (m.) have the 

termination 5 or a, as: j.G ^f e yaro or: I'^G yara, 

o friends! (nom. sing. sG); those ending in o terminate 

in the Vocative Plur. in a, o and au, as: \s^jJq ^^I e man- 

gata, o beggars! or: ^xxLo mangato, ^i^li mangatau 

(tiCi mangata-u), Nom. Sing. j.axLo mangato; those ending 
in u. (u) terminate in o or a, before which affixes the 

preceding u (u) most be shortened, as: L^lil^ (cl e va- 

tahua or i^s^ljU ^\ e vatahuo, o travellers! JSTom. Sing. 

yJ^LJ•|^ vatahti; those ending in i terminate in the Plural 

1) About the origin of re, rl, are, see Dr. Caldwell's Compar. 
Grammar of the Dra\ddian languages p. 440. 



122 SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

in a, and au (a-u), shortening at the same time the 

final 1 of the base, as: L^v.1^ ;<l e kecia, ^X^iS j^l e ke- 

cio, or: ^^sS' ^\ e keciau, o Kecis! Nom. Sing. ,,-^5^ keci, 

an inhabitant of Kec (in Beluchistan) ; occasionally 'ah' 

is added in the Vocative Singular, as: iilA^ hamiah, o 

protector! and in the Tocative Plural final a is even 
lengthened to 'ahu' for the sake of the rhyme, as: 

SiV^^yi priyahu, o friends! those ending in 'i' (e), add in 

the Vocative Plural simply the affix o or a: ilgjc-u^ ^\ 

e setheo, or: L^Xyw ^1 e sethea, o wholesale-merchants! 

Nom. Sing, j^jj^ sethe. 

Feminine nouns ending in V, V, a, i, T (e) in the 
Nom. Singular, remain unaltered in the Vocative Sing.; 
in the Plural the Vocative is likewise identical with 
the Nominative. The few fem. nouns, which end irre- 
gularly in the Nom. Plural in 'u', as: >-u^j bhenaru, 
sisters etc., retain likewise their final 'u' in the Vocative 
Plural, as: Cl^ ^1 e bhenaru, o sisters! when ending 
in u, they drop in the Vocative final Anusvara, as: 
^y^^ (^t e dhiaru, o daughters! Nom. Plur. ^^y^^c> 

dhiaru. 

The Vocative may also be used without any inter- 

jectional prefix, as: L^jU marhua, o men! 

§. 17. 
in. The Formative. 

The Formative or obhque case, though in Sindhi 
throughout identical with the Instrumentalis , is by itself 
no case, but represents merely the euphonic change of 
the final vowel of a noun previous to the accession of 
any flexional particle or postposition, by means of which 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 123 

the various cases are made up. The changes, which 
the final vowel of a noun undergoes before the accession 
of any adverbial postposition, are on the whole the same 
as those before any other affix. In Sindhi the post- 
positions do not coalesce with the noun itself, the lan- 
guage still being conscious of the fact, that it has to 
deal with original adverbs. We have hinted already, 
that the Formative is originally the Grenitive; it would 
be rather difficult, to prove this in reference to the 
Formative of the Singular, but that the Formative of 
the Plural originally represents the Genitive Plural, is 
borne out by the Prakrit and the kindred modern idioms. 
In Prakrit the Grenitive Plural ends in ^TJT §TJT ^TJF 
in the Apabhransa dialect ^^ ^^ ^^, thence the Sin- 
dhi Formative Plural a, e, or -ne. 

Though the Formative be, in all likelihood, the 
Genitive of the Prakrit, the adjectival affix ^c^ has been 
added to it, to turn it into an adjective, the modern idioms 
once having taken this course to supply the Genitive. 
From thence it was only a consequent step, to use the 
ancient Genitive as the base, to which all the other 
declensional postpositions were added, i. e. the Genitive 
was turned into the Formative. 

1) The Formative of nouns ending in 'u' 
(masc. and fem.) 

a) Masculine nouns ending in 'u' change final 
'u' in the Formative Sing, to 'a', as: ^^13 dasu, a slave. 
Form. (j]-l3 dasa; ^ ^\3 dasa jo, ^^45" J^l5 dasa khe etc. 
If final 'u' be preceded by a short 'a', the insertion of 
euphonic v becomes necessary, as : ^ C ra-u, a weed, Form. 
y^ rava; the same is the case, when final 'u' is preceded 
by a long nasalized a, as: ^L^i* than', a dish. Form. 
pLgo thava. But if final 'u' be preceded by any other 



124 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

vowel, the insertion of euphonic v is optional, as: if: 
van, wind, Format, ^f^ vava or ^|^ vaa; ^jS deu, a demon. 
Format. ^.jS deva or ..jS dea; when final 'u' however is 
preceded by short or long ^i', no euphonic insertion is 
required, as: yj diu, a mound, Format, ^jj dia; ^^ 
viu, a meadow. Format. Jj^ via; ^j^ Jiu, life, Format. 

The following nouns ending in 'u' retain their final 
'u' unaltered in the Formative Singular: 

^, piu, father; Format. ^Jj, as: j.^^ ^^ piu jo etc. 
il^j bhau, brother. Format. iL^j, as: ^^T il4^ bhau 
khe etc. 
but ^Aj piu, sweetheart, ^L^ bhau, price, are regular. 

The Formative Plural ends either in a, e or 
-ne, as: l^om. Sing. Ji^j phulu, a flower; Koni. Plur. 
J^:? phula; Format. Plur. ^^4:*. phul-a, ,j-44:*. phul-e, 
or: j^^J-gj phula-ne. The Formative in a and e is ge- 
nerally used without a following postposition, and that 
in -ne more with a following postposition, as being more 
sonorus; but in poetry the one or other form is used 
as required by the metre. 

Those nouns, which form their Plural irregularly, 

as: iL^J bhau, brother, Nom. Plur. IjL^jbhauraor: laL^ 

bhauru; ^Jj piu, father, E^om. Plur. Iaj piura, derive their 

Formative Plural either from the I^ominative Singular 

or the Nominative Plural, as: ^L^j bhaune or: ^J>A^^ 

bhaurane; ^a^ piune or, ^jCaj piurane; the contracted 

form of the Formative (i. e: a, e) is never used with 
them. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 125 

h) Feminine nouns ending in 'u' remain unaltered 

in the Formatiye Sing., as: ^Uo mau, mother, Format. 

iUo, j.^ iUo man jo; in the Formative Plural the long 
u of the 'Nom. Plur. is shortened before the Format. 

termination -ne, as: ^ yiju, lightening, IN'om. Plur. 

^^4^ viju. Format. Plur. viju-ne. 

Those fem. nouns, which have, besides their regular 
Plural, also an irregular one, derive their Formative 

Plur. from either form, as: ^J.>^ bhenu, sister, 'Nom. 

Plur. ^y^v^ bhenu or: J-^ bhenaru {^^yLfj^ bhenaru); 

Format. Plur. ^^^ bhenune or: jjU-y^ bhenarune. 

2) The Formative of nouns ending in o (6). 

Nouns ending in o change the same in the For- 
mative Sing, to e, as: ^^^ matho, head, Format. ^^^^ 
mathe. If final 5 be preceded by 'a' or a, a euphonic 
V may be inserted, as: pS dao, the glare of the sun, 
Format. ^3 dae or: ^^3 dave; pLi nao, felt. Format, 
^b nae or: ^^^b nave; if o be preceded by any other 
vowel, no insertion of euphonic v takes place, as: pi 
dio, lamp. Format. ^<*> die; jo^ ctio, perfumed oil. 
Format. ,^^^ cue. If a noun end in a nasalized o (=6), 
the Anus vara is retained in the Formative, as; ^j.^b 
nao, the ninth. Format, (j^^b nae. 

K o be preceded by y, it is commonly dropped 
in the Formative, as: 

>-y?5>-! porhyo (or porhio), labour. Form. ^^;j=j XDorhe. 

^Kj^s rupayo, rupee. Format. (^,^y rtipae. 



126 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

The Formative Plural ends either in a, e, the 1 
termination of the Nomin. Plural (a) being dropped be- 
fore them, or in -ne, final a of the Worn. Plural being 

shortened to 'a' before it; as: j.^jiykulho, the shoulder, 

Nom. Plur. l^ kulha, Form. Plur. ^L^JLT kulha, ^j..^,^ 

kulhe, or: ,j4-^ kulhane; j^^ ku5, rat, Nom. Plur. 

liy^ kua, Format. Plur. ^J^yS^ ktia, ^^^ kue, or: | 

^y^ kuane. 

3) The Formative of nouns ending in u (u). 

Nouns ending in u change the same in the For- 
mative Singular to ua, as: y^^^ vaghu, crocodile, 
Format, y^^"^ vaghua. If final u be nasalized (= u), 
the Anusvara is commonly retained in the Formative, 

as: jj^"§^^ vichu, scorpion. Format. ^J^g^^ vichua. 

The Formative Plural ends either in u-a, u-e, or 
u-ne, ua-ne, long u and u being shortened before the 

terminations of the Formative, as: ySHs rahu, a resident, 

Nom. plur. yo^ rahu, residents. Format. Plur. ,jfy»; ra- 

hua (or: jjl^'^)? ^j-^^ rahue, ^5&J rahune, ^^J ra- 

huane; ,j^vf miru, a wild beast, ISTom. Plur. ^^^ miru, 
wild beast. Format. Plur. ^l21^ mirua, ,j«olo mirue, 
^jlo mirune, ,j-5yo miruane. 

4) The Formative of nouns ending in a (a). 

Nouns ending in a remain unaltered in the For- 
mative Sing., as, \Sf\, f , agya, command, Format. 11^ I 
agya; L^lj raja (m.), king. Format. LiC raja; in the 
Formative Plur. they end (according to the termination 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 127 

of the Xomin. Plural: a-u) in u-ne, as: ^LITI agya- 
ime; also ^Lilj rajaune, masc. 

5) The Formative of nouns ending in 'a'. 

Nouns ending in 'a' remain unchanged in the For- 
mative Sing., as: *1^ kama, a beam. Format. 1^ kama; 
in the Formative Plur. they terminate (according to their 

ISTom. Plural) either in a (e) or u-ne, as: ^Lcfe^ kama, 
,j^l^ kame, ^1^ kamune. 

6) The Formative of nouns ending in i (i), 

a) Masc. nouns ending in i change the same in 

the Formative Sing, to i-a, as: ^JLo malT, a gardener, 

Formative "^JL* malia. Those nouns, which have final 

1 nasalized (=^ i), retain the Anus vara in the Formative, 
as: (j^vJ pri, friend. Format, ^^^j pria. The Formative 

Plural ends either in i-a (ya), i-e (ye), or in i-ne, 

ia-ne (yane), iu-ne (yune), as: ^lllLc malia, ^a^|U 

malie; ^JLo mahne, ^j^JLc mahane (^jjJL.«), ^j^U ma- 

liune (^^?Lc). 

h) Feminine nouns ending in i change the same 
likevrise in the Formative Sing, to i-a, as: ^jj topi, 

a hat. Format, ^jj topia; the Formative Plural also 

quite agrees with that of the masc. nouns, as: ^L^j^* 

topia, ^^^^jiJ topie, ^^,p t opine, ^J^Jo* topiane. ^^jo" 

topiune. Such fem. nouns, as have dropped final i in 
the Nom. Plural (c£ §. 15, 6), drop the same also in 

the contracted form of the Formative Plur.. as: ^^^^ 
manji, a stool, Nom. Plur. ^y^^ manjii, Format. Plur. 



128 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

^Lixx) manja, j^A^sxi manje; but: ^j^m manjiane, ^J,^^Jo 

manjiune are also in use. Some other nouns also, in which 
final i is not preceded by a palatal, drop T in the con- 
tracted form of the Formative Plural, as: ..vj'a^kore, in 



scores, from {s';}^ kori, a score. 

7) The Formative of nouns ending in T (e). 

ISTouns ending in T (fem. and masc.) remain un- 
altered in the Format. Sing., as: o^j, f , bhite, a wall, 

Format, v^.^ bhite; y^f kehare (m.), a lion, Format. 

y^f kehare. In the Formative Plural of fem. nouns 

the same terminations are employed as with fem. nouns 

ending in i, as: (jLa^j bhitia, ^j,.f^x^j bhitie, jj^a^j bhi- 

tine, ,j.aa4j bhitiane, ^^aX^j bhitiune. In the Formative 

Plural final T is frequently dropped altogether, especially 
in poetry, but only in the contracted form of the For- 
mative, as: ^aX§j bhate, in (different) ways, from o^^j 

bhate, habit, manner. 

The Formative Plural of masc. nouns ends in -ne, 
the contracted form a, e hardly ever being in use with 

them, as: ^Jy^^f^ keharine. 

&j^ joe, wife, which forms its Plural either regu- 
larly ^^^i>^ joyu, or irregularly: ^Sj.^^ joiru, j.5&j.^ jo- 
hiru, has in the Format. Plur. either ^Jj.^^ joyune or: 
^y^}^ johirine. 

§. 18. 

We let now follow, for the sake of perspicuity, a 
survey of the Sindhi declensional process. As the Gle- 
nitive affix s^ jo is originally an adjective affix, by 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 129 

means of which the noun is turned into an adjective, 
dependent on the governing noun in gender, number 
and case, we premise the inflexion of ^^ which, ac- 
cording to its terminations jo and ji, is inflected after 
the manner of nouns ending in o and T (fern.). As 
stated already, j^ always requires the Formative of a 
noun, as all postpositions. 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. 



INom. j.a. JO. 
Form. ^^ je. 
Vocat. Li ja. 


<5t J^- 

iSf J^' (5t J^^- 

(5t J^- 




PLURAL. 


ISTom. L^ ja. 


^^^ jfi; or-f ji^. 


Form. s. je; 

" 1 


c>^ jane. ^:^ je; ^ jine; ^L June 


Vocat. Li- ja. 


i^^ jiane; ^1:^ jiune.) 



In poetry the diminutive form yi^ jaro, ^'i^ 
jari is occasionally used instead of j.^^ , as : 

Yesterday (thy) relatives have departed (this life); 
to-day it is thy turn. Golden Alphabet II, 4. 

In the same way as ^ jo the adjective j ja-1 sando 
(belonging to, own) is very frequently used in poetry, 
and inflected regularly, as: 

SINGULAR. 

Feminine. 

^^djJL sandi. 
^d3L sandia. 
^iXk^ sandi. 





Masculine. 


Nom. 


^ 


sando. 


Form. 


^iXl^ sande. 


Yocat. ttXil 


sanda. 


Trum 


pp, Sindh: 


i-Grrammar. 



130 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

PLURAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Nom. ItXlL sanda. ^^^JlLI sandiu. 



Form. 



^Jol/ sandane, 



^tXll sandine; jjJtXH san- 



^jdl. sande. diane; ^,djS*j sandiune. 

Yocat. ItXil sanda. j^^^Jjil sandiu. 



I. DEOLENSIOK 
Nouns in u (masc. and fern.) 

a) Masc. nouns in V. 
SINGULAR. 

Nom. ..^o deli-u, a country. 

Format. | 

lustrum. 1 4?^ ^^^-^• 

Gen. j.:?^ ^o deh-a jo etc. 

Dative. .^ ^i deh-a khe. 

Accusat. ^,i deh-u (^^4^ 4^^)- 

Locat. ^fi deli-e, or: ^-yo ^o deha me etc. 

Ablat. ^Li:>S deh-a; ,j54j<3 deh-o; ^^^.^ deh-u. 

^1^.0 deh-au; iL^S deh-au or: ^L^ J^fi deha 
kha etc. 
Yocat. ^o ^5l e deh-a; ^,S deh-a. 

PLURAL. 

Nom. ^j deh-a, countries. 

Format. \ 

lustrum. J u'^?^ ^^^"^5 ,^^fi deh-e; ^:^S deha-ne. 

Gen. i^ (j^.^ dehane jo etc. 

Dative. ^^ ^j^.'^ dehane khe. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 131 

Accus. 4j5 deh-a {^ ^.'i)- 

Locat. vA/D lJ^^'^ clehane me etc. (^^v^i cleli-e). 

Ablat, ^\lx^/i cleliane-a etc.; ^L^ ^^^4^!^ deliane 

kha etc. 
Vocat. i^ji deli-o; I^jj deli-a. 

An irregular noun. 

SINGULAR. 
Nom. ^^ pi-U; father. 
Format. ) 
Instrum.ji^. P^"^* 
Grenit. ^ ^^ piu Jo etc. 

Dative. ^^^ ^^ piu khe. 
Accus. ^. pi-u (^ ^j. 
Ablat. ^L^ ^^ piu kha etc. 
Yocat. ^^ pi-u. 

PLURAL. 

'Norn, "lo piu-ra, fathers. 
Format 



lustrum./^ Pi^^-^^' ij;^. P™^a-ne. 

Dative. ^^^ ^j^^ piune khe; ^^^ ^Lo piurane khe. 

Accus. p^ piura (^ j^.; ^ ^^). 

Ablat. ^^i-o pinne-a; ^jLowo pmrane-a etc. 

^145^ ^j^, piune kha; ^L^ ^lo piurane kha etc. 
Vocat. jwAj piur-o. 



1) In poetry an additional vowel may be joined to the final a of 

the Yocative , for the sake of the metre , as : ili • vanau , oh ye trees, 

instead of U. vaiia; -^cU^ vanaha, :^li« vanaa. Sh. Ma^ourl, III, 6. 7. 8. 

12 



132 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

^ yJJo lXLo ^L^j ^L4j (5^^ ^4^J (5j^. 

Having returned to my own cowpen, may I see 
the country of Malir. Sh. Um. Mar. I, 13. 

Forget not (thy) husband; o woman (rather) die! 
Sh. Um. Mar. II, 6. 

ehfL^ U^^"" x^^f^ ^T^^ -f^^ r'^ ""^ ^)^ 

May I be of a black face (literally: in a black 
face) on the day of the resurrection from amongst the 
sinners. Maj. 731. 

Having made a journey from a foreign country he 
has come hither. Sh. Sor. I, 2. 

Wounded were those feet of the poor woman from 
the journey (1-w). Sh. Abiri VI, 6. 

The thief, the mad man, the stranger, the fool take 
out of thy mind. Maj. 291. 

Come near, o sweetheart, do not go away, my 
friend! Sh. Abiri X, 3. 

^xj>1 |vJ4> p ^^ (j-iy-^ ^iXx^ j^iXj^ 

If one give me thus intelligence of my friends. 
Maj. 733. 

Having separated the friends from the friends he 
shows compassion. Sh. Sor. I, Epil. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 133 

(5^^ v;^ >#5 y^i ^ '^^ r-f^ 

Stand up, ye physicians, do not sit down, go off 
with your medicines! Sh. Jam. Kal. I, Epil. 

h) Feminine nouns in 'u'. 
SES^GULAR. 

Nom. ^ vij-u, lightening. 

Format. ^ 



Instrum.J^5 ^y-^* 

Grenit. j^ _.^ viju jo etc. 

Dative. ^5^ ^^ viJu khe. 
Accus. ^^ ^dj-u (^^ ^^). 
Ablat. ^J^ irr^ ^W^ k^^ ^tc- 



Vocat. ^ vij-u. 

PLURAL. 

Nom. \jy=?'y vij-fi- 
Format. | , " _ 
lustrum. J c?^^^ ^J^-^^- 

Genit. ^ ^L^ vijune jo etc. 

Dative. ^^^ ^j^^ vijune khe. 

Accus. ^^^ vij-u {^^ ^p. 

Ablat. (j'--*^^ viju-ne-a etc. ; ^L^ ,j^^ vijune kha etc. 

Vocat. (j^^^ "^j-fi- 

An irregular noun. 
SINGULAR. 
Nom. iUo ma-u, mother. 
Format. iLo ma-u. 
Vocat. iUo ma-u. 



134 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^^jLi> ma-u; IsUo ma-i-ru; ^J^'^}^ ma-i-ru, 

mothers. 
Format. ^j-sLJo mau-ne; ,jvjUo mairu-ne. 

Yocat. (j^Li ma-u, *oUo ma-i-ru. 

<s^ ^ S?^^^ ^ ^ "^ ^*' ^T ^-^'^^ 

Having risen with love depart; nothing (else) will 
bring thee to Kec. Sh. Ma^B. 11, 10. 

friend, do not go to a foreign country, said to 
him again his mother. Maj. 83. 

lXjI ^jLi ,j4^^ >^?^ ^i^Aii ojjs 

The sweetheart has been won by those, who set 
off, placing rent upon rents (i. e. in their clothes). Sh. 
Abiri, YTI, 7. 



^. - j- 



O sisters, I am simple-minded; by me unknowingly 
a marriage has been contracted. Sh. Abiri V, 16. 

n. DECLENSION. 

Nouns in 6 (8). 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. ji'lY-yo merak-o, crowd. 

Format. \ ^ 

lustrum. j(5f>f merak-e. 

Genit. ^c^ ^^r^ merak-e jo etc. 
Dative. ^^^ c5^'rty merake khe. 
Accus. yS\'U,^ merak-o (^^^ ^5"!^). 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 135 

Ablat. ^jl^lj^ merak-a etc.; ^L^ ^s^^}^ merake kha. 
Yocat. l^t>-yo merak-a. 

PLURAL, 

Nom. ^yj^ merak-a, crowds. 

Format. )^^ 

Instrum./u'^^j^ merak-a; ^5't^ merak-e; ^Ij^xx) me- 

raka-tie. 
Genit, j^ ^j^^Y-y* merakane jo. 

Dative. ^^^ (j^^ t-y^ merakane khe. 

Accus. I^lv-yo merak-a (^^^ ^\''Lm). 

Ablat. ^CjSy-jjjo merakane-a etc.; ,jL^ ij-^'T-y^ mera- 
kane kha etc. 
Yocat. l^l>-yo merak-a; ^Ij^ merak-au; ji'lj^ merak-5. 

Having filled the dish with many pearls she gave 
it to the lucky one {^\^), Maj. 714. 

The elephant, though he walk slowly, is yet of greater 
price than a horse. Sh. Shiha Ked. I, 2. 

Get up, o mad one! be off! do not sit now here! 
Maj. 249. 

The sails are straight, the ropes are new, their chiefs 
are the Muhanos (fishermen). Sh. Sur. I, 12. 



136 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Having lifted the killed one (fern.) into the paniers 
{^lkiS)j the friend has driven off. Sh. Abiri X, Epil. 

The lovers scoop out (their head) from the shoulders, 
says ,'Abd-ul-Latif. Sh. Kal. I, 7: 

. -r ^ -r 1^ ^ I ■:. 

.. I .. ^ , 

In the bottom she (i. e. the boat) has got holes; 

from the sides water flows in. Sh. Stir. Ill, 6. 

m. DECLENSION. • 

Nouns in u (u). 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. ^^) rahak-u, an inhabitant. 
Format, l^' ^^. 
Instrum.)/^; ^ahak-ua. 



- ^ :^ !.. - - 



Ablat. ^I^^L^r rahaku-a; ^^Lg-^^LiT rahakua kha etc. 
Yocat. ^^Liu rahak-u. 



PLURAL. 



Nom. ; y^^\ rahak-u, inhabitants. 

Format. \ C^MT. rahaku-a; ^,^\^\ rahaku-e; 
lustrum./'^ ^ ^*' ^ 

^/.S'Li's rahakua-ne or: ^rLiv rahaku-ne. 

Ablat. 0La5"Li^ rahakune-a etc.; ,^1^ v:)-^'-^; rahakune 

kha etc. 
Vocat. s^rL^^T rahaku-o; U5^L5^^ rahaku-a. 

Grains of medicine have been given by me to the 
sweetheart with (my) hands. Sh. Kohiari IV, 9. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 137 

Cause to come to Punhu this foot-traveller (fern.). 
Sh. Koh. IV, Epil. 

darling Marti, would that the Pauhars would be 
reconciled with me! Sh. Um. Mar. I, Epil. 



CI > 



*iLo ,^AAJ J JLXjO r.si,*M ,^,(LKS>- ,^^ 



u^^;*^ C5^^. ^ -^ ij}^ (5f^^ 



(5": 



Truth like gold has not fallen into the mouth of 
of the people. Sh. Jam. Kal. YIII, 7. 

By wild beasts, by ants, by birds, by (any) other 
speach be not misled. Sh. Kal. I, 16. 

Xii> ^jLxL/o ,j»A-L^ is^)^ '^ (5^^^ L^iXxjyo 

Marui does not wash the braids in the palaces, 
away from the Marus. Sh. Um. Mar. Ill, 5. 

By those cows, by which not a drop was given, 
the pots have been filled. Haz. Sar. V, 47. 



-<>0-- .S- 9 



Do not remain, o people under the protection of 
Nangar (i. e. Tattha)! Yerses of the Mamuis. 

Note. It is a poetical license, if a noun is not inflected in 
the Formative for the sake of the rhyme, as: 

u^-^ ^s^ i^}-^ u^ (5^' u"'^^^ oy^ >^;^ 
High above the sky art thou, I am a wanderer upon 
earth (^^4^ instead of J^). Sh. Sor. I, 3. 



138 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

lY. DECLENSIOK 
Nouns in a (^). 

a) feminine. 
SINGULAR. 

Nom. \^ hac-a, murder. 

Format. ] ^- 

T J. \l^ hac-a. 
instrum. J ••• 

Ablat. (,jL=^ hac-a); ^l^ L^ haca kha etc. 
Yocat. La^ hac-a. 

PLURAL. 

Nom. v:;^^'-^ haca-u, murders. 

Format. ] ^, ^ - ^ 

T J. ^.oL=^ nacau-ne. 

Instrum. J y^ ••• 

Ablat. ^jLuuL^ hacaune-a. 
Vocat. ij^LiP haca-u. 

h) masculine. 
SINGULAR. 

Nom. U.ir raj-a (LitJ raja), a king. 

Format. ], ^ .- _v _ 
Instrum. J • -> ^ * 

Ablat. (jLi^ Lii> raja kha etc. 

Vocat. LLlJ raj-a. 

PLURAL. 

ISTom. Lit^ raj-a, kings. 

Format. 1 ^^, - »- v 

T , r.wsL^K raiau-ne. 

Instrum. J Sr * > "^ 

Ablat. ^li^L^fJ rajaune-a; jjL^^LilJ rajaune kha etc. 
Vocat. pl^^ ^^J^"^- 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 139 

There is no way with those Jats, o aunt! Sh. 
Hus. YI, Epil. 

That one is with thyself, on whose account thou 
causest thyself troubles. Sh. Abiri III, 5. 

V. DECLENSION. 

Nouns in a. 

SINGULAR. 

Nona. JidS^ sadh-a, wish. 
Format. ) ^ ^ 
Instrum.r'^ '^'^^■^- 

Ablat. ^Lijuw sadh-a; ^L^^^^Jcl sadha kha etc. 

Vocat. .ijJ*; sadh-a. 

PLURAL. 

Nona. jjLijuL sadh-a; ^^jJL sadh-u, wishes. 

Format. 1 , . . ^. , . _, ^ , . ^, 

T f f jli^tVAv sadh-a; ^^.j^tX**; sadh-e; ^iX^ sadnu-ne. 

Ablat. (jLoiiX^ sadhune-a ; ^l^^tXl, sadhune kha etc. 

Vocat. ^LitX^ sadh-a; ^yid<L sadh-u. 

By the counsel of Saharu (the buffalo-keeper) I have 
been made to pass the whirlpool with the mercy (of God). 
Sh. Suh. II, 2. 

From the unity multiplicity has sprung; multiplicity 
is all unity. Sh. Kal. I, 15. 

Sit not, o lady! in Bhambhoru, thou wilt now come 
up to him. Sh. Hus. YIII, 3. 



140 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Hot winds blow, oppressively hot are the days. 
Sh. Desi m, Epil. 

In the men's sitting rooms is aloe -wood, on the 
couches musk. Sh. Mum. Ean5 11, 3. 

VI. DECLEJSFSIOK 

Nouns in i (i). 

a) Masculine nouns. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. (5^L1 san-i, companion. 
Format. K „ _ 
Instrum.ji^^ ^^^-^^• 

Ablat. jjLiLl sani-a; ^L4^ ^^ sania kha etc. 
"Vocat. ^iL-1 san-i (i^L.! sani-ah). 

PLURAL. 

Nom. ^IZj san-i, companions. 

Format.)' ^ _ . . , , ^., ^ . ^, ,., ^ 

lustrum. J ^^^ sani-a (^jLoU saniy-a); ^xajU sani-e; 

^jJoLL sanya-ne (^^LL sania-ne) ; ^liLI« sanyu-ne 
(^j.xiLL saniu-ne); jjiLl sani-ne. 

Ablat. ^LoliUw sanyane-a etc. 

Vocat. LiLw sani-a ; j^Ll sani-5. 



i- -r 



;'5 u'"^'"^^ u^^^ cff (5^/=?- -f^ iJ''^/^. 

Under the feet of (my) friend I spread out my 
hair. Maj. 231. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 141 

f P^ ,j-^!^ ^Lii ^^ yMxiJ ^^ ^U ^s^fXi 

Then said the Qazi to Qaisu: dropp bashfulness 
from (thy) mind. Maj. 183. 

From the women, o protector! deliver now this 
man. Sh. Sor. I, 9. 

On (my) feet I cannot arrive; the country of (my) 
friends is far off. Sh. Khambh. I, Epil. 

^i^ y^y^^ u^^-^ '^Lk^-f^ ^y^^ 
Cut off wands, many are necessary for you, o ye 
camelmen! Sh. Abiri XI, 7. 

My condition is such, as ye see, o friends! 
Maj. 441. 

h) Feminine nouns. 
SINGULAR. 
Nom. ^.Ij^ gol-i, a slave-girl. 
Format. 1 * ^ _ 
lustrum. jc5-i/ g^^-^^' 

Ablat. ^^^>^ goli-a; ^L^ ^^Jj-f golia kha. 
Vocat. (^jj^ g5l-L 

PLURAL. 

JSTom. ^^^r goliy-u (^^>f goli-u; ^^j.f goly-u). 

Format. 1 ^ ^ ^ 

lustrum.) u'^-^i^ g^li-^5 ^^If goli-e; ^j^ golia-ne (go- 

lya-ne) ; ,j-Jj.f goliu-ne ; ^jyf goli-ne. 

Ablat. ^jLaaaJ^S^ goliane-a etc. 

Vocat. \jy^J^ goli-u. 



142 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Then said the lady to her slave-girl: having risen 
saddle the camel! Maj. 738. 

^^^^^ ^ ^^I|j ^^ ^LL^ ^^'6 ^^C> 

O afflicted one, forget (thy) grief; break in pieces 
(thy) bed, o Sacui! Sh. Ma^B. Yl, 6. 

The kernels of the golaros (coccinea indica) will I 
pick with a snap of the fingers. Sh. Una. Mar. n, 
Epil. 

They (i. e. the physicians) give a pill of mercy, 
having seen the pulses {^^'i^). Sh. Jam. Kal. 11 , 18. 

To the queens pleasure has returned; the griefs of the 
slave-girls have been taken off. Sh. Desi, Chot. 3. 

companions, my soul has been confided to the 
protection of my sweetheart. Sh. Desi VII, 11. 

YII DECLEJSTSIOK 

Nouns ending in e (i). 
SINGULAR. 
Nom. ^\.f galh-e, story (fem.). 
Format. \ ^ __ 

Ablat. ^Ll^LT galhe-a; ^j^^L^ galh-o etc. 
Yocat. ^L? galh-e. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 143 

PLURAL. 

Nom. jjy.^JL/^ galhe-u, stories. 

Format. l^-___ ^ _ ^ ^ 

Instrum.ju'^-^'^ gallie-a; ;j^Lf galhi-e; ^Vf gal- 

hea-ne; ^j^iLr galheu-ne; ,jj^\^ galhi-ne. 

Ablat. ^Ll^Ly galhine-a etc. 

Yocat. ^yju^\f galhe-u. 

^'5 ^;^-^f y^ is^ "^^ (5f^ ur" vj^^^ 

friend, may some one show me the way to the 
mosque! Maj. 131. 

From Kake do not go anywhere! it is not right for 
thee, o Eano! Sh. Mum. Ran. I, Epil. 

4^ U^-i^ U>->e isi)^ "^ ^^ U^ 
Acknowledge then Muhammad, the intercessor, out 
of thought and love (cf^U). Sh. Kal. I, 2. 

mother, I do not trust them, who shed tears, 
Having brought water into their eyes they show 
a sandhill. Sh. Jam. Kal. I, 20. 

The self-willed buffaloes graze the cool deserts. 
Having come in front of the cow-house they give 
fresh milk. Sh. Sar. lY, 14. 



144 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

In the caldrons the limbs boil, where in the eddies 
a grain does not sink. Sh. Kal. 11, 27. 

Volumes beautiful in all ways, and other elegant 
books. Maj. 141. 

O sisters, give me by no means counsels to return! 

Sh. Desi yn, 6. 

&) Masculine nouns. 
SINGULAR. 

Nom. yj^ kehar-e, lion. 
Format. V ' 
Instrum./^ kehar-e. 
1^ - 



Ablat. ..X^Jjn^ kehare-a etc. 



(J 



^M 



Yocat. J^ kehar-e. 

PLURAL. 



N"om. y^ kehar-e, lions. 

Format. V ^ _ _ 

lustrum, ju^^ kehare-a; ^^^^ kehari-e ; ^^ ke- 

hari-ne. 

Ablat. ^jLLw^ keharine-a etc. 

Vocat. py^ kehare-o. 

This in the business of the lion, that he strikes his 
hand into the elephant. Sh. Shiha Ked. 7. 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 145 

Chapter IX. 
Adjectives. 

§. 19. 

The Sindhi adjectives and participles have the 
same terminations as the substantives and may there- 
fore be classed under the same heads as the substan- 
tives. 

The general rule, that the adjective must agree with 
its substantive in gender, number and case, holds 
good in Sindhi likewise. 

In reference to the gender no exception takes place; 
but if an adjective or participle be referred to two pre- 
ceding substantives, the one of which is masculine, the 
other feminine, the adjective or participle follows in 
the Plural masculine, as: 

U^^'^ U^^ ^f}^ T\ >J 

He created them male and female. Gen. I, 27. 
With regard to the number the following ex- 
ception takes place. When an adjective precedes a noun 
in the inflected case of the Plural, it may remain in 
the inflected case of the Singular, as: 

^ ^^ ^j^ to false prophets, or: ^^T^a^ ^j^ 

The same is the case, when an adjective precedes 
a noun in the Vocative Plural, the adjective being 
then commonly put in the Vocative Singular, as: 

iL&jCo s^^iXL^ (^1 o Sindhi men! instead of: Li=*Lo U^Jclw ^|. 

But it does not fall under this head, when an adjective 
or participle is referred to a preceding substantive fol- 
lowed by the postposition ^ khe; for in this case 

there exists no grammatical connexion between the ad- 
jective and substantive, but the adjective is used ab- 
solutely as: 

Trumpp, Sindhi- Grammar. K 



146 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

He saw those two brothers throwing their net into 
the sea. Matth. lY, 18. 

I thought the hills high. 
As to the case it may be observed, that ad- 
jectives, which end in i and u may remain unin- 
flected, when immediately followed by a substantive 
in the Formative, as: 

Do not make a journey in the caravan of vin- 
dictive men! 

^W ^T^'^ ^>rf. ^y^i ^ C5f^ 
To both the helpless there was in many ways pleasant 

conversation. Maj. 198. 

An adjective, following a substantive, may be put 

in the Ablative case, whereas the preceding substantive 

is only put in the Formative, as: 

" f " " ' •*• t>T k"' i'' i"'' " 

" ^ I 

He who has come from the grand-father's countr}^, 
has given me a reproach. Sh. Um. Mar. H, 2. 

When an adjective precedes or follows a noun in 
the contracted form of the Formative Plural, it as- 
sumes the same form, as: 

"Wicked men forsake. 

I seek in many ways the mercy of others. Sh. Jam. 
Kal. Y, Epil. I. 



1) ^xl^S is contracted instead of ■^^•-^aa 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 147 

<5?^. y^ (j^H ^'ji^ (J^<^Lj ^JtXjLf 

By the burning coals of the thorn and babul tree 
I am indeed roasted! Sh. Jam. Kal. Ill, 3. 

Adjectives precede, as a rule, their substan- 
tives, as: 

Man sees with his small eye the world. 

Good, fragrant, sweet -smelling food was contained 
therein. 

An adjective may also follow its substantive, es- 
pecially when the adjective contains more syllables than 
its substantive, as: 



The stars from the day of beginning are, without 
having deviated from their fixed intervals, in full turning. 

Two and more adjectives very frequently follow their 
substantive as: 

^^^ 4>l^l -g-^*w [JL^ )^^^ ^■€-% L/'i^ 

sweet and charming friend, make the whole earth 
blooming! Sh. Sar. lY, 12. 

.4js\/o |*^r ^^ jj"^. tX-V6-? ^r^l (5^'^ ^-^L^ feltX^ 

By the knowing and wise God such secrets have 
been explained in his word. 

K2 



148 SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

To adjectives, as well as to substantives^ very fre- 
quently an emphatic i accedes in all cases, signifying 
'very', 'quite', 'truly', without altering in any way the 
termination of the adjective (the feminine Singular of 
adjectives ending in o alone being excepted; see §. 20, 2), 

as: SiJCcs^jl ocitoi, quite accidental; ^^aaj^^ yaribei (Sing, 
fem.) very humble. 

O companion, make preparation of the very instant 
journey! Golden Alph. I, 1. 

§. 20. 
Formation of gender. 

With reference to the derivation of the feminine 
from masculine nouns the general rules, which have 
been laid down in Chapter YII, §. 14, are equally ap- 
plicable to adjectives. Some minor points, in which ad- 
jectives differ in this respect from substantives of the 
same termination, will be noticed under the following 
heads. 

1) Adjectives ending in 'u'. 

These change the masc. termination 'u' either to 
'e' (i) or to 'a', as: 

litXj nidharu, helpless, fem. vitXJ nidhare or: 

IStXj nidhara. 

U^i^ ^j-fi^r*"^ <^7"^' }^^i 7^^^ 

Porlorn, helpless, wretched, unacquainted I am! 
Sh. Abiri YIII, 1. 

Some adjectives of Sindhi origin, but more so those 
borrowed from the Arabic or Persian, remain without 

any change of gender, number and case, as: ^IZ, sarsu, 



SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 149 



?• <- 



plentiful (s.); <A/gadu, mixed (s.); Js-§-^ sahiju, easy (s.); 
<c;aa£ laba'iu, vain (a.); |*Uj* tamamu, whole (a.); ^y^ 
Xtibu, good (p.); JL^^o dursu, right (corrupted from ^l[c^ 
(p.)); ^U matu, done for (p.); ^jLi^S pasimanu, ashamed 
(P-)5 ij^i^^ Eairanu, bewildered (a.); Jf ^i halaku, killed 
(a.); oLo safu, clean (a.); (viii ma^limu, known (cor- 
rupted from ^^JLxxj (a.)), etc. etc. 

^U .J ,j»-»-S-5 (5^ ^ '^^ ^=> ^ri ^^Li^/o 

Those who have died before dying, they are not 
done for when dead. Sh. Ma?Bu.ri TV, 7. 

^ (j^;^ U-f-^ ^;'^ ^'; erf tj^^o y^ 

By the medicine, which is in the mouth of the 
physicians, they have been made whole. Sh. Jam. 
Kal. n, 17. 

Those who have looked about with men, will there 
be put to shame. Maj. 266. 

2) Adjectives ending in o (o). 

These change the masc. termination to i (i); as: 

^i^ kuro, false, fem. ^i^ kuri; ^j-^j nao, new, fem. 

,j^j nai. 

When an adjective or participle ends in y5 (or io), 
being preceded by a consonant, the y (i) is dropped be- 

fore the fem. termination i, as: j-x^J dukhyo or: j^.^0 

dukhio, pained, fem. ^^c> dukhi; j.^ kio, done, fem. 

^S ki; but j.^^^ pio, fallen (Part. perf. from ^^) makes 

its feminine ^Lo pel, not pi. When yo however is 

preceded by a vowel, the feminine is formed regularly 



150 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

in yi, as: ^j^ cayo, said (Part. perf. from ^^j^a^), fern, 

^^i cayi; ^ kayo, made (another form of the part. 

perf. of ^^''S)^ fern. ^^ kayi; jjI ayo, come (part. perf. 

from (j;^!), fem. ^} ayi; but the y may just as well 

be dropped in such like forms, as: cai, kai, ai etc. 
When the emphatic i accedes to the feminine Sin- 
gular, then the masc. termination o is changed to yai 

in the Nominative, as: u^ muno, blunt, with the em- 
phatic i in the feminine: ^Ljax> munyai; but the other 

cases of the feminine are quite regular, and hardly ever 
found with an emphatic i. 

Look, says Latif, what credit (is given) to pieces 
of straw! Sh. Suh."vm, 1. 

J^ <sf (S?^-^^f^ ^ ;^ ^ (57=?. (5f 

If she sees the face of the buffalo - keeper , she be- 

V 

comes quickly well. Sh. Suh. Ch5t. 5. 

3) Adjectives ending in u (u). 
These do not change their termination in the fe- 
minine, as: y^ sahu, masc. and fem., patient; y^jrt^ 
verhu, masc. and fem., quarrelsome. 

4) Adjectives ending in a (a). 

These are comparatively few in number and admit 

of no change of gender, as: U>l(3 data, masc. and fem., 

liberal; ,jSG tala, masc. and fem., worried. The greater 

number of them is indeclinable, as: Isuo safa, pure (a.); 

Qi fana, extinct (a.); ^^^, pha, tired; ItXa- juda, se- 
parate (p.). 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 151 

5) Adjectives ending in a. 
They admit of no change of gender and are all 
indeclinable^), as: {X^i>j vadhika, excessive; ^^ suiia, 

empty, barren; JLit> dhara, separate, or compounded: 

rLit>jsLi4> dharodhara; JL^i jala or "^Li jara, much; "A^ 
jama, much. 

(His i. e. God's) life is with the life of every one; 
but the aspect is quite different. Sh. Kal. I, 24. 

^^AX> lX:)c> L:^ ^^.^J^ c5^(3 \Hi> 'iS^O ItX:^ y^ 

Whose heads (are) asunder, the trunks separated, 
the limbs in the caldron. Sh. Kal. 11, 24. 

6) Adjectives ending in i (i). 

These remain unchanged in the feminine, as: ^^Li 

bari, carrying a burden, masc. and fem.; ^i^\^ sa- 

yadi, savoury, masc. and fem.; some are only used in 
the feminine. 

7) Adjectives ending in e (i). 

They do not differ in the feminine , like those ending 

in i; as: (j^j^ caurase, masc. and fem., square. Most 

of them are indeclinable, chiefly those of foreign origin, 

e. g.: j»tXw sudhe, pure; j^yc> dadhe, wrong; ^^^ mukhe. 



1) Stack exliibits in his Sindhi Grammar the paradigma y-^^-^ 
sakhara and inflects it in the Formative Plural; but in his Dictionary 

he gives v-^Xjuw sakharu, which is the proper termination. I have 
never met with an adjective ending in 'a', inflected in any way, for 

the cardinal numbers ^^:> panja five etc. can hardly be classed under 
this head. ^ 



152 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



supreme; ifiy-^ x^^e (p.), pleasant (generally pronounced 
short and partly also written (ji^); t>Lxo sade (p.), joyful; 
JQ barabare (p.), abreast, right; ^L^ bajae (p.), per- 
formed. 

The feminine affixes ni, ne, ani (yani), aine 
(yaine) are occasionally used with adjectives ending in u, 
o, Uj i, if some inherent quality, habit or occu- 
pation of living beings is to be marked out (the 

details see Chapter VII, §. 14), as: r^■^=^ ch^r^ '^ai>Yi- 

bine chokare, a girl (habitually) humble; ^J ^it>Llw 
sadhuni rana, a (thoroughly) virtuous widow; ^^ti ^ilJ^j.P^ 
hodiyam daci, an obstinate (female) camel. 

We subjoin here a survey of the inflexion of ad- 
jectives, 

1) Adjectives ending in 'u'. 

SINGULAR. 

Feminine. 



Nom. 

Format. 
Vocat. 

Nom. 

Format. 
Yocat. 



Masculine. 

v::^£s^l acetu, 
1 
thoughtless. 

.! aceta. 
aceta. 



xcs^t aceta; oti^^l acete. 



,, ^ I aceta. 
(j^^i&^l acete, etc 



ATS. I aceta; o«jy^l acete. 
I " 'i 

xs^] aceta; v:>.-y^l acete. 
PLUKAL. 

acetu ; 



^J-""^ 



I acetane. 



I 

acetune; 
etc. 



acetiu. 

acetine. 
etc. 



1aA£^ 



I aceto. 



acetu ; 



acetiu. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 153 

2) Adjectives ending in o. 
SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Kom. ^f' ruklio, dry. is"^) ^'^^^i- 
Format, ^^-^l rukhe. <s^; ^^khia. 

Vocat. l^fl rukha. isi:^) ^^^^^^^• 

PLURAL. 
Nom. L^N rukha. >j)^r^) I'ukhiyu (rukkiu), 

^j-j^j rukbe etc. (j>4^; rukhine etc. 
Format. < ' 

^j.^fj rukhane. 

Yocat. 14^ rukha; ^$^ ^Tf^) r^kliiyu. 
rukha-u ; ^fl ruklio. 

SINGULAR. 
Nom. (jj^0 agio, prior, ^j-^l agi. 
Format. ,j-v^l agie. ^jj^\ agia. 

Vocat. ^Ll^i agia. j^C^ agi. 

PLURAL. 
JSTom. ^^^ agia. Ur^^' agiyu (agin). 

j^n agie etc. ^f] agine etc. 

^A^l agiane. 
Vocat. (j^^ agia; ^T^^ agiyu (agiu), 

^A^^i agiau; 

^fl agio. 



Format. < 



154 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



3) Adjectives ending in u. 
SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Nom. y.^ saM, patient, y^ saliu. 
Format. ^^ sahua. 
Vocat. ^^ sahu. 



y^^ sahua. 
y^.Zj sahti. 
PLURAL. 



Nom. ^aL sahu. 

■ 

^j-j^^ sahue etc. 
Format. <! ,j.ju§-1 sahuane. 
j^ sahune. 

Vocat. U^^'^tuo. 
iLlgiw sahua. 



y^ sahu. 
,jj^^4^ sahue etc. 

^^1^ sahuane. 

^j^ sahune. 

j.^4*^ sahuo. 
U^ sahua. 



Nom. 



4) Adjectives ending in a. 
SINGULAR. 

b'lS data, liberal. bfj data. 



Format. LjIo data. 
Vocat. bl5 data. 



bfS data. 



Nom. 

Format. ^jUIj dataune= 



b*|j data, 
bi^ data. 
PLURAL. 

jj^jLjIj datau. 



dataune. 



Vocat. s.jb((3 datao. 






^j^Lj)l<3 datau. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



155 



Nom. 

Format. 

Vocat. 

Nom. 
Format. 

Vocat. 



5) Adjectives ending in i. 
SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

^^i dukhi, afflicted, i^-^^ dukhl. 

^^45^j dukhia. (s^'^^ dukhia. 

^4^0 dukhi. is-^'^ dukhL 

PLURAL. 

^^<3 dukhL ^^A^j dukhiyu (dukhiu). 

■*.'- ^ "?- 

^j-^j dukhie etc. ^j.j^:^o dukhie etc. 

^j^o dukhine etc. ^j^'i dukhine etc. 
ll§5^5 dukhia. 



^j^A^o dukhiyu. 



7 _ 

j.lg5^<3 dukhi5. 



Nom. 

Format. 
Vocat. 

Nom. 
Format. 

Vocat. 



6) Adjectives ending in e (i). 
SINGULAR. 
^JilX;^ hikamuthe, ...^illxi hikamuthe. 

unanimous. 
^'xj^ hikamuthe. ..^!U^ hikamuthe, 

..^Xtijo hikamuthe. -^iUijc hikamuthe. 

PLURAL. 
..^ij^ hikamuthe. ^j 

^l^ilX!^ hikamu- 

thie etc. 
^j^^xU^ hikamu- 

thine etc. 
yX^xJ^^ hikamu- ^^a^^uXp hikamuthiu. 

thio. 



hikamuthiu. 
hikamuthie etc. 

hikamuthine etc. 



156 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

§. 21. 
Comparison of adjectives. 

The Sindhi, as well as the cognate idioms, has lost 
the power to form a Comparative and Superlative 
degree after the manner of the Sanskrit (and Persian) 
by means of adjective affixes, and it is very remarkable, 
that the Semitic way of making up for the degrees of 
comparison has been adopted. In order to express the 
idea of the Comparative, the object or objects, with 
which another is to be compared, is put in the Abla- 
tive, or, which is the same, the postpositions ^jL^ kha, 

^J}^ kho, (j^-^ khu, ^\So ma, ^L^-^p^ manjha and si- 
milar ones (see the Postpositions) are employed, the 
adjective itself remaining in the Positive. In order to 
express the idea of the Superlative, the pronominal 
adjective all is placed before the j^blative. By the 
Ablative the difference or distance, which exists 
between the objects compared, is pointed out. 

Much sweeter than sweetness, (and) not bitter is 
the word. Sh. Kal. HI, 10. 

More valuable than a hundred heads is the breath 
of the friend (Plur.). Sh. Kal. II, 30. 

Nearer than the breath and the veins is the union 
of the one (God). Maj. 5. 

^>^ C5^ r^" ^ ^/ uH^ ^H ^;'^. 

The wife, whom thou hast respected, having loved 
her more than thy Lord (Plur.). Mengho 8. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 157 

If thou likest to meet (thy) friend, then esteem 
virtue more than vices. Sh. Jam. Kal. VIII, 22. 

Whosoever break one of these least commandments 
and teach the people thus, he will be called the least 
in the kingdom of heaven. Matth. V, 19. 



Chapter X. 
Numeral adjectives. 

§• 22. 

The Sindhi possesses a great variety of numeral 
adjectives. 

I. The CARDmAL NUMBERS are: 

\ jCjbb hiku; jC^ heku; (X)l eku; j^^ hikiro; j^^^^ 

hekiro, one. 

^ ^ ba, two. 
r ^J tre, three. 

f X^ care, four. 

d ^j panja, five. 

^ ..^ cha, or: .^s> chaha, six. 

V vILv^ sata, seven. 

A ^'1 atha, eight. 

^ ^pj nava, nine. 



158 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

t* .a daha, ten. 

^^ U^;^ yaralia; ,j^J(^| ikaraha; ^"s^ karaha, eleven. 

^^ c^^;^ baraha, twelve. 

ft** ij^Zf^ teraha, thirteen. 

ff jj^^j^ codaha, fourteen. 

td ^JtXlS pandraha; ^C^oJOj pandlira, fifteen. 

\'i J>i;3-w s5ralia, sixteen. 

rv ^2^^P^ satraha, seventeen. 

lA \j^'i^ araha, eighteen. 

\^ ^il uniha, ^^^t univiha, nineteen. 

!*♦ ^« viha, twenty. 

Annotation. The Sindhi numerals are all derived from the 
Sanskrit by the medium of the Prakrit. — Sansk. XXoR one, Prak. 
^Ig; in Sindhi a euphonic h has been preposed, as: hiku 
(= hikku). When commencing to count the Hindus use to say 

instead of hiku: '■^^ barkhu, and the Musalmans: <ow^w3 
barkh at a, invoking thereby a blessing. — Sansk. 1%, two, Prak. 
'^; in Sindhi the crude form dva has been assimilated to 

vva and thence to ba (— bba). Besides -p ba we meet also 
occasionally the form jj^3 du, which has sprung from the Pra- 
krit ^ (iJJ. — Sansk. t^5 three, Sindhi ^A tre, whereas the 
Prak. form TTTRt?!! ^^^ given rise to the Hindustani ^.^^ 
Sansk. t|rl<^, four, Prak. "^^TK,? ii^ Sindhi the conjunct tt 
has again been elided = care. — Sansk. i|o^f-| , Prak. l|^; in 
Sindhi (and Panjabi) the tenuis c has been changed into the 
media j (but in Hindustani and Marathi again pane). — Sansk. 
"^"Cf , slk; Prak. ^, as in Sindhi. — Sansk. ^^^, seven, Prak. 
^'^; Sindhi: sata (== satta); Panjabi: satt; but in Hindu- 
stani and Marathi: sat, the conjunct tt being dissolved by leng- 
thening the preceding vowel. — Sansk. ^TSrl, Prak. ^SR? SindhT: 



SECTION II. THE DsFLEXION OF NOUXS. 159 

atha (= attha); PanjabI: atth; but Hindust. and Marathi: atb. 
Sansk. ^ cp , nine, Prak. IJT^; Sindhi: nava; PaQJabi: no; 
Hindust.: nau; Maratlii: nava. — Sansk. F^IH , ten, Prak. 
^^; Sindhi: daha; Maratbi: dab a; Hindustani and Pan- 
jabI: das. 

In Sanski'it the first nine numbers are prefixed to H'^[r^, 
ten, to form the following nine numerals; but in Prakrit and 
consequently in Sindhi (as well as in the cognate dialects) they 
undergo already so great changes, that the way. in which they 
have been compounded, is at the first sight scarcely recognis- 
able. The Prakrit form F^ is in these compounds first changed 
to ^^ and thence to T^, as: Prakrit "^^ITR^ = Sansk. T^^- 
H^fTTrT eleven; Sindhi: yaraha, with elision of k, or without 
elision of k: ikaraha or karaha (initial 'i* being dropped). — Prak. 
"^T^^ = Sansk. '^'5'5Tjr( , twelve; Sindhi: baraha. — Prakrit 

^7^ = Sansk. "^"^t^^^fJT^^ thu-teen; Sindhi: teraha. — Prakrit 

x|^S|^ = Sansk. x(rtCi^»7 5 fourteen; Sindhi: codaha. An ex- 
ception forms the Sindhi: pandraha or pandhra, fifteen, the Pra- 
krit form of which is XfTTTJT^ = Sansk. H^^'^fJTT , the con- 
junct nc, which in Prakrit has been assimilated to the cerebral 
nn, having been changed in Sindhi to nd before the liquida r. 

Prakrit ^t^(-) = ^^nsk. I^t^^^ 0^^^- H, 23?), sixteen; 
Sindhi: soraha; Hindustani: solah. Prakrit 4i'^<^(?) = Sansk. 
^HC^M, seventeen; Sindhi: satraha; Hindustani: satrah. — Pra- 
krit ^<J<5 = Sansk. ^TST^^^? eighteen; Sindhi: araha, 
the Prakrit cerebral conjunct tth being changed in Sindhi to r 
(see lutrod. §. 7, 2) and assimilating the following dental r, by 
throwing out the long a; PanjabI: atharl; Hindustani: atharah; 

Marathi (with elision of medial a): athara. — Sansk. '^^fcfSj (r| 
(Prakrit form unknown), one less than twenty (Latin: un-de- 
viginti); Sindhi: uniha or univiha; the Sanskrit f^pSfjfrf twenty, 
becomes in Prakrit "^tW?? thence Sindhi: viha; in compound 
numerals the v is generally ehded, when preceded by a con- 
sonant, as: uniha or univiha; PanjabI: unnT; Hindustani: unis; 
Marathi: ekunis. 

\'\ -4^J ekiha, twenty one. 
t't' -4:?;Lj baviha, twenty two. 



160 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

t^t" .^,y^J trevilia, twenty three. 

t^t^ -i':?;^^ CO villa, twenty four. 

I'd --^^^J panjviha, twenty five, or: .4-y:sv.j panjiha. 

l^l ^^y^ chaviha, twenty six. 

fv .^.U-w sataviha, twenty seven. 

^K ^.L^jf athaviha, twenty eight. 

^<\ .^v^if unatriha, twenty nine, 
r* ^4:?r^* triha, thirty. 

Some of the units are lengthened in these com- 
pounds, as: (J ba, (x^ sata, L^j'I atha, but apparently 
not after a fixed rule. — jL^. care, four, is, when com- 
pounded with another numeral, contracted to co, after 
a different process of assimilation, '^rf?^ being first dis- 
solved into ca-ur, and thence into co, by assimilating 
the semi-vowel r with the following v. The same is the 
case in Panjabi, Hindustani and Marathi. 

j^JS triha, thirty, is derived from the Prakrit rft" 
^^SfT, Sansk. T^^f|^, the Sanskrit termination ^rf^ being 
changed in Prakrit to ^^ and thence to tt^l or ^T, 
and consequently in Sindhi to ha. — -i-tV^'-^ caliha, fourty, 
Sansk. "^f^TT^Jfl^, the conjunct tt in the Prakrit form 
(very likely '^'^TfT.'RT?) being elided in Sindhi and r 
changed to 1, in Panjabi and Marathi even to 1, as: 
cali, calis; Hindiistani: calis. The remaining tens 
follow the common rules of assimilation, as: Sindhi 

i^li^S panjaha, fifty, Sansk. TT^T^rj;, Prak. TRTTTin^? 
the Sindhi keeping closer to the Sanskrit in this word, 
than the Prakrit; Panjabi likewise: panjah; Hindiistani; 

pacas, but Marathi: pannas. — ^1/ sathe, sixty, Sansk. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 161 

^lk* — yxZj satare , seventy, makes an exception , final t 

(Sansk. ^TTTfT) having been changed to r; the same 
is the case in PanjabT (sattar), Hindustani (sattar) and 

in Marathi (sattar).— ^^1 asi, eighty, Sansk. ^"SfXm; 

PanjabT and Hindustani assi, but Marathi aisi. — ^^^:i nave, 

ninety (in Lar also &j.j noe), Sansk. ^^1 ri 5 Panjabi like- 
wise: navve; Hindustani nave, but Marathi navvad. 

t"( ^vaXjI ekatriha, thirty one. 
rt" '■^.y'^ batriha, thirty two. 
1^1" ^ JbJ tretriha, thirty three. 

t'^t^ ^J^s^ cotriha, thirty four. 

^ '' -^ " -• 
t"d ^jJcisLj panjatiiha, thirty five. 

rs ^^4^ chatriha, thirty six. 

t"v .^itJU^ satatriha, thirty seven. 

t"A .^Ji^\ athatriha, thirty eight. 

\^^ -^JUuil uiietaliha, thirty nine, 
t^* -4^L^ caliha, fourty. 

When -4JLi is preceded by the units (amongst 
which must also be numbered un, one less), it is 
changed to -.^b taliha; but in this case the units re- 
quire the conjunctive vowel e, to facilitate the pronun- 
ciation. This change of c to t is not yet to be found 
in the older Prakrit, but seems to belong to a later 
period of the language. Lassen only mentions (§. 33, 4), 
that t is occasionally changed to t and c, thence we 
may conclude, that vice versa c also was liable to be 
changed to t. The same is the case in the Panjabi 
(iktali) and Hindustani (iktalis), but not in Marathi 
(ekecalis). 

Trumpp, S in dhi- Grammar. L 



162 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

ft .4^L£jol eketaliha, forty one. 

^^ ^JliLwLj baetaliha, forty two. 

fi" .^IxjJ^ tretaliha, forty three, 

ff ,^Vjjt^'L^ coetaliha, forty four, 

t^d .^L£^j panjetalilia, forty five. 

t^H .^IxoL^ss^ chaetalilia, forty six. 

i^v j^\1j^Zj satetaliha, forty seven. 

i^A ,^\j.jsj^\ athetaliha, forty eight. 

t^S -J&L^^I univanjaha, forty nine. 

«♦ ^^L^, panjaha, fifty. 

^ifiLixj panjaha (pronounced also: ^;&Ljd^j panjahu), 
when preceded by the units, is, for euphony's sake, 

changed to -i»Li; vanjaha the tenuis p being softened 
to the media b, and thence to v. The same change 
takes place in the kindred idioms. 

dt -^Q-XjI ekvanjaha, fifty one. 
t^ ^Q^U bavanjaha, fifty two. 
d{" .;i5L^^jJ>* tre vanjaha, fifty four. 
di^ .Sil^^j.^ covanjaha, fifty three, 
dd ^Q^js^j panj vanjaha, fifty five, 
di" ,5&Q*Lg.5^ chavanjaha, fifty six. 

dv ^t^^i^ satvanjaha, fifty seven. 

^ -"- ^"^ 
dA ^l^^-gil athvanjaha, fifty eight. 

^ --? 
d*l -^^^if unahathe, fifty nine. 

t* .^^1 sathe, sixty. 
.4icl sathe and J:! satare, when preceded by the 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 163 

units, are changed, for euphony's sake, to ha the and 
hat a re, initial (and now medial) s being softened to h. 
The same is the case in Panjabi, but in Hindustani and 
Marathi the s of sath is retained, whereas that of 
sat tar is softened to h. 

ir .^Jc^Jol ekahathe, sixty one. 

"i^ -^^L? bahathe, sixty two. 

H^ j^L^^Js trehathe, sixty three, 

it^ -^^j^ cohathe, sixty four. 

^t ^^x^jsxj panjahathe, sixty five. 

"i^ j^\u^ chahathe, sixty six. 

*iv -4!^^ satahathe, sixty seven. 

Hk j^\ii\ athahathe, sixty eight 

-'-■'' 

1^ v^^ unahatare, sixty nine. 

V SL satare, seventy. 

vl y^^jQ^ ekahatare, seventy one. 

vi* v^LS bahatare, seventy two. 

vt" r^.p>* trehatare, seventy three, 

vt^ 7^3^ cohatare, seventy four. 

" ^ ^ ^^ ^ 
sd v^^(^<v^ panjahatare, seventy five. 

vl yxil^ chahatare, seventy six. 

vv yX^^ satahatare, seventy seven. 

VA .y'^^5l athahatare, seventy eight 

v^ (^^^^ unasi, seventy nine, 

\* ^*wl asi, eighty. 

The units preceding ^^ asi and ^^y nave, are 

joined to them by the conjunctive vow^el a; the same is 
the case in the cognate dialects, 

L2 



164 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



At ^-^^l^t ekasi, eighty one. 



LL 



Al" (^AA'^.Aj biasi, eighty two. 

Af" ^^^y^ triasi, eighty three, 

vf ^^Cj.^ corasi, eighty four. 

Ad ^^Lixj panjasi, eighty five. 

At ^^\J^^s^ chahasi, eighty six. 

Av ^-wL£l satasi, eighty seven. 

AA ^^AA^L^'I athasi, eighty eight. 

^ "' 

^ ;5^^Lil unanave, eighty nine. 

♦ ^^ nave, ninety. 

t (^yKjJ ekanave, ninety one. 

t* (^^Iaj bianave, ninety two. 

t" ;^^ljji trianave, ninety three. 

^ (^yljj^ cor ana ve, ninety four. 

d (^yL^j panjanave, ninety five. 

'I (5pL44^ chahanave, ninety six. 

V (^^Uclw sat ana ve, ninety seven. 

A i^JLpI athanave, ninety eight. 

(5«itlS navanave, 
(^JLSjO nadhanave*), 



^^ < 



(^•5Lio« vadhanave, 
tiL sau, hundred. 



ninety nine. 



*) We cannot offer a satisfactory explanation of these two curious 
forms. The corresponding Hindust. numeral is: ninanave, the Panjabi 
narinave. We can understand, how the Panjabi nar (nan = nan = 
nar) could be changed in Sindhi to nad or nadh; but we cannot well 
perceive, that d or dh should have been exchanged for a dental d or 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 165 

Annotation, y^ sau is derived from the Sansk. ^W? Prak. 
^^; Panjabi sau or sal; Hindustani likewise sau or sai; 
MarathT (in compounds) se; Gujarat! so. 

The numbers above one hundred are commonly 
formed as in English by placing the lesser number after 
hundred, as: 

\A (X^ yL Jjfi hiku sau hiku, one hundred (and) one. 

Ul" ^ y^ \Ssi hiku sau ba, „ „ „ two. 

But there are two other ways of making up these 
numbers; the one is to place before sau the lesser 

number in an adjective form, as 11 ^j| eko sau, 

literally: one hundred having or possessing one; or 
to put after the numeral adjective the noun utar (ori- 
ginally an adjective) which is contracted with the 
termination of the preceding numeral into otar, as: 

yj^ySyyA ekotarsau, one above one hundred. This utar 

(Sansk. ^tK, adj., above) is used in a similar way in 
Marathi. 

!♦! yL j.Xl>l eko sau, or: yLSdii\ ekotarsau, 

one hundred (and) one. 

\*^ y^ y'Lj biro sau, or: yll^^yj birotarsau, 

one hundred (and) two. 

1*1" ^ jvwj triro sau, or: ^wjj.o* trirotarsau, 

one hundred (and) three. 

\*^ y^ j'iy^ coro sau, or: y^Jiu^ corotarsau, 

one hundred (and) four. 

Ud y^ j-sxj panjo sau, or: y^Jiy^ panjotarsau, 

one hundred (and) five. 

dh, wliicli would be a surprising phenomenon in a modern Prakrit 
idiom. In regard to vadhanave it would be necessary to assume a 
change of n to v, of which we could not adduce another instance. 



166 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

f«1 ^ }^s^ chah5 saUj or: yL^^^^c^ cbahotarsau, 

one hundred (and) six. 

Uv y^j ^XjlL satyo sau, or: yU^^xL sat5tarsau, 

one hundred (and) seven. 

I ♦A yjj >^'' athyo sau, or: yjjJSyj^S athotarsau, 

one hundred (and) eight. 

f*1 y^ fy^ naro sau, or: ^wj»jp narotarsau, 

one hundred (and) nine. 

H* yZj ^st'i dah5 sau, or: yl^jSyS^'i dahotarsau, 

one hundred (and) ten. 

ftt y^ 3^;'-^ yarah5 sau, or: ^iLlSj^'^lS yarahotarsau , 

one hundred (and) eleven. 

nf y^ 5^;^ baraho sau, or: ^lSj.;e^lo barahdtarsau, 

one hundred (and) twelve. 

ft I" yL yS^y^ teraho sau, or: y^JJi^'U^ terahdtarsau , 

one hundred (and) thirteen. 

t(f y^ }^^y^ codahd sau, or: ^ISjjd^^:^^ codahdtarsau, 

one hundred (and) fourteen. 

Ud yZj yS^\iXXj pandraho sau, or: ^ISj^s^J^Ij pandhr5- 
tarsau, one hundred (and) fifteen. 

HI y^ y^")}^ soraho sau, or: ^ILISj-p^j^av s5rhotarsau, 

one hundred (and) sixteen. 

I(v yL yS^Jii^ satrah5 sau, or: ^Jj.s^'lxL satrah5tarsau, 

one hundred (and) seventeen. 

Ha y^ yS^'li araho sau, or: yMyS^s^'ii arahotarsau, 

one hundred (and) eighteen. 

IH y^ H^' uniho sau, or: ylj''3j,^\ unihotarsau, 

one hundred (and) nineteen. 

Wo yL y^^^ viho sau, or: y^JSy^i^ vihotarsau, 

one hundred (and) twenty. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 167 



\Y\ ^^ >-6-V^J ekiho sau, or: ^j>j.^aXjI ekihotarsau, 

one hundred (and) twenty one. 

W^ yl^ i-^9^ baviho sau, or: ^iSj^^Lj bavihotarsau, 

one hundred (and) twenty two. 
etc. etc. 

!["♦ y^ j^.y^ trih5 sau, or: ^L^j-^^J>* trihotarsau, 

one hundred (and) thirty. 

\f* y^ y^)^ caliho sau, or: y^JSyjy^\^ cahhotarsau, 

one hundred (and) forty. 

tfl yL j-gjJL£^J eketaliho sau, or: yL^JSyj^\jijS^\ eketa- 

lihotarsau, one hundred (and) forty one. 

etc. etc. 

Id* yL j^Lio panjaho sau, or: ^L^ySS^C^^ panjahdtarsau, 

one hundred (and) fifty. 

f^* yL j.A^-1 sathyo sau, or: ^lljj^^l sathy5tarsau , 

one hundred (and) sixty. 

fv* y^ y^y^ satary5 sau, or: ^^j.jJLl sataryotarsau, 

one hundred (and) seventy. 

\K* y^ y^jjy] asyo sau, or: y^Ji^j^] asyotarsau, 

one hundred (and) eighty. 

\ yjj^ yjy^ naviyo sau, or: y^Jiyjyj naviyotarsau, 

[y^ j^ji noyo sau, or: pLljjjji noyotarsau, 

one hundred (and) ninety. 

When the numeral adjectives of the first series pre- 
cede the Plural of ^ sau, they must agree with their 
substantive in number, as: 

!"♦( (LO or) 1^ J KjI eka ba sava (or sa), literally: 
two hundreds having or possessing one. 

!'♦(' y^ ^ 1^ bira ba sava, two hundred and two, 
etc. etc. etc. 



168 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

These numerals are not used in the Formative, as 
they are only employed in counting. The numerals of 
the second series remain unaltered, according to their 
original signification. 

The hundreds are regularly made up by the Plural 

01 ^M/ J as I 

{"♦♦ (l^ or) jLl ^ ba sava (or sa) two hundred. 

$"♦♦ ^I< (5 J tre sava, three hundred. 

f"** "yL ^Li care sava, four hundred. 

*♦♦ ^ ^0 panja sava, five hundred. 
I** "yL .^ cha sava, six hundred. 
\** pi/ o^ sata sava, seven hundred. 
A*» ^Iw ..pi atha sava, eight hundred. 
V* ^ ^y.j nava sava, nine hundred. 
,A^ sahasu (= sahassu),] ^^^ thousand. 
[jlC^ hazaru, J 

\(^y^a^ saliasa,L^^ thousand. 

("IlCi .J ba hazara, J 

!♦♦♦♦♦ J^ lakhu, one hundred thousand. 

{"♦♦♦♦♦ j^ J ba lakha, two hundred thousand. 

!♦♦♦♦♦♦ j^ ^S daha lakha, one million. 
'\^^ kirore,] 

iten milHons (one hundred lakhs). 



!♦♦♦♦♦♦< 



y^ koru, 

vj^r J ba kirore , 

ki^ ^ ba kora, 



twenty millions. 



(♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ y*| arbu, one thousand millions (one 
hundred kar5rs). 
(♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ uj 1^ kharbu, one hundred thousand millions 
(one hundred arbs). 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 169 

!♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ Juj nilu, ten billions (one hundred kharbs). 

{♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ ^j^j padamu, one thousand billions (one 
hundred nils). 

Annotation. (jw»^-w sahasu is derived from the Sansk. TT^^j 
Prak. ^^^. It is a regular substantive and inflected accor- 

dingly. &r^ hazaru (s. m.) is of Persian origin. — -4^J lakhu, 
Sansk. ^^; Hindust. lak (and lakh); Marathl lakh; it is like- 
wise treated as a substantive masc. — ':iS' kirore (Sansk. "^f?) 

is not inflected, v^^hereas >^5 koru is treated as a regular sub- 
stantive. The follov^ing numerals, which belong more to the 

realm of fancy, are all substantives, as: ^^"1, Sansk. ^''^^J 
^y^^ Sansk. ^l^^? J^, Sansk. ? [♦tVj, Sansk. "R^. 

§. 23. 
Inflexion of the cardinal numbers. 
<X» hiku or 3^55 hikiro are regular adjectives and 
inflected according to their respective terminations (JGj> m.; 
JC56 fern, etc.); the other numerals have no change of 
gender, but are inflected in the Formative Plural, as: 
^ ba, two; Format. Plural: ^ bine. 
(5 J)* tre, three; „ „ ^JS trine. 

5, ,5 u>?^ caine. 

„ „ jj*^5 panjane. 

5? 75 i^-i-iT^ chahane. 

„ „ jjJCaw satane. 

„ „ ^^\ athane. 

„ „ ^yjJi navane. 

„ „ ^j dahane. 



1 
^L:^ care, 


four; 


1.; panja 


, five; 


4^ cha. 


six; 


viLul saha, 


seven; 


^yt atha, 


eight; 


^y^ nava, 


nine; 


^(3 daha, 


ten; 



170 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

The following numerals, from eleven -eighten, throw 
final Anusvara off in the Formative Plural and drop the 
short a, preceding h, as; 

^ji^Lj yaraha, eleven; Format. Plur. ^"X}, yarhane. 



^j^Uj baraha, twelve; 


5J 


„ ;j^jL? barhane. 


ij-iUi teraha, thirteen; 
^jj.s. codaha, fourteen; 


5? 


„ ij^C^y terhane. 
?5 ^Ji%r^ codhane. 


^^ pandrahaL^^^^^. 
^jlyajdj pandhra, 


T) 


„ ^y^tXlI pandhrane. 


4^^ viha, twenty; 


7? 


„ ,j4:J^ vihane. 



Those numerals, which end in e (i) and e, are not 
capable of inflexion, as: ^^ sathe, sixty; yX^ satare, 
seventy; ^^ nave or &J.3 n5e, ninety; but ^^1 asi, eighty, 
makes the Format. Sing. " a^I asia. 

yl^ sa-u, hundred; is inflected, as follows: 
SING. PLUR. 

Nom. yZj sau; 11 sava, or contracted IL sa. 
Format. ^ sava; ^j^ savane, ^11 sane, ^^ save, 



cJ^ 



sae. 



The cardinal numbers, chiefly the decimal ones, 
are also used as collective numbers, and in this case 
they are inflected according to their respective ter- 
minations, e. g. ^^i<3 ^^yJ tre dahu, three tens. For- 
mative ^s^'i ^J>* trine dahune; ^^jl^L^ ^Li care satheu, 
four sixties; ^yj nave forms the Plural ,j^y naveu, 
Format. ,j^j*i naveune. When used in a collective sense 
these numerals are mostly put in the Formative Plural 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 171 

ending in e, as: ,j.-v4:?^ vllie, in scores; ^,yL save, in 

hundreds, ^-;«ww^ sahase, in thousands. 

When a noun in the Formative Phiral takes the 
termination ne or e, the preceding numeral, Hke all other 

adjectives, must take the same too, or: ^^^ ^wj^ ^ic> 

to ten enemies, or: ^^ ^^^wj^ ^j-t^'^- ^ ^^^ \Sy^ do 

not admit of a Formative in e, but make it i, as: 

^j^j bi, ^.vJ tri; of nL^ there is a Formative as well 

in 1 as in e; ^j-a^ cai or: ^-v^ cae; but the Forma- 

tives bi , tri , cai are also used with Formatives of nouns 
ending in ne. 

The emphatic i (hi) may also be affixed to the 
cardinal numbers to ex]3ress completeness or inten- 
sity, as: ^^ bai or: ^Jj.i bei, all two = both, For- 
mative Plural: ^-^ binhi or: ,j-v4^ binhi; or: ^j-^ 
binhine, ^^a^L binhini. ^Aj>y trei, all three, Formative 

Plural: ^^>^ trinhi or: ^j-^^ trinhi; or: ^j^J trin- 

hine, ^^-^y^ trinhini. ^)^ carai or: ^^AjjLi carei, all 

four, Formative Plural: ^^^^ caini. ^^^'I athai, all 

eight. Formative Plural: ^v^^ athani, etc. 

The cardinal numbers, from two upwards generally 
require their substantive in the Plural; but they may 
also be constructed with the Singular, after the manner 
of the Persian. Sau, hazaru, sahasu, lakhu etc., being 
properly substantives, are either constructed with the 
Genitive Plural of the following substantive, or they 
have the same coordinated in the Plural. The numerals 
preceding a substantive may either be inflected according 
to the termination of the substantive or they may remain 



172 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

uninflected; when two or more numerals precede a sub- 
stantive, the last only is inflected. 

Do not forget the words; in youth there are two, 
three short days. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, Epil. 

"=^5 istr^ ^7^ >^ J^;5 ^f u>^ 

Having taken provisions of two, three years, depart. 
Amulu Maniku, Stack's Grram. p. 147. 

Being unwell she weeps much all the eight watches 
with grief Maj. 562. 

^1^ (^A^ (5^>^ e^L>i ^^ ^^j^ ^3 ^S^ 

Man has come into the midst of ten enemies — 
That young man, who wins the battle out of the 

midst of all these ten enemies etc. Sh. Barvo 

Sindhi, Chot. 18. 

.^icl; ^ ^1 ^L5 ^*^ .j^ ^ ^ ^=^ c^f^ 

Under whose command are sixty, eighty bond-maids; 
those sixty, eighty bond-maids have pellet-bows in their 
hands. Amulu Maniku, p. 141. 



In that very palace one hundred Fairies also will 
dance near the Dev Sufedu. Then he will say: if thou 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS- 173 

causest these hundred Fairies to sit down and showest 
me a dancing etc. Amulu Maniku, p. 144. 

^^•^ ^y^ '"'^ ^y^ (5^ 07^ <J^ ^7"^? 

In the body of that young man there are nine hundred 
and nine wounds. Sh. Ked. YI, 7. 

With him ten hundred hberal persons mounted on 
swift boats. Ajaib, v. 253. 

Hundreds and also other multitudes of generous 
persons are in the world. Sh. Sor. II, 3. 

yji ^^.aX"^ Ia^J* ^^ ^^XJ ^^Lj ^yo 

Thousands of physicians I have had for (my) disease. 
Sh. Abiri I, Epil. 

^LL j4^j .:« ^f ^jLJ ..|j J jij;^ %5a ^i^ ^^ 

If thou hast thousands of sweathearts, even then 
compare none with Punhu. Sh. Ma^B. Y, 2. 

In one palace there are lakhs of doors, windows 
in thousands (belong) to it. Sh. Kal. I, 23. 

Where there are ten millions of killers, in that 
direction lift up thy eyes. Sh. Jam, Kal. lY, 4. 

Jaj ^b .!^ ^^x^ ^y^L ^^^4aS iXxXj 

Of bedsteads, beddings, palkis nine lakhs, nils of 
hard cash. Sh. Sor. 11, 5. 



174 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

§. 24. 
II ORDINAL NUMBEES. 



^^j^4J paharyo. 

^}rt;fi peheryo, 

UJ^ff. pehero, 



the first. 



^ bio, 

• _ 

^y3 trio, 



the second. 

, .. , _v- r the third. 
^/ trijo, 

^j.^ys^ cotho, the fourth. 

^j.jdo panjo, the fifth. 
^^.^^ chaho, the sixth. 
^Jj.xl; sato, the seventh. 

^jJ^jI atho, the eighth. 

^^\1 nao, 1 ^^^ ^.^^^^ 

^j.5>j daho, the tenth. 

^jj.;&jl^ karho, J 
^j.5^!Lj barho, the twelfth. 
^jj&ljo terho, the thirteenth. 
^j.5>Oi^ codho, the fourteenth. 
^}6^ pandraho, j ^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^ 
^j^^ijaS pandhro, J 
^s.;ii^j^ sorho, the sixteenth. 
^•jDjcXw satraho, the seventeenth. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 175 

^j.5&l-l arho, the eighteenth, 

^j..^^! uniho, the nineteenth. 

^j-^j. viho, the twentieth. 

^j^jGI ekiho, the twenty first. 

^j.^.Lj b'BViho, the twenty second, 

etc. etc. 
^}^>^ triho, the thirtieth. 

^^i^jLa. caliho, the fortieth. 

^j.;oL^, panjaho; the fiftieth. 
^jj^xL sathyo, the sixtieth. 
jj^l;u2 sataryo, the seventieth. 
^j.-^f asyo, the eightieth. 

^^"r ^ ' I the ninetieth. 
^jj.Ajj.S naveo, J 

^^^ saviyo, 



^j.jp« sau-o 
^it-vAAA^ sai-0 J 



the hundredth. 



Of compound numbers only the last takes the form 
of the ordinal and is inflected, as: 

jjj.jl^, ^ JCp hiku sau peheryo, the one hundred 

and first. 

^}ity^ -^ ba saviyo, the two hundredth. 

jXi l^ Z ha> sa bio, the two hundred and second. 

■^3;ip hazaro, j ^^^ tj^ousandth. 
jjj„u*^.^ sahaso, 



176 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Annotation. The ordinals are regularly derived from the 
Prakrit; ^y^y^^^ peheryo, the first, though, has not followed 
the traces of the Prakrit i—z X(^^^ but taken its own course 
of assimilation; Sansk. lil"^^, thence: pahama; the m of pa- 
hama has been changed in a rather unusual way to 1 (r), pahala, 
pahara, thence the Sindhi: pahary8 or peheryo. Hindust. and 
Panjabi: pahila, MarathT likewise: pahila. i^j bio, the second, 

points back to the Prakrit cfT^ (shortened from f^fr^) 
and the other form i^o bijo, corresponds to thePrak. r^^mf. ^A 

trio, the third, coincides with the Prakrit nT^? ^i^h this dif- 
ference, that original r has been preserved in Sindhi. ^y^^^ 
coth5, the fourth, Prakrit x(^^; the original dental (th) has 

been preserved in Sindhi. The following ordinals are all re- 
gularly derived from the cardinals, by adding the affix o cor- 
responding to the Sansk. affix rTH? which has in Sindhi been 
changed to o by the elison of t (co-mpare: In trod. §. 9). In 
Hindustani and Panjabi tama has been similarly changed to 
vS, in Marathi to va; the Gujarat! has preserved the affix mo, 
and the Bangali even the whole affix tarn. 

§. 25. 
Inflexion of the ordinals. 

The ordinals are regularly inflected as adjectives 
according to their respective terminations: 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Norn. {j}irH peheryo. »j-"7fv P^^^^^i- 

Format. ^jI^. pehere. (P/f v P^lieria. * 

Yocat. ^L^>4^. pelierya. u^?rt^. pelieri. 

PLUKAL. 
Nom. ^LSj^j pelierya. u^/f^. peheryu. 

Format. ^j^l^i>, peherye. vj^j-ff, peherye (peherie). 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



177 



Format. < 



^\i"jfj peherya. 
^.y^. pelieryane. 



Vocat. 



U^T^. peherya. 
^w§j peherine. 

^j'^^ peheryune. 

^Gj^. peherya. u^'i^i^. peheryu. 
>:?7f^, peheryd. 
^!^^ peheryau. 



> ^. 9 ^' 



His first own enemy is the unlucky, wretched, 
ignorant man. Sh. Barvo Sindhi, Chot. 18. 

JoJ^ ysL-ww '-j^j.r ^-ir L^$^ 

In the fort of Kufa are happy the heroes clad in 

armour, 
The first are the brothers, the second the nephews, 

the third the beloved friends. Sh. Keel. Ill, 2. 

On the twenty first (date) self was forgotten to 

(=z by) the lover; 
Consciousness became hidden with the beloved on 

the twenty second. Maj. 518, 519. 

On the eleventh day the kindness of the Beragis 
returned. Sh. Eamak. II, 11. 

The date of the year is not expressed by the or- 
dinals, but by the cardinals: 



Trumpp, Sindhi-Grammar, 



M 



178 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



On the twenty seventh of the blessed month of Ra- 

mazan, according to calculation, 
In the night of power the story was completed, on 

a Tuesday. 
It was the year of the Hijrat eleven hundred thirty 

six (= A. D. 1724, 8*^ June). 
By Fazil was composed the science of the love of the 

wise ones (i. e. Sufis). Maj. 829. 



§. 26. 
ni. AEITHMETIOAL FIGURES. 

The arithmetical figures or names of the numbers 
are expressed by adjectives, which are formed by adding 
the adjective affix o to the cardinal numbers; some 
few have also, in order to distinguish the arithmetical 
figures from the ordinals, the affix ko. 

iXjl eko, p^ hiko, containing the number 'one'; 

the number or figure 'one'. 
j.jG biko, the number 'two'. 



j.5lj triko, 


?5 7 


, 'three'. 


y^\s^ caiiko, 


11 1 


'four'. 


>^e P^^J^' 


I) 5 


'five'. 


^jC^^ chako. 


5? 5 


, 'six'. 


iA*M sat5. 


11 1 


, 'seven'. 


^^sS atho, 


jj 1 


, 'eight'. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



179 



^pb nao, 


the 


number 'nine'. 


^o daho, 


?5 


55 


'ten'. 


^JLj yarho, 


?? 


55 


'eleven'. 


j.5slj barho, 


?5 


5? 


'twelve'. 


jjOwo" terho. 


?5 


55 


'thirteen'. 


jjfiSj^ codho, 


55 


55 


'fourteen'. 


jji\ JOj pandraho 


5 55 


55 


'fifteen'. 


yS^l}^ sorho, 


55 


55 


'sixteen'. 


yS^yXjj^ satraho. 


5? 


55 


' seventeen '. 


^jj arho, 


5J 


55 


' eighteen '. 


j^^^f unili55 


55 


55 


'nineteen'. 


>^; vitio, 


55 


55 


'twenty'. 


j-^j^l ekihoj 


55 


55 


'twenty one'. 


etc. etc. 








j^y>* triho, 


55 


55 


'thirty'. 


^^L^ caliho, 


55 


55 


'forty'. 




jjclr^, panjaho, 


5? 


55 


'fifty'. 


^.^ sathyo, 


55 


55 


'sixty'. 


jjlxl satary5, 


55 


55 


'seventy'. 


J.-U*;! asyo, 


55 


55 


'eighty'. 


jj^ naviyo, 


55 


55 


'ninety'. 


j-}^ saviyo, 


55 


55 


'hundred'. 


They are regiL 


larly 


inflected as adjectives ending in 


5; LX;^ J two units 


' s?f' >^' 


}^"^^ ^H u^^ ^r^ ^^^'^^^ 



the number three comes the number four. 



the sum of twenty; about twenty, 
the sum of thirty; about thirty. 



180 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

§• 27. 
ly. COLLECTIVE NUMBEKS. 

We have noticed already (§. 22), that the cardinal 
numbers may also be employed as collective numbers; 
but the Sindhi possesses also a peculiar kind of nu- 
merals, which express an aggregate sum; these are: 

jS'lio dahako, the sum of ten; about ten. 

3^L^^ vihar5, 

3^14:?^ viharo, 

j^LiJ triharo, 
j^L^^sJ triharo, I 

^sU^L^. calhyaro, the sum of forty; about forty. 
Sf?^^ panjahi, ^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^. ^^^^^ ^^^^ 
s.5sLio panjaho, J 
ijCw.^*Llw sathiko, the sum of sixty, about sixty. 

They are properly adjectives, formed by the affixes 
ko (§. 10, 24) and ar5, as: j.^LSo dahako, making ten; 
j.Li. viraho, containing twenty. They may be con- 
structed either as substantives with the noun in the Ge- 
nitive, or as numeral adjectives, e. g.: ^ ^"S^^ j.$^Lij 

ten boys, literally: a decade of boys, or: v^j-^^ jfl^o. 
To express more distinctly the indefiniteness of such 

a number, the adverb ^^ khanu (literally: piece, por- 
tion, Sansk. IJf^) is added to them as well as to the 

cardinal numbers; e. g. ^"^ ^jli^ viharo khanu, about 
twenty. 

La^ y^^/0 ^J^S j\-^Si> ^J 

They were about five thousand men. Matth, 14, 21. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 181 

JsJ^^ cauku, i^'j^y^ caukiri, the sum of four, 

^'iy^ kori, a score, are only used substantively, the 

latter generally in the Formative Plural ^/jj.^ kore, 

in scores, as: 

L^ ^S JL.^ \j^^)i^ LiLX^ ^ju^M,^ 

In thousands are the thanksgivings, in scores the 
favours of the kind one (i. e. God). Sh. Surag I, 
Epil. 1. 

jjXil saikiro, a hundred, is only used when 
speaking of interest, expressing our "per cent", as: 
j^sLijf ;^^a1; vJ"^^) (J^^V^^. ^ir55) L.W ^ I borrowed 
two hundred rupees at five rupees by the hundred (i. e. 
at five per cent). The percentage may also be expressed 
by an adjective (a so-called Bahuvrihi, cf. §. 12, II, 5), 
compounded of the respective amount and the adjective 
otiro, 'having above', as: 

^ yy^y^} one hundred having one above it, i. e. one 

per cent; 

^-w jyJJw^ two per cent. 

yL iyij)y^ three per cent. 

etc. etc. 

Of the same kind are the compound adjectives, such as : 

(yjl) 3^1^ cauano (sau), one hundred having four Annas, i. e. 4 

Annas per cent; (ylu) j-AiLjvj tripanyo (sau), one hundred 

having three quarters of a rupee, i. e. at three quarters 
of a rupee per cent, etc. When ^jlc miti (interest) is 

used, ^ is omitted, as: ^Xjo ^^y^ysa^X^o^ interest of one 

and a half 



182 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

§. 28. 
Y. PEOPORTIONAL NUMBERS. 
The numerals denoting 'fold', are: 
•j«.Xa5> hekuno, 
p'y^^ hekuto, 
JJ.AJ bino, 1 



single. 



twofold. 
^j^-t^ trino, threefold. 



jjb bito. 



^^ 



>.^ cauno, f^^^^^j^ 
p^ cauno, J 
ji^-kxj panjuno, fivefold. 
ji^^^ chahtino, sixfold. 
^yjj^ sattino, sevenfold. 
jj^^j'l athuno, eightfold, 
ji^ nauno, ninefold. 
^ys^c> dahuno, tenfold. 
ji^ifi^Lj yarhuno, elevenfold. 
^^50^ IJ barhtino, twelvefold. 
ji^5&wo terhuno, thirteenfold. 
^^c>y:^ codhuno, fourteenfold. 
jijjyc jjj pandhruno, fifteenfold. 
^.iyojj.^ sorhiino, sixteenfold. 
ji»i>lxl satrahuno, seventeenfold. 

jj«i>vl arhuno, eighteenfold. 
si -4-^5^ tinihuno, nineteenfold. 

P^y vihuno, twentyfold. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 183 



ji^j^-^Xjl ekihuno, twenty- onefold. 
ji^-^J* triliuno, fortyfold. 

p^^l^ calihuno, fortyfold. 

ji^^cL^do panjahuno, fiftyfold. 

^^-<^IL sathyuno, sixtyfold. 

ii^wA^, sataryuno, seventyfold. 

ji^^yw.1 asyuno, eightyfold. 

^'iyi^.yi naveund, ninetyfold. 

ji^-Jw sauno, hundredfold. 

In the same way the affix Lino (c£ §. 10, 28) is 
added to the fractional numbers, as: 

ji«i>t>l adhtino, one half-fold. 

ji^l^ savauno, one (or a certain sum) and a quarter- 
fold. 



ii5i^JJ<*> dedhuno, one and a half- fold. 
^^Lijl aclhauno, two and a half- fold. 

When he has been brought over by you, then you 
make him twofold more a child of hell, than yourselves. 
Matth. 23, 15. 

(sf ^y^ Cff '^r^. ^ ^ (5^' (5^7^'^ ^5^ ^ '-^ 

Other seeds fill upon good land; these brought forth 
fruit, some hundredfold, some sixtyfold, some thirtyfold. 
Matth. 13, 8. 



184 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



§• 29. 
VI REDUPLICATIVE NUMBERS. 

The numeral adverbs, denoting reduplication, are. 
^LX-^ hekara, 
"Sj^^ hekara, j 

^Lgj bihara. 



once. 



j^. 



bihara , 



"^LiJj* trihara, 



ff\ 



J* trihara, 



twice. 



thrice. 



>Lis.:a. cohara, p ,. 

) ^'' ' > lour times. 

lijj^ cohara, J 

The further reduplicatives are commonly made up 
by the cardinals with the nouns j.t* varo, ^yj^-s^^ or s.^j 
(lino). 

Annotation. The affix sL^a, or shortened *.5a, has taken its 
origin from the Sansk. eJTT,^ Hindustani: barah, PanjabI: vari; 
in Sindhi v has been ehded and euphonic h inserted. 



§. 30. 
VII FRACTIONAL NUMBERS. 

The fractional numbers are of two kinds; they are 
either substantives or adjectives; 



a) substantives are: 
■ a quarter. 



.^jj-ss^ cothe, 



cothai . 
cotho , 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 185 

iL pau, a quarter; Plur. ^Lj pava or'^U pa. 
^LiJ tribal, a third. 

.it>f adhu, a half. 
^-Sfll savai, one and a quarter; a quarter more 

(than the whole). 
J^SL^ sadhu, one half more (than the specified sum). 
jdjLjo dedhe, one and a half, '^/^x^^j 

h) adjectives are: 

}^yi pauno, ( ^^^ quarter less (than the whole). 
jjU) muno, J 



-^^l adhu,, j^^jj 
^o^ adho, J 
111 sava, one quarter more (than the whole), 
Li 5 LI sadha, one half more (than the whole). 
^Juo dedhu, one and a half. 



<5i 



LijI aclhai, two and a half. 



Annotation. -^^^ ' (5? ^"^3"^ ' i^i^ ^® derived from the 
Sansk. x^fl^'1^5 Hindustam cauth, cauthai; in the same way 
-jLiJj* is derived from the Sansk. HnT^T^^ Hindustani tihai. 
^Lj corresponds to the Sansk. "RT^, Hindustani pao; the ad- 
jective ^j'lj has sprung from the Sansk. adj. TTT^ST*^^ Hindust. 

pauna, Marathi paun; the origin of yX>o is doubtful. J^C>\ is 
substantive and adjective at the same time, Sansk. ^^, Hin- 

dust. adha. i^y^ ^i^d the adjective l^-w are derived from the 
Sansk. ^XJTF, having a quarter, Hindust. and Marathi: sava; 

.5&<3Ljww and the adjective L^e^L.^ (Plur. m.) from the Sansk. ad- 
jective ^T^5 having a half, with a half^ Hindustani (Instrum.) 



186 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

sarhe. -^iXj^ and the adjective J^O^/6 are apparently derived 

from an unusual Sansk. compound f^ + ^^, having three halves, 

Hindust. derh, Panjabi dedh, Marathi did. ^L55l has drawn 
its origin from the Sansk. ^^'^'^, Hindust. arhai, PanjabT 
dhai, Marathi adits. 

U. In reference to the use of these fractional numbers 
it is to be observed, that ^juo is generally used with 
units, and p^^ with two, three etc., as: 3.-0^ s ^x>, a 
rupee wanting a quarter = three quarters of a rupee; 
US. > .J li J two rupees wanting a quarter = one rupee 
and three quarters; 11 yS^'l one hundred wanting a 
quarter = 75. 1^ one quarter more, as: wyw 111 one 
ser and a quarter; Ij^^^ ^y^ 111 three sers and a quarter. 

1^1 is not inflected in the Singular, nor in the No- 
minative Plural, but it has a Formative Plural masc, 

viz.: ^jI^I savaine, ^jI^ savayane or: ^^-ol^ savae, 
and fern. ^jI^ savaine or: ^1^ savayune; but ge- 
nerally it is not inflected at all, e. g. : ^j.a*w ,jJjo ,j^ (J*^I11 

with four maunds and a quarter or: ^j.^^ ^j-f^^ ^j-f^ ^y^- 
1^ may also precede ^, slC^ etc., as: p^ IJ!aL one 

hundred and a quarter =125; jCi 1^1 one thousand 
and a quarter = 1250. 

.;ot>l adhu, half, is a common adjective and used 
accordingly. 

Li3L^ sadha, adding one half, is only used with 
nouns of number subsequent to 'two', and therefore 

ever found in the Plural; its fern, is ^^I^jLl; sadhiyu. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 187 

;5^jj* ^J't^' ;^^ 7^ ur^ is^oL^ o^'^ 

Then she weighs with a balance nine sers and a 
half of read lead. Maj. 320. 

^Joj dedhu, one and a half, is only used in the 

Singular and not compounded with other numbers, as: 

^1 -sfijuo one Anna and a half; 'is ^OuiS one rati and 
a half. 

^Li3l adhai, two and a half, is only used in the 

Plural, without distinction of gender in the ^Nominative; 

in the Formative Plural it makes for the Masc. ^SLijI 

adhaine, ^li'o^ aclhayane or: ^j^li5\ aclhaie, and for 

the fem. ^jLi<]>l adhaine, ^jLi5l aclhayune, ^^li'3\ 
adhaie; ^ ^\ic^ two yards and a half; ^^.p C5?^<^^ 

tw^o Tois and a half; Formative: ^^.^pj** ^Liji; ,joLijj 

^^j^ etc. 

From these fractional numbers another kind of ad- 
jectives has been derived, implying "consisting of, com- 
puted at such a rate, standing in such a relation", as: 

j^iLj panyo or jCuLS panyaku, only used in the 

compound: j-v^UyJ* oy\ tXxiLJ)', computed at 

at three quarters of a rupee. 

pLS pao, compounded with cardinal numbers, as: 

j^G ;^J>*, consisting of three quarters. 

j.j|^ savay5, computed at 174. 

5.5>jL3t> dedho, consisting of 1%- 

^j^J-sj dedhuo, standing in the 1% place. 

^Li3l adhayo, consisting of 2^/2. 
jjj.jLit>l adhao, standing in the 2V2 place. 



188 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

These are used as common adjectives and inflected 
and constructed accordingly. 

Tlie other fractional numbers maj^ be made up by 
compositions, as: 

5^Lj J>4>I adhu pau == %. 

ill ^Juj dedhu pau = %- 

^LiJ>* 4 ^^ tribal = %. 

J U^S pauna ba = V/^, 
etc. etc. etc. 

Fractions with sjpecial application are: 
a quarter of a rupee. 



jj.b parupo, 
(J^Lj paili, 
0oLI paine, 



^y)-i pairi, the quarter of a £" (yard). 
^^J^ lari, one third of a rupee. 

J^i^^ adheli, 
^oj adhio, 

(^^s&4>t adhiri, half a gaj, or half a damiri (^5>-oS). 



half a rupee piece. 



Chapter XL 
Pronouns. 

§. 31. 



The personal pronoun is in Sindhi of two kinds: 
it is either used as an absolute pronoun or as a suffix, 
acceding to nouns, adverbs or verbs. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 189 

I. PERSOISrAL PEONOUNS. 

The Sindhi has a personal pronoun only for the 
first and second person Singular and Plural, the third 
person is made up by means of demonstrative pronouns. 
A remnant of the old (now lost) personal pronoun of 
the third person has been preserved in the pronominal 
suffix of the third person, as we shall see hereafter. 

1) The personal pronoun of the first person. 

There are two forms in common use for the first 
person Singular, ^J^1^\ au, and shortened ^( a; besides 

these ^Lx) ma or ^^ mu are also dialectically used 
in Siro. 

The great deterioration of the language is strikingly 
illustrated hj the present forms of the absolute pronouns. 
The Prakrit form is ^|^ or ^^^ (Sansk. ^^); but 
in the corrupted Apabhransa dialect, the mother of the 
modern Sindhi, we meet already the form ^^, from 
3fTT (by elision of ^), from which the Sindhi au has 
drawn its origin (Lassen, §. 183); the other form a has 
been simply contracted from ^H, The two other forms 
ma and mu are originally the Accusative, Sanskrit 
Tit (Prakrit shortened T(), and are still used as the 
Formative Singular. 



> O } 



The Genitive ^j^Xjo muhii or ^j^Xjo miihe, with the 
adjective affix j.:^ jo, is to be referred to the Prakrit 
Genitive lif^ (Sansk. ^^, Apabhransa HW (Lassen §. 183), 
the vowels being nasalized in Sindhi. 

The Nominative Plural is ^jj^^ asi, Prakrit W^^ 
(Sansk. root WW); in Sindhi m has been elided and 
final e changed to i (= !); the Formative jjLIiwI asa 



190 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

corresponds to the Prakrit Genitive Plural ^^Ti^t'^ 
(Sansk. ^"J^TT^). 

Annotation. In the cognate dialects the Accusative has si- 
milarly been used for the Nominative; Marathi mi (inferior 

Prakrit dialect TT2[^5 Lassen §. 183, 2), Formative ma (Prakrit 
Genitive ffi^) ; Hindustani mai, Formative mujhe or mujh (Pra- 
krit Genitive ^T^IJ); Panjabi: mai, Formative mai; but Gu- 
jarati: hu, Formative ma. In the Plural the Marathi has in 
the Nominative ahmi, in the Formative ahma; the Hindustani 
ham, Formative ham or ham8; the Panjabi asl. Formative asa; 
the Gujarati hame or hamo, Formative ham or hamo. 

Inflexion of the first personal pronoun. 

^yj| au or ^1 a, I. 
SINGULAR. 

Norn. ^y/S\ au, ^T a; ^jU ma, ^^xj mu; 
Format. 1 ? ^ , - ^ r - 
Instrumjc)^ ™^' O^ ™^' ^' ^- 

Genit. s^ ^-^ muhu jo; j.^ ;j»-^ muhe jo; j.:^ ^jyA 

mu jo; ys^ Ji ^ jo. 

Accus^* W ^^ "^^ ^^^' ^^ ^^^ "^^ ^^^' 
Ablat. ^j^'^yx^ muha; ^J^^ ^y^ inuk ha or ^L^ ^U 
ma kha. 

PLURAL. 

Nom. ij-AA^I asi, we. 

Format.) _^, ^ o, .- ^, ^ :>o,-- ^,^ 

lustrum.) ^^' ^^^' ^-^^-"^ ^^ ' vi?^"^'"**'' ^^^^''• 

Genit. j.s> ^Lll asa Jo, y^ ^^Lll asahe jo. 

Accus!' \^'f ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^' srf' ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^'^^' 

Ablat. (jL^ (j'-'^i ^sa kha etc. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 191 

If they have been seen by you, for Grod's sake tell (me). 
iVfter them my eyes weep night and day. Sh. Hus. 
X, 22. 



By no means I shall give up my friend till the day 
of resurrection. Sh. Ked. lY, Epil. 

(jdj^i j.lw.1 ^LLo ^^y^ ^^ ^^f ^yO ^Li* 

Kazi, why doest thou beat me, having seen me ill, 
o friend! Maj. 251. 

Even before me all would have perhaps slided down 
(into the river) having taken their jars. Sh. Suh. I, 4. 

^L^l^ ^j^^ jjL^I ^j-^ i^i y u^^«^f 

She in bashful before God and faithful towards us. 
Maj. 671. 

Our love flows excessively with our sweethearts. 
Maj. 675. 

2) The personal pronoun of the second person. 

The pronoun of the second person is ^^* tu , which 
points rather to the Sansk. f^, than to the Prak. fl"^; 
the Formative and Instrumentalis p to is derived from 
the Prak. lustrum. ^'^; the Genitive ^j4^' tuhii or ^j.^ 
tuhe (with j.^ etc.) corresponds to the Apabhransa Ge- 
nitive Hf ♦ 



192 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

The Plural of this pronoun presents a great variety 
of forms, as: ^^^"^3 tavhi, ^^y^ tavi, ^A^i' tahi, ^^ 
tai; or: j.^^f avhi (avhe), ^j^f ave, ^^^f ahi, ^T ai, 
,j4jt ai. 

The forms tavhi etc. have been derived from the 
Prakrit JSTom. Plural H'^, tti having been changed to 
tav, and m elided. The forms avhi, ah! etc. are 
very remarkable. As initial t is never elided, they 
cannot well be derived from tavhi etc. It is therefore 
very probable, that these forms are to be referred to 
the Sansk. Plural Tf^ = Prak. IR^, and with elision 
of initial y, umhe ; in Sindhi 'u' has been changed to 'av' 
and m elided, as in tavhi. 

The Formative ^jLS^j tavha, ^Li^f avha corresponds 
to the Prak. Genitive Plural rf^^TJl^ 

Annotation, The cognate dialects agree in all essential points 
with the SindhT. Marathi: tu, Formative tu or tuja (Prakrit 
fTS" or fT^lJ; Nom. Pkiral tuhmi and Formative tuhm£. Hin- 
dustani: tu or tai; Genitive te-ra (me-ra), ra being used in this 
instance to form a pronominal adjective; the Formative tujh 
is properly the Prakrit Genitive ffr^^ 3,nd the Instrumentalis 
tu coincides with the SindhT to. The Nomin. Plural tum is 
shortened from the Prakrit fll^, and the forms tumha (tum- 
ha-ra), tumh5, tumh point back to the Prakrit Genitive Plural 
flWXTJT, Panjabi: tu, Genitive te-ra, Instrument, tai (Prakrit 
fT5): Formative tai (Prakrit Genitive n). Nom. Plural: tusi, 
Formative: tusa. Gujarat! : tu, Genitive: taha-ro, Formative ta; 
Nom. Plural: tame or tamo, Formative tam or tamo. 

Inflexion of the second personal pronoun. 
SINGULAR. 

Nom. jjy tu, thou. 
Format. 



Instrum. 



y' 



to. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 193 

Gren. j^ <j-S^* tuhu jo (tiihe jo); j.^. p t5 jo. 

Dative. ) 

Accus. j^S'ptokhe. 

Ablat. ijL%^* toha; ^L^ p* to kha. 

PLURAL. 

Nom. {j-f^y-^ tavhi; ^.^ tavi; ^^ tahi; ,j«^j> tai. 

^jw^^f avhi (avhe); ^^f avi; ^^^f ahi; ^X^ 

ai; ij.^1 ai. 

J^ormat. l^Li^j tavha, ^L^* taha; ^Li^l avha; ^Lil alia; 
Instrum.j r ^ 

tavha jo etc.; avha jo; 

tavahe jo; avahe jo 

i^^ (jLiy tavha khe; ^f ^Li^i avha khe. 

Ablat. ^14^ u'"^^^ tavha kha etc. 



Gen 

Dative. 

Accus 



^ ^j»l ahe jo. 



The emphatic 1 or hi, hi is very frequently joined 
to this pronoun in all its forms. 

^^ 4^'^ (5?>^' c;-^^ ^;; r^; u^-f^;-^* 

Even thou remainest in my heart; only towards 
thee my eyes (are directed). Maj. 211. 

Even for thy sake I have borne the tauntings of 
my companions. Sh. Mum. Rano I, Epil. 

^yj^dJ i^S J^^j r^-^^ 3<\a^ ^^p 

Even thy reproach has been welcomed by me. 
Maj. 341. 

Trumpp, Sindhl-Grrammar. N 



194 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Separate from thee I cannot find any strength in 
my body. Sh. Suh. II, 4. 

jj^S" ^ ^ ^1 ^^f ^j^ ^ ^llo 

friends, do not hinder me at all! Maj. 95. 

1 shall not at all give up (your) shed nor your 
door, o friend! Sh. Barv5 S. I, 16. 

O handsome lady! the mark of your family is 
greatness. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 8. 

After my friend (is gone) I talk over with you my 
misfortunes. Sh. Hus. VI, 5. 

n. DEMONSTEATIYE PRONOUNS. 

§. 32. 

1) The proximate demonstrative pronoun is ^sa hi, 

^s^ he or ^^^ hiu (also pronounced: ^ hiu); in Lar 

initial h is commonly dropped, as: ^^l i, ^^1 e, ^1 lu. 

The base of this pronoun is i (cf Bopp §. 360 sqq.); 
in the Formative another pronominal base is substituted, 
i-na, (Bopp §. 369; compare also the inflexion of '5JSTT 
'this' in Sansk.). 

Annotation. The Marathi form of this demonstrative is ha, 
Formative: ya (Prakrit ^^ = Sansk. ^fllTT); Hindustani: 
yeh, Formative: is (Sansk. ^f^); Plural: ye, Formative: in. 
PanjabT: ih, Formative: is, Instrument.: in; Plural: ih. For- 
mative: ina. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 195 

Inflexion of the proximate demonstrative. 

^ hi, this. 

Nom. ^5? l^i; (^ he; ^J^ hiu or ^ hiu, masc, 'this'; lie'. 

^ hi; ^^ he; ^^ hia or ^ hia, fern., 'this'; 'she'. 

Format. 1 ^ i • * • 

\r\ssi hma or r\} ma, com. 

Instrum. j^" ^^ 

Genit. j.:^. ^j^ hina jo or j.:^. ^^ ina jo. 

Dative. ^^ ^jj» hina khe etc. 

I^^^y ^jjj hina khe etc. 
^ hi etc. 
Ablat. ^L4^ ^j^ hina kha etc. ; ^L% hina. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^ hi; ^ he, 'these'; 'they'; com. 

i,jj& hine or ^1 ine; ^jjjt hinane or ^j| inane. 

Grenit. j^ ,jje hine jo; j^ ^^^.a^o hinane jo. 
Dative. ^^ ^^ hine khe; ^^ ^1^ hinane khe. 

1^^^ ».50 hine khe etc. 
(5? ^1' cf^ ^^• 
Ablat. ,jL^ ,j-? hine kha etc. 

There is also an emphatic form of this pronoun: 
^L<jo hei, this very one. 

To travel after Punhu, this is my happiness. Sh. 
MaiB. m, 1. 

^ 7 ' "i" - -I - ^ 

With this water she does not wash at all her head. 
Sh. Suh. Chot. 3. 

N2 



Format 
Instrum 



196 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Nothing but wickedness has been in his heart. 
Maj. 244. 

Never it will be after this in the world. Sh. Kha- 
hor. Ill, 11. 

I '- 

Whoever shall give to drink unto one of these little 
ones a cup of cold water. Matth. 10, 42. 

is^ }^ ^/ yH ^^ r^^! (J>^ iJ-^ C^>? ^'<^^ 

God can make sons for Abraham from these stones. 
Matth. 3, 9. 

2) The emphatic proximate demonstrative 
is jjdI iho, 'this very'; 'this here'. It is properly a 
compound pronoun, consisting of the demonstrative base 
T, and 'ho' = Sansk. ^ C^), and therefore inflected ac- 
cording to both terminations. 

SINGULAR. 
K"om. ^^\ iho; y^\ iho; p\ i5; j.^jj i5; masc.^) 
Lil iha; Lg.jl iha; U] ia; LjI la; fem. 

orma . I _^| i^he; ,^^l inhi; ^ AS inhia; j^S ineha; com. 
Instrum. J-i' S?-- ^-'' 

Genit. ^ ^\ inhe Jo etc. 

Dative. ^^5^ ^\ inhe khe etc. 



1) It very rarely occurs, that the Singular of this pronoun is 
(after the manner of an adjective) joined to a noun in the Plural. 

2) In poetry the form ^\ ehu also is to be met with. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 197 

^-^ ^^1 inhe klie etc. 
Accus. < " ) ^1 ' 

ys^l iho; m.; Li[ iha, fern. 

Ablat. ^i^ ^^l inhe kha etc. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^1 ihe, com. 

IiS^mm.JS^^ i^^a^^' v^l inhine; ^^Jj inhe. 
Genit. jjs. ij-i^l inhane jo etc. 

Dative. ^-^5^ ij-^^ inhane khe etc. 

1^^ 1^)4^^ inhane khe etc. 
^lihe,'com. 

Ablat. jjL^ ij-^i inhane kha etc. 

The emphatic i may also be added to this pronoun, 
to point the object out with still greater distinctness, 

as: ^Jy^\ ilioi) ^l^is very same person, fem. ^Li| ihai; 

Format. ^J^\ inhei; Plur. ^^\ ihei; Format. ^^a^J 

or commonly: ,j-ss^] inh!. 



i ^ ^ 



Even this is the cause of the Lord, that he draws 
forth the drowned ones from the eddy. Sh. Surag. 

n, 16. 

The lovers, says Abd-ul-Latif, have fallen into this 
very reflection. Sh. Kal. I, 8. 

Even these are the works of God; otherwise who 
wouldstep down into the whirlpools? Sh. Suh. VI, 13. 



198 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

3) The demonstrative pronoun j..g.>| ijli5, 'this 

one present' is only used in the Nom. Sing, and Plural. 
It is apparently compounded of the base 'i' and the Sansk. 
pronoun ^t, s being now and then changed in Sindhi 
to j, and even to jh (see: Introduction §. 11, 2). 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. }<l'>l ij^o; fem. l^>[ ijha. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. is^l -y^^' ^^^' 

They come here; the faqirs have been made tawny 
by the Kak (river). Sh. Mum. Eano II, 3. 

4) The remote demonstrative pronoun is ^hu 

or ys^ ho, in Lar pronounced ^f u or jl o. The base 
of this pronoun, hu, is not in use in Sanskrit, but in 
Prakrit a remnant of it has been preserved in the Gre- 
nitive ^^ Its theme must have been (according to Bopp, 
Comp. Gramm. §. 341) sva, from which 'hu' has been 
regularly formed. Its inflection quite agrees with that 
of ^ hi, only hu (u) being substituted instead of 'hi' 

in the Formative. 

Annotation. The Marathi does not know this pronominal 
base; it only uses to, corresponding to the Sindhi so. In 
Panjabi we find uh, Instrum. un, and Formative us, Plur. 
uh, Formative una. The Hindustani uses: woh, Formative us; 
Plural we, Format, un (Hindu! : wah, Formative va; Plur. we, 
Formative: un). The Gujarat! , like the Marath!, has only the 
theme te. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. ^ hu, y^ ho, y u, 31^0, masc. L^, ^^^^^^ 
yk hu (j.55 h5), ^ hua; ^1 u, ^\ ua, fem. J 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 199 

Format. 



Jbormat. | , > 

Instmm.}'^* ^™^' ^' ™*'' ''°^- 

Dative. ^^^ ^ huna khe etc. 

\^4^ ^jj^ huna khe etc. 



Accus. 



[*i5 hu, ^ic hua etc. 

Ablat. ^Ui huna, ^^^^ hunaha, ^bl una; ^l^ ^ 
huna kha. 

PLURAL. 

Nom. ^5^ hti; j.iD ho; £:^5> hue; &.I tie; s^ hoe, com. 

J^ormat. 1^^ hunane, ^1 unane; ^ hune, ^jl une. 

lustrum./ " , , ,. ^ ' -u -X ' 
(emphatic: ^j^xa^o hum). 

Dative. ^^ ^s^ hunane khe ; ^^^ ^i hune khe etc. 

\.^4f ..yli hunane khe etc. 
Accus. <^T ^ 

[ys^ hti; ^55 ho etc. 
Ablat. ^L^ ^Jlsii hunane kha etc. 

Having travelled from a foreign country he had 
come. Sh. Sor. I, 3. 



- ' T 



I am not worthy of that shoe, which they put on 
(their) foot. Sh. Koh. HI, 8. 

At that door those are accepted, who have lost 
their existence. Sh. Surag. I^ Epil. 2. 

* .1 n - - .1 ^ ^ 'I"" ' 

Those are the mansions, those the mosques, those 
the palaces of the Kazis. Maj. 137. 



200 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

" ^t ^ ^ .. 

Yesterday were raised by them the masts by the 
support of the north -wind. Sh. Surag. Ill, 1. 

5) The emphatic remote demonstrative is 

jj&l uho, 'that very'; it is formed in the same way as 
ys^[ iho, only 'u' being substituted for 'i'. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. 35&I uh5 or j.j| uo, masc. 

Lil uha or Gl ua, fern. 
Format. 1 „' , _ ^ 0' , . ^ ' 
Instrum.jcrf ^ ™^^' ^^ ^^^^^' '^} ^^^^^' ^^^' 

Genit. 3.2^ ^c^^ unhe jo etc. 
Dative. ^§^ .^1 unhe khe etc. 

1^45" ^^1 unhe khe etc. 
ys^} uho, m.; Lil uha, fem. 
Ablat. ,jl4^ ^5-^t unhe kha. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^1 uhe, com. 

Format. 1 ^oj , "/ i . o' , ^ 

lustrum. J S^-^^ unhane; ^1 unhme; ^4^! unhe. 

Genit. ^ ,j^l unhane jo etc. 

y 

Dative. ^4^ ^^jf unhane khe etc. 

(^^5" jj-gj! unhane khe etc. 
^1 uhe, com. 
Ablat. ^L^^ (j-^l unhane kha etc. 

The emphatic 1 may also be added to this pro- 
noun, ^jj.5i| uhoi, 'that very same', fem. ^^W uhai, 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 201 



Formative: ^^^tygil unhei, ^^1 unhi or ,j.x^i unahi. 
Plural: ^^^x^&l uhei; Formative: ^^^1 unhani or ^jj^\ 
unhi. 

^|4^Lf ^5tXll ^1 ^ ^- ^fl 

The story of that very (person) was heard before. 
Sh. Khahori I, 11. 

^'P it; ^^ 4il ^ ^S^)^ ^sf^ (5^i ^ ^ i5^i 

Having come to that very house (and) having seen 
that very child and its mother Mary, they fell at his 
feet and worshipped (him). Matth. 11, 11. 

cff^ il^7^. H^ is^' ^^ >^ i5?>^^ ;<^ (sf 

This one sees the moon, and that one, who is there, 
(sees his) friend. Sh. Kambh. I, 3. 

Even those remember thee always 

Who never live in a town. Sh. Sarangu 11, Epil. 

Even towards them, says Ahmad, I have an im- 
mense longing. Umar Marui X. ^) 

6) The remote demonstrative pronoun y.^S 
ujho, that one present, is, like y-^S ij^o? only used 
in the Nom. Singular and Plural. It is compounded of 
the base 'u' and the Sansk. pronoun ^: (see: j-g^j). 



1) A poem, difierent from that contained in the Shaha jo Kisals. 



202 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS, 

SINGULAR. 
Nom. 3"^^^ ujto; fern. L^s.1 ujha. 

PLURAL. 

9 

l^om. ^-^1 i^jhe, com. 

§. 33. 
m. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

The relative pronoun in Sindhi is ^ j5, 'who', 
'what', Sansk. "^^ Prak. '^; the Formative Singular 

^j^i. jahe corresponds to the Prakrit Grenitive ^fW 

= ^^, the vowels having been nasalized in Sindhi. The 
Nom. Plural is ,^^ je, as in Prakrit %, and the For- 

mative ^j^ jine or ^^^ jane points to the Prakrit Gre- 

nitive Plur. ^T^, a having been shortened in Sindhi. 

Annotation, The cognate dialects do not differ essentially 
from the Sindhi; Marathi: Sing, jo, Plur. je; Gujarat! : Sing, 
je, Plural jeo; Hindust.: Sing, jo or jau; Formative jis; Plur, 
jo, Formative jin or jinh; Panjabi: jo, lustrum, jin, Formative 
jis; Plur. jo. Format, jini, BangalT: je or jine. Formative jaha 
(Prak. ^T^); Plur. jiha-ra. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. ys^ jo, masc. ; Ls>- ja, fem. 

Format. ] 

Instrum.M^ J^^^' '^'^- 

Genitive, j^ ij-g-*-^ j^^^ j^ ^^^• 
Dative. ^^4^" ^^1^ jahe khe. 
Accus. ^^ c^f^ J^^^ ^^^5 >=- jo; U. ja. 
Ablat. (jL^ ^j-^^ jsbhe kha. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^^ je, com. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 203 

Format. 1 - , v. ^o ,. ^ o .. , . 

Instrum./S?^ J^^^^' d^t J'^^' c^-S^^Jintane; ^j^^ jmhine. 

^1:^ jinane, ^X:^ jinine. 

Genit. ^ ^j^ jane jo etc. 

Dative. ,^ ^^ jane khe etc. 

Accus. ^^ ^J^ jane khe ; ^:5. je. 

Ablat. jjLi^ ^^ jane kha etc. 

In poetry the emphatic i very frequently is added 
to the Formative Sing, and Plur. of this pronoun, as: 

Format. Sing. j^^I^ jahi; Format, phjr. ^x^ jam (also 

written jj^aa^ jam), ^j.^^!^ janhi (to be well distinguished 

from the Format. Sing.) 

>^^^^ \J"^ U*^ ^ (S^' ^e ^ 3^ 

That, which is the spittle of Punhu, of that will 
I lick a drop. Sh. Sah. II, Epil. 2. 



- J 



She, who has a longing for Saharu asks not for a 

slope in the ferry; 
Those, who thirst after love, consider the brooks as 

small steps. Sh. Suh. Ill, 4. 

Those who have fallen asleep on the evening, suffer 
pains indeed. Sh. Khahori III, Epil. 2. 

I " .. I I 

They will depart with faith, in whose mouth the 
creed is. Maj, 37. 



204 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

O motlier, go and bring me the spinning wheel 

from the courtyard. 
The mountaineer, for whose sake I have spun, is 

gone to Kec. Sh. Hus. Ill, 8. 

Those drink draughts, whose heads are devoted. Sh. 
Jam. Kal. II, 25. 

§. 34. 

ly. THE COERELATIVE PEONOUK 

The pronoun j.a*; so is nearly always used as the 
correlative of s^; it is seldom found isolated, in which 
case it retains its original signification 'that'. It cor- 
responds to the Sansk. pronoun ^t, Prak. ^, The 

Formative Sing. ,j^S* tahe is derived from the Prak. 

Genitive TTW (Sansk. rl^) ^ rf^; the ISTom. Plur. .^ 

^ I 

se differs so far from the Sanskrit and Prakrit (^) 
as having retained the base of the Singular; the For- 
mative Plural ^j.f tane is to be referred to the Prak. 
Grenitive fTT'^, a having been shortened, as in ^T^. 

Annotation. All the kindred idioms know this pronoun; 
Marathi: to, Plur. tl; GujaratI likewise: te, Plur. teo; Hindust.: 
s5 or taun, Formative tis; Nom. Plur. so or taun, Formative 
tin, tinh or tinho. PanjabI: so, Instrument, tin, Formative 
tis; Plur. so. Formative tina. Bangali: se, Formative taha, 
Plur. taha-ra. 

SINGULAR. 
Nom. j.^ so; fem. LI sa. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 205 

Format. ) ^-: .-i ~ 
lustrum. J ^^'^°' 

Genit. ^r^ ,j-4^* ^^^^ Jo ^^<^- 

Dative. ^^^T ^j-gL* tahe khe. 

Accus. ^^^5^ (j"€^' t^^^ ^he; ^^ s5; LL sa. 

Ablat. ^L^' taha; ^L^ ^j-S-^-'' ^ahe kha. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. --W se; com. 

Format. 1 r . .. .• -.. ^- . j.- • 

>j^ tane; ..p tme; .kaj tmane, yXJ tmme; 

Instrum.J - ^^ V^ ^o' . ^^^ 

^j.,^jj tinhane; ,jm^ tinhine. 

Grenit. ^ ^jj tane jo etc. 

Dative. ^^^ ^jJ tane khe etc. 

Accus. ^f ^ tane khe; ^^ se. 

Ablat. jjLjj tanea; ^L^^ ^ tane kha etc. 

The emphatic i may also be joined to this pronoun, 
as: Nom. Sing. ^Sj^ soi, fem. ^SLl sai; Format. ,j.a^* 
tahi. Nom. Plur. ^aa^ sei, Format. ^^ tani or: ^^3* 
tanhi. 

aj.j| S-w Jk:5^l ^ ^ y^ %J^ yJM 

He is this, he is that; he is death, he is Allah. 
He is friend, he is breath; he is enemy, he is helper. 
Sh. Kal. I, 19. 

(J^/^^^'^ -^ -^5 (5^ vJ^'^"' cs^*-^ 7fr^ 

O Sumiro! do not confine in fetters that chaste 
woman! Sh. Um. Mar. HI, 9. 



206 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

In that very time I have made an engagement with 
the inhabitants of the jungle. Sh. Um. Mar. I, 1. 

When they were fallen asleep, having stretched out 

their feet on the bed, 
Then they were left behind by the caravan, whilst 

sleeping. Sh. Koh. I, 8. 

jj^j (j^*^ (j^^ ^^ '•^^ (^tX-*.^ jj.A^«;j^ 

cH 3;>4^' ijr^ ^* 3}^ i^^'^i u'^-'' 

In whose face there are hundred thousands of noses, 
Cut off from those one, then what obligation is it 
to them? Sh. Mum. VI, 22. 

§. 35. 
Y. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1) The interrogative pronoun ^ keru, who? 

This pronoun is only used absolutely. The No- 
minative base yS keru is derived from the Sanskrit 

c|^^^, Prak. '^f^H (s^® Introduction §. 2, 6); but the 

Formative Singular ^^i^ kahe, and the Format. Plural 

w^ kane point back to the Sansk. ^t; Genitive Sing. 

^^, Prak. ^W = ^W; Genitive Phiral in Prakrit 
^TTjr, the a of which has been shortened in Sindhi. 

Annotation, The cognate idioms fall back on the Sansk. 
base cjt (i. e. on the Accus. Sing, cp), as Marathi and Gu- 
jarat!: kon; Hindust.: kaun, Format, kis; Plural kaun, Format. 



Accus. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 207 

kin, kinh, kinho; PanjabT: kaun, Instrument, kin, Format, kis; 
Plural kaun, Formative kina. BangalT: ke. Formative kaha; 
Plural kaha-ra. 

SINGULAR. 

ISTom. jjS keru; fern. 1^ kera. 
Format. ) op , , 

Grenit. y^. jj-^^ kahe jo etc. 
Dative. ^^^5^ lH^ kahe khe. 
^4^ ^jj^ kahe khe. 

>^ keru; Ia5^ kera. 

Ablat. ^L^ jj-^^ kahe kha. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. yjS^ kere, com. 

^ , * LJ^ kane, ,.»y kine; ,.J5" kinane. ..4^ kinine; 
Instrum. J V ^ ^ y " " o " . - " 

jj^5" kinhane, jj-gil' kinhine. 

Dative. ^^^5^ ^^ kane khe etc. 

1^^.^ ^^ kane khe etc. 
wo kere. 
Ablat. (jLg^ (j*^ khane kha etc. 

^jjli 3jL2^ ^^^uyli U^"^ (J^^ 7^ 

Who art thou? from whence proceedest thou? what 
is thy name? Maj. 167. 

\^y^ ^^ yt^ C5^ \J^ cH-y W j^ 

Who is the brahman woman? whose (Genit. Plur.) 
is she? who knows her? Sh. Ma^B. I, 14. 



208 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

e^Li Use {s'yi^ '^5 -^^'^^ ^^ r^ 

Who have they been? wither are they gone? of 
what class have they been? Maj. 659. 

2) The interogative pronoun L^ cha, w^hat? 

This pronoun is only used in a neuter sense and 

has no Plural. The Grenitive ^ L^ cha jo etc. signifies: 
of what sort, of what kind? With the postpositions 
^^^ khe, ^b^ kane, ^[^ kha, it signifies: what for? 
to what purpose? why? — It is derived from the Sansk. 
f^t^l^ what. 

Annotation. The Hindustani uses kia, the Panjabi ki and 
kia, Format, kas; the Marathi kay (Formative kasa); Bangali: 
ki, Format, kaha. Hindu! : kaha, Format, kahe. 

^^^ ^i^ Jl^ 14^^ ^- ^^5 0\y^ yS> ^y j^a^ 

If the savour of the salt goes, whit what shall it 
be salted? Matth. 5, 13. 

3) The interrogative pronoun .50j^ kohu, what? 

This pronoun is only used in a neuter sense, just 
as the preceding one, and is indeclinable. If signifies 
very frequently 'why', 'what for'. In poetry it is oc- 

casionally shortened to J^ kuhu. 

As to its derivation it is identical with L^ (= ka, 
kaha), a having been changed to o in this instance. 
The same is also the case in Hindu! , where kaun, 
who? makes the Formative either in ka, kohe or kahe. 

I have been made alive by remembering (him); what 
will he do to me having met (me)? Sh. Suh. IV, 7. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 209 

Why do the vacillating ones talk of strong wine? 
Sh. Kal. II, 25. 

4) The interrogative pronouns ^^^ keh5, 
jj-gj^ keharo and j-jLiJ^ kujaro, what? which? 

These three interrogative pronouns may either be 
used absolutely or adjectively with a substantive. Instead 

oi ^^ keho the form ^l^f keo is also used in Lar; j>^^ 

keharo may also be written 3>4^ keharo or it may be 

contracted to yS^yS kerho; about their derivation see 

Introd. §. 2, 6. They are inflected regularly. The Dative 

Sing, of jjLii', i. e. ^^5^ ^^vLio^ kujare khe and the 

Ablative of the fem. Sing. ^CvLivy kujarea (frequently 
also written CvLi^i') is generally used as an interrogative 
adverb, Vhy?' Svhat for?' 

In which wise wilt thou, o afflicted one! pass (thy 
time) without the bountiful? Sh. Jam. Kal. IV, 16. 

^y=^ 5^^i >?^^ c5f^ u^* jj'^^i^-f-^' 

What has happened to Qais? having come they 
speak thus. Maj. 39. 

J^ >^ u4^. 5-^ >^>^' (5"f^ ^j^^ 

Why has thy own state been made by thee thus? 
Maj. 655. 



T r u m p p , Sindhl- Grammar. 



210 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

§. 36. 
VI. INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 

1) The indefinite pronoun j^ ko, any one; 
some one. 

The root of this indefinite pronoun is the same as 
that of the interrogative (Sansk. ^^S'H?): "the Formative 
Sing, and Plural is therefore identical in both pronouns. 

SINGULAR. 
Nom. 3/ ko; fern. ^ ka. 

Format. ] "> i ^i ~ 

i..w4A> kahe, com. 

lustrum. J ^ " 

Genit. ^ (j-^^^ kahe j5 etc. 

Dative. ^^ ^j^S' kahe khe. 

( ^45" ^4!^ kahe khe. 
Accus. < * ' 

[ji^ ko; b" ka. 

Ablat. ^14^ ^-^^ kahe kha. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^ ke, com. 

Format. ] -, ., ^ . . 

^ ^ \^,S kane; ..vf kme. 

lustrum. J ^ y - 

Genit. ^^ ^f kane jo etc. 

Dative. ^45* ^< kane khe. 

I^y wf' kane khe. 
^r ke. 

Ablat. ^l^ ^ kane kha. 

•• , .. I ^ ..I ^ 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 211 

Nothing else will be of use to thee, except that, 

which thou hast sown thyself; 
Not a grain givest thou to any one, accumulating 

thou hoardest up treasures. Mengho 10. 

>^ ^ •' • .. I ,. I ^ ^ ^ .. I 

Some (lightenings) flash over China, some take notice 
of the Samarqandis. Sh. Sar. lY, 12. 

I do not other (work) for any, even his I am. Sh. 
Um. Mar. YH, 5. 

The emphatic form of this pronoun is also in 
frequent use: 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. ^^ koi, any one; fem. Sl^ kaL 
Format. ^a.^I>'^ kahi. 

PLURAL. 
JSTom. ^j^ kei, or ^-^^f kai, ^j^^xf kai. 
Format, ^xf kani or ^^^f kanhi. 

Because there will be at the door of my friends 
some (== several) longing like me. Sh. Jam. Kai. YIII, 
Epil. 

To some, some men some (peculiar) knowledge has 
been allotted. Sh. Sor. I, 17. 

Instead of the emphatic form of this pronoun ^i' 
ko may also be repeated: 

02 



212 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

^ "^ •• ' - I 

Some reproach of the liquor-seller (fern.) has fallen 
upon their gall -bag. Sh. Jam. Kal. IV, 18. 

A neuter form of ^ is $^ ki, something, a 
little; it is not inflected. 

With hard labour scoop a little out the heart from 
the sugar-cane. Golden Alphab. VI, 8. 

With a negation S signifies: no one, nobody, 
and ^ ki: nothing; for emphasis' sake they are fre- 
quently reduplicated, in which case the negation is put 
between them, as: ^ ^ ^ ko na ko, nobody at all, 
5" .j ^ kl na ki, nothing at all. 

^y^ ^ ^ ^j-yo ^Uj ;j^ 

^K ^y -3 gi J<A^ ^^.g.AX) ^^il^j ^;o 

In this time that one is a good comrade 

Who has no children, no buffalo calf, no son and 

no fortune; 
Nothing in his bundle, nothing in his lap, no blanket, 

no sack, 
A rope, at the bottom old and at the top broken, 

and no place whatever to live in. Golden Al- 
phab. VII. 

y^ ^ y^ ^j}-^^^ '•^•^^^ ^tXLc^' .S^\y^^ ^J.A^j.A•J^ 

Kot any one from thy family will be thy companion 
from hence. Mengho 3. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 213 

When ^f is followed by the auxiliary verb ^s&l ahe 
(is) with a negation, a contraction takes places, as: 
^^j.5^ konhe (instead of: ^sSi j ^) there is nobody (m.), 
^^SK kanhe (£); jXa^jj-S^ konheko, there is nobody at 
all (m.), bC^^I^ kanheka (f); ^^^^f kiheki, there is 
nothing at all. 

2) The compound indefinite pronoun 
L^i^ Jeko, whoever. 

The original form of this jjronoun is j-^:^ joko, 

fern. ^Li^ jaka, which alone is in use in the Formative 
Sing, and Plural, in the Nominative Sing, and Plural 
however the form jXa^ jeko preponderates; it is com- 
posed of ^c^ je, if, and j.5" ko, literally: if any one. 
Instead of jS^ or jf^ the reduplicated relative 3^3^ 

jojo (and as its correlative j.**;j.-w soso) is likewise in use; 
it is inflected in the same way as the single j.^ (or ^), 
The neutral form of this pronoun, ,-)Cvs> jeki, wha- 
tever, is not inflected. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. sXa^ jeko; fem. LC^-^ jeka. 

y .. . .. . 

Format. ) ,^ o. , , , , 
Instrum.M^^ ^^ ^^^'' ^^^'^' 
Genit. ^ ^-^ ^-^^ j^^^^ kahe jo etc. 
Dative. ^^ ^-^^ c^■^^ ^^^^^ kahe khe. 

\s-^ \J^^ ij-f^ ]^^^ kahe khe. 
Accus. \" 

ySUsb. jeko; LXa^ jeka. 

Ablat. ;jW^ c)"^ cH-^^ j^he kahe kha. 



Accus. 



214 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

PLURAL. 
N'om. /^Xl^ jeke. 

- I " i 

Format. ) 

Instrum.Js^^S^^ ^^^""^ ^^''^' c^f J"^ J^^^ ^^^^• 

Genit. ^ ^ ^^ jane kane jo etc. 

Dative. ^^ ^S w^ jane kane khe. 

^^ ^i" ^^ jane kane khe. 

..I ^ ^ 

,^Xx^ jeke. 
Ablat. ^J^ ^ ^^ jane kane kha. 

Whatever (word) be in his mind, hear that his word. 
Maj. 43. 

Whatever thou wilt pray to the Lord of the world, 
that will be thy companion (i. e. to the other world), 
Mengho 9. 

Instead of jiW j^ko the poets very frequently use 
^^jf, reverting the order of the two pronouns. 

Whatever thing thou hast to say, o Bijalu, let me 
hear that! Sh. Sor. II, 17. 

isf^ iS-^ C57 ^'i ^-^ '^ ^h >^^ U5 (5f (5f 

Which trees soever give no good fruit, those are 
cut off and thrown into the fire. Matth. 7, 9. 

There is also a reduplicated form of this pronoun: 
j.^Xa^ jekoko , but it is only used in the Nominative Sing. 

and Plural. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 215 

SINGULAR. 

Norn. jijXj^ jekoko; fern. b^LjCo^ jekaka. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^:CjCA.i^ jekeke, com. 

The neuter form of it is: jCjC^ jekikl. 



I - ' " rr - 

Whosoever is angry witli his brother without a 
cause, he will be guilty of judgement. Matth. 5, 2. 

Annotation. Another compound of ji^ is j.$^>5> harko, every 
one, whoever (Hindustani: harkoi); it is only used in the 
Singular and inflected regularly, as: 

]^om. j.S'li hark5, fem. (^li harka; 

Format. jj.^Is'li harkahe, com. 

§. 37. 
VII. THE RECIPEOCAL PEOjNOUN 

J^Ij pana, 'self. 

The reciprocal pronoun in Sindhi is J^(J pana, 'self', 
in person, in contradistinction to ^j^Lj panu, s. m., one's 
own person or personality. It is derived from the Sansk. 
'^irHl, soul, self, which becomes in Prakrit either 't^'-MI 
(Yar. m, 48) or ^IWT^ (Yar. Y, 45). From the latter 

Prakrit form appana, the Sindhi J^Lj has sprung by 
dropping the first syllable 'ap'. 

Annotation. The Marathi reciprocal pronoun apan points 
likewise back to the Prakrit appana, whereas the Hindustani 
ap (possessive: ap-na) is to be traced back to the Prakrit form 
appa; similarly the Panjabl: ap, possessive ap-na. In Gujaiati 
both Piakrit forms reappear: ap, and possessive: apan- no. 



216 SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

From the original signification of J^lo pana, "souF 
(like the Hebrew ti^'?i^), its application may be easely ex- 
plained. It refers in a sentence always to the chief- 
snbject, be it distinctly expressed or only tacitly under- 
stood. In the Genitive (j.^^ ^^^l paha j5 etc.), which 
serves as a possessive pronoun, it may be translated by 
^own'; but at the same time it points out with a pe- 
culiar nicety the subject, to which it must be referred, 
and may then be translated by the respective possessive 
pronoun, required by the subject. 

SINGULAR and PLURAL. 

Nom. J.Lj pana, self; masc. and fem. 
Format. ) ^ , - _ 
Instrum./^ *•* 

Genit. ^ ^i^^l paha jo; j.;*- ^^. ipahR jo; j.^ ^L 

pa jo (in Lar). 
Dative. ] ^ -x- - ^ i - 

Ablat. ^LiLi pana; ^Lgi" ^U pana kha. 

An adverbial form is ^^.A^ili^ panahi, of, from, by 
himself or themselves, in person; in a similar sense the 
Ablative ^ULj pana is also used. 



By himself he knows his own person; his own 
person takes notice of himself; 

By himself he sees himself; by himself he is be- 
loved. Sh. Kal. I, 18. 



Thou theyself art thy own (i. e. thy soul's friend); 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 217 

thou (thyself art) in presence of (thy) friends. Sh. 
Abirl V, 12. 

•^ '^) ^^ ^ "^^ '^ yf '^^^• 

Do not worship thyself; o JogT, keep (thy) devotion! 
Sh. Eamakali VH, 20. 

j^^ ^iis ^ ^j.xj .45'! ^^ ^4^ 

How wilt thou say to thy brother: let me ]3ull out 
the mote from thy eye? Matth. 7, 4. 

In this last sentence the subject, to which the re- 
ciprocal pronoun is to be referred, must be found out 
from the context or the emphasis of the speaker. 

^o dhure is not a reciprocal pronoun, as alleged 

by Capt. Geo. Stack; it is the Locative of w;i>4> dhuru, 
'extremity', 'exact spot' (Panjabi: dhur, adv.), used adver- 
bially. The same is to be remarked of jLaj pinde, which 
is the Locative of Jij ijinclu, s. m. 'body', and signifies: 

'in person'. For this reason its Grenitive is j^ JLL 
pinda jo etc. 

But ask thy own body (i. e. thyself), having turned 
thy face upon it. Grolden Alphabet 43, 7. 

'One another' is expressed in Sindhi in the fol-= 
lowing way: 

Their hearts always remember each other. Maj. 200. 



218 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

§. 38. 

Vm. PEONOMmAL ADJECTIVES. 

Under this head we class only such adjectives, as 
participate more or less of the nature of pronouns and 
are somewhat irregular in their inflexion, and such, as 
are derived from pronominal themes. All other adjectives, 
which may, according to their position in a sentence^ 
supply the place of the pronoun, we exclude from this 

list, such as: p3.i falano, a certain x^erson, j'jXi^ hikiro, 

one , lij Bio , another , i^ sajo , whole , as they are treated 

and constructed as regular adjectives. 

1) Indefinite pronominal adjectives. 

We have to deal here with the pronominal ad- 
jectives .j^jJ^ sabhu, whole, all, every one; the emphatic 
form of which is ^I^yj^jS^ sabhoi; with the compound 
d<^j^ sabhuko, every one, and ^jj^>5 miryoi or ^3^-5 
miroi, all, whole, every one. 

a) The pronominal adjective ..g-A.IL sabhu. 

It is derived from the Sansk. ^c(, Prak. ^cof; 
Hindustani: sab (Marathi: sarv); in Sindhi b has been 
aspirated (as in Panjabi: sabh) on account of the elided 
r (see: Introd. §. 15, B. c.) 

SINGULAR. 

l^om. ^^^ sabhu; fem. ^^.L sabha. 

Eormat. | - - ^ -, 

\^j^ sabna, com. 
Instrum. J 

Genit. s.^ ..^-auI sabha jo etc. 

Dative, ^f ^Z, sabha khe. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



219 



Accus. 

Ablat. 



JSTom. 
Format. 1 




sabha khe. 
.^^ sabliu; fern. .^^1 sabha. 
^1^5" .4^ sabha kha. 

PLURAL. 
^^L sabhe, com. 



Instrum. J 

Oenit. 
Dative. 

Accus. 
Ablat. 



l^j^AA. sabhane, ^-^^^ sabhine; ^•^•^^.^ 



sabhi= 



nine; ,j.a.^a^ sabhe. 
j.^ ^j^jJ^ sabhane jo etc. 
^^f (j-i-i-^ sabhane khe etc. 
^^^ ^j4^ sabhane khe. 
..g.A.1 sabhe. 
^Laa^^^ sabhanea {^jIx^Zj sabhina). 



jjL.^ ^j^-?^ sabhane kha etc. 

In the Nom. Plur. we find occasionally ^^aIw sabhe 
written, instead of ,^aaL sabhe. In the Formative Plural 
^j-f<^j^ sabhe may be used, instead of ^j^^ etc., when 
the noun immediately follows in the Formative (e). 

l^ ij'4J'-f, ^rr^^ ^^^5 ^'^'^ '■^^ r*^ 

My whole life is useless; my time (pi.) has been 
lost by me. Sh. Surag. V, Epil. 

By Allah all the undertakings of that friend are 
carried out. Maj. 688. 

" . I ' :: ' . " ^!'.- \ "*' 

Sitting they read with love, causing always their 
eyes to shed tears; 



220 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

Volumes beautiful in all ways, and other elegant 
books. Maj. 140. 141. 

y/J^^M ^^^^JJ^Km ^SiXjM yZS" iXXS yJM S.S> ^JajLww 

It is an oath of the Lord (i. e. by the Lord), that 
my friend is the most beautiful. Sh. Barvo Sindhi 11, 6. 

h) The pronominal adjective Si^x^ sabhoi. 

The inflection of ^^^jj^, 'all', 'whole', 'every one', 
is somewhat irregular. 

SINGULAR. 



Nom. ^j-^^ sabhoi; fern. ^^SLg-^ sabhal. 

Format. 
Instn 



l^L^^AA*. sabhei; fem. ^I^j^ sabhaia. 
rum.J"'"'* 

etc. etc. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^^.fi^jJL sabhei, or: ^4^^^ sabhai, com. 

^^^^ ' I^-a^aI- sabhini or: ^^^.^-JL sabhini. 
lustrum. J ^^ - * W-- . • 

etc. etc. 

Ablat. ^jU^aII; sabhinai or: ^pLj^^j^ sabhineai. 

Come in, o Punhu! all pains are gone! Sh. Desi 11, 
Epil. 

I " t I T - ? * - 

..I •• , ^ ..■'..-' 

The safety of all, says the Sayyid, is there. Sh, 
Abiri V, 6. 

To Todi (Suhini) belongs more honour than to all 
(others). Sh. Suh. Ill, 9. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 221 

c) The pronominal adjective ^^^ sabhuko. 

The compound pronominal adjective j.X^aL sabhuko 
is inflected as follows: 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. jJ^4'^**' sabhuko; fem. IXI^a^ sabhaka. 
Format. ^.^jX^jJ^ sabhakahe, com. 
etc. etc. etc. 

PLURAL. 
Nom. ^^-i^ sabhake, com. 
Format. ^JC^a^ sabhakane. 
etc. etc. etc. 
There is also a neuter form of this pronoun: ^JC^a;! 
sabhukl. The emphatic form ^ji,S<.^jJ^ sabhukoi is also 
used (see ^^j^)- 

^;La^ (5?;"^ (1^? LX^A^ ^/f^ U^^'"^ 

In Savan (July — August) every one slips (into the 
river), this one (goes into it) merry in the cold season. 
Sh. Suh. m, 17. 

I come at every time, using shifts I go. Sh. Barvo 
Sindhi n, 7. 

Having drunk a cup of love we understood every 
thing. Sh. Kal. n, Epil. 

d) The pronominal adjective ^^}^i^ miryoL 

The pronominal adjective i^Hrt'j^ miryoi or ^Sjv^ 
miroi is inflected in the same manner as ^jj..^-^ sabhoi. 



222 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. ^>:?V? niiryoi or: ^^j^ miroi; fern, ^^m niiryaL 
Format, ^^aj^ miryei or: ^^^jyo mirei; fern. ^Lj^? niiryaia. 

etc. etc. etc. 

PLURAL. 
JSTom. ^5^.V? miiyei or ^^^:yi mirei; ^-U mirai (in 

Lar); com. 
Format. ^'U mirini; ^^v? niiryam. 

etc. etc. 

Ablat. ^Llip mirinea or: ^L^ ^^''ho mirini kha. 

^^O ^4^ J^. -^^ ^^ -ykk:^ ^^'H 

Every good tree gives good fruit. Matth. 7, 17. 

u;^ (5?^)^ 4^^ u^^ '^ csf*^ O^ 

There is no living in the world; all the days (of 
life) are two. Sh. Kal. II, Epil. 

(^jjir L^ \djS .4JK J.5j.x) ^^ySyo 

The devotees, taking yesterday leave from all, went 
off. Sh. Eamakali Vn, Epil. 

The Locative Sing. masc. ^^ajj^ mirei, 'in all', 

'throughout', 'altogether', is very frequently used, 
where we would employ the simple adjective all, whole; 
but it is to be noticed, that the Locative ^aj^ mirei 

always follows immediately the noun, on which the stress 
is thus to be laid. 

A hot wind has set in; the world in all (i. e. the 
whole world) has been singed. Sh. Abiri I, 11. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 223 

The gravel -stone throughout (i. e. all) make red 
with blood for the sake of (thy) husband. Sh. Abiri 
VIII, 8. 

O bard! upon thee (i. e. for thy sake) I sacrifice 
aU (my) property. Sh. Sor. lY, 10. 

2) Correlative adjectives. 

The Sindhi possesses a great facility to derive cor- 
relative adjectives from pronominal bases. 

a) The pronominal adjectives, denoting 'quantity' 
are formed by affixing to the original Sanskrit - Prakrit 
bases or other bases formed alike, the adjectival ter- 
mination ro, as: jwCaS^ ketiro, how much? Sansk. f^R'^IrT 

Prak. ^f%^. As similar phenomenon is to be noticed 
in the cognate idioms, as Hindustani: kitta and kit- 
na; Panjabi: kit-na; Marathi: kit! or with the affix k: 
kitik; G-ujarati: ket-lo; but Bangali: kat. 

&) The pronominal adjectives denoting 'size', are 
formed by affixing to the respective pronominal base 
the termination: j3 d5, as: jjwvi^ kedo, hoAv large? This 

termination is properly not an adjectival affix, but an 
adjective: so; vado, 'great', the first syllable of which 
is dropped in this composition. This is clearly proved 
by the Marathi, as: ke-vadha, how great, and the Gu- 
jarati: ke-vato (but Panjabi: ke-cla, as in Sindhi). 

All these pronominal adjectives admit again of a 
diminutive form, by adding the affix ro (see §. 11), as: 
j-ijL^ kediro, how small? 

c) The pronominal adjectives denoting 'kind' are 
formed by adding to the pronominal bases keha, jeha, 
teha, eha, hua (tiha), \h.^ diminutive affix ro, in 
consequence of which the long vowel of the pronominal 



224 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



base is shortened to its corresponding short one, as: 
y-f^ keharo, of what kind or manner? 

The pronominal bases, from which these three kinds 
of adjectives are derived, are: e or he, this; o (u) and 
ho (hti), that; the relative jo (je), the correlative so (te), 
and the interrogative ke. 

We exhibit them in the following survey: 
From 



the base: 

e 

or 
he 



Quantity. 

j^^l etiro 

j^^A^a hetiro 
this much. 



Size. 



sjol edo 

jJu55 hedo 
as large as this 



jjJLjl ediro 

jv<iA5>hediro 
as small as this 



Kind. 
jj^l eharo 

y-U^ hiaro 
of this kind. 



o 

or 

ho 



30^ I otiro 

jo^5> hotiro 

that much 



jjjl odo 

jijic hodo 
as large as that 



3^-03! odiro 

3^0^55 hodiro 
as small as that 



3*iil uharo 
yus^ huaro 
of that kind. 



jo (je) 

and 

so (te) 



j etiro 
as much 

^yXjJ tetiro 

so much 



3 JU^ 

jedo 
as large 

3JL0 tedo 

so large 



3j4^ 



as small 

svJuu tediro 

so small 



j eharo 

of which kind. 

3l^teharo 
of that kind. 



ke 



ketiro ^) 
how much 



kedo 
how large 



kediro 
how small 



keharo 
of what kind. 



All these correlative adjectives are inflected re- 
gularly, according to th*eir respective termination (masc. 
and fem.l 



1) Not to be confounded with jy^>^ is the interrogative prono- 
minal adjective ^^y^ kao, which of more than two, Sansk. ^fT'H; 
about its formation see Introd. §. 9. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 225 



§. 39. 

IX. PRONOMIJSTAL SUFFIXES, 

attached to nouns and postpositions. 

Instead of the inflected cases of the absolute 
personal and possessive pronouns the Sindhi uses very 
extensively the so-called suffixes or pronouns, which 
are affixed to nouns, postpositions (adverbs) and 
verbs. The use of these suffixes constitutes quite a pe- 
culiar feature of the Sindhi language and distinguishes 
it very advantageously from all the kindred idioms of / 
India , which are destitute of pronominal suffixes ; but at ; 
the same time the construction of the sentences is very 
frequently thereby rendered so intricate, that it presents 
great embarrasments to a beginner. In this respect the 
Sindhi quite agrees with the Pas to and the Persian, 
being the connecting link between the Indian and Iranian 
languages. 

Here we shall describe the manner, in which the 
suffixes are attached to nouns and postpositions; the 
verbal suffixes will be treated in their proper place. 

The pronominal suffixes, which are added to nouns 
and adverbs, are: 

Singular. Plural. 

I pers. ^ me. ,j^l u or ^^i hu. 

n pers. :& e. ^ va. 

in pers. (j^ se. ^ ne or ^ na. 

The suffix of the I pers. Sing, me corresponds to 
the Prakrit Grenitive Sing. T{ my; the Persian suffix is 
-♦-^ am, Pasto me, as in Sindhi. 

The suffix of the 11 pers. Sing, e has sprung from 
the Sansk. Grenitive Sing. ^, thy, t being elided in Sindhi 
according to Prakrit rule (see Introd. §. 7). In Persian 

Trumpp, Sindhi-Graramar. P 



226 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

final e (te) has been dropped and t preserved (= at), 
whereas the Pasto has retained the original form of 
this pronoun, only with transition of the tenuis into the 
media =^ t> de. 

The suffix of the III pers. Sing, se is to be re- 
ferred to the Prakrit Grenitive ^ (shortened from ^T^Zf), 
literally: hujus. In Persian it has become ^^-^ whereas 
in Pasto s has been changed to h (Zend he) and then 

altogether elided = ^ e. 

The suffix of the I pers. Plur. u or hu accedes to 
postpositions only, no suffix of the I pers. Plur. being 
in use with nouns. It is a contraction from the Prak. 
Genitive Plur. ^1^, the first syllable being dropped in 

Sindhi. The Persian form is Li ma, Pasto y? mu or 
^! um. 

The suffix of the 11 pers. Plur. ^ va is derived from 
the Sansk.-Prak. Grenitive Plur. '^; Persian on the other 

hand V^^ (pointing to the Sansk. Grenit. Plur. ^"^TT^^) 
but Pasto y) mu (m == v). 

The suffix of the III pers. Plur. ne or na has ap- 
parently sprung from an old pronominal base ^ na, which 
is already in Pali substituted for ^, that; the Prak. 
Genit. Plur. would be '^'P^ (cf Lassen p. 325; Yar.VI, 4), 
shortened ne, or na from TJJT'^* 

These suffixes, according to their etymology, supply, 
when attached to nouns, the place of possessive 
pronouns; but when joined with postpositions or ad-^ 
verbs, they may stand in lieu of any inflected personal 
pronoun. The suffix however, which properly belongs 
to the noun, may also be attached to the verb, as will 
be explained under the verbal suffixes. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 227 

§. 40. 
I. Pronominal suffixes attached to nouns. 

When a suffix accedes to a nouu, its final vowel 
unclero'oes in some instances a change. But it is to be 
noticed, that the suffixes are not used promiscuously 
with nouns, but for the most part only with those re- 
ferrino; to man. far less with those referring to animals 
or to inanimate objects. 

In the Nominative Singular: 

1) Xouns ending in 'u' undergo no change before 
the suffixes. 

2) Xouns ending in o generally shorten the same to 
V; but o may also keep its place before the 
suffixes. 

3) Masc. nouns ending in i change the same for 
euphony's sake either to yu or to ya. 

4) Fern, nouns ending in i change the same either 
to ya or shorten it to 'i'. 

5) Xouns ending in 'e' (i) remain unaltered before 
the suffixes. 

In the Formative Singular the suffixes accede 
to the final voAvel without any further change, with the 
exception of nouns ending in o. the Formative Singular 
of which terminates before suffixes in a, and not in e. 

In the Xominative Plural a final lono; vowel is 
shortened respectively and final nasal n dropped before 
the suffixes; but final i of masc. nouns is changed to 
ya, as in the Xom. Sing. 

In the Formative Plural the suffixes accede to 
the termination ne without anv further chano-e. 

Xouns ending ui u (u) and a are hardly ever found 
with suffixes: of nouns ending in 'a' there are some in- 
stances, but they are very rare, and only found in poetry. 
On the whole the suffixes are for the most part attached 

P2 



228 SECTION H. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

to nouns ending in 'u' and o, far less to those ending in 
1 (masc. and fern.) and 'e'. 

The way, in which the suffixes are attached to nouns, 
may best be learnt from the following examples. 

1) ISTouns ending in u (masc.) 

Nom. Sing. Jvxj nenu, eye; Format. JwO nena. 

Nominative. 

I pers. jU-o nenume, my eye. 

i> * 
Sing. < II pers. .J^ nenue, thy eye. 

m pers. ij/^-UJ nenuse, his eye. 
Formative. 
I pers. jU-o nename; |V.^i-o nenahime. 

Sing. < II pers. «Lo 

in pers. (ji*AAJ nenase; ^j»Jj^j^ 
Nominative. 

^ 9 

n pers. "yj^ nenuva, your eye. 



nenae; ^aj nenahe. 

nenahise. 



Plur. 



Plur. 



Sing. 



TIT pers. jji^j nenune, their eye. 

Formative. 
n pers. ^Iaj nenava; y«^Lo nenahiva. 

Ill pers. jjuLo nenane; ^^A-o nenahine 
Nom. Plur. J^x3 nena; Form. ^^^«Lo 

I pers. (U-o nename , my eyes, 
nena-e, thy eyes 



n pers. 



Ill pers. y^ijo nenase, his eyes. 



nenane. 
Formative. 
nenanime. 



r^^ 



^^aLu nenani. 
^j»jJ^ nenanise. 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



229 



Plur. 



Formative, 
y-xLJi nenaniva. 



O^^ 



nenanine. 



Nominative. 
n pers. ^vo nenava, your eyes. 

HE pers. ^jXfJi nenane, their eyes. 

In the Formative Sing, there is instead of the suffix 

me, the form hime also in use, as: a^I-o nenahime; and 

instead of se we find likewise the form hise, as: u^-^^ijo 

nenahise. In the Format. Plur. the suffix of the 11 pers. 
e is generally contracted with the final e of the ter- 
mination ne to e (e) or even i, or he is affixed, to 

avoid a hiatus, as: ^JJ^ nenane, ^^^i;^j nenani or: 



^, 



--f-^A-y 



nenanehe. 



In poetry final 'u^ is frequently lengthened again 
to o before the suffixes; but final 'a' may also be likewise 

lengthened, if required by the metre, as: ^U-o nenana, 

instead of ^j-l-o nenana. 

Some nouns of this class, which do not change final 
'u' in the Formative Singular, are somewhat irregular 
in attaching the suffixes. These are: ^Jj piu, father, 

i\^ bhau, brother, iLi mau, mother, ^^t> dhiu, daughter, 

f 9 

^ nuhu, daughter-in-law. 

^^ piu, father. 
" SINGULAR. 
Nomin. and Format.: ^^ piu.g 

I pers. jv^^ piume; f»Lo piame; (V^l? pinhame; 

*-§-b pinhime, my father. 



Sing. 



s>i> 



n pers. ^^ piu-e; sL-o piae; ^^^Ij pinhe, thy 
father. 



I ;. 



m pers. j/^^ piuse; ,j>-LL piase; (j^ii pinhase. 



his father. 



130 



Plur. 



Nomin. 



Sing. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

II pers. ^j piuva; ^Lj piava; ^i^j pinhava, 

your father. 
m pers. ^j^j piuna; ,^4-^. pinhune, their father. 

PLURAL. 

wu piura; J^ormat. ^^aj piurane or: ,j^j piune. 
Nominative. Formative. 

1 pers. |*^Aj piurame, i*^r^- piuranime. 

my fathers; li*^. pi^^i^^ie. 

II pers. ^f'vAJ piura-e, thy fathers; ^Aaj piunl. 

in pers. j^lo piurase, his fathers; jj^aj piunise. 



Plur. 



m 



pers. ^ Iaj piurava , your fathers ; ^Aaj piuniva. 
pers. ^wAj piurana, their fathers ; ^j-aL piunine. 



^L^j bhau, brother. 

SINGULAR. 

Nominative and Formative iL^j bhau. 



Sing. 



^. - 



I pers. (vjL-^j bhaume; (♦L^ bhame; ,^14^ bha- 

name, J>1^ bhanime, my brother. 
II pers. sL^j bha-e; ^il^ bhane, thy brother. 

ni pers. (j^L^j bhase; u^L.^ bhanuse, his brother. 



Plur. 



--i, ^ 



II pers. ^^14^ bhauva, ;-jL^ bhanuva, your 
brother. 

Ill pers. ^JoL4? blmuna, their brother. 



SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 231 

PLURAL. 
Nomin.: yjL.^j bhaura; Format.: jj>jI^ bhaurane or: 

^L^ bliaune. '^ 
Nominative. - Formative. 

I pers. (•vjL-g"? bhaurame, I |VJ>.j1^j bhauranime. 

my brothers. [ ^^^ bhaunime. 

etc. etc. 

^U man, mother. 
SINGULAR. 
Nominative and Formative: ^Lx» man. 
I pers. *.jL;o maume; (♦L mame; j%-g.iU manhime, 
my mother. 
Sing. \ n pers. &U mae; ^iU mane, thy mother. 

in pers. (j^Li mause; j^Lx) mase; ,jjgoLo manuse; 
jjj^JLo manise, his mother. 

In pers. ^Lx) mava; ^Li manuva, your mother. 
Ill pers. ^U mane; ^Li manune, their mother. 

PLURAL. 

Nomin.: laU maura; Format.: ,joLo maune. 

Nominative. Formative. 

I pers. (•^L^ maurame, my mothers; jU^L^ maunime. 

etc. etc. 

^^4> dhiu, daughter. 

SINGULAR. 

Nomin. and Format, ^o dhiu (Ji?i> dhia). 

Sing. I pers. ^si^o dhiume; ^Iss^o dhiame; *aa^j> dhi- 
name; ^j^^ dhinime, my daughter. 



232 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



Sing. < 



II pers. (5A^4> dhiya-e; ^'U^t> dhme, thy daughter. 

in pers. (jj*aj54> dhiuse, ^jt*j^i^ dhiase; u^L^i> dhi- 
nuse, his daughter. 
PLURAL. 
Nomin.: wc»t> dhiaru; Format.: ^^)^4> dhiune. 
Nominative, Formative. 

pers. f»vA^4> dhiarume, my daughters. ^s^c> dhiunime. 
etc. etc. 

^ nuhu (or: ^3), daughter-in-law. 

SINGULAR. 

Nominative and Formative: ^ nuhu. 

I pers. ^ nuhume; ^ nuhame; J^ nuhi- 
name; jU^ nuhinime, my daughter- 
in-law. 

gj nuhu-e; ^^i nuhe; ^i^ nuhine, 
thy daughter-in-law. 
pers. (j/^j nuhuse; ^j*^ nuhase; jj^^i nu- 
^ hinise, his daughter-in-law. 

II pers. ^4^ nuhuva, your daughter-in-law. 

Plur. "jni pers. ^j4^ nuhune; ^j..^ nuhane, their 

[ daughter-in-law. 

PLURAL. 

Nomin.: y^ nuharu; Format.: ,j^ nuhane. 

Nominative. Formative. 

I pers. j»l^ nuharume, jU^ nuhunime. 

my daughters-in-law. 
etc. etc. 



Sing. 



n pers. ^^ nuhu 



m 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 233 

A noun with suffixes may be followed by post- 
positions; in this case the suffixes are added to the 
Formative of a noun. 

The people said to his mother: ask him thyself. 
Maj. 42. 

.. \ ^ '- " I -' ^ 

May that thy son fall into the forest (i. e. away 
with that thy son) , who will cut off my brother's head. 
Story of Eae Diacu p. 1. 

O mother, away with thy house (literally: to the well 
with thy house); away from me goes the little caravan. 
Sh. Hus. n, 7. 

ij^Ui ^yJ ^ LI ^t)^Li ^Li (^j^j ^-^^ 

By no perplexity was Suhini kept back; in the stream 

was her devotion; 
From which poor (woman) such a one was born, that 

her mother may well boast: 
If thou seest her father, thou mayst also love him a 

little. Sh. Suh. m, 13. 

Thy mother and thy brothers are standing outside. 
Matth. 12, 47. 

His mother and his brothers, standing outside, wished 
to speak to him. Matth. 12, 46. 



234 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

U^:?^ (5;^-^; (5^^ -^''-^ (j^ \J^} 
^LL^f j-xXir ^pL5? ^^5 ^-u:^ ^.15 ^LS 

-'I "I ^ ^ 

When I sit in silence, having forgotten their abuses, 
Then my heart goes like sand, moaning after them. 
Maj. 679, 680. 

To-day there is no talk (iL^iLr) of theirs; they are 
the whole day in the hut. Sh. Mum. Eeno V, 12. 

2) Nouns ending in 5. 
Nouns ending in do not differ essentially from 
those in 'u', as regards the annexion of the suffixes; 
they generally shorten final o to 'u', but they may also 
retain the same in the Nom. Sing., which is frequently 
the case in poetry. The Formative Sing, always ter- 
minates in 'a', not in e, when followed by suffixes. In 
the Nomin. Plural final a may be hkewise preserved be- 
fore suffixes, instead of being shortened to V. 

^^fi matho, head. 
SINGULAR. 

Nom. : j^^joo matho ; Form. : ^.^ mathe = j^^ matha. 

Nominative. Formative. 

I pers. ^xJo mathume , I ^.^^^ ^) mathame ; 

my head; [*™g.4-^i^ mathahime. 

n pers. ^^4^^) mathu-e, I ^^^^ matha-e; 

thy head; U-^4-^ mathahe. 

m pers. ij^x^ mathuse, [u^^^ mathase; 

his head; | ^_;Jl.^;oo mathahise. 



Sing. 



1) In Siro the people very commonly substitute 'i' instead of 'a' 
in the Formative Sing, as: iv^axj mathime etc. 

2) In poetry the long vowels may be retained, as: s=^-^^ ma- 
tho-e, ^\.^Xjq matha-na. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



235 



Plur. 



II pers. ^4ax> your head; 

mathuva, 
III pers. ^^4-^ their head 
mathune , 



o — -- 



PLURAL. 
Nomin.: Lgjci matha; Format. 
Nominative. 
I pers. J^£o mathame, 
my heads; 

Sing. ] ^^ P^^^* i^ matha-e, 
thy heads; 
III pers. (j*J^ mathase, 
his heads. 



matha va; mathahiva. 
mathane ; mathahane. 



^jj^ mathane. 

Formative, 
jvA^^ mathanime, 

^x^jijo mathani; 
^4^^ mathanihe. 
^juJL^ mathanise. 



Plur. \ 



II pers. "y^ mathava, ^fi^ mathaniva. 

your heads. 
in pers. jj^x) mathane, ^^^^ mathanine. 
their heads. 



^^b 3jjLp.5" j^i Jl^^ ^A.|j| ^ 

Who art thou, whence comest thou, what is thy name? 
Maj. 167. 

Where the sight of the Lord is, there are their 

abodes. 
These are their tokens: concealed they wander about 
in the world. Sh. Ramak. II, 9. 



236 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



3) Nouns ending in i (masc.) 

Nouns ending in i (m.) generally change tlie same 
to ya, far less to yu, before the accession of the suf- 
fixes; in the Formative Sing, e must always be changed 
to ya. The same is the case in the Nom. Plur., so that 
only the context can decide, whether a noun is put in 
the Nominative or Formative Sing, or in the Nominative 
Plural. 

In poetry a final short vowel may be lengthened 

before a suffix, as: ^l^lio dhanyase, instead of: y^Joit) 

dhanyase. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom.: (^a54> dhani, master; Form.: ^^Xic> dhanya. 
Nominative. Formative. 

I(vlii4> dhanyame, ^,^^ dhanyame. 
jvli^4> dhanyume, my master. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



n pers. 



in pers. 



II pers. 



ni pers. 



^/J^i> dhanya-e, 

tli^t> dhanyu-e, 
thy master. 

^j.Joi^ dhanyase. 



^^Ja5t> dhanya-e. 
j^j^'^ dhanyahe. 

\j^^j^c> dhanyase. 



va. 



(jrfJait> dhanyuse, his master. 

^Iit> dhanyava, ^lii^ dhanya 
^^4^ dhanyuva, 
your master. 

^jlXio dhanyane, ^ji^^^ dhanyane. 

jj^iio dhanyune, 
their master. 



Norn, 



Sing. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 237 

PLURAL. 
^^I^j> dhani; Format.; ^j^^'^ dhanyune. 
Nominative. Formative. 

I pers. ^^i> dhanyame, *Ali54> dhanyui 

my masters. 
n pers. ^^Ai^i> dlianya-e, 
tliy masters. 



mime. 



^-}lsJSiC> dhanyuni. 
^j^k^licf dhanyunehe, 
m pers. uw.lL»t> dhanyase, ^j*jj^ii> dhanyunise. 



his masters. 



n 



pers. ^y^i> dhanyava, 'yk^i:> dhanyuni va. 
PI I your masters. 

m pers. ^j^ic> dhanyane, ^jMUxii> dhanyunine. 
their masters. 

;^. (5t ?%• ^ ^^l 'Piy^-y 

There is constantly in my body the talk of my 
friend. Sh. Suh. lY, 7. 

O my master, do not make apart (thy) quarter from 
those friends. Sh. Barvo HI, 5. 

Because her steersman is sturdy, therefore she floats 
facing the current. Sh. Surag. m, 6. 

4) J^ouns ending in i (fem.) 

Nouns ending in i (fem.) either shorten final i to 
'i' before the suffixes or change it to ya; the latter is 
always the case with adjectives and participles ending 
in 1. The termination of the l!^omin. Plur. u is shortened 
to V and the final nasal dropped before the suffixes. 



238 SECTION H. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

SINGULAR. 
Nom.: ^jlj bai, lady; Format.: ^IJ ba-ia. 



Sing. 



Nominative. Formative. 

[VjLj baime, ^jLI bayame. 

*.jLj bayame, my lady. 

^Lj baya-e. 
j^LJ baya-e, thy lady. 

u*4Lj baise, u^LS bayase. 

(j^G bayase, his lady. 



I pers. 



^LS baye, 
n pers.<! " ' 



m pers. 



Plur. 



m pers. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



nlSLj baiva, IjLS bayava. 

pers.<'- '. _ ' T- : '^ 

[^SU bayava, your lady. 
^SU baine, ^\^ bayane. 

^jjLj bayane, their lady. 

PLURAL. 

Nom.: jj^jLj bayu; Format: ^ILj bayune. 

Nominative. Formative. 

I pers. |4^ bayume, 
my ladies. 

II pers. ^jG bayu-e, 
thy ladies. 

m pers. ^j^lj bayuse, 
his ladies. 

n pers. ^jLj bayuva, 
your ladies. 

m pers. ^C bayune, 
their ladies. 



jvajG bayunime. 
^^Lj bayuni. 
^^ajLj bayunise. 

^ajG bayuniva. 
^ajLj bayunine. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



239 



In poetry final i is occasionally not changed to ya, 
but simply to 'a', as: 

t • '■* " I 

if there is any power of mine, it is that. Sh. Ked. lY, 9. 
^-g.>o puphi, a father's sister, has, besides the re- 
gular forms, also fU-fo xmphiname or: (*1^^, puphinime. 

Like the moon on the fourteenth of the month was 
his turban in the plain. Sh. Ked. Y, 1. 

ISTot by any messenger have they been asked; inside 
is their grief. Sh. Eamak. YI, 4. 

5) Nouns ending in e (fem.) 

Nouns ending in e remain either unaltered before 
suffixes or change final e (i) to ya, as well in the No- 
minative as in the Formative Sino^ilar. 

SINGULAR. 

JSTom.: ^y-^ chokare, girl; Format.: ^y^- 

No7nmative. Formative, 

^Sy^ chokarime, thy girl; the same. $ 

j»Il5j^> chokaryame. 

^Jj.4jN chokare, thy girl; the same. 
^jlSl^ chokarya-e. 
^IS'i^^ chokaryahe. 

(j^Jj-^ chokarise, his girl; the same. 
j^Jj-^ chdkaryase. 



Sing. 



I pers. 



II pers. 



ni pers. 



240 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



Plur 



II pers. 



m pers. 



yy^}^s^ chokariva, your girl; the same. 

J.jl5j.49^ chokaryava. 

^w5j.^ ch5karine, their girl; the same. 

jj^ Jj-^ chokaryane. 

PLURAL. 
Nom.: ^jy,yS^^ chokaryu; Form.: ^Jj.^ chokarine. 

Nominative. Formative. 

I pers. ^l5j.^ chokaryume, ^jSj^s> 

my girls. chokarinime 

Sing. ! ^^ P^^^- i^;^«^ ch5karyu-e, isi/r^ 

thy girls. chokarini 

III pers. (j^v^j-^ chokaryuse, ^j^^^j..^ 

his girls. chokarinise. 



Plur. 



n pers. ^/Jj.^ ch5karyuva, ^^yfy^ 

your girls. chokariniva 

in pers. ^/Sy^i^ chokaryune, ^^yfy^ 

their girls. chokarinine. 

The substantive noun ej.:^ joe or &j\ zoe, wife, 
presents, when joined by suffixes, some irregularities, as: 

SINGULAR. 

Nominative. Formative. 

A-jj.:?. joime, my wife. 



Sing. I pers. < 



^;y=^ joyame; 

(^j.s. joname ; *-gij^ jonhame ; 
jjj.^ jonime; ^}=^ jonhime; 



The same. 



Sing. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 241 

Nominative. Formative, 

^^^}^ joe, ^^j^ j5ye, thy wife. 

II pers.<j^^ joya-e. i The same. 

C5^>r- jone, ^>=- jonhe. 



m pers. 



^y^ joise, ^j^^j:^ joyase, 
his wife. 
(jj^s^ jonase ; jj^*.^ j^ jonhase. 



The same. 



Plur. 



II pers. 



^j.:^ joiva, ^^^ joyava, | 

your wife. [The same. 

y^y^ jonava, ^}^ jonhava.i 



m pers. 



^jo^::. jome, ^j^:^ joyane, 
their wife. >The same, 

^jj^ jonane, ,^.^3.^^ jonhane. 

PLURAL. 

Nominative. Formative. 

1 pers. (4j.^ joyume, my wifes. [Vaj^^ joyunime. 
etc. etc. 

When he was seated on the judgement seat, his 
wife sent him word. Matth. 27, 19. 



The other nouns, ending in u, a, V are generally 
not used with suffixes, though occasionally one or another 
is found with a suffix; in this case final u is changed 
to u' in the Nominative, and in the Formative to ua, 
whereas a and V keep their place before suffixes. 

Trump p, SindM-Grammar. Q 



242 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



^^ydS '^d^i^ J^A Law (^^jI^L^^ I^ ^^ 

Whatever their lifetime is, it has been spent in sorrow. 
Sh. Eamak. Ill, 4. 



§. 41. 

11. PRONOMmAL SUFFIXES 

attached to Postpositions and Adverbs, 

The rules, according to which pronominal suffixes 
are attached to nouns, are also applicable in reference 
to postpositions and adverbs. Any pronominal suffix may 
be joined with a postposition, but with most of them 
only the suffix of the third person Singular and Plural 
is in use. It is however quite optional in Sindhi, either 
to subjoin a pronominal suffix to a postposition, or to 
put the absolute pronoun before it in the Formative, 
with or without the Genitive case -sign ^^, as: ^^'^ 

vatise, with him, or: ^^ ^^ huna vate. 

1) The postposition jtXll sando. 

jcXlIw sando is originally not a postposition, but an 
adjective, and therefore declinable, as well as j^, the 
Grenitive case-sign, for which it is very frequently sub- 
stituted (see §. 18). It corresponds to the Panjabi 
sanda, being (Sansk. part. pres. ^rff = ^?^) and sig- 
nifies therefore: 'belonging to'. It is now used as a 
regular postposition, chiefly in connexion with suffixes, 
before such nouns, to which suffixes are not attached, 
either for the sake of the final vowel, or for per- 
spicuity's sake, or, as in poetry, for the sake of the 
metre. 



1) Short 'a' may be lengthened to a in poetry for the sake of 
the rhyme. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



243 



SINGULAR. 
Masc. jjJ^ sando. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



Nom.: jjdl sand5. 

I pers. ^jJll sandume, my. 

n pers. fetXll sandu-e, thy. 
HE pers. j^jJl sanduse, his. 

I pers. ^^tXll sandu, our. 

n pers. jlUaw sanduva, your. 

m pers. j^JuLw sandune, their. 



Form.: jdl sanda. 

I»ja.l saiQdame. 

fetXLl sanda-e. 
j^tXLl sandase. 

^yjcUv sanda-u. 
^jo^ sanda va. 

jjjalw sandane. 



Sing. 



PLURAL. 
Nom.: ijdiL sanda. Form.: ^^jdL sandane, 

I pers. ^OjJL sandame, my. 
n pers. &iXlL sanda-e, thy. 
m pers. j^tXH sandase, his. 



|W4XIaL sandanime. 
^jdl; sandani. 
^tXll sandanise. 



Plur. 



£>" 



I pers. ^^JcUw sanda-u, our. 
n pers. ^iXlL sandava, your. 
m pers. ^JolI sandane, their. 



^^tXll sandineu. 
^iXll sandiniva. 
^tXliL sandanine. 



It has been stated already (see: nouns ending in o, 
§. 40, 2) that o and a may also be preserved before the 

suffixes, as: |*jjdiL sandome, j^lJs-Ll sandase etc. 



Q2 



244 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 



Sing. 



Fern.: ^^^xH sandi. 

SINGULAR. 

Nominative. 

I pers. j^JcXl*! sandyame, my. 

II pers. ^^iXl^ sandya-e, thy. 

ni pers. (j^jJll sandyase, his. 



Formative, 
The same. 



Plur. 



i- 



I pers. ^^JoLw sandy ati, our. 
II pers. ^.tXlIw sandyava, your. 
in pers. jjJtXl.^ sandyane, their. 



Sing. 



Plur.<^ 



PLURAL. 
I pers. f^jd-1 sandyume, my. 

n pers. ^^tXll sandyu-e, thy. 

ni pers. ^tXll sandyuse, his. 

I pers. (not in use). 
II pers. ^JtXLl sandyuva, your. 

m pers. jjotXLlsandyune, their. 



(UJtXll sandy unime. 
^AJiXl^ sandy um. 
^^jtXH sandy unise. 

(not in use). 
^AjJoL-l sandyuniva. 

^jjj>i\lL sandyunine. 



The Plural of jjol is very little in use, jJJaw 
preceding a noun in the Plural generally in the Singular. 

A^tXAAA/ v:^^ ^^v£i.Lww ^:s>' ,^^^».^«*jo .-.^ajLww (c:?^^ 

Even that is my native country, where my sweet- 
heart is. Maj. 86. 

Thy government, o Sumaro! has been reconciled to 
the Lord. Sh. Um. Marui VI, Epil. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 245 

&^iXXjM (^-w i^-f^ ^^-6^ ^^^7t^ f^y^')^^ 

The people (and) whosoever are thy relatives, will 
give thee reproaches. Maj. 292. 

The women have on the head two plaits, 

The men have on the heads hair: 

In the hands sticks, 

On the heads plaits: 

These are their habits. Yerses of the Mamuis. 

The garden (of Eden) is their place; the noble ones 
have gone to Paradise. Sh. Ked. IV, 5. 

In poetry jjulw is now and then used without suf- 
fixes, which must then be supplied from the context: 

^^v-wwt> jjiltS liXLww i^y^ ^-gA.n.' /-jL^tXi 

The worthy ones, says Latif, see his gifts. Sh. Sor. 



I, 14. 








2) Postpositions ending in 'u'. 




^IL sanu, with. 




SING. 


PLUR. 


I pers. 


jjLIl; sanume, with me. 


^yj^\^ sanuhu, with us. 


n pers. 


^iLl sanu-e, with thee. 


^iLw sanuva, with you,. 


ni pers. 


j^LL sanuse, with him. 


^L^ sanune, with them. 



246 SECTION U. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

In the same way the suffixes are attached to jj>aaw 

I 
senu, with. In the third person Plural we meet often 

in poetry the form ^IXj^ senana or ^LLu« senane, in- 

' _ ' '' ' 

stead of ,j«Lu« senune. 



> ^ 



^L^ 5^4^. '^ ^ ^j^ jj^' -^^^ 4S^^ u^ u^ 

As long as there is a breath with thee, compare 
none with Punhu. Sh. Ma^B. Y, 5. 

My soul is gone with them, o mother! how shall 
I sit in Bhamboru? Sh. Hus. XI, Epil. 

3) Postpositions ending in e or e (e). 

^ kane or ^ kane, near, with, to. 

SING. 
I pers. *.a5^ kanime, to me. 

n pers. xf kane , to thee. 

in pers. u^5^ kanise , to him. 



PLUR. 
^jyj^S kaneu, to us. 



^ kaniva, to you. 
^j^ kanine, to them. 



About the derivation of ^ see §. 16, 4. 

Other postpositions of this kind are : *> gare , to ; 
v£)5 vate, near, with; ^4^^ manjhe, in; ^-gJuic hethe, 
below etc. Before the suffix of the third person Sing, 
final i (e) is often lengthened to i, as: u^-^'j vatise, 
near him, and before the suffix of the third person Plur. 
to 1, as: ^j^x^jsxx) manjhina, in them. 



SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 247 



In one palace there are laklis of doors, in thousands 
are to it windows. Sh. Kal. I, 23. 



If we are beaten by them, even then it is our ad- 
vantage. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 64. 

jj^ feLitXij J^ixj ^^ ^If L^ \i 

Whatever be the matter with thee, o Bijalu, let me 
hear that. Sh. Sor. 11, 17. 

Do not unbosom thyself to them; weeping do not 
make it public. Sh. Ripa I, 8. 

His disciples came unto him. Matth. 5, 1. 

Postpositions and adverbs ending in e are treated 
differently; they either retain e before the suffixes or 
they shorten it to e (i); thus the postposition ^-^ khe, 

the case -sign of the Dative or Accusative, retains its 
final e before the suffixes, as: ^j^j^ khese, to him (her, 

it), ^^.^4^ khene or ^J*A^ khena, to them, whereas ^\ 

ute, upon, shortens final e to e (i) as: (jjuol utise, upon 

him (her, it) or: (j^^jI utehise; ^s\ utine, upon them 

or: (jM^ol utehine. Others again vary, as: ^^xxj mathe, 

upon (properly the Locative of j.^^^ math5, the head), 

-4^ matha-e, upon thee (the Formative of j-g-Xo), but 

jj^j^jo mathise, upon him (being" properly the Locative 

of .4^, the top). 



248 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 

..^Jl/JO Lua/» ic-^^ ^Uo .L^ yMXjOyS>' 

During the rainy season, four months, rains have 
fallen upon thee. Maj. 646. 

There is no reproach upon it; if thou wilt ask any 
thing, ask it. Sh. Khambh. I, 10. 

To the postposition ^j^ me (in) the suffixes are 
attached in the following manner: u^^lfjo mese, in him 

(her, it) or: j-^lo maise (in Siro); ^^Ili mainu, in us; 
,j-yo mene or ^^^ mena (in Sir5: ^jjyo maina) in them. 

4) Postpositions ending in a, a, au, 6. 
Those, which terminate in a, remain unaltered be- 
fore a suffix, as: eLLy^) to thee, (y-Ui^ kenase, to him, 

jjLL5^ kenane, to them. Similarly jjL^ kha, from, as: 

U^14^ khase, from him, ^jL^ khane, from them (the 

final nasal being dropped before a following dental n); 

^jL^ matha, from upon (properly the Ablative of j.^xxi 

matho, the head), ^L^ mathae, from upon thee, (j^jL^jc;© 

mathase, from upon him; yj^Lx^iLj puthiase, from behind 

him, after him (properly the Ablat. of ^j puthe, the back). 

Before the suffix of the third person Plural a eu- 
phonic 'i' is occasionally inserted, especially in poetry, 

as: ^j^L^:di manjhaine, instead of: ^L.^.:doo manjhane, 

out of them. 

Those ending in au, au, au (termination of the Ablat. 
Sing.) remain likewise unchanged before suffixes, the final 

1) This postposition or adverb is never found without suffixes. 



SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 249 

nasal only being dropped before them, as: u^^jol^^ nia- 
thause, from upon it, ^Li^ mathauva, from upon you; 
U^juuL^ khause, from it, ,^jl^ khaune, from them. 

Those ending in o change it to a before suffixes, 
as: u^LI puase, behind him (from ^jIj puo). 

I .. •♦<. .. I -^ .. I .. I 

Then the mother asked Majno: what (matter) has 
happened to thee? Maj. 44. 

My limbs melt, no languor befalls them. Sh. Kha- 
h5ri, Epil. I. 

I sacrifice myself for thee; thus he spoke. [MaJ. 755. 

That whole state becomes known out of them. Sh. 
Kal. I, 17. 

^ ^ - ..I 

Then that, which is ^ain, becomes ^ain, if thou re- 
move from it the dot. Sh. Kal. I, 21. 

This head is ready ; o bridegroom , for you I sacrifice 
it. Sh. Ked. lY, 8. ^ 

Such days will come, that the bridegroom will be 
taken from them. Matth. 9, 15. 



250 SECTION III. THE VERB. 



SECTION III. 
THE VERB. 

- The great deterioration, the modern Indian lan- 
guages have undergone, is nowhere more apparent, than 
in their conjugational process. They have lost nearly- 
all the Sanskrit tenses, especially those of the Past, which 
were too intricate for the conception of the vulgar, and 
have therefore been compelled to have recourse to com- 
positions, in order to make up for the lost tenses* They 
differ very greatly as to the method, which they have 
followed in this respect, every one of them exhibiting 
some peculiar features, which are not to be met with 
in the other idioms. 

Chapter XIL 

Formation of the verbal themes, the Imperative and the Participles. 

§. 42. 
Formation of the verbal themes. 

I. We have seen already (§. 7, 2) that the In- 
finitive of the Sindhi verbs, terminating in anu, cor- 
responds to the verbal noun of the Sanskrit and Prakrit. 
The root of the Sindhi verb is therefore not to be sought 
in the Infinitive, but in the Imperative, which ex- 
hibits the crude form of the verb without an additional 
increment, except that of the final vowel, which is 
no part of the verbal root. 

Properly speaking there is only one class of verbs 
in Sindhi, as all verbs, with a slight difference, are in- 
flected alike. There are therefore no different con- 
jugations, as in Sanskrit, but the same rules of in- 
flection apply equally to all verbs. 



1 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 251 

In some tenses though there is a marked difference 
between neuter and active verbs, and we may there- 
fore, for practical purposes, divide the Sindhi verbs into 
neuter and active ones. 

1) The neuter or intransitive verb ends in the 
Infinitive in anu and in the Imperative in V, as: 

^JUd hal-anu, to go, Imper. Jki hal-u, go. 

J^r^ var-anu, to return, „ ^^ var-u, return. 

But in derivative verbs, where the termination 

of the Infinitive is preceded by a, the Infinitive ends, 
for euphony's sake, in inu, as: 

^jCI^ kara-inu, to be blackish, Imper. i.\\^ kara-u. 

When the verbal root ends in short 'a' or 'i', a eu- 
phonic V is inserted between it and the increment of 
the Infinitive, as: 

^j^j pa-v-anu, to fall, Imper. ^ pa-u. 

^'^ ni-v-anu, to bow, „ yj ni-u. 

2) The active or transitive verb ends in the In- 
finitive likewise in anu (in Sir5 commonly in inu), and 
in the Imperative in 'e' (and partly in \i'), as: 

j^jJL^ jhal-anu, to seize, Imper. ^y^ jhal-e. 
^y^, phur-anu, to plunder, „ w^j phur-e. 

But when the increment of the Infinitive is pre- 
ceded by 'a', a and o, the Infinitive ends, for euphony's 
sake, in inu^), as: 

^^^ ma-inu, to measure, Imper. -i ma-e. 

^L^JLr galha-inu, to speak, „ &l^ilf galha-e. 
^ji63 dho-inu, to carry, „ &^3 dho-e. 



1) Some Sindhis, especially the Musalmans, write aud pronounce 
instead of ainu : a-anu or contracted: anu. 



252 SECTION m. THE VERB. 

If a verbal root (active or neuter) end in i and u, 
these vowels are respectively shortened before the in- 
crement of the Infinitive, as: 

0^^ pi-anu, to drink, Imper. ^^ pi-u. 

jjtj pu-anu, to string beads, „ i^ pu-u. 

In some instances radical o is likewise shortened 
to 'u' in the Infinitive, as: 

^yi^ dhu-anu, to wash, Imper. ijjcj dh5-u. 

^^j ru-anu, to weep, „ j^ ro. 

A number of Sindhi verbs have a different form 
when used in a neuter or active sense, but it would be 
wrong to say, that such neuter verbs are changed into 
an active form; they recur to a different Sanskrit form, 
from which they are derived and must therefore be con- 
sidered as independent verbs. 

The most common of these are: 

Neuter. Active. 

^L§^l ujhamanu, to be extin- ,j;4^^^ ujhainu. 
guished. 

^tol udamanu, to fly e>?^^i udainu. 

J^4^ bajhanu, to be bound ^^i^ bandhanu. 

^^.^' bujhanu, to be heard ^iiXXj bundhanu. 

J>.sx^ bhajanu, to be broken . . . ^.^^ bhananu. 
J^.i^ bhujanu, to be fried .... ^^^.sL^ bhunanu. 

JjJL^j phatanu, to be torn u;^ pharanu. 

^h J^panu, ^^ ^^ ^^^^ i^ Jananu. 

J^ Jamanu, J 

J^.1^ chupanu, to be touched . . . ^^.^a* chuhanu. 

^j^^s^^ chijanu, to be plucked. . . ^^-^ chinanu. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



253 



Neuter. 
^,yS^i^ dhopanu, to be washed . 
0^3 dubhanu, to be milked. . 
,^4^i dajhanu, to be envious . 
^^y^ssi'S dhrapanu, to be satiated 

^^4t*J rajbanu, to be boiled 
^h^ rahanu, to remain . . . 
0^ sujanu, to be heard. . . 
^2S kusanu, to be killed. . 
(j^L^ khajanu, to be eaten 
J^^oL^ khamanu, to burn . . 

^^\y^^ khajanu, to be raised 

JjiJ^ gasanu, to be abraded. 

J^ labanu, to be reaped . . 

Jj4^ labhanu, to be obtained 

,j^^ lusanu, to be scorched . 

,:oUo mapanu, I, i . • 

Y3 ^ -^ • ' y to be contame( 

Jj^Lo mamanu, J 

^^jj^ musanu, to have ill luck . 

^^^ visamanu, to be extinguished 

jj^l^. vikamanu, 

, > ^ „ * > to be sold . . . 

^^ vikanu, 

J^LS^ vehamanu, to be passed. . 

hapamanu, to be lessened 

J yabhanu, to be copulated . 



Active- 
^y^^ dhuanu. 
J^i duhanu. 
(j^j dahanu. 

dhra-inu 

,j^Jo^ randhanu. 
^^^s rakhanu. 
^\yj^ sunanu. 
0^^ kuhanu. 
^L^ khainu. 
(j^Lgi^ khainu. 

^xyXj^ khananu. 
jj^^ gahanu. 
jjPJ lunanu. 
^\y^ lahanu. 
^yi luhanu. 



Lh? 



Uo mainu. 






muhanu. 



visamu. 



^; 



vikinanu. 



^Li« vehainu. 
^^Lxi hapainu. 
J^ yahanu. 



254 SECTION lU. THE VERB. 

n. Almost from every neuter or active verb a Causal 
may be derived. Those causals, which have sprung from 
a neuter verb, are, as regards their signification, active, 
whereas those, which are derived from an active verb, 
are doubly active. 

The Causal is derived by adding to the root of a 
verb the long vowel a, to which the increment of the 
Infinitive accedes as usual; e. g.: 

J;.^!. vircanu, v. n., to be tired; causal: ^IL^^ vir- 
c-a-inu, to cause to be tired or to tire. 

J^S dasanu, v. a., to show; causal: ,^Lli dasa-inu, 
to cause to show. 

fl^ysaS dhoinu, v. a., to carry, causal: ^Ij^sn^ dho- 

a-inu, to cause to carry. 
But when the verb ends in radical 'a', euphonic v 
is inserted between the final root-vowel and the causal 
increment, as: 

J^io ma-inn, v. a., to measure; causal: ^^ys ma-v-a- 
inu, to cause to measure. 

Exceptions to this rule: 
a) When a verb ends in radical r, r, rh, h, pre- 
ceded by a short 'a', the causal increment may be in- 
serted in the root itself, coalescing with the short radical 
V to a, as: 

j^lj baranu, v. n., to burn; cans.: ,j^\S baranu, to 

kindle. 
^^ garanu, v. n., to drop; cans, '^"jlf garanu, to 

cause to drop. 
J^i-j.j parhanu, v. a., to read; cans.: ^^S\^ parhanu, 

to cause to read, to teach. 

Jj4? gahanu, v. n., to work hard; cans.: ^\^ ga- 
hanu, to make work hard. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 255 

In a number of verbs, the final r (r) of which is 
preceded by the vowel 'i', a is inserted before the final 
radical and T dropped, as: 

J^l^ajJu sudhiranu, v. n., to be arranged; cans.: ^jjLitX^ 

sudharanu, to arrange. 
jjl^. visiranu, v. n., to be forgotten; cans.; ^^X^^ vi- 

saranu, to forget. 
^TJo^ kindiranu, v. n., to be spread; cans.: ^71 Ju^ 

khindaranu, to spread. 
^•^^1 ujiranu, v. n., to be waste; cans.: ^j'jL^f uja- 

ranu, to lay waste, 
etc. etc. 

But the regular mode of forming the causal is also 
in use, as: 

J^jl aranu, v. n., to be caught; cans.: J^jKM ara-inu, 

to entangle. 
'^JS taranu, v. a., to fry; cans.: J;»jt^* tara-inu, to 

cause to fry. 
^^'C parhanu, v. a., to read; cans.: ^{sn'-C parha- 

inu, to cause to read. 
^jJ^^ sambahanu, v. n., to be ready; cans.: ^^jL^IlI 

sambaha-inu, to get ready. 

h) When final r or r of a verbal root be preceded 
by the short vowels 'i' or 'u', the causal increment a 
coalesces with them to e and o respectively, as: 

J^l^j phiranu, v. n., to turn; cans.: ^y>^j> pheranu, 

to cause to turn. 
^^iyj^ khindiranu, v. n., to be spread; cans.: ^i^ljfXj^ 

khinderanu, to spread (besides ^JlJ.*.^). 



256 SECTION HI. THE VERB. 

^j%^^ vichuranu, v. n., to be separated; cans.: j-jj (^ ^ . 

vichoranu, to separate. 

Those verbs, in whicli the root- vowel 'i' coalesces 
with the causal increment a to e, may add, besides 
the causal increment, a to the end of the root, without 
altering the simple causal signification of the verb: as: 

^^'y^, phiranu, v. n., to turn; cans.: ^Zf^, pheranu 
or: jjollygj phera-inu. 

Some verbs with radical 'u', form the causal in the 
common way, as: 

^'j^ kuranu, v. n., to be tired; cans.: ^^(>^ kura-inu, 

to tire. 
A few verbs change in the causal the final cerebral 
t (tr) and d to r, as: 

^S^ budanu, v. n., to be drowned, cans.: '^-ly^ bo- 
ranu, to drown. 

^1j!j trutranu, v. n., to be broken, cans: ^i}J t^o- 
ranu, to break. 

c) If a verb end in radical 'i' or 'u', r is inserted 
after the causal increment a, as: 

^^ di-anu, v. a., to give; caus.: <jUj^ di-a-r-anu, to 

cause to give. 

^yL cu-anu, V. n., to leak; caus.: ,jjl^ cu-a-r-anu, 
to cause to leak. 
The same is the case, when final h is preceded 
by 'i', as: 

J^i. veh-anu, v. n., to sit; caus.: ^^^^^ veh-a-r-anu, 

to cause to sit, 
but if final h be preceded by 'u', the common rule 
holds good, as: 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 257 

^^5^ kuh-anu, v. a., to kill; caus.: ^jL^ kulia-inu, 

to cause to kill. 
On the reverse a euphonic r is inserted before the 
causal increment in such verbs, the final radical of which 
ends in a, as: 

J)oL4^ gha-inu, v. a., to wound; caus. ^^Q^^ gha-r- 

a-inu, to cause to wound. 

There is a number of causal verbs, which cannot be 
brought under any of the foregoing rules; these are: 

^^\ uthanu, v. n., to rise; caus.: ,j^L-^1 utharanu, 
to cause to rise. 

i^)^sC> drijanu, v. n., to be afraid; caus.: ^^A'ks3 dre- 

Jaranu, to frighten. 
j^^aa; sikhanu, v. a., to learn; caus.: ^^L^Xj^ww sekha- 

ranu, to instruct. 

^.^.♦^ sumhanu, v. n., to iall asleep; caus.: ^"^L^^-l 
sumharanu, to put to sleep. 

J^^ vananu, v. n., to be lost; caus.: J^^jQ^ viiiainu, 

to loose. 
^.■<v^L vehejanu, v. n., to bathe; caus.: ^TLiv^L ve- 

hejaranu, to wash. 

III. From most of the causal verbs a second 
causal may be derived, according to the rules laid 
down already, the first or simple causal being treated 
again as a theme by itself. 

Simple caus.: ^ls>s^ virca-inu; double caus.: ^jfXs^l^ 
virc-a-r-a-inu , to cause (another) to weary. 

Simple caus. : jjvL5^ garanu; double causal: ,^jK*Lf gar-a- 
inu, to cause to shed (tears). 

Trump p, Sindlii-Grammar. R 



258 SECTION IE. THE VERB. 

Simple cans. : ,j)*j-S^^ vichoranu; double cans.: J^K-j.^^ 

vichor-a-inu, to cause to separate. 

Simple caus.: J^JlZA^:> pher-a-inu ; double caus.: ^^.Sljtlv^. 

pber-a-r-a-inu, to cause (another) to cause to 
turn. 

Simple caus.: J^jCL^f gha-r-a-inu; double caus. : ,j.Sl^tjL4^ 

gha-r-a-r-a-inu , to cause (another) to cause to 
wound. 

Annotation. The Prakrit forms the causal either by adding 
the increment e (Sansk. ay) or ave (Sansk. apay = abe = ave, 
cf. Varar. VII, 2Q^ 27). In the modern Indian idioms only the 
latter increment is in use, which has been shortened to a in 
SindhT, Hindustani and BangalT, the syllable ve having been 
dropped. In Gujarat! the causal is formed by adding the in- 
crement av (and vad, when the verb ends in a vowel); in Pan- 
jabi by means of the increment aa. In Marathi av is generally 
shortened to av. 

The insertion of euphonic r in SindhT (in Hindustani and 
PanjabT 1) has its precedent in the euphonic 1, which is inserted 
in some Sanskrit causal themes. 

The double causal is formed in Hindustani by inserting 
V before the simple causal increment a; the same is the case 
in PanjabT and GujaratT. 

IV. Almost from every neuter, active or causal 
verb a Passive may be derived by adding to the verbal 

root the increment ^^ janu (j-anu). A few verbs, chiefly 
denominatives, are only found in the passive form, 

as: J^jLlyf ukandhijanu, to long for, ^^'^\ anguri- 

janu, to be exchanged, (^^IfO damirjanu, to be angry etc. 

Any neuter verb may take the passive form, without 
changing its original signification. 

The passive of neuter or intransitive verbs is mostly 
used impersonally (HI pers. Sing.) , whereas that of active 
and causal verbs is inflected through all persons. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 259 

The passive increment ^^ janu is joined to the 
verbal root, if it end in a consonant, with or without 
the conjunctive vowel 'i', as euphony may require it; 
but if the verbal root end in a vowel, the conjunctive 
vowel 'i' must always be employed, as: 

^^J puranu, v. a., to bury; pass.: ,j*^^^^, pur-janu, 
to be buried. 



ghatanu, v. n., to lessen; pass.: ^^jsxic^f ghati- 
janu, to lessen. 

^^^^^ vinainu, v. cans., to loose; pass.: ^iLS^ viiia- 

i-janu, to be lost. 

Those verbs, which end in a radical 'a' and in the 

Imperative in ^u' (see §. 43), as: ^jii ca-v-anu, Imper. 

1^ ca-u, to speak, drop before the increment of the 

passive the euphonic v of the Infinitive, as: ^j^ivi ca- 

i-janu, to be spoken; ^jlj pa-v-anu, to fall, Imper. J, 

pass. J^^ixj pa-i-Janu, to fall. 

Those verbs, which shorten their final root -vowel 
(i, ti, o) before the increment of the Infinitive (§. 42, 2), 
retain their long vowel before the passive termination 
j-anu, as: 

Jj^j pi-anu, V. a., to drink; Imper. ^aj piu; pass, ^sxj 

pi-janu, to be drunk. 
{^y-ri pu-anu, v. a., to string beads; Imper. ^J pu-u; 

pass. (^%^J pu-ijanu, to be strung (as beads). 
^^4> dhu-anu, v. a., to wash; Imper. ij=;&j dho-u; 

pass. j^^j.504> dh5-ijanu, to be washed. 

Exceptions to these rules are: 
0»lgj thi-anu, v. n., to become; Imper. ^^^43 thi-u; 
pass, ij^iv^' thi-janu, to become. 

R2 



260 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

^1?^ karanu, v. a., to make; Imper. Ji^ kare (Prec. ^ 
kije); pass. ^iv5" ki-janu, to be done. 

Annotation. In Sanskrit the Passive is formed by adding y 
to the root of the verb; in Prak. y is dissolved into la or ijja, and 
in the Apabhransa dialect ija or ijJa is employed for the formation 
of the Passive (Lassen , p. 467). The increment of the Passive is 
therefore in Sindhi j, joined to the affix of the verbal noun or the 
Infinitive = j-anu. The Sindhi (and to some extent the PanjabT) 
is the only modern idiom of India, which has preserved a regular 
passive voice, all its sister languages being compelled to resort to 
compositions, in order to express a passive voice. The common 
way to form a passive voice in the kindred idioms is, to compound 
the past participle passive with the verb jana, to go, as in Hin- 
dustani: \^y^ Lj*l^ Klx) jj»jyo mai mara jata hu, I go being 
beaten = I am beaten. But the use of the passive voice, if it 
may be called so_, is very limited in the cognate languages, and 
it is avoided wherever possible, which is greatly facilitated by 
a great number of verbs having a neuter or passive signi- 
fication. 

§. 43. 
The Imperative. 

The Imperative represents the root of a Sindhi 
verb, as stated already, and as the whole conjugational 
process depends a great deal upon it, its formation must 
be explained in the first place. 

1) The Imperative of neuter and passive verbs 
always ends in V^), as: 



J^lio mar-anu, to die; Imper.: yo mar-u. 
L^l ac-anu, to come; Imper.: -A ac-u. 



U^ 



£' 



1) The only exception to this rule is: 
^j»jO*.jLj pabuhanu, v. n. , to smile, which has in the Imperative, 
besides the regular ^*jl.J pabuhu, also: -?^Jv, pabtihe. 



SECTION in. THE VERB. 261 

j^itXJ gad-ij-anu, to meet; Imper. : -.J.? gacl-ij-u. 

Those verbs, which insert a euphonic v in the In- 
finitive, droxD it again in the Imperative, as: 

^jji na-v-anu, v. n., to bow, Imper.: p> na-u. 

If a final vowel has been shortened in the Infinitive, 
it is restored again in the Imperative, as: 

J^^l^' thi-anu, v. n., to become, Imper. ^a^ thi-u. 

^^ cu-anu, V. n., to leak, Imper. i^ cu-u. 

^^. ru-anu, v. n., to weep, Imper. j. ro (= ^is). 

Similarly: ^^^ veh-anu, v. n., to sit doY*m; Imper. ,^. 

veh-u. 

The following verbs form their Imperative both re- 
gularly and irregularly: 

jj^l ac-anu, v. n. , to come; Imper. _.! ac-u and 

iT a-u^). 
J^^ van-anu, v. n., to go; Imper. J>^ vaii-u and ^j^^ 

va-u. 

2) The Imperative of active and causal verbs 
ends in 'e', as: 

JjJLj pal-anu, v. a., to foster; Imper. JIJ pale. 

^Ix^ ghata-inu, v. cans., to lessen; Imper. &lx^ 

ghata-e. 

But there is a considerable number of active verbs, 
which end in the Imperative in 'u' and not in 'e'; some 
have both terminations. These are: 



l) From an old root I a, which is no longer used in Sindhi. but 
in Hindustani (Iji a-na). 



262 



SECTION III. THE VERB, 



j^ajI upinanu, to sift . 
5^^| akhanu, to inform 



0.^! ughanu, to wipe . . 
Jpi alanu, to deny . . . 
ij-^^ bujhanu, to understand 
^itXjJ bandhanu, to bind. 
^j^JUj bundhanu, to hear, 
^.ic^ bhananu, to break . 

J^i^ bhunanu, to fry. . 

^^;^^ puchanu, to ask . . 
^^^j purjhanu, to understand 
Ohyi partiranu, to understand 
J^i^ parhanu, to read. . . 
J^j pasanu , to see . . . . 
j^jj pinanu, to beg .... 

^^^ puanu, to string (beads). 

Lj pibanu, 

to grind 



9 -- 



^^j*^, pihanu, 

^^^ pianu, to drink. . . 

J^iL^ jananu, to know , 
^^y^ jahanu, to copulate . 
jhinikanu, to scold 



^4-^4 cubhanUj to prick . 



Imperative, 
;^j| upinu. 

.45"! akhu and 
..^T akhe. 

4^1 ughu. 
Jf alu. 
-^^ bujjhu. 
.5CJUJ bandhu, 
^JOj bundbu, 
A^ bbanu. 

x^j bhunu. 

^sJ puchu. 

v^^j paruru. 
^^ parhu. 
JfJ pasu. 
J^j pinu. 



t^ puu. 
^4^. pehu. 
-4^ pihu. 

^Lf Janu. 
4^ jahu. 
JCL^ jhiniku. 

,4^4 cubhu. 



SECTION UL THE VERB. 



263 



^li caranu, to graze . . . 
^j*^^ cakhanu, to taste . 
J^L cuganu, to peck up food 
j^^..^^ cughanu, to puncture. 



cumanu, to kiss . 
jj^Ais. cunanu, to crimple (clotli) 



•r 3 



^^ cavanu, to speak . . 
^^^-^^ cukanu, to soak up . 
j^^Xg^ chinanu, to pluck . 



^^ chuanu, , ^^ ^^^^^ 

J,44^ chuhanu, J 

^lio dhainu, to suck . . 



qIsho dhunanu, to choose 
^j^A5>c> dhavanu, to blow (with 

bellows). 
^jysao dhuanu, to wash 
Jjji daranu, to eat up 
i^^S disanu, to see . 

(j^i dahanu, to vex. 

9 

J^i duhanu, to milk 

,^4^r rakhanu, to keep 

0^^ sibanu, to sow. . 

^^ sikanu, to long for 

^jJ^Si^ sikhanu, to learn 

^^L1 salanu, to divulge 

^J,^^sJ^ samujhanu, to understand 



Imperative. 
L^ caru. 
.^JCi cakhu. 
3iL cugu. 
4^ cughu. 
(^ cumu. 
(j^ cunu. 
^=^ cau. 
^^ cuhu. 
^j^^s^ chinu. 

I i^4'> chu-u. 

[,.44-> chuhu. 

iL^t> dhau. 

^^4> dhunu. 
y.;DO dlia-u or 
^j^o dha-e. 
ij.5ej dho-u. 
ji daru. 
J^^ disu. 

j^o dahu. 
^S duhu. 
^J rakhu. 
,^y^ sibu. 
J^M, siku. 
^..^Xw sikhu. 
Jlw salu. 
.44^-^ samujhu. 



264 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



Imperative. 
^"y^jjJ^ sambliiraiiu J to recollect . I^aH sambliiru, 

0JLiul sunananu, to recognize . . ^LiJu sunanu. 
JjXLy sinikanu, 



> to blow the nose . 



> to smell 



smiikann , 
0»^X-Iaa. singlianu, 

^ly^^ik^ snngliann, 
^^L^ sunanu, to hear . 
0.^^ sahanu, to endure 
^^ katanu, to spin 
^hSs^ kadhanu, to pull out 
j^L^ khainu, to eat 



khatanu, to earn 
Q^ kahanu, to say 
^^^^ kuhanu, to kill . 
^'i^ khananu, to lift . 
^^)^j^k^ khahann, to scratch 
^Ju^T khedanu, to play 

^^)*j^ khianu, to eat 

jj.-^I/* ginhanu, to take 
^14^ ghuranu, to wish 
^j^.^ gahanu, to rub 
^^)*^f gehana, to swallow 
J^jG lakhanu, to ascertain 
,^4^j likhanu, to write 



tXLw siniku. 
lClI suniku. 



,-^^ singhu. 
^^^jL, sunghu. 



? - 



sunn. 



.^ sahu. 
o^r katu. 
j&Ss' kadhu. 

iL^ kha-u. 

^^ khatu. 
^^ kahu. 
,^ kuhu. 
Jj.^ khanu. 
,^L^f khahu. 
Jou^ khedu, 
^ Idiiu. 

.4-^ ginhu. 
j4f ghin^u, 
4?^ gahu. 
.4f gehu. 
.4^ lakhu, 
^jCi likhu. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 265 

Lnperative. 
j^aII limbanu, to plaster .... v^uJ limbu. 

^jj lunanu, to reap ^} lunu. 

0».gj lahanu, to obtain ^ lahu. 

Jj^A^i lahananu, to have to receive . ^^^ lahanu, 
J^ixi munjanu, to send . . . . vsxi munju. 

,j^.^Lo mananu, to need. . . . • <^^ 

\a^ mane. 

^jXjJq mananu, to ask cXjLo manu. 

^jjjo mananu , to shampoo .... ^ manu. 

^l)>^^ vathanu, to take ^^ vathu. 

J^^^^ vijhanu, to throw .... , (^^^ vijhu. 

^f^ vikinanu, to sell ^.5^ vikinu. 

^xi hananu, to strike . . . . . ,^ hanu. 

0^^) yahanu, to copulate . . . ^^ yahu. 

The following active verbs form their Imperative in 
an irregular way: 

0oi dianu, to give; Imper. ^^S de (instead of: ^^'i diu). 



l) Capt. Stack in his Sindhi Grammar has adduced the following 
verbs also as active and ending in the Imperative in V: 



^Xj bakanu, to chatter, 
,j^-L^ bhulanu, to forget. 



9^9 - 



0*ix.i:^ camburanu, to stick close to, 
j^Xl^^ jhakanu, to prate, 



0».^-ua; suhanu , 
(^jL.§XvA/ siiha-inu, I 

f^'ir^y vacuranu, to stick to, 
f^^Mj^ visahanii, to trust, 
\^^ vananu, to please; 



^^)^y rucarm, to please, 

but all these are properly intransitive verbs and therefore quite 
regular in their Imperative. 



266 SECTION III. THE VERB. 



9 ^ 



jj^jo nianu, to take away; Imper. ^ (instead of ^ niu). 

Verbs wMcli end in the Imperative Sing, in 'u', form 
the Plural in o (or yo, with euphonic y, if the verb 
end in any other vowel but 'a' and ti), and those, which 
end in the Imperative Sing, in e, form their Plural in 
yo or io, as: 

' I acu, come, Plur. j.£s^l ac-o. 

iiiDj dho-u, wash, „ ^i.ySSiO dho-yo. 

^ pa-u, fall, „ j^j pa-o. 

(^i de, give, „ p^ dio. 

, - vT T . . [>^^ jlial-yo or 

S^ jhal-e, seize, ,, T ,. ,^ ^ . 

j^A^ jhal-io. 

An older form of the 11. pers. Plur. is the termi- 
nation ho, which is also in use, as; j-gi-^ jhal-iho. 

The other persons of the Imperative must be supplied 
from the Potential. 

There is another from of the Imperative, ending in 
je^), which is added equally to the root of neuter 
and active verbs. This form of the Imperative is pro- 
perly a Precative, implying exhortation, request 
or prayer, as: 

^yjo motanu, to return; Imper. ^yi motu; Prec. Jyi 

mot-ije, please to return, 
j^ls^ ^atanu, to scatter; Imper. cio^ vit-e; Prec. ^j^ 

vit-ije, please to scatter. 
If a verb end in 'i' or i, the initial 'i' of ije is 
dropped, as: 



1) In poetry ije is now and then lengthened to eje, as well in 

neuter as active verbs, ending in the Imperative in 'u' or 'e', as: 

^•.5 kar-eje, from ^^yi karanu, Imper. yS kare. /f>^^ vaneje, 

from ;j^^^ vananu, to go, Imper. J>^ vanu. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 267 

J^i^ kliiann, v. a., to eat, Imper. ^^5^ khi-u; Prec. 
^ khi-je. 

^^^j^ thianu, v. n. , to become; Imper. ^^s thi-u; 
Prec. ^^ thi-je or: >s^* thi-je. 

Quite irregular is ^S karanu, to do, in the Pre- 
cative, as: 

'^^S karanu, Imper. S kare, Prec. ^ ki-je or: >s^ 
ka-je. " " " 

Neuter or such active verbs, as end in the Im- 
perative in 'u', take frequently, especially in poetry, the 
termination iju instead of ije, as: 

J^ sunanu, to hear; Imper. ^L sunu; Prec. Lx», 
sun-iju. 
This termination is also now and then found in 
active verbs, ending in the Imperative in 'e', as: 

J^AjL^ bha-inu, to think; Imper. ^^L^ bha-e; Prec. 

Js^^L^ bha-iju. 

The Plural of the Precative ends in ijo (or 
ejo, as the case may be), as: 

^y\ pur-ije (^^^, pur-eje), shut up; Plur. j^^^^ pur- 

Instead of ijo (ej5) the terminations ija, ijae (ija-e), 
ijahu (ijau) ijaha are also in use, especially in a ho- 
norific sense, and are therefore also referred to a subject 
in \h& Nominative, as: 

^s^ var-iju, return; Plur. L^.^ var-ija. 
^>^^ van-iju, go; „ fiLiv:^^ van-ija-e. 

X^ sun-iju, hear; „ ,iLs^ sun-ijaha. 

>s^vJ parh-iju, read; „ iLiv^o^S parh-eja-u. 



268 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

Annotation. In Prakrit the different (10) conjugations of 
the Sanskrit have already been discarded and only the first of 
them is in common use. The II pers. Sing, of the Imperative 
ends in Prakrit in 'a', which in Sindhi has been changed to V 
and ^e' respectively; the II pers. Plur. ends in ha (Sansk. "If 
dha) , and in Sindhi in o , h being commonly dropped. — In 
the cognate idioms the final vowel of the II pers. Sing, of the 
Imperative has been dropped altogether; in the Plural the Im- 
perative ends in o, as in Sindhi, with the exception of the 
Marathi, the Plural Imperative of which ends in a, and the 
BangalT, the Plural Imperative of which is identical with the 
Singular. 

The Sindhi Precative is to be referred to the Prakrit in- 
crement ija or ijja, which is inserted between the root and 
the inflexional terminations in the Present, the definite Future 
and the Imperative (Varar. VII, 21). Lassen's conjecture (p. 357), 
that this increment has sprung from the Sanskrit Precative, is 
borne ont by the modern idioms. — The Gujarati forms the 
Precative in the same way as the Sindhi by adding to the verbal 
root the increment aje (Plur. ajo). — In Hindustani iye is 
joined to the root of the verb for the III pers. Sing, (generally 
with ap etc.), it being considered more respectful to address a 
person in the III pers. Sing.; and iyo for the II or III pers. 
Plur.; Jie is only used, when the root ends in I or o. — In 
Panjabi the increment T is added to the root for the II pers. 
Sing., and To for the II pers. Plur. Similarly io is joined to 
the root in Bangali, as well for the II. pers. Sing, as Plur. 



§. 44. 
The participle present. 

From the Imperative or the verbal root the Par- 
ticiple present is derived in the following way: 

1) Neuter verbs ending in the Imperative in V, 
add to the root the affix and 5 (see §. 8, 11), as: 

i^^^JbD halanu, to go; Imper. Jk;o hal-u; Part. pres. j jJJbft 
hal-and5. 
The same is the case with active verbs, the Im- 
perative of which ends in 'u', as: 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 269 

J;.Xi hananu, to strike; Imper. Jji hanu; Part. pres. 
jjdli han-ando. 

Some of these however use also the other form in 
indo, as: 

J^Ll sunanu, to hear; Imper. J^ sunn; Part. pers. 

jdlxL sunando or: jJUaIvw sunindo. 

Those verbs, which end in radical a, and in the 
Imper. in 'u', form, for euphony's sake, their Participle 
present in indo, and not in and 5, as: 

J^L^ kha-inu, v. a., to eat; Imper. iL^^ kha-u; Part. 

pres. jjd-oL^ kha-indo. 
J^oLiJo budha-inu, v. n., to become old; Imper. i.li(Xj 

budha-u; Part. pres. jJo-oLijLj budha-indo. 

Those verbs, which shorten their final vowel in the 
Infinitive or insert a euphonic v (§. 42, 1. 2), do the 
same before the affix of the Participle present, as: 

^^ pa-v-anu, to fall; Imper. ^^ pa-u; Part. pres. 

fj^^ pi-anu, to drink; Imper. ^>o pi-n; Part. pres. 

jJCLo pi-ando. 
^y&t> dhu-anu, to wash; Imper. ^^o dho-u; Part. 

pres. jjup04> dhu-ando. 

In some verbs, with eux^honic v inserted, a con- 
traction takes place, as: 

jj^i ca-v-anu, to say; Imper. ^ ca-u; Part. pres. 

jjo^ ca-v-ando or: jjJ^ cundo. 

^^ hu-anu, to be; Imper. ij.5> h5-u; Part. pres. jjj^^ 

htindo (instead of jjd^ hu-ando). 
A similar contraction takes ^Dlace in: 



1^70 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

^lyJi^ klii-aiin, to eat: Imper. ^^ klii-u: Part. pros. 

sJlLy^ khindo. 
(joS cli-anii. to give: Imper. ^5 de: Part. pres. jJujo 

dindo. 
jj^ ni-anii. to take away: Imper. ^ iie: Part. pres. 

jjuxj nindo. 

The follo^Ying verbs form their Participle present 
in an in^eo-nlar wav: 

j^^l ac-anii. to come: Imper. _.! ac-u; Part. pres. 

^jjjj indo. 



' »-. 



vananu. to go; Imper. ^: vaiiu; Part. pres. 
jtUj^ vendo or jcUj* vindo. 

2) Active and cansal verbs form the Participle 
present by adding the affix in do to the root, as: 

J^"!^ bharanu, v. a., to fill; Imper. y^ bhar-e; Part. 

pres. jjJjw^ bhar-indo. 

JplitU? gandha-inu, to cause to connect; Imper. ^Li^Ju? 

gandha-e; Pcirt. pres. jJUL-oL5>Jur ganciha-indo. 

The verb ^3" karanu, to do, forms its Part. pres. 

both regularly and irregularly, ^iXx^S kar-indo or: jjj/ 

kando, ^iXlf kindo. 

3) The participle present of the Passive voice is 
formed by adding the affix ibo to the root of the 
passive theme (cf. §. 8, 13), as: 

J^^ pasanu, v. a., to see; pass. (^^^.^^wS pas-ijanu; Part. 

XDres. j-A^ pas-ibo. 
^1^ ca-v-anu, v. a., to say; pass. 0*ivi ca-ijanu; 

Part. pres. j-j^ ca-ibo. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 271 

J^^3 dhu-anu, v. a., to wash; pass. 0%j^^ dh5-ijanu; 

Part. pres. >^>^^ dho-ibo. 
^l^^ pi-anu, v. a., to drink; pass. ,j.^o pi-janu; Part. 

pres. jjLfj> pi-bo. 
J^I^* tlii-anu, V. n., to become; pass, ^sx^ thi-janu; 

Part. pres. ^^^ thi-bo. 
^"S karanu, v. a., to do; pass. J^ ki-janu; Part. 

pres. ^ ki-bo (also: j^ ka-bo). 

The Participle present is also used in the sense of 
a Future, as will be seen under the future tense. 

§. 45. 
The Participle past. 

From all Sindhi verbs, be they neuter, active (causal) 
or passive, a past participle may be derived by adding 
the affix io or yo (the latter always, when the root ends 
in a vowel) to the root of the verb (see §. 8, 14). The 
past participle of neuter verbs implies simply a prae- 
terite sense, whereas that of active (causal) verbs always 
denotes a praeterite passive signification. 

J^Li jaganu, v. n., to be awake; p. p. j-^f^Li jag-io, 

having been awake. 

J^ji^ khatanu, v. a., to gain; p. p. j-v^L^ khat-yo, 
having been gained. 

,|j.jL4j1j parbhainu, v. cans., to quiet; p. p. j-}L.^jlJ 

parbhayo, having been quieted. 
J^osv.^5^ parkhijanu, v. p., to be tested; p. p. j.^4^ 
parkh-io, having been tested. 
Those verbs, which insert euphonic v in the In- 
finitive, drop it again before the affix of the past par- 
ticiple, as: 



272 SECTION HI. THE VERB. 

^J^ ca-v-anu, to say; p. p. j^ ca-yo. 
^^ na-v-anu, to bow; p. p. j.Ai iia-yo. 

If a verb end in 'i' or i, the initial 'i' of the affix 
io is dropped in the past participle; the same is com- 
monly the case, when the root ends in one of the Pa- 
latals c, ch, j, jh. 

,^^ ni-anu, to take away; p. p. ^j ni-o. 

j^^l^* thi-anu, to become; p. p. ^X^ thi-o. 

J^ocs^ ji-anu, to live; p. p. j.^ ji-o. 

i^^d. kuchanu, to speak; p. p. j.^ kuch-o. 
J^^^ sojhanu, to investigate; p. p. j-g^j-w sojho. 

If final o and i has been shortened in the Infinitive, 
it is restored again (with a few exceptions) in the past 
participles, as: 

^^j dhu-anu, to wash (Imper. i.^ssii> dho-n); p. p. 
j.jjjS4> dho-yo. 

J^ ji-anu, to live (Imper. ^j^ ji-u); p. p. j1ks> ji-o. 

About the compound affixes ya-lu or ia-lu, ya-ro 
(ia-ro), which are attached to the past participle, in order 
to impart to it more the nature of an adjective, com- 
pare §. 9, 22. 

A considerable number of verbs form their past 
participle in an irregular way, that is to say, they have 
retained the old Sanskrit-Prakrit form of the past par- 
ticiple, modified only according to the laws of trans- 
mutation of letters, as current in Prakrit and Sindhi. 
We subjoin here an alphabetical list of them. 

^L^l ubhamanu, v. n., to boil up; p. p. jJL^jI ubhano. 
i^^i ubahanu, v. n., to stand; p. p. y^^^] ubitho. 
^\ utanu, V. a., to say; p. p. ^\ uto. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 273 

J>i! V. n., to be woven, ^.f 

,^1 V. a., to weave, j 

^xL^I ujhamanu, to be extingnislied ; p. p. jiL^:^! njhano. 

J^l V. n., acanu, to come; p, p. j.j| ayo. 

jj^fil V. n., udamanu, to fly; p. p. j.il5! udano. 

^wS'l V. a., ukaranu, to engrave; p. p. jjw5l ukaryo or: 

yX^^ ukhato. 

J^^l V. a., ughanu, to wipe out; p, p. ^!^f\ ughatho, 

^1 alanu, v. a., to deny; p. p, j.Jf alto. 

,j^f ulahanu, v. n., to descend; p. p. j-^l ulatho. 

^f ananu, v. a,, to bring; p. p. jtXjf ando. 

J^.^ bajhanu, v. n,, to be bound; | p. p. j.^ bajho or 

JjijcAj bandhanu, v. a,, to bind; ] ^Jo badho. 

^ bujhanu, V. n., to be heard; 1 ^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^j^_ 

J^iXu bundhanu, v. a., to hear; J 

^Ju budanu, v. n., to be drowned; p. p, jJLj budo. 

^^^^■g? bhajanu, v. n., to run away; 

to be broken; 

,^;,i^j bhananu, v. a., to break; 

J^^ix^ bbijanu, v. n., to get wet; p. p. j.a^j bhino. 

J>ixJ.j bhuianu, v. n., to be fried; ^? , t __ 

Y^T' ^ • ' ' f P- P- >%^ bhugo. 

^^.ix^j bhunanu, v, a., to fry; J 

^J*^^ bhucanu, v. n., to be digested; p. p. ^x^ bbuto. 

^jj-^ bhunanu, v, n. , to wander about; p. p. j.!^ bhuno. 

J^ bihanu, v. n., 

J ^' , * [to stand up; p. p. 14x0 bitiio. 

j^.^-o bihanu, v. n., ^ ± x j^ ,.^ . ^ 

^Lj painu, v. a., to get; p. p. pij pato. 

Trumpp, Siudhl-Grrammar. S 



p. p. y^ bhago. 



274 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

vl>=?. P^Janu, V. n., to be finished; p. p. I ^' P^no, 

[ijcsi' pujito. 



^^^ pacanu, v. n., to be cooked; p. p. tXo pako. 
^j^,.^^j purjhanu, v. a., to understand, p. p. j^t>U purdho. 

J^lj parcanu, v. n., to be reconciled; p. p. < -^>H -^ ' 

[i^lj parco. 

jjlS parnanu, v. a., to entrust, p. p. p'S parto. 

J^^. pavanu, v. n., to fall; p. p. j.^. pi5. 

^tj puanu, V. a., to string (as beads); p. p. ^\.j puto. 

J^jL^^, phatanu, v. a., to tear; p. p. ^jL^j pbato. 

(j^L^. pliasanti, v. n., to be caught; p. p. j-^'l^J phatho. 

J^iLg-j phitanu, v. n., to be injured; p. p. jiLg.^ phit5. 

^J^■^, pahucanu, v. n., to arrive; p. p. jXg.1 pahuto. 
J^>14^, phasanu, v. n., to be caught; p. p. j^i^. phatho. 
J^^Iw^ phisanu, v. n., to burst; p. p. 34^. phitho. 

^LlJ pehanu. 

W. n., to enter; p. p. s-^iLo petho. 



^.^^ pehanu, 
j^^.^^ picanu, V. n., to be credited; p. p. jJUj pito. 
J^^-o pisanu, V. a., to grind; p. p. ^^. pitho. 
J^Aj pianu, V. a., to drink; p. p. ^x^ pito. 
0*4^. pihanu, v. a., to grind; p. p. j-^a-v^s pitho. 
J^* tapanu, v. n., to be warm; p. p. ^ tato. 

J^* Cusanu, V. n., to be gratified; p. p. | -^^ ^- ^^' 

[j-§^* tutho. 

J;.X1^' thakanu, v. n., to be weary; p. p. jX^* thako. 



^JL^ jhalanu, v. a., to seize; p, p. 



SECTION IIL THE VERB. 275 

J^Q* trahanu, v. caus., to frighten; I p. p. j-g^'Q* tratho. 
J^p trahanu, v. n. , to be frightened ; J p. p. ^'p tratho. 

0oLi Japanu, v, n., to be born; I p, ]), plL Ja-o, ^IL 

^xi Jananu, v. a,, to bring forth; J Jayo or j^i^ Janio. 

^^L^ Jananu, v. a., to know; p. p. pl^ Jato, 

J^^ jabhanu, v.n, to be copulated; j ^^ ^^ ^^ .^^^^^ 

J^,'^.> jahanu, v. a., to copulate; J 

i^X:^ jumbanu, v, n., to be deeply engaged; p. p, jjc:^ 

juto or yXj<xL jumbi5. 

0^144^ jhapamanu, v. n., to decrease; p, p, ^Ll^^ 
jhapano. 

jjci^^ jhalto 

j^,(^> jhalio. 

^Xi. cukanu, v. n. , to be finished; p. p. jjCa^ cuko. 

J;>14t> chupanu, v. n., to be touched; I .. ' ^h i~ 

J;.^4> chuhanu, v. a., to touch; J 

^JLg^ chutanu, v. n., to get loose; p. p. }':i^ chuto. 

j^^^kscg^ chijanu, v. n,, to break; 

^j_^l^ chinanu, v. a., to break off; 

^^^-^ cuhanu, v. a., to soak up; p. p, j^L cutho. 

^^)J<s^i^ dhunanu, v. a., to choose; p. p. ^xio dhuo. 

Jkijj dubhanu, v. n., to be milked; .' n -,, 

^T'. - [ P- P- >^t>o dudho. 

Jjsio duhanu, v. a., to milk; J 

0.L^5 drijanu, v. n., to be afraid; p. p. py^ drino. 

^^i>yi drahanu, v. n., to tumble down; I p, p. ^^'^o dratho. 
J^IJiS drahanu, v. cans., to demolish; J p. p. ^Uo dratho. 
^^J^'^ disanu, v. a., to see; p. p. s-gJJ ditho. 

S2 



p. p. j^,^g> chino. 



276 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

,:wj|l5>5 dhrapanu, v.n., to be satiated; ^,- :: -n _. 

u^' r^ ' ^ ' ■> ' [ P- P- >jl v^4> dhrao. 

J;.jip&t> dhrainu, v. a., to satiate; J 

j^iS dahanu, v. a., to torment; p. p. jjot^o dadho. 
^'i dianu, v. a., to give; p. p. jj^ dino. 
^l^s rijanu, v. n., to be watered; p. p. jt>. rido 

>%•; rijio. 
J^; rajhanu, v. n., to be boiled; 1 ^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^^ 
J^icXj^ randbanu, v. a., to cook; J 
l^)^j^\ rujhanu, v. n., to be busy; p. p. y^C>\ rudho. 
J^J racanu, v. n. , to be immersed; p. p. ij" rato. 
J^x rusanu, v. n., to be sulky; p. p. j^\ rutho. 
Jj^^t rumbhanu, v. n., to be engaged; p. p. ^c>\ rudho 
J^j rubhanu, J or yJ^'^ rumbhio. 

^t] ruanu, v. n., to weep; p. p. j.js runo. 

J^^^s rijhanu, v. n., to be pleased; p. p. jj&Jus ridho. 

J;*js3oLx)Ll/ samaijanu, v. n., to arrive at the years of dis- 
cretion; p. p. jiLx)Ll samano or: j->UoLl samayo. 
^d: sujanu, v. n., to be swollen; p. p. ji^ suno. 
^di sujanu, v. n., to be heard; p. p. 






suo 



^'j^ sunanu, v. a., to hear; J y^ sumo. 

J^4^ sijhanu, v. n., to be seethed; p. p. ysaCs^ sidho. 
JjXl sukanu, v. n., to be dry; p. p. jjCl suko. 
^JLIu salanu, v. a., to divulge; p. p. jJC-LL salto 

3^-U*/ salio. 
J^'^UL samaijanu, v. n., to be contained; p. p. jJU 



samano. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 277 

0*4^^ samujhanu, v. a., to understand; p. p. ^xlL sa- 

muto or j-^^w samujho. 
J^,^,»w sumahanu, v. n., to go to sleep; p. p. 3.^^ suto 



O 9 



or jl^^j^ sumhio. 



^y.^jlL sambhiranu, v. n., to be prepared; p. p. fi^^jj,^ 

sambhtiro, jJ^^^aa^ sambhfmo or: y^y^/jS^ sam- 
bhirio. 



^ir karanu, v. a., to do; p. p. j.^ kio, j.^ kayo; ^jiS 
kito. 

^;U^r kumatijanu, y, p,^ to wither; p. p. jiU^r ku- 
^y^/ ktimaijanu, ^an^ or ^U/ kumayo. 

^jo\-^ khamanu, v. n., to be burnt; p. p. jiL^^^ khano. 
^r^.1^ khapanu, v. n., to be wearied; p. p. j>x^ khato 

or yit^ khapio. 
^^4^ khupanu, v. n., to be fixed; p. p. j-X^ khuto or 

yJ^ khupio. 
0^1^ khisanu, v. n., to be reduced; p. p. j..^A.gi^ khitho. 

J^.lug5^ khusanu, v. n., to be plucked out; ]3. p. yj^^ 

khutho or y%^^ kbusio. 
f^ kuhanu, v. a., to kill; | ^ ^ ^ ^^^j^_ 

^ZS kusanu, v. n., to be killed; J 
j^l^ khananu, v. a., to lift up; p. p. y^^ khayo or 

j.AA^ khanio. 
Jj^$^ khuhanu, v. n., to be tired; p. p. j..^^^ khutho. 
,j^ gapanu, v. n., to stick (in mud); p. p. j-aT gato. 
J^if* gutanu, V. a., to plait together; p. p. yxf guto. 
^^ySS gasanu, v. n., to abrade; I 
J^4^ gahanuj v. a., to rub; J p. p. j.=g,^f gatho. 



2T8 SECTION IH. THE VERB. 

^IJ" gusanu, V. n., to fail; p. p. j>^ ^^^^^^ 

Jjolii lainu, V. a,, to apply; p. p. jol^f lat5 or ^jS layo, 

^iS lahanu, v. cans., to cause to descend; p. p. ^^^3 
latho. 

J>1J labhanu, v. n., to be obtained; ,-, -t -fi _ 

Y^: f P- P- j^tJJ ladno. 

Jj4^ lahanu, v. a., to obtain; J 

j^^XJ likanu , v. n, , to be hidden ; p. p, j.jO liko or j.^ likio. 

J^j limbanu, v. a., to plaster; p. p. i „ " . 

U^^J limbio. 

/:>!/• J lusanu, V. n., to be scorched; •♦ '» i-xi - 

7 ^ • P- P- H^y I4I1O' 

Jj.i^ luhanu, v. a., to scorch; j 

^2;^ macanu, v. n., to fatten; p. p. jjci mato. 

.:>Iy^ musanu, v. n., to be unlucky; ..> , . _ 

Y ^ • ' ' [ P- P- 3-^ mutho. 

0^ muhanu, v. a., to cause loss; j 

^^^^<jo munjhanu, v. n., to be perplexed; p. p, j^-jv^ 
murho. 

J^'^ vathanu, v. a., to take; p. p. ^J^ varto, jt>J^ 
vardo, j.^^'^ vathito. 

Jj.^^ vijhanu, v. a., to throw; p. p. j^j^ vidho. 

J^w vircanu, v. n., to be wearied; p. p. jj\. virto. 

j^L^. visamanu, v. n., to be extinguished; p. p. jiLIu^ 



visano. 



J^^ vasanu, v. n., to fall (as rain), p. p. ^^^ vatho, 

^^•| utho, j.4j^ vutho. 
J^l^* vikamanu, v. n. , to be sold; p. p. jil^^ vikano. 

Jj.A^ vikinanu, v= a., to sell; p. p. j^ vikio. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 279 

,ly^^ vananu, v. n., to go; p. p. p^ vio. 

J^i^. vehejanu, v. p., to bathe; p. p. jjc^^ veheto. 

0.^^ velianu, v. n., to sit; p. p. j.^J^ vetho. 

J^^yoLj^ hapamanu, v. n., to lessen; p. p. jiLl^ hapano. 
J^J yabhanu, v. n., to be copulated; j ^ ^ ^^ ^^g^^. 
J^ yahanu, v. a., to copulate; J 

§• 46. 
The participle of the Future passive or the Gerundive 0- 

The participle of the Future passive or the Gerun- 
dive is formed by adding to the verbal root the affix 
ino (or ano, if the verb end in 'i' (i) and optionally ino 
and ano, if the verb end in V (o)). The Gerundive can 
only be derived from active verbs; neuter verbs form 
also a similar participial noun by means of the affix 
ino, but it is not to be confounded with the Gerundive; 
see §. 9, 12. 

The final vowel of a verbal root undergoes the same 
changes before the affix of the Gerundive, as before the 
affix of the Infinitive (§. 42), so that for practical pur- 
poses the rule may thus be given, that the termination 
of the Infinitive anu is simply changed to ano (ino), 
in order to form the participle of the Future passive. 
About the derivation of the affix ino see §. 8, 12. 

J^^^ vijhanu, v. a., to throw; Gerund, j.1^^ vijhino, 

what is to be thrown. 
J^S dianu, v. a., to give; Gerund. j.1jj dian5, what 

is to be given. 



1) A kind of participle of the Future active is formed by at- 

tacliing the affix haru to the Infinitive, as: sL^^LsO halana-haru, one 
who is about to go; see §. 9, 33. 



280 SECTION EI. THE VERB. 



.s- ? 



^y^C> dhuanu, v, a., to wash; Gerund. -^^c> dhitand 
or j.il55t> dhuino, what is to be washed. 

^jL^^ khainu, v. a., to eat; Gerund. j.ioL^ khaino. 
what is to be eaten. 

§. 47. 
Indeclinable past participles. 

The Sindhi uses different past conjunctive or in- 
dechnable participles. 

1) The form most in use is that ending in i (o) 
or e. 

a) Neuter or such active verbs, as terminate in 
the Imperative in 'u^, form the past conjunctive parti- 
ciple by joining to the verbal root the affix i, as: 

^r,J^ var-anu, v. n., to return; past part. conj. ^^^l 

var-i, having returned. 

^>lw sunanu, v. a., to hear; p. part. conj. !«/ sun-i, 

having heard. 
Those verbs , which end in a radical i, coalesce with 
the affix of the past part. conj. to i, as: 

0.^4^* thianu, to become; Imper. ^^'s thiu; p. p. conj. 

^j^s thi, having become. 

Those verbs, which end in ti, shorten u before the 
affix 1 (as before the affix of the Infinitive), as: 

0^^ pu-anu, to string (beads); Imper. ^y^^ pti-u; p. p. 

conj. ^^ pu-i. 

But those verbs, which shorten radical final o to 
\i' in the Infinitive, restore the same again in the past 
participle conjunctive, as: 

^^y ru-anu, to weep; Imper. y r5; p. p. conj. ^jj> ro-i. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 281 

If in the Infinitive euphonic v has been inserted 
between the verbal root and the affix of the Infinitive, 
it is dropped again in the past part, conj., as: 

^I^ ca-v-anu, to speak; Imper. ^ ca-u; p. p. conj. 

X^ ca-i, having spoken. 

J^lj pa-v-anu, to fall, forms either regiilarly: ^^j pa-i, 

or irregularly ^^Jaj pe-i, having fallen. 

The verb ^^\ acanu, to come, makes in the p. p. 

conj. either regularly ^^f ac-i, or irregularly ^^1 ac-e. 

The verbs Jjoj dianu, to give (Imper. ^(3 de) and J^ 

nianu, to take away (Imper. ^ ne) make in the p. part. 

conj. ^ajo de-i and ^Z^J ne-i or ^^ na-i. 

Passive verbs, be they derived from neuter or 
active themes, form the p. part. conj. quite in the same 
way, as verbs of the active voice, by adding the in- 
crement i (o) to the passive base, as: 

^j^.iLjj.J lo-ij-anu, v. p. to be moistened; p. part. conj. 
^rsvSjj lo-ij-i or j.iS\oy lo-ij-o, having been 

moistened. 

h) Active and causal verbs, ending in the Im- 
perative in 'e', form the past part. conj. by adding the 
affix e to the root of the verb, as: 

^JUo malanu, v. a., to polish; p. p. conj. JJo mal-e, 

having polished. 
^^\^ lagainu, v. cans., to apply; p. p. conj. ^LSJ 
laga-e, having applied. 
2) The second past participle conjunctive is formed 
by adding to the root of the verb, be it transitive or 
intransitive, the affix yo (or io). This form is only 
used with a Present, Future or Imperative, and 
may therefore in most cases be translated by the present 
participle, as: 



282 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

^j^ motanu, v. n., to return; p. p. conj. ^^yt mot-yo 
(mot-io). 

jj^.^A^ sithanu, v. a., to compress; p. p. conj. j.^^a*/ sith-io. 

If the verb end in 'i' (i), it coalesces with, the affix 
io, as: 

^'6 dianu, to give; p. p, conj. p5 dio. 

0.AJ pi-anu, to dink (Imper. ^^^ piu); p. p. conj. ili pio. 

Those verbs, which shorten original o to 'u' in the 
Infinitive, restore the same again in the p. p. conj., as: 

j^yo4> dhu-anu, to wash (Imper. ^ys^o dho-u); p. p. 
conj. j-sjjoo dho-yo. 

^ys ru-anu, to weep (Imper. j. ro); p. p. conj. j.jj. 
ro-yo. 

The verbs J^l^ khananu , to lift up , ^ki hananu, 

to strike, ^^Ci^karanu, to do, drop, as in the past par- 
ticiple, their final radical before the affix yo, as: 

J^lgi^ khananu, p. p. conj. y.uj^ kha-yo or: y^^i kha-yo. 
J^ii hananu, p. p. conj. ^.^ai ha-yo or: yi ha-yo. 
^If'karanu, p. p. conj. y^ ka-yo or: jjcT ki-yo (ki-o). 

3) The third past participle conjunctive is formed 
by adding to the root of transitive verbs, irrespec- 
tively of their termination in the Imperative, the affix 
je (i-je), and ji (i-ji) to the root of neuter verbs. 

This form is generally used with the Present and 
Past tenses. 

^yX^ khananu, v. a., to lift up (Imper. ^^^4^ khanu); 

p. p. conj. ^5^^^ khan-ije. 
0.:it. vircanu, v. n., to be tired; p. p. conj. ^^^3^.^ 

virc-iji. 

4) The fourth past participle conjunctive is formed 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 283 

by putting ^S kare, the ^. j). conj. of ^1^ karanii, 

** I 
after the x^ast partic. conj. ending in i or e. This 

compound form is used with the Present, the Future, 

the Past tenses and the Imperative, as: 

^^S (^»; vari kare, having returned; Inf. ^j<^ varanu. 

^^S JJo male kare , having polished ; Inf. ^^^ malanu. 
^S ^^^}i loij-i kare, having been moistened; Inf. 
oiJ loij-anu. 



Annotation. The indeclinable past participles are formed in 
Sanskrit either by the affix tva or ya. In Prakrit tva is 
changed to tuna and (by elision of t) to una, and ya becomes 
ia. In Sindlii the first form of the past participle conjunctive 
ending in i (or e) corresponds to the Prakrit affix ia. The 
second form of the p. p. conj., ending in yo, is identical with 
the first, and the same must be said of the third form ending 
in ji (or je), the Sanskrit affix ya (Prakrit ia) haA'ing been 
changed in SindhT to ja (= je), as in the case of the Passive. 

This is fully borne out by the kindred idioms. In Hindus- 
tani vre find the following forms of the past part, conjunctive 
(Inf. mar-na): mar, mar-e, mar-ke, mar-karke. In the first form 
mar the affix ia has apparently been dropped altogether, whereas 
in the second mar-e the affix ia has been contracted to e. The 
affix ke in mar-ke, corresponds to the Sindhi affix je, j having 
been changed to a guttural, with transition of the Media into a 
Tenuis. Mar-kar and mar-karke are compound past participles 
conj. like the Sindhi form. Similarly we find in Panjabi (Inf. 
ghall-na, to send): ghall and ghall-ke. 

The Gujarati uses two forms of the past part, conj., one 
ending in i (used especially in compound verbs), as lakhT^ 
having written, and the other in ml, as lakhinT. The first 
form is identical with the Sindhi affix I, the latter, Ini, cor- 
responds to the Prakrit affix una, I having been substituted 
for u. 

The Mar at hi uses only one form of the past. part, conj., 
ending in un, as karun, having done; this affix quite coin- 
cides with the Prakrit affix una. — The Bano:alI uses either 



284 SECTION IH. THE VERB. 

the affix ya (iya), as dekhiya (dek-e or dekh-i also being 
employed), or the Locative of the past participle, dekhite, in 
the state of having seen. 



Chapter XIII. 

Formation of the Tenses and Persons. 

§• 48. 

In treating of the Tenses in Sindhi we must dis- 
tinguish simple and compound Tenses. 

I. Simple tenses. 

In the Active and Passive Voice there are only 
three simple tenses, viz.: the Potential, the Aorist 
and the Future. 

1) The Potential, which implies possibility, un- 
certainty or a wish, is formed by adding to the root 
of the verb the inflexional terminations. The ab- 
solute personal pronouns may also be put before the 
verb, where any stress is to be laid on the person, but 
they may also be omitted, where such is not the case, 
the respective person being sufficiently pointed out by 
the inflexional termination itself. 

Neuter and such intransitive verbs, as end in the 
Imperative in 'u', and all passive verbs, receive the 
same personal terminations, whereas those transitive verbs, 
which end in the Imperative in 'e', differ from them in 
the I and partly in the 11 pers. Sing, and in all the 
persons of the Plural, by retaining their characteristic 'i' 
(e) before the inflexional terminations. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



285 



Personal terminations of the Potential. 



Verbs ending in the Imperative 
in ^u'. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


I pers. -a 




II pers. -1, e 


-0 


II pers. e 


-ane 



Verbs ending in the Imper. 



Singular. 

-ya, -ia 
-ie, ye; i, e 



in 


^e'. 




Plural. 




-yu, iu 


e 


-yo, id 




-ine, ine 



In reference to verbs, ending in the Imperative in 
'u', it is to be observed: 

a) A final long vowel is shortened before all the 
personal terminations in the same way, as before the 
affix of the Infinitive; e. g. ^^^ ruanu, to weep, Imper. 
ss ro, Potential I pers. ^bs ru-a, I may weep; J^L 
pianu, to drink, Imper. ^Jaj piu. Potential I pers. ^jLo pi-a, 
I may drink; J^^' pu-anu, to string (beads), Imper. iJ 
pti-u, Potential I pers. ^Lj pu-a, I may string (beads). 
In poetry an original long vowel may be restored again 
in the III pers. Sing,, the personal termination e being 
at the same time shortened to 'e', as: ©jn ro-e, he may 

weep, instead of ^S. ru-e. 

h) The euphonic v, which is inserted between the 
root of a verb ending in 'a', and the affix of the In- 
finitive, is commonly retained in the Singular and the 
III pers. of the Plural, but dropped commonly in the 

I and n pers. Plural, as: Inf. ^^j pa-v-anu, to fall. 

Potential, Sing. I pers. ^Ij!j pa-v-a, 11 pers. ^j^S pa-v-e, 

HI pers. (^^j> pa-v-e; III pers. Plur. ^"yj pa-v-ane; Plur. 

I pers. ^yji^^ pa-u, II pers. j.^j pa-o. In the 11 and III pers. 



286 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

Sing, however v may be also dropped, as .v^^i ca-e, 
thou may st say; ^^ ca-e^), he may say. 

c) In the m pers. Plur. verbs , which end in 'u' (u) 
or original 5) and 'a' (with euphonic v inserted) fre- 
quently contract the inflexional termination u-ane, a- 

v-ane, to tine, as: ^^s rune, they may weep, instead 

of ^^j ru-ane; ^^^ pune, they may fall, instead of ^^ 

pavane; ^^ cfme, they may say, instead of ^li cavane. 

A similar contraction takes place in the II pers. 
Sing, and in the HI person Plur., if a verb end in 'i' 

(i), as: jo-jS di, thou mayst give, instead of ..>aj^ di-e; 

_ *" * . . ^. - *'" ' 

^jj^ dme, they may give, instead of ^j3 diane; ^j^o 

ni, thou mayst take away, ^^^ nine, they may take 

away; jJ.aj pine, they make drink; jj-v^ khine, they 

may eat; but the uncontracted form is equally in use. 

d) Yerbs, which end in a radical a, and in the Im- 
perative in 'u', insert in the I pers. Sing, and Plur. and 
in the 11 pers. Plur. a euphonic y before the flexional 

termination, as: ^^LSLiJj budha-y-a, I may become old, 

^^.liJo budha-y-u, ^LSjio budha-y-5, we, you may 
become old. In the HI pers. Plur. they end likewise, 

for euphony's sake, not in ane, but in ine, as: ^^L^ 

kha-ine, they may eat. An exception to this rule is 

^L4^ kha, I may eat, instead of ^j^l^ kha-y-a. 

In reference to verbs, ending in the Imperative in 
'e', it is to be observed: 

1) The characteristic 'i' (e) of the Imperative may 
be contracted with the inflexional termination of the 



1) /c^ ca-e is even contracted to ^ss^ ce, when used more in 
..I * .• i' 

the sense of a particle, to quote the words of the speaker ('says he'). 



1 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 287 

I and II pers. Sing, and the 11 and I pers. of the Plur. 
to ya, ye (yi), yu, yo, or not, if the verb end in a 
consonant; but the contraction must take place, if the 

verb end in a vowel, as: ^LJiX^:^ chadya, or j^LjL^^, 
^^^S.^ chadye or ^aSjL^ chadie etc.; but: ^LjL^ bha- 
ya, jj^L^j bha-ye etc. from ^{^ bhainu, to think. In 
poetry however the looser form is also in use, as: jjLoL^ 
bha-ia or ^LIji.4^ bha-iya. In the II pers. Sing, the in- 
flexional termination ye or yi may also be contracted 
to e or 1, as: jjm<jcjLjL1 sandhe or ^j.x^J.jL-1 sandhi, thou 

mayst cherish. 

In the m pers. Plural 'i' is generally lengthened 
to '1', and the initial 'a' of the inflexional termination 
ani dropped in order to distinguish the neuter and active 
verbs. But ine is again frequently pronounced and written 
ine, especially when the verb ends in a long a, as: 

^jL^lS^ galha-ine, they may speak. 

2) The verb ^S karanu, to do, forms the III pers. 
Plural either regularly in ^>.5^ karine, or irregularly 
in ^f kane or ^ kine. 

Annotation. The Sanskrit Potential has aheady qiiite dia- . / ' 

appeared in Prakrit. But, abstracted from this significant cir- ' 
cumstance, there can be no doubt, that the Sindhi Potential 
corresponds originally to the Prakrit Present tense. In Sindhi 
itself there are many reminiscences , that the Potential properly 
represents the old Present of the Prakrit; for it is very often, 
chiefly in poetry, used without the characteristic j.-^J, in the 
sense of the Present. After the custom had gained ground, to 
express the Present by joining the y^ tho to the old Present, 
the old Present was reserved to denote a Potential mood. The 
inflexional terminations of the Sindhi Potential correspond very 
closely to those of the Prakrit Present, as: Prak. I pers. Sing, 
ami (Sansk. ami), Sindhi I; II pers. Sing, asi (Sansk. asi), Sin- 
dhi e (or f), ^a' being dropped (as a conjunctive vowel) and s 



288 SECTION IH. THE VERB. 

being first changed to h and then dropped altogether; III pers. 
Sing, a-ti or a-di (Sansk. a-ti), and by elision of t or d: a-e, 
Sindhi e. In the I pers. Plur. the Prakrit has different termi- 
nations, as a-mo (Sansk. a-mah), a-mu, a-ma, or a-mo, a-inu etc. 
These latter terminations have given rise to the Sindhi termi- 
nations u, m being elided and final 'u' lengthened to u and 
nasalized at the same time; II pers. Plur. a-ha (Sansk. a-tha), 
Sindhi o, h having been dropped and 'a' lengthened to o; 
III pers. Plur. a-nti (Sansk. a-nti), Sindhi ane, t having been 
elided in this conjunct letter. — The Hindustani, PanjabT 
and Gujarat! coincide in this respect with the Sindhi, forming 
the Potential in the same way, as the Sindhi, only with modified 
inflexional terminations. The proper Potential of the Marathl, 
which is now commonly called by the Grammarians the "Past 
Habitual" 1), exhibits likewise the signs of the old Prakrit 
Present. — The Bangall alone has preserved the old Present 
tense, formed by joining the inflexional terminations to the root 
of the verb; the Present is in BangalT also used in the sense of 
a Potential. 

2) The Sindhi has a regular Aorist or Praete- 
rite tense denoting, that an action once took place in 
time past. 

a) The Aorist is formed from neuter verbs, by- 
joining to the past participle the terminations of the 
(now in Sindhi) obsolete substantive verb as, to be. This 
tense is therefore originally a compound, and the par- 
ticiple must be put, according to the gender referred to, 
either in the masc. or the feminine. The inflexional ter- 
minations are only affixed to the I and H pers. of the 
Sing. masc. and fem., to the I pers. of the Plur. masc. 
and fem. and to the U pers. of the Plur. masc, the 
TIT person of the Sing, and Plur. masc. and fem. being 
left without any inflexional terminations, as well as the 
II pers. of the Plur. fem. 

h) From transitive verbs, the participle past of 
which always has a passive signification, the Aorist is 



1) As in the Marathi Grammar, published by the American Mission, 
Bombay 1854. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



289 



formed by joining to the past participle the same in- 
flexional terminations, as to that of neuter verbs, the 
in pers. of the Sing, and Plur. masc. and fem. and the 
II person of the Plur. fem. being likewise left without 
inflexional terminations. If the Agent is to be ex- 
pressed, this must be put in the Instrumental, the par- 
ticiple past agreeing throughout with its subject (ex- 
pressed or only hinted at) in gender and number. 

The inflexional terminations of the Aorist are: 



Singular. 



Mas c. 




Fem. 


I pers. 


-se 


-se 


II pers. 


-e 


-a (e) 


n pers. 







Plural. 



Masc. 
■SI, su 
■u 



Fem. 



The past participle of neuter and active verbs com- 
monly ends, as we have seen, in yo or io, fem. i. If 
therefore the past participle be of the masc. gender, its 
final o is shortened before the inflexional termination 
of the I person to u = u-se, whereas the final i of 
the fem. gender is changed, as before the other pro- 
nominal suffixes, to ya or ia = ya-se, ia-se; e. g. 

j-^JLi halio, m., gone, I pers. masc. ^jw^i haliu-se, I went 
or have gone , fem. ,jujJ<i halia-se ; in the same way j.^*<3 
ditho, past participle of ^^o disanu, seen: ij^^'o di- 
thu-se, masc. J was seen, fem. ^j^/^o dithia-se or: (j^a^'o 
dithya-se. In poetry though io or yo may keep its 
place before the inflexional termination se, and ia or ya 

may be lengthened to ia or ya, as: j^pj..^ chadio-se, 
I was left, fem. ^LIJ.^^ chadia-se. 

Before the inflexional termination of the II person 
masc, e, final o is dropjDed altogether, as: ^%Xi hali-e, 



Trumpp, Sindhl-Grammar. 



290 SECTION IH. THE VERB. 

tliou hast gone; (j-y^JtS dith-e, tliou wast seen; before 

the inflexional termination of the 11 person fern, a, final 
i is shortened to 'i' = i-a (occasionally also as in the 

masc. to i-e), as: ^^^ hali-a; thou hast gone, ^jJ-gjS 

dithi-a, thou wast seen. 

Li the first person Plural the inflexional termi- 
nation SI (se), su is affixed to the masc. or fem. Plural 

of the past participle, as: ^A^Llii halia-si, we have gone, 

^^^.j^jmlXi haliu-si (fem.); ^j..-«^L^j'j ditha-si, we were 

seen, ^j^j^^I^'S dithiu-si (fem.). 

In the II person masc. the final a of the Plural {IjJ^) 

is shortened before the inflexional termination 'u' = a-u, 

as: ^^i halya-u, you went; t-pt> ditha-u, you were seen; 

to the n person fem. no inflexional termination is added, 
the Plural fem. of the past participle alone being used, 
the subject of which must be indicated either by the 
absolute personal pronoun or gathered from the context. 

It is to be noticed, that in poetry the inflexional 
terminations are frequently left out, in which case the 
subject, if it be not indicated otherwise (by an ab- 
solute personal pronoun etc.)^ must be gleaned from the 
context. 

Annotation. The three praeterite tenses of the Sanskrit, 
with the exception of a few traces (Yarar. YII, 23), have been 
aheady discarded in Prakrit, their formation being apparently 
too intricate for the conception of the vulgar. In their lieu the 
past participle has been substituted in the sense of an A oris t, 
either with or without inflexional terminations^ the Perfect 
proper being denoted by a compound tense. The inflexional 
terminations, which are affixed in Sindhi to the past participle, 
are derived from the Sanskrit substantive verb 'as', to be, though 
they be now so much mutilated and differ so considerably from 
the forms used in Prakrit (Lassen, p. 345), that they are scar- 
cely recognisable. The termination of the I person Sing, -s 



i 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 291 

corresponds to the Sanskrit asmi (Prak. amhi), 'm' having been 
thrown out in SindhT. 

In the II pers. (Sansk. and Prak. asi) s = h, has been 
dropped and final i (e) lengthened in the masc. to e, whereas 
in the feminine the initial 'a' of asi has been retained, and 
the latter half of it dropped altogether. The masculine termi- 
nation i is however also now and then applied to the feminine. 

In the I person Plural the Sanskrit smah (Prakrit amho) 
has been changed to si (s§) or su; in the 11 person masc. the 
Sanskrit stha has been first changed to tha, thence to ha, and 
with the elision of 'h' to V. 

In Hindustani, Panjabi and GujaratT the Aorist is made 
up by the past participle without the addition of inflexional 
terminations, but in Marathi inflexional terminations are affixed 
to the past participle, as in Sindhi. The same is the case in 
Ban gall, but with this difference, that it can form an Aorist 
of the active voice not only from neuter verbs, but also from 
active verbs; in the Passive though it must have recourse to a 
composition. 

3) The Future, 

which implies in Sindhi not only the sense of futurity, 
but also of possibility, uncertainty, is formed 

a) In the Active Voice, by affixing to the 
present participle the same inflexional terminations 
as to the Aorist. 

h) In the Passive Voice, by affiixing to the 
present participle passive the same inflexional termi- 
nations, as to the present participle of the Active. 

Annotation. The SindhT has quite left the traces of the 
Prakrit in forming the Future and fallen back to a composition, 
in order to make up for the lost future tense. It has approached 
in this respect again nearer to the Sanskrit, which likewise forms 
the I Future of the active v.oice by affixing the inflexional ter- 
minations of the substantive verb 'as', to be, to the participial noun 
ending in ta (tr). The modern Arian idioms differ very greatly 
from each other as to the method, in which they form the Future. 
The Hindustani and Panjabi express the Future by means 
of a compound verb; they add to the Potential of a verb the. 
past participle ga (instead of the common gia), from the root 
gam, to go, the gender of which must agree with the subject 

T2 



292 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

in question. This is properly a Desiderative, and not a Fu- 
ture; but already in Sanskrit the Desiderative is now and 
then used in the sense of a Future. Thus we have in Hindu- 
stani IXJ^yS kartin-ga, masc. , and ^Xj^*j karun-gi, fern. I shall 

do, literally: I am gone (IT ga), that I do {^)y^ karti), i. e. 
I will do or shall do; similarly in Panjabi: karanga, masc, ka- 
rangi, fem. 

The Gujarati on the other hand accedes again more clo- 
sely to the Prakrit; the conjunctive vowel of the Prakrit (i) has 
been lengthened in the I person Sing, and Plur. , in order to 
make up for the double ss, which has been reduced to a single 
one (cf. Introd. §. 19), as: lakh -Is, I shall write, Plur. lakh- 
Tsu, we shall write. 

In the II and III person Sing, and Plur. the conjunctive 
vowel has been dropped altogether, as II pers. Sing, lakh-se, 
thou wilt write etc. 

The Future of the Marathi is quite peculiar, and, as it 
seems, made up from the different terminations of the Future, 
used in Prakrit. 

The termination of the I person Sing. In (en) seems to 
have arisen form the Prakrit termination himi (Varar. VII, 12), 
and that of the I person Plural H, from the Prakrit sisi 
(= hisi; Lassen, p. 352), the final ^i' of which has been dropped 
and in compensation thereof medial 'i' lengthened = sis; final 
's' has been hardened to 'r' and thence to T. The II person 
Plur. ends in al, which I would refer to the Prakrit termi- 
nation -ssaha, the latter half of which (aha) seems to have 
been dropped, and the conjunct ss reduced to ""s' by length- 
ening the preceding (conjunctive) vowel = as; ""s' again seems 
to be hardened to r = 1. A similar process appears in the 
III pers. Sing., ending in II (el); the Prakrit termination is 
hidi (= sidi); the initial 'h' has been elided and id(i) length- 
ened to Id, final ^d' being changed at the same time (as it 
is usual in the past participle) to ^T. The III person Plural, 
ending in til is quite perplexing. We would refer to the fact, 
that in Prakrit hittha is also used instead of hissa (tth = ss; 
Lassen, p. 353; Varar. VII, 15), though restricted to the I pers. 
Plural. In Marathi it appears, that tth has also been used in 
the III pers. Plural, so that the III pers. Plural would i^roperly 
terminate in hitthinti ; of this initial hi has been elided and 
the aspirate conjunct tth reduced to tt = t; n is in Marathi 
always dropped in the termination of the III pers. Plural and 



SECTIOI^ III. THE VERB. 293 

in consequence the preceding vowel (i) lengthened; thus we 
get tit, of which final '"t' must have been changed to 1 
= til. 

The Bang all forms the Future by affixing to the root of 
the verb the inflexional termination iba; this is very remark- 
able and without any analogy in any of the Prakrit dialects. 
It reminds us very strongly of the Latin termination bo in the 
formation of the Active Future of the I and II conjugation, which 
Bopp (Comp. Gramm. II, §§. 526, 663) derives from the San- 
skrit bhu. It would be near at hand, to compare this affix 
with the Sindhi affix bo, employed to form the present parti- 
ciple passive; but its origin will hardy allow of such a com- 
parison. 

n. Compound tenses. 

1) The compound Potential. 

The Potential may be compounded: 
a) with the present participle and the Potential 

of the auxiliary verb ^^sn huanu, to be, in order to de- 
note an enduring action or state, as: ^jlli ^(Xxi'C ^*IjT 
I may be reading. 

h) with the past participle and the Potential of 

the auxiliary verb ^ysi^ huanu, to be, as: ^[Is^ j.1!, ^j^^^ 
I my have wandered about; ^^s^ >-^'<^ <j^^ it '^^'^J have 
been seen by me, i. e. I may have seen it. 

2) The present tense. 

The Sindhi has two forms for the Present tense: 

a) The common or indefinite Present tense, which 

denotes, that an action is commenced or going on at the 

time being, is formed by putting after the Potential (and 

occasionally before it) the augment i^j tho^), which must 



1) Instead of ^'J tho: S-aJ peo (fern. z^^^. P^O ^^ ^^^^ used, 
but with this difference, that a more enduring action is thereby de- 
noted. Cf. §. 53, 2. 



294 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

agree with tlie gender of the subject, as: ^^ ^^^ \jy^ 
I go; fern. ^45 ^±i ^^LT I go. 

h) The definite Present, which imphes habit, 
usage or that an action is still going on at the time 
of speaking, is formed by compounding the present par- 
ticiple with the Present of the auxiliary verb ^^sa huanu, 
as: ^; 114^1 JJ.I4X) ij^^j! I am writing, or I am used to 
write; ^5^1 jtXjC^ he is in the habit of weeping. 

In poetry the auxiliary verb is often left out and 
the participle used by itself, determined by a noun or 
pronoun as subject. 

Annotation. The Potential, which, as stated already, re- 
presents the old Present tense , is no longer considered sufficient, 
to express the Present by itself; the augment ^^S th5 is therefore 
added, to render more prominent the sense of the Present. This 
augment j-^ji tho is derived from the Sanskrit adjective ^2f stha 
(as used at the end of compounds) and signifies ^standing', 

as: ^.43* (j'-'^:^. \jy"^'^^ I see, litterally: standing I see, I am in 
the state of seeing. 

In Hindustani tha is used as an augment for forming 
the Imperfect, whereas the common or indefinite Present is 
expressed by the present participle alone, and the definite Present 
by the addition of the auxihary verb hona. The same is the 
case in PanjabT, with the only difference, that the Sanskrit 
stha has been assimilated in Panjabi to sa. In GujaratI the 
indefinite Present is formed by adding the auxiliary (de- 
fective) verb chaii etc., I am etc. (derived from the Sansk. 
substantive verb 'as', to be) to the Potential, as: hii lakhti chau, 
I write, and the definite Present by joining the Present 
of the auxiliary verb hovti, to be, to the present participle, 
as: hu lakho hou chati, I am writing. 

The Marathi forms the common or indefinite Present by 
affixing the inflexional terminations of the Sansk. substantive verb 
'as', to be, to the present participle, ending (originally) in ta, 
with which the terminations coalesce, as t6, tos etc. Besides 
this the Marathi uses three other compound forms for the definite 
Present, the first of which is compounded with the present 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 295 

participle ending in 'at' or 'it', and the irregular form of the 
auxiliary verb asane, viz: ahe, as: mi lihlt ahe, I am writing; 
the second adds the auxiliary verb ahe etc. to the indefinite 
Present ending in to etc., as: mi lihito ahe, I am writing. Both 
these forms of the definite Present , wich do not differ from each 
other as to their signification, denote an action going on or en- 
during at the time of speaking. The third form adds to the 
present participle ending in 'at' or 'it', the regular Present of 
the auxiliary verb asane to be, viz: asato etc., as: ml lihit 
asato, I am in the habit of writing, and implies a habit, 
custom or natural disposition; it may therefore be termed 
the Present Habitual. — The Bangali has, as noticed al- 
ready, a simple Present, formed by affixing the inflexional 
terminations to the root of the verb, and a definite Present 
formed by uniting the auxihary verb achi etc. with the present 
participle ending in ite , the initial a of which is dropped in this 
composition, as: ami dekhitechi, I am seeing. 

3) The Habitual Aorist, 

which implies, that an action was repeated in past time 
or went on at the time indicated, is formed by adding 
to the Aorist the indeclinable augment ^^j* the, which 

may follow or precede it, as the augment of the Present; 

e. g.: ^^ j.j| ^5^ he came (repeatedly), or: was coming. 

This tense is quite peculiar to the Sindhi, no ana- 
logy to it being met wdth in the kindred idioms. The 
indeclinable augment ^^ the is apparently the Lo- 
cative of tho, and signifies: 'in standing', which 
agrees well with the import of this tense. 

4) The Imperfect, 

which denotes, that an action was progressing or re- 
peated at a particular time past, is formed by adding 
to the present participle the Aorist of the auxiliary verb 

^^si^ huanu, as: ^^s^ jjJK I was wandering about; 

g^j.;5> 3-^:»4>jJ I was being driven out. The Imperfect may 

be rendered more emphatic by premising the past par- 



296 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

ticiple^j pio (lia^n.ng fallen), as: ui \5d^'i [1j> ^, they 
were in the habit of seeing. 

Annotation. In Hindustani the Imperfect is formed, as 
already alluded to, by adding tha to the present participle; 
the same is the case in Panjabi, which adds sa; the Ma- 
ra thi joins the Aorist of the auxiliary verb asane, viz: 
hoto etc. to the present participle ending in at or it. The 
same method is kept to in Gujarati and Bangali, in the 
latter language with the slight difference , that the Aorist of the 
auxiliary verb (viz: chilam etc.) is coalescing with the participle 
present. 

5) The Perfect, 
which implies an action, that has been completed in 
time past, is formed by adding the auxiliary verb ^Llgil 
ahiya etc. to the past participle, as: ^Ll^il ^^^ I am 
gone, ,jLl^l JL^X^^ I have been seized. 

Annotation, All the kindred idioms form the Perfect in the 
same way as the Sindhi, by adding the Present of the auxiliary 
verb to the past participle. 

6) The Pluperfect, 

which implies an action, that has been completed in 
remote past time chiefly in relation to some other time^ 
expressed or only understood, is formed by adding the 

Aorist of the auxiliary verb J^pe huanu to the past par- 
ticiple, as: ^i.55 £.^i I had gone; ^j^ isi^^ ^ ^^^ 
been enticed (fern.). 

Annotation. In Hindustani and Panjabi the Pluperfect 
is formed by adding tha and sa respectively to' the past par- 
ticiple. In Marathi the Aorist hot6 etc. is joined to the past 
participle and similarly in Gujarati hato etc. In Bangali 
(which must not resort to a passive construction in the case of 
transitive verbs, as the other idioms) the Aorist of the au- 
xiliary verb, viz: chilam etc. is united with the past participle 
ending in ya. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 297 

7) The compound Future tenses. 

There are two compound Future tenses in Sindhi: 

a) The one is compounded with the participle 

present and the Future of the auxiHary verb ^^^i 
huanu, which may be termed the Definite Future, 

as: (j^JLj^i jtXllo I shall be seeing. 

h) The other is compounded with the past par- 
ticiple and the Future of the auxiliary verb ^^ysi^ huanu, 
and may be termed the Past Future, as: j^tXj^5& ^XXs^ 
I shall have gone; jtVjj.i ^(Xl ^i he will have been bound. 

Both these tenses do not only denote futurity in 
its strict sense, but imply also possibility, uncertainty 
or doubt. 



Chapter XIV. 

The auxiliary verbs. 
§• 49. 

9 ^9 

A. The auxiliary verb ^^^ huanu, to be. 

Before we can fully develope the conjugational process 
of the Sindhi, we must first describe the inflexion of the 

auxiliary verb ^^5> huanu, to be, by means of which 
the compound tenses of other verbs are being made up. 

Infinitive: ^^^p^ hu-anu, to be. 

Imperative. 
SING. PLUR. 

II pers. ^^ or i.^s^ be thou. ^5> or j-^i be ye. 
ho ho-u, ho hu-o, 



298 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 
Precative. 



II pers. 



SING. 

^^i hu-ije 
12^ ho-ije 



PLUR. 



e 



iS liu-ju 



mayst thou be. 



^ hu-jo, 
may ye be. 



^3^ lio-je 

Participles. 

1) Present participle: jtXj^^ litindo, being. 

2) Past j)articiple: ^sn bo, j.^ buo, baving been 

Verbal nonn. 
^^s& bn-ano, being. 

I. THE POTENTIAL. 

1) THE SIMPLE POTENTIAL. 

SINGULAR. 

I pers. ^jL^ ^jLa55 ^jySf au bu-a, buj-a, I may be. 
II pers. ^A^ ^'^ (j^ tu bu-e, buj-e, tbou mayst be. 

III pers. ^^^ ^a;d ysa bu bu-e; buj-e, be may be. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. (j^-^ ccj^^ e>^^ ^^^ ■^^' buj-ti, we may be. 
II pers. j.^ ^j.a;s j^5> jj.a^I abi bo, bu-o, buj-o, you 

may be. 
Ill pers. jj.^ cu^^ cc^"^"^ ^^ 1^^^ bn-ane, btine, buj-ane, 

tbey may be. 
In tbe II pers. Sing. ^-^ cij-tV^^ bu-i, buj-i is equally 
in use. In poetry we meet in tbe III person Sing, fre- 
quently &ys£> bo-e, instead of ^Xsi^ bu-e. 



SECTION III. THE VEKB. 299 

2) THE COMPOUND POTENTIAL. 

a) The present participle with the Potential 

^Lp5 etc. 'May be being'. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^L^ cijL^ jtXj^^^) ^l^ ^^^ ^<^^^^ 
htindo hu-a, huj-a. hundi hu-a, huj-a. 

II pers. ^^s:^ cU^^^ jtXJ^^D ^-ti^ eO"-^^ C5^^^^ 

htindo hu-e, hnj-e. himdi hu-e, huj-e. 
Ill pers. ^^ .^A^ 3<Xj^;o ^^ ^^^^ ^^-^^^ 

htindo hue, huj-e. htindi hu-e, huj-e. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. ^y^ ,^yi \d<:^yk ^y^ , ^yi UP^^>^ 

htinda hu, huj-u. htindiu^) hu, huj-u. 

II pers. j.^ ^j=A^ ItXJ^^ y^ ^y.i ^^jjo^i 

htinda hu-5, huj-o. htindiu hu-o, huj-o. 
Ill pers. ^^ (^-^^ 1 4X3^^ ^''c^ ^^li jjptXJ^^ 

htinda hu-ane, huj-ane. htindiu hu-ane, huj-ane. 
h) The past participle with the Potential 
^jllsa etc. 'May have been'. 
SINGULAR. 
I pers. ^Lis ^Is^ huo hua. ^lls& ^^s& hui hua. 
II pers. ^j^^sn „ „ hue. (j^^ ?, ,j hue. 

Ill pers. ^^;d „ „ hue. ^^i „ „ hue. 



TT i 



1) The absolute personal pronouns are left out in the following 
tenses, as they may be easily supplied. 

2) The Plural fern. ^•.j^j&^D hundiu may also be pronounced 
and written ^^..JtXJfcSS hundyu or ,^«.JtXJfc5& hundiyu, and so all the 
present participles in the fem. Plural. 



300 


SECTION III. 


THE VERB. 




Masc. 


Fem. 




PLUKAL. 


I pers. 


(jyo U^ hua hu. 


^y^ ^y^ ^^1^ ^^' 


n pers. 


>^^ „ „ huo. 


j.^ „ „ huo. 


Ill pers. 


^jli> „ „ huane. 


^^ „ „ huane 



II. THE PRESENT. 
1) THE INDEFINITE PRESENT. 

The Potential with -^^s th5. 
^I am'. 

SINGULAR. 

I pers. ^j ^Lli hna tho. ^^ ^L^s hua thi. 

II pers. j..g.j (j^^ hue tho. ^45 ^j^lsa hue thi. 

Ill pers. yj^ ^ik hue tho. ^^ ^ik hue thi. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. L4-5 ^ya hu tha. ^y-"^ (j^ ^fi ^liifi- 

n pers. 1^3 j.^^ huo tha. ijy^ }^k ^^^ tliiS- 

III pers. L^* jjj^ huane tha. ^^^-3 (j»-S» huane thiu. 

Old Present of the Sansk. substantive verb 
'as' to be. 'I am'. 
SING. PLUR. 

I pers. ^LI^jT ahiya. jj^i^T ahiyu. 

II pers. (j^-s^jf c ^j*^\ ahe, ahi. j-aj^I ahijo. 
Ill pers. ^f ahe. ^j*^^ ? ^j^^ ahine, ahine. 

This form is commonly used in the Present, and 

always in compound tenses, whereas i^j* ,jLa;o hua tho 
is seldom to be met with, and never in a compound 
tense. 



SECTIOX III. THE VERB. 301 

The initial vowel a is often found without a nasal 
sound as: ^llsef ahira instead of ^ll^t ahiya. "When J if 
ko na. i 1^ ka na. J ^f lu na not any one etc. precedes 
suL they are contracted to ^-pi5^ konhe, ^-^^ kanhe, 
^^vUS^kinhe; J na. not. preceding ^ll^l etc. may coa- 
lesce with it. as: .^^ilS nahe or: ^s^\ j na ahe. he is not. 

2) THE DEPINITE PRESENT. 

The present participle with the auxiliary: ^il^\ 

'1 am being'. 

SIXGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^ \1^T 3 Joy^ ^ U^iT ^ J^^ J 

hundo ahiya. hundi ahiya. 

n pers. ^^^.y^^fjjLj^ hundo ahe. ^j.>^^ ^^-^^^ hundi ahe. 

ni pers. ^T „ ,, ahe. ^T „ ,, ahe. 

PLURAL. 

hunda ahiyu. hundiu ahiyii. 

II pers. ix^T \(XiySSi y^ ^^d<^^ 

hunda ahiyo. hundiu aliiyo. 

ni pers. ^T to. J^ ^T ^^d^J^ 

hunda ahini, hundiu ahine. 

III. THE BIPEEFECT. 

The present participle with the Aorist of the 
auxiliarv: v^^^j. 'I was' or: 'was Ijeino-'. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^yS^ 3 Jo»iD hund(5 hose. ij^Zs^ ^ JJ^js hundi huyase. 



302 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

Masc. Fern. 

II pers. ^^^i yiX^^sn hundo hue. ^jl^i '3^'^y^ Mndi huia^). 

Illpers. j.;& jdi^i himdo ho. ^^ ^^%k (^dj^i 

hundi hui, hi. 
PLURAL. 



:6' 



I pers. ^AAA;L;a tdi^^s 
hunda huasi. 

II pers. j.^^ ^yjJ^ \3<^yk 

hunda hua-u, hu5. 
Ill pers. Li ^\li> ItXi^i 
hunda hua, ha. 



hundiu huyusi. 

^y^^ \jy^^y^ 
hundiu huyu. 

hundiu huyu. 



ly. THE AORIST. 

1) THE SIMPLE AORIST. 

The past participle with the inflexional ter- 
minations. 'I was', or: 'have been'. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fem. 



I pers. ^^sn hose. 
II pers. ^J.^Xs^ hue. 

Ill pers. J.5& ho. 



PLURAL. 



I pers. ^j^lls^ hua-si. 

II pers. j.is ^^Xs^ j^aP5 

hua-u, hu-o, ho. 

Ill pers. li ^[li hua, ha. 



yjj^ huy-ase. 

^^^^ J ^l^i hui-a, hui-e. 

.^^i hui. 

^J^J^^y^ huyu-sl. 
^^ huyu, 

^^ huyu. 



1) Or ^^jJXls^ huie 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 303 

Instead of ,j.^U5> liua-si, ^^^L^J hua-sUj the con- 
tracted forms ij^A^L^ ha-si, ^.^Li hasu, are also in 

use. — The inflexional terminations are now and then 
dropped altogether, but in this case the absolute per- 
sonal pronoun must always be prefixed, as: i.s^ ^y^^^ 
au ho, I was etc. 

2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. 

The simple Aorist with ^^ the. 
'I used to be'. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 



I pers. ^^^ (j^jja hose the. ^^S ^j*^ hujase the. 
etc. etc. etc. etc. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. ^^ ^A*wU;& huasi the. ^^ ^^..k^^ huvus! the. 
etc. etc. etc. etc. 

• V. PERFECT I 

VI. PLUPEEFECT j ^^^^ "^ ^^^^• 

YII. THE FUTURE. 

The present participle with the inflexional 
terminations. 'I shall be'. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. (j^Jo^5& hundu-se. ^j^Ju^ hundia-se^), 

II pers. ^j Jo^5> htind-e. ^'^^ htindi-a ^). 

HI pers. jjoyo hundo. (^tXjyo hundL 

1) Instead of ^jj^^iX^».S^ hundia-se we find also ^J*^^iX^yS^ hundi- 
yase or ij*^^(Xi^ liundjase. 

2) Or (j^Jo^ hundi-e. 



304 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

PLURAL. 
Masc. Fen. 

I pers. jjju^lJJ^i hunda-si. ^J^^yiiXiysa hundiu-si. 

II pers. j<X:^5> c;<^y^ ijp^^^^ htindiu. 

Mnda-u, hundo. 
ni pers. \(XiyS!i hunda. ^^tAJ^^s hundiu. 

The compound future tenses are not in use. 

As from all neuter verbs, so also from this auxiliary 
an impersonal or passive form may be derived, as 

III pers. Sing. Present ^^ cs^j^ ho-ije tho, literally 

it is been; III pers. Sing. Future: j-aj^^ ho-ibo, literally 

it will be been. 

Annotation. The root i^ ho (Inf. ^yS^ hu-anu) corresponds 
to the Sansk. root ^ bhu, to become, which is assimilated in 

Prakrit to ho or huva ; the past participle of it is in Prakrit 
huo or huo, thence the Sindhi huo. In reference to the 
Potential huja etc., it is to be kept in mind, that Prakrit 
uses already for the Present (and Future) such forms as hojja, 
hojja etc., which Lassen derives from the Sansk. Precative iT^TfT 
(Lassen, p. 357). 

The root ho is used in all the kindred idioms. 

The old Present ^jLa^j! ahiya, I am, is derived from the 
Present of the Sansk. substantive verb ^^ 'as' to be, Prakrit 
amhi etc. The Mar at hi form of it approaches very closely 
to that of the Sindhi, as: ahe etc. In Hindustani (hi, hai, 
hai etc.) initial 'a', which has been lengthened in Sindhi and 
Marathi, has been dropped; the same is the case in Panjabi, 
as ha, hai, hai etc. In Gujarati, where initial 'a' has been 
likewise thrown off, we find the forms chati, che, che etc., 

which correspond to the Prakrit form ^f^Sf acchi etc. (Lassen, 
p. 266, 346). In Bang all we meet with the still more primi- 
tive form achi etc. 



SECTION III. THE YERB. 305 

§. 50. 

B. The auxiliary verb ^-^ thianu, to become, to be. 

The verb ^\y^ thianu, to become, to be, is also 

partly used as an auxiliary verb. Its compound tenses 

are made up by means of the auxiliary verb ^y^ huanu. 

Infinitive. 

^^^1^ thi-anu, to become, to be. 

Imperative. 
SING. PLUE. 

n pers. ^Ja^j thl-u, jX^' Cy^^ thi-o, thi-5, 

become thou. become ye. 

Precative. 
n pers. ^j^ ,^ thi-je, thi-Je. y^s ,y^ thi-Jo, thi-Jo. 

mayst thou become. may you become. 

Participles. 

1) Present participle: jJ^wU^j thi-ndo, becoming. 

2) Past participle: jl^* thi-o, become. 

3) Past conjunctive participles: 

^ thi ] 

j^^j thi-o ^ having' become. 

^/ ^ thi kare 

4) Verbal noun: j.il^* thi-ano, becoming, being. 

I THE POTEi^TIAL. 

1) THE SIMPLE POTENTIAL. 

'May become'. 
SING. PLUR. 

I pers. ^jU^j thi-a. ^jy^ thi-u. 

II pers. ^J*-v4^' ^ ^v^-vl^* thi-e, thi. a,^- thi-o. 

III pers. ^^' thi-e. ^j.^-j^j^^ithi-ane,thi-ne. 

Trumpp, Sindhi-Grrammar. XJ 



'to 



306 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

2) COMPOUND POTENTIAL. 

a) The present participle with the Potential of 
^yk huanu. 'May be becoming'. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^lls^ 3<A«^v4J* e^^^ iS^^-fi^ 

thindo hua. thindi hua. 

II pers. ^j«f^ j^^^^j*' (j*^^^ ^s^^"^ 

thindo hue. thindi hue. 

in pers. ^a5& jcXaa^* thindo hue. ^Jjd ^iXX/^3 thindi hue. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. jj^5> IlXAa^j jj^^e ^^^iXx^'J 

thinda hu. thindiu hu. 

II pers. j.^ I^^x-v^j thinda hu5. jXs^ ,j^j<Xu^* thindiu huo. 

Ill pers. ^jli ldA-^43 ^i ^^jJ^aa^* 

thinda huane. thindiu huane. 

h) The past participle with the Potential of 

^l5^ huanu. 'May have become'. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern, 

I pers. (^ ^m jX^ thio hua. ^jLiO ^'s thi hua. 

II pers. ,j^^ „ „ hue. ^^aP ,, „ hue. 

in pers. ^%i ,y „ hue. ^a^ „ „ hue. 

PLURAL. * 

I pers. jj^5& U.^j thia hu. ^^yo ^^j^^ thiu hu. 

n pers. j.A;fi „ „ huo. j.^;» „ „ huo. 

Ill pers. ^i „ „ huane. ^Isa „ „ huane. 



1) Or jjL^ liuja etc. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 307 

II. THE PRESENT. 
1) THE PRESENT INDEFINITE. 

The Potential with s.^* tho. 
'I become'. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. j.^* ^j^-^' thia tho. ^^ ^'-^^* ^^i^ ^hi. 
II pers. y^ ^-v^' ^^i§ ^^^. ^4J j.^^^* thie thi. 
Ill pers. j.^* ^^- thie tho. ^i* ^I^* thie thi. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. L^* ^y^-^ thiu tha. ^yJ<^ ^y^ ^^i^ ^^i^- 
II pers. \J^ j.^* thio tha. ^jy^ y^ thio thiu. 

III pers. L^j* (j-^-^J* thiane tha. ^;^j c^^■^* thiane thiu. 

2) THE PRESENT DEFINITE. 

The present participle with ,jLI.gil ahiya etc. 
'I am becoming', etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^Ll^T 3<XiAf^* ^^if^ (54^^f^' 

thindo ahiya. thindi ahiya. 

II pers. ^j^^T 3<Xu^* c>^^^ ^^^^j* 

thindo ahe. thindi ahe. 

Ill pers. ^T jiXiA^ ^s^\ ^iXL^ 

thindo ahe. thindi ahe. 

U2 



308 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 
PLURAL. 



Masc. 
I pers. ^j^tr%^ ItLu^j 
thinda ahiyu. 
n pers. jjt^l ttXvU4J»" 

thmda ahiyo. 
in pers. ^^j^l IcXaa^J 
thinda ahine. 



Fern. 



tliindiu ahiyu. 
thiiidiu ahiyo. 
thindiu ahine. 



m. THE BiPEKFECT. 

The present participle with ^^s^ hose etc. 

'I was becoming' etc. 

SINGULAR. 



Masc. 
I pers. y^jjs j iXx^ 
thindo hose. 
n pers. jj.^ 3^^H^* 
thindo hue. 



thindi huyase. 
thindi huia. 



m pers. J.5& j JUa4> thindo ho. ^^ ^^^Xk^ thindi hui. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. ^^\ls^ It3u-V4^' 
thinda huasi. 
n pers. f t^ l<i.^^* 
thinda hua-u. 



m pers. L^ IJUa^' 
thinda hua. 



thindiu huyusi. 
thindiu huyu. 
thindiu huyu. 



1) Or ^-VAAiS huie. 



2) Or yXsSi liuo, lio. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 309 

lY. THE AOEIST. 

1) THE SIMPLE AOEIST. 

The past participle with the inflexional ter- 
minations. 'I became' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern, 

I pers. (yjl^ thiuse^). c/*^^' thiase. 

n pers. ^^>A%i* thie. f ij*^* ^^i^- 

in pers. ^j^ thio. ^ thi. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. ^j^\.j^ thiasi. ^^^^^yl^'s thiusi. 

n pers. j.^* c^4^* thia-u, thio. ^^-^' thiu. 

m pers. \j^ thia. ^^-^ i^au. 



2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. 

The simple Aorist with ^^ the. 
'I was becoming, was in the habit to become' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^^ n*^>^ thiuse the. .^j^ u^--^* thiase the. 

etc. etc. etc. etc. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. ^j jj^aa;La4j ^^j ^j^h^yl^ thiusi the. 

thiasi the. 
etc. etc. etc. etc. 



1) In poetry often: ^y^ thiose, fern. u^L^^' thiase. 

2) Or: ^AA^* thie. 



310 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

V. THE PEEFECT. 

The past participle with the auxiliary ^ll^jTahiya. 

'I have become' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ijLlgjf j.^.^* thio ahiya. ^La.^1 ^4j* thi ahiya. 

n pers. ^A^T „ „ ahe. ^^^jj „ „ ahe. 

Ill pers. ^5>T „ „ ahe. ^^M „ „ ahe. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. ^^l^T C^ thia ahiyu. ^^-fjT ^jy^ 

thiu ahiyu. 
n pers. j.A^I „ „ ahiyo. j.a^I ^y^^ thiu ahiyo. 

ni pers. ^^^ „ „ ahine. ^j^ „ „ ahine. 

YI. THE PLUPEEFECT. 

The past participle with the Aorist ^J^ys^ hose etc. 
*I had become' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. (j/.j.5i ^^^ thio hose. q^J^ ^^ thi huyase. 
n pers. ^^i J, „ hue. ^j^^ ?? 55 huia. 

HI pers. ^ „ „ ho. ^^Xs^ „ „ hm. 

PLURAL. 



i 



I pers. ^*wjU;o Ll^' ^/.^'^^/^ ^y^'-^ 

thia huasi. thiu huyusi. 

n pers. yli La^j thia hua-u. ^^li u^"^"^ ^^^^^ huyu. 

in pers. La^ „ „ hua. ^yi „ „ huyu. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 311 

Vn. THE FUTUEE. 
1) THE SIMPLE OR INDEFINITE FUTURE. 

The present participle with the inflexional 
terminations. 'I shall become' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. j^Ju-^' thinduse. jj^tX-u^* thmdiase^). 

n pers. (J^jlVaa^' thinde. ^^Xk^^ thindia.^) 

m pers. 3 Jcaa4j thindo. ^^^^x^ thmdi. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. ^j^tjOx^j thindasi. ^^..K^y^iXj^^'S thmdiusi. 

n pers. ^Jcaa^* thinda-n. ^) ^^(XXk^ thindiu. 

Ill pers. iJ^-u^-^' thinda. ^j^jJuU.^* thindiu. 

2) COMPOUND FUTURE TENSES. 

a) The definite Future. 

9 9 

The present participle with the Future j^tUys 
htinduse etc. 'I shall be becoming' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

1 pers. (jwtXi*;© y^^k^^ jj^^ocXj^^d ^iXkj^^ 

thindo htinduse. thindi hundiase. 

~II pers. ^^d^ysa jtLu^^' ^jjjo^^s ^^x^jp 

thindo hunde. thindi hiindia. 

Ill pers. jtXJ^^i jjo-y^* ^iX^ysa <^Cs.x^S 

thindo hundo. thindi hundi. 



1) Or (jjjJcXaa.^* thmdiyase, (jw.JtXAX.gJ' thindyase. 

2) Or ^j^iXU.^* thindie. 

3) Or jcXaa^j thindo. 



312 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern. 

thinda Mndasi. thindiu litindiusi. 

11 pers. ^(X^^sQ ^iXx^ ^^iXh^^ ^^jdJ./^ 

tliinda hunda-u. tliindiu Mndiu. 

Ill pers. f4XJj.5i^ ^(XXj^ ^^^^Xj^s^ ^j^j^Xaa^J 

tliinda hiinda. thmdiu Mndiu. 

h) The past Future. 

The past participle with the Future (jjwtXjj.5D hunduse. 

'I shall have become' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

ipers. (jjjcX,Je.5& j.A=^j' (j^j4X.J9=55 z^-^' 

thio hunduse. thi htindiase. 

etc, etc. etc. etc. 

PLURAL. 

1 pers. j^^A-W/f^XJajS La^J ^J.AAW.Je=J4Xi*=5S ^^yj^^ 

thia htindasi. thiu hundiusi. 

etc. etc. etc. etc. 



Chapter XV. 

Inflexion of the regular verb. 

§. 51. 
A. Inflexion of the neuter or intransitive verb. 

All the neuter verbs end in the Imperative in 'u' 
(§. 43) and in the participle present in ando (§. 44). 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



313 



But there is also a considerable number of transitive 
verbs ending in tlie Imperative in \i' and in the par- 
ticiple present in an do, ^'hich take in consequence 
thereof the same inflexional terminations as the neuter 
verbs, with the only difference, that in the Past Tenses 
they must invariably resort to the passive con- 
struction. 

We exhibit now the inflexion of a regular neuter 
verb. 

Infinitive. 

(J^JLS hal-anu, to go. 

Imperative. 
SIXG. PLUR. 

U pers. Jlso hal-u , go thou. Jbs hal-5 , go ye. 

Precative. 

hal-i] e , , 

^ ' mayst i - i, i -v - 

'^ ^..^sjd hai-ij-o, may ye go. 



,-li> hal-iju, 



thou D'o. 



Participles: 

1) present participle: jjuii hal-ando, going. 

2) past participle: z^J<i hal-io, having gone. 

3) past conjunctive participles: 

J^ hal-i, 

j^^ hal-io, 

cs4^ hal-iji, 

r^S J^ hal-1 kare, 

Verbal noun. 



having gone. 



■^Xki hal-ano, going, 



314 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



I. THE POTENTIAL. 
I) THE SIMPLE POTENTIAL. 

'I may go' etc. 



SING. 



PLUR. 



I pers. ^J'3^i ^^^1 an hal-a. ^^i^ ^j-^\ asi lial-u. 
II pers. jj^io jj^' til hal-e. ^ ^^^^\ ah! lial-5. 
ni pers. ^^ii ySb hvL lial-e. ^X^ ya hu hal-ane. 

2) COMPOUND POTENTIAL. 

a) The present participle with the Potential 

^jLs& hna etc. 'I may be going'. 

SINGULAR. 



Masc. 


\Fem, 


I pers. ,jLi jiXllii 


^La^ (^tXUU halandi hna. 


halando hna. 




II pers. ^jjfisii jtXiii 


,j^ „ „ hue. 


halando hne. 




in pers. ^^ jdJli 


(^^ „ „ hue, 


halando hne. 






PLURAL. 


I pers. ^^sa l<xUi 


9 ^ T " 


halanda hu. 


halandin hu. 


II pers. j.^ ftuii 


^^ ^^jtuiS 


halanda hno. 


halandin hno. 


Ill pers. ^li \i\jli 


5 J i^ -r ^ 


halanda huane. 


halandin huane. 



SECTION m. THE VE^B. 315 



S f 



h) The past participle with the Potential ^CJa 
'I may have gone'. 

SIXGULAE. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^Li ill5 haho hiia. ^Li J^ hall hiia. 

n pers. ^j^ „ „ hue. ^j^ ,, ,, hue. 

Ill pers. ^.k ., .. hue. ^^ „ .. hue. 

Sr 1 " St I 

PLUE-IL. 

I pers. ^yc llii haha hii. ^^ \jy^ haliu hu. 
n pers. i^ ., ,, huo. ilk ., ., huo. 

in pers. ^j^ 5. ,j huane. ^^^ „ „ huane. 



II. THE PEESEXT. 
1) THE PEESENT INDEPimTE. 

The Potential with i-p tho. 
'I o'o' etc. 

SLNTtULAR. 
2Iasc. Fern. 

I pers. i^j' ^^k hala tho. ^ ^^^-^ ^^'^1^^ ^lii- 

n pers. ^ j-iv^ lit^^l? tho. ^^ ^-rV^ 1^^"^!? thi. 
EH pers. i^ Jyh hale tho. ^^ JJ^ hale thi. 

PLUEAL. 

I pers. L^j- ^J<k halu tha. or*^" ur^^ -^^-^^^ ^^^^' 

n pers. 14j' J.1S halo tha. ^y^ r^ ^^"^^"^ '^^^^^■ 

EH pers. L^j- ^i halane tha. ^^^ ^^ halane thiu. 



316 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

2) THE PRESENT DEFINITE. 

The present participle with ^Ll^T ahiya etc. 
^I am going" etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^Ll^iT jtxlii (j^-V4^T ^tuli 

halando ahiya. halandi ahiya. 

II pers. ,jj^T 3 JcH^ ^j-^T (5^^i 

halando ahe. halandi ahe. 
ni pers. isTjJuii halando ahe. saj ^(XlXi halandi ahe. 

PLURAL, 
I pars. ^Jy^l liXlU u>^^ (j^jjUi 



halanda ahiyu. 


halandiu ahiyu. 


n pers. j^T fjul^ 




halanda ahiyo. 


halandiu ahiyo. 


n pers. ^4jT ItxiU 


^^■fM tj>>^li^ 


halanda ahine. 


halandiu ahine. 



m. THE n^iPEEFECT. 

The present participle with ^^s^ hose etc. 

'I was going' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fem. 

1 pers. ^^si jcX^ii U*^^ (J^^-^^ 

halando hose. halandi huyase. 

n pers. ^j^^ ^iXxXi \J^^ ^iXlXi 

halando hue. halandi huia. 

m pers. ^s^ jjJjLi halando ho. ^%i ^^^^ halandi hui. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 
PLURAL. 



317 



Masc. 
I pers. ^^m \iXxXi 
halanda hnasi. 

XT i-^ > ^ -r ^ 

il pers. ^Ais I JaA55 

halanda hua-u. 
in pers. iXs^ ijJLli 

halanda hua. 



Fern. 
halandiu huyusi. 
halandiu huyu. 
halandiu huyu. 



lY. THE AOEIST. 
1) THE SIMPLE AOEIST. 

The past participle with the inflexional ter 
minations. 'I went' etc. 



Masc. 
I pers. ^jZX^ haliu-se. 

II pers. ijoXl^ hali-e. 

in pers. ^Xi halio. 



SINGULAR. 



Fern. 
fjjjjiXi halia-se. 

^^5 hali-a.^) 

JLi halL 



PLURAL. 



I pers. tj^HXi halia-si. 



^^^j^/Ji haliu-si. 



n pers. ^LLi» halya-u. ^^^ haliu. 

in pers. ilXi halm. U^^^^ haliu. 

2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. 

The simple Aorist with ^^^ the. 

'I used to go' etc. 
SINGULAR. 

I pers. ^^ (j^^Ili haliuse the. ^^^ ^j^i haliase the. 
etc. etc. etc. etc. 



1) Or (jj^-JjO hali-e. 



318 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

PLURAL. 
Masc, Fern. 

I pers. ^ ^jju^uii ^ ^jj^yjJ^ 

haliasi the. haliusi the. 

etc. etc. etc. etc. 

y. THE PERFECT. 

The past participle with ^UL^jT ahiya etc. 
'I am gone' or 'have gone' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Tern. 

I pers. ^jUL^TjXj.^ halio ahiya. ^jLl^T J^i^ hali ahiya. 
II pers. ^j^J „ „ ahe. ^j^J „ „ ahe. 
in pers. s^\ „ „ ahe. i»| „ „ ahe, 

PLURAL. 

I pers. ^^j^jf Ldi haha ahiyu. ^y^\ ^y^^ haliu ahiyu. 

II pers. j-v^l „ „ ahiyo. j.^i»| „ „ ahiyo. 

Ill pers. ^^T „ „ ahine. ^j^J „ „ ahine. 

VI. THE PLUPERFECT. 

The past participle with the Aorist ^^s^ hose. 
'I was gone' or 'had gone' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fem, 

I pers. ^^st j.^5 halio hose. yj^Ii JkS hall huyase. 
n pers. jjnaa^ „ „ hue. ^jj^s^ „ „ huia. 
m pers. $.^ „ „ ho. ^%k „ „ huL 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 319 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^j^U^a Ldi ^jj^^^^sa ^jy^Xi 

halia liuasi. haliu huyusi. 

II pers. yli \lXi halia hua-u. ^jy^sa ijy^i haliu huyu. 

Ill pers. U5& „ ,5 hua. (j^^ j? ?? huyu. 

VII. THE FUTURE. 
1) THE SIMPLE or INDEFINITE FUTURE. 

The present participle with the inflexional 
terminations. 'I shall go' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

1 pers. ^J^^^lXi halandu-se. ^i\xXi halandia-se.^) 

n pers. ^j.jtXLLi haland-e. ^tXlli halandi-a.^) 

Ill pers. j jJii halando. ^^^XxX^ halandi. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. ^j.j^\3<xXi halanda-si. ^xwi^jtXlXi halandiu-si. 

II pers. ^jjjl^ halanda-u. ^^S jjj.i halandiu. 

Ill pers. \(\xXi halanda. ^ptXAli halandiu. 



2) COMPOUND FUTURE TENSES. 

a) The definite Future. 

9 t\ 

The present participle with ^iXj^s^ hunduse. 

'I shall be going' etc. 
SINGULAR. 

I pers. fj^iXJySt jiXaI^ ij^iXj^s^ ,^i\xXi 

halando hunduse. halandi hundiase. 



1) Or ^JMJ)^\xXs^ halandiyase, ^J*J^^^\xks^ halandyase. 

2) Or f^^j^iXxXs^ halandi-e. 



320 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 
SINGULAR. 



Masc. 
n pers. jj^^<\j^55 jjJii 

halando hunde. 
m pers. 3 Joy© j djJJi 

halando Mndo. 



Fern. 
halandi hundia. 
halandi htindi. 



PLURAL. 






halanda hundasi. 
n pers. ^Jo^5^ ItXLU 

halanda hunda-u. 
m pers. ljo^55 ItX-i-Us 

halanda hunda. 



halandiu hundiusi. 
halandiu hundiu. 
halandiu hundiu. 



2)) The Past Euture. 

The past participle with the Future ^^jo^^o 

hunduse. 'I shall have (be) gone' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

I pers. ijwtXj^P j^i {j^jtXi^55 ,^5 

hah5 hunduse. hali htindiase. 

n pers. ^^d^J^ }^i ^^h^ <^^ ^^^^ hundia. 

halio hunde. 
m pers. j.Joys 3.^ halio hundd. ^^ Jo^i „ „ hundi. 

PLURAL. 



I pers. ^j.-u*;ljo^5> Lii 
halia hundasi. 
n pers. ^Jo^5> La^i 

halia hunda-u. 
Ill pers. tJoy& Llli 
halia hunda. 



hahu hundiusi. 
hahu hundiu. 
haliu hundiu. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 321 

Neuter verbs very often take in the Potential and 
in the Present tense the passive form, without al- 
tering in any way their signiiication, and are then in- 
flected like other passive verbs (see the inflexion of the 

passive verb), as: fjy^i>^ pharanu, v. n., to be fruitful, 

or ^j^l^j phar-j-anu; ^j^i'p v. n., lurhanu, to float, or 

^^V lurhe-j-anu, ^'U^ kaviranu, v. n., to be angry 

or fj^^'U^ kavir-j-anu, ^if v. n. acanu, to come, (j^iv-^^l 
ac-ij-anu, ^^S ^'' '^' pavanu, to fall, or ^J-^^^ P^^-ij^ 
anu etc. 

The m pers. Sing, of neuter verbs in the passive form 
is frequently employed impersonally throughout all the 
tenses with the exception of the Aorist and Perfect, as: 

^^^i halije, it may be gone, ^j ^s^^ halije tho, it is 

gone, ^55} i.Ai halibo ahe, it is being gone, j.^^ ijdi 

halibo ho, it was being gone; zjJii halibo, it will 

be gone. 

Many neuter verbs are in Smdhi considered both 
active and neuter, and therefore in the Past tenses 
constructed either as neuter (i. e. personally) or as tran- 
sitive verbs (i. e. passively, the agent being put in 

the Instrumental), as: ^j^^'U virhiuse, I quarrelled or: 

3^^) 5 UT* -"^^ virhio, by me it was quarrelled, from ^i'U 

virhanu, v. n., to quarrel; ^jJ^Jl^ khiliuse, I laughed, 

or: j^JL^ ^.^ mu khilio, by me it was laughed, from 

i^^ khilanu, v. n., to laugh; but ^.s ruanu, v. n., to 

weep, is always constructed passively in the past tenses, 

as: ^j^^Lis runa-i, he wept (it was wept by him). 

On the other hand there are also some active verbs 

Trumpp, Sindlil-G-rammar. X 



322 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

(but ending in tlie Imperative in 'u'), which are con- 
structed in the Past tenses like neuter verbs, and not 

passively, as: y^^^X^ sikhiuse, I learnt (not ylj^i^ ^^) 

from. ^^)J^^ sikhanu, v. a., to learn; j^lCw sikiase, I 

longed for, from ^X!**. sikanu, v. a., to long for. 



§. 52. 
B) Inflexion of the transitive verb. 

The inflexion of the transitive and causal verb 
agrees on the whole with that of the neuter verb in the 
Potential, the Present, the Imperfect and the Fu- 
ture; but it differs from the inflexion of the neuter verb 
by being destitute of the Past Tenses of the Active 
Voice, which must be circumscribed by the 'past tenses 
of the Passive Voice, the past participle of transitive 
verbs having always a passive signification. The agent 
must therefore in the past tenses be put in the In- 
strumental, or it may, if that be a pronoun, be affixed 
to the past participle in the shape of a Suffix. It is 
understood, that the past participle passive must agree 
with its substantive in gender and number, as well as 
the adjective. 

Prom every transitive and causal verb (and partly 
also, as noted already, from the neuter verb) a passive 
theme may be derived, which is regularly inflected through 
all tenses. 

We exhibit now the inflexion of a transitive verb, 
ending in the Imperative in 'e'. 

1) ACTIVE VOICE. 

Infinitive: 
J^jL^ chad-anu, to give up. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 

Imperative. 
SDsG. PLUE. 

n pers. (X^:^ chacl-e, give up. ^(X^ cliad-i5^) 

give ye up. 



323 



Precative. 



■S^s^ chacl-ije. 



C 



<X^ chad-iju. 



;>^ /v^ >^ chad-ijo, please to 
give up. 

Participles: 

1) Present participle: j Joj J.^ -^ chad-mdo, giving up. 

2) Past participle: jjJL^^ chad-io, having been given up. 

3) Past conjunctive participles: 

^jL^ chad-e 



3jJu^ chad-io 
^=i.<X^ chad-ije 



<s/^ ^<^|4^ 



chad-e kare 



ha\dng given up. 



I. THE POTENTIAL. 
1) THE SIMPLE POTENTIAL. 

'I may give up' etc. 
SING. PLUE. 

^jy^iX^ ^j-^^ as! chad-iu. 
au chad-ia. 



I pers. ^C(X^ ^jySf 



pj>4?> ^j^^ at^i chad-io. 



n pers. ^^4^ ^-3 
tu chad-ie.^) 
m pers. (^JL^ ys hu chad-e. ^<A,.gr> yc chu chad-me.^) 



1) Or yj^iXj^ chad-yo; the form i^CtV^.^ chad-eho is also in use. 

2) Or ^tX.^ chad-e, ^j<X^ chad-l 

3) Or j^J^-g^ chad-ine. 

X2 



324 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



2) COMPOUND POTENTIAL. 

a) The present participle with the Potential jjL^. 
^I may be giving up^ etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^La5> jcXAjji^s. 

chadindo hua. 



^L^ 



chadindi hua. 



II pers. ^j.AAfl5 jJJ.jJ.4^ 

chadindo hue. 

in pers. ^^ jjaj jLg^ 

chadindo hue. 

I pers. ^yii Sd^ds^:^ 

chadinda hu. 
n pers. -yjn ltXAja4^ 

chadinda huo. 
m pers. ^j^ iJajJc-i^ 

chadinda huane. 



chadindi hue. 
chadindi hue. 



PLURAL. 



chadindiu hu. 
chadiindiu huo. 
chadindiu huane. 



S?. 



h) The past participle, with the III pers. Singular and 

Plural of the Potential of the auxiliary verb ,j^^, 

the agent being put in the Instrumental. 

'By me etc. may have been given up.' 

SINGULAR. 
The object being masc. The object being fern. 

mu chadi hue. 

A^ s.jJL^9. ji* to chadio hue. a^ ^<a4^ j.j to chadi hue. 

„ ;j,i huna „ „ „ „ ^i huna „ „ 



mu chadi5 hue. 



SECTION in. THE VERB. 325 

SINGULAR. 

The object being fern. The object being masc. 

asa chadio hue. asa chad! hue. 

aha chadio hue. aha chadi hue. 

hune chadio hue. hune chadi hue. 

PLURAL. 

mu chadia huane. mu chadiu huane. 

etc. etc. etc. etc. 

n. THE PRESENT. 
1) THE PRESENT INDEFINITE. 

The Potential with ^ th5. 
'I give up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. j_g3 jjLsci^r^ chadia tho. ^ ^U jL^^s. chadia thi. 

n pers. ^'jj.^oJ.4^ chadietho. ^^^ ^^JL^t^ chadie thi. 

m pers. j-^* i^(X^sf^ chade tho. ^.^ ^J.^> chade thi. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. 143 ;jy44^ U^-'' uy^4^ 

chadiu tha. chadiu thiu. 

n pers. L.^' J.J 4X4^ chadio tha. ^j^^j >^^■iT^ chadio thiu. 

in pers. L^ ^^A^ ^jy'^f'' L^^4-^^ 

chadine tha. chadine thiu. 



326 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



2) THE PHESENT DEFINITE. 

The present participle with ^UL^T ahiya etc. 
'I am giving up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. 

I pers. ^LI|jT jtX-Lsil^ 
chadindo ahiya. 



n pers. ^^ jtXAj J^ 

chadindo ahe. 

in pers, ^T jJcAjJ^^ 

chadind5 ahe. 



Fern. 
chadindi ahiya. 
chadindi ahe. 



chadindi ahe. 



PLURAL. 



' 'r . -- 



I pers. ^^A.§iT ftXij^X^s. 
chadinda ahiyu. 
n pers. j-AijI ItXAJii^a. 

chadinda ahiyo. 
m pers, ^^jJ lJ<Jo44^ 
chadinda ahine. 



chadindiu ahiyu. 
chadindiu ahiyo. 
chadindiu ahine. 



III. THE IMPERFECT. 

The present participle with the Aorist ^ys^ hose. 
'I gave up' or: 'was giving up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. 

I pers. j^3^ j ja^JtX^^ 
chadindo hose. 



II pers. (j^A^i jtXA^J-^ 
chadindo hue. 

Ill pers. ysn j JoUiX^^ 
chadindo ho. 



Fern. 

chadindi huyase. 
$ ^ ? ♦•• - 

chadindi huia. 



chadindi hui. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 327 

PLURAL. 
Masc. Fern. 

1 pers. ^^mX/^ ftXAJcX^cs^ ^j^M^iyj^ss^ ^^j^XajJc^ 

chadmda huasi. chadindiu huyusi. 

11 pers. j.A5a ^yj^ liXoJ-g^ jj^^ iJ^^^^^M^ 

chadinda hua-u, huo. cliadmdiu huyu. 

Ill pers. li \,^ ftX-oiX^^ ^yj^ ^^y^'^^l^'^ 

chadinda hua, ha. chadindiu huyu. 

lY. THE AORIST. 
1) THE SIMPLE AORIST. 

The past participle (passive), with the agent in 
the Instrumental. 

'By me etc. was given up'. 



The object being masc. ^^^^ 


ULAK. 


The object being fern. 


P^-i^ 


^^/) mu chadio. 


^5^^ uy "^^ chadL 


11 


jo to „ 




jj to „ 


11 


^ huna „ 




^jjs huna „ 


11 


^LLl asa „ 




^Laa<i asa jj 


11 


^Lil aha „ 




^Lif aha „ 


11 


^ hune „ 




^ji hune „ 




PLURAL. 




^44^ 


^yA mu chadia. 


^^jL^ss. ^yA mu chadi 


etc. etc. 




etc. etc. 



2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. 

The simple Aorist with ^^j the. 

'By me etc. used to be given up'. 
The object being masc. SINGULAR. rpj^^ ^j^jg^^. y^^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
^^4J jo jL^ ^yA mu chadio the. ^^^ (5<^^4^ \^y^ ^^^ chad! the. 
etc. etc. etc, etc. 



328 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



PLURAL. 



The object being masc. 

mu chadia the. 
etc. etc. 



The object being fem. 



i> ... ^ , 

mu chadiu the. 
etc. etc. 



y. THE PEEFECT. 

The past participle (passive) with ^;s| ahe and ^j«^l 

ahine, the agent being put in the Instrumental. 

'By me etc. has been given up'. 

SINGULAR. 

The object being fem. 

mu chad! ahe. 
etc. etc. 

PLURAL. 

mu chadiu ahine. 
etc. etc. 



The object being masc 

mu chadio ahe. 
etc. etc. 



mu chadia ahine. 
etc. etc. 



VI. THE PLUPEEEECT. 

The past participle (passive) with j.;i> ho, La5& hua etc. 

'By me etc. had been given up'. 

SINGULAR. 

The object being fem. 



The object being masc. 

mu chadio ho. 
etc. etc. 



mu chadia hua. 
etc. etc. 



mu chadT huL 
etc. etc. 



PLURAL. 



i .-. 



mu chadiu huyu. 



etc. 



etc. 



SECTION HI. THE VERB. 329 

YII THE FUTURE. 
1) THE SIMPLE or INDEFINITE FUTURE. 

The present participle with the inflexional terminations. 
'I shall give up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ij^lUj jL^ chadinduse. ,j^i\x^^(X^ chadindia-se. 
II pers. ^J«5^XxJ<A4T^ chadind-e. ^J,J(XL(X^ chadmdi-a. 
in pers. j jjjii^.5^ chadindo. ^^^XXJ<X^ chadindi. 

PLURAL. 

i pers. ^j,j^]iSJj)iX.^:^ ^^uf^JyJi\Xj(X^:^ ■ 

chadinda-si. chadindiu-si. 

n pers. JjJj JL^ chadinda-ii. ^^j jJj Jl^ chadmdiu. 

m pers. ftxLjL^ chadmda. ^y t>J.j jL^ chadindiu. 

2) COMPOUND FUTURE. 

a) The definite Future. 

The present participle with j^Jo^ hunduse. 

'I shall be giving up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 



^ J 



I pers. j^4>o^55 j^XajJc^ ^j^d<iyS^ ;^JcL<A4^ 

chadindo hunduse. chadindi hundiase. 

n pers. jj.jjjys ^d^,ix^ ^JcXj^^D ^tX-v.J-^^ 

chadindo hunde. chadindi hundia. 

in pers. jJJ^^ jtXL jL^ ^^y^ c5<^^44^ 

chadindo hundo. chadindi hundi. 



330 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



PLURAL. 



Masc. 
I pers. ^-cwltXi^ ItxLiX^ 

chadinda hundasi. 
n pers. JjJ^i I jJ!jJ4^ 

chadinda hiinda-u. 
in pers. Ijsi^ Ijajj^cs. 
chadinda htinda. 



Fern. 
chadindiu hundiusi. 
chadindiu htlndiu. 
chadindiu hundiu. 



h) The Past Future. 

The past participle (passive) with jtXi^^ hundo etc., 

the agent being put in the Instrumental. 

'By me etc. will have been given up'. 

SINGULAR. 



The object being masc. 

mu chadio htindo. 
etc. etc. 

mu chadia hunda. 
etc. etc. 



The object being fem. 

mu chad! hundi. 
etc. etc. 



PLURAL. 



i> o 9 i> .: ^ 9 

mu chadiu hundiu. 
etc. etc. 



2) PASSIVE VOICE. 

Infinitive. 

J^tS-^ chad-ij-anu, to be given up. 

Imperative. 



SING. 



PLUR. 



II pers. ^iX^ chad-ij-u, }=^^^^^ chad-ij-o, 

be given up. be ye given up. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 331 

Participles. 

1) Present participle: y^<X^ chadibo, being given up. 

2) Past participle: pX^ chadio, having been given up. 

3) Future participle or gerundive: ji<X^ chadino, to 

be given up. 

4) Past conjunctive participles: 

^:^t>4r^ chacl-ij-i or ^s^(X^ chadij-o, 
^S ^^<X^ chadiji kare, 



having been 
given up. 



I. THE POTENTIAL. 
1) THE SIMPLE POTENTIAL. 

'I may be given up'. 
SING. PLUR. 

I pers. ^LitX^ chadij-a. ^^LiX^ chadij-u. 

n pers. ^/^<X^ chaclij-e. ^) j^d^ chadij-o. 
in pers. ^^<X^ chadij-e. ^j^(X^ chadij-ane. 

2) COMPOUND POTENTIAL. 

a) The present participle with the Potential ^l^ hua. 
'I may be being given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
3Iasc. Fern. 



^ i 



I pers. ^\1& yi'^^ ^^ isi^^ 

chadibo hua. chadibi hua. 

n pers. ^J^s!i r^^ir^ U^ tsf'H^ 

chadibo hue. chadibi hue. 

m pers. ^ >^44^ is^^ ^"^^ 

chadib5 hue. chadibi hue. 



1) Or ^J..K=^(X^:^ chadiji. 



332 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^yi Lj44^ ^y^ u;-^44^ 

chadiba M. chadibiu M. 

Ilpers. j.a;d ^(X^:^ j.A^ ^JyL<X^ 

chadiba huo. chadibiu huo. 

in pers. ^Ls LjiX^^ ^Isa ^yl^iX^ 

chadiba huane. chadibiu huane. 

h) The past participle with the Potential 

^La^ hua. 
'I may have been given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fem. 

I pers. ^L^^j.jj4^^^^4iohua. ^lli (^44T^ chadi hua. 
II pers. ^aa;s „ „ hue. ^jfiss^ „ „ hue. 

Ill pers. ^5> „ „ hue. ^s^ „ „ hue. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. ^jyi ^^<^'^ chadia hu. ^^5> ^^^(X^ chadiu hu. 



n pers. j.Ais 


55 


„ huo. j.^^ 


55 


55 ll^O. 


III pers. ^i 


55 


„ huane. ^i 


55 


„ huane 



II. THE PEESENT. 
1) THE INDEFINITE PRESENT. 

The Potential with j^'S tho. 
'I am given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fem. 

I pers. j^j- ^1^4-4^ isf^ U^^44^ 

chadija tho. chadija thi. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 333 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

Ilpers. ^- ^^^d^:^ ^^ (j^J4^ 

chadije tho. chadije thi. 

Ill pers. j.^- ^4-i^ ^ ^f^ 

chadije tlio. chadije thi. 

PLURAL. 

I pers. V:^ ^yLd<^ ^^3 ^yLiX^ 

chadiju tha. chadiju thiu. 

n pers. L^3 >=^^-€~- U^-'f^" >^^^ 

chadijo tha. chadijo thiu. 

rH pers. L^:; ^^^44^ ^r^ i^^44^ 

chadijane tha. chadijane thiu. 

2) THE DEFINITE PRESENT. 
The present participle with ^ll^l ahiya. 
'I am being given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fem. 

I pers. ^LI^iT }i4^=^ ^^"^f^^ isi^^ 

chadibo ahiya. chadibi ahiya. 

n pers. ^A.^7 >^44^ c)-^-f ^ (^^4-4^ 

chadibo ahe. chadibi ahe. 

in pers. ^i& I j.jjL^ chadibo ahe. isj ^jJ^4^ chadibi ahe. 

PLURAL." ' 

chadiba ahiyu. chadibiu ahiyu. 

n pers. ^^ LjJ.^^ ^aj^T (j^Lii-i^ 

chadiba ahiyo. chadibiu ahiyo. 

m pers. ^^T Ljil^ ^^T ^yl^S^^ 

chadiba ahine. chadibiu ahine. 



334 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

m THE IMPERFECT. 

The present participle with ^^s& hose. 
'I was being given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ^^sa ^j^X^ ^j^i is^*^^ 

chadibo hose. chadibi huyase. 

n pers. ,j^P >->^?4^ «j^ cs"?'^^ 

chadibo hue. chadibi huia. 

ni pers. ^ >^44^ chadibo ho. ^xi ^^<X^ chadibi hui. 

PLURAL. 

J. .-e- 9 . ^ .'. ^ 9 9 i> f. ^ 

i pers. ^J^\a.S^ \ji(Xj^ ^^.J^MjJiy^p ^yj.y\ ^f-^ 

chadiba huasi. chadibiu huyusi. 

n pers. ^^ ^yj^ '■^^^^ U^^ U^^^^^ 

chadiba hua-u, huo. chadibiu huyu. 

m pers. L^i LjtX^sa. U^^ \jy^^^>^ 

chadiba hua. chadibiu huyu. 

IV. THE AOEIST. 
1) THE SIMPLE AORIST. 

The past participle with the inflexional terminations. 

'I was given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. (j^jL^ chadiu-se.^) ^j^Cyj^ chadia-se. 
n pers. ^^^Ckj^zs. chadi-e. ^jL^ chadi-a. 

Ill pers. ptX^ chadio. (5<M^ chadi. 



1) Or (j«.jjLg.£^ chadyuse, (jj*j<X^ chadyase. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 335 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ,jju*;lj jL^ chadia-si. ^^.a^^jL.^ chadiu-si. 
II pers. tSjL^ci. chadya-u. ^^jL^ cliadiu. 



Ill pers. GjL^ chadia. ^^<X^ chadiu. 

2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. 

The simple Aorist with ^3 the. 

'I used to be given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fem. 

^u^ U>ojL§^ chadiuse the. ^^^' y^jL4^ chadiase the. 

etc. etc. etc. etc. 

Y. THE PEEFECT. 

The past participle with jjLx^l ahiya. 

'I have been given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fem. 

I pers. ^LL^T >2^^ U^^ ^5^4^ 

chadio ahiya. chad! ahiya. 

n pers. ^-s»^T >S44^ ^^^yj^ ^44^ 

chadio ahe. chad! ahe. 

m pers. ^5>T ptX^is. chadi5 ahe. t^ k5^^>'-^ chadi ahe. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. ^y^ LSa4^ ^yt^ U^44^ 

chadia ahiyu. chadiu ahiyu. 

II pers. ^Aj»| iS JL^ j-A^T jj^j J4^ 

chadia ahiyo. chadiu ahiyo. 

m pers. ^^jf bJL^ ,j-|3| (j^ j^ 

chadia ahine. chadiu ahine. 



336 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



VI. THE PLUPEEFECT. 

The past participle with ^^i^c hose. 
'I had been given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. 

I pers. ^ys^ ^^^ 
chadio hose. 
II pers. ,j^55 p j^4^ 

chadio hue. 
m pers. js^ >J<^r^ chadio ho. 



Fern, 

chadi huyase. 

chad! huia. 

^^lsi (^44^ chadi hui. 



PLURAL. 



S ? ,:&.•. ^ 



I pers. jj.A^L;c '-■'^9^ j^^-^j^^ ^JT^^i^ 



chadia huasi. 
n pers. y.si> ^"^^4^ 

chadia hua-u. 
ni pers. \H ^<3L^ 
chadia hua. 



chadiu huyusi. 

) > i> ,'. ^ 

chadiu huyu. 

5 5 !> ... ^ 

chadiu huyu. 



YII. THE FUTUEE. 
1) THE SIMPLE or INDEFINITE FUTURE. 

The present participle with the inflexional terminations. 
'I shall be given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ijjuoii.^ chadibu-se. jjw.L44t^ chadibia-se. 
n pers. ^AjJ^cs. chadib-e. ^L jL^ chadibi-a. 

ni pers. yiiy^ chadibo. ^j J.^^ chadibi. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



337 



PLURAL. 
Masc. Fern. 

I pers. ,j.x^LjJL4^ chadiba-si. ^jj^yj^ix^ chadibiu-si. 
n pers. p<X^ chadiba-u. ^j^idJ^ cbadibiu. 

m pers. t h} ^7^ chadiba. ^^-o jL^ chadibiu. 



2) COMPOUND FUTURE. 

a) The definite Future. 

The present participle with jjwJo^5> hunduse. 

'I shall be being given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 



Masc. 
1 pers. ^d^ysa jj^X^ 

chadibo hunduse. 
n pers. ^tXi^i >?<^T^ 
chadibo hunde. 
m pers. jtXl^i >^<^4T^ 
chadibo hundd. 



Fern. 
chadibi htindiase. 
chadibi hundia. 
chadibi htindi. 



PLURAL. 
i pers. ^-A^ftXi«.5B LjiXg^ ^j-j^^J^JiXj^s^ ^^-o<X§^ 



chadiba htindasi. 
II pers. ^ Jo^je ^?<^S4r^ 

chadiba htinda-u. 
in ]3ers. f jJ^i Lj J^r^ 

chadiba hunda. 

Trumpp, Sindlu-G-rammar, 



chadibiu hundiusi. 
chadibiu htindiu. 
chadibiu hundiu. 



338 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

h) The Past Future. 

The past participle with ^(Xj^s^ himduse. 

'I shall have been given up' etc. 

SINGULAR. 



Masc. 

' o » ^ ... ^ 

1 pers. ^O^j^s^ >-'<:N^ 

chadio hunduse. 
II pers. j.JtX3^5> 3-2 <X4^ 

chadio htinde. 
Ill pers. ^iXiysa p(X^ 
chadio htindo. 

PLURAL. 
I pers. ^AA**ltXj^;s> ^^^-§^ [^'•fi^y'^^^^ UT^^^"^ 



Fern. 
chad! hundiase. 
chadi hundia. 
chad! hundi. 



chadia hundasi. 



II pers. ;tX^^ '"■^^■i-^ 



chadia hunda-u. 



III pers. ItXj^ifi LjJc^ 
chadia htinda. 



chadiu hundiusi. 
chadiu hundiu. 
chadiu hundiu. 



Chapter XVI. 

Compound verbs. 

§■ 53. 

The Sindhi possesses a great facility in giving dif- 
ferent shadows of meaning to a verb by compounding 
it with another verb. 

1) The most common way of compounding a verb 
with another is to put the past conjunctive par- 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 339 

ticiple of the active or passive mood, ending in 
1 or e^), before it.^) The construction of a verb thus 
compounded depends entirely on the definite verb, not 
in any way on the past conjunctive participle. In this 
way are formed 

a) So-called Int ens it ives, which impart to the de- 
finite verb a peculiar signification, arising out of the 
sense of the preceding past conjunctive participle, as: 

J^: (c^'S vathi vananu, to take off, literally: to go 
having taken; ,j^: ,^^xi mari vananu, to be dead, lit.: 

to go having died; ^J^^Z ^5>i carhi vaiianu, to ascend, 
lit.: to go having ascended; ^"^^^ J^A^ khuli pavanu, to 
be opened, lit.: to fall having been opened; J^^j ^^ ji 
pavanu, to become alive, literally: to fall having lived; 
^^^ ^^j vahi pavanu, to pour do^Yn (as rain), literally: 
to fall having flown. — O'^^ C5^^5 vadhe vijhanu, to 
cut down, lit.: to throw having cut; ^^(Xf \S)y^ sore 
kadhanu, to pull out, lit.: to pull having moved; 
J^T (^;^ carhe ananu, to hang up, lit.: to bring 
having caused to ascend; ^cV.^.jn ^^i'j^J lorhe chadanu, 
to float off (act.), lit.: to give up having floated away; 
^;(^'> j.^b* tanio chinanu, to pluck out, lit.: to pluck 
out having pulled; ^^ ^^^y mota-e nianu, to bring 
back, lit.: to take away having caused to return, etc. etc. 
It is to be noted, that ^i^rkhani, the past conjunctive 
participle of i^-l^ khananu, to lift up, is used with all 



1) The past conjunctive participle ending in io is also occasionally 
used to make up a compound verb. 

2) In poetry though the past conjunctive participle may also follow 
the definite verb. 

Y2 



340 SECTION lU. THE VERB. 

sorts of verbs, to intensify their signification, im- 
plying, that the action is done forthwith, as: J^^JO ^^4^ 
khani likhanu, to set to writing; ,jU^I ^^i^ khani uja- 
ranu, to set to x^olish, ^^L^5 ^^ khani vajainu, to 
set to play (an instrument); '^-k"^ ^X^ khani vananu, 
to be off. 

In the same way the past conjunctive participle of 

^jP pavanu, to fall, viz.: ^I pai or ^a-o pel, is put 

before a verb, to intensify its signification ^ as (j^^a^T^aj 

pal khianu, to eat on or up, literally: to eat having 
fallen upon it. The augment t^ tho of the Present 
tense is dropped, when the verb is thus compounded 

w^ith ^j pai or ^aaj pei. 

When he was grown up, he died. Abd-ul-Latif's 
life, p. 2. 

Take the advice of the pilots, that thou mayst pass 
the full tide. Sh. Surag. Y, 7. 

Tears trickle down to the kind one upon the cheek. 
Maj. 459. 

In crossing the ocean they were forcibly carried off. 
Sh. Sam. I, 11. 

^ C? '^\'^ "^ "^^ ^^-^ ^ '^ 
Bring (and) fasten thy own self in the midst of the 
furnace. Sh. Jam. KaL rHj 13. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 341 

^1 L45 ^^Xj jj^^^ ^^^ u^a:^ .3- ^21^5 ^14^ ^u 

When he sets to play, then four thnes as many 
deer, wild beasts, birds come on. Story of Rae Diacu, 
p. 3. 

Buy those goods, which do not become old. Sh. 
Surag. Ill, 2. 

Then having taken out earth from this tank they 
built cells and a mosque. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 22. 

He who will eat (it) with pleasure, that is my friend. 
MaJ. 319. 

&) Compound verbs, implying possibility, and power 
are formed by putting a past conjunctive participle before 

the verbs jj;.^^ saghanu^), to be able, and ^.iL:^. ja- 

nanu, to know, as: ^j^"*^ ^^S c;5r^ kare, karyo sa- 

ghanu, to be able to do; ^iLL ^^:?5 del jananu, to know 

to give. 

^LiLf J ^53^ ^r jj^^. ^Gj ^ ^.|Ir 

In what manner shall I weep for my friend? I do 
not know how to weep. Sh. Koh. YI, 1. 

Thou didst not understand to give sleeplessness ta 
(thy) eyes. Sh. Koh. I, 12. 



1) With 0».§X^ the Infinitive may also be joined. 



342 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

c) The idea of completion is expressed by putting 
a past conjunctive participle before the verbs: J^T ra- 
hanu, to remain, ^^j vathanu, to take, ^^s^- cukanu, 
to be at an end; ^^^^xi nibhanu or ^^y^ nibanu, to be 
ended; similarly before ^^If y^j base karanu, to leave 
off, to have done, as: ^i^ C5^*5 vathi ralianu, to have 
taken; ,^7 xi^ rami rahanu, to be off; ^^)^^ (^^i^ 
khae vathanu, to have done eating; j^^X^ ^S kare cu- 
kanu, to have done; ,j^ u^ ^^ cai base karanu, to 
have done speaking. 

In order to see those lightenings he sat down. 
Amulu Man. p. 146. 

V 

The Caran, having slung the harp upon his shoulder, 
went in the night. Sh. Sor. Ill, 5. 

>% ^Z' r^T^ O^ ^J^ ^^^ ^ cs?-^ 

Who so ever looks upon a woman with a heart of 
fornication, that one has even therein committed al- 
ready fornication with her in his mind. Matth. 5, 4. 

<5te (5^*4^ ^7^7v ^5/ ij^ (ji-^' 

With him friendship has been already made. Maj. 196. 

u..§o L*w^ ^^<X*.j o*.x) j.^ ^j^ uy^; 

When Jesus had ended these sayings, then the people, 
having heard his doctrine, became astonished. Matth. 7, 28. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 343 

d) Duration or repetition is expressed by 
putting before tlie definite verb the past conjunctive 
participle ending in io, to which also the emphatic i 

may be affixed, als: ^^iii }^?''fi parhio parhanu, to read 
over again, to keep on reading. 

Kead over again the lesson of this very pain. Sh. 
Jam. Kal. V, 31. 

Even that, that letter I read over and over again 
Sh. Jam. Kal. V, 33. 

2) Another kind of Intensitives is formed by 

putting the past participle of ^"Jj) pavanu, to fall, viz.: 
j.l> pio, before the Imperative, Present^) or Imper- 
fect of a definite verb, as: y^L^j.^ s.aj pio manijase, 
enjoy her; ^j^c^* Lxj pia thiane, they become L;a fj^il^ Ij^j 
they were seeing. 

When she comes to the couch, then pull oiit her 
feathers; afterwards enjoy her. Amulu Man. p. 147. 

In that (palace) sparks are made like lightenings. 
Ibid. p. 140. 

Many of his miracles the other boys used to see. 
Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 3. 



1) In tliis case the augment y^3 tlio iy dropped aa unnecessary. 



344 SECTION HI. THE VERB. 

3) The idea of continuation is expressed by 
putting a present ]3articiple before the verbs Jji' ralianu, 
to remain and Jp^ vatanu, to go about, as: ^7 jjJj. 
vendo rahi, he continues going; ^l jtXljAi carmdo 
vate, he keeps on grazing. 

(*L^ ^^/o jjL^^/0 ^s^^^ 3tU5>^ i<^^ 

He kept on travelling in fatigue from Egypt (and) 
Syria. Maj. 357. 

His father Shah Habib continued searching (and) 
seeking him. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 9. 

^ -■ / ^ ^ 

Bijalu goes on grazing the horses. Story of Rae 
Diacu, p. 2. 

4) Two verbs may also be joined by putting the 
Infinitive of a verb in the Formative case before the 

verbs: ^^^j laganu, v. n. to apply, ^il acanu, to come, 

^•dl vananu, to go. In this way so-called Inceptives 

are formed, as: ^?J ^j^. ruana laganu, to begin to cry; 

c>^^ (i>-^5 vasana acanu, to come to ram; ,^^^ ^iX^ 
sadana vananu, to go to call. 

^ ^^^)^ o^j^*^ (j^^' Lh^j u^T^; 
The lightenings have come to flash (to rain); the 
monsoon has ascended (his) couch. Sh. Sor. IV, 13. 



i " \ 'I ' 

Then whilst they went to buy, the bridegroom ar- 
rived. Matth. 25, 10. 



SECTION ni. THE VERB. 345 

Chapter XVII. 

The Verb with the Pronominal Suffixes. 
§. 54. 

The Sindhi uses the pronominal suffixes far more 
extensively with the verbs, than with the nouns (cf. 
§. 30). The suffixes attached to the verbs express, strictly 
speaking, only the Dative and Accusative (the object), 
and, with the past participle passive, also the In- 
strumental, though we may translate them by any case, 
save the ^N'ominative. 

The pronominal suffixes attached to verbs are iden- 
tical with those attached to nouns, with this difference, 
that the suffix of the I person Plural, u, which is not 
in use with nouns (but with adverbs and postpositions), 
is used throughout the verb. There is further a pe- 
culiar Instrumental affix, attached to the past par- 
ticiple passive, which is never used with nouns or adverbs, 
viz.: 1 for the Singular, and u for the Plural. 

It appears, that the suffix i is originally the In- 
strumental Sing. ^[ ina, by him (from ^ hi, this), and 
u the Instrumental Plural ^1 une, by them (from ^ 

hu or ^1 ti, that). 

To the first person Sing, and Plur. the suffix of 
the same person is never attached, as in this case the 

reflexive pronoun J^Lj pana, self, must be employed. 

In the compound tenses and in compound 
verbs the suffix always accedes to the latter part of 
the compound, though it properly belongs to the first 
member of the compound. Similarly the suffix is never 
attached to the augment ^^ tho or ^'j the, but always 
to the verb itself 



346 SECTION HI. THE VERB. 

To the past participle passive even two suffixes 
may accede, the first expressing the Instrumental and 
the second the Dative or Accusative, as will be 
shown afterwards. 

The way, in which the several suffixes are attached 
to the inflexional terminations of the verb , will be best 
seen from the following survey. 

§. 55. 

I. The pronominal suffixes attached to the auxiliary 

verbs ^jys^ and ^-^ 







1) The Imperative. 


The same 

TJ J- 4-' .r^l 


as the n pers. 


Sing 


. and Plur. of the 


Potential. 


The Precat 


}ive. 


' 




, Suffix 
I pers. 


SING. 

jjL^ huj-a-me. 




PLUR. 
j»j.^ hujo-me. 


Sing. 


Ill pers. 


be to me. 
ij^L^ huj-a-se. 
be to him. 




be to me. 
u^^ hujo-se. 
be to him. 


Plur. ■ 


Suffix 
I pers. 

ni pers. 


^^jL^ huj-a-u. 
be to us. 

jjL^ huj-a-ne. 

be to them. 




^^^ hujo-u. 
be to us. 

^^ hujo-ne. 

be to them. 



In the same way the suffixes are attached to ^^3 
thiju, as: j^ki^j* thij-a-me, become to me, ^j^JiLi^* tliij- 
a-se, become to him. 

^L:^ ^jQ ^X^, ^JyJ J j.-yo iS) (J^-^^' yS& &>J 

Then if those are in front, be thou in their back. 
Amulu Man. p. 144. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



347 



1^' 



2) The Potential ^jUsn liua, I may be. 
SINGULAR. 



bo 
• I— I 



I — I 



Suffixes of the I pers. 
I 

n ^l^i hue-me. 

m ^ash hue-me. 



II *jl5i huo-me.^) 



in 



jU-*.^ 



huani-me. 



bo 
S ^ 



II jj^A^ hue-u. 



m 



u^-^ 



hue-u. 



Suffixes of the II pers. 

^L^ hua-e. 



^aaa5> hue-i. 



^yS& hu-e. 



^^xJ^ huan-i.^) 

PLURAL. 
yLsi hua-va. 



^j^s^ hue-ne.^) 
^AA^ hue-va. ^^ hue-ne. 



Suffixes of the III pers. 

(j^U5> hua-se. 

ijj^ass^ hue-se. 
j^A^o hue-se. 

^^s& hu-se. 
j^j^ huo-se. 
U^^s^ huani-se. 



jjLxis hua-ne. 






n ..sZi^xi huo-u. 



ur^>^^ 



^ySS> 



hu-va. 



\jys^ hu-ne. 



in ^^AA^shuane-u. ^a;s huani-va. 



^J^s& huo-ne. 
^jjIs^ huani-ne. 



1) Or ^yS^ ho-me, (j^j-^i ho-se. 

2) Or -^AA^ huane-i. 

3) When a nasalized vowel (e) is followed by a dental nasal, 
the sign of nasalisation (^ in Arabic characters) is generally dropped 

as superfluous; thus ^-f^^^ hue-ne, instead of ^X^S^ hue-ue, <o^^ 
hu-ne, instead of ^yS^ hu-ne. 



348 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



In the same way the suffixes are attached to the 
Potential (^L^i* thia, I may become, and to the In- 
definite Present y^ ^Laa hua tho and yj^ \J-^ ^^i^- 
tho, as: y^ ^Sj^ hue-me tho, thou art to me etc. 

Finally push it off, lest any damage befall the ship 
(literally: lest any damage befall thee as regards the ship). 
Sh. Surag. ni, 7. 

If my breath may expire, yet carry (my) corpe to the 
Malir. Sh. Um. Mar. Y, 14. ^ 

\ " ^' °' " ^ .A" r. -^^r r ^' 

If there be to thee lakhs of sweethearts, compare 
none with Punhu. Sh. MaiB. V, 4. 



3) The Present ^Ll^j ahiya. 
SINGULAR. 



to 

g 



Suffixes of the I pers. 
I 

II |vlsgjTahe-me.^) 

Ill (Wi^fiT ahe-me. 

I 

n |*j^^T ahiyo-me. 
m r^jf ahini-me. 



Suffixes of the II pers. 

^LI-§jT ahiya-e. 



^,s^\ ahe-i. 



Suffixes of the III pers. 

j^Ly^jj ahiya-se. 

(jj^AA-ygil ahe-se. 
(jwjkisj ahe-se. 



o 3 ^r 



^^Igjf ahiyu-e. l^yl^\ ahiyu-se. 
^iA^ij ahiyo-se. 



^^\ ahin-i.'). 



,j*^J^\ ahini-se. 



1) Or [W^^l all! -me. 

2) Or ^^XX^\ aliine-1 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



349 



PLURAL. 



be 

s ^ 






Suffixes of the I pers. 
I 

n (j^lix^T ahe-u. 
ni ^yj^ ahe-u. 



ahiyo-u. 

ni ^y^ 
ahine-u. 



Suffixes of the II pers. 

liLI^I ahiya-va. 



1^5£>T ahe-va. 
"yi^j^S ahiyu-va. 



yt-^: 



j| ahini-va. 



Suffixes of the III pers, 
jjLl^l ahiya-ne. 

^j.a55| ahe-ne. 

j^l ahe-ne. 

^yjd^S ahiyu-ne. 
jj^^l ahiyo-ne. 

^A^f ahini-ne. 



Instead of ^p^S ahe and ^43! ahine the form j^\ 

atha is also in use, but only when joined by suffixes. 
It corresponds to the old Prakrit form ^rfN? athi (the 
ITT pers. Sing, of the substantive verb asmi, I am, 
see Lassen, p. 345), which in Sindhl has also been trans- 
ferred to the Plural. 

The suffixes are attached to it in the following 
manner : 





' Suffixes of the I pers. 


Suffixes of the II pers. 


Suffixes of the III pers. 


Plur. 

and- 

Sing. 


^S atha-me. 
^^•| ath-u. 


|^3l ath-1, 
L,AA.^I athe-L 

"yj^S atha-va. 


^J^4^•f atha-se. 
^j^\ atha-ne. 



In the Present Definite: ^Llg-^l ^d^y$> the suffixes 

accede, as noted already, to the latter part of the 
compound. 



350 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

(^r^^ (S^'^ I^^T ^j-mL ^LL ^11 

With girls of my age I have an appointment, after 
rain has fallen. Sh. Um. Mar. V, 21. 

tjl^;3t u^^' ^^i' ^^ ^}i^^^ (^^ est? 

I have a secret matter, come near, then I will tell 
(it). Sh. Sor. 11, 22. 

\Laj S.5 (jw^Lj 3"**^ 3^7*^ (3^"^ CS^ 1^^^* 

Then having heard the lesson he became glad; he 
has no other want. Maj. 189. 

^yi T^' ^ e>-i^ "-^ \j"fi^ O^^ '^^"^ is^^ cs^ 

If thou hast a desire in seeing, then lift not thy 
step far off. Sh. Kal. H, 4. 

Except the worshipping of the Lord all other things 
are to thee selfishness, o ignorant one! Mengh5 4. 

4XS. ^j^U L^^^ e^jl j^ ^ ^^A^l ^ ^.|i!i 

We have no wickedness in our heart; those liars 
calumniate. Maj. 255. 

We have nothing to do with those stones, but 
our concern is with their master. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, 
p. 20. 

You have no taste of the pain; now you laugh. Sh. 
Sam. Ill, Epil. 1. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



351 



No wickedness is in their heart; they have known 
the retribution. Maj. 218. 

4) The Aorist. 

a) The masc. form ^^a^ hose. 

SINGULAR. 



bo 



Suffix I pers. 
I 

II *-u^ hue-me. 
in (.^ ho-me. 



pi 



n *jl;a huo-me. 
Ill ^ hua-me.^) 



CO 



n ^y„;^^ hue-u. 

m ^y^yS^ ho-SU. 



Suffix II pers. 
^Lljja hosa-e. 

&J.55 ho-e. 
^^LL& huasu-e. 

^k hua-e. 

PLURAL. 
yLlj.55 hosa-va. 



Suffix III pers. 
(j^LL^io hosa-se. 

j^^ hue-se. 
j^jjD ho-se. 

huasu-se. 






a55 huo-se. 



hua-se. 



1 — I 



II jj^j^5> huo-su. 



in ^^iL^it hua-su. 



jys^ ho-va. 

'yJyM.\ 



^IZ^js^ hosa-ne. 



l^huasu-va. 



^ 



hua-va. 



.^x^55 hue-ne. 
^j^5i> ho-ne. 

^y^ilsQ huasu-ne. 
^^s^ huo-ne, 
^j.j^ hua-ne. 



1) In poetry long a is frequently retained, as; *Ia5C> hna-niGj 
&Ia55 hua-e, (jjwLa5D liua-se etc. 



352 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



h) The fern, form yjuJ^^ huyase. 
SINGULAR. 







Suffix I pers. 


Suffix II pers. 


Suffix III pers. 




I 




^IjwuLJLAiD huisa-e. 


huisa-se. 


bQ 






1 ^m ^9VW^0m^S§^^ XXtA.XKJ»-A^ \^» 


rr, 


II 


^^ 




^XA^ huiya-se. 


Uj 








huiya-me. ^) 








TIT 


^ huya-me. 


^i huya-e. 


^;«j^55 huya-se. 




I 




9 ? ? 


? > > 






U 






huyusu-e. 


huyusu-e. 


i' 


II 


jjli huyu-me. 




y^Ili huyu-se. 


p-t 






III 


Als^ huyu-me. 


^jSJh huyu-e. 


ijJLsa huyu-se. 






PLURAL. 






I 




pLLvA^ huTsa-va. 


^Ijljdi huisa-ne 


bb 


n 


? 9 




..wAAiD huiva-ne. 


fl 




l^^^^*^ JJ-iAxj I* XX vy. 


m 




huye-su. 








m 


^y^^ hui-su. 


^li huya-va. 


^^ huya-ne. 




I 




-0 5 5 ? 

huyusu-va. 


> J J 

huyusu-ne. 




II 


> 9 9 

huyu-su. 




j» « ff> huyu-ne. 


,3 < 








m 


9 9 9 

huyu-su. 


^Ia5> huyu-va. 


^jjn huyu-ne. 



O 9 ,v O 7 ^ 0--7 ^ 

1) Or |VAA^5C huie-me, jV^^Ait huye-me, ^XxS^ huya-me. 



SECTION III. THE VEEB. 



353 



That to j.55 ho, ^^k hui etc., when forming with 

the past participle passive the Pluperfect, also a suffix, 
denoting the Instrumental, may be attached, will be 
shown in §. 56, 5. 

It is to be observed, that the inflexional termination 
of the I pers. Sing. masc. and fem. , se, becomes sa 
before the accession of the suffixes; the fem. termination 

y^A5> huyase is at the same time reduced to its original 

form ^a55 hui, as: ^V^L^^ hui-sa-e. The suffix of the 

I pers. Plur. is in the Aorist su or si, and not u, 
as in the Imperative, Potential and Present. In the 

n pers. fem. Sing, the form ^^ huje or .j^si^ huyi 

is employed, when followed by the heavy suffix su or 
SI, the accent being then thrown on the last syllable 
of the verb, as: huye-su or huyi-su. 

In the same way as to ^ys^ hose and ^j*Z^ huyase 

the suffixes accede to ^^^-c^' thiuse and ^j^^^j^ thiase, and 

to every other neuter verb in the Aorist, for which 

^j*^j<^ thiuse may serve as paradigm. 

The Aorist (j^J-^J thiuse. 



•i-H 

m 



n 



a) The masculine form ^j>^^ thiuse. 
SINGULAE OF THE SUFFIX. 



Suffix I pers. 



r^' 



thie-me. 



in |V-^* thiu-me.^) 



Suffix n pers. 



thiosa-e. 



^ja4j thiyu-e. 



Suffix m pers. 

thiosa-se. 
^j*^/1j^ thie-se. 



u^-*-^* 



thiu- 



se. 



l) In poetry the diminutive affix S*i ro is frequently attached to 
the past participle , to wliich the suffixes accede according to the common 

Trumpp, Sindha-G-rammar. Z 



354 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 






Suffix I pers. 



n ^^^3 
*.A^* thia-me 

I 



tbid-me. 



Snffix n pers. 
thiasu-e. 



^^ thiya-e. 



Suffix in pers. 
thiasu-se. 



Lr>^' 



thio-se. 



PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. 



♦rH 



II ^j^^ju^- tliie-ii. 



in jj^j^^j 

thio-su. 



tlii5sa-va. 






> thiu-ya. 



•5. 
ij^ju-^' thia-se. 



thiosa-ne. 



ch^^* 



thie-ne. 






II ^y^y^ 

thio-su. 
Ill jj^A*;U4j 
thia-su.. 



thiasu-va. 



-:g^ 



y^ 



tHa-va. 



(J.A4J thiu-ne. 



thiasti-ne. 

thio-ne. 



^j.!^' thia-ne. 



&) The feminine form (j^-^-^j thiase. 
SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 





1 Suffix I pers. 


Suffix II pers. 


Suffix III pers. 




I 


^3 1.^x45 thTsa-e. 


jjjJLa^^V-^J' 


.s- 


II [v1a4j thia-me. 




thisa-se. 
j^AA^j thia-se. 








Ill 1^145 thia-me. 


^4j- thiya-e. 


jj^i^o thiya-se. 



rules, as: (•v*-^-'' thiaru-me, y^J-«§-3 thiaru-se etc. But in the I. and 
II pers. the diminutive affix is never added. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



355 



SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 



Suffix I pers. 



n jUa^j thiii-me.^) 
m ^JL^ tliiu-me. 



Suffix II pers. 
thiusu-e. 



5H^' 



thill- e. 



S ^ 

CO 



PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. 



n 






•iL.w.A.^' 



thisa-va. 



tliie-su. 
HI ^JyJ,^^.J^ thi-su. j*^^* tliiya-va. 



Suffix III pers. 

thiusi-se. 
ij*jJ^^ thiu-se. 

ij*jju~^ thiu-se. 
^jL-wIa^j thisa-ne. 






thiu-su. 



m 



thiu-su. 



^ o s> 

thiusi-va. 






thiu-va. 



^j-j^ thia-ne. 
,j44^* thiva-ne. 

thiusi-ne. 
^^^-v^j tlnu-ne. 



^-^* 



thiu- 



ne. 



When his father haying gone and searched (after 
him) took and brought him, then he was coming forth. 
Life of Abd-ul-Latif , ]}. 3. 

As much as was necessary to him, he was taking- 
out of that vessel Ibid. p. 21. 



1) Or witliont the final nasal: iv^* tliiu-me. 



Z2 



356 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



>% 



Hearing this story her mind became mad. Maj. 375. 

^T >^ !^^* VJ-^ ))^^ ^) isir^ 

Without them (i. e. removed from them) abundant 
pains have befallen me in the furnace. Maj. 663. 

Having removed the little daughter and placed her 
in their own house, they made her read (i. e. they in- 
structed her). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 46. 

is^ (s^ o' (57 ij^ '^^ u^i^ ^^ y^ \/^ 

Whatever pieces were remaining to them from 
eating, those they used to put in the hole of that ta- 
marisk tree. Abd-ul-Latif 's life, p. 23. 

5) The Future. 

' 9 

a) The masculine form y^Jo^5> htinduse. 
SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 



bb 


Snffix I pers. 
I 

TT " " ' 

JJL jUJtXJyi> 
hunde-me. 

,-^^ '09 

hundu-me.J^ 


Suffix II pers. 
htindosa-e. 


Suffix III pers 

. ^ 9 

hundosa-se. 

9 

htinde-se. 
hundu-se. 


fejo^i htindu-e.^) 



9 t 

1) In poetry frequently *JtXJ^56 hundo-me, |»!tXi^5> hunda-me etc. 

9,^ *' 

2) Or [^iy^y^ htlnde. 



SECTION IIL THE VERB. 



357 



SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 





Suffix I pers. 


Suffix II pers. 


Suffix III pers 




I 


^Jy^^SlyS^ 


Urf*J^I<Xi^i6 






htindasu-e. 


hundasu-se. 


^ < 


n |»j4>3^^ 

hundo-me. ^) 




J 

hundo-se. 




III ^JO^ 


^dSysa hunda-e. 


- J 




hunda-me. 




hunda-se. 


PLURAL OF THE SUi^.b'lX, 






I 


.0, . , 


^LLjjJ^i 




• 


htindosa-va. 


htindosa-ne. 


Pi < 


TT ^ " ' 
11 ^^.^tXj..^ 




^JJ^i 


m 


Mnde-u. 




hunde-ne. 




TTT ' " ' 

111 jj^^j<>J^5> 








htindo-su. 


htindu-va. 


hundu-ne. 




I . . 


^0 '»'''' ^ 


5 . -^ 9 






hundasu-va. 


Mndasti-ne. 




TT ' " ' 




u3^^^ 


s 


hundo-su. 




Mndo-ne. 




Ill ^^I;f3i^ 




- J 




htinda-su. 


htinda-va. 


hunda-ne. 



h) The feminine form (j^jtXj^iC Mndiase. 
SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 



Suffix I pers. 



Sing. I 



Suffix n pers. 
htindisa-e. 



Suffix III pers. 
hundisa-se. 



1) Or ^^(X>yS^ hnnda-u-me. 



358 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 



^ < 






Suffix I pers. 

himdia-me.^) 

TXT ^ O J 

ILL jvJtX3ye 

hundya-me.^) 



hundyu-me. 

mo ? > 

hundyu-me. 



Suffix n pers. 



hundya-e. 
hundiusu-e. 



9 9 

hundyu-e. 



PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. 






TT ^ p. " ' 

hundie-u. 

TTT ' " ' 

iii ^yM^^lXiyS^ 

hundi-su. 



rTl 



n 



•mmO 



^4XJ^ 



htindiu-su. 



iS 



hundiu-su. 



hundisa-va. 



hundya-va. 

^o J o i^ a 9 

hundiusu-va. 



^ O J O J 

hundyu-va. 



Suffix in pers. 

<i-$- a 9 
Ij^J^t^yS^ 

tondia-se. 

- o ? 
U^jJ^XJyS^ 

hundya-se. 
hundiusu-se. 

9 O > 

hundyu-se. 

> O 5 

hundyu-se. 

htindisa-ne. 

hundia-ne. 

htindya-ne. 

9 o i> o ? 

htindiusu-ne. 

^^A-^y^ 
hundyu-ne. 

9 9 

^Jid^'^yS!^ 

hundyu-ne. 



1) Or AiX^JtX.Ja.^ liundie-me. 

2) The final i (y) of i^i\jy^ hundi is frequently dropped in poetry, 
as, *Jo«.5i liunda-me, instead of *-JtXJyo htindya-me (hundia-me). 



SECTION ni. THE VERB. 359 

In the same way as to y^cxl^^s hunduse and ^^iX^yS^ 

litindiase the suffixes are also attached to the Future of 
the active and passive voice, and consequently to the 
present participle of both voices. 

The head, o friend, I shall give to thee with salu- 
tation as a present, o bard! Sh. Sor. Ill, Epil. 

The merciful one, having bestowed mercy, will join 
me with him. Maj. 182. 

-ilj ^4;:^ ^J j^yo ^>i ^(Xf ^^sa 

(Thy) sweetheart will join thee on the Habb, as a 
guide on the way. Sh. Ma^B. Y, 5. 

Whatever else he will ask, that shall be given to 
him. Story of Eae Diacu, p. 7. 

^j^jjaj j4^ '-^ (^ Jf^ (ih?. \J^ ^s^ isi^y^^ ij'^^-^'i^ 

If laziness will be made, then also death will by 
no means give us up. Sindhi Eead. book, p. 63. 

^ •• i " I ^ ^ 

You will be angry with me and turn me out of 
the service. Sindhi Eead. book, p. 51. 

Sisters, says Abd-ul-Latif, my friends will remember 
me. Sh. Um. Mar. I, Epil. 



360 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

^JjLljJJyD Lit .i' 

On whose nose thou seest the nose ring, that one, 
having recognised, take out, then that one I shall be 
to thee. Amulu Man. p. 150. 



?, - > J ? 



Be ready (and) careful, the lightening will flash 
upon thee suddenly. Sh. Surag. YI, 5. 

;^'5 t5t ^^i ^ ^ cJr4. c5#5 U-^ ^^' 3;'-^>^ cHVfl 

So it is good, that we having gone fall amongst 
them and with the assistence of each other we shall beat 
and subject them. Sindhi Eead. book, p. 64. 

Then they will say to her: o princess, last night 
thou hadst gone to an amusement. Amulu Man. p. 145. 

§. 56. 

II. The pronominal suffixes attached to the regular 

verb. 

1) The Imperative. 
(The same as the Potential.) 

Having come he said to (his) mother: give me leave 
(and) permission. Maj. 77. 

The people said to his mother: ask thou thyself 
him. Maj. 42. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 361 

Show us that place, where the devotee has become 
red. Sh. Mum. Eano IH, 9. 

Lord 5 show to us their face with (out of) kindness. 
Sh. Ked. IV, 5. 

^"^ ^^}^^' 7^^ ^)^* "^^^ ^^^ 
Give him a quick arab horse ,f having placed jewels 
on the saddle. Sh. Sor. I, 18. 

The Precative. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Suffix 
I p. Sing. *j>L^4"i^ chadija-me. ^^=^3^^^ chadijo-me. 

Give me up. Give ye me up. 

Suffix c . ,_ 

in p. Sing. (jj^jLi J^£s. chadija-se. y^j.^iX^s. chadijo-se. 

Give him up. Give ye him up. 

Suffix ^ . ... ^ -.,, . i ... . 

I p. Plur. ^^AjL^^jL^ chadija-u. ^^jj^^J.^ chadijo-u. 

Give us up. Give ye us up. 

Snffix 
III p. Plur. jjLicX^^ chadija-ne. ^^=^ix^ chadijo-ne. 

Give them up. Give ye them up. 

i^'^i^ ^'trpy-%^'^ ^y^ (^-^ L^S'Lio ^;Lf .^3 ^:^ ys& 

0. ^ 

Those ten (or) twelve dishes having eaten from above 
go away from her. Amulu Man. p. 144. 

When we both come together, then please to give 
us this money. Stack's Gram. p. 135. 



362 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



When I dismiss the court, then kill him. Story of 
Rae Diacu, p. 4. 





2) The Potential. 




SINGULAR OF THE SUJb'i^TX. 




Suffix I pers. 


Suffix n pers. 


Suffix HI pers. 




I 


I^'"^^^^ 


1 :^ A ^ 










chadia-e. 


chadia-se. 




n fjjti^^ 
chade-me.^) 




.♦. ^ 

chade-se. 




ILL j^j4^ 


Sf^f^ 


0-5.^4^ 




chade-me. 


chade-i. 


chade-se. 




I 




i ... ^ 










chadiu-e. 


chadiu-se. 


^■ 


n f^:>C^ 




Lr>^^^ 


^ 


chadio-me. 




chadio-se. 




m j^44^ 


(5^44^ 


(j^jiX^ 




chadini-me. 


chadin-1. 


chadini-se. 


PLURA 


L OF THE SUFFIX. 






I 


^0. :£ .% ^ 








chadia-va. 


chadia-ne. 


t 


J-1 (J^-^'^-r'tX-^ 




ij-^^fi^ 


m 


chade-u. 




chade-ne. 




in ^y^M^rr 


^^fi^ 


ij^^-i^ 




chade-u. 


chade-va. 


chade-ne. 



l) Or A.AAJtX..^^ chadie-me, [*-A.JiX^^ cliadT-me. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



633 



PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. 






Suffix I pers. 


Suffix n pers. 


Suffix m pers. 


I 


^0 ^ .♦. ^ 

chadiu-va. 


chadiu-ne. 


chadio-u. 




chadio-ne. 


chadine-u. 


chadini-va. 


chadmi-ne. 



In the same way the suffixes accede to the Potential 
of the passive voice. The Potential and Present of the 
regular passive is however very rarely found with a 
suffix, more frequently that of intransitive verbs in the 

passive form, as: ^^ ^I'LoS gadija-e tho, I meet 

with thee. 

In the Imperfect the suffixes accede, as stated 
already, to the auxiliary verb ^^.s^ hose. 



^-r - 



••I ^ I , 

Lord, give leave of absence to the prince, that 
I may come having laid him at the feet of the Faqir. 
Amulu Man., p. 1. 

Having gone speak, o guest, that I may give thee 
there this head. Sh. Sor. I, 13. 



-5 O -- 



Even thou remainest me in the heart, even towards 
thee (are my) eyes. Maj. 211. 



364 SECTION m. THE VERB. 

Then the mother in (her) wise gives her her own 
advices. Maj. 288. 

Whatever may be necessary to thee, take that out 
of this (vessel). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 21. 

Whatever he may ask you for, that bring and give 
him. Amulu Man., p. 148. 

(^ I .. - - ^ • 

Brahman! woman! become pieces of flesh, in order 
that the dogs of Kec may eat thee! Sh. Ma^B. I, 1. 

O Eano, the record (pi.) of our conversations kills 
us. Sh. Mum. Eano V, 10. 

Though their wounds flow, yet do they not their 
sigh divulge to the people. Sh. Kal. II, 23. 

3) The past participle. 

(The III pers. of the Aorist.) 

The way, in which the pronominal suffixes accede 
to the Aorist of neuter verbs, may be seen from the 

paradigm of (j^l^* thiuse. In the Aorist of the passive 

voice the suffixes are only attached to the m pers. 
Sing, and Plur. or to the past participle passive. The 
suffixes thus attached imply either a Dative-Accusa- 
tive (the object in general) or an Instrumental. The 
suffixes of the I and 11 pers. of the Sing, and Plur. may 
at the same time denote the object or the agent, but 



SECTION III. THE YERB. 



365 



in the HI pers. Sing, and Plur. different suffixes are 
employed to express the object or the agent, se and 
ne denoting the object, and i and u the agent (see 
§. 54). Both 1 and u are considered as heavy suf- 
fixes, which draw the accent from the first to the last 
syllable of the verb; final o of the past participle must 
therefore be changed to a before them (and for eu- 
phony's sake with an additional nasal to a), to give a 
support to the following heavy suffix. In the fem. Sing. 
an a must likewise be inserted between the final i 
and the suffixes i and u, to which even the feminine 
Plural termination u must give way, so that the Sin- 
gular and Plural of both genders become ahke, if joined 
by the instrumental suffixes i and u. 

a) The past participle with single suffixes. 
The masc. Sing. ^jjLi^ chadio. 





Suffix I pers. 


Suffix n pers. 


Suffix III pers. 


Sing. 




i^M^ 


jjo^LjL^ 




chadiu-me. 


chadyu-e. ^) 


chadia-i. 


Plur. 


^^Ly^Sj^ 




^j^bjL^ 




chadio-su. 


chadyu-va. ^) 


chadia-u. 




The masc. 


plur. Ij44^ ^^^ 


idia. 


Sing. 


(^44^ 


|5^4^ 


^a^Lj44?^ 




chadia-me. 


chadya-e. ^) 


chadia-i. 


Plur. 


> 1 :& .♦. ^ 


^^^^ 


^yJ>\.j<X^ 




chadia-su. 


chadya-va. 


chadia-u. 



1) Or ^j<X^ chadie (chadye). 

2) Occasionally also: ^^IjcX-^:^ chady-a. 

3) Or contracted ^Jk.^^ chadye. 



366 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 





The fern. 


Sing. (5<i^ chadi. 




Suffix I pers. 


Suffix II pers. 


Suffix m pers. 


Sing. 


1^4^^ 


^.^ 


^A3La4^ 




chadia-me. 


chadya-e. 


chadia-i. 


Plur. 


ur^4i^ 


i^^H^ 






cliadi-su. 


chadya-va. 


chadia-u. 




The fern. Plur. ^^<X^ chadiu. 


Sing. 




^M^ 


j^bJ4^ 




chadiu-me. ^) 


chadyu-e. 


chadia-i. 


Plur. 


^^11^^44^ 


^:?<^4^ 






chadiu-su. 


chadyu-va. 


chadia-u. 



Another fruit of this sweetness was never eaten by 
me. Maj. 129. 

-:> ^' '^> :•♦•• "» 

Having come thou hast seen that high bank, of 
which thou hast heard with (thy) ears. Sh. Surag. HE, 9. 

(My) friend has been separated by thee, calculates 
Sorathi. Sh. Sor. I, Epil. 

^o.AJLx^N .5&L^ |*Xi jjbf J'-'b ^ \J'^''^ ^"h^i^-^^^ 7^ 

By her a son was born, to whom by them the 
name Mia Glhulam Shah was given, Abd-ul-Latif's life, 
p. 35. 



i> ... ^ 



1) Written and pronounced frequently *.J4Xg.:^ cliadiu-me, without 
an intervening nasal. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 367 

Having drunk a cup of love we understood every 
thing. Sh. Kal. H, Epil. 

^^ ^"^ ^>^ iJ^ ^y" £iji isf ^^^ 
If by you the Baroc, the sweetheart, had been seen 
with the eyes, as by me. Sh. Hus. XI, 1. 

,.^-uj ^j-fr^ }^y^ ^j^'^ }^ c^?^^ (j^iXc J ^y 

Was never sent by them to thee any message with 
love? Maj. 648. 

Would that I had not suffered so much anxiety 
about the mountaineer. Sh. Abiri Y, 17. 

Even from the midst he was cut off by thee; thou 
didst not make one step. Sh. Hus. X, 27. 

I have never informed me about thee nor remem- 
bered thee, o friend! Maj. 757. 

What wants unction she does not anoint; her beauty 
has been wasted by gTief. Sh. Um. Mar. HE, 7. 

We have not any bread taken with us , therefore he 
spoke thus. Matth. 16, 7. 

I likely would not have been stopped by you; you 
aU would have slided down (into the river), ha^dng taken 
jars (to swim upon). Sh. Suh. I, 3. 



368 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 



U^:?pl4^ |4$'Lj (5^ JJ;-^. ;-^L^ j^lS 

For the sake of seeing my friend I applied little 
peepings, i. e. I peeped a little through. Sh. Kambh. 11, 
Epil. 1. 

Lest some say to me: by thee the daughters of the 
Thar have been put to shame. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 17. 

Then having thrown (your) mouth into (your) sleeves, 
you would have made wailings in the desert. Sh. Hus. 
XII, 6. 

Suffixes of the III pers. Sing, and Plur. denoting 

the object. 



Sing, (j^ jL^ chadiu-se. 

Plur. ^jL^ chadiu-ne. 

Sing. (jjoJ4^ chadia-se. 

Plur. ^jo44^ chadia-ne. 



(j^jJL^ chadia-se. 
^jjjL^ chadia-ne. 

^jt,j^(X.^ cnadm-se. 
jjojLg^ chadiu-ne. 



^y^y^v ^-^ C5^^ >^ u^ (5^^ c^ M^v <^^ 3^ 

One says: a jinn has fallen into his body, another 
says: his understanding has turned round (i. e. he has 
become mad). Maj. 40. 

Yesterday met with us a Kapari, a mendicant babu. 
Sh. Mum. Eano III, 4. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 369 

All those have been forgotten by me, whoever (be) 
my relatives and friends. Maj. 212. 

g^bj^ ^^ ^^y j.A^J j.A4^ ^j.^J5^ >^J"^ 

In the bottom she has got leaks , from the sides water 

flows in, 
The mast has become old, all her ropes are dangling. 
Sh. Surag. m, 6. 

That little daughter also, when she was hearing 
the talk of him, used to stand up herself, and having 
taken and brought a piece of bread, was giving it him. 
Abd-ul-Latlf's life, p. 46. 

^LSJVX) Lg.5 ^yjQ ^J^Mj ^-^J ^^y^ y^ '^ 

If there had been to you, like as to me, a meeting 
with the sweetheart Punhu. Sh. Hus. XIE, 6. 

Cc5^ '^ CJ^^' ;'>^ CS^ J'"^ (5^ u*^^^ O^ 

JN'o intelligence of this our state has come to thee. 
Maj. 229. 

Their speech perhaps would not be forgotten by 
you. Sh. Hus. XII, 7. 



1) ^aj pi-e instead of ^J piya-e, 

Trumpp, Sindlu-Grrammai'. A^i 



370 SECTION III. THE YERB. 

- ^ " ^ - ... ^ 5 

They went having given me up; some (word) has 
fallen upon their gall bag. Sh. Ma^B. HI, Epil. 

u^rtyi erf-' >^5 UT^ 'o^^-^ u*'^^ 

In that wise, as the advices came to her, she, having 
gone, answers him. Maj. 424. 

By the wine nothing was done to them; by the 
ill-language of the released one they were killed. Sh. 
Jam. Kal. IV, 18. 

At a vice every body takes offence; (my) friends 
have taken offence at (my) virtues. Sh. Asa IV, 24. 

^y^ (J'"%-^'^"? (S^"^ ^^^ »i^^'^ (j-^f^ 

'^■i-^^7^^. \J^ y, ^4^' (54^ ij^^ 

By whom were enchantments made to thee? how wast 

thou confused, o camel? 
Upon (thy) eyes are hoods; in the plain (thy) feet were 

grated. Sh. Kambh. H, 39. 

Of slender loin, of straight nose, their eyes filled 
with lamp-black. Sh. Sam. I, 35. 

&) The past participle with two suffixes. 

To the past participle passive two suffixes may be 
attached, the first denoting the agent and the latter 
the object (Dative -Accusative), as: 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 371 

^jUoj.j4i.^ chadio-ma-e = p44^ (s-^ f-^ u;-"^ 

thou wast given up by me , literally : by me it was given 
up in reference to thee. 

To suffixes of the II pers. Sing, and Plur. no further 
suffix is added, joint suffixes of this kind being mostly 
found in the III pers. Sing and Plur., very seldom in 
the I pers. Sing, and Plur. 

The suffix used for the I person Singular is in this 

case not me, but ma (the Instrumental of ^.IjI au), 
as 'me' would not be strong enough to support the 
following suffix. The Instrumental suffix of the HI pers. 
Singular i is either contracted with the preceding a 
to a, or is retained before a following suffix; the suffix 
of the m. person Plural keeps its place before 
another acceding suffix, but is frequently shortened 
to u (u). 

ISTo change of gender and number can take place 
in the participle, when joined by the suffix of the 
in person Singular or Plural; but when the participle 
is provided with a suffix of the I person Singular 
or Plural, it must agree with its subject in gender 
and number. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 



Suffix 

I pers. 

Smg. 



^jLij.j<X.^ chadio-ma-e. ^UjJL^^ chadi-ma-e. 
^Lij.j Jl^£s. chadio-ma-se. (j^Uj^X^^ chadi-ma-se. 
yl\.xi^(X^ chadio-ma-va. yUjtX^s^ chadi-ma-va. 
^Uj-jJ^A. chadio-ma-ne. ^\^<X^:^ chadi-ma-ne, 



372 SECTION IH. THE VERB. 

Masc. and Fern. Sing, and Plur. 



to 

•rH 






X 

IB 



jvAAAJUJL^ chadia-i-me or: aJL^Jl^ chadia-me. 



^JJUiiLjtX^cs^ chadia-i-e or: ^\^<X^ chadia-e. 

(j^^jGjl^is. chadia-i-se or: u^bJL^^s^ chadia-se. 

^j^wwJUAJbjLg^ chadia-i-su or: ^^*u^jLjJL^ chadia-su. 

IjUajUlL^ chadia-i-va or: ljbjLg.£s^ chadia-va. 

^jm^^jLjJL^ chadia-i-ne or: ^jLJ-g^ chadia-ne. 



Suffix 

I pers. 

Plur. 



^jj^piX^ chadio-su-e. ^^^jJL^ chadi-su-e. 

^j^J^soJLg^ chadio-su-se. (jj^I^-wljJL^ chadi-su-se. 

y^I;j.ja4r^ chadio-su-va. y^J^^a^^ cliadi-su-va. 

^^j.jj-^ chadio-su-ne. ^^j^jlL^ chadi-su-ne. 

Masc. and Fern. Sing, and Plur. 

*3«jk.jL^jL^ chadia-u-me. ^) 
^j«.juGjL^ chadia-u-e. 
(j^^IjLjd^^ chadia-u-se. 



Suffix 
m pers. Plur. 



^^l^j^C<X^s> chadia-u-su. 
pj.x3LjJ..g£s. chadia-u-va. 
^jyjl^<X^ chadia-u-ne. 



<i> ,^;. ^ 



1) Or shortened: |vAAJLj4X^£i. chadia-ii-me and with elision of 
the final nasal: *.v6U<X^:^ chadia-u-me. 



SECTION III. THE VERB. 373 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fem. 

Suffix I pers. Sing. ^jjULTJ^^ ^Lii^j J^^s. 

chadia-ma-e. chadiu-ma-e. 

etc. etc. 

Suffix I pers. Plur. ^3«-wbtX4^ ^y'^^^i^r^ 

chadia-su-e. chadiu-su-e. 

etc. etc. 

I brought him to thy disciples, but they could not 
cure him. Matth. 17, 16. 

He gave him provisions (and) victuals. Story of 
Eae Diacu, p. 5. 

^c>\yK^\.^ j^^ ^\ ^5^^ j=J J» jjb* "^^-^^ .;sL^ P»^L£ ^L^ 

Mia Grhulam Shah, having jumped from the couch, 
having come (and) seized the hand of the gentleman, 
seated him upon the couch at its upper part (hterally: 
from its upper part). Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 7. 

LT-^^V^ \j^y^ (^^^ ^^'^ 4>La^I j.j| ^3l 

Having risen he came to (his) master and addressed 
to him standing the petition. Maj. 6. 

She said to them: fathers, what reason have you 
to ask after this? Amulu Man. p, 140. 



374 SECTION III. TIIE VERB. 

Having given all this as a gift to the Faqir he 
started them off. Ainulu Man. p. 140. 

They, having placed their money in deposit with 
an old woman said to her. Stack's Gram. p. 135. 

Having prepared bread and brought (it), they placed 
it before him. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 48. 

4) The past participle with the auxiliary 

^s^^ ahe etc. 

(The Perfect.) 

The single suffixes, be they referring to the agent 
or the object, are joined to s^l ahe and ^j^l, but 

chiefly to the form ^'s\ atha (§. 55), and not to the 
participle itself. 

But to the form .^ji atha a double suffix may be 
joined, the first implying the agent and the latter the 

object, as: ^U.a.^-1 j.jS, I have given to thee, literally: 

it has been given by me in reference to thee. The 
suffix of the HI. person Singular and of the II. person 
Plural does not admit of a second suffix. 

The original i of ^fN? atthi reappears again and 
is lengthened at the same time, when followed by a 
double suffix in the II. and III. person Singular, to give 
a support to the heavy joint -suffix. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 



375 



Suffix 
I pers. Sing. 



Singular and Plural. 
^U^'l piX^ chadio athi-ma-e. 
(jjJUj^'I IjJ^r^ chadia athi-ma-se. 

^Ua^jI iS^ry chadi athi-ma-va. 

^^U-ygj| ^j^<X^ chadiu athi-ma-ne. 



if 



Suffix 
n pers. Sing. 



U^tV^^^*^ 



ur 






ch^-^*^ 



athe-i-me. 
athe-i-se. 
athe-i-su. 
athe-i-ne. 



Suffix 
I pers. Plur. 






ath-u-e. 
ath-u-se. 
ath-u-va. 
ath-ti-ne. 



Suffix 
in pers. Plur. 






atha- 



ni-me. 



„ atha-ne-I. 
„ atha-ni-se. 
„ atha-ne-u. 
„ atha-ni-va. 
atha-ni-ne. 



376 SECTION III. THE VERB. 

(^■€-^*^ ^y-hf^^ ^^A4JL^ ^y^^f i^yi^ ^ ^^JO ^Igl^ 

In a dream I have suffered many things for his 
sake. Matth. 27, 19. 

^^st\ ^1^^^ .55dl5" ^3 Oj.f ^^ ^Ij ^yl ^^^ 

He has placed his neck upon the knee of Husine, 
the fairy queen. Amulu Man. p. 152. 

Then having dried the hairs thou hast asked for 
clothes. Ibid. p. 146. 

The lions awakened him (saying): the fairies have 
come to thee. Ibid. p. 150. 

5) The past participle with the auxiliary jJJ^ etc. 
(The Pluperfect.) 

The single suffixes are joined to z.ssi ho etc., 
which see. Thus in the III person Singular and Plural 
the instrumental suffix i and u is also attached to 

j.55 etc., as: ^j^AA^Lli }^^^ chadio hua-i^), by him it 

had been given up, ^^^ajL^^o p'6^^ chadio hua-u, by 
them it had been given up. 

But to J.P ho etc. a double suffix may also be 
attached, the first denoting the agent and the latter the 

object, as: ^Loj.5a j.jd49- chadio ho-ma-e, thou hadst 

been given up by me, literally: it had been given up 
by me in reference to thee. These double suffixes however 
are of rare occurence; in the II person Singular and 
Plural they are not in use. 

1) Instead of |^a.ajLa5> hua-i and j^«.ajLa55 hua-u the contracted 
forms ^j.AAjL55 ha-i and (j^/iL^ ha-u (from yS^) are also in use. 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 
SINGULAR. 



377 



^LX)jJ» >StX^^ 



Suffix 
I pers. Sing. 



Suffix 
in pers. Sing. 



Fern. 

chadi liui-ma-e. 

chadi hui-ma-se. 

chadi hui-ma-va. 

chad! hui-ma-ne. 
Masc. and Eem. Sing, and Plur. 

J<^'^Cj^ (^j^J.4^ chadio hua-i-me. 

^AAjlIi Lj^X^r^ chadia hua-i-e. 

(j^^A^LliS ^44^7^ chad! hua-i-se. 



Masc. 
chadio ho-ma-e. 
chadio ho-ma-se. 
chadio ho-ma-va. 
chadio ho-ma-ne. 



*-djL-^ ,.,^^4X4.-. chadiu hua-i-su. 



La5> 



ajLa55 



5J 



Suffix 
I pers. Plur. 






chadio ho-su-e. 

O } s> '' " 

chadio ho-su-se. 

^o ? j^ :. ^ 

chadio ho-su-va. 
chadi5 ho-su-ne. 



„ hua-i-va. 
,, hua-i-ne. 

chad! hui-su-e. 

chad! hui-su-se. 



^^^' 



chadi hui-su-va. 
chadi hui-su-ne. 



1) Or shortened: *.aajIaP^ liua-1-me , and with ehsion of the final 
nasal of the first suffix: *.-olA;a hua-i-me etc. 



378 



Suffix 
in pers. Plur 



SECTION m. THE VERB. 

Masc. and Fern. Sing, and Plur. 

(W^lAio (^j^<X^ chadio hua-u-me. 

^byJilj>.ss> LjiXg^ chadia hua-u-e. 

yj^jj.-oL/^ (5^^ cnadi nua-u-se. 

^y^j^jJills!^ jj^jiX^ chadiu hua-u-su. 

„ „ liua-u-va. 

hua-u-ne. 



^0 i> .^ y 






PLURAL, 

Masc. 



Suffix 
I pers. Sing. ^Ulli LIJ.^^ 

chadia hua-ma-e 
etc. etc. 
Suffix 
I pers. Plur. ^yj^llsa Ld^T^ 

chadia hua-su-e. 
etc. etc. 



Fem. 

chadiu huyu-ma-e. 
etc. etc. 

chadiu huyu-us-e. 
etc. etc. 



^jja >^? L^-^^ 3^ (j--y^f^ ^:^ u*"^ u^^ 7^^. '-^ )"^^^ <5) 

O son of the potter! with me thou hadst made a 
term of two months. Story of Eae Diacu, p. 5. 

Give us that letter, which thou hadst promised. Abd- 
ul-Latif's life, p. 49. 

He looked towards that servant, whom he had in- 
structed beforehand. Ibid. p. 9. 

1) Or sliortened ^aajLa^ hua-u-me, and with elision of the final 
nasal of the first suffix: *-vjIa5& hua-u-me j etc. 



SECTION in. THE VERB. 379 



^' - n'S* I-- i^"^-* -•I-' 



By reason of tliat word, wHch the Faqir liad spoken 
to you, tie has not come himself. Abd-ul-Latif's Hfe, 
p. 49. 

^-y^ )4^ c5^ ^^ y^i LTj^ r^ i^e ^ >^^^ >^^ 



^aJL^Ji 



That nose ring, as it had been said to him by the 
fairy, he threw into the jar of the slave -girl. Amulu 
Man., p. 150. 

What royal word had been spoken by them. Ibid, 
p. 143. 

6) The Future. 

(Active and passive voice.) 

See the paradigm of j^dj^ hunduse. 



380 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 



SECTION IV. 

ADYERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS 
AND INTERJECTIONS. 



Chapter XVIIL 

Adverbs. 

§. 57. 

The Sindlii has only a limited number of original 
adverbs.^) Adverbs are not derived from adjectives by 
any change of the adjectival termination, but the ad- 
jective as such (in the masc. Sing.) is either used in an 
adverbial sense, or the adjective, agreeing in gender and 
number with the subject referred to, is employed, where 
we would use an adverb as a complement to the verb, as: 

3^5 ^j^ yk^f he weeps much: y^ ^J^< ^^^ ^fj ^ 
he eats only bread. 

A number of substantives are at the same time 
also used adverbially, either in the ITominative, the In- 
strumental, the Locative or the Ablative case, similarly 
some adjectives in the Locative and Ablative have re- 
ceived an adverbial signification. 



1) Adverbs borrowed from the Arabic or Persian are here only 
so far taken into consideration, as they are commonly used in 
Sindhl. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 



381 



I. Original adverbs. ^) 

The most common of tliem are: 



v3lJl apaka, accidentally. 
Jl apare, excessively. 
cjI ate. verv. 



C 



i aju, to-day. 



Jo 1^1 acanaka, I suddenly; 
^..^L^l acacete, unawares. 

c - T T ^ ^ on the 

^t ^^'^^^^- fourth day 

o - - , 1 _ I (from the 
,.ySiyS tarena, ^ ,^ 

^^^/ ' J present). 

j^\ asahn. wholly; com- 
pletely. 

aJuJI albattah, certainly 
(arab.). 

vXJLcl umalaka, in a moment. 

Ql ana, till now. 

,j^ base, enough. 

JjCJLj bilkule, wholly; ab- 
solutely (arab.). 
^j^ bineha, completely. 

^^^ patia, 



o^, phate, 



completely ; 
at all. 



^vj pareha, after to- 
morrow. 
<^JS turtu, quickly. 
^ys toe, then. 
-^4^' thahapaha, quickly. 
^SLi. jai, positively; ne- 
nessarilj. 
^L janu, to say so: as if. 

^i^oL^^ jhatepate, 

> instantly. 
oyo:^ catepate, 

;j.jCo* jelvuse, perhaps, 
j.^^ cho, why? 
Ijs..! sada, always. 
tXJLi say ad, 
cL^SL^ saita. 



^M. sat a. 



perhaps, 
(pers.) 



^l< kalha., , •, 

■ yesterday. 

.41^ kalha,] 
ljs.5^ kadacite, perhaps. 

S kara^), as if; to say 
so; like. 



1) The numeral adverbs see §. 29. 

2) Or \S karu. 



382 



SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 



jLT gadu, together. 

J lura, straight- 
forward; instantly. 



LT^ 



masa 



^L-iL^ masa, 
^j.A.w^ mase. 



with 
difficulty. 



^I:^JLX) muftu, gratuitously, 
(pers.) 

J na, not. 
vLxJ nipatu, very; ex- 
ceedingly, 
vi^j nitu, 
;Cj o6 nitu pratu 

nicu, with a wellcome. 



always. 



r 



nikani, thoroughly; 
wholly. 
.^^ nethe, finally; at last. 

yL>^ vetare, very greatly. 

SLi hane, 



C5^ 



iL^ hane-i. 



now; im- 
mediately. 



9 ^ } ^ 



^w4j^v5> harubharu, certainly. 
1aa5> hiara, now. 

jjya htinda, possibly; 
perhaps. 

Ix5& hera, now. 

;^,K<^5> hekari, still more; 
still further. 



4:?*^ (S^' C>-^'^ (^* U*^' ;5J.l5'f ^1 



I am very longing as well after the spinning place 
as after the country. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 1. 

As yet thou art ignorant, thou takest no notice of 
the furnace. Sh. Jam. Kal. Ill, 11. 

^iljj ^^S ^^j^ -^^ 

Having snatched (it) quickly she rose and flew away. 
Amula Man. p. 147. 

^ .. - - ?.": ' u. \- ' ?' 

The returning of him, who falls into the face of 
Mtimala, is effected with difficulty. Sh. Mum. Rano 

ni, 5. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 383 

(5^^* }H^ isf^.^ ^f^'^ .^L^j-U ^Zf^ 

At length the king, sitting (and) sitting, becomes 
dissatisfied. Amulu Man. p. 143. 

"■^t (5-^ (5?^. (J^f -^r^ ^'j^^ (^d-Uj ^>:^ 

If thou having read the Kanz, the Qudtirl, the 

Kafia^), understandest them all, 
It is as if a lame ant , which has fallen into a well, 

contemplates the sky. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 4. 

r. .!"- I- ^..T ^ > 

j^S«-CvaA/0 ^WavO ^•.AJI (^wA«* U^-^^ U^-^^^ 

Perhaps I have been forgotten from the mind of 
the beloved. Maj. 507. 



O - 9, ^ 



In smiling they (i. e. the teeth) are apparent, as if 
the sunflowers would laugh. MaJ. 55. 

Thou art welcome, thou art welcome! Amulu 
Man. p. 141. 

II. Peculiar use of Adjectives. 

The following adjectives may be either used as 
(indecl.) adverbs or they may agree with their subject 
in gender and number even in such constructions, where 
in English an adverb would be used. 



1) Grammatical treatises in Arabic. 

2) (^-^J is substantive, after which (^v> kare is to be supplied: 
i. e. having made a favour thou art come = thou art welcome! 



384 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

sol ado^), opposite; in front. 
j.As.j! ocitoly, unexpected; unexpected; suddenly; by 

chance. 
jOjl odo, 1 * 

jjSjt odird, dim, | 

jjb^l avelo, out of time; late. 

^^^,ic>y^ caudharij round about. 

aj&jfj dadho, hard, intense; very much. 
j..^LL sajhuru, early. 
jjt^LL samuho, in front. 
y\Sy^ savaro, 



3;^>- 



early; at an early hour. 



-yS^dyL sudho ^) , I accompanied by; along with (with 
'^iL sao I ^^^ Instrumental). 

^y^^C^Jj^ mahandiyo, in front; before. 



jj.^^^ vejhiro, dim, 

" 1 



near; close to. 



In the same way the Adjectives, implying time or 
place, derived from adverbs by the affixes aho or 
aro are either used adverbially or they may agree 
with their subject in gender and number, as: 



1) jtSt fj^jl fijJ-^L'^ c3-€^.^ ^^y ^® ccnstructed with ^^^si- 



tr I 



or ,^^. 



2) 5.5>i>^ is probably derived from tbe Sansk. ^J^^ , with; 



^y 



s^ . 



from ^tf^j joined by. 



CONJUNCTION'S AND INTERJECTIONS. 385 

^i;cir;! 5ralio, somewhat on this side; from ^x;( ore, 
on this side. ' 

^ji5>L^ agaho, somewhat in front; fr'om ^S age, be- 
fore, in fr'ont. 

^iifiUcjij poetaho, a Kttle behind; fr^om ^^j-j poete, in 
the rear. 

^jjfiL^Xo mathaho, somewhat higher up; from ^^^ 
mathe, on; upon. 

j.l^<A^ manjharo, I somewhat inside; from ..^^^ man- 
^ys^\j^^ manjhaho, J J^^' ^^' 

When used adverbially (which is commonly the case), 
they take also the fem. termination, as: 

jj^Lri agahi, in fr'ont; in advance. 

,j^l4^ mathahi, on the top; above. 

The Adjectives, ending in ait5 (§. 10, 20) may at 
the same time be used adverbially, as: 

jJoL4^ suhaitd, suitable and suitably. 

^Ll^ vasaito, optional and optionally. 

etc. etc. etc. 

The Adjectives of one ending, which are not in- 
flected, may all be used as adverbs; as: 

JG barabare, right and rightly. 

;L^ jara, 1 

< \ much; very. 

JL^ jala, J 

jJLs^ jalda, quick and quickly. 

vio^^ soditu, true and truly. 

o4^ jaba'iu, vain and vainly, 
etc. etc. etc. 

Trumpp, SindM-Grraminar. B b 



Sm SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

By chance one mouse made a liole in the vicinity 
of that garner. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 54. 

(Thy) friends have departed early, look thou, o lost 
one! to-day. Sh. Sam. II, Epil. 2. 

Then his mother, having shed tears (and) having 
wept very much, returned. Maj. 99. 

Then there is some very ancient generosity of the 
Egyptians. Maj. 135. 

iai [J'^l VJ"-^ ^J-f^ *-^^ f»^ 3-:?^ 

Joining the Lam with the Alif they write nicely 
letters. Maj. 144. 

If they had performed the advice, they would have 
quickly become whole. Sh. Jam. Kal. II, 2. 

Hot winds blow, the days are excessively hot. Sh. 
Desi m, Epil. 

With him there are only words. Amulu Man. 
p. 150. 

L:s^ Vj4^^ U5^ ^' ^'W C5)'■^^5■r^ 

Round about sound the beUs of the woodmen. Sh. 
Suh. IV, 2. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 387 

The eyes are opposite to tlie eyes the whole day 
(and) night. Maj. 219. 

^L^ ^^^ -^/o ^jj^ ^)^y*' ^'^ 

Thou hadst fallen asleep early, having wrapt up 
(thy) face like the dead ones. Sh. Kah. I, 11. 

Do not turn me back; I am ahead. Sh. Sor 

ly, 12. 

m. Substantives used adverbially in the 
uninflected state. 

A number of substantives are at the same time also 
used as adverbs, as: 

y^\ avera, ^ ^^^ q£ ^-^^^^ i^j.^.^ subst. f. Is^f avera, 
jo^l avela, delay. ' 

,jL^ bucha, unpleasingly ; subst. f. ^L^ bucha, disgust. 
^sLS tari^a, daily; subst. f. i^;LS tarixa, a date. 

^^ J 5 I forcibly; very; subst. m. jj.£> joru, force. 
^3^ zoru, j 

^^''^^JO dihari, daily; subst. f. ^vL^S dihari, day. 

ij^^^lL subaha, to-morrow; subst. f. ^j4^ subaha, the 
morrow. 

o^ savera, early; subst. f. Ij^Iw savera, the early 
' hour of day. 



J o - J 



Then, because they will sleep out of time, therefore 
the sun wall even there rise to them. Amulu Man., p. 145. 

Bb 2 



388 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

My lover Majn5 is sorely displeased. Maj. 294. 
^ ' ^ ^ 

Daily it (the mouse) used to spend a great portion 
from it for the sake of the companions. Sindhi Eead. 
Book, p. 55. 

IV. Substantives and Adjectives used adverbially in the 

injBlected state. 

1) Substantives. 

^j^A^n agahi (instead of agehi), before, Locat. with 
emphatic hi, jfrom ^\ agu, the front. 
^\ age, before; Loc. from, j.5^ ago, the forepart. 

Kd^S andare, inside; within; Loc. from \o^\ an- 
daru, the inside. 

Jy^\ andaca, K^^^ ^^^j^.^. ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^ 
^j^jJl andaro, J 

43aSf ananda, well; in good health; lustrum, from 
txlif anandu, happiness. 

J^jl 5rake, at last; Loc. from J^jl oraku, the end. 

w5Lj bahare, outside, Loc. 
^jIliLj bahara, from the outside, Abl. 



from ^iLS ba- 
haru, the 
outside. 



.Lj pare, on the o]oposite 
side, Loc. 

^Qj para, from the opposite 
side, Abl. 



from JLj paru, the 
opposite side. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 



389 



^^Li pase, on the side; near; Loc. from j^lJ jo^^so, 
the side. 
^Ll^j puthea, behind; from the back; Abl. from 
^j puthe, the back. 
eij poe, after; Loc. 



from ij.j pou, the 
latter part. 



^\11 pua^), I from behind; 
- I after; Abl. 

^j}A^ Haqqo, justly; Abl. from i^j^ Haqqu, justice. 

jjUXL Hukuma, I violently; Abl. I from liCi huku- 
^l hukumane, J ^^ ^^^^^' Instr. J ^^' command. 

^jjX^y^ Xuseo, willingly, Abl. from (Jt^ X^^^j pleasure. 
^i.^L> dileo, willingly; Loc. from J^ dile, heart. 
.j\ zorCj forcibly; Loc. from sj\ zoru, force. 



(J^Uo mage, 
^j^^[^ magahi, emph. 

^^ mathe, on the top; Loc 

^jL^aJo matha, from upon; Abl. 

syj3 mure, 

^^;^ murahl, emph. 
^Ajjj^x mura-1, emph. 



at all; completely; Loc. from 
J^u magu, place. 



from j»^i matho, 
the head. 



at all; 
} com- 
pletely; ^^j_ 



tXl^ mahande, in the beginning; 

before; Loc. 

^\S^x^ mahanda; from the beginning; 

before; AbL 



from K^o 

mtiru, 
capital. 



? ^ ^ 

irom iXx^xi 
mahandu, be- 
ginning. 



1) (^v./^. pua etc. instead of ^LjiJ poa. 



390 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

^jgiw^j nihice, certainly; Instrum. from j-^J^ nihicd, 
certainty. 

^^ vice, in the midst; Loc. from '^ vicu, the 
midst. 



^j^di hadehi, emph. 
JLi hade^), 



at all; Loc. from jLi hadu, 
the core. 



.^iu^i hethe , below ; Loc. 1 ^ ' .. i - x i 

^ -, • ' I Irom .J^L^ hethu, 

^L4^ hetha, from below; Abl. j ^^^ ^^^^^^^ * 

Laside is to the Adesis (Jogis) the Lord personally. 
Sh. Eamak. IT, 6. 

;^ S^y^ ^ i^ ^yJ^, iSf ij}i ^^^ 

Outside another speech is used; in the heart there 
is a wounded fierce look. Sh. Ramak IH, 2. 

Nothing else at all he asks; give the invaluable 
(thing) to this one. Sh. Sor. I, 8. 



> ^ rr fi i 



In front will be Mustafa; in the rear the world 
will march. Sh. Barv5 Sindhi 11, Epil. 2. 

2) Adjectives. 

^Liyi agiya, before; Abl. from ^j-^l agiyo, first; 
prior. 

oJSl anante, exceedingly; Loc. from vLJil anantu, 
endless. 



1) l5*^Lx) ^\yA and iXS^ signify in a negative sentence, ""by no means'. 



COXJUNCTIOXS AM) INTERJECTIONS. 



391 



^)^ 



\ ore, on this side: 
near; Loc. 



uL^;3' 






.j»j<A-o 



oriya . from tliis side : 
near; Abl. 



from jjNjf oriyo, of 

this side: near. 



avase, helplessly; Loc, from ^v-^l ayasu, helpless. 

bhale, Avell; Loc. from J^ bhalo, good. 

bedohe, faultlessly; Loc. from ,^iix>^ bedohu, 
faultless. 



^cvJ pare, far off; Loc. 



u^T^ 









j'^L. 












parea, from a distance; 
beyond; Abl. fem. 
pehere, at first; Loc. 



from v!> paru, re- 
mote, distant. 



fi^om ,.r.r4J pe- 



U^Ttt- 



pehera-i, from the first; Abl. hero, the first. 

caiiia, well: in a good manner; Abl. fem. from 

j.^-ii cano, good, 
dhire, o"entlv; Loc. from ;w^5^^ dhiro, o'entle. 

dadhia, violently; Abl. fem. from i^^jfj da- 
dho, violent. 

sabhea, effectually; Ablat. from .-§-?L.l sabhe, 
effectual. 

samhune, in front: Loc. from a.I.^lJy samhuno, 
of the front. 



savere, earlv; Loc. from. 



iy^- 



savero. earlv. 



mathia. disgustingly; Abl. fem. from ^^^ ma- 
th5. bad. 

haure or ^^ u^ hore. o-entiv: Loci ,. 
hauria : 



Abl fem. liauro, gentle. 



392 



SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS. 



(5^ V^ ijL^ 0*^f ^?J^ iSyi, j^. 

The pain went far off with the coming of (my) 
friend. Sh. Jan. Kal. II, 10. 

You will feel very disgusted. Sindhi Eead. Book, 
p. 51. 

Standing on the road give forcibly three cries and 
say. Ibid. p. 66. 

V. Adverbs derived from the Pronominal bases. 

From the pronominal bases a number of adverbs 
is derived by means of certain affixes, which coalesce 
with the pronominal base. We exhibit them in the 
following survey. 



Pron. base. Manner. 


Place. 


Direction. 


Time. 


i, 1, e he. JajI la^) 


^1 ite^) 


^a.j| ede^) 


^jjy^jf e-si*) 


^J-UiD hia 


o^ hete 


(^jLa;& hede 


^^j^ he-si 


^aS! i§ 
in this wise. 


here. 


in this 
direction. 


up to this time 
(or place). 



1) Or short: (Jjj la, ^Xs^ liTa; ^j| ua, ^J^^ jia etc. 

2) Or ,JS\ ite, .J^^sa hete; also /ff-gol ithe; ^*l ute etc. 

3) There are many other forms of this adverb, as: ^S^iX^} edaha, 
^^ajul edahu, ^S^ik^S!^ hedaha etc.; see Stack's Sindhi Dictionary 
under the different forms. 

4) Or ^avua/wjI es'^a, ^J^^} e-sla etc. This set of adverbs is ge- 
nerally compounded with the postpositions ^^ajIj ta-T, ^^^j'"' ^^"^ ^^ 
ic^y^ tonl, as: ^^^jIaaaaw^jI esTtai etc., or shortened: ^^^^^^^JiMt.^} 
es-taT etc. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTEKJECTIONS. 



393 



Pron. base. Manner. 


Place. 


Direction. 




Time. 


5 

u,u,6,h6. ^^1 


ua 


> 
1^1 u-te 


^:>3l o-de 


^J.Xaa;j| 0-Sl 


^y^ 


hua 


c>i hu-te 


^ij.ia ho-de 


ij.juvj.55 ho-Sl 


ch2I 


ue 


there. 


in that 


up to that 


1 








direction. 


time. 


(J^ 


hue 










in that 


wise. 










J^ y^ 






Cu-^-- 


U^?^ 


jia 


ji-te 


je-de 


je-si 


jade-hi 


u^^ 


v:i«^ 




\j^^ 


^^ 


ji-e. 


ja-te 




ja-si 


Ja 


in which 


where. 


in which 


as long as. 


when. 


wise. 




direction. 






so ^i^ 


Ci\J 


^iX^- 


^:^V^" 




ti-a 


ti-te 


te-de 


te-si 


tade-hi 


c>^: 


v,:iO 




cT^^ 


J^ 


ti-e 


ta-te 




ta-si 


ta 


in that 


there. 


in that 


so long. 


then. 


wise. 






direction. 









1) Or ^^^ ji-te; ^^-^ Ja-te, ^a^ ji-tlie, ^^^-^^ ji-the. 
There is also a lengthened form ^c^v^ J^-te, ^-.g-jl^s. ja-the. All 

these forms may equally be used with the Correlative ti (as ti- 
te etc.) and ki. 

2) Instead of the postfix j-a^ sT, the postfixes j^ajU tal, j-o^* 
toT, i^y^ toni, may also be joined to ^^^s* je and ^J^ te, as: j.aSUca^ 
je-taT, ^AjLAA,*i te-tai etc. 



394 



SECTION IV. ADVEKBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 



ko 



ki-a 



ki-e 

in what 

wise? 



ki-te 

ka-te 
where? 



" I I 
kede 



in what 
direction ? 



ke-si 

ka-si 
how long. 



kade-hi 



when? 



Some of these adverbs are again compounded with 
adverbial postfixes (and partly prefixes): as: ^^Li ja-ki 
or ^L£vXiLi ja-ki-ta, so long as; ji^LiJ^ jadeh-a-ko, 
^^jLi jadeh-o-ko, l5^LiJ.i jadeh-a-kura (a-kara), from 
such a time as, since. ^^^15 ta-ki or ^L£^L5 ta-ki-ta, 
as long as; jyi^jLji* tadeh-ako, jSy^iXs tadeh-o-ko, SisaJJ 
tadeh-a-kura, from that time; yS'liSf kadeh-a-ko^) etc., 
from what time? ,-j»*Jol ed-te, (^voljjul ed-tai or^^liju! 
ed-tahi, a little in this direction; ^^JX^ je-kadehe if 
(at any time). 

The adverbs implying 'place' and 'direction' 
may also be put in the Ablative, as: (jLSj it-a, ^^jLSI 
it-aU; ^v^i it-ahu, ^^^LSf it-ahu, from this place, hence; 
^jLS'l ut-a, ^j^jI ut-u, ^^^J'l ut-ahu, from that place. 



1) The forms: ^Ls^JL^^ jadeli-a-ko etc. are properly double 

compounds viz.: ^L^jLa" jadeh-a, the Ablative and J.> ko or ^^..j kii, 

a postposition (identical ^vith ^^^-^ khu) Trom'. In the same way 

J$\.S^(X£^ jadeh-a-kara is compounded from ^li^tX^ jadeh-a (Abl.) 

and y> kara (or kura) postposition, up to, literally: from which 
time up. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 395 

tlience; ^Lib tit-a, ^j^h tit-u, ^^jL% tit-au, from that 
place; ^L^^c^ kith-a, ^^^x5^ kitli-u, ^^5&L^5" kith-ahu etc. 
from what place, whence? ^IjLj! ed-a, ^^jljuf ed-au, 
^•.^Jul ed-ahu, ^j^^lJol ed-ahu etc. from this direction. 

The emphatic i (!) or hi (he) very frequently ac- 
cedes to these adverbs, as: ^1*>a^I, ie-i, in this very wise; 
^a5| ita-i or ^^| ita-hi^), even here; ^jLS] ita-i, 

^^IliJ it-a-hi, even hence; ^il^l eda-i, ^^^Jol eda-hi, 
in this very direction; ^lilJuf ed-a-i, from this very di- 
rection etc. 

The eyes of my body are there, where the side 
(country) of my companions is. Sh. Um. Mar. I, 12. 

Lpj-^ \jzy^ jcUaa; j^^ <^^^ p}-%^^ 

Where is gone to the Jogis' emotion of yesterday? 
Sh. Eamak. I, 30. 

Thence a camelman has come; this information is 
correct. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 6. 

cs^-y-f-' ^AAAAj ^^.J.g.> ^^j ^j-».^ 

As thou wilt, even so it shall be unto thee. Matth. 
15, 28. 



1) The final e these adverbs is changed to *"a' before the em- 

phatic 1, for the sake of euphony; but e keeps its place also, as: /^^^*' 
ute-], in that very place. 



396 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

f>^ tUai- ,j^w^5> ^-yo ^4-^ ^^ u'"-';'"^^ (5^ U^^* 

I ask, o gallant young man! how far did your 

purpose go? 
Then he says: I dwell in the city of Mekka, 

my purpose went up to this place. Maj. 

168, 169. 
' ,. - j>i - " .. ^ ? - ' j>i - " 

As long as they get ready, ascend thou and sit 
down. Amulu Man. p. 144. 

>^f-> '-^•^ 0^-"° UT^;-^ (j^^^^ u"-^ u-^ 



Since I entered into connexion with the Jats, o 

companions ! 
The mountaineer is gone off, having torn (my) 

body; 
I am also from that time (only) half (and) afflicted. 
Sh. Desi, Chat. 6. 



VI. Compound adverbs. 

The SindhI uses a considerable number of compound 
adverbs^), which are formed either by reduplicating the 
adverb (or noun), or adding a similar adverb (or noun), 
or by adding an adverbial affix or postposition. 



1) Such compound adverbs may be written in one word or se- 
parately. When joined by a conjunctive vowel it is usual to join 
them also in writing'. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 397 

1) Eeduplicatecl adverbs, 
(with or without a conjunctive vowel; cf. §. 12, 11, 2). 
(^wygj {Srf^ bhere bhere, constantly. 
Ju JJ pale pale, every moment. 
,-§Aji -6^.^ dehu dehu, day by day. 
^ir^'ir rateorate, night by night. 
wllll sarasare, entirely. 
^^4^ (j^L^ ghari ghari, constantly (hour by hour). 
^^IfJil^ji/J nethanethe, at last. 
-?;53^;5 varehovarihe, year by year. 
Ci wi hara hara, constantly. 
^^iXliyS^odi handhohandhe , place upon place, 
etc. etc. etc. 

2) Adverbs compounded with a similar adverb 

or noun. 



O ^ -- > > 



,j«^lww -I aju subaha, in a day or two. 

^^j»jii jj.-^55j^ jadehi tadehi, constantly. 
^jj3 i^^ jie tie, in any way. 

.-^-uSj-jir ratodiha, night and day. 

^IJo ^oA5^txf' kadehe kadane, now and then. 

^.^ ^h^ hethe mathe, down and up (up and 

down), 
etc. etc. etc. 



398 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

3) Adverbs compounded with an adverbial 

postfix or postposition. 
j^^?f aga-bharo, a little in front; a little ago. 
^^^\ age-te, in front; in future. 

^j^^aLiSjj poe-talio, a little in the rear. 
^;^j.j poe-te, behind. 



l^LSfJ rat-a-kara, since night (lit. from night up). 

^y^\j^'^ kalha-ku, since yesterday. 

Compare also the compound adverbs of §. 58. 

They remember no pains in the body, constantly 
they are happy. Maj. 801. 



One, having joined all bones, place upon place, 
having read an incantation, besprinkled them. Sindhi 
Read. Book, p. 53. 



Chapter XIX. 

POSTPOSITIONS. 

§. 58. 

The Sindhi has no prepositions, but only post- 
positions, as all adverbs or particles, which influence 
in any way the noun, are placed after the noun and 

not before it. Only ^s re, ^^^ ria may be optionally 

used as preposition or postposition.^) 

1) In poetry the postpositions are freq[uently turned into pre- 
positions, if required by the metre. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 399 

There is only a small number of original post- 
positions in Sindhi, wMcli require the noun in the For- 
mative; far the greatest part of the postpositions now 
in use are originally adverbs (i. e. substantives and 
adjectives used adverbially; cf §. 57, 11. ITT. lY.), which 
either retain their original adverbial signification and 
are consequently constructed with ^^ je, or which are 

already treated as postpositions and require the For- 
mative of the noun governed by them; the greater part 
of them may therefore be constructed with or without 
^£^ je, and be put before or after the noun, they 
govern. 

I. Postpositions proper, requiring the Formative 
of the noun governed by them. 



Lj bhara, 



on, with such a part downward; against; 
supported from. Sansk. H^, adj.^) 



7^- 

y^ bhare, 

J pare, on, upon; Sansk. '^'Rft. 
^^^LS tai. 



ij^p toi, 



> up to, till; Sansk. ^T'^; Hindust. ^^^ tai. 



(5)^ toriO, 

' . ,- _ ^ up to; till. 
^p toni, f ^ 



1) y^ bhar has already in Hindustani a signification bordering 
on that of a postposition. In Sindhi the substantive >-^j bharu, prop, 
support, is also in use, of which j-^ bhare is the Locative. 

2) Apparently derived from vj-j torn, the end; ^s'i}^ ^^H? = 
^^vij> tore-i, emphatic Locative. 



400 



SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 



^j* te^), on, upon; Sansk. ^r|^. 



from -upon; from; upon (for the sake of). 



^LS ta, 1^ 


U>^' 


ts, 1 


o^ 


ja, 


^ 


jia, 


(S-^-v^ 


Jia, 




Jie, 


J^ 


m, 


'",1: 


daha, 


^i 


de, 


i^L»S 


daha, 




daM, 




daku, 


*#^ 


re, 


'^^ 


ria, 



like, as; Sansk. "mm. 



>; 



;l: 



towards; in the direction of. 



from the direction of; towards^); 
Abl. form. 



without; Sansk. '^iT. 

sarti, according to; conformable to; Sanskrit 
BKH??;, Prak. ^TT;^ or ^TTWt. 



1) Instead of te, ta etc. the Panjabi froms ute and uta are 
also occasionally used in Sindhi. 

2) The forms ^)J^<3 daha, ^^j^O dahu are also in use; emphatic: 
(^^.^13 dahi. 



3) The Ablative forms daha etc. are generally used in the sense 
of the Locative. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 



401 



^u 


sa, 


^^ 


sanu, 


^ 


se, 




senii , 



with; Sausk. t1*1- 



^\.ioyL siidha, alono' with; Sansk. ^TW*J 



il^^ 



^ sia, up to; till; Sansk. ^?WT; Panjabi: si. 
IT kara, up to. 
>y kane^) ] ^^' ^^^^ ^^' Sansk. ^il|, edge (of a 
^^aT kane , 



vessel); Sindhi uT, rim, border; 
Panjabi: kanni. 



^OTkana^), L.^^. ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
^^kano, j 
^^^ khe , to ; as regards ; in reference to ; Sansk. ^Jf, 



> from; Abl. form. 



^l4rkha, 
^^kho, 
^^khaiv 

^gare, to; with (Lar). 

^ 8'^^' j like, as. 

^^!^ laku, from -up; Panjabi: lago (Sansk. ^T^). 
..^-rpwc manjhe, in; to (with verbs implying motion); 
Sansk. Tf^, 



1) Instead of ^^JS kaue, ^^JS^ gane is used in Lar: similarly 



i[jS^ 2'ana 



istead of ,.^lj.J kana and ,.i«.Ar kano. 



j^-^^ 5"!^", ^^'^■' g^^^IlOj mSLcau ui ^^^^ ivctuci ttiiu ^^, 

2) Frequently written without the final nasal, i. e. l-o kana. 

Trumpp, Sindhi-Grammar. Cc 



402 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS-, 

jjL-^^doo manjha, from- — in^, out of; Abl. form. 

^^;o me, in; to (witli verbs implying motion); Sansk 
TfUf-^ Hindust, ^j^. 

^ ' I from — in; out of; Abl. form. 

^yo mo, J 

e>5 vate, near to; with; in exchange of; Sansk> 

root '^^; Sindhi subst. v£^^. 

,jU; vata, from — near; from; away from; Abl. form. 

{S'y^ LIa.^x) ^^ ^^j ^J^x jX3^3 {S%^ v^^^L^ ^SS^IJj 

Shah Sahib, having gone to one mountain, was fallen 
asleep on one side (lying on one side) for six months. 
Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 39. 

Having offered many thanks to God (and) having 
descended from his couch he went to his court and sat 
down. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 30. 

uF ^jLS ^c> ^laX ^^5 ^sy^ G! 
..I '"J 

father, I sacrifice (myself) upon the name of God, 
i. e. for God's sake. Amulu Man., p. 41. 

The lightenings glittered in the north like a sun- 
flower, Sh. Sar. II, 1. 

^>^ ^^ (5f; ^f ^7^ jri^ h/ 

Having directed her face towards the Malir she 
weeps; having stood up she says. Sh. Um. Mar. IH, 8. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 403 

f^ ^; v^^i <^; ^^ vj^. uk 

By themselves the fruits ripen without guarding, 
without a fence. Sh. Um. Mar. Ill, 14. 

^aav ^^ .sni^ ^^)^ -f^^ ^-^"4 j'-'^ r^v ;; 

Eeturn with Punhu a moment! away with twelve 
months with others! Sh. Ma^B. YI, 6. 

In the upper rooms reproach has been my lot all 
(my) hfe long. Sh. Um. Mar. Y, 1. 

Then what do they see? that a vessel of wine, 
filled up to the rims is placed there. Sindhi Eead. 
Book, p. 68. 

I will collect and guard property and not give any 
thing to any one. Grolden Alphab; X, 7. 

I am come having taken a matter hidden to thee. 
Bh. Sor. II, 18; 

Ks( u^ O-^f^ is=^ ^^ (5-^; 'f^ y^ isf u^-^ 

Having gone td the house of somebody (and) having 
stolen from his food it (i. e. the mouse) ate it. Sindhi 
Read; Bookj p. 62; 

Cc2 



404 



SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 



>^ \J^ iS-fi''^ <S^ (5f^ u^^ ^'-^ 

Having called Majno from the side of his mother 
he said. Maj. 49. 

The following postpositions (mostly of foreign origin) 
may be optionally constructed with -^ je. 



without (Panjabi). 



^L^L5 bajha, 
^^L; bajhu, 
^^s.L; bajho, 

Sj bigire, without; except (Panjabi). 

Qj bina, without; except (Hindust.) 
&\^^ sivae, without; except (Arab. Pers.) 



S kare, 
(^^rkare, 

^y lae, 
^ lae, 



by means of; by ; on account of; Sansk. 

^. 

for the sake of; on account of; Panjabi 
lai; Hindust. ^^ liye. 



cs^ u^i^ u3^^^ (ih-^<^ -§-^ ^^^^ 'i))^ ,jLS* 

Then they (i. e. the flowers) were considered by the 
hero as thorns without the sight of the friend. Ajaib, 
V, 20. 

" \ " -: "{ " ' . " ^ ^ " 

Without the S5dho, o companions! there is no 
getting on with life; i. e. I cannot live. Sh. Mum. 
Rano I, 8. 

^ .. I • *- 

Except the adoration of the Lord thou hast no bu- 
siness, o lost one. Mengho 12. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 405 

o^. f J^'f. 4^. ^/ r^^l u^ri^7^ 

I '' .... 

Having turned the back to other houses ask on 

account of thy friend thy own self; 
He is even with thee, for whose sake thou causest 

(thyself) troubles. Sh. Abiri IH, 5. 

Why searchest thou not, says Latif, for (the sake 
of) thy sweetheart, o lost one! Sh. Koh. I, 10. 

n. Adverbial postpositions (derived from sub- 
stantives or adjectives), which are optionally 
constructed with or without ^^ je, or which re- 
quire another postposition. 

pSi ubatare (mostly with ^=^^ contrary to. 
jol ado^), in front. 



U>^^ agio. 



before; in front. 



.dll andare, within. 

^Cjol andara, from within. 

jOjl ddo, ] 

.. .-. , -J- - Tk- \ near to. 

jvjj! odiro, Dim. 



1) y6\ ado, jtSjl odo 3"^^^ vejlio may also be constructed with 

^^r khe. 

2) ^\ e&%J and ^^KLfDJ are more frequently constructed with 
the postposition \^J^-^ or the Ablative, than with (^■^« 



406 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS. 



i^.jl ore, on this side. 
^L.jl oria, from this side. 



^LJ bahare, outside. 
^IliLj bahara, from without. 



.tXj badire, 



> in lieu of; instead of. 



^jLdj badira, 

sLj pare, on the opposite side; across. 

^ ) ' ^ M from the opposite side ; on the part of. 

^isLS paro, J 



^^ll pase, on the side of; near to. 






sjLjLic^^ patandare, according to (mostly without ^s.). 
^ *•* ' Sri 

^jll^xl puthia, on the back of; after. 

^^iblS paraputhe, behind one's back. 
^5^1 pare, beyond; far from. 

y ^^. P . ? i after; subsequent to. 
^ULijJ puiiana, J 

£=^j poe, after (always constructed with ^L^ or 
the Ablative). 

^Cj pua, on the back of; behind. 
^ioLi X^tire, on account of (Arab.). 

LSt>li caudhari, round about. 



^jy^o^ 



o^f^^ caugirde, around (Pers.) 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 



407 



^^Xi^y dhare, 



without; apart; round about (also 
constr. with ^jL^^ or the Abl.). 



"Xio dhara (always with ^z^) on, upon (on tho 

prop of). 
'^yj^[ rubaru, in the presence of (Pers.), 

^j.^Ll samho^). 



}^-^ 



LIL samhuno, 



on account of 



in front; before; over against. 
^^4^11 samhune^ 

,-^jLl sange, 
V? I 

jjLfcUL sanga, 

y^ sire, on, upon; on the top of. 

^^^ Ivaze, in lieu of (Arab.). 

jj«Tl^ karane, on account of; for reason of. 

^1^ kane, 



^^ kane, 
(^J lage, 



for the sake of. 



on account of; as concerns (mostly 
^ lage, J witli°"t isf)- 

^^^jCc mathe, upon. 

^l^£o matha, from upon. 

^^U\Jk^M manjhara, , . _ 

"^ \ } from — withm; out oi. 

^J^Xi^^<^ manjharo. 



1) Oi* ^jj-^La« samulio, ^y^ljM samuliu. 



408 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

JljU/o muqabile; over against; opposite to (Arab.). 
v^^^^x) mtijibe; according to; conformably to (Arab.). 

jj^ mahande, 

in front; before. 



^ o -- ^ 



. like to; as (mostly without ^a>). 



jjlja^ mahanda, 
^^L^y vaste, on account of (Arab.). 

Ixif^ vangurUj 
^Cl^ vange, 

^L^l^ vangia, 

_.^ vice, in the midst of. 
^^^ vighe^), by reason of; by. 

yXj^ vetare, besides (mostly with ^^), 

.. ' _vi . - T^. > near to. 
yj^.^ vejhiro, Dim. 



.^juia hethe, below. 
^jI^Iks^ hetha, from below. 

y^ U^y^ ^Sj'%-? J7f^ ^}^t^ ts^ ^j^^L^ .Hm^ 

Having paid thy respects before Shah Sahib beg 
(of him). Life of Abd-ul Latif, p. 34. 

Those who have died before dying become not extinct 
when having died. Sh. Ma'B. lY, 7. 



1) (c-§^^ vighe, apparently shortened from ^-^^ vighine, Nom. 
^-y-^^ obstacle, Sansk. T^^f, is used only when speaking of some 
disability or distress. 



CO^^JUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 409 



The point of this proverb is this, that it is necessary, 
to make (one's) expenses according to the income. Sindhi 
Eead. Book, p. 58. 

y^ jLo^ ^^^Lo f*;tX-^ j-^**^. cH-^^ i3-^^ ^yy^ 
After few (or) many days Ma/dum Sahib died. Abd- 
ul-Latifs hfe, p. 37. 

After this time thou art my mother (and) sister. 
Ibid. p. 42. . 

ur^'^ J^^5 (J^5 >-^ -^-^ (5i^'5 

Whith what face shall I go to the presence of my 
country? Sh. Um. Mar. Y, 5. 

tSf ^ (5?^- (5^^ C5^ U*"-^ (Jff ^tU55 ^1 

From the top of that place a piece has been cut 
out. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 45. 

i5^T (ii^A^. ^?Slo ^^ d,^ ^?j ^^ ^^;4^ 

My daughter is grievously vexed by a demon. Matth. 
15, 22. 

..I 1 .. I .. I •• I 

Shah Jamal, being mounted on a horse, having come 
near to the couch alighted from the horse. Abd-ul-Latif 's 
Hfe, p. 7. 



410 



SECTION lY. ADYEEBS, POSTPOSITIONS; 



Chapter XX. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

§. 59. 

The conjunctions serve to express the relation, in 
which either the single words of a sentence or two or 
more sentences stand to one another. According to their 
signification the conjunctions may be divided into: 

1) Copulative. 



and 



u;^ au, 

. u>^i ai^), 

-? hi, 

^ t>hi, 

^ bill, 

'^. pi, 

^^ pune, 

(^^ punu, 
j^' — ^jAj tia-tiaj as well -as. 



also. 



He also, after he was grown up, died. Abd-ul- 
Latifs life, p. 2. 



1) Generally written, for the sake of abbreviation -^. 



CONJUNCTIOKS AND INTERJECTIONS. 411 

Therefore they are often also beaten. Sindhi Eead.. 
Book, p. 50. 

^c> ;^i J>Sl ;^ ^La^jI ^^Xa^I ^I . 

I am very longing as well for the spinning place 
as for the country. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 1. 

2) Concessive. 

J ta, I then (as apodosis in a conditional sentence 
LS ta I generally not translated). 

.J J ta bi, 

^.._ - ^ . [- nevertheless; then also; even then. 
^ ,jM«^Jj tadehi bi. 

(5)3^* tore, 

^j.j tone, 

^jjjcxc. jetore'), 

isf}^ jetone, 

-s> je, although; if. 

" f 

^^ r^ -^ c5#5 >^ i)^ (5f oi^' c^^^. Sft ^^' 

(5^5 i^-^-^* C5^-'^5 
. ** ' ' " ' 

If from her limbs the cloth is stripped, (then) a 

brilliancy like lightening is effected. Amulu Man. 

p. 141. 

-^^ 7^ ^ (jLiy ^^c^ ^L^J ;jLi ^L5 ^!^ ^^ ^L5 

Then he says: (if) I die, I obtain honor; I if return,. 
it is, to say so, a shame. Maj. 408. 



although; notwithstanding. 



1) Very often also written separately: i^'ij^ /^^ 



412^ SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

♦• ^ ** 1 

Though their wounds flow, nevertheless they divulge 
not (their) sighing to the vulgar. Sh. Kal. 11, 23. 

The heart also shall be given to one, though hundreds 
covet (it). Sh. Barvo Sindhi HI, 7. 

Change thou that company, although the profit 
of a thousand would accrue to thee. Sh. Earn. Kal. 
Vin, 25. 





3) Adversative. 




^^^ bigire, " 






}l para. 


> but. 




0.J pana. 






^jjo- tore, 1 

1 ±- - ( either. 
^jj.3 tone, j 


J J 


— ^^':p tore — na ta , either — - or. 




^Li ja, either; or. 


o^ 


— ^JlL ja — ja, either — or. 




yke. 




^ T _ > or. 




^.Ci magare, except; but. 




J .3 na ta. 


otherwise; else. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTEEJECTIONS. 413 



^14^5 hatha, 

^j-LoL^xi hatha-!, emphat., 

^}^i hatho, 

^j^j^xi hatho- 1, emphat., 



but rather; on the con- 
trary (PanjabT). 



> ^ 



(j^ ^^ c^^5 uP^**' ^ -^ Cu^ (5?<^^ (^jr' 

Either they go to the bank or (they go) with them 
in the stream. SL Suh. \ill, 1. 

Do men pluck grapes from thorns or figs from a 
thistle? Matth. 7, 16. 

No man can do the service of two masters; for 
either he will keep enmity with the one and make 
friendship with the other; or he will seize the skirt of 
the one and not at all mind the other. Matth. 6, 24. 

^^i »iL>l5 ^=?^ ^Aj ^ (j'Af jf ^^p^ ^ }S^ j^l j^ 

Art thou he, w^o was coming, or shall we look out 
for another? Matth. 11, 3. 



1) ^f kane is postposition and not the III pers. Plur. of tlie 
Present {\^j^ =^ \:)^-r^ ^^ Stack supposed; see Stack's Gramm. p. 101, 
Note. The verse quoted there does not quite agree with the Risalo. 



414 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

We have ho con'cern with those stones, but oiii" 
concern is with their master. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, 
p. 20.. 

4) Causal and Final. ^) 

3 ta, that; in order that; also an expletive^ 
in quoting the words of a person^ 



that; so that; in order that; 
because; as. 



jfe. jo, that, in order that; because; 
^j!^^^ jela. 



^^^i^ jelha, 



> because; wherefore* 



^j-f^ jelahe, 
^SLaj ^^ ^^a:5^ jela -tela 
.o ^-- ^j^A^ jela-ta, 

chajo^), because; 



i 



correlat. because -therefore; 



1) We have classed the causal and final conjunctions under one 
head, because many of them are used in the one or the other sense. 

2) These compound conjunctions are commonly written separately^ 
but by some they are also joined in one word; 

•^ ^T^ literally: why? because etC;; of different kind are such 

expressions as:- ^ &^ ^jJii for this sake, that = be<;ause; 



CO^^JUNCTIONS AKD INTERJECTIOXS. 



415 



^ ^^ L^ clia kane ta, 
Js &Sl L.^ cte lae ta, 



because. 



i^ £^1 L^ cha lae jo, 
j jL.^s> clio ta, 
^ L.^ clio jo, 

L^ SO, therefore, 
j^ ^— j^ jo -SO, correl. because — therefore. 
^il^ soko, 



^jij.^ soko-ta, 

j^iSl^ sokohu, 

J ^s.5"s..u- sok5hu-ta. 



because. 



vo ma, not, in a prohibitive sense (con- 
structed with the Imperative or Po^ 
tential). 

be it not that: lest (constructed 
with the Potential). 



lest (constructed with the Po- 
tential). 



^lii 


mata , 


j\jJO i^ 


jo mata. 


<^ 


machane , 


o4^ 


maclianu , 


o4? 


machune , 



^2)-^^ machunu, 



This is not becoming, that we, having comitted a 
theft, drink wine after. Sindhi Eead. Book; p. 69. 

U^ -^.'^ L>^' ^ ;3^ i^^ i^^^, -^^ L^Ay^ 

O Mengho, having directed (thy) face and having 
risen seek, in order that thou mayst find (it) in the 
body. Mengho 23. 



416 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

In order that I, having risen, may make some 
search for the unity. Maj. 9. 

Thou boasted and smilest thereat, that people call 
the 'Mia\ Golden Alphab. X, 3. 

This is the custom of the friends, that they do by 
no means pluck the plucked ones. Sh. Barvo Sindhi HI, 9. 

^li 4^ si-^ >^ ^r^ ^ U^^? "^y"^^ C5^ 

Saying: your honour, it is not becoming thus, that 
laughing they shake hands. Maj. 348. 

^:^ti> \^d<^^ Lj^ ^j^a:^ LlsDJ 1^^^ (jl^-^^-y* 

Therefore they were chosen by the Lord, because 
they were mixed up in the Unity. Sh. Kal. I, 8. 

^f ^^j^ ^145" ^L^^ ^455 jCXj ^^^^ ^ &y L^ 

Because a joyful moment is better than a painful 
life. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 62. 

The advantage is on our side, because (our) name 
will become great and renown will come out of it. Ibid, 
p. 64. 

Then, because they will sleep out of time, there- 
fore the sun will rise to them in that very place. Amulu 
Man. p. 143. 



INTERJECTIONS AND CONJUNCTiaNS. 417 

Do not sit upon a bedstead, having placed a string 
of cowries upon (thy) neck. Sh. Um. Mar. 11, 2. 

I seek, I seek, may I not find, please God, that 
I may not meet with (my) sweetheart. 

Lest the grief, that is within (my) heart, may be 
calmed down! Sh. Hus. YII, 3. 

Be it not that thou repent of it after, like the deer 
and the donkey. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 68. 

5) Conditional. 

Jifjs> Jekara, 
^A^ajij^ jekadehi, if (at any time). 

iS^ |iJLw ^i^^ Jj ^ .iiXlf ^ijic> ^^Jp ^2^ 

If thou puttest a cap on thy neck, then become a 
sound Sufi. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 8. 

If there be such lovers, show kindness to them. 
Maj. 776. 

jdA^V^ j^ ^U^ ;5;L'^ }-%^ ^r • 

If we sing, then upon the melody of the song its 
master will awake (and) settle (with us) the account of 
the whole life. Sindhi Bead. Book, p. 68. 

Trumpp, Sindhl-Grammar. D d 



if 



418 



SECTION lY. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 



6) Interrogative. 

- ' I interrogative expletive, generally not 
^ ki, I translated. 

O princess, do we dissuade you? Amul. Man. p. 145. 



Chapter XXI. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

§. 60. 

In treating of the Interjections we abstract form 
such nouns or phrases, as are or may be used in the 

sense of Interjections, e. g. ^'Lo mathe, silence! (s. £), 

^^ cano, good! ^^ sacu, true! A^S iJJI allahu ailamu, 

God knows! (lit. God is wiser, scil. than I), and only 
adduce such particles, as have now become strictly inter- 
jectional. 

Besides the Vocative signs, mentioned already in 
§. 16, 8, the following are the most common; they 
imply: 

1) Assent. 

^^A ahe, 
^M ae, 



^jj^jf ai, 
^li ha, 
ioLi hao, 
^i ha-u, 
3.^5 hao. 



yes. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 419 

Jio bale, 

•*'* > yes! true; even so! 

^j bala, j 

^^ bhala, 
J^^ bhali, 

^.f^ ji^O? y^^' (^ respectful term of ascent.) 
7" 



well; good! 



maru. 



.^ varu 



3^ea! indeed! well! 

The Devs will say to thee: wilt thou recognise her? 
Then say: yes. Amulu Man., p. 150. 

Well, show me those things. Ibid. p. 147. 

y=rr (5^ ^^y^ ^yi ^^^ (j-^?*-^^ \s^^ 

Abate too high acrimony; if they say to thee: bodu 
(pooh), say thou: jiu (very well). Sh. Jam. Kal. YIII, 22. 

They, who have love to Grod, they, indeed, boast. 
Maj. 778. 

My heart does not remain a moment without thee, 
truly! o Sir! o Lord! o Baroc! Sh. Abiri Ohot. 
Epil. 2. 



1) ^>f^ jiu is apparently the Imperative of (J^-*^ jianu, live! 

D d2 



420 



SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 



2) Commendation. 
J.JI j.JI alo alo, bravo! bravo! 

(j;^l4:?^ cbabase, 
(j^jL^ sabase, 

^^&- nsqn, 
,5&l^ vahu, well done! 



bravo! (Pers.) 
praise to! (Arab.] 



.s^ 



All said: friend, the prince has that very same drawn 
ont from so many! praise be to him! and having got 
a bravo! bravo! he went away. Amulu Man. p. 151. 

Praise to Kae Diacu, who has given (and) exhibited 
(his) head! Story of Eae Diacu, p. 17. 

3) Astonishment. 
y] lo, look there! behold! 
xLo mare. 



cs^^ft) 



U marebhini 



wonderful ! oh ! 



^^l.^^LoAi maremanjjha. 



Companions, I shall not say then: behold the pain 
and the reproach of (my) friends! Sh. Suh. Y, Epil. 1. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 421 

4) Desire. 
J14^ chala^), ^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^, ^^^_^^^ ^^^^, ^^^^^^^^^ 
JLi salaj J 



^ ' > woiilcl that 



^ mana 
^l^i* *JU| allaliu tuliara^) 
)^ „ „ tub 



lare 



\^y^ 5, „ toliara 



God keep lliee! good bje! 



JLw ^^^w9>w> ^-f^ ij*-^ j) tAJe^3 \L^«.j JL^' 



Would to God, that the Pauhars Avere reconciled, 
o darling Mam! TTould to God, that the Pauhars were 
reconciled T^dth me! Sh. Um. Mar. I, Epil. 

Would that (mj) sweetheart having come to the 
shore, would make (= say) alas! alas! Sh. Suh. Y, 20. 

Jlijj- ^l i^\ li fjajj ^L:^ 

When (we) shall come, depart! God protect thee! 
Maj. -437. 

5) Uncertainty. 



^=. aJI allahuje^), 

" ' - , _ God knows! perhaps! 

,^ ^'l ala je, 



C5T 

LiL^ ninana, God knows! 



1) Corrupted from the Arabic phrase: 

eUJf ^Lw ^1^ if it please God, 

2) Properly: ^l^^l LS X-UI God be thy protection. 

3) This is an eliptic phrase : if God (will or please). 



not so exactly (a polite ne- 
gation; Arab.) 



422 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 

6) Dissent. 
^ Xaira, 
^ (5?^-^ Xaii'^i-Xairu; 

J na, no. 

Have we before committed any theft on tbee? SLe 
says: no, girls; ye have not committed any theft. Amulu 
Man. p. 145. 

7) Disapprobation and reproach. 
.^jt ohe, oho! 

JJ.J bodu, pooh! fy! (a contemptuous reply.) 
^ic^j phithe, hoot! 

^ thu, fy! 

^^ chi, I 

'* v-._ tush! 
<54^ chi, J 

^ll^iUo mahiya, fy! hoot! 

^sa hvLj tush! pish! 
..^5> hethe, down with! away with! 

8) Grief and complaint. 
^i.j^\ afsosUj alas! 
.if aha, alas! 
LiT aha^), alas! what a pity! 



1) L^ij aha is at the same time also an interjection denoting 
pleasure, ahal 



POSTPOSITIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 



423 



Jo barebare, alas! ah! woe! 

(^.A^ Haifu, woe to! (Arab.) 
Ivj.^5^ ^i}-^ gh5ra ghora, alas! alas! o misery! 
\jy\^ vavela, alas! lackaday! (Arab. Pers.] 
&\j vae, 1 

also ! woe ! 






vo 



ve, 



Li ha, 
&Li hae. 



^ASti lia-e\), 



cs-: 



SSi 



iS",^ 



liae 



hue. 



alas ! 



^1 



s^ hoe. 
hue 



ah ! alas ! 



:i>L^Ii haihate, alas! 



^^ 



^l5Co ^^1 ^^^ ^jl^ ^f JU ^:?. ^4ax» ^.-dA^ 
^1 .. " ..1 ..I 

Woe to my state, that I am wicked (and) useless! 
Maj. 756. 

j.L^'j j.i^ jo. ^4^^ J.XC ^5" ^4^1 ^j^f Ij^ 1^-3.4^ 

To make, alas! alas! in such a business, for which 
a remedy is impossible, is not the custom of wisdom. 
Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 56. 



1) Contracted also ^S^ lie. 



424 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS etc. 

Woe ! sisters ! I shall not live then without the Jat ! 
(Plur.) Sh. Desi YH, Epil. 2. 

Having made alas! alas! she lifted up, burning, her 
hands. Maj. 758. 

Lackaday! lackaday! why were ye terrified? empty 
has become the men's apartment! 



THE S^^riVT^^X, 



We divide the Syntax into two parts, the ana- 
lytical and synthetical. In the analytical part 
the chief constituent parts of speech, which have been 
described in the elementary grammar, are to be con- 
sidered according, to their exact signification, their in- 
trinsic value and their special application. In the syn- 
thetical part it will be shown, how the different parts 
of speech are linked together in order to form a sen- 
tence and how two or more sentences are joined to- 
gether. 



L THE ANALYTICAL PAET. 
SECTION L 

THE NOUN. 

Cliapter I. 
On the absence of the article in Sindhi. 

§• 61. 

The Sindhi possesses no article definite, as little 
as the Sanskrit and the modern Arian tongues of India. 
The noun may therefore be definite or indefinite, as: 

JK the woman or: a woman. 

There are no fixed rules, by which a noun may 
be known as definite or indefinite, the only safe guide 



426 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

is attention to the context. On the whole it may be 
remarked : 

1) A certain number of nouns have by themselves 
a definite meaning, as: ^^^ hio, the mind, X^ siju, 
the sun, jJow^jI ubhirando, the east, Sy^ surgu, the 
heaven, ^| ubhu, the sky etc. Similarly all proper 
nouns. 

2) If a noun stands in apposition to a proper name, 
it is thereby rendered definite, as: v:Io!^. jj*^^ ^^ 
country of China, ^cJ ij"^^ ^^ fairy Husine. 

If for any reason a noun is to be pointed out as 
indefinite, the numeral adjective yl^s^ one, or the in- 
definite pronoun j.5^, some one, any one, is used. There 
is some slight difference in the use of 3 vXi and ^5^ the 

first particularizing the noun by implying that only one 
person or thing is unterstood, the latter generalizing the 
same, by implying, that some one out of many, or 
something, which is not further described, is intended. 
jLJGs may also be used in the Plural, especially before 

another numeral, to render the number somewhat doubtful, 

as: ,.««.;s>--Uo ^ |-iX]» some two men, or about two men, 

the number not being fixed as certain. — If some portion 
or quantity of a thing is to be indicated ^ (or ^/S^ 

ki) is ^ui before the noun, irrespectively of the gender 

of the noun (as in Hindustani ^^^f). 

}^ <j}i^ (S^ O;^ <sf^ c^^ is^^^r" ^"^ 

The donkey, having become jolly, began to say to 
the stag. (Both the donkey and the stag having been 
mentioned before.) Sindhi Head. Book, p. G8. 



I 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 427 

He asked from them a vessel of (magic) power; at 
length they gave him the vessel and its (magic) power. 
Sindhi Read. Book, p. 67. 

Some boys read (their) lesson, applying the (their) 
mind. Ibid. '^. 50. 

High art thou upon the sky; I am a wanderer upon 
earth. Sh. Sor. I, 3. 

u;;*^/ e^y*^- s!^^ ^v ^-f ;>-^-^ 7^^ Uy*^ J^^ 

In the city of Bhambhoru evil chats are constantly 
made about me. Sh. Ma^B. lY, Epil. 



^iS ^si ^iLr 1^3 1/ ^ 



With some physician there was a servant; one day 
the physician gave him some medicine to pound. Sindhi 
Eead. Book, p. 51. 

Li vjL^ o*..w ^r?-^ c^^ ijLwwf 

Amongst us there were some seven brothers. Matth. 
22, 15. 

y^ 7^)5 (^f >^?^ 7^^^ ^ ^^ 

Are ye (some) amirs, are ye (some) vezirs? Amulu 
Man. p. 160. 



428 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

Whatever milk and scum of butter there will be, 
that I will give to foreigners. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 60. 

Some villager had put some quantity of grain in 
(his) garner. Ibid. p. 54. 



Chapter II. 

On the gender of nouns. 

§. 62. 

The Sindhi possesses only two genders, the mas- 
culine and feminine, the neuter having been lost in 
the course of time. As to the special use of the genders 
it is to be remarked: 

1) The masculine gender is the next and refers 
either to male beings, or to things and abstract ideas. 

a) The masculine gender denotes living beings in 

general (the females being included therein) as: ^jysn'ilxi 
a man (generally); j^ baco, a child; ;^jL:i janvaru, an 
animal; fjj-^^ ghoro, a horse (generally). But in some 
nouns, implying inferior animals, the feminine in- 
cludes both genders, as: ^I bala, a snake (generally); 
^^£c makhe, a fly; ^^s* ju; a louse etc. But if the 
gender of a noun is to be expressly mentioned, yj naru, 

a male, and ^oU madi, a female, must be put be- 
fore it. 

The people of the city of Mekka assembling form 
crowds. Maj. 38. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 429 






God said: tlie earth bring forth living beings after 
their own kind, cattle and creeping animals. Sindhi 
Eead. Book, p. 14. 

They do not allow a male bird to sit down. Amulu 
Man. p. 141. 

It is an anomaly, that the nouns \Lj bazu, j^lj baso, 
j^Xlcc sikiro, o>J^ caragu, sJl^^ sican5, j*..wJ.aj baisird, 

•j5lJ lagaru, denoting different kinds of female hawks, 
are masculine, whereas the nouns ^Iw^ basina and 
cC^^ cipaka, denoting male hawks, are feminine. 

h) If a neuter idea is to be expressed, the masculine 
must be employed, the masculine generally supplying 

the place of the neuter, as: ;c| ^£v^ it is good; tj.^ ^y^ 

it was said by one. But this is only the case in the 
Singular, the masc. Plural of an adjective (or participle) 
never being used in a neuter sense. It must not be 
lost sight of, that the masc. form of an adjective cannot 
be employed in Sindhi in the sense of an abstract sub- 
stantive ^) (as in Latin , Greek or German) , but that the 
corresponding substantive mu^st be used (cf §. 9, I. 1, 2) 
or the adjective must be accompanied by a substantive 
denoting 'thing' or 'matter'^); only the masc. Singular 



1) In sentences like the following: 5 J^\,55> ijjy^ iXl^ to do good 
allowed, ^^\ tKX:^ is an attribute, belonging to ^^^-^ , literally: 



IS 

I 
well doincy is allowed. 



2) It is a different case, when adjectives are used without a sub- 



430 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

of the past participle passive may be used in the sense 
of a neuter substantive* 

Ye will become like God, knowing good and evil. 
Sindhi Read. Book, p. 19. 

Will he not give to them good things? Matth. 7, 12. 

Surely, what is written (in fate), will be fulfilled; 
from that, which is written, no one will escape. Maj. 258. 

U^7>.f ^^ ^y^ <j^ ^^5 .J j.^ j^ ^j-i^ 

She does not, what I said, go thou and subdue 
her. Maj. 285. 

c) In such nouns, in which a distinction between a 
larger or smaller size is admissible, the masc. ter- 
mination is used to express the idea of relative lar- 
geness, as: jvj^Lvo makoro, a large ant, j-^JCo makho, 
a big fly; ^^a^j bhungo, a house (large hut); y-^yf ko- 
tho , a large room ; ^^ kathu , a beam (a big stick) etc. 

2) The feminine gender refers either to female 
beings, or to things and abstract ideas. 

a) The feminine being considered the weaker sex, 
the idea of relative smallness, littleness or weakness 
is expressed by the fem. termination in all such nouns, 

which admit of such a variation of meaning, as: ^fVjiLo 

makori, a small ant, .^/i makhe, a small fly; ^Sj^ 

bhungi, a small hut etc. 



stantive, as: j-a-^.^ J.^ right (and) left, scil. ^-^v. ? which is to be 
supplied. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 431 

h) A number of adjectives are only found in the 
fern, form j^ixll sandhe, barren (said of Avomen); 1^ 
pacliara, barren (said of cattle; ^L^jS garbliini or ^^J^ 
garbMne, pregnant (said of women); iX^ sua, milch 
(said of animals); ^•'X.y^f gabhorari, having a child 
(said of a mother) i i^^.yj '^^areti, having a husband 

(said of a married woman), ^^Sr vadavara, iit to be 
married etc. etc. 

c) Adjectives or pronouns in the feminine are fre- 
quently used eliptically, the noun j^\S galhe, word, 
matter, being unterstood. The noun >^J)LS tari^a, date, 
day, is also occasionally omitted. 

^LLT ^P ^-^ ^ ^ ^^. ^U ^ JJ 

Then the mother asks Majno: what has happened 
to thee? Maj. 44. 

fair husband of Sorathe! do some (word) of mine! 
Sh. Sor. I, 11. 

On the fourteenth (day) the moon rose; on the 
twenty-ninth the vulgar sees it. Sh. Kambh. II, 10. 



Chapter III. 

Number. 

S. 63. 



The Sindhi has only two numbers the Singular 
and the Plural, the Dual having been dropped already 



432 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

in Prakrit (cf. §. 15). As to their special use it may 
be remarked: 

1) Arabic nouns in the so-called broken Plural 
are (according to their original signification) treated as 
collective nouns, and consequently constructed with 
the Singular of a verb (or adjective). The Arabic fern. 

Plural in ^^^^1 is likewise treated as a Singular. But now 
and then the Arabic Plur. is constructed with the Plural 
of a verb etc., or it is put in the Sindhi Plural form 
and treated accordingly. 

Ask, if some children are destined for me from the 
threshold of God. Amulu Man., p. 139. 

Blessed are those, who are peace - makers ; for they 
shall be called children of God. Matth. 5, 9. 

^^ ^(X& ^U:2> ^5>! o*.^ (Jj^ ^aj^Ij3 ^il^ .J 
" " '- •• i " -' •• I 

Then the Lord gives thee a meadow, where the 
gardens of Eden are. Sh. Sor. I, 9. 

Do ye not see, that the Lord of the world with 
all companions , and all prophets are come. Life of Abd- 
ul-Latif, p. 37. 

2) With numerals the Singular form of a noun 
may be used, though the Plural is more common (cf. §. 23). 

3) The Plural is frequently used in a honorific 
sense, when speaking with respect of any person. A noun 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 433 

in the Singular may therefore be constructed with the 
Plural of a verb (adjective etc.), or the noun itself may 
be put in the Plural, though implying only a Singular. 

This is frequently the case with the nouns j^jt>, ^jje, 

For the same reason the II pers. Plural of a verb 
is used, w^hen addressing politely a person, but not so 
frequently as in Hindustani, the common people being as 
yet in the habit of addressing each other by the II pers. 
Singular. 

Abd-ul-Latif used to play in his youth with boys 
of his age the play lika lik5ti (hide and seek). Life of 
Abd-ul-Latif, p. 9. 

"Woe, o sisters, I shall then not live without the 
Jat (i. e. Punhu). Sh. Desi YI, Epil. 2. 



^ , /. - -^, ^ c ^ 



By the discourse of (= about) my beloved, by the 
recollection of my friend my crippled life has been re- 
vived. Sh. Jam. Kal. Ill, Epil. 

isf^ isi^ c»^ u^-^j*-^ ^^ c^^^^?^ ^f" S?t^ "^^ ^^"^ 

Having come to the Shah he said : Sir , give me also 
to drink. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 32. 

4) The following nouns modify their signification in 
the Plural: 

Trumpp, Sindhi-Grrammar. ^ 6 



434 



SINGULAR, 
lyol Amiru, s. m., Lord; 
Amir. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

PLURAL. 

Iv^l, tlie ^^L5 or coffin of 

the Imams Hasan and Hu- 
sain, carried about in tlie 
Muharram. 



>^^. peko, Adj., belonging 
or relatino; to one's father. 



'pLi cavaru, 
kho, 



CO 



s. m. a gram 
of cleansed 
rice. 



s. £, yel- 
lowness. 



IXo peka, the relations of 
i' 
one's wife (her father's 

family). 
JIlLi cavara, I cleansed rice 
14^:^ cokha, J (i^ general). 
LilS dana, grain (in general). 
^^j>r zardiyu, the dark 

spots in the teeth of an 
old horse. 

(j^.LL sariyu, rice in hnsk 
(in general). 

Cs^lL sahm^a, the relations 
(or family) of one's father- 
in-law. 

^y^tr^ seyn, vermicelli (in 

general). 

Liljli nanana, the relations 
of one's mother (the 
mother's father's family). 

5) The following nouns are only used in the Plural: 



j.!>l3 dano, s. m., a grain 
^^^<^ zardi, 

^c>^ jardi, 

<5sLl sari, s. £, a grain of 
rice (in husk). 

jwiLL sahuro. Adj., belonging 
or relating to one's father- 
in-law. 

^x*A/ sei, s. f. , a piece of 

vermicelli. 

pUlj nanano, Adj., belonging 
or relating to a mother's 
father. 



f '. - T- _r 



,j«-jw5L baburiyu, s. f. , tufts of tangled hair (as worn 
by faqirs). 

^-.^^ pithu, s. f., pieces. 

JJ..AJ J>* treyu, s.f., certain funeral rites, performed during 
' three days after the decease of a person. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 435 



the short hair of an 
infant. 



\i5lL junda, s. m., 
IjcXli Junclira, s. m., Dim., 

IjLl^ jhinda, s. m., 

1,^ javira, s. m., a neck ornament of gold beads. 

\y!^ citra, s. m., the hot days. 

^JkjH^ dhanijn, s. £, grain boiled and afterwards 
parched. 
LS*;j\ ratiriya, s. m., A kind of superior rice. 

^yj^ katiyUj the Pleiades. 

1^ knhara , s. m. , boiled dry grain. 
LiLf ganja, s. m., a kind of rice. 
lljix motiya, s. m., a kind of rice. 

^jL^ muhadra, I s. m., barley separated from the 
^jL^ muhadha, J li^sk. 

LUjU vapamba, s. m., the capsules of the Corey a 
arborea (a medicinal plant). 

^4)i-€^ hathoriyu, s. £, handcuffs. 



Chapter IV. 

The cases of the noun. 

§• 64. 
I. The Nominative. 

As to the special use of the Nominative it may 
be noted: 

1) Nouns or proper names standing in apposition 
to another noun are generally coordinated to the same, 

Ee2 



436 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

as: \oj^ ^^s^Cf the harbour Karaci; JoC ^j.J3 liCJ the 

play lika likoti; ,5cL.cioLj y^^-i^ci the Mng Shamsu etc.; but 

the noun in apposition may also be subordinated by means 
of the Grenitive; cf. §. 67, 4. 

^ £^^^ ^^; ^-^) ^^ ? ^f 
Well! smiles the queen -mother of the king Diacu; 
i. e. saying: well! she smiles etc. Sh. Sor. Ill, 6. 

Laila is the name of a woman, who (is) the daughter 
of the Qazi Qamar. Maj. 33. 

^^' ^jOlyoLw ^X:^^ ,5>L/o *w^ i^*^ 

The month (= moon) (of) Muharram was seen; an- 
xiety befell the princes. Sh. Ked. I, 1. 

2) Substantives implying a number or quantity 
may be likewise coordinated to another noun, instead 

of governing it in the Genitive (cf. §. 23), as: ^o ofj 
lots of liberal persons. 

There are throughout lakhs (of) tale-bearers and 
scouts upon lovers. Maj. 254. 

Having cut with (their) swords they made heaps 
(of) carcasses. Sh. Ked. Ill, 4. 

'^^ is-^^) ^i ^5 s!'? ^^y^ ij''^ 

Having taken buckets (of) heart -pleasing gifts be 
content! Sh. Sor. IH, 4. 

3) The duration of time is expressed by the No- 
minative (or by the uninflected case generally). 



1. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 437 

The (whole) eight watches (i. e. day and night) the 
hook of the Grreat {= God) is in my skull. Sh. Sor. 
I, 20. 

Those, who watch during the nights, I shall make 
(my) friends. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, Epil. 2. 

C5^^ ur° ^^■'^ U>^* ^>^'(; c5?>7^^ -^; 

Stay for my sake this night, o darling! Sh. Sam, 
I, 20. 

4) The Nominative is frequently used absolutely 
to avoid two or more nouns following each other in 
the inflected case , which is contrary to the Sindhi idiom ; 
the case, in which the nouns should properly stand, must 
then be taken up by a pronoun or pronominal adjective. 
If the stress be laid upon some part of a sentence, it 
may be put quite absolutely, its relation or subordination 
being taken up by a pronoun. This is especially the 
case, when a noun is nearer defined by a relative pronoun 
in the JSTominative, the noun being then attracted by 
the following relative. 

Fruits, clusters of flowers, (kinds of) honey, they 
try the taste of all. Sh. Um. Mar. YI, 9. 

o^ vJ-f^' uxf^ 3^ ^l^ysL^ ,j^ ^LxioLj ^ -^]iX^ 

(As to) the entering of a rich one into the kingdom 
of God, the passing of a camel through the ear of a 
needle is easier. Matth. 19, 14. 



438 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

oLf (^lXa^sJ ^^<>.Jw^J (^lXa54> ^^iXAJsLw ^^^ iS'*':^'"'^ ^ 

She remembering tlie Lord, trembling, shaking, 
fearing, lifted up (her) neck and made: Man. Sindhi 
Eead. Book, p. 64. 

Then ye will become children of your father, who 
is in heaven. Matth. 5, 45. 

§. 65, 
II. The Vocative. 

By the Vocative a person or thing taken perso- 
nally is addressed; the Vocative stands therefore in no 
connexion with other nouns or with a verb, and is ge- 
nerally put at the beginning of a sentence. 

1) The Vocative is used without any interjectional 
particle, if no particular stress is laid upon the address; 
but if the attention of the person spoken to is to be 

roused, the interjectional particles Lj ya, ^1 e, ^\ ai, 

jl o, y^ are used promiscuously with masc. and fem. 

nouns, ^\ 1 and ^1 ai only with fem. nouns. 

In addressing an inferior person, or when speaking 
very affectionately to a person, the interjectional par- 
ticles ^v re (^s re) and ^--l are (^vf are) are used with 
masc. nouns, and ^-l ri (^s ri) and ^-A ari (^^sl ari), 
(cf §. 16, 8, Note) with fem. nouns, be they in the 
Singular or Plural, ^-l^ bari, ^-'i ri and ^yy\ riu are 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 439 

also used indepenclentlv of a noun, in addressing an in- 
ferior female (or intimate friend). 

I have been quickened, companions, come in my 
Punhu! Sh. Desi n, Epil. 

j-^T j5>JjliT j.^ ^^^ ^^3^ C^l^ 

For God's sake, camelmen, do not drive on the 

camels ! 
Friend! tliou art the protector of my crippled life! 
Do not extinguish (my) affection, o sweetheart! Sh. 
Desi m, 1. 

^T ^ ^^ ^ J^ ^ LJ 

lAli, ?Ali, misfortune is on the orphans! 
The order of God has come, o Imams. Sh. Ked. V, 
Epil. 



^ * > , - 



Hallo! son of man, doest thou go having beaten 
our mother? Amulu Man. p. 148. 

Hallo! cook, bring bread! Ibid. p. 144. 

2) Adjectives preceding or following a noun in the 
Vocative are likewise ^Dut in the Vocative. But if an 
adjective defines another adjective in the sense of an 
adverb, it remains uninflected. 



440 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 



I 

Sweet, charming friend! mayst thou fertilize the 
whole world! Sh. Sar. IV, 12. 

very kind friend! they (= she, Sing.) have given 
me up with difficulty (i. e. unwillingly). Maj. 664. 

3) The Nominative Plural is occasionally used in- 
stead of the Vocative, especially with nouns terminating 
in V (masc). 



,^^ ^ Of 



Who are ye? whence do ye come from? ye men 
of foreign appearance? Nanga jo Qisso, v. 23. 

Ye, that labour and are heavy laden, come unto 
me. Matth. 11, 28. 

4) A number of nouns are commonly found in the 
Vocative only, as: jJol amare (^il amane), ^T ai, Jul 
ay ale, ^-;o! ami, ^U mai, o mother! an affectionate 
term for a female; ^^jj adi, ;C4>l5 dadi, o sister! Liy?^ 
jija or (^^^ jiji, o aunt; \S\ ada or I5l5 dada (Nom. 
jof and 3^13) o brother! LjI aba and Lj(J baba (from 
jj| and j.jlj), o father! a term, which may be applied 
even to a child (male or female); ^LI^ miya (Sing, and 
Plur.) o friend! a respectful address. 

ij^^ £--y y'^t u>-^^. Lr'' (5:^^. ST"' 

mother! hope is fulfilled, Punhu has arrived at 
Kec. Sh. Desi, Chot. 4. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. Ui 



--„ J 



child (o father!) I make thy espousals with the 
son of the king Lain. Amulu Man. p. 142. 

Fathers! what reason have you to ask after this 
very (thing?) Ibid. p. 140. 

jj.AX> ^ ^-ijJ 3^ ^ ^LOo oJ j.J^I ^^1 

Having come, o darling, o friend! cover with dust 
the tomb of the deceased one in the mountain- passes. 
Sh. Ma^S. YI, Epil. 

§. 66. 
in. The Instrumental. 

1) The Instrumental either denotes the agent, by 
whom an action is performed, or the instrument, by 
means of which any thing is done.^) The Instrumental 
in Sindhi is not only used with the past tenses of 
transitive or causal verbs (which always have a pas- 
sive meaning), but also with any tense of neuter verbs 
implying a passive signification.^) 

By the people of the caravan the loads have been 
bound up; in thy eyes there is sloth. Sh. Surag. HI, Epil. 



. . ' I " 

1) The sense is different, if the postposition ^jil.'W be used with 
a noun denoting an instrument. In this case it is implied, that some 
one was accompanied or armed with any thing, but not, that he has 
performed any thing by a certain instrument. 

2) Independently of a verb the Instrumental of ijli nalo, name, 

is used quite in an adverbial sense, as: (c-^tJ (^y"^ iX*-^ yf^ 3r^? 
one faqir, by name Muhammad |Alim. 



442 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART, 

^p ^y£ jsb^^ ^y^ (X^^ ^ ^x^x^ 

Suhini was killed, says the Sayyid, by (her) re- 
lationship. Sh. Suh. Y, 17. 

By the lovers (God) is never forgotten. Sh. Jam. 
Kal. VII, 1. 

By means of (my) feet I cannot arrive (there); the 
country of (my) friend (PI.) is far off. Sh. Khambh. I, Epil. 

^La^j^ jj^ajUXJ >ii^ u>^7^. -^ [s^ c^^v 

By drops they are not reconciled; they have espied 
the jars of the heroes. Sh. Jam. Kal. lY, 9. 

2) The Instrumental expresses causality^) (by reason 
of, by dint of): 

^^) ^; u'-^^ >^; ^^ '?^ <5^ 

■ On the seventh in the month the blood went out 
of the veins by reason of dryness; 
On the eigth in the month the eyes of the lover 
die of thirst. Maj. 478, 477. 

3) The Instrumental expresses the way and manner^ 
in which any thing is done. 

He kept the custom (good breeding) in a good manner 
before the Qazi. Maj. 173. 



1) In a similar sense tiie postposition ^^^ may also be employed. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 443 

'There is no purpose in both mansions', in this wise 
they spoke. Sh. Jam. KaL Y, 23, 

'^/)^ u;"^.^ ^•;^- ^Ai is^ u^^ 

To both helpless ones (there is) pleasant talk in 
many ways. Maj. 198. 

4) The Instrumental expresses the price, for which 
any thing is bought or sold.^) 

Are not two sparrow sold for a piece? Matth. 10, 29. 

Fine black woollen blankets come there to hand 
for a paltry (sum). Sh. Um. Mar. YI, 8. 

§. 67. 
lY. The Genitive. 

1) It must be remembered, that the Genitive in 
Sindhi is originally an adjective, formed by the affix 
yc^j which always requires the Formative of the noun, 
to which it accedes; the Genitive admits therefore of 
gender, inflection and number, like other adjectives. In- 
stead of j.:^ its diminutive form y-i^ jaro is also found 
in poetry, and especially jJolI sando (cf. §. 16, 6) and 
its dim. form j-jt)^ sandiro. The Genitive case -sign 

i.^ etc. may also accede to a noun with suffixes; in 
poetry it is frequently dropped altogether , to be supplied 

from the context. jlXaI may also be separated from the 
noun, to which it belongs. 



. . ' I - 
l) But the postposition m'*'^ ^^7 also be used in this sense. 



444 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

The understanding of the duties of a faqir is not 
easy. Mengho 37. 

friend, into my soul falls the desire after thee! 
Sh. Barvo Sindhi II, 2. 



O J > 1 - 



By means of the magic power of the bucket he 
became wealthy. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 67. 

.♦I .. .. ^ .. ,1 

The masters of the house having got up what do 
they see? that a thief, having collected all things of the 
house, having bound a bundle, having drunk wine (and) 
having become intoxicated, dances. Ibid. p. 69. 

Having stolen daily from the houses of men all sorts 
of food they were bringing it to him. Ibid. p. 62. 

To the forest with that thy son, who will cut off 
the head of my brother! Story of Eae Diacu, p. 1. 

The grass of (my) fatherland I consider as musk. 
Sh. Um. Mar. II, 1. 

2) As regards the position of the Genitive, it ge- 
nerally precedes the noun, by which it is governed, like 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 445 

other adjectives; but if the stress be laid on the go- 
verning noun, or if the euphony of the sentence should 
require it, the Genitive follows the same. In poetry 
the Genitive precedes or follows the noun, on which it 
is dependent, either immediately or separated by one 
or more intervening nouns, as it may be required by the 
metre or the rhyme. 

Whoever flees from the trouble of labour, his state 
will become like that of the dogs. Sindhi Eead. B., p. 61. 

^\ L^J adJi ^:s^ ist"^ <si^ 

Escort, for God's sake, the boat of the helpless 
one! Sh. Barvo Sindhi 11, Epil. 

3) The Genitive has a double signification in Sindhi; 
it refers either to the subject or to the object of the 
sentence. The Genitive is called subjective, if the 
attribute expressed by the Genitive refers to the go- 
verning noun (or subject) as to its owner or author, 
and it is called objective, if it refers to the object, 
to which the action of the subject is directed. 

I have borne the taunts of (my) companions for 
thy sake. Sh. M€im. Eano I, Epil. 

Those, whose I am, will not abandon me. Sh. 
Koh. n, Epil. 

h ^^"^^l '^y'^ ^ 5^7^ '4^ u^^7^^. 

Beneath the feet of (my) friend I spread (my) hair. 
Maj. 231. 



446 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

" \ ^ \ •""""7 ''!" "'^ ""' 

^yllul ^:SV>o stXJf ^^^ j»La.- j^xf jvxS^I 

In my heart there is a thirst after the Jam Ari. 
Sh. Hus. YHI, Epil. 

^LI^ ^^.^^yrr (5^^ J4^^. u;-^ 0^7^ u;^'-^/ 
Complaints about the separation I shall utter to 
dear Punhu, o friend! Sh. Hus. VIII, Epil. 

4) One noun is often made dependant on the other 
by means of the Genitive, where we should properly 

expect an apposition.^) In this way dlS nalo, name 
and similar nouns subordinate the appellation in the Ge- 
nitive. The same subordination in the Genitive takes 
place, when the genus is nearer defined by the species, 
as: a fig-tree, or when a geographical appellation, as: 
town, mountain, river etc. is followed by a proper name, 
as : the river Indus. In some instances the English idiom 
resorts to the same construction, as the Sindhi, e. g. the 
city of London. 

From whom hast thou learnt the word (of) 'se- 
paration', dear friend! Sh. Barvo Sindhi II, 8. 

The woman uttered the word (of) 'money' slowly. 
Sindhi Read. Book, p. 68. 

H^i isf^ T^i'^ ^ 3^5 >^ (5^ u5 P'-*" isir^ is^ ^^^ 

That very dry post stood as a green tamarisk tree, 
having become big and thick. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 23. 

There was a very respectable inhabitant of the town 
of Thata. Ibid. p. 45. 

1) See §. 64, 1. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 447 

5) The Grenitive describes the material, of which 
something is made or composed; in this case the Gre- 
nitive quite supplies the place of an adjective. 

I ' I 

The garment of John was of camel's hair and round 
his waist a girdle of leather. Matth. 3, 4. 

She, having put on bracelets and buttons, will cause 
to bring (call for) a garment of pearls and rubies. Amulu 
Man. p. 144. 

6) The Genitive describes the nature or quality 
of the noun, on which it is dependent (Grenitivus qua- 
litatis). But in this case the Grenitive must always be 
accompaniecl by an attribute, be that an adjective, 
pronoun or another noun in the Genitive; the repetition 
of a |noun may also serve as an attribute. In poetry, 
and even in prose, the Genitive case-sign is frequently 
dropped, so that constructions of this kind can hardly 
be distinguished from those with the Locative, see §. 70, 4. 

One of them was nine years old, the other eight 
years. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 50. 

Without understanding science is of no use. lb. p. 54. 

From Kec came a caravan, camels of a fine kind. 
Sh. Desi m, 8. 

Having given clothes of different kinds he started 
them off. Amulu Man. p. 140. 



448 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

7) When the Genitive is dependent on nouns, im- 
plying a part, quantity or measure, it expresses the 
whole of that, of which the governing noun forms 
a part. But if no such noun precede and a part is 
to be singled out, a postposition must be used (as: 

Which a woman took (and) hid in three measures 
of flour. Matth. 13, 33. 

A jar of wine fell into his hands. Sindhi Eead. 
Book, p. 62. 

.. I ^ •• .. , .. - I " n 

In one of those (houses) my beadstead shall be, in 
the other that of the king. Amulu Man. p. 142. 

If two persons of you become one-hearted respecting 
a petition. Matth. 18, 19. 

8) A certain number of adjectives and appellatives, 
which have partly taken the signification of substantives, 
may subordinate another noun in the Grenitive. Of this 
kind are the nouns formed by the affix aku, au (see 
§. 8, 9) and others. 

Lovers, drinkers of poison, are verry happy when 

seeing poison; 
They are always used to the chain and the execu- 

cutioner. Sh. Kal. II, 33. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 449 



-- 5 



Tlioii art a resident of the waste and desert. Sindhi 
Read. Book, p. 69. 

A vagabond, accustomed to bits, no breeding and 
good beiiaviour. Maj. 304. 

Which histre is upon thee, for that head I am 
lono'ino;. Sh. Sor. 11, 7. 

}^ >^ cr^-^; c5^^5 "^^^ J4^.^ ;r^ cr'*^-^ v^^^ --^^ <^^ 

The Sayjid, by name Shah Habib, was originally 
an inhabitant of the village Yango Yilaso. Life of Abd- 
ul-Latlf, p. 1. 

9) The Genitive is used, without being dependent 
on a governing noun, to express a space of time, as: 

^ ^fs by night, jljsx -^.5 by day etc., the noun, by 

which the Genitive is governed and which is idioma- 
tically left out, being JL?^ velo, time. 

This construction is therefore identical with that 
mentioned in §. 64, 3. In Hindustani jl5^ is used in 

the same sense. 

« 

Sitting at (the time of) evening prayer I spread out 
my skirt on the water. Sh. Sor. Y, 14. 

>?L? ^-L^ ^')^ }^ c^f; ^jfi i'LS 

The bard sang the first night at the side of the 
castle. Sh. Sor. 11, 1. 

T r u m p p , SinclM- Grammar. F f 



450 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

By day they used to sit in its shade. Life of Abd- 
ul-Latif, p. 23. 

10) A number of adjectives require idiomatically 
the inflected case of the Grenitive (i. e. ^^), when a 

noun is made dependent on them. The most common 

of them are: jSf ado, in front; jOjl od5 (Dim. j-j^j-l odiro), 

near to; ^j.^LlL samuho, in front of, opposite; ^j.JtXJLgi 

mahandiyo, in front; 3.4^^ vejho (Dim. 3^4:^^ vejhiro), 

near etc. These adjectives being mostly used as ad- 
verbial postpositions (§. 58, II), the same construction 
has apparently been preserved, when they are used as 
regular adjectives. 

When they came near to Jerusalem. Matth. 21, 1. 

;^^ ur° ^h^ P d^-;^' u^- ;^^ 7^^^ 

Look at the rising of the moon; the friend is near 
to thee, far from me. Sh. Kambh. 11, 7. 

The eyes are opposite the eyes the whole day and 
night. Maj. 219. 

11) The relative -adjectives 3.4.^ jeho, jv^r^ jeharo, 

such as, like as, fit to, j^xLL sando, like as, jv^x:?- je- 

tiro, as much as, and jJus^ jed5, as large as, are always 

constructed with the simple Formative of the noun, that 
depends upon them. 

Majno, the son of Mahmud, is then not such as 
to come, i. e. is not hkely to come. Maj. 719. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 451 

jLjitS tXjtS u^9 ^7*^ c^^v-^^. 1^:)^'-^ 

Teetlis like Jasinum flowers the Bountifal has given 
her. Maj. 54, 

Which is blessed in all ways, like thou, o wise one. 
Maj. 825. 

In that (there is) pven thou, thou; (there is) no other 
sound (as much as the twinkling of an eye =) for a 
moment. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 19. 

Then no mote, as large as a sesamum seed, came 
into thy body, o friend? Ajaib v. 21. 

12) When a noun is subordinated by means of the 
Genitive to the Infinitive of a neuter or active verb, 
the case-sign of the Genitive may be optionally dropped. 

}H^ ck^; -f^^ 0)r^ (5t ^^ ^;;>^' «J^ p'-^y* 

The villager occupied himself in (the) removing of 
that little grain. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 56. 

The Mughals, having taken (their) swords came for 
the killing of the Shah, i. e. 'in order to kill him'. Life 
of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. 

^j^AAJli^ SJi. yy^ £=3»J (jL^ ^^^'6 c>«*Jt3 ^jj^ 

After the seeing of this affluence she offered up 
dutiful thanks. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 55. 

Ff2 



452 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

o-i^^ yi i>^ y^ ty^ ^t9 ^#5 ^^/^^ ^ u'-^^^ 

Till the passing away of heaven and earth not one 
jot of the law shall in any way pass off. Matth. 5, 18. 

§. 68. 
V. The Dative. 

1) The Dative denotes the more distant object, in 
reference to which the subject is acting. This is already 
indicated by the postposition ^^ khe (§. 16, 4), by 

means of which the Dative case is made up \ and which 
originally signifies: 'on account of, for the sake of, 
in reference to'. In prose the postposition ^^ is 

always put after the Formative of a noun, but in poetry 
it may precede the noun, or it may be dropped al- 
together. 

When a Genitive, depending on a noun in the Da- 
tive, follows the same immediately, the postposition ^j^ 

is put after the Genitive case -sign. 

Come near, dear friend, do not give pain to the 
distressed. Sh. Abiri X, 4. 

jol ^A^ ^ ^ SyXxi vb c>..w«^ ^U 

Then Maste IN'aze came and said thus to the elegant. 
Ajaib, V. 90. 



1) In poetry the postpositions ^^'f kane, ^^j kane and yj gare 

are used in the same sense as jc^>. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 453 

j^5 .; ii5 i^>r ^^r ^.y sif 

May no sunshine apply to the camelmen, may 
no hot wind apply to the camels! 

Grod, may no hot wind blow to the sons of An! 

Sh. Desi I, 25. 

Having bound (him) they delivered him to the po- 
lice-officer of the town. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 69. 

2) The Dative with the auxiliary verbs ^J^s to be, 
and 0*1^' to become, to be, expresses the idea of pos- 
sesssion. 

1 have hope in God. Sh. Sor. I, Epil. 

-^ is( '^^^^ yl <sf^ (5?^ <s^ c5t ^^ ^f ^y^ 

I have no lack whatever of wealth, but children 
are not at all born to me. Amulu Man. p. 139. 

3) The Dative denotes the remote object, in re- 
ference to which the action takes place. In this case 
the postposition ^^ must be translated by: for, for 
the sake of. 

(My) heart (and) mind burns for my sweetheart 
in intoxication. Maj. 728. 

In Kec there is a call for those , under whose armpit 
there is nothing (i. e. who have nothing). Sh. Ma^B^. 11, 11. 



454 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

^y^^ ^yijU ^4^ .itf ^IJ ^^ 

They sent men for food, water (and) grass. Sh. 
Ked. I, 5. 

hero! thou diest for the sake of victory, forget 
then the apprehensions of the heart! Sh. Ked. VI, 9. 

4) The Dative expresses the idea of motion to 
a place. 



> « > ^ , - 



^y^H u^. <5^ (sf^ ^^ o^-^^ (j^^'^ 

Having driven on I came to Kec, where Punhu 
himself (is). Sh. Abiri Y, 1. 

O fair Lady, after death thon wilt come to Punhu. 
Sh. Ma^B. lY, 5. 

tsf^ g^ (s^'-^; -^ ^ )^ iA^^^^^ 

The work of a messenger (i. e. travelling) does not 
at all bring to Kec. Sh. Abiri lY, 10. 

5) The Dative is used to express time, when only 
an indefinite space of time is spoken of, whereas the 

postpositon ^/.A or -^^sLo, in, is employed, if the time, 

during which any thing is done, is to be noted. 

Qaisare says: arrive that very night in Kelat. Sh. 
Sar. IY,'3. 

Go to (thy) friend at day-break, in clear day, Sh. 
Suh. Ch5t. 11. 



11. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 455 



^ J'^^f c>^-^ty ^ff^T^-? ^"i^-" i^^i 

Immediately at that time an order was given to 
the chamberlains. Ajaib, v. 15. 



§. 69. 
YI. The Accusative. 

The Accusative has two forms in Sindhi, it is either 
identical with the Nominative or with the Dative, 
i. e. the idea of the Accusative may be expressed also 
by means of the postposition ^^^. 

1) The Accusative is commonly expressed by the 
form of the Nominative, whenever the verb governs only 
an Accusative, and not at the same time a Dative. 

When he shall keep his own horses, boats, soldiers 
and make his own judgements and thoughts. Amul. 
Man. p. 139. 

If I shall marry, I shall marry this very fairy Hu- 
sine. Ibid. p. 141. 

2) But when the subject of the sentence is an ani- 
mate noun (in the Nominative) the object (Accusative) 
must be marked out by means of the postposition ^ 

to avoid a possible mistake. If the subject be animate, 
and the object inanimate, the object (Accusative) gene- 
rally remains in the uninflected form (i. e. without 
the Postposition), if there be no danger of misappre- 
hension. If both, subject and object, imply inanimate 
things, the object may likewise remain uninflected. 



456 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 



' I -- " I " 



y^S (5-^5 <J^*^ <j^. is^^ y^^ C5f^^ v-^^Li sX.^ 

Shah Sahib, having taken that very faqir with him^ 
came. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 40. 

The father of the Shah continued seeking the Shah 
Sahib. Ibid. p. 44. 

j^^;^ tXifV.A«..« v^^Lo ^Lw ^j* i^BtXj *-CyLiC rk^tXi^ jo^^cV.^ 

When Ma/dum Hashim heard, that the Shah Sahib 
causes to make music in the mosque. Ibid, p. 35. 

If ever this word the king of the mice will hear. 
SindhI Read. Book, p. 62. 

If that (treasure) some man finds, he keeps it con- 
cealed. Matth. 13, 14. 

The (black) marks (from blows) cause pains; the 
bones also are aching on account of the (= my) sweetheart. 
Sh. Abiri, Chot. 2. 

3) When the object (Accus.) of an active verb is 
for any reason to be rendered more prominent, the post- 
position ^f is used for this purpose. This is especially 

the case, when the object implies living beings, whose 
mention has been made already, or when two or more 
persons or things are in any way compared or set 
against each other. But much scope is left in this 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 457 

respect to individual judgement. In poetry ^f is oc- 
casionally dropped, but then the contracted form of the 
Formative must be used in the Plural. 

That disciple, having called (that) girl, said. Life 
of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 48. 

The devs said: wilt thou recognise that very one? 
Amulu Man. p. 151. 

In that way money will be got; having brought 
(something) from that let us feed (our) guests. Life of 
Abd-ul-Latif, p. 41. 

j.Ai^CL^ (^^ ^^ ^y^ ^-^j^Jf tX^A fjyr><$^ 

Sisters, says Abd-ul-Latif , praise ye the (well-known) 
friend. Sh. Abiri Chot., Epil. 3. 

>-^; ^'j^ u^V^ 0^^ ^ 

Having gathered first the tares , having bound bundles 
to burn (them), gather (and) put afterwards the wheat 
in the garner. Matth. 13, 30. 

Whatever longing there is, learn (it); otherwise look 
at the longing ones. Sh. Jam. Kal. YII, 7. 

4) Whenever an active verb is constructed imper- 
sonally in the past tenses (§. 94, 5) the object must 
be pointed out by the postposition ^^^5^ signifying: as 
regards. 



458 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

Then it was abandoned by the caravan as regards 
her, while being asleep, i. e. she was abandoned by the 
caravan while being asleep. Sh. K5h. I, 8. 

^3bj <s^^ S?t^^^ ^^'^ ^4^^^ ^ u)^ 
Having taken his bundle he started him off. Sindhi 
Bead. Book, p. 53. 

5) When a verb governs a double Accusative, both 
objects remain in the uninflected state, if they imply 
things; but if the first object be a person or a living 
being in general, it is rendered more definite^) by the 
accession of the postposition ^^, whereas the second 

object, be it a person or thing, remains in the unin- 
flected state of the Singular, though it refer to a Plural. 
If the stress is on the second object (compare §. 94, 3), 
it may be placed first. 

^7^ y^ V"^ ^y^ <^t^ ^y^ '■^^'^ u*^^:?^ 

I shall give (my) flesh to the wild beasts, having 
made atoms (my) life. Sh. Abiri IX, Epil. 

That one was in the habit of causing the guests to 
eat bread, i. e. he was in the habit of entertaining the 
guests. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 40. 

^y^ ^JlAi^ ^?L4^ (5«^ (i:>i^? }^f^ 

Make the weak one pass the Harho, says Latif. 
Sh. Desi lY, 4. 

I will make you fishers of men. Matth. 4, 19. 



1) But both objects may also remain in the uninflected state, 
though implying persons; see §. 94 ^ 3. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 459 

6) When an active verb subordinates at the same 
time a near and a more distant object (iv e. an Accu- 
sative and a Dative), the Accusative (in the uninflected 
state) generally follows the Dative, except a particular 
stress be laid on the Accusative, in which case it pre- 
cedes the Dative. 

,^U. ^^ ^^^ \Xxs> ^^ (j^-o ^il4i?^ J^l< 

The accomplished one causes daily nice blandishments 
to be made to Qais. Maj. 223. 

^^Cs^^ ^sy^^ is^ u^^ -^ 

The hands the little daughter shall wash us. Life 
of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 48. 

i^^i^ (5-f^^ ^^^^ ^Y^ti ^^^ '"^ ^- '■" ^^^ ^7— 

But one (grain) thou doest not give to another with thy 
hand, having thrown in an obstacle, o brother! Mengho 11. 

§. 70. 
YII The Locative. 

The Locative, as noted already, can only be ex- 
pressed in the Singular of masculine nouns terminating 
in 'u'; in all other nouns and throughout the Plural 
the Locative must be circumscribed by the postpositions 

^^yKjo and ^^ivc, 'in'. In poetry these postpositions are 

commonly dropped and only the Formative of a noun 
is used to express the idea of the Locative, in the Plural 
the contracted form of the Formative (ending in e or 
a) must in this case always be employed. But also in 

prose the postpositions ^j^yo and ..g-^ are frequently 

left out idiomatically, especially after nouns implying 
time. 

When a substantive in the Locative is accompanied 



460 1. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

by an adjective ending in 'u', the adjective must be 
likewise put in the Locative; but adjectives of other 
terminations, pronouns or numerals are only put in the 
Formative. 

1) The Locative expresses in Sindhi not only the 
place, in which an action is going on, but also di- 
rection and motion to a place. The Locative is 

therefore used after verbs of motion, such as: J^l va- 

iianu, to go, ^^1 acanu, to come etc. 

^y^ ^-J^ ^J^S ^^^ Sj\i L^AJ^ J ^5 

•^^^ i5-t=^^^ ^st^ ^/ -f^^ }}^ ^y^ 

;N"o crows were sitting on a tree; evening tide has 

set in; she seizes the opportunity. 
She stepped in, having taken the jar into the hand, 
having heard the call (to prayer) of the evening. 
Sh. Suh. I, 14. 

In the caldrons the limbs boil, where not a grain 
does descend in the eddies. Sh. Kal. 11, 27. 

In deep, very great love are hares and jackals. 
Maj. 548. 

May not any one, friend! trust in a Baluchi 
promise! Sh. DesT, Chot. 7. 

I go to the forest; I have seen the footstep of 
Punhu. Sh. Hus. Y, 4. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 461 

/^ c5^ <J^''* ^ is^ ^"i (5?^^ ;^ ^^^ 

Having given (left) the other doors to others, 1 
came to thy door. Sh. Sor. I, 11. 

2) The Locative is used with nouns implying time, 
to express the point of time, at which an action 
takes place. 

One day, making a journey, they arrived at (lit.: 
came out of) Jesalmer. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 40. 

" ' * 1 •* ' ^ I 

At some time in a village one mouse, having re- 
flected in its mind, said. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 61. 

yS y^ ^t^ g^^ i)^y^ i>f^ 

(My) beautiful friend came at day -break to (my) 
house. Sh. Khambh. I, 9. 

(My) body weeps in the nights {and) in the days, 
in the chains (i. e. in prison). Sh. Um. Mar. V, 7. 

3) The Locative is used also in the sense of the 
Latin Ablative absolute, to express a state or 
circumstance. In this way either an adjective may 
be used absolutely (i. e. substantively, so that an attri- 
bute may be joined to it) or a substantive with an ad- 
jective; in either case the participle present ^d^y^ in 

being, being, should be supplied, but is idiomatically 
left out/) 



1) About the Locative of the participle present and past, see §. 81, 2. 



462 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

^4^ <i:^SSi ^^^ ^^a:^ Ja^ ^Nf j^j^i- j^^ j^ 

Grant me that favour, that I may meet, whilst 
living (lit. in the state of being alive) my sweetheart. 
Sh. Abiri I, 1. 

jiXx^xf J ^f ^ 3.3 b ^ y\^ ^^ 1^4^ j* ^y^^ ^^ \J^^^ 

"Whilst we live no one shall take even the name 
of thy hair. Amulu Man. p. 151. 

Do not take down the load; depart, that thou mayst 
meet with (thy) object, whilst the sun is (yet) red. Sh. 
Hus. I, 2. 

4) The Locative describes the attributes or qualities, 
in which the subject is, to say so, immersed. In the 
English idiom such a Locative must be translated by 
the postposition 'of or 'with'. 

Of slender waist, of straight nose, with lamp-black 
their eyes (are) filled. Sh. Sam. I, 35. 

In the adornment of the head (and) body he is a 
hero of great boldness. Ajaib, v. 156. 

With great udder they came, having behind their 
young ones. Sh. Sar. IV, 14. 

Hast thou seen any where one by name Shah Abd- 
ul-Latif, of such marks and signs, my son? Life of Abd- 
ul-Latif, p. 9. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PAKT. 463 

J J ^^iXx^'6 ^ ^^y^ ch^-f^ 3;>-^^ 

An orphan, of torn clothes, to look upon like a 

basil leaf. Maj. 303. 

■'^^"^ i> " ^ ^ ^ 

Of deer-eyes, of ears of a wild goose, of a Kovil's 
speech. Ibid. 52. 

^/^ Sfr"^ i-f'f (^/i?^ /-^^-^^ 
Of a neck (and) breast like a pigeon, amiable. 
Ibid. 60. 

5) The Locative is used also in computations, the 
sum or price, at which something is computed, being 
put in the Locative (cf. also §. 66, 4). 

Thy step I do not balance with ten billions, if thou 
become comforted. Sh. Sor. II, 4. 

'^ r -' r ' J ' ' ' 

That heart, which is not at all obtained for a price, 
thou hast asked. Sh. Sor. 11, 15. 

§. 71. 
Vm. The Ablative. 

The idea of the Ablative is expressed either by the 

Ablative case (c£ §. 16, 5) or by postpositions, as: ^Lgi^ 

^J}^, Ur from, ^\Jo, ^l^^'i from-in, ^jli, (jL^Jc^J from- 
upon etc. 

1) The Ablative denotes in the first instance se- 
paration, removal, distance from a place or thing; 
it is therefore commonly used with such verbs, post- 
positions and adverbs, as imply a distance or separation 
from any thing (place, time etc.). 



464 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

This one came, having made a journey from a 
foreign country. S. Sor. I, 5. 

U^^ u^if" ^A^i C4^ u;L^ ,sf^ 

When I fled from Bhambhoru, then all pains became 

delights; 
Having descended from the mountain-pass I became 

in my own person Punhu. Sh. Abiri Y, 2. 

I will scoop out of (my) shoulders something, o 
bard, and give it thee with the body. Sh. Sor. II, 22. 

yXi ^jLa:^- J^i^Xx) ^^M^Mj ^^y\ jj^&>! 

Before death, o Sasui, o fair Lady! die whilst living! 

Turn not aside from that company, by which the 

soul has been lost on the road. Sh. Ma^B. lY, 6. 

2) The Ablative is therefore used in comparisons, 
the object, with which a noun is compared, being 
put in the Ablative, to state the distance or difference 
of one noun from another (c£ §. 21). 

&i^ O^ U^%^ '^ U^jrf 5^7^. ^* ch^^^^ erf 

If thou desirest to meet thy friend, then esteem 
virtue more than vices; (literally: esteem virtue before 
vices.) Sh. Jam. Kal. YIII, 22. 



1) ^.gX] the same as LXi, the latter having been, after a poe- 
tical license, aspirated, for the sake of the rhyme. 



L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 465 

>«^^ is'-" ^-^^ is^^)^ i^^ J-i^ ^jUP u^-'f isiyi 3pi^ 

Having built a dwelling better than all other faqirs 
(lit. good from), he lived at Bhita (i. e. on the sandhill). 
Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 21. 

3) The Ablative expresses the ground, reason or 
feeling, out of which or with which an action is done. 

Respect Muhammad, the intercessor, out of un- 
derstanding (and) love. Sh. KaL I, 2. 

Gro, ye scholars, that she may eat with pleasure. 
Maj. 117. 

4) The Ablative denotes also instrumentality 
and accompaniment; but this use is restricted to in- 
animate nouns and to poetry; in prose either the In- 
strumental or ^Q postposition ^j^LL would be employed 
for this purpose. 

Those say to thee: do thou not return a word with 
(thy) mouth. Sh. Jam. Kal. VIII, 17. 

Give thou praise to the wise one publicly with (thy) 
tongue. Sh. Surag. I, Epil. L 

The mouthfuls, which thou, o camel! hast obtained 
(and) plucked with the mouth. Sh. Kambh. 11, 29. 



1) LjLjx instead of ^^uUv. 

Trumpp , Sindhi-Gramniar. Gr g 



466 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

Go with the gold to the banker, (but) do not at 
all take down the load! Sh. Surag. IV, 9. 

5) With neuter verbs the Ablative (especially with 

the postposition ^jL^O denotes the agent. The same 
is the case with passive verbs, if the agent be an inani- 
mate noun. 

" ' C- '♦*• ,''09 c^ I -' 

Master, I have done wrong, forgive me that! Life 
of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 20. 

CS^'-i^ U^-6^ C54>^ ul u^^"" V"^ U^.<>-^4^* ^-^ 

I shall become a candle in the night, being burnt 
by that dehght. Sh. Khambh. I, Epil. 3. 

^ys^ <y.i:^ q^^f ^^«^ -4^^^ ^)y^ 

By the beauty of (his) face I was made mad in (my) 
mind. Sh. Suh. IX, 8. 



Chapter V. 
Pronouns. 

I. Personal pronouns. 

§. 72. 

1) The personal pronouns are generally not ex- 
pressed, being implied in the inflexional terminations of 
the verb. They are therefore only used either for the 
sake of perspicuity or for the sake of emphasis^) or con- 
trast. In poetry a personal pronoun is often omitted, 



1) Commonly with the emphatic i (i) or hi, h}. 



L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 467 

where we should expect one, and must then be suppHed 
from the context. 

On the whole the personal pronouns precede the 
verb, to which they belong, but they may also follow 
it, especially in poetry. 

I am alone on the Hab, I have no friend nor 
brother. Sh. Suh. II, Epil. 2. 

^; ;; ^^)^ -" u^ 3;; -t? u^-p 

Ye married women also return! I shall not return 
without (my) husband. Sh. Abiri IV, 9, 

u^yi u;; <5t ^'f isb"" -f^-^ >#; 
Go again ye all, who have husbands! Ibid. IV, 9. 

Even me kill my own pains. 

2) The Genitives j.^^ ^j-^ ^nd j.^ ^j-^ i^y? thy, 
are possessive adjectives in the [N'ominative and inflected 
accordingly. In poetry the case -sign j.^ is frequently 

dropped, but then the forms ^yj and p must be em- 
ployed. Instead of the possessive adjectives the prono- 
minal suffixes attached to nouns (verbs and postpositions) 

or to jjoL (cf §. 40, 2) may also be used, and in certain 
cases ^ ^j-^,1 see §. 77. 

The Genitive of the personal pronoun of the I and 
II pers. Sing, and Plur. (Lat. mei, tui etc.) is expressed 

by the Formative ^^ ^^4^>«, ^5^ «j4^' ^^-s which is 
also used before such postpositions, as require ^:^, cf. 

§. 58, n. 

6£2 



468 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART, 



My heart is fixed there, here is (only) earth and 
flesh, Sh. Urn. Mar. VI, 16. 

3^5 >^ O^^^ C5^ c>^7e o^^ ;4^ ur" 

It is my friend's turn to come to my house. Sh, 
Kambh. I, 9. 

Thy companions, thy friends have been carried down 
the river by the waves. Sh. Surag. YI, 6. 

r- 3^X3^4^ ji^f ^jL^r ^^;J ^^ ^o ^ti ^iii ^^XU^ 

Whoever loves son or daughter more than me, is 
not worthy of me. Matth. 10, 37. 



> o ? 



Come, walk after me, i. e. follow me. Ibid. 19, 21. 

3) ^^5^ tj^^-^ and j.^ (^4-^* are also used substan- 
tively, especially in the Plural, in the sense of: my, thy 
people or friends. 

I have a very great longing; would that my (friends) 
had returned! Sh. Sam. 11, 17. 

4) The Accusative of the personal pronouns must 
always be marked by the postposition ^.^f, which in 

poetry however is frequently dropped. But if in a sen- 
tence a Dative and Accusative of a personal pronoun 
(or pronoun of the III pers.) should occur, the Dative 
takes the postposition ^i' as well as the Accusative; 



L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 469 

constructions of this kind are however avoided, whenever 
possible. ^) 

(To =) Upon me (is) thy reproach , o my friend! 
•Sh. Mum. Eano II, 14. 

Go not away from Kak anywhere, o Rano, it is 
not right for thee. Sh. Mum. Rano I, Epil. 

g-i^ ^ ^y^ ^ ^f^^ ^ -^ "^^-f-? (5f^ u^^^' 

Bhita does not give you up, and thou do not run 
away! Life of Abd-ul-Latif , p. 21. 

3) When the personal pronouns are accompanied 
by an attribute in the inflected case, they must precede 
it in the Formative. 

Make some turn, o husband, to the hut of me, the 
lowly one! Sh. Daharu III, 1. 

Woe, by me the humble one nothing was then 
said! Sh. Desi lY, Epil. 

They will give to me the afflicted a sign, for God's 
sake. Sh. Koh. Ill, Epil. 



1) This may be done easily by a passive construction, as: 

^f (>4 ^-f^i ^5^^ ^? (^4^ e;^? uy^ 

I have presented you into his hands, i, e. made a present of you 
to him. Amulu Man. p. 148. 



470 I. THE ANALYTICAL PAKT, 

§. 73. 

11. Demonstrative pronouns. 

1) There is no personal pronoun of the III pers. 
(Singular and Plural) in Sindhi, its place being generally 

supplied by the demonstrative y» that, he, she; but if 
a distinction between a nearer and a more distant object 
is to be made, the demonstrative pronoun ^ this^), is 

referred to the object near at hand , and ^s& to the more 
distant one. When the subject (or object) of the sen- 
tence immediately preceding is to be taken up again 
by a pronoun, the demonstrative pronoun j..^^) is used. 

is^) is-j ^ isf o^ isf- U7'' isf u^ ^^ u^?^^ 

When the groan of her dying came upon her ear. 
Sindhi Eead. B. p. 64. 

Thou art a man, she a woman. Amulu Man., 
p. 147. 

5? ^SL4/,L4^- ^5? ^-yj ^/) ^t; ^sf^ ^ 

That one has in his mind (the word) 'night', these 
ones think this. Maj. 34. 



1) ^S& is also used idiomatically in the following way: 

Otherwise this is the kingdom , this thou , i. e. I will have nothing 
to do with the kingdom nor with thee* Amulu Man. p. 141. 

2) The demonstrative pronoun j.^, when joined to a personal 
pronoun, signifies ''therefore^; as: 

Umar of the Sumiro clan, therefore how shall I put on silk? 
SL Urn. Marui VII , 6. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 471 

>^ ^^ '4^^ ^5<^4^ u>^' ^ r^ P9 )^ K^y U'^ <rf^'^ 

The Dev has given thee a necklace of nine lakhs; 
that also I snatched away and took to hands. Amulu 
Man. p. 147. 



c-f- f 



All these buffaloes have come out of it {^= were 
born); take them as thy own. Sindhi Eead. B. p. 61. 

2) The demonstrative pronoun i^&f, this very, refers 

emphatically either to an object near at hand, or just 

mentioned or immediately following, and jjol that very 
to a more remote or afore mentioned one. j^^^l this 

here, and i.^1 that there, are only used in a local 
sense. 

If ever this very (just mentioned) word the king of 
the mice shall hear. Sindhi Eead. B. p. 63. 

That very one then is my sister. Amulu Man. 
p. 149. 

3) In the Accusative the demonstrative pronouns 
commonly take the postposition ^^, if they refer to 

persons (or animate beings generally) which are to be 
rendered more prominent; but if there be no stress 
laid on the demonstrative, the uninflected form of it is 
used. If the demonstratives refer to things or if they 
precede adjectively another noun in the uninflected form, 
they remain uninflected in the Accusative, if the post- 
position ^^^ be not required for reasons stated at §. 69, 3. 



472 I, THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

3^k J^ ^t^ is^'i C5f^ c^% d-f^' 

Shey having seen these, locked the door. Amulu 
Man. p. 149. 

>^^ 7->^ t5^^ C5^ Ur^ ^ jV >^ O"?^^ 
>' .. I ..I 

When you find it, come and give me intelligence. 
Matth. 2, 8. 

Then I shall see that, (and) then send to you a slave- 
girl. Amulu Man. p. 150, 

These trees you will not obtain; those trees there 
(are) many. 

§. 74. 
in. The relative and correlative pronoun. 

1) The relative pronoun^) in Sindhi is ^c>, who, which, 
and the correlative ^^ that, which usually takes up the 
relative. Besides the relative j.^., the indefinite pronouns 
jX^s^, j.5jjs> whosoever, ^^j^ whatsoever may jalso cor- 
respond to the following correlative ^. The place of 
the relative pronoun may also be taken up by a relative 
adverb. Instead of the correlative ^^ a demonstrative 
may be used, if the stress be laid upon it. 

The sentence headed by the relative pronoun may 
either precede or follow that commenced by the corre- 
lative j.^, according to the emphasis laid on either 



1) The relative j^, when followed by a personal pronoun in the 
same sentence, signifies "^as' (Lat. quippe qui) 

;^ U^^'^ Cff^ ^ (5"t^ ^^^ SfT ^^ "^^^^ 
"Woe to my state, as I am bad and useless! Maj. 756. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 473 

pronoun; for the sake of emphasis the correlatives may 
be repeated. 

When the relative (and correlative) refers to a 
pronoun of the I or II person, the verb of the relative 
sentence is usually in the HI person, and not in the 
I or II person. 

In poetry either pronoun may be dropped. 

That, which shouted: a coward (is) the cat, ran also 
away. Sindhi Read. B. p. 64. 

Those, which thou considerest as verses, are signs. 
Sh. Suh. IX, 6. 

That will be a companion to thee, whatever thou 
pray est to the Lord of the world. Mengho 8. 

^^i\XMi Ci^Ca. 0»^Lju/ jsSf ^^^X^ ^J^J^\.JM /c-'3"^ 

That is my native country, where my sweetheart 
(is). Maj. 86. 

May I not be forgotten by them, whom I do not 
drop out of (my) mind. Sh. Sam. II, 4. 

Those trees, which give no good fruit, are cut off 
(and) thrown into the fire. Matth. 7, 19. 

I, who is (= am) given up in the mountains, how 
shall she (= I) arrive at Kec? Sh. Desi, III, Epil. 



474 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART, 

2) The relative pronoun (and, as the case may be, 
the correlative) usually precedes the substantive, to which 
it refers, but the relative may also follow, if the sub- 
stantive has one or more attributes. The subject of a 
sentence is frequently first expressed by a demonstrative 
pronoun, and then taken up by the relative and corre- 
lative, to render it more prominent. 

"Which cat {= a cat that) eats her own young one, 
will that ever give up a mouse? Sindhi Read. B. p. 53. 



? .-"- 



Give up that traffic, in which there is no jewel. 
Sh. Surag. lY, 8. 

(5?^j5 ^?^v 7-^^ (5^ u^f^^* >^ 3; ^5 t5^''-M >^ 7^3^ 

The faqir, who was powerful (in magic), to him in- 
formation was brought. Amulu Man. p. 147. 

is^ .4^ >^f ^ ^J^ i?^ C5f ^J^'-" y^ 

A mad, strange thief, a foreigner, who reads (studies), 
Shakes laughing hands with thy daughter. Maj. 240, 241. 

^yA ^LIia*. L^ L-LgX*« ^^ (♦Ljj^ ^5 lo^ ^^ jj& 

Those, who were great men (and) warriors, went 
destitute out of the world. Mengho 4. 

4) The relative and correlative pronoun may in the 
same sentence be subject and object, so that the sentence 
is doubly correlative, the object, if a pronoun of the III 
person, being likewise expressed by the relative and cor- 
relative. 



I. THE AKALYTICAL PART. 475 

For whom they are longing, with them join them. 
Maj. 203. 

^l^ ^ ^yL J5 j.a. (j.r ^A-"^ Jj ^^ 

That kindness they bestow, which is bestowed on 
them. Sh. Surag. IV, 4. 

5) In the first member of a correlative sentence (or, 
as it may be, in the second) ^^ y^ is occasionally used 
instead of the simple relative j^, which is then taken 
up again by a following correlative. 

^^x^ LaA.55 ^^ ^^ .-gJoLj ^:^ ^tVf^ (J"^* 

Those friends, who are wanted, have gone on a 
journey. Sh. Sam. I, 24. 

v^Lj ^:^ ^si- ^'J ^^^<ij ItX-oj si^ljs ^.w 

O Almighty, will those ever come, of whom the 
discourse is? Maj. 457. 

6) With the correlative adverbs the correlative 
pronouns and adjectives may be joined in the same 
sentence. 

^^ J.AC&- ^55 J^ &J lXj*.^ y SlX-:>4 

When those, who said: he is alone (God), he has 

no partner, 
Kespect Muhammad, the intercessor, out of love 

with their hearts. 
Then (none) out of them was entangled in a place, 

where there is no landing. Sh. Kal. I, 3. 



476 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

u^^ c;;'4^ u^>i^ u;^7^* ^l 

Where so many hours are written in fate, 

There so many have come to pass. Sh. Ma?B. Y, 9. 

7) The correlative adjectives and adverbs (cf. §. 38, 2), 
when placed after each other, imply an indefinite 
sense. The same is the case, if a relative be joined with 
an interrogative. 

The cat, having eaten some (a number) of the mice 
with delight, went off. Sindhi Read. B. p. 64. 

The princess, having enticed him somehow, having 
gained (his) heart, drew him out (i. e. got the secret 
from him). Amulu Man. p. 147. 

§• 75. 
IV. The interrogative pronouns. 

1) IxT who? is applied to persons and L^ and ,stiyf 

what? to things only; these three pronouns are used ab- 
solutely and not joined adjectively to another noun^); 

in which case the interrogative adjectives j-^aT, }y^^ 

which? and jv-^S^ of what kind? are to be employed. 

1) y/S is occasionally joined adjectively to a noun in poetry, as: 

Which hero shall we send to the combat of the snake? Story 
of the snake v. 59. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 477 

The interrogative pronouns are not only used in 
direct interrogatory sentences but also in indirect in- 
terrogatory ones, when the governing sentence contains 
a negation; but if the governing sentence be positive, 
the relative s.^^ is preferred. The same rule applies to 
the interrogative adjectives and adverbs. 

I do not know exactly, who it is. Life of Abd-ul- 
Latif, p. 13. 

I also do not tell you, by what order I do this, 
Matth. 21, 26. 

I shall also tell you, by what order I do this. 
Matth. 21, 24. 

2) The interrogative pronouns (adjectives and ad- 
verbs) are frequently used, where a negative answer is 
expected. 

^MO iii/i3 ^^ CST^' y'^ "^ '^ U^^-:^^ ^^ (.:>.4«*ao 

By fate I have been put into prison; otherwise who 
would come into this fort? Sh. Um. Mar. I, 8. 

§• 76. 
y. The indefinite pronouns. 

1) ^f some one, any one, when standing by itself, 
is applied to animate beings and ^f to things only; but 

when j.r is used adjectively, it may be joined to any 
noun; similarly ^5" also may be put before nouns, when 

a part or quantity is to be expressed, cf. §. 61, 3, 



478 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

, .. I ^ .. I ^ ^ 

Nothing else will be of use to thee, except what thou 
hast sown thyself. Mengho 10. 

2) j.$" is now and then added to a personal pronoun 
(expressed or only implied in the inflexional termination 
of the verb) in an interrogative or negativ-e sentence, 
for the sake of emphasis, with nearly the same sense 
as ^. 

Wilt thou, having forsaken (me) go at all to the 
mountains? lover, I did not think thus. Sh. Desi, 
m, Epil. 

3) When ^f is repeated in the next sentence, it 
signifies : one — another. 

o^^rf^' ^>^ ^s^ P u^ c57^ \j^ LT^ ^>^ r 

One says: a demon has fallen into (his) body; another 
says: his understanding is upset. Maj. 40. 

§. 77r- 
The reflexive pronoun. 

1) The reflexive pronoun J^Lj (Sing, and Plur.) 'self, 
always refers to the subject of the sentence (expressed 
or only understood); somewhat intricate is the use of 

its Grenitive, the reflexive pronominal adjective j.^^ ^ji^.j 
'own'. When the subject of the sentence is a pronoun 
of the I and 11 person (expressed or only impHed in the 
verb), its application is clear enough; but when the 
subject is of the III person (or any noun), the question 
arises, whether the possessive pronouns 'his', 'her' etc. 
refer to the chief subject of the sentence (Lat. suus) , or to 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 479 

some other subject (Lat. ejus etc.); in the first case the 
reflexive pronoun must be employed, in the latter a 
demonstrative. 

^h^ U^ e;^ C5^4^ u^ 3^ f"^^ <^'^5 ^)^^ csf"*^ 

Having risen (and) greeted (and) having met with 
great respect (and) politeness they sat amongst themselves. 
Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 36. 

O pure friend, show thy face! Sh. S5r. I, 10. 



Having come with his (own) servants to the service 
of Shah Sahib, he was present. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 31. 

That wealthy one, marvelling at his (the other's) 
recognising her, asked him. Sindhi Read. B. p. 61. 

2) In addressing a person the reflexive pronominal 
adjective j^ ^j^^rt is now and then used (like the Hin- 
dustani \i u^l etc.), instead of the peculiar pronoun, that 
would be required, as: ^( JL/o s.:^ ^j^?, (^^ (j-V?jLl> 

master, this is your property, which under certain cir- 
cumstances could also be translated: master, this is our 
property, when the spaker includes himself, as: 

Send forth some mice of our country and land. Story 
of the mice and the cat, v. 35. 



480 L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

3) The reflexive pronominal adjective ^ ^j4^ ^^J 
also refer to the object (noun with postp., or Dat. and 
Ace.) immediately following. 

I am come to make quarrel the son with his father, 
the daughter with her mother. Matth. 10, 35. 

4) When the subject of a sentence is a noun with 
a possessive pronoun, the peculiar possessive pronoun 
(if such occur with a noun) must be used and not 

^ ^;4^jj because the use of ^ ^^^, would give quite 
a different sense. Similarly when the subject of a sen- 
tence is a personal pronoun and when in the next sen- 
tence, joined to the preceding by a conjunctive particle, 
a noun with a possessive pronoun occurs, the peculiar 
pronoun must be used for the reasons stated above. 



? .- r ^ 



u^r^- c5^ ^ ^"^ c5f ^J-^ >^ c^■^ >^ 

(If) there would be in my kingdom some hero of 
mine. Story of Shamsadu, v. 40. 

> •♦ 
I am a man under authority and under my hands 
are soldiers. Matth. 8, 9. 

5) The subject, to which ^s>^ ^^^^ refers, must oc- 
casionally be gathered from the context; but when thus 
used without a clear subject, to which it may be re- 
ferred, it generally implies the I person (Singular or 
Plural). 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 481 

HaviiiQ: removed far from our comitrv mav our lot 
be made auv where I Story of the cat and mice, v. 20. 

6) ^s. c>"i^ ^^ ^-^^*^ ^^^^^^ substantively, signifjiiig 

my, thy etc. property, friends or people. 

Take what is thine and oo. Matth. 20. 14. 



SECTION IL 

THE Y E E B, 

Oiapter Vl. 

§. 78. 

The Infinitive. 

1) The Infinitive as well of neuter as of active (cau- 
sative) verbs is treated in Sindhi as a regular substan- 
tive. The complement (^object), which is required by an 
active verb, is subordinated to the Infinitive either by 
the Genitive or by the Accusative in its uninflected form, 
or governed by the postposition ^^^5^ 



c5%^' u^ >^ yj^ J^)^^ ^ O^ 



The Hving (= life) of the disappointed one gets 
on with difficulty without the Jat. Sh. Abiri V, 9. 

LIT ^i ^,;U ^ ^U ^U5" u;-^;0 S^ 

The Mughals, having taken their swords, came to 
kill the Shah. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. 

Trumpp, Sindlii-Grammar. H ll 



482 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

To ascent the impaling stake, to see the (nuptial) 
bed, this is the business of the lovers. Sh. Kal. II, 8. 

^^b j^:^ j4^ .44sxi ^^4^ u^;r' csf^^-^ 

It is by no means proper to put that into the house. 
SindhT Eead. B. p. 65. 

' 2) The Infinitive is added as an expletive object to 

the verbs 0o<3 to give leave, ^4X4^ to let go or allow, 

'^^-^ to desire, and partly also to J^n^^JCI to be able. 

But when the verb, which subordinates an Infinitive, 
requires an object (Accus.), it puts the same in the Ac- 
cusative, according to the signification of the finite verb. 

C5^* (V-li* jj^J y^yi ^/i ^"^^^ J> J|J 

Tears don't let me write (lit. give no writing); 
dropping they fall upon the pen. Sh. Um. Mar. 11, 9. 

The Mughals did not allow the Shah Sahib to come 
(lit. gave him no coming). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. 

They do not allow a male bird to sit down. Amulu 
Man. p. 141. 

>^ }^^^-^ i^'^^ c^vfJ^^^ ^ ^^ c^^^ is-^ is^l 

Many prophets and pious people had wished to see 
this very (sight). Matth. 13, 17. 

3) The Infinitive may also be turned into an ad- 
jective by the accession of the Genitive case -sign j.^.. 
In this case the Infinitive itself is strictly treated as a 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 483 

substantive, as regards its government, and j.^. is nearly 
used in the same sense as j..^^ or jv,^,>, cf. §. 67, 11. 

But he was not of the eating of the crocodiles, 
i. e. he was not destined to be eaten by the crocodiles. 
Story of Eae Diacu p. 1. 

This word is mere joke and impossible. 



Chapter VII. 

§. 79. 
The Gerundive. 

1) The Sindhi derives from the Infinitive of active 
verbs a regular Grerundive or participle future passive 
(cf. §. 8, 12, b; §. 46), which agrees with its subject 
in gender and number, except the construction be ren- 
dered impersonal by the use of the postposition ^, 

cf. §. 94, 5. The agent is put in the Dative (like in 
Latin) or expressed by a pronominal suffix. 

/ <S^^ U>^* >- C5t^ }Y ^^? ^ S?f ^-^ ^^ 

If by thee some complaint is to be made, come and 
make it. Amulu Man. p. 150. 

Whatever thou hast to get from me, that is alms 
(i. e. given in alms). Matth. 15, 5. 

^i (5?f^ T'y^ C5^ iS"}^ 

1^0 w, whatever thou hast to say, say. Amulu Man. p. 143. 

Hh2 



484 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

2) But when the construction is rendered impersonal 

by the use of ^ or when a Dative occurs in a sen- 

^ 1 
tence, the agent must be expressed by the Instrumental, 
to avoid the double use of ^^. 

Thou shouldst have seized this horse. 

What is to be got by me as regards thee (i. e. from 
thee), give that to me. Matth. 18, 28. 



Chapter VIIL 

The Participles, 

§. 80. 
I. The participle present. 

1) The participle present agrees as a regular ad- 
jective with the subject of the finite verb (expressed or 
implied). 

Is it used, when an action is to be described as 
lasting or continuing, for which purpose it may be 
repeated. 

^^^ .;oLx^*^ ItXA^M^ l<X*.4-gy ^sr^ ^^ i^ r^^ (s^ 

Having made the tour of the whole city they came, 
wandering, wandering to the lanes of the king. Amulu 
Man. p. 140. 

Upon them (i. e. on their heads) are (large) baskets and 
(small) baskets; groaning they come. Sh. Um. Mar. YI, 12. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 485 

2) The participle present is very frequently used in 
the Locative Sing., terminating in e, or with the em- 
phatie i or hi, in ei and ehi^), to express an action coin- 
ciding with what the finite verb declares. 

As regards the subject of the present participle, 
Loc, it is either the same, as that of the finite verb, or 
it may refer to another noun in the sentence (G-enitive, 
Dative, Accusative etc., usually expressed by a prono- 
minal suffix), or it may not be expressed at all, to be 
gathered from the context. 

When the subject of the present participle Loc. differs 
from that of the finite verb, it is added in the For- 
mative; the same is the case, if an attribute be joined 
to the subject (expressed or only understood) of the 
present participle. But if the Locative of the present 
participle requires a complement (an object), it is con- 
structed according to the common rules. 

In coming and going he used to say these words. 
Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 47. 

U/-^ ^ (^5f jjL^ cK-^^ L-y|5^ ^s^^f -i^ 

Dying of hunger they ask not from any one alms. 
Sh. Ramak. VII, 7. 

Whilst searching about in the mountains some man 
met him. Maj. 122. 

**:>^ U;^-^-^-^* j^;-^ '^)^^ ist-^^-f^^ U^-^ 

Then whilst eating her mind became drunk (and) 
mad. Maj. 178. 



l) Occasionally ehi is shortened to ahi, as: ^^<XI^a« instead of 



486 L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

The wife and children of a gambler, (although) being 
in the house, do not consider as in the house. Sindhi 
Read. B. p. 52. 

^A^J y^'6 .J^ J^'6 ^^^ y^^ ^t)J-»Mj 

In seeing the friend all (their) pains are removed. 
Maj. 818. 

&Li^ ^^; ^^^;; (j^^ ^'^i-^ u;-^' >^ 

Turn thou back the camel; pass the night, whilst 
I am w^eeping. Sh. Mfim. Eano I, Epil. 

§• 81. 
11. The participle past. 

1) The past participle of neuter verbs agrees with 
its subject in gender, number and case; the form in 'alu' 
is used, when the participle passes more into an ad- 
jective. The past participle of active and causal verbs 
(implying always a passive sense) agrees likewise with 
its subject in gender, number and case, except the con- 
struction be rendered impersonal by the use of the post- 
position jL^ (cf §. 94, 5). 

2) The past participle of active (and partly also of 
neuter) verbs with a passive signification, is used also 
substantively, cf §. 62, 2, and may therefore be con- 
structed with a postposition. 

^ .. ••>[ ^ ^ 

The Qazi, having done the word (= what was said) 
of the scouts, became a tyrant. Maj. 296. 



L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 487 

After being broken it became beyond (= more) a 
tbousand billions. Sh. Surag. IV, 17. 

3) The past participle of neuter and active verbs 
is frequently used in the Locative Singular (cf. §. 80, 2); 
if the subject of the past participle do not differ from 
that of the finite verb, it is not expressed, but if it do 
differ, it is added in the Formative. But the subject 
of the past participle may also refer to a more distant 
object, or it may not be expressed at all, in which case 
the Locative is used absolutely. The impersonal con- 
struction of the past participle by means of the post- 
position ^^^ is also retained , though the participle be 

put in the Locative. 

The past participle in the Locative is used sub- 
stantively, but nouns, depending thereupon, are idio- 
matically only put in the Formative , and not subor- 
dinated by the inflected Genitive case-sign ^^. 

By lAzrail having come, Sasui was awakened whilst 
sleeping, i. e. in the state of being asleep. Sh. Abiri YIIT, 5. 

^A^j- j-ja^Av ^ ^j| (j.:^ £^| ^s^] ^1 

O God, may those come, by whose coming (my) 
heart becomes glad. Sh. Desi III, 5. 

CJp C5^ )^^-? ^"^ ^fH^ UT^ 

Whilst I stood upright, they went to the landing- 
places of the harbour. Sh. Sam. 11, 2. 

Whilst the physicians were seated (lit. in the state 
of the physicians being seated), the friend entering came 
to (my) door. Sh. Jam. Kal. II, 10. 



488 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

Those 7 who do not understand much, after one 
letter has been touched, Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 29. 

Since I have seen the Dothis , many days have passed 
to me (ht. In the being seen the DothTs). Grolden Al- 
phabet xxvm, 2. 

Sitting near whom the pain becomes intense. Sh. 
Jam. KaL YIII, 25. 

';L-i-^3f ;j.^t ^.^3 v:>4^ e>^^^ ^^L4^ 

Which being eaten coughing arises, vomiting comes 
on. Golden Alphab. XVIH, 10. 

§. 82. 
III. The past conjunctive participles. 

The past conjunctive participles (cf. §» 47) very greatly 
facilitate the conjunction of the different members of a 
compound sentence and are therefore very extensively 
in use. They are translated according to the tense of 
the finite verb. 

1) The past conjunctive participles commonly refer 
to the subject of the finite verb, and in a passive con- 
struction, to the agent (Instrumental); but when to the 

past conjunctive participle of ^j^ an attribute is added, 

it must remain in the Nominative, though the subject 
(agent) referred to be in the Instrumental. 

Having thrown (them) into the jar, having secured 
(them) take care (of them). Life of x\bd-ul-Latif, p. 11. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 489 

Thou wilt go to die, Majno, being dried up by 
thirst. Mai 407. 

The Dev Ahriman having taken me from the country 
carried me off. Ajaib v. 119. 

^^aa^Lass- i^ty° ^^^TT" [S^ is^y^ Lsi"^ ^"^ cj'?^"^' 

Then having heard the call, having become glad in 
(her) heart, she said. Maj. 702. 

2) The past conjunctive participles may refer also 
to the object (Dative, Accusative) in a sentence, and 
in a passive construction one past conj. participle may 
refer to the agent (Instrumental) and another to the 
subject. 

^y^) ^^^l Hi) ^'^ ^^')^ c5f o-f 

To them, who remember (their) friends, the night 
passes in weeping. Sh. Jam. Kal. I, 18. 

Having tarried they would possibly have been cured 
by the physicians having applied plaster. Sh. Jam. 
KaL n, 5. 

3) In an impersonal (neuter) or passive construction 
the past conjunctive participles may be used absolutely, 
without any reference to a subject, which must be gathered 
from the context. 

U^-^' ^^"^ is'^^ <J^ ^) (5^^^^ ^b 

The night was passed (by her) in the desert, having 
come to that very place. Maj. 745. 



490 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 



T ^^ - ? ^ 



Having collected the remnant of the grain, it is 
good (for me) to carry it to another place. Sindhi 
Eead. B. p. 56. 

iSff^' ^f ^l ^ 4^^ J-f^' 

Having sold him and his wife and his children and 
whatever he has, the debt shall be paid (scil. by you). 
MattL 18, 24. 

What shall be done to them, having made them 
hear the whole matter? Sh. Jam. Kal. V, 29. 

4) The past conj. participles are also now and then 
used in the sense of the Latin Ablative absolute, when 
the subject of the finite verb differs from that of the 
past conj. participle. But constructions of this kind are 
rather exceptions. 

-5 -f^^ 4^i^ ^;^ tsf^^ ^7^ ur^f (5?)^ 7^- iil 

After all cats had died in this very manner, two 
cats in the whole town were left alive. Sindhi Eead. 
Book p. 63. 

5) Some past conj. particix^les are used quite ad- 
verbially, as: ^^5, ^Ij^; ^yc, ^^\^yo ^again' (lit. having 
returned or caused to return) ; ^^^^ with the postposition 
^l^f from (lit. taking from); ^^^ isi^^ intentionally 
(lit. having known, understood), or ^if^ (^1^^ or ^L^ is^^^ 
j^if^ and ^b^ being alliterations. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 491 



Friend, do not go to a foreign country, his mother 
said again to him. Maj. 83. 

^ ^ <5p^ 5?^ is^ <J^ crf^'5 O^ i>^ J^ 

From that hour her daughter was made whole. 
Matth. 15, 28. 



Chapter IX. 
The tenses of the verb. 

§• 83. 
I. The Present. 

1) The Sindhi has two forms for the present tense^ 
one identical with the Potential, to which the inflexional 
increment j^", ^^^ etc. is added, the Present inde- 
finite, and the other being compounded with the present 
participle and the auxiliary verb ^llgiTetc, the Present 

definite. 

The present tense of the passive voice is formed in 
the same way as that of the active voice, but its use 
is very restricted, neuter verbs being substituted wherever 
possible. 

There is also a simple and compound Potential, 
as well of the active as of the passive voice, to express 
the idea of the present tense (cf. §. 90). 

2) The first form of the Present tense, the 
Present indefinite, expresses our common Present, 
i. e. an action begun and still continuing in the present. 

The- increment j.^' may optionally follow or precede 



492 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

the verb ^) , but when the verb commences a sentence , it 
is put after it (poetry excepted). In poetry s.^* is often 
separated from the verb by some other words, either 
preceding or following it. 

When the negative adverb J, 'not', accedes to the 

verb, J immediately precedes j.^j, and both the verb^); 
but in an interrogative sentence, or when a particular 
stress be laid on the verb, they may as well follow it. 
In poetry ^^ is very frequently omitted and the 
Present indefinite then coincides with the Potential, so 
that only the context can decide, whether the Present 
indefinite or Potential is intended. In prose also j^ 

is dropped, when the interrogative pronoun L.^ what? 
and the adverb ^li when, precede the verb. 

Instead 'of the increment ^ the past participle 
j.^j (from ^^S to fall) is also used, but with this dif- 
ference, that a more enduring action is thereby 
implied. 

Remembering (her) guardians she gives a thousand 
blows. Story of the cat and mice v. 11. 

The king, the Lord of the kingdom, executes his 
own orders. Ajaib v. 5. 

Hearing they do not hear nor do they understand. 
Matth. 13, 13. 



1) When an interrogative pronoun or adverb, as l^^ , j^^ ^^^"> 
occurs in a sentence, it generally attracts y^. 

2) But when in a sentence *J — -J neither — nor, occurs, the 
adverb -3 is put before that noun , on which the stress is laid. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 493 

For those rich inhabitants of the jungle I weep 
nights and days. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 11. 

When they see, one big black snake is seated (there). 
Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 16. 

3) When occurrences are related, as the narrator 
or person, he speaks of, saw them, the Present is fre- 
quently used, in order to transfer the hearer to the 
scene of action. The same is the case , when the thoughts 
are given, which somebody had at a time. 

When the Mughals saw the Shah Sahib, that he is 
(= was) sitting in the house. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. 

What does he see? that his children (and) his wife 
go night and day about in begging. Sindhi Kead. Book, 
p. 62. 

j> y^ ^^:?^ ^'\y^ y^ w^Lo .$\Jii (jLXxi u5^Lx) ^^^S 

Having there built a shrine of the Shah Sahib in 
that very place they sat down : ' because the Shah Sahib 
is here'. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 26. 

4) The Present is also now and then used for 
the Future, to signify thereby, that the action will 
be done forthwith. 



494 I. THE ANALYTICAL PAKT. 



Ur**'^ L^J ^^u;l ^ ^ly ^Li ^yS 



Take thou now rest; we see (i. e. shall see). Amulu 
Man. p. 149. 

5) The second form of the Present, the Present 
definite, denotes a lasting or habitual action. The 
auxiliary is occasionally dropped, especially in sentences 
of general import. 

Whoever is walking according to his will, that is 
my brother and sister and mother. Matth. 12, 40. 

.ij.5" itUr ^ ^^ U4^ ^yc> ^y^'f^ 

Why are the people giving me reproaches? Sh. 
MaiB. Y, 14. 

§. 84. 

II. The Imperfect. 

The Imperfect denotes a past action, which is in- 
complete in reference to some other past action. It 
implies therefore duration, habit or frequent oc- 
currence. 

I " ' •• " ' 

Whenever the Shah Sahib was going to that very 
village, the Mughals were quarrelling with him. Life of 
Abd-ul-Latif p. 15. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 495 

§. 85. 

m. The A o r i s t. 

I. The simple Aorist. 

The Aorist imphes indefinitely, that an action took 
place in past time. It is therefore commonly used in 
narrations, where past events are reported irrespectively 
of their duration. We may therefore translate the Sindhi 
Aorist either by the Imperfect or Perfect. 

The Aorist of neuter verbs has an active meaning; 
some neuter verbs though (implying a passive sense) 
may also be constructed with the agent in the In- 
strumental. 

Active verbs are constructed passively in the 
Aorist (Perfect and Pluperfect), the agent (subject) being- 
put in the Instrumental and the past participle agreeing 
with the subject (properly the object) in gender, number 
and case (cf. §. 92, 2), or being constructed impersonally 
by the use of the postposition ^ (cf. §. 94, 5). It is 

understood, that the Aorist (Perfect and Pluperfect) of 
the passive voice is also used personally, agreeing with 
its subject (expressed or implied in the inflexional ter- 
minations) in gender and number. 

I was asleep, those went off, they drove away the 
young camels. Sh. Hus. YI, Epil. 

[Sy^^ Qw^j^ (j^^Xa^ ^y^\ ^'y^y^^ 

Perhaps I have been forgotten by the dear Martis. 
Sh. Um. Mar. V, 13. 

y^^ C57^ -^7^ >^ ^^; ^T^' '^^' 

The bard sang the first night at the side of the 
castle. Sh. Sor. II, 1. 



496 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

^;3^ ^^^ 7^;^ <5?; ^b^ c)¥; 

Who, having remained the night in the deserts, 
looked out for the mountains. Sh. Khahori I, 3. 

isl^ ^^ C5-^^ d-^' L^;>^ S^l^ C5^ ^^ 

Those, who were made tawny by the Kak (river), 
the redness does not leave. Sh. Mum. Rano IE, 4. 

2) The compound or habitual Aorist. 

The compound Aorist with the indeclinable increment 
^ denotes in the first instance, that an action was 

done repeatedly in past time or for any length of time; 
it is therefore chiefly used, when an occupation, habit 
or manner is to be described. In the second instance 
it implies, that an action had been commenced in past 
time and was still going on at the time mentioned, 
and in this respect it nearly coincides with the Im- 
perfect, with the only difference, that generally a simple 
Aorist corresponds to it. 

The increment ^'j is usually put before the verb, 

but is may also follow it; it may be also separated from 
the verb by some intervening words, in the same way 
as j^'. Instead of ^^^ ^^aj (the Locative of ^^ with 

emphatic i, instead of ^^aaj piei), is also used, which 
more strictly points out commencement and continuation. 

^ .. I .. - ..I - I •• I •• I " 

Where the night used to befall him, there he used 
to sleep. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 21. 

On account of her food she used to make lakhs of 
jumps. Story of the cat and mice v. 13. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 497 

The pebbles of Karbala his mother was gathering, 
5 All was wiping him away from the wounds the 
drops of blood. Sh. Ked. Y, 2. 

The drums in the cells went on sounding by them- 
selves as they pleased, and from them this tune was 
coming. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 36. 

'^ y*i cr^* ^^ '^r csf^ cH-4 '^'^^ -^^ c^?'^ 

(5^3""* ^^^-^ C5^^"^ -^Lj ^^^ (5^^^^' (^^ v«^^Lo ^Lw 

When Shah Jamal was (as yet) going to his village, 
the Shah Sahib died on the second day. Then when 
Shah Jamal heard the message of the removal of the 
Shah Sahib, he was coming again behind (the mes- 
senger). Ibid. p. 6. 

§• 86. 
lY. The Perfect. 

1) The Perfect denotes an action, that is completed 
and finished in the past, so that it extends to the 
Present. 

I do not live at all, nor am I at all dead. Sh. 
Hus. IX, 16. 

Trumpp, Sindhl-G-rammaj!. J| 



498 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

u'^^ C5?^^ ch^lS c^^i ^ ^;3^ ^ ^4^'l 

Do not bring near the camels, I have been tor- 
mented by the camels. Sh. Desi I, 14. 

2) The Perfect is occasionally used to represent an 
action as done already, whereas it is intended or ex- 
pected, that it will be done forthwith. 

^f j.X^ <y^b5 ^l^ ^ ^'6 ,5^. 

The fairy saw, that he is (has been) now done for, 
Amulu Man. p. 151. 

§. 87. 

IV. The Pluperfect. 

1) The Pluperfect denotes remote past action, which 
has taken place previous to some other past event men- 
tioned or understood. But in this connexion its use is 
not strict (as in Latin), the Aorist commonly being em- 
ployed, where we would expect a Pluperfect. 

^ isf^^ U^ 7-^5^ U-f*^^ "^^ isf ^ U^^;^ S^^ 

In some town there had fallen in a dearth of grass; 
Those people drove off their cattle and went away 

at (with) some opportunity. Story of the cat 

and mice, v. 5. 6. 

^7^ isT ^-^^ 5-^* ^ i^^ ^7v i^ i^^:?^ >^' 

As the fairy had told, so she threw that very nose- 
ring into the jar of the slave-girl. Amulu Man. p. 150. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 499 

(s?^ e5 ^>^ Llfj^^ ^si^'^ ^ ^^5^ 

Had you seen (when you were there) some one at the 
side of (her) sweetheart, o DothTs? Sh. Hus. VI, Epil. 2. 

2) The Pluperfect is frequently used in Sindhi, where 
we would use an Imperfect or Perfect. When an action 
is represented, from the point of the speaker, as com- 
pletely past some time hence, so that its results were 
already clear at the time mentioned, or when it is 
implied, that since an action has taken place, something 
else has happened, that could be said about it, the Plu- 
perfect is used and not the Aorist nor the Perfect. The 
Sindhi idiom is much more accurate in discerning the 
different shades of meaning, than the English, and the 
correct use of this tense requires therefore a careful 
attention. 

0O Laj ^ 3-6-^^ 4^5 V^^ ^l^ JU>^ .iS&Lw --^^3 i^'y^ 

One day Shah Jamal sat with the Shah Sahib, and 
also many other faqirs were sitting (i. e. had seated them- 
selves before). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 5. 

jdL& (X«^ ^^ VjHy? -^* fstH -^<Xw ^^45^ w^Lo r*^cXi^ 

.^Si 30^ ^y ^^f ^>^;3 ^ v,j;^Uo 

Maxdtim Sahib received the intelligence, that Mia 
Nur Muhammad had gone (but was no longer there) to 
have an interview with the Shah Sahib, Life of Abd- 
ul-Latif, p. 29. 



Ii2 



500 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

§. 88. 
Y. The Future and Future Past. 

1) The Sindhi has two forms for the Future, the 
simple or indefinite Future and the Future definite. 

The first form corresponds to our common Future 
and denotes a future action in general, the latter form 
implies, that the future action will last or endure for 
some time. 

;^^ 4^k^ (j'-^ ^^ (j^ U^:;S>^;L^ -P^ 

I shall graze their camels , having seized the bridle 
of the camels. Sh. Hus. IX, Epil. 



i ^ s> ^ 



At that very time an hundred fairies will be dancing 
near the Dev Sufed. Amulu Man. p. 144. 

2) The simple or indefinite Future is used also to 
denote possibility, inclination or doubt. 

g^tUT ^Lr ^y^ ^y^ ^s^ >j* ^L.ccoLi 

O king, I will speak one word to thee. Amulu 
Man. p. 143. 

boy, wilt thou give us a ram? Life of Abd-ul-. 
Latif, p. 17. 

3) The Future indefinite is also used for the Im- 
perative, when an order is not strictly given, but when 
it is expected, that it will be done spontaneously; it may 
therefore alternate with the Imperative. 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 501 

Honour thy father and thy mother, and love thy 
neighbour as thyself. Matth. 19, 19. 

4) The past Future is seldom to be met with in 
the sense of a strict past future action, which should 
have taken place, before another action will be possible, 
but it generally implies uncertainty, doubt or possi- 
bility in reference to a past action, as: jjo^ ^} lsh, 

he may have come. Instead of the past Future the 
Aorist is commonly used in Sindhi, especially in con- 
ditional sentences; see §. 98, 6. 



Chapter X. 
The Moods. 

§. 89. 
I. The Indicative. 

The Indicative represents an action or thought as 
real, and is therefore used, not only when matters of 
fact are related, but also when suppositions (in con- 
ditional sentences) are considered as really taking place 
(cf §. 98 &, 3). The Sindhi uses consequently the In- 
dicative in such sentences, in which the speaker makes 
a subjective assertion, which he considers as true and 
real, whereas in the English idiom the S'ubjunctive would 
be used in such cases. 

q^-| j.^^ ^ c>^;>f c^^ 7^ cp" -^^;^ u^ ^^^ 

It would be better for him, that he were drowned 
in the depth of the sea. Matth. 18, 6. 



502 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

§. 90. 
n. The Potential. 

The Potential is, as stated already, the old Present 
and expresses therefore only present time; but by means 
of the present and past participle and the Potential of 

the auxiliary verb J^y^, a Potential of the Present de- 
finite and Perfect may be formed; these compound forms 
however are of very rare occurrence. 

1) The Potential, in its widest sense, denotes in- 
definiteness, possibility, uncertainty or doubt. 

Then, think I, I eat together with thee bread. Amulu 
Man. p. 146. 

Companions, how shall I act with (= towards) them? 
Sh. Abiri Vm, Epil. 

Wilt thou not pull me out this wood? Amulu 
Man. p. 148. 

••I •• I * • 

He delivered him into the hand of the tormentors, 
as long as he shall not repay all, what is due unto me. 
Matth. 18, 34. 

2) The Potential serves also to express a usual or 
habitual action. 

Drinking the water it makes (it, i. e. the river) 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 503 

bare ground, it dries up the whole world. Nanga Jo 
Quisso, V. 40. 

A kingdom I do not compare with (my) needle, o 
companions! Sh. Um. Mar. YI, 18. 

That one shall go with me, who does not make 
(^= consider) her life sweet. Sh. Abiri VI, 2. 

3) The Potential is frequently used in the sense of 
an Optative or polite Imperative, especially for the 
I. and in. person Singular and Plural. 

O friend, may the lovers obtain (their) sweethearts 
as guides! Maj. 817. 

May there be blessing to all! that our business (and) 
affair has succeeded. Story of the cat and mice v. 52. 

O God, mayst thou bring camelmen, who take off 
messages of love. Sh. Um. Mar. 11, 9. 

Quickly, with speed, they shall bring this infor- 
mation and intelligence. Story of the cat and mice v. 38. 

4) The Potential is used with the Interjections ^U, 
JLi. would that, with the conjunctions ^^), not (prohi- 



1) With -J the Potential may also be used, if the injunction ba 
more strict. 



504 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

bitive), ^LSi, O*-^? j*^ niay it not be, that, lest; J 
that, ^, ^L:^, (J-*.:?*? that, so that, in order that; (^vjJ 
although; ^^, ^Xa^^, ^J^JXv=> if (cf. §. 98 &, 1); and with 

the adverbs tVl^i, possibly, u^^s^, perhaps etc., if the 
sentence be indefinite. 

O physican, do not give a powder! o God, may I not 
become well! Sh. Jam. Kal. IT, 13. 

(J^?^'^ ^J.A£a.| J JL^ nL.^JXa/0 CS^i"^ 

Would to God, that thou, o beggar, wouldst not 
come any more. Sh. Sor. 11, 9. 

^^^ ^-yi d>-^ L^iV^ ^r^ eH^^. -J vii>D 

"I * * ' I * 

Cut off, that thou mayst be approved, lest loss befall 
thee. Sh. Kal. H, 17. 

Thus, o camel, lift up (thy pace), that I may 
meet there (the friend) in the coming night. Sh. 
Khamb. H, 15. 

Make some such jump, that ye fall upon that 
garment. Amulu Man. p. 150. 

Having given (thy) soul to the omnipotent, thou 
mayst possibly be put into the track of (thy) friend. Sh. 
Surag. Ill, EpiL 



I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 505 

§• 91. 
m. The Imperative. 

1) The Imperative is restricted to the II. person 
Singular and Plural; for the other persons the Potential 
must be used. 

The Imperative has two forms, the Imperative 
strictly speaking and the Precative (cf §. 44). The 
Imperative expresses a command, whereas the Pre- 
cative implies an exhortation, request or haste. 

When a negation accedes to the Imperative, .3 is 

used to express a strict negation, whereas ^ is used 

in a prohibitive sense. With the Precative Jxi is 

commonly joined, but j may also be employed, if the 
injunction be more strict. 

yf .•> jXll ^y) J.AS. C>-^4 

The lions said: be thou not anxious. Amulu 
Man. p. 151. 

^j^^.^X/^ .X) ..g^^ ^^X^ ;J"|^ ^l^ }yo^^ 

O Stimard, do not throw and tighten chains upon 
the chaste one! Sh. Um. Mar. HI, 9. 

Come near, good friend, do not apply a funeral 
pyre to the afflicted one! Sh. Abiri X, 5. 



7, 6. 



What is pure do not give to the dogs. Matth. 



506 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 

2) When two Imperatives are joined together by 

the conjunction .3 or jjb, the first Imperative is hy- 
pothetical. 

Eeturn quickly, o dear friend, if you mean to go, 
then return. MaJ. 439. 



n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 507 



11. THE SYNTHETICAL PAET. 

CONSTEUCTION OF THE SENTENCE AND CON- 
JUNCTION OE SENTENCES. 

SECTION m. 

THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 

Chapter XL 
Subject and Predicate. 

§. 61. 

In every sentence there must be a subject and 
a predicate; subject is called that person or thing, 
of which something is said and predicate that which 
is said about it. 

1) The subject may be expressed either by a sub- 
stantive or adjective or pronoun or numeraL It 
is not expressed, if it be a personal pronoun and its 
predicate a verb, except a stress be laid upon it, as: 

^ jjLILo I see, but ^LIS ^ ,j^-iT I see (not you). 

The subject must always be in the Nominative. 

2) The Predicate may be expressed either by a 
verb, or adjective (participle), or substantive, or 

numeral with the auxiliary verbs ^j^s^ to be and J^lgo 

to become, to be. 

The predicate may be joined to the subject in a 
threefold manner: 



) by way of asssertion, as: ^l ^3 Sm the 
girl weeps. 



508 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

b) by way of interrogation, as: jjj l^ who 

is come? 

c) by way of command (or desire), as: ^^^ go (thou). 

3) The subject and predicate, if they be substan- 
tives or pronouns, may be nearer defined by an attri- 
bute. The attribute is commonly an adjective, but it 
may also be a substantive in the Genitive (with or 
without an adjective, pronoun etc.), on which another 
noun in the Genitive may depend again, as: 

a great man came j.j| ^y^'i^ 3^5 
or: this is a great man ^| ^jysa'jl/) jo^ ^ 

the Lord of the kingdom died ^^ ^^ ^5^^^ >^ ^-^-^ 

the son of the Lord of the kingdom died. 
(^yo "§-y*' ^^^.^ ^^ tXA/o Vt*^ 

AH the people of the kingdom (of) Maghrib will 
go to die. Nanga Jo Qisso, v. 51. 

4) The subject and predicate, if they be proper 
names, substantives or pronouns, may also be nearer de- 
fined by a noun in apposition, as: 

^T >^t> oo^fj ;^jj^ the country (of) China is far off; 
^5^T ^^Iy^ 'y^ (5? this is the city (of) Kara6i. 



II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 509 

Chapter XII. 

Concord of the subject and predicate. 

§. 93. 

1) If the predicate be a verb, it must agree with 
its subject in person, gender and number. This rule 
is strictly adhered to in Sindhi, even in such cases, 
where the subject in the Singular implies plurality, 
cf. §. 63, L 2. A subject in the Singular however may 
be constructed with the Plural of the predicate, when 
spoken of politely or honorifically , cf §. 63, 3. 

I do not reject the word of mother and father. Amul. 
Man. p. 142. 

iA")^ tX^' ^^f :j Z ^d L^f 

Standing the strangers ask: where is Muhammad, 
the intercessor? ISFanga jo Qisso, p. 15. 

2) If the predicate be an adjective, participle, pronoun 
or substantive, from which a feminine may be derived 
(cf. §. 14), it must agree with its subject in gender, 
number and case. (In the same way every attribute 
must agree with its substantive in gender, number 
and case, whenever possible.) 

What is thy pleasure? Amulu Man. p. 140. 

C5f^ C5f^^ ^>^? U>^ 

From above descended a slave ^ girl. Ibid. p. 140. 

By all the companions they were seen, those maimed 
young men. JSfanga jo Qisso, v. 17. 



510 11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

LT^ \j^ c5^5 ^) ij^-f'*'^ istP cs?^'""**' u;^ ^ ^ 

Some cat was tending her young ones with some 
great love (and) pleasure. Story of the cat and mice v. 8. 



Chapter XIII. 

Enlargement of the sentence by a near and remote 

object. 

§. 94. 

1) The verb, which refers to the subject as its 
predicate, has a double form; it is either of the active 
voice, if the subject be active, or of the passive voice, 
if the subject be passive. 

The active voice of a verb has a treble signifi- 
cation; it is either neuter (intransitive), or active 
(transitive), or causal. The verb is called neuter, if 

the action be restricted to the subject, as: ^^ ^^ js^ 

/♦ i 
he goes; active, if the verb necessarily requires a (near) 

object or Accusative, as: J^^ ^-^ ^^^^ ^J•^ lie seizes 
him; and causal, if it requires one or two Accusatives. 

2) N" enter verbs commonly subordinate only a 
remote object or Dative, as: ^^ j..^^ J ^-^ (j^** i^ 

does not please me; but some neuter verbs may also 
subordinate a near object (Accus.), as: 

He went that way. Ajaib v. 44. 

3) Active verbs subordinate a near object (Accus.), 
and, as the case may be, a remote one (Dative), as: 

^j ^lx> ^^ ^1 give him bread. Active verbs may 



II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 511 

also subordinate a double Accusative, one implying the 
near object and the other its attribute. In this case 
the first object is generally defined by the postposition 
f^^ by means of which the construction is rendered 

impersonal and the concord between the object and 
its attribute dissolved, so that the attribute remains 
in the uninflected form of the Singular, though the 
object, to which it refers, may be a Plural. But both 
may also remain in the uninflected state (Singular or 
Plural). Some verbs govern a double Accusative, one 

of a person, and one of a thing, as ^^)4^. ^^ ^^^ some- 
body a thing, though it may also be constructed with 

the postposition j^Li^ to ask from a person, or with ^^. 
Make the lepers clean. Matth. 10, 3. 

As long, as I live, I shall not make any other (my) 
husband. Sh. Um. Mar. VH, 6. 

Keep the fasts of Eamazan, give (thy) wealth as 
alms. Golden Alphabet 4, 7. 

4) Causals, derived from neuter verbs, subordi- 
nate a near, and as the case may be, a remote object 
(§. 69, 6); and causals, derived from active verbs, may 
subordinate two near objects (a double Accusative), the 

first generally being defined by the postposition ,^4^ 

St I 

and the second remaining in the uninflected state (§. 69, 5). 

Having made drink the travellers a bowl try (it). 
Sh. Jam. Kal. lY, 7. 



512 11. TPIE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

5) Eegular passive verbs can only be derived from 
active or causal verbs; for the passive form, wliich 
neuter verbs occasionally assume, does not essentially 
alter their signification. 

In a passive sentence the near object (Accus.) is 
made the subject, and the subject of the active sen- 
tence is turned into the InstrumentaP), the remote 
object (Dative) keeping its place, as usual. But with 
the passive Present, Imperfect and Future the In- 
strumental is not used, the agent being expressed by 

means of the postposition jjL^^ if it cannot be possibly 
avoided. 

Of the passive voice only the past tenses (past par- 
ticiple passive) are in common use, the other tenses 
being expressed, wherever possible, by a neuter verb. 

The past participle (passive) agrees either with its 
subject in gender, number and case (§. 93, 2), or the 
construction may be rendered impersonal, the past par- 
ticiple containing at the same time subject and pre- 
dicate, in which case the (proper) subject of the passive 
sentence must be subordinated as a remote object 
by means of the postposition ^fj 'as regards', 'in re- 
ference to'. 

This impersonal construction must always take 
place in the passive, when an active verb governs a 
double Accusative, one implying the near object and 
the other its attribute. The near object must in this 
case be subordinated by the postposition ^^^5^, whereas 

the other object, as the predicate, remains in the un- 
inflected form of the Singular, referring to the (neuter) 
past participle. 



1) In a longer sentence, when the agent is separated by a series 
pf words from the verb , the agent is frequently repeated for the sake 
pf perspicuity, by adding a pronominal suffix , corresponding to the 
figent, to the verb. 



II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 513 

But wlien a causal verb governs two near objects, 
the first (implying a person) must be subordinated as 
remote object by tlie postposition (^^, whereas the 

St 1 

second is made the subject, with which the past par- 
ticiple agrees in gender and number. 

Thus also the son of man shall be afflicted by them. 
Matth. 17, 12. 

Death was agreed to by those, who saw the af- 
flicted one (Ht. by whom it was seen as regards the af- 
flicted one). Sh. MaiB. Vn, 16. 

By what reason (and) disorder have you been made 
ill? (ht. by what reason and disorder has it been made 
ill as regards you.) x^anga jo Quisso, v. 24. 

The king, having come, related tliis whole matter 
to the Yazir Saifal. Amulu Man. p. 142. 



Chapter XIY. 

Enlargement of the sentence by a nearer definition of 
the verb as predicate. 

§. 95. 

The simple sentence may be enlarged to a consi- 
derable extent by a nearer definition of the verb as 
predicate. 

Trumpp, Sindhi-G-rammar. Kk 



514 n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

1) The verb may be nearer defined by one or more 
cases, on which again another case may depend, viz.: 
the Instrumental (agent etc.), the Accusative (of time etc.), 
the Ablative and the Locative, and by nouns with post- 
positions generally. 

At some time one man sat on the bank of the 
river with his wealth (of buffaloes). Sindhi Reading 
Book p. 59. 

That one began to go to school one year later than 
(from) his elder brother. Ibid. p. 50. 

2) The verb may be nearer defined by adverbs ge- 
nerally, especially by adverbs of time, place and 
manner, and by postpositions with pronouns. 

t5^ viJ.^ K ^L5 ^ ^yA 

Give me now some advise. Amulu Man. p. 147. 

Thus they talked amongst each other four goodly 
months. Maj. 235. 

This also is with me. Amulu Man. p. 147. 



II. THE SNYTHETICAL PART. 515 

Chapter XV. 
Omission of the verb as predicate. 

§. 96. 

1) The auxiliary verb ^II^T etc., forming the pre- 
dicate with or without an adjective etc., is occasionally 
omitted, especially in poetry and in short proverbial 
sentences. 

Let me hear that matter, which (is) in thy heart. 
Maj. 45. 

y -^ isf^ >^ cJ-f^-^' u^f"^ -^yi^ r^^^ 

There (is) a deep well there; no bottom of that is 
found. Nanga jo Qisso, v. 38. 

"Where (is) the cowardly cat? where (is) the cowardly 
cat? Sindhi Eead. B. p. 62. 

2) In sentences, which contain an imprecation or 
curse, the verb as predicate is generally omitted. In 

such like sentences the Potential of ^^S, to fall, should 
be supplied, which occasionally is met with. 

May the courtyard (fall) into the well, the com- 
panions into the forest, the sisters-in-law into disease! 
Sh. Suh. rX, Epil. 1. 

(May fall) into the well those days of life, which 
are apart from the friend! Sh. Desi VII, Epil. 



Kk2 



516 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

SECTION IV. 
THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 

Two or more sentences may be so joined together, 
that a compound sentence arises. This is done either 
by way of coordination or subordination. 

Chapter XVL 
I. Coordination of sentences. 

§. 97. 

1) Two or more sentences may be so joined, that 
each one remains independant of the other. This is 
done without or by the copulative, adversative, 
disjunctive and conclusive particles (cf. §. 59) and 

by the negative adverb .j — j neither — nor. 



^ ^? ^ f 



The lover was joined to her by pain, the sweetheart 
was not joined to her by pleasure (= by dint of). Sh. 
Abiri YII, 13. 

jli C5?}^ c^^?^ ^ i^^^ --f^ ^^ 'jH^ 

Fasten the horses below and go ye up. Amulu 
Man. p. 149. 

Either they bring them across, says Latif, or they 
make a cry from that very spot. Sh. Suh. YIII, 2. 

I know it, but the Shah Sahib has forbidden (me) 
to tell it. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 44. 



n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 517 

2) Sentences are also coordinated by joining to- 
gether a disjunctive question. In tlie first member the 
interrogation is generally not expressed hv a particle, 
but only by the voice of the speaker; in the second (or 
third) the interrogation is j)ointed out by the particle 
^ ki or y ke. 

ur^$ ci^fj ^ ^ y ^j^\ ^^^ >w 

Is it thou or shall we look to the way of another? 
Matth. 11, 3, 



Chapter JNJl. 

Contraction of coordinate sentences into one; 

concord of two and more subjects and 

predicates. 

§• 98. 

1) When two or more sentences have either the 
same subject or the same predicate or the same 
object or any other common member of speech, they 
are contracted into one sentence, with or without a 
conjunctive particle. 

j^A-o ^-^ (s^*^ i^j'^.yt^ o^j^L-ww j^w^Lw 

Lord, may (our) dear friends (and) lovers meet 
(us) again! Xanga jo Qiss5 v. 81. 

u^! u^^ o^'^ ^7^ ^r^ -^ c^? 

1 am not a jinn, demon, fairy, I am a man. 
Maj. 639. 

Which then is greater, the sacrifice or the altar? 
Matth. 23, 19. 



518 n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

(c^ ^T^AAAA-Sk y^jQ ^Xmj.^ («^^. j'-^'aj Li&l \^y Y?, 

But tliis discourse fell into tlie ear of Mir Hasan 
(and) Husain. Nanga jo Qisso v. 75. 

2) When there are two or more subjects in a sen- 
tence, denoting animate beings, the verb or adjective 

(Avith the auxiliary verbs ^t5> and ^2^'J) as predicate 

is put in the Plural; if the subjects have the same 
gender, the predicate agrees with them, being put in 
the Plural, but if they be of various gender, the mas- 
culine has the precedence. 

When two or more subjects imply things (or ideas), 
the predicate is either put in the Singular, agreeing 
commonly with the last subject, or in the Plural. If 
they be of various gender, the Plural of the mas- 
culine or feminine is employed, according as one or 
the other subject is considered more important. 

The same rule holds good, when an attribute 
(adjective etc.) is referring to nouns of diiferent gender. 

(JJJ«^JI Lv,£a^w*w {^^^^ ^ y^ 

A male and female was created by him. Sindhi 
Eead. Book, p. 15. 

^j«^| 14^x5 yi[^ ^r^L^j ^ sLx) 

Thy mother and thy brothers stand outside. Matth. 
12, 47. 

In this pond there will be water and fish. Life of 
Abd-ul-Latif, p. 27. 

But for an able army there is no delay (nor) pause. 
Nanga jo Quisso, v. 154. 



11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 519 

When I saw from afar the places, houses, cells. 
Ajaib, V. 72. 

(^^ I^Lw Lv-^' J^Laa/ yM U1a5^ l:s.» (i>^5 L^**"^ UjH*"^ 

By the lightenings dresses of rain (i. e. clouds) have 
been made; reeds and herbs have become green; oh! 
Sh. Sar. lY, Epil. 

By whom eyes (and) face have been turned towards 
the buffalo-keeper. Sh. Suh. Y, 9. 

^' CJ ^1 Li pli ^LfJ txf u;44^. 

The farms and ferries of the world (people) are 
upon that water. JSTanga jo Qisso, v. 36. 

3) When two or more subjects of different persons 
occur in a sentence, the first person precedes the second 
(or third), and the second the third, the verb being 
put in the Plural. 

We and the Pharisees keep many fasts. Matth. 9, 14. 



Chapter XVIII. 
II. Subordination of sentences. 

§. 99. 

Two or more sentences may be so joined together, 
that one is not independent of the other, but is only 
making up for the deficiency of the other. A sentence 
thus depending on another, is called a subordinate 



520 11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

sentence, and the otlier, that is completed thereby, is 
called the main sentence. 

A subordinate sentence may have another sentence 
coordinated either with or without conjunctive particles; 
or it may again subordinate another sentence. 

A subordinate sentence may be linked to the main 
sentence either by subjunctive particles, or by re- 
lative pronouns and adverbs or by interrogative 
pronouns and adverbs. 

1) Subordination of a sentence by subjunctive 

particles. 

§. 100. 

Particles, by which a sentence is subordinated to 
the main sentence are the concessive, the conse- 
cutive, the causal, the final and the conditional, 
cf §. 59. 

a) "With the three first particles the Indicative 
is used, if the assertion be positive, and the Potential, 
if the assertion be more vague or uncertain; with final 
particles the Potential is always used. 

-- --^ - -^ ^ ^ I' 

Though they be killed by the knife, they do not 
at all divulge any thing. Sh. Kal. U, 8. 

It threw the head of dejection so much on the 
ground, that its brain was confused. Sindhi Eeading 
Book p. 58. 

God, take away the covers, that we may know 
the truth. Maj. 205. 



II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 521 

h) In conditional sentences the subordinate sen- 
tence generaHy precedes the main sentence, but the 
conditional part of the sentence may also follow that, 
which is conditioned thereby. 

The subordinate sentence is introduced by the par- 
ticles ^a^, y^=^ if, and j^.^J.X'.a^ if (at any time), and 

the main sentence by the concessive particle J, ^Lj*, then, 
which is generally not translated. 

1) If the condition and that, which is conditioned 
thereby, be indefinite, possible, doubtful or un- 
certain, the Potential is used in both members of 
the sentence; in the main sentence the Imperative may 
also be employed. 

Be not seated here; if thou go, thou mayst obtain 
(thy) sweetheart. Sh. Abiri YII, 6. 

Then thou mayst enjoy it at all, if thou perform 
this very advise. Sh. Abiri YII, 14. 

}^,/ ^-f-^L? ^"^^ iljf i ^^i l^^ ^ J' 

If they may have been seen by you, then, for Grod's 
sake, speak! Sh. Hus. X, 22. 

2) If the condition be uncertain, possible or 
only expected, but if that, which is conditioned 
thereby, be represented as certain and positive, the 
Potential is used in the subordinate, and the Indi- 
cative (commonly the Future) in the main sentence. 

mother, o mother, I live, o God, if my dear 
friends remember me! Sh. Suh. VII, Epil. 2. 



522 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

^-y^l .j* j=^3 (5jj^:^ j^xj ^^^^L^t c^^ jj^ ^^aX^ 

If thou construct us here a mosque, then we shall 
let thee daily make the pilgrimage of the Kaiaba of 
God. Life of Abd-ul-Latif , p. 4. 

3) If the condition and that, which is conditioned 
thereby, be taken as certain and positive, the In- 
dicative is used in both members of the sentence. 

If thou castest us out, allow us to go into the herd 
of »wine. Matth. 8, 31. 

If thou shalt divulge it, thou wilt become a leper. 
Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 44. 

4) If the condition as well as that, which is con- 
ditioned thereby, is represented as such, that could 
have happened under certain circumstances, but which 
has not happened, because the condition was not ful- 
filled , the Imperfect , Aorist or Pluperfect is used 
in the subordinate, and the Aorist in the main sen- 
tence, or, under certain circumstances, the Pluperfect 
(cf. §. 87, 2). 



^ - ^ ' 03i J 



1^ 



C5- 



If he had not kept on drinking liquor, he would 
not have died. 



II. THE SYNTHETICAL PAKT. 523 

CiA^X^w z^-**^' tXJe.^ ,e:2a. s^^\j^S cXA-^a) ij*^\ 

I have ^yritten a letter to thee; but if I were a bird 
I would likely have come before the letter, having 

flown quickly. 
If the pen would be aware of the heart, it would 

wee|3 blood out of affection. Sh. Barvo Sindhi, 

Chot. 6. 

If those (cries) had been heard by (my) sweetheart, 
he would likely not have gone off. Sh. Hus. m, 2. 

1 

If the master of the house had known, (that) the 
thief will come at a certain watch (of the night), he 
would hkely have remained on his guard. Matth. 24, 43. 

If those (works) had been done at Sodom, it would 
have likely remained until this day. Matth. 11, 23. 

Instead of the Aorist or Pluperfect the Poten- 
tial (of the Present) may be used (but very rarely) 
in both members of a conditional sentence, followed by 

the particle Li; but more commonly Li is added to a 
past tense, for the sake of emphasis. 

Li ^ J ^ ^^ J Li J.i J yi ^ 

If she had not gone, she would not have obtained 
(her) friend. 



524 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

If you had ever understood this word, you would 
not have condemned the guiltless. Matth. 12, 7. 

5) If the condition must have been fulfilled in 
past future time (Futurum exactum), before that, which 
is conditioned thereby, shall happen, the Aorist is 
used in the subordinate, and the Future in the main 
sentence. 

JL^« ^\ jjL^ ^j^ci-L^ «jsl^ v^^L^ [**tXi^ ^^txCy^ 

** I •• ' " I* 

If ever Ma/dum Sahib should have died before 
Shah Sahib, then Shah Sahib will come and be present 
with the bier of Ma/dum Sahib. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, 
p. 37. 

If one shall have come and recognised her, I will 
give her to him. Sindhi Eead. B. p. 59. 

6) The conditional particle ^^ is often omitted in 
the subordinate sentence, and ^^Xl=^ on the other hand 
is used without a main sentence, it being passed over 
in silence, so that S^:^ assumes quite the sense of the 
interjectional particle ^Uo would that! 

^I4J l^^ ^ J^y^ ^L^f ^^^ e>^* 1^;^. 

O my friend, (if) I die of thy wound, I (may) 
obtain honour. Sh. Jam. Kal. I, 6. 



n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 525 

If we would go to (our) village, (it would be well) 
= We should like to go to (our) village. Amulu 
Man. p. 151. 

2) Subordination of a sentence by the relative 

pronoun (also the indefinite pronouns iSi^^^ 3^"=^) ^^^ 

relative adverbs, corresponding generally to a 

correlative. (§. 74 sqq.) 

§■ 101. 

The subordinate sentence may either precede or 
follow the main sentence. 

Come back, o louse of the blanket, which was 
given to me by the grandfather's family. Sh. Um. 
Mar. Vn, 3. 

J Jo^iC -f:^^ 7"^ C5^ Vj' ^'^^ >-^* ^-W >-^^-S^ 

Whoever is given to gambling, in his house pro- 
perty does not remain. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 52. 

(j^ ^^H \J^}^ ^ ^ 4^.^ C5<^* a^ (1^ 

As the day gets hot, so I push on in the jom'ney, 
Sh. Hus. n, 14. 



^}?^ tsf^ ^i' 7^. ^5f^^ 



Where there is not a footprint of a bird, there glimmers 
a small fire. Sh. Khah. II, 11. 



526 n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 

When there are some reeds of the shore, pull them 
out and bind together a raft. Sh. Hus. YIII, 3. 

3) Subordination of a sentence by an interro- 
gative pronoun or particle. 

§. 102. 

The dependant sentence is generally introduced 
by the particles o, j.^, and y, that, which are not 
translated. 

How do I know, how the calculation of the Amir 
has been made? Sh. Um. Mar. 11. 

Give me an answer about the marriage, how thou 
hast arranged it? Amulu Man. p. 142. 

Take no thought of your life, (saying) what shall we 
eat, what shall we drink? nor of your body, what we 
shall put on? Matth. 6, 24. 



11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 527 

Chapter XIX. 

Abbreviation of subordinate sentences. 
§. 103. 
A subordinate sentence may be abbreviated: 

1) by using the present and past participle (c£ 
§. 80, 81), either adjectively, or in the Locative Sin- 
gular, which is more common. The participle supplies 
the place of a relative or conjunctional subordinate 
sentence, into which it may be dissolved, when ne- 
cessary, as: 

Pass the night weeping, distilling glasses of liquor; 
i. e. whilst weeping, or as one who weeps etc. Sh. Jam. 
Kal. lY, 25. 

C5?^. (^rT u^^ is?^"^ ^J^ 4^^ ^'i>Vc> ^i:^ 

Having been seized = after or when or as she 
was seized by a violent pain, she fell down near some 
bank. Story of the cat and mice, v. 29. 

2) By using the past conjunctive participles. 

They carry off (my) sweetheart Punhu, speaking 
Baluchi, i. e. whilst they speak Baluchi. Sh. Desi 11, 13. 



528 II. THE SNYTHETICAL PART. 

Chapter XX. 
On the indirect oration. 

§. 104. 

When the words or thoughts of a person are given 
with the very same expressions, as used originally, the 
oration is called a direct one; but when they are 
only represented according to their general contents 
or purport, the oration is called an indirect one. In 
Sindhi the indirect oration is never made use of, but 
the words or thoughts of a person are always repre- 
sented in the direct oration and generally introduced 

by the particle j. 

He was thinking: 'in some way having sneaked off 
I will get away^; i. e. that he would sneak off etc. Life 
of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 20. 

When he sees: I am sitting near Bhita. Ibid, 
p. 21. 

If thou likest: I will meet (my) friend = to meet 
(thy) friend, then learn the mimicking sound of the 
thieves. Sh. Jam. Kal. II, 8. 



APPENDIX I. 529 



APFEIVDIX I. 

ON THE SINDHI CALENDAR. 

The Muhammadans of Sindh reckon by lunar 
months after the common Muhammadan aera, called 

djl^j the flight of Muhammad from Mekka to Me- 

dinah, the years of this aera are therefore called ^y^^). 

It dates, according to the best accounts from the 18*^ 
of July 622 p. Chr. Their months commence with the 
appearance of each new moon and consist of 30 and 
29 days alternately, amounting to 354 days and about 
nine hours; in consequence thereof l^ew-year's-day falls 
every year about eleven days earlier than in the pre- 
vious year. 

To keep pace with the seasons the Sindhis inter- 

pose every third year an intercalary month (SjJ lundu), 
repeating that month, in which the sun enters no new 
sign of the Zodiac. 

In naming the lunar months the learned Muham- 
madans follow the nomenclature of the Arabs; but 
among the common people the names of those Arabian 
months only are known, which are noted by some spe- 
cial religious observance, the other months being called 
by the names of the Hindu months then being. 



1) Another aera, which is also in use amongst the Muhammadans 
of Upper India, is called j^^^cii, or revenue aera; it dates, according 
to Prinsep, from the year 592% p. Chr. 

Trump p, Sindhi-Grrammar. L 1 



530 



APPENDIX I. 



Lunar months of the Arabians. 



1) lli? muharrarnu 
^"y-S inaharamu 



30 days. 



2) 



4) 



yk^ safaru 29 days. 

J^^!| «Aj^ rabimlavvalu . . 30 days. 



5i -O 5 ^ 



.^11 



*-^j^ rabim-laxiru 



29 day 



5) J^!^l| ^3U4 jumada-lavvula 30 days. 

6) (^jLaJ! ;5i>U£^ jumada - 'i'^ani 

^is-^H ^31^^ jumada-laxiru 

7) 



29 days. 



8) 

9) 
10) 

11) 
12) 



.. rajabu . 
ili^ sa?abanu. 



>,--.—- 



^Ldx)N ramazann . 



Jl^^ 



savvalu. 



sJoiiUI ^^3 M-lqaiadali 
stXii' ^5^ M qaiadah 

xiv^l ^<3 M-lHijJah . . . 



30 days. 

29 days. 

30 days. 

29 days. 

30 days. 
29 days. 



The Hindus reckon by solar years, and luni- 
solar months. They follow either the Vikramaditya 

(o*.As>Lil5^) aera, called sambatu (Sansk. ^"^ff^ year), 



APPENDIX I. 531 

dating from the year 57 a. Chr., and commencing with 
the month of kati, or that of Shalivahana, called 
saku (Sansk. "^^j, dating from the year 78 p. Chr., 
and commencing with the month of Cetru. 

The Hindu year is divided into 12 equal portions, 
which nearly correspond to our solar months. Each 
month is divided again (by Hindus as well as Muham- 

madans) into two parts (-^Xl or .4^^ lunar fortnight), 

the first from new to full moon (^^^ sudi), and the 

second from full to new moon (^ctXl badi). The dates of 

these two divisions {.^x'J lunar date), fifteen each, are 

reckoned separately. 

Solar months of the Hindus. 

ylf^ cetru, from the middle of March to the middle 

of April. 

-4^L1j^ vesakhu, from the middle of April to the middle 

of May. 

..^jif^ Jethu, from the middle of May to the middle 

of June. 

vLg.n akharu, from the middle of June to the middle 
of July. 

^j^ savanu, I from the middle of July to the middle 

^1;^ sranu, J ^^ ^'^g^^^t- 

j.iXj badro, from the middle of August to the middle 
of September. 

y^\ asu, from the middle of September to the middle 

of October. 

L12 



532 



APPENDIX I. 



^ kati, from the middle of October to the middle 
of November. 



from the middle of November to the 
middle of December. 



^_5^b nahari, 

^^ nahari, 

^.^Xlc manghiru, 

,5^j^. pohu, from the middle of December to the 
middle of January. 

^fU maghu, from the middle of January to the 
middle of February. 



J;.^j phagunu, 



from the middle of February to the 
middle of March. 



The Hindus commence the day at midnight, as 
we do, but the Muhammadans at the previous evening. 
In the mouth of a Muhammadan therefore the night 
of a certain day always signifies the night of the pre- 
vious day, as: ^IT ^:a. ^^^ Friday night = Thursday 

night, according to our way of reckoning. There is 
some difference between the Hindu and Musalman names 
of the days of the week, as subjoined. 



Hindu. 
IjjT artaru^) 



Days of the week. 

Musalman. 
. . . liT acaru, Sunday. 



sumaru 



yy^ 



sumaru 



fr^ 



nUo^ sumaru, 



Monday. 



i.^'-'i-r- 



1) Or: y^*§t aditavaru, '^y^S aitavaru, ^l^\ I artavaru. 



Hindu. 
^ijJo mangalu . . 

lijo budharu . . 

o^^ vispate . . . 

^^JL^' tharu^) . . . 

IXco sukru . . . . 

. j,<^^gs chancha.ru . 



APPENDIX I. 533 

Musalman. 
j,L6l anaro, Tuesday. 

LSjl arba, Wednesday. 
(j^jww^ X^misa, Thursday. 

^L jumo, Friday. 

T^rf^'^o chancharu, Saturday. 



1) Or: s^L.^j thavaru. 



534 



APPENDIX IL 



APPEIVDIX II. 

SURVEY OF THE DIFFERENT SINDHI -ARABIC 
ALPHABETS. 



The Alphabet 
used in this 

Grammar 
(Hindustani). 


The 

GoTernment 

Alphabet. 


The 
old Sindhi 
Alphabet. 


Roman 
Characters. 


1 


1 


I 


a 


^ 


V 


V 


b 


O 


O 


V 


b 


^ 


^ 




bh 


Ui> 


C^ 


*^ 


t 


^'■^ 


e 


viL) 


th 


o 


cn, 


^ 


t 


-^ 


^ 


c 


th 


^ 


vd> 


^ 


•i 


V 


u^ 




P 


-^■ 


o 


o 


ph 


C 


21 


z 


J 


S 


s 


£ 


J 


-^ 


-«^ 


a: 


jh 


€ 


E 


€ 


n (ny) 


£ 


c 


c 


c 


-^ 


21 


© 


ch 


C 


C 


c 


H 


t 


t 


t 


X 


c> 


i> 


4> 


- d 


JtO 


i 


3 


dh 


s 


J 


t> 


d 


s 


V 

4> 


i 

1 


d 





APPENDIX II. 




The Alphabet 
used in this 

Grammar 
(Hindustani). 


The 

Government 

Alphabet. 


The 
old Sindhi 
Alphabet. 


Roman 
Characters, 


.saiS 


t> 


4> 


dh 


j 





3 


^ 


) 


; 


; 


r 


; 


; 


; 


r 


) 


) 


; 


z 


ir 


(j^ 


LT 


s 




.♦. 


• 


s 


LP 


U^ 


(JO 


s 


U^ 


o» 


a» 


z 


io 


ic 


Ja 


t 


ib 


ib 


ii 


S 


£ 


e 


£ 


5 


£ 


e 


£ 


T 


o 


o 


o 


f 


l3 


O 


O 


q 


J^c^ 


^ 


-= .lT 


k 


^^ 


cT 


uT 


kh 


s 


S 


J- 


g 


^ 


s 


<S 


g 


^ 


^ 


s 


gh 


S^ 


s 


jG 


(ng) n 


J 


J 


J 


1 


r 


r 


r 


m 


u 


«j 


u 


n 


u 


fe 


c) 


n 


^ 


; 


5 


V 


.fl^ 


.50 


JS 


h 


c5 


c5 


^ 


y 



535 



MISPRIUTS AID EMEIDATIONS. 



Introduction. 

p. I, 1. 23 wteras, read: whereas, p. I, note, 1. 2 
troughout: throughout, p. V, 1. 3 r: r. p. VII, 1. 18 
^^^: ^TSJ^. p. XIV, 1. 20 ff^l: Tf^ p. XV, 1. 18 
^iWtftr: ^T^T^. p. XV, 1. 19 ?lWrft?: 'ST^fil. 

p. XV, 1. 29 HK*y : ^^. P- ^^' ^- 30 g^^' g^^- 

p. XVI, 1. 1 ^: ^. p. XVin, 1. 20 »T: ^. p. XIX, 
1. 7 ri: ri. p. XIX, 1. 23 T^t^f[: ^ftW^. P- ^^' 
1. 18 seams: seems, p. XXIV, 1. 6 ^: ^. p. XXX, 
1. 23 ^^: ^^i|. p. XXXI, 1. 29 f>: W.^ V- XXXVI, 
1- 9 ^ift^: Wft^. P- XXXVII, 1. 13 ^t^: ^t^. 
p. XL, 1. 5 -ftrot: ■%#. p. XLI, 1. 3 ^^: ^^ 
p. XLH, 1. 12 -fri*^^: f^r^^. p. XLVn, 1. 27 

p. 3, 1. 21 e.: o. p. 3, 1. 22 ^■. o. p. 10, 1. 15 
(ja-ft*^: oaM^. p. 11, 1. 21 anu: anu. p. 12, 1. 22 
C5/4-- iS)^^^' P- 23, 1. 19 ^yy. ^y p. 23, 1. 25 
the these: these, p. 29, 1. 29 goal: goat. p. 30, 1. 1 
add before p5e: s^j. p. 33, 1. 27 vijti: viju. p. 36, 1. 5 
carho: carho. p. 36, 1. 15 tobo: tobo. p. 36, 1. 21 
jtUj^L: jtUjjU. p. 37, 1. 27 add before u: in. p. 37, 



538 MISPRINTS AND EMENDATIONS. 

1. 33 bhue: bhiie. p. 39, 1. 11 ^^J: ^'^. p. 46, 

1. 20 4^: J^.. p. 51, 1. 16 yy^j^f: ^^y^^f. p. 51, 1. 27 
\^i<:>y. ^ic>y p. 52, 1. 15 c/lIj: lTLL. p. 59, 1. 26 
Gujurati: Gujarat!, p. 60, 1. 27 o: e. p. 62, 1. 4 Gu- 
jarathi: Gujarat!, p. 66, 1. 25 ^j^: (5%^* P- 66, 1. 28 

^L^i^l: ^L4%|. p. 66, 1. 28 4:.1: J^. p. 67, 1. 14 ^ 

3^A5tXjl45^ kbandMro : j^JoL^^ Miandlro. p. 67, 1. 14 

^cXjL^ kbandbe: tUL^ khande. p. 68, 1. 9 alti: atu. 

p. 68, 1. 24 patru: putru. p. 69, 1. 9 y^\S^\y. y^^^y 

p. 69, 1. 20 kachiro: kachiro. p. 69, 1. 29 J^'i and 

5^*5: J^^J^ fj"4^*<3. p. 72, 1. 3 hanoko: hanoko. p. 72, 

1. 3 bane: bane. p. 72, L 12 aniko: aniko. p. 72, L 24 
coraniko: coraniko. p. 78, L 11 menaged: managed. 

p. 82, L 7 ^AjG: ^>JG. p. 82, L 26 Sbortened from tbe 
Sansk. ^^ read: Sansk. ^, sbortened from ^3^. p. 88, 
1. 14 Babtivribi: Bahuvribi. p. 88, 1. 25 recognizable: 
recognisable, p. 90, 1. 21 After TT^ add: fem. p. 92, 
1. 4 5^^: ^T^. p. 92, 1. 25 after: Sansk. T?^f 
add: masc. (also in Sindbi). p. 94, 1. 25 ^3\ ^3. 
p. 99, L 24 ni: ni. p. 106, L 24 j.jj.j tobo: y^ys tobo. 
p. 106, 1. 25 Ljj.j- toba: Lj^' toba. p. 113, 1. 6 Whe: 
We. p. 120, 1. 8 put a Comma after palatal. p. 128, 
1. 22 joyu: j5yu. p. 140, 1. 18 ^HL^: ^liLI.. p. 144, 
1. 20 ^L^^4f- u^^;4^ P- 144, 1. 21 p^^r: p^. 
p. 157, 1. 15 hikiro: hikird. p. 157, 1. 16 bekiro: he- 

kiro. p. 159, 1. 4 daha: daha. p. 164, 1. 14 ^^yl^j.^.: 

" I _ 
^y^^^yc^. p. 169, 1. 23 saba: sata. p. 170, 1. 7 codaha: 

codaba. p. 170, 1. 8 pandraha: pandraba. p. 171, 1. 20 



MISPRINTS AND EMENDATIONS. 539 

^^•1: ^^x:^i p. 173, 1. 3 (5^: ^^f^. p. 173, 1. 16 

sweathearts: sweethearts, p. 190, 1. 20 muk ha: mu kha. 
p. 201, note: Eisals: Risalo. p. 208, 1. 15 whit: with, 
p. 215, 1. 5 ,^)CjCx^: .^J^Xac^. p. 216, 1. 28 theyself: 

thyself, p. 230, 1. 5 ^y^/'^Jy^^^ p. 234, 1. 8 Rino: 
Eano. p. 236, 1. 4 e: i. p. 237, 1. 20 .$^y iy p. 239, 
1. 7 ,^lSjfLj: g^wLkf LI. p. 241, 1. 4 jonhe: jonhe. p. 245, 

1. 4 ^yl:Sy^\ ^^a5j.£s.. p. 248, 1. 13 ^^LIT: ^\xjS. p. 255, 

1. 19 parhainu: parhainu. p. 258, 1. 16 aa: au. p. 261, 
1. 8 cu-anu: cu-anu. p. 264, 1. 16 "khahann: khanhanu. 
p. 267, 1. 29 parh-iju: parh-iju. p. 274, 1. 21 susanu: 
tusanu. p. 277, 1. 20 kuhanu: kuhanu. p. 283, 1. 32 
una: una. p. 286, 1. 20 budhayo: budha-y-o. p. 287, 
1. 1 the n and I: the I and II. p. 287, 1. 14 ani: ani. 

p. 289, 1. 28 ia: ia. p. 294, 1. 8 30.3^^: jjo^j. p. 299, 
1. 16 (j.li: ^i. p. 301, 1. 21 tii^i: (j^j^i. p. 310, 
1. 19 (ji^Aio: \j»-j^' p. 311, 1. 7 y^jiXiA.^': |jw.JtXAA^j'. 

p. 311, 1. 8 ^J.aa^j: ^d^kKJ^s. p. 320, 1. 20 ,j«5tXi^: 
^tXjyc. p. 323, 1. 9 chad-indo: chad-indo. p. 325, 
L 2 The object being fern.: being masc. The object 
being masc: fern. p. 336, 1. 6 (^44^* (^^-i^- P* ^^^' 
1. 12 jJ^-Uf^: jtX-U^ p. 342, 1. 18 ^k^\ ^^. p. 348, 
1. 10 corpe: corpse, p. 361, L 7 (jii^SS: (j^j.j^. p. 368, 

1. 18 chadiu-se: chadiii-se. p. 372, 1. 5 chadia-su: 
chadia-su. p. 384, 1. 2 ocitoly: ocito. p. 384, 1. 2 for 
the second unexpected read: unexpectedly, p. 384, 1. 5 
odiro: odiro. p. 384, note 2, 1. 2 Trf^* ^Rf^. 
p. 389, 1. 12 Loc: Abl. p. 395, 1. 20 ^jo^4^: ^j^^. 



540 MISPRINTS AND EMENDATIONS. 

p. 395, note, 1. 1 e o: e of. p. 396, 1. 19 Chat: Chot. 

p. 402, 1. 2 me: me. p. 405, 1. 2 ^^^jUi: ^^Us.. 
p. 411 The last two quotations are misplaced there and 
to be inserted on p. 417, after 1. 16. p, 414, 1. 15 

^^w^JL^: ^14JU^. p. 416, 1. 6 the 'Mia': thee 'Mia', 
p. 418, 1. 8 form: from. p. 420, 1. 8 ^^JL^: ^d^. 

p. 423, 1. 6 also!: alas! p. 432, 1. 13 after God, add: 
or not? 



HOV "" 



, Printed bj' F. A. Brockhavis, Leipzig. 



PRINTED BY F. A. BROCKHAUS , LEIPZIG. 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2007 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

111 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



